JP2023064159A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To easily check whether or not a movable body unit is electrically connected normally, in relation to a game machine represented by a rotary-drum game machine (slot machine) and a pinball game machine (Pachinko game machine).SOLUTION: Light-emitting means 24ML may emit light by causing induction current to flow due to a counter electromotive force generated by a first motor 110m after manually operating a first movable body 110 in the power interruption state to drive the first motor 110m and may emit light by causing induction current to flow due to a counter electromotive force generated by a third motor 112m after manually operating a third movable body 112 in the power interruption state to drive the third motor 112m. A certain substrate case 220B' is provided at a position where the light from the light-emitting means 24ML reaches (Fig.14(b)).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 14

Description

The present invention relates to amusement machines typified by reel game machines (slot machines) and pinball game machines (pachinko machines).

Conventionally, slot machines and pachinko machines are known as one of the game machines. The slot machine uses a predetermined number of game media and operates a start lever to perform a lottery for determining an internal winning combination from among a plurality of combinations, and rotate a plurality of reels to determine a winning combination. The reels are stopped based on the internal winning combination and the operation result of the stop button, and a profit is given according to the winning combination determined according to the mode of the stopped reels.

Also, in a pachinko machine, it is common to provide obstacles that change the direction of the game ball's fall, a winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening, etc. that allow the game ball to win in the game area of the game board. is. When a game ball wins a prize, the player is given a privilege such as paying out a prize ball.

Some of these game machines are provided with a movable body unit having a movable body that can be moved by being driven by a motor (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2020-92786

However, in the conventional game machines, there is room for improvement in checking whether or not the movable units are electrically connected normally.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine that makes it easy to check whether or not the movable units are electrically connected normally.

The amusement machine of the present invention that solves the above object,
light emitting means;
a movable body unit having a first movable body operable by being driven by a first motor;
a substrate case;
A game table comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body operable by being driven by a third motor,
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness,
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness,
The light emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current flows in due to the back electromotive force generated by the first motor. is something,
When the light emitting means emits light when the third movable body is manually operated in the de-energized state to drive the third motor, and current due to counter electromotive force generated by the third motor flows in. and
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The certain substrate case is provided at a position where the light from the light emitting means reaches,
It is characterized by

According to the game machine of the present invention, it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the movable unit is electrically connected normally.

1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a line. 3 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the slot machine 100. FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the configuration of a reel unit 700; (a) is a perspective view showing the structure of the backlight module 740, and (b) is a front view of the backlight module 740. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a first selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG. 3; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of setting values selected using a first selection switch 190 and a second selection switch 194; It shows a circuit block diagram of a control unit. It is a figure which shows the connection example of each board|substrate and each unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing how the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 in a power-off state is opened and the left reel 110 is manually rotated. (a) is a perspective view of the hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 3 as viewed obliquely from above, and (b) is a diagram showing how the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated. 10 is a diagram showing an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 9 and the hopper unit 180 and reel unit 700 also shown in FIG. 9. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the slot machine of the second embodiment, (b) is a side view schematically showing the visual range of a person H1 in a standing posture, and (c) is a sitting posture. 2 is a side view schematically showing the visual field range of a person H2 in FIG. FIG. 4 is a plan view showing the inside of the slot machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification of the example of connection between each substrate and each unit shown in FIG. 9; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a protection circuit provided between a reel motor drive IC 322i and a 24V power supply line; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a demonstration animation displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the demonstration effect; (a) is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157, which is displayed when the second chance button 166 is pressed while the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed, and (b) is a diagram showing the display screen. 21(h) shows a display screen displayed when the first chance button 165 is pressed in the state shown in FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing step by step how the effect image display device 157 and various lamps appear when the power saving mode is selected while the non-demonstration animation is being displayed. 20 is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. 19; The state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when the front door 102 is opened while the opening/closing piece is pressed while the demo animation is displayed and the power saving mode is selected. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing; 22 is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. 21; The state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when a selection is made to open the front door 102 without pressing the opening/closing piece while the demonstration animation is being displayed and to set the power saving mode is performed step by step. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing, step by step, the state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when a selection is made to set the power saving mode while the hopper empty error is still occurring. It is a figure which shows two examples of operation production|presentation. FIG. 2 is a table summarizing characteristic operation effects in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the relationship of colors in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1; FIG. It is a figure which shows concretely several examples of the 1st operation production|presentation 1 demonstrated using Fig.26 (a). It is a figure which shows concretely some examples of the 1st operation production|presentation 2 demonstrated using FIG.26(b). It is a figure which shows concretely several examples of the 2nd operation production|presentation 1 demonstrated using FIG.26(c). It is a figure which shows concretely several examples of the 2nd operation production|presentation 2 demonstrated using FIG.26(d). It is a figure which shows the other example of operation production|presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a case where an operation means other than the first chance button 165 is operated in the operation effect; It is the back view which looked at the pachinko machine which can apply this invention from the back side. 1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a winning line. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols applied to each reel in a planar development; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and payouts for each winning combination. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a lottery table of internal winning combinations in the state of internal winning special combination 2 together with types of internal winning combinations. 35(a) is a transition diagram of the game state of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 35, and (b) is a transition diagram of the effect state in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing a flow of a main control unit initial setting process (step S101) in FIG. 42; FIG. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing a flow of setting change processing (step S1013) in FIG. 44. FIG. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the flow of various lottery processes (step S105) in FIG. 42. FIG. (a) is a flow chart showing the flow of item addition processing (step S1203) in FIG. (e) is a diagram showing a table used for the lottery in step S1315. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing the flow of the confrontation setting process (step S1205) in FIG. 46; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing a table used for setting a confrontation mode. (b) is a diagram showing a table used for setting an aura start zone. (a) is a flow chart showing the flow of the point specialization state B transition lottery process (step S1207) in FIG. be. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the flow of AT-related processing (step S1209) in FIG. 46; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing a lottery table for obtaining an item "Defeat 1 body", (b) is a diagram showing a lottery table for increasing the defeat rate by the "defeat rate UP" item, and (c) is an AT remaining FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a game number lottery table, (d) is a diagram showing an AT direct hit lottery table, (e) is a diagram showing a pseudo BB lottery table, and (f) is an AT additional game number lottery. It is a figure which shows a table. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing a flow of state update processing (step S117) in FIG. 42; FIG. 54(a) is a flow chart showing the flow of the point acquisition process (step S1A01) in FIG. 53, and FIG. 54(b) is a diagram showing a table used for lottery for determining the value of acquired points. (a) is a flow chart showing the flow of point specialization A state processing (step S1A11) in FIG. 53, (b) is a flow chart showing the flow of normal state processing (step S1A15) in FIG. c) is a flow chart showing the flow of point specialization B state processing (step S1A19) in FIG. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing the flow of precursor state processing (step S1A23) in FIG. 53; FIG. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing the flow of confrontation state processing (step S1A27) in FIG. 53; FIG. 53(a) is a flow chart showing the flow of AT state processing (step S1A31) in FIG. 53, and (b) is a flow chart showing the flow of pseudo BB state processing (step S1A33) in FIG. (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400, and (c) is 4 is a flow chart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. 59. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the production|presentation control processing (step S309) in FIG. 61(a) is a flowchart showing the flow of display point management processing (step S3003) in FIG. 60, and (b) is a diagram showing a table used for a lottery for determining the value of acquired points. 61 is a flow chart showing the flow of display item management processing (step S3005) in FIG. 60; FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the flow of item acquisition effect setting processing (step S3207) in FIG. 62. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (c) is 10 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect executed from an initial state to a normal state via a point specialization A state; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect that is executed until the effect state shifts from the normal state to the point specialization B state or the false portent state and returns to the normal state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an item acquisition effect when the effect state is the normal state; The flow from the normal state to the true omen state to the confrontation state will be described. This figure shows an example of the effect that is executed until the effect state shifts from the normal state to the true omen state and shifts to the confrontation state. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of an item acquisition effect when the effect state is a confrontation state, and (d) to (f) are diagrams of an item use effect when the effect state is a confrontation state. It is a figure which shows an example, (g) is a figure which shows the state which the showdown production|presentation started. It is a figure which shows the example at the time of winning all the confrontation production|presentations. It is a figure which shows the example at the time of losing in confrontation production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation performed before it transfers to a pseudo-BB state or an initial state from AT state. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of redisplaying an item that has been hidden before using (deleting) the item; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification when power failure and power recovery occur; 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 4 is a circuit block diagram of a control section of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. (a) is a plan view showing an array of symbols provided on reels of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and (b) is a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, payouts and operations. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing by a main control unit of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flow chart showing the flow of main controller timer interrupt processing of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a flow chart showing the flow of first sub-controller main processing, first sub-controller command reception interrupt processing, and first sub-controller timer interrupt processing of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. Flow of second sub-controller main processing, second sub-controller command reception interrupt processing, second sub-controller timer interrupt processing, and second sub-controller image control processing of slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention It is a flow chart showing. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an outline of a panel attack effect of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a panel elimination effect of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing the operation of each device in the panel attack effect of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating another example of the panel elimination effect of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing the operation of each device in the panel attack effect of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing the operation of each device in the panel attack effect of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention (modification). FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the execution time of the panel clear effect and the operation invalid time of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention (modification). FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing the operation of each device in the panel attack effect of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention (modification). FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating a panel attack effect of Example L1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention (modification). It is a figure explaining the panel attack production|presentation of Example L1 of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention (modification). FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an outline of effects of a bonus symbol notification effect and a bonus symbol stop effect in a BB1 internal winning state in Example M1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an effect outline of a small winning symbol notification effect in a BB1 internal winning state in Example M1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an effect outline of a bonus symbol notification effect and a bonus symbol stop effect in a BB2 internal winning state in Example M1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an effect outline of a bonus symbol notification effect and a bonus symbol stop effect in a BB2 internal winning state in Example M1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an outline of effects of a bonus symbol notification effect and a bonus symbol stop effect from a first stop operation to a third stop operation in Example M1 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 1 is a front view of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention with its front door opened; FIG. 4 is a circuit block diagram of a control section of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the notification mode of the notification means when the second error occurs in a certain game and the first error notification and the second error notification are executed. It is a diagram showing a flow from lever-on to error cancellation when a second error occurs in a certain game and the first error notification and the second error notification are executed. It is the figure which showed an example of the notification mode of the notification means when the 3rd error generate|occur|produced in a certain game and the 1st error notification and the 3rd error notification are performed. It is a diagram showing a flow from lever-on to error cancellation when a third error occurs in a certain game and the first error notification and the third error notification are executed. It is the figure which showed an example of the notification mode of the notification means at the time of the 4th error having generate|occur|produced in a certain game and performing the 4th error display. It is the figure which showed the flow from lever ON to error cancellation|release when the 4th error generate|occur|produced in a certain game and the 4th error display is performed. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. (a) It is the figure which showed the item given in point specialization state production, and the point corresponding to each item. (b) It is the figure which showed an example of the 1st provision production|presentation in the point specialization state production|presentation in time series. (c) It is the figure which showed an example of the 2nd provision production|presentation (refill production|presentation) in the point specialization state production|presentation in time series. (a) It is the figure which showed an example of the 1st provision production|presentation in the point specialization state production|presentation in time series. (b) It is the figure which showed an example of the 2nd provision production|presentation (refill production|presentation) in the point specialization state production|presentation in time series. (c) It is the figure which showed an example of the 3rd addition production|presentation (refill production of the refill production) in a point specialization state production|presentation in time series. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, processes such as payouts before and after the slot machine is powered off and restored. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, processes such as payout and error notification before and after power interruption/recovery of the slot machine. 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to this embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the display area of the symbol display window and the winning lines of the slot machine according to the present embodiment; 3 is a circuit block diagram of a controller of the slot machine according to the embodiment; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols applied to each reel of the slot machine according to the present embodiment, and a diagram showing the relationship between the symbol number counter and the symbol interval counter; b) is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including activated combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and activation or payout of each winning combination. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of a reel rotating device of a slot machine according to this embodiment; FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of a reel driving unit that constitutes the reel rotating device of the slot machine according to the present embodiment; FIG. 4A is a schematic side view and a schematic front view showing a state in which the reel drive unit of the slot machine according to the present embodiment is assembled; 3 is an exploded perspective view of a stepping motor used for the reels of the slot machine according to the present embodiment; FIG. 131 is a diagram showing the magnetic pole arrangement of the stator of the stepping motor shown in FIG. 130; FIG. It is a table|surface which shows the content of the excitation table which excites the stepping motor which concerns on this embodiment. It is a table showing the contents of the rotation control table of the present embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing the flow of main processing by a main control unit of the slot machine according to the present embodiment; 135 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of the internal winning combination lottery process in step S103 shown in FIG. 134; 135 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of reel rotation start processing in step S105 shown in FIG. 134; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; 138 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of stop button display control processing in step S207 shown in FIG. 137; 138 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of reel rotation control processing in step S208 shown in FIG. 137; FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of reel control determination processing in step S208g shown in FIG. 139; FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of acceleration control processing in step S306 shown in FIG. 140; FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing in detail a first constant speed control process in step S308 shown in FIG. 140; FIG. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing in detail second constant-speed control processing in step S310 shown in FIG. 140; FIG. FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing in detail stop button acceptance processing in step S208d shown in FIG. 139; FIG. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing in detail a pull-in counter setting process in step S208d5 shown in FIG. 144; FIG. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing in detail the pull-in control process of step S313 shown in FIG. 140; FIG. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing in detail brake control processing in step S312 shown in FIG. 140; FIG. (a) is the first sub-controller main process of the slot machine according to the present embodiment, (b) is the first sub-controller command input process, (c) is the first sub-controller command reception interrupt process, and ( d) is a flow chart showing the flow of each timer interrupt process of the first sub-controller. Changes in the state of the three reels in the conventional method, changes in the detection state of the light shielding pieces provided on each reel in the index sensor, changes in the state in which the stop button corresponding to each reel can be operated, and each stop button 4 is a timing chart showing changes in light emission mode of a built-in light emitter; In this embodiment, changes in the states of the reels 110-112, changes in the detection state of the light-shielding pieces, changes in the states of the stop buttons 137-139 that can be operated, and light emission modes of the stop button LEDs 137a-139a. is a timing chart showing changes in . 4 is a timing chart when a step-out occurs on the spinning right reel in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. 4 is a timing chart when step-out occurs in the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment and the stop button is operated before re-acceleration. FIG. 10 is a timing chart when a power failure and power recovery occurs during execution of the second constant speed control in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a timing chart when an operation of the stop button is accepted before the stop button LED changes to the second light emission mode in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a timing chart when the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment detects the light shielding piece and stops the game at the shortest number of frames; FIG. It is a figure which shows the state of the left reel in each timing. FIG. 10 is a timing chart when a reel-related effect is performed by the effect device in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of the 1st production|presentation in a production|presentation apparatus. FIG. 10 is a timing chart when slide push operations are performed on three stop buttons 137 to 139 in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment, but only part of the operations are accepted. FIG. 10 is a timing chart when all slide push operations performed on three stop buttons 137 to 139 are accepted in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, it is a timing chart when the real game is played after the pseudo game is played. In the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, it is a timing chart when the main game is played after the reel action is performed. It is a diagram showing the relative positional relationship of symbols forming a specific symbol combination with reference to the symbol display window 113. FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart when three stop buttons 137 to 139 are simultaneously pressed in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment, but only some of the operations are accepted. FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart when all three stop buttons 137 to 139 are simultaneously pressed in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. FIG. In the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, it is a timing chart when simultaneous pressing is performed during a pseudo game. 1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a winning line. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols applied to each reel in a planar development; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and payouts for each winning combination. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a lottery table for internal winning combinations for each RT; 4 is a transition diagram of a game state (RT) of the slot machine 100. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the transition of the game state regarding the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section of the slot machine 100; 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400, and (c) is 4 is a flow chart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (c) is 10 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing a button body 610 that constitutes the push button 600. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view showing a push button 600; FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a positional relationship between a button body 610 and a detection sensor 710; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification of the push button 600; 6 is a diagram showing an example of arrangement of a button body 610 and a detection sensor 710. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration in which the thickness direction of a substrate 700 is perpendicular to the pressing direction of a button body 610; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display on the effect image display device 157. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the second stop operation and the third stop operation; FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the third stop operation and the bet operation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an operation example when a chance button 190 is operated between a bet operation and a start operation; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the second stop operation and the third stop operation; FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the third stop operation and the bet operation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an operation example when a chance button 190 is operated between a bet operation and a start operation; 1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a line. 3 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the slot machine 100. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a medal selector 170; FIG. (a) is a table showing the display order of setting values displayed on the setting value display 293, (b) is a table summarizing the difference in performance for each setting value, and (c) to (f) are It is a figure which shows an example of setting-related notification (setting suggestion notification, setting confirmation notification). It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; FIG. 199 is a flow chart showing a flow of main control unit initial setting processing (step S101) in FIG. 198; FIG. 201 is a flow chart showing a flow of setting change processing (step S1013) in FIG. 200; (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400, and (c) is the first sub-controller. 4 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the control unit 400. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (c) is the second sub-controller. 4 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the control unit 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. FIG. 10 is a table summarizing the procedure for setting to setting b by setting change and the state of related components; FIG. 205A to 204B are diagrams schematically showing the states of the components in each stage from (A) to (B) in FIG. 204; FIG. (a) is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is repeatedly opened and closed while the setting value is set to setting b; FIG. 10 is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when the checkout operation is performed immediately after the third stop while the third stop is being performed; FIG. 207 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the constituent elements at each stage of FIG. 206; FIG. (a) is a table summarizing the states of the related components when the setting is checked in the state where the default setting value is set to setting 1, and (b) is the state set to setting 1. 10 is a table summarizing the states of related components when setting confirmation is performed in power saving mode in . 209A and 209B are diagrams schematically showing the states of the components in each stage of FIG. 208; (a) is a table summarizing the states of related components when setting confirmation is performed in the state set in setting b, and (b) is a table set in power saving mode in the state set in setting b It is the table|surface which summarized the state of the component concerned when confirmation is performed. FIG. 211 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the constituent elements at each stage of FIG. 210; (a) is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state in the slot machine in this modified example, and (b) is a diagram for explaining some of the hands that are the targets of the lottery of hands and the level of the winning probability in RT1. FIG. 10C is a diagram for explaining part of the winning combination that is the target of the winning combination lottery and the level of winning probability in RT2. It is a diagram showing an example of payout rates of RT1 and RT2. It is the table|surface which put together the state of the component related when the 1st sound is output by the closure of the front door 102 after setting change. 10 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the reel is rotated before the front door 102 is closed after the setting is changed, and the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed while the reel is rotating. . When the reel is rotated before the front door 102 is closed after the setting is changed, power failure and power recovery occurs during rotation of the reel, and the front door 102 is closed while the reel is rotating after power recovery. It is the table|surface which summarized the state. It is a table summarizing the states of related constituent elements when the front door 102 is closed during payout after settlement of the inserted tokens before the front door 102 is closed after the setting change. Before closing the front door 102 after changing the settings, the state of related components when power failure and power recovery occurs during payout after settlement of inserted medals and the front door 102 is closed during payout after power recovery. It is a summary table. 4 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is closed during setting confirmation after setting change. It is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is closed after shifting to the second game state after setting change. After confirming the setting once, the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, and the inserted medals are settled. be. 10 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state after the setting is confirmed once, and the game is played once. 4 is a table summarizing the states of related components when a set value is displayed on a set value display 293 even when a setting key switch 281 is in an off state. After confirming the settings once, medals are inserted with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and the inserted medals are accounted for. is a table summarizing the states of After confirming the setting once, the state of the related constituent elements when the setting key switch 281 is turned on after the tokens are inserted with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state and the game is played is summarized. It is a table. It is the back view which looked at the pachinko machine which can apply this invention from the back side. 1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 100 and a lending machine 700 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. It is a figure which shows the connection example of each board|substrate and each unit. 230 is a diagram showing an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 229 and the reel unit 109 similarly shown in FIG. 229; FIG. 227 is a configuration diagram of a game system including the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 227. FIG. It is a table summarizing gaming machine state information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information. It is a figure which shows a communication sequence when a game control state command is transmitted to the medal|token number control part 350 from the game control part 302. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing details of communication performed between the medal count control unit 350 and the lending machine 700. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing details of hall control/fraud monitoring information, and (b) is a list of error codes. It is a table showing game control state commands. FIG. 10 is a table showing medal count control state commands; FIG. It is a figure which shows a communication sequence when a game control priority command is transmitted to the medal|token number control part 350 from the game control part 302. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing the details of the game control priority command, and (b) is a diagram showing the details of the response command returned from the medal count control section 350 to the game control section 302. FIG. It is a figure which shows a communication sequence when the game control priority command 2 is transmitted to the medal|token number control part 350 from the game control part 302. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a game control part main process. FIG. 242 is a flow chart of medal insertion/start lever acceptance processing (step S102) in FIG. 241; FIG. FIG. 243 is a flow chart of processing during medal insertion (step S1011) in FIG. 242. FIG. FIG. 244 is a flowchart of the settlement button process (step S1102) in FIG. 243; FIG. 249, 244, and 248 is a flow chart of variation information transmission processing (steps S1111, S1205, and S1605) addressed to the medal count control unit. FIG. FIG. 246 is a flowchart of triple command transmission processing (step S1307) in FIG. 245; FIG. FIG. 247 is a flow chart of priority command transmission processing (steps S1014, S1403, S1406, and step S1409) to the medal number control unit in FIGS. 242 and 246; FIG. FIG. 242 is a flowchart of a medal awarding process (step S109) in FIG. 241; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of game control part timer interruption processing. FIG. 250 is a flowchart of disconnection determination processing, which is one of the error monitoring processing (step S203) in FIG. 249; FIG. FIG. 250 is a flow chart of medal count control command reception processing (step S206) in FIG. 249; FIG. FIG. 249 is a flowchart of game control command transmission processing (step S207) in FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the flow of a medal count control unit main process; FIG. FIG. 254 is a flowchart of RAM abnormality determination processing (step S302) in FIG. 253; FIG. 4 is a table showing a target range of RAM clear processing; FIG. 255 is a flowchart of error request setting processing (step S3022) in FIG. 254 and the like; FIG. 254 is a flowchart of preparation processing (step S303) in FIG. 253; 254 is a flowchart of gaming machine information notification transmission processing (step S304) in FIG. 253; FIG. 259 is a flowchart of gaming machine information type acquisition processing (step S3305) in FIG. 258. FIG. FIG. 254 is a flowchart of count notification transmission processing (step S305) in FIG. 253; FIG. FIG. 254 is a flow chart of a lending notification reception confirmation process (step S306) in FIG. 253; FIG. FIG. 254 is a flowchart of lending reception result response transmission processing (step S308) in FIG. 253; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the flow of timer interrupt processing of a medal count control unit; FIG. FIG. 264 is a flow chart of a lending notification reception process (step S404) in FIG. 263; FIG. FIG. 265 is a flow chart of the loan number determination process (step S4004) in FIG. 264. FIG. FIG. 264 is a flow chart of the planned count number update process (step S405) in FIG. 263; FIG. 264 is a flowchart of game control unit command reception processing (step S406) in FIG. 263. FIG. 267 is a flowchart of game control state command reception processing (step S4304). FIG. 267 is a flowchart (first half) of game control priority command reception processing (step S4305) in FIG. FIG. 267 is a flowchart (second half) of game control priority command reception processing (step S4305) in FIG. FIG. 271 is a flowchart of input command reception processing (step S4517) in FIG. 270; FIG. 271 is a flowchart of settlement command reception processing (step S4519) in FIG. 270; FIG. 271 is a flowchart of start lever acceptance command reception processing (step S4521) in FIG. 270; FIG. 275 is a flow chart of game information setting processing (steps S4806, S4A19) in FIGS. 273 and 275. FIG. FIG. 271 is a flow chart of payout command reception processing (step S4523) in FIG. 270. FIG. FIG. 276 is a flowchart of game medal number overflow confirmation processing (step S4A11) in FIG. 275; FIG. FIG. 271 is a flowchart of an error occurrence command reception process (step S4524) in FIG. 270; FIG. 264 is a flowchart of error monitoring processing (step S407) in FIG. 263; FIG. 264 is a flow chart of a game control unit-addressed medal count control command transmission process (step S408) in FIG. 263; FIG. 264 is a flow chart of a display device display process (step S409) in FIG. 263; FIG. FIG. 244 is a flow chart showing a modification of the process during medal insertion in FIG. 243; FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing a modification of the triple command transmission process of FIG. 246; FIG. 272 is a flow chart showing a modification of the input command reception process of FIG. 271; FIG. FIG. 267 is a flow chart showing a modification of the planned count number update process of FIG. 266; FIG. FIG. 267 is a flow chart showing a modification of the planned count number update process of FIG. 266; FIG. (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400, and (c) is 4 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400, and (d) is a flowchart of command processing (step S307) in (a). (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (c) is 10 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a first example in which a count button 171 is operated; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing a first example of an effect during counting; FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example in which a betting operation is performed before the counting button 171 is operated and the number of bets is not 0. FIG. It is a timing chart showing an example of the counting end effect. 4 is a timing chart showing an example when the settlement button 134 is operated; FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example in which the number of sheets to be counted increases as the operation time of the count button 171 increases. 293(a) is a timing chart showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 293(c), and FIG. 293(b) is a state in which 30 sheets are set as the number to be counted in the example shown in FIG. 293(c). 10 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where power is cut off at , and then the power is restored. FIG. 286 is a timing chart showing an example employing the scheduled count number update process of FIG. 285; FIG. (a) is a timing chart showing an example in which automatic counting ends when the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 reaches a certain value; 4 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a power failure occurs and the power is restored; It is a figure which shows the example of a display showing that automatic counting is in progress. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of sound output indicating that automatic counting is in progress; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a power failure occurs before 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time for a long-pressing operation, has elapsed since the operation of the count button 171 was started. FIG. FIG. 300 is a timing chart showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 299; FIG. FIG. 300 is a timing chart showing another modification of the example shown in FIG. 299; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of change display (subtraction) on the game medal number display device 170, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of change display (addition) on the game medal number display device 170. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing another example of change display on the game medal number display device 170; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example in which the effect image display device 157 displays the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 in addition to the game medal number display device 170; FIG. 305 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 304; 304 is a diagram showing another example that is completely different from the example shown in FIG. 304. FIG. (a) is a timing chart when the payout is about to be performed in excess of the payout threshold, and (b) is a diagram showing another example of an error notification of exceeding the upper limit. (a) is a timing chart when the payout is going to be performed after exceeding the second payout threshold, and (b) is a diagram showing another example of the approaching upper limit notification. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a case in which a notification prompting counting is superimposed on an error notification with high urgency; (a) is a diagram showing an example in which the notification prompting the count continues even after transition to the demonstration display, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of notification after the count button 171 is operated during the demonstration. . (a) is a diagram showing an example of notification when the "number of game medals" once exceeds a prescribed number such as a payout threshold value or a second payout threshold value and then falls below the prescribed number; 10 is a diagram showing an example of notification prompting counting when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second payout threshold over a plurality of games; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of performing a notification prompting counting each time the "number of game medals" increases by a predetermined number; FIG. 11C is a diagram showing an example, and (c) is a diagram showing an example in which the count button 171 is operated in a state disadvantageous to the player. 312(a) is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 312(b), (b) is a diagram showing an example in which the counting forcefully terminated once is restarted, and (c) is an example of the modified example described using (a) and (b) when the player is in a disadvantageous state (for example, normal state). 7 is a timing chart showing an example when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a second modification in which the operation differs depending on whether or not the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing another example when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off; FIG. It is a figure which shows the change of the number of game medals when the count button 171 is long-pressed. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation performed according to the number of game medals. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation performed according to the number of acquisition medals in AT state. It is a figure which shows an example of operation|movement when overflow of a game medal|token occurs. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of operation when a medal number control disconnection error (error code E0) occurs. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an operation when a game medal number upper limit exceeded error and a medal number control disconnection error (error code E0) occur at the same time. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a medal number control unit disconnection error occurs. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an operation when a sound output permission period is provided in outputting a counting sound for a counting process; 324(a) is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of FIG. 324(a). FIG. FIG. 324(b) is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of FIG. 324(b).

1 to 34, a game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel game machine such as a slot machine 100 or a pinball game machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail. In principle, the symbols shown in FIGS. 1 to 34 are used only for explanations using FIGS. In the explanation using FIG. 34, priority is given to the symbols shown in FIGS.

FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a plurality of reels, into which a predetermined number of game media are inserted and on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied, start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winnings is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if not, the game medium is paid out. It is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out. Note that this payout of game media may be referred to as profit. Moreover, what makes acquisition of this profit easy may be called a privilege.

This slot machine 100 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101 . The front door 102 is a door member rotatably attached to the main body 101 . The front door 102 is provided with a locking function so that the front door 102 cannot be opened by anyone other than the staff of the game parlor.

Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

A proper number of each pattern is printed on a belt-shaped member at equal intervals, and this belt-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form each of the reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen.

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of lines.

2, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure) is the upper stage symbol of the left reel, and the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 4 shown in the figure) is displayed. The symbol to be displayed is the left reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 7 shown in the figure) is the left reel lower stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (position 2 shown in the figure). The symbol displayed on the middle reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure) is the middle reel symbol, and the symbol displayed on the middle reel 111 (position 8 shown in the figure) is the middle reel symbol. is the middle reel lower symbol, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the right reel 112 (position 3 shown in the figure) is the right reel upper symbol, and the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the right reel 112 (position 6 shown in the figure) is on the right The symbols displayed on the middle stage of the reel and the symbols displayed on the bottom of the right reel 112 (the position of 9 in the drawing) are called the right reel bottom stage symbols, respectively. 112, three in each vertical direction, nine in total. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. That is, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. Further, although the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 has three reels inside the center of the slot machine 100, the number of reels and the position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is configured so that each pattern is shielded so that the individual patterns can be evenly illuminated. An optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting section and a light receiving section is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112 inside the slot machine 100. This optical sensor (the index sensor shown in FIG. 4) is provided. 730), a light blocking piece (not shown) provided on the reel and having a predetermined length passes between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion. The symbol position on the reel is determined based on the detection result of the sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the activated line.

A valid line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid line 114 . The effective line is a line (a line on which a winning judgment is made) on which it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 17, is displayed. When the pattern corresponding to stops, it is determined as winning. Here, a line is defined as an area corresponding to one symbol for each of the reels 110 to 112 in the area within the display window 113 . A line other than the valid line on which winning determination is not performed is referred to as an invalid line.

FIG. 2 shows a middle line L1 composed of a left reel middle symbol, a middle reel middle symbol and a right reel middle symbol, a right downward line L2 composed of a left reel top symbol, a middle reel middle symbol and a right reel bottom symbol, Rising right line L3 composed of left reel lower symbol, middle reel middle symbol and right reel upper symbol, upper line L4 composed of left reel upper symbol, middle reel upper symbol and right reel upper symbol, left reel lower symbol, Five lines of the lower line L5 composed of middle reel lower symbols and right reel lower symbols are shown. These lines are examples, and for example, a line composed of left reel upper symbols, middle reel lower symbols, and right reel upper symbols, each of the reels 110 to 112 defines an area for one symbol. Anything is fine. Note that, among the lines shown in FIG. 2, the upper line L4 is used as an effective line in this embodiment. The pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. The slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a special machine for betting 3 coins, and when the number of inserted medals is less than 3, none of the lines becomes effective, and when 3 medals are betted, the line L4 becomes effective. (to be used as a valid line). When the line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135 . Note that the number of effective lines is not limited to one line. For example, the middle line L1, the downward-sloping line L2, and the upward-sloping line L3 may be used as active lines, or the number of active lines corresponding to the number of bets may be used.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination) has been internally won in an internal lottery, which will be described later, or that the player is in a special game state, which will be described later. be. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later), which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, is won. ) is a lamp that informs the player. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, one card is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. ing. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

A start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112 . That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 including a left stop button 137 , a middle stop button 138 and a right stop button 139 . The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112, respectively. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as the second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as the third stop operation. Also, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations will be referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel, respectively. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as the operation order or pressing order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 .

A key hole 140 is also provided in the front door 102. A key is inserted into the key hole 140 and turned clockwise to unlock, and counterclockwise to lock. The slot machine 100 is provided with an open sensor 294 (see FIG. 3A) for detecting that the front door 102 is opened. The open sensor 294 detects that the front door 102 is opened by detecting an opening/closing piece projecting when the front door 102 is opened.

A first chance button 165 and a second chance button 166 are provided between the bet button 132 and the medal slot 141 . A first chance button 165 incorporates a first performance lamp, and a second chance button 166 incorporates a second performance lamp. Both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operating means operated by the player in the performance. A left button 167 is provided on the left side of the second chance button 166, and a right button 168 is provided on the right side thereof. By operating the left button 167 and the right button 168, it may be possible to move the cursor displayed on the effect image display device 157. In this case, the second chance button 166 functions as a confirm button. Sometimes.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. This title panel 162 is illuminated from behind by a title panel lamp 164 . A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

A sound hole 145 provided at the bottom is a hole for outputting the sound of the bass speaker 277 (see FIG. 3) to the outside. A left side lamp 144L provided on the left side of the front door 102 and a right side lamp 144R provided on the right side are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is also provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This sound hole 143 is a hole for outputting the sound of the upper speaker 272 (see FIG. 3) to the outside. The production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a production image display device 157 arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (on the side of the player). . Although the effect image display device 157 is a liquid crystal display device, any display device other than the liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it can display various effect images and various game information. display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display, reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Furthermore, although the display screen is a flat surface, it may be curved.

It should be noted that what has been referred to as a lamp is an example of light-emitting means, and in this specification, a device using an LED as a light source is also referred to as a lamp. It may be called a lamp, and a device that emits light corresponds to an example of a light emitting means.

3A and 3B are diagrams showing the internal configuration of the slot machine 100. FIG. 3A is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened, and FIG. It is the figure which expanded the door relay board|substrate 290 arrange|positioned.

The main body 101 is a box-shaped body surrounded by an upper plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a lower plate 264 and a rear plate 242, and having an open front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board housing case 210 containing a main control board 300B (see FIG. 9) is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper portion of the back plate 242. A reel unit 700 having three reels 110 to 112 is arranged below the control board housing case 210 . On the side of the main control board housing case 210 and the reel unit 700, that is, on the left side plate 260, a sub control board housing case 220 containing the sub control board 400B (see FIG. 9) is arranged. be. A first selection switch 190 is provided in the sub control board housing case 220 . Since the first selection switch 190 is provided inside the main body 101, a person who can unlock the front door 102 (for example, a store clerk at an amusement shop, etc.) can open the front door 102. However, a person (for example, a player) who cannot unlock the front door 102 cannot operate. That is, the first selection switch 190 is provided at a position where the player cannot operate it. Details of the first selection switch 190 will be described later. Also, on the side plate 260 on the right side, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached which is connected to the main control board 300B (see FIG. 9) and outputs information of the slot machine 100 to an external device.

Further, on the right side of the reel unit 700, a setting key switch 281 is provided for changing the game mode (also referred to as set value) of the slot machine 100 and for confirming the changed set value. Here, the set value refers to the ratio of the total number of game media put out by the gaming machine to the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets when playing the game for a predetermined period. This value is a so-called “payout rate”, and can be set in multiple stages, for example, from “1” to “6”.

The setting key switch 281 is a key switch that is electrically turned ON/OFF by inserting a predetermined setting key (not shown) and turning it. Specifically, when a predetermined setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and rotated clockwise, the setting key switch sensor provided in the setting key switch 281 detects the ON state, and when the setting key switch 281 is rotated counterclockwise, the setting key switch sensor is detected. Detect the OFF state.

A hopper unit 180 (a device for dispensing medals accumulated in a bucket) is arranged on the lower plate 264. Above the hopper unit 180, that is, below the reel unit 700, a power supply control board 252B (see FIG. 9) is provided. ) is provided, and a power switch 244 is provided in front of the power supply device 252 . Power switch 244 is a toggle switch electrically connected to power supply 252 . With this power switch 244, the slot machine 100 can be powered on (power ON) or powered off (power OFF). The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400, and each device. In addition, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) is provided for supplying power to predetermined parts (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after external power is cut off. there is

On the right side of the hopper unit 180, an auxiliary medal storage box 240 for storing medals overflowing from the hopper unit 180 is arranged, behind which an overflow terminal is arranged (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting a power cord 265 , and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101 . there is

The front door 102 is hinged to the side plate 260 on the left side of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and above the pattern display window 113 is a production device 160 and a production control board ( not shown), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. Below the pattern display window 113, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting inserted medals, and a path 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals onto the medal receiving tray 161. there is Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145 . An open sensor 294 is provided on the rear surface of the front door 102 . The open sensor 294 is configured to be L (OFF) when the front door 102 is closed and H (ON) when the front door 102 is open.

A door relay board 290 is arranged below the design display window 113 on the rear surface of the front door 102 . This door relay board 290 is provided with a reset switch 291, a setting change button 292, and a set value display 293, as shown in FIG. 3(b).

The reset switch 291 is a push-button type switch, and by pressing (short-term pressing) the reset switch 291, the error of the slot machine 100 can be canceled.

The setting change button 292 is also a push button type switch similar to the reset switch 291 . An operation procedure for changing the setting value by using the setting change button 292 will be described later.

The set value display 293 is a display such as a 7-segment LED. The set value display 293 can display the game modes (set values) 1 to 6 set by the setting change button 292 in numbers.

When the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise (setting key OFF→ON) in the power-on state (power ON), the setting value display 293 displays the currently set game mode (setting value ) is displayed numerically, it can be used to confirm the currently set game mode. That is, when the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise (setting key OFF→ON) in the power-on state (power ON), setting value confirmation processing for confirming the setting value is started. , and turned counterclockwise (setting key ON→OFF), the set value confirmation process ends.

Here, the operating procedure for changing the setting value will be described. By inserting a setting key (not shown) into the setting key switch 281 and turning it clockwise (setting key OFF→ON), the power switch 244 is changed from the power cutoff state (power OFF) to the power ON state (power ON). The setting value change becomes effective (set value change processing is started), and each time the setting change button 292 is pressed, the game mode (set value) changes in order from 1 to 6, and the desired game mode can be selected. can. By operating the start lever 135, the game mode (set value) selected at that time is determined. Finally, by turning the setting key counterclockwise (setting key ON→OFF), the set value changing process is completed.

In the following, the period of the setting value change operation, that is, the period from the first clockwise operation of the setting key in the setting value change operation to the last counterclockwise operation of the setting key is also referred to as the setting value change mode. The period of the setting value confirmation operation, that is, the period from the first clockwise operation of the setting key to the last counterclockwise operation of the setting value confirmation operation is also called a setting value confirmation mode.

Here, the conditions for starting and ending the set value change mode and the set value confirmation mode will be described in detail. In this embodiment, the condition for starting the set value change mode is (1) that the power is turned on when the setting key switch 281 is ON, and (2) that the front door 102 is open. , is not a condition. In addition, conditions for terminating the set value change mode are (1) that the setting key switch 281 is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, and (2) that the front door 102 is in the open state. Similarly, in this embodiment, the condition for starting the set value confirmation mode is to turn on the setting key switch 281 while the power is on, and (2) the front door 102 is open. is not a condition. In addition, the conditions for ending the setting value confirmation mode are (1) that the setting key switch 281 is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, and (2) that the front door 102 is in the open state. That is, in the present embodiment, the condition for starting the setting value change mode (setting value confirmation mode) does not require that the front door 102 be in an open state. requires that the front door 102 be in an open state. If an attempt is made to start the set value change processing (set value confirmation processing) while the front door 102 is closed, the start condition is cleared, so the set value change processing (set value confirmation processing) is not started based on the illegal act. It is possible to start execution. However, since the termination condition cannot be cleared, the fraudulent person cannot terminate the set value change processing (set value confirmation processing). Therefore, it becomes easy to arrest the fraudster on the spot.

In the setting value change mode, effect devices such as the effect image display device 157, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, the title panel lamp 164, and the speakers 272 and 277 are used to indicate that the setting values are being changed. In the setting value confirmation mode, the effect device is used to notify that the setting value is being confirmed (hereinafter also referred to as setting value confirmation notification). )I do.

Next, the structure of the reel unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing the configuration of the reel unit 700. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 4, the reel unit 700 includes a left reel unit 700L, a middle reel unit 700C and a right reel unit 700R inside a reel case 702 made of a box-shaped metal plate. Connectors 7030, 7031, and 7032 for connecting with the main control board 300B (see FIG. 9) via harnesses MR1 to MR3 (see FIG. 9) are provided on the upper portion of the reel case 702. FIG. A left reel 110 is arranged in the left reel unit 700L, a middle reel 111 is arranged in the middle reel unit 700C, and a right reel 112 is arranged in the right reel unit 700R. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by motors 110m, 111m and 112m (see FIG. 9) provided for each reel. Each motor 110m-112m is a stepping motor. The left reel unit 700L will be described below as an example, but the same applies to the middle reel unit 700C and the right reel unit 700R. In the left reel unit 700L, a motor 110m, an index sensor 730 for detecting the rotational position of the reel 110, and a backlight module 740 for irradiating light from the back side to the front side of the belt-shaped member 710 of the reel 110, It is attached to the mounting base 732 .

The replacement work can be performed for each of the reel units 700L, 700C, and 700R. For example, if the left reel unit 700L fails, only the left reel unit 700L can be replaced with a new reel unit.

5A is a perspective view showing the structure of the backlight module 740, and FIG. 5B is a front view of the backlight module 740. FIG.

The backlight module 740 is composed of a reflector 742 and an illumination board 744 detachably attached to the back of the reflector 742 . The reflector 742 has three vertically arranged openings BK1 to BK3 extending from the front side to the back side. Also, two LEDs 745 are arranged on the lighting base 744 at positions corresponding to the openings BK1 to BK3.

The openings BK1 to BK3 and the LED 745 are provided at positions corresponding to the symbol positions (the positions of Nos. 1 to 9 shown in FIG. 2) which are stopped and displayed on the display window 113 in the attached state. As described above, by providing the LED 745 in each of the openings BK1 to BK3, when irradiating light, it is configured not to interfere with light irradiated to other positions. As a result, light can be applied to each of the positions Nos. 1 to 9 shown in FIG. For example, by turning on all the LEDs 745, it is possible to illuminate all the symbols visible to the player from behind. In addition, by lighting a part of the symbols, it is possible to illuminate a part of the symbols visible to the player from behind. The number and positions of openings and LEDs are not limited to this configuration.

Next, the first selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG. 3 will be described in detail. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the first selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG.

FIG. 6A is an enlarged view of the first selection switch 190. FIG. The first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 6(a) has 16 contacts, a rotatable circular rotating portion 190a, and a circular rotating portion 190a protruding outward from the rotating portion 190a. and an instruction unit 190b. Also, around the first selection switch 190, 16 numbers (hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are applied corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the rotating portion 190a. The first selection switch 190 is an operation means for selecting one number out of 16 numbers.

These 16 numbers are treated as numerical values (set values) representing settings. That is, the first selection switch 190 is configured to be able to externally output the numerical information indicated by the instruction section 190b as a detection signal. For example, as shown in FIG. When "B" is indicated, the value of hexadecimal "B" is selected, and the information of the value can be output as a binary 4-bit detection signal (0b1011). Therefore, the first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 8), which will be described later, receives this detection signal and selects the numerical value (one of the numerical values from 0 to F in hexadecimal) selected by the first selection switch 190. In the first sub-control section 400, the numerical value indicated by the instruction section 190b is treated as the selected setting value.

Instead of the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 6A, for example, a rotary switch 191 as shown in FIG. A switch 192 may be applied.

A rotary switch 191 shown in FIG. 6(b) has 16 contacts, a rotatable ring-shaped rotating portion 191a, and a cutout window 191b formed in the rotating portion 191a. . Also, 16 numbers (hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are applied to the bottom of the rotating portion 191a of the rotary switch 191 corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the rotating portion 191a.

The rotary switch 191 selects a numerical value that can be seen through the cutout window 191b, and is configured to be able to output the information of the numerical value to the outside as a detection signal. As shown in FIG. 6(b), when the numerical value seen from the notch 191b is "F", it means that the numerical value of hexadecimal F is selected, and the information of the numerical value is represented by a 4-bit binary code. can be output as a detection signal (0b1111). Therefore, by inputting this detection signal, the first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 8), which will be described later, selects a numerical value visible from the notch 191b of the rotary switch 191 (hex 0 to Any of the numerical values of F) can be detected.

A slide switch 192 shown in FIG. 6(c) has a rectangular guide groove 192a and a slide portion 192b having 16 contacts and slidable along the guide groove 192a. Also, above the slide switch 192, 16 numbers (in this example, hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are given corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the slide portion 192b.

With this slide switch 192, the numerical value at which the slide portion 192b is positioned is selected, and information on the numerical value can be output to the outside as a detection signal. As shown in FIG. 6(c), when the slide portion 192b is positioned at the position of the numerical value "0", the numerical value of hexadecimal 0 is selected, and the information of the numerical value is converted into a binary number. It can be output as a 4-bit detection signal (0b0000). Therefore, by inputting this detection signal, the first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 8), which will be described later, selects the position of the sliding portion 192b of the slide switch 192 (0 to F in hexadecimal). Either) can be detected.

Since the first selection switch 190 described above with reference to FIGS. 6(a) to 6(c) is a mechanical switch, it can be operated even when it is not energized. , the selected numerical value (set value) can be retained even when the power supply is interrupted due to a power failure or the like. Therefore, once a selection is made, the selected numerical value can be retained even when the power is turned off. In addition, since a number (display means) for confirming the selected numerical value is provided, it is easy to confirm the set value, which is highly convenient.

FIG. 6D is an enlarged view of the second selection switch 194. FIG. The second selection switch 194 shown in FIG. 6(d) is composed of the left button 167, the right button 168, and the second chance button 166 functioning as a confirmation button shown in FIG. While the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 6A is an operating means provided at a position where the player cannot operate, the second selection switch 194 can be operated by the player. It is an operation means provided at a position where it can be operated. That is, the second selection switch 194 is a switch that can be operated by the player. By pressing the chance button 166, the selected setting value is confirmed. Alternatively, the setting value can be selected by pressing the left button 167 and the right button 168, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the selected setting value is confirmed without pressing the second chance button 166. good too.

This second selection switch 194 can output a detection signal corresponding to each button when any of second chance button 166, left button 167, or right button 168 is operated. Therefore, the first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 8), which will be described later, receives this detection signal to detect which of the second chance button 166, the left button 167, or the right button 168 has been operated. It has a configuration that allows

Instead of the second selection switch 194 shown in FIG. 6(d), for example, as shown in FIG. 195 , and this cross key 195 may be applied as the second selection switch 194 . Alternatively, two types of operating means may be provided, one of which may also serve as a chance button, or only one of which may be the second selection switch 194 .

Since the second selection switch 194 is not a mechanical (mechanical) switch, it cannot operate in a non-energized state and cannot hold the selected numerical value (set value) by itself. Therefore, it is necessary to separately provide storage means for storing the set values. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the numerical value selected by the second selection switch 194 is not backed up, but it may be backed up.

FIG. 6(f) is a diagram comparing the sizes of the second chance button 166 and the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. Left button 167 and right button 168 are also shown in FIG. 6(f). The first chance button 165 is about three times as large as the second chance button 166 .

In addition, under the condition that the second chance button 166 or the first chance button 165 is operated, a cut-in display is performed, or one of the chance buttons is used for repeated hit effects, etc., and the other chance button is used as a hidden button. may Here, a hidden button does not suggest or promote the operation of the operation means (for example, the operation suggestion display or the operation promotion display is not displayed on the effect image display device 157, or the built-in effect lamp does not light up). at least one or both), but when the operation means is operated, some kind of production is performed.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of setting values selected using the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194. As shown in FIG.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the setting values that can be selected with the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194 are the sounds output from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 (for example, BGM, sound effects, error sound, etc.). As described above, the first selection switch 190 is an operation means provided at a position where the player cannot operate it, and serves as a switch used by the store clerk to select a set value. Only the first selection switch 190 out of the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194 selects whether the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode or the non-power saving mode (normal mode). can also be done. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the power saving mode is set only while the demonstration effect is being executed. Hereinafter, the demonstration will be abbreviated as demo. The demonstration effect is a effect that is started when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses without restarting the game after the end of one game. The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is set to the power saving mode when the demonstration effect is started in a state where setting to the power saving mode is selected.

When the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode, the animation (demonstration animation) displayed on the effect image display device 157 is reproduced in a dark state, thereby suppressing the power consumption of the effect image display device 157 and saving power. . In addition, the power consumption of these light emitting means can be suppressed by turning off the first effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 shown in FIG. Power is saved. Note that when these light emitting means are turned off, the power consumption becomes 0, and the power saving effect of these light emitting means is higher than the power saving effect of the effect image display device 157 .

Further, when the first selection switch 190 is operated, the effect image display device 157 displays either the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2. In volume selection using the first selection switch 190, one volume level is selected from among seven volume levels. Also, in the non-power saving mode, mute can be selected.

FIG. 7A shows the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "0" shown in FIG. 6A.

The effect image display device 157 displays a first volume selection icon SI1. The first sound volume selection icon SI1 displays seven levels of volume level selection values and seven levels of horizontal level display (indicator display). The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 7A displays that the selection value of the seven-stage volume level is 0 (0/7) and the characters "mute". In addition, none of the 7 levels of horizontal level display are illuminated. When mute is selected by the first selection switch 190, the output sounds from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 are completely inaudible.

FIG. 7(B) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "1" shown in FIG. 6(a).

In the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 7B, characters of "volume 1/7" indicating that the selection value of the seven-step volume level is 1 are displayed. In addition, in the seven-step horizontal level display, only the leftmost first step level is illuminated in the first color (for example, yellow).

FIG. 7(C) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "7" shown in FIG. 6(a).

In the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 7(C), characters "volume 7/7" indicating that the selection value of the seven-step volume level is 7 are displayed. In addition, in the 7-step horizontal level display, all the levels from the 1st step to the 7th step are lit in the first color (for example, yellow). When the seventh-stage volume level is selected by the first selection switch 190, the output sound from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 becomes the maximum volume.

FIG. 7(D) shows the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "8" shown in FIG. 6(a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 7D displays characters indicating that the volume selection value is exhibition volume. This exhibition volume is a volume suitable for giving a presentation of the slot machine 100 at an exhibition or the like, and is, for example, a volume between the fourth volume level and the fifth volume level. In addition, in the 7-step horizontal level display, all the levels from the 1st step to the 7th step are lit in the second color (for example, red). In place of the exhibition volume, a special volume that cannot be selected with the second selection switch 194 but can be selected only with the first selection switch 190 may be selected. For example, it may be possible to select a step tone in which the volume increases by one step each time a predetermined time elapses.

The first volume selection icon SI1 displayed on the effect image display device 157 disappears when the first selection switch 190 is not operated for a predetermined time.

FIG. 7(a) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "9" shown in FIG. 6(a).

A second volume selection icon SI2 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 7(a). The background color of the second volume selection icon SI2 is different from the background color of the first volume selection icon SI1. In addition, the second volume selection icon SI2 displays characters indicating power saving mode, selection values of seven levels of volume levels, and seven levels of horizontal level display (indicator display). The second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 7(a) displays the characters "power saving mode" and the characters "volume 7/7" indicating that the selection value of the seven-stage volume level is 7. there is In addition, in the 7-step horizontal level display, all the levels from the 1st step to the 7th step are illuminated in the third color (for example, blue).

FIG. 7(b) shows the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "F" shown in FIG. 6(a).

The second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 7(b) displays the characters "power saving mode" and the characters "volume 1/7" indicating that the selected value of the seven volume levels is 1. there is In addition, in the seven-step horizontal level display, only the first step level at the left end is lit in the third color (for example, blue).

The second volume selection icon SI2 displayed on the effect image display device 157 also disappears when the first selection switch 190 is not operated for a predetermined time.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, when the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to either "9" or "A" to "F" shown in FIG. A power saving mode is selected to be set. Note that even if the power saving mode is selected, the slot machine 100 is not set to the power saving mode. be a condition. On the other hand, when the instruction section 190b is set to any one of "0" to "8" shown in FIG. 6(a), setting the slot machine 100 to the non-power saving mode is selected. When setting to the non-power saving mode is selected, the power saving mode is not set even in the demonstration state. Also, while a game is being played, the slot machine 100 is set to the non-power saving mode (normal mode).

The volume output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 is the same regardless of whether the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode or the non-power saving mode. Therefore, the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. 7B and the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. The volume output with the selection value and the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. 7A are the same.

FIG. 7A shows the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the second selection switch 194 is operated.

When the player operates the second selection switch 194 while the effect image display device 157 displays the first guide display icon GI1, which will be described later, the effect image display device 157 displays the third volume. A selection icon SI3 is displayed. The third volume selection icon SI3 displays five levels of volume level selection values and five levels of vertical level display (indicator display). In the third volume selection icon SI3 shown in FIG. 7(a), characters of "volume 1/5" indicating that the selected value of the five-level volume level is 1 are displayed. Also, in the five-stage level display, only the lowest level, the first stage, is lit in the fourth color (for example, green). Pressing the right button 168 of the second selection switch 194 once raises the level by one step, and pressing the left button 167 once lowers the level by one step. However, even if the left button 167 is pressed once in the state shown in FIG. 7(a), the level does not drop any further. That is, it is not possible to select mute by operating the second selection switch 194 . It should be noted that muting may also be selected by operating the second selection switch 194 .

FIG. 7(a) shows a display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the right button 168 is pressed four times from the state shown in FIG. 7(a).

On the third volume selection icon SI3 shown in FIG. 7(a), characters "volume 5/5" indicating that the selected value of the volume level in five stages is 5 are displayed. In addition, in the five-step vertical level display, all the levels from the first step to the fifth step are lit in the fourth color (for example, green).

The third volume selection icon SI3 displayed on the effect image display device 157 disappears when the left button 167 and the right button 168 are not operated for a predetermined time.

Seven levels of volume are selected by operating the first selection switch 190, while five levels of volume are selected by operating the second selection switch 194. FIG. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the volume setting range is from 0 to 127, and the setting values in the seven stages are 18 for the first stage, 36 for the second stage, 54 for the third stage, and 4 stages. The number is 73, the 5th row is 91, the 6th row is 109, and the 7th row is 127. On the other hand, in the 5th stage, the 2nd to 6th stages are left except for the 1st and 7th stages of the 7th stage. That is, the 2nd step (36) of 7 steps is the 1st step of 5 steps, and the 6th step (109) of 7 steps is the 5th step of 5 steps. Therefore, only the store clerk of the amusement arcade can select the setting value (18) in the 7th stage and the setting value (127) in the 7th stage. In addition, the 1st stage (18) of 7 stages may be the 1st stage of 5 stages, the 5th stage (91) of 7 stages may be the 5th stage of 5 stages, or the 3rd stage of 7 stages (54 ) may be the first stage of the five stages, and the seventh stage (127) of the seven stages may be the fifth stage of the five stages. Alternatively, the set values in the five stages may be 26 in the first stage, 51 in the second stage, 76 in the third stage, 102 in the fourth stage, and 127 in the fifth stage.

With the effect image display device 157 displaying the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 and a first guidance display icon GI1, which will be described later, the left button 167 of the second selection switch 194 is pressed once. When pressed, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 that has been displayed until then is replaced by the third volume selection icon SI3, and a display indicating that the volume level selection value is the second level is displayed. . On the other hand, when the right button 167 is pressed once instead of the left button 167 in the same state, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 that has been displayed until then is replaced with the third volume selection icon SI3. The display shows that the volume selection value is the fourth step. These displays are displayed regardless of what selection value the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 displays. That is, regardless of whether the selected value is 1/7 or 7/7, pressing the left button 167 once causes the selected value to be displayed as 2/5. Also, regardless of whether the selected value is 1/7 or 7/7, if the right button 168 is pressed once, the selected value is displayed as 4/5. This is because when the third volume selection icon SI3 is switched to, the selected values up to that point are discarded, and the volume level value of 3/5, which is the initial value of the third volume selection icon SI3, is selected again, and the left button is pressed. By operating 167 or right button 168, the initial value (3/5) is changed. That is, when the operation of the second selection switch 194 is accepted, the initial value of the third volume selection icon SI3 is set, and the value obtained by changing the initial value by operating the second selection switch 194 is changed to the first value. 3 Displayed by volume selection icon SI3. The first selection switch 190 is designed to be operated by a store clerk, and the second selection switch 194 is designed to be operated by a player, so that the intention of the player can be prioritized. Conversely, if the first selection switch 190 is operated while the third volume selection icon SI3 is displayed, the selected value displayed by the third volume selection icon SI3 is inherited and the first selection is selected. By operating the switch 190, a value obtained by changing the previously selected value is displayed by the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2. However, here too, the initial value (eg, 4/7) of the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 may be set without taking over the selected value.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control part>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and reel patterns. A ROM 306 storing arrays and the like, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, and a WDT. (watchdog timer) 314 is installed. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start signal when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). Start).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, a right stop button 139 sensor, a checkout button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the hopper unit 180, and a left reel 110 sensor. index sensor, middle reel 111 index sensor, right reel 112 index sensor, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generating circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, the middle stop button 138 sensor, and the right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the player's operation of the stop buttons.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed on the corresponding bet buttons 130 to 132, respectively, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are used as the medals to be inserted into the game. Detects the submit operation when submitting. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the hopper unit 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor for the left reel 110, the index sensor for the middle reel 111, and the index sensor for the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through them. It becomes L level every time. Rotational position information indicating how much the reel rotates from the reference position from when it once goes to L level until it goes to L level again is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, the CPU 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 .

The main control unit 300 controls the drive circuit 322 for driving the motors 110m to 112m (see FIG. 9) provided for each of the reels 110 to 112 of the reel unit 700, and the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals. A drive circuit 324 for driving, a drive circuit 326 for driving a motor 180m (see FIG. 9) provided in the hopper unit 180, various lamps 339 (active line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, the game medal insertion lamp 129 includes a driving circuit 328 for driving the game start lamp 121, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127).

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the game state) is output.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supplied to the main control unit 300 from the power supply device 252 (see FIG. 3). When the voltage value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal is output to the basic circuit 302 to indicate that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-controller 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main controller 300 .

Each component of the main controller 300 described above is mounted on the main controller substrate 300B (see FIG. 9).

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via the input interface. The first sub-controller 400 comprises a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on this control command. , an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-controller 400, lighting patterns of the backlight module 740, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and an upper speaker 272 and a bass speaker 277 are provided in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier, the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 .

A drive circuit 422 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, title panel, etc.) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface. lamp 164, bet button lamp 200, backlight module 740, first effect lamp built in first chance button 165, second effect lamp built in second chance button 166, etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-controller 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor 163m (see FIG. 9) of the shutter 163. As shown in FIG. The motor 163m of the shutter 163 is a stepping motor, and the drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to the motor 160m according to the command from the CPU404.

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time. Further, the first sub-control section 400 is provided with a switch sensor 427 which detects pressing of the first chance button 165 . The switch sensor 427 also detects pressing of each button of the second selection switch 194 consisting of the second chance button 166 , the left button 167 and the right button 168 . Detection signals from the shutter sensor 428 and switch sensor 427 are output to the basic circuit 402 by the sensor circuit 426 .

Further, although the first selection switch sensor 190 is directly connected to the basic circuit 402, the first selection switch sensor 190 may also be connected to the basic circuit 402 via the switch sensor 427 and the sensor circuit 426. .

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface.

Each component of the first sub-controller 400 described above is mounted on the first sub-controller board 400B (see FIG. 9).

The second sub-control section 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157 . The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effects (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. 512 and are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 534 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub-control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 536 are connected to this VDP 534 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

With the circuit configuration described above, the first sub-controller 400 transmits to the drive circuit 422 or the second sub-controller 500 a control signal instructing the setting of the power saving mode. As a result, the effect image display device 157 receives the control signal via the second sub-controller 500, and controls the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight. The module 740 receives control signals without going through the second sub-controller 500 .

Next, an example of connection between each board such as the power control board, the main control board and the first sub-control board and each unit such as the reel unit, the hopper unit and the effect movable body unit will be described.

FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of connection between each board and each unit.

This FIG. 9 shows a power control board 252B, a main control board 300B, a first sub-control board 400B, a reel unit 700, a hopper unit 180, and an effect movable body unit 160U. The effect movable body unit 160U is a unit that moves the shutter 163 incorporated in the effect device 160 shown in FIG. The shutter 163 corresponds to an example of a movable body.

A plurality of connectors PC1 to PC4, MC1 to MC6 and SC1 to SC4 are shown on each of the power control board 252B, the main control board 300B and the first sub-control board 400B. Also, one or a plurality of connectors HC1, RC1 to RC3, DC1 are shown in each of the reel unit 700, the hopper unit 180 and the effect movable body unit 160U.

An island facility installed in a game machine installation office steps down a 100V AC power supply to a voltage of 24V, and supplies a 24V AC current to the pachinko machine 100 through a power cord 265 connected to a connector PC1. The 24V AC current is converted into a 24V DC voltage, a 12V DC voltage and a 5V DC voltage in the power control board 252B. In addition, although it may be converted into other DC voltages, the DC voltage of 24V and the DC voltage of 5V will be explained here.

The power control board 252B shown in FIG. 9 shows a 24V power line and a 5V power line, and a power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and a power control 24V capacitor 24PC connected to the 24V power line and connected to the 5V power line. Also shown are power control 5V monitor LED 5PL and power control 5V capacitor 5PC. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL is a power monitoring LED lamp that lights or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL lights or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. LED lamp for power supply monitoring. Also shown is the power switch 244 also shown in FIG.

A 24V power line and a 5V power line are connected to the connector PC2 of the power control board 252B. The connector PC2 and the connector MC5 of the main control board 300B are connected by a harness PM, and the main control board 300B is supplied with a direct current of 24 V and a direct current of 5 V through the harness PM. .

A 24V power line is connected to the connector PC3 of the power control board 252B. The connector PC3 and the connector SC1 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS1, and a 24V direct current is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through this harness PS1. A 5V power line is connected to the connector PC4 of the power control board 252B. The connector PC4 and the connector SC2 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS2, and a direct current of 5V is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through this harness PS2.

The main control board 300B may also be supplied with 24V and 5V through separate harnesses, like the first sub-control board 400B. Also, 24V and 5V may be supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through a common harness, like the main control board 300B.

The main control board 300B shown in FIG. 9 also shows a 24V power line and a 5V power line. A 24V DC current supplied through the harness PM flows through the 24V power supply line of the main control board 300B, and a 5V DC current also supplied through the harness PM flows through the 5V power supply line of the main control board 300B. . 9 also shows a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and a main control 24V capacitor 24MC connected to the 24V power line, and a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML connected to the 5V power line. ing. The main control 24V monitor LED24ML is a power monitoring LED lamp that lights or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the main control 5V monitor LED5ML lights or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. LED lamp for power supply monitoring. Note that no capacitor is provided on the 5V power supply line.

A hopper motor driving IC 326i and a reel motor driving IC 322i are mounted on the main control board 300B. The hopper motor drive IC 326i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the drive circuit 326 shown in FIG. The reel motor drive IC 322i is an integrated circuit forming the drive circuit 322 shown in FIG. Both the hopper motor drive IC 326i and the reel motor drive IC 322i are supplied with a 24V DC current and a 5V DC current, respectively. Although not shown, the main control board 300B has the basic circuit 302 shown in FIG.

The connector MC1 of the main control board 300B, to which the hopper motor drive IC 326i is connected, and the connector HC1 of the hopper unit 180 are connected by a harness MH. The 24 V DC current and the 5 V DC current supplied to the hopper motor drive IC 326i are supplied to the hopper unit 180 through the harness MH, and the motor 180m provided in the hopper unit 180 can be driven. A control signal (command) for controlling the motor 180m is sent from the main control board 300B through the harness MH.

The connector MC2 connected to the reel motor drive IC 322i of the main control board 300B and the connector RC1 of the reel unit 700 are connected by a harness MR1. A connector RC2 of the reel unit 700 is connected by a harness MR2, and a connector MC4, to which the reel motor drive IC 322i is also connected, and a connector RC3 of the reel unit 700 are connected by a harness MR3. The reel unit 700 is supplied with the 24 V DC current and the 5 V DC current supplied to the reel motor drive IC 322i through these harnesses MR1 to MR3, respectively, and the motors 110m to 112m provided for each reel are driven. become drivable. Control signals (commands) for controlling the motors 110m to 112m are sent from the main control board 300B through the harnesses MR1 to MR3, respectively. Although a harness is connected to each motor, the connectors RC1 to RC3 on the reel unit 700 side are made into one connector, and the connectors MC2 to MC4 on the main control board 300B side are also made into one connector, and one common harness is used. You can connect with However, one common harness is a collection of three harnesses MR1 to MR3.

Furthermore, the connector MC6 of the main control board 300B and the connector SC4 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness MS. This harness MS is a harness for control signals (for command transmission) and is not used for current supply.

A 24V power supply line and a 5V power supply line are also shown on the first sub-control board 400B shown in FIG. A 24V direct current supplied through the harness PS1 flows through the 24V power supply line of the first sub-control board 400B, and a 5V direct current supplied through the harness PS2 flows through the 5V power supply line of the first sub-control board 400B. current flows. Also, on the first sub-control unit board 400B shown in FIG. 9, there are also a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and a sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC connected to the 24V power supply line, and a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL connected to the 5V power supply line. It is shown. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL is a power monitoring LED lamp that lights or blinks while a 24V DC current flows, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL lights or blinks while a 5V DC current flows. LED lamp for power supply monitoring. Also in the first sub-control board 400B, no capacitor is provided on the 5V power supply line.

A movable body motor drive IC 424i is mounted on the first sub-control board 400B. The movable body motor drive IC 424i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the drive circuit 424 shown in FIG. A DC current of 24V and a DC current of 5V are supplied to the movable body motor drive IC 424i. Although not shown here, the first sub-control board 400B has the basic circuit 402 shown in FIG.

The connector SC3 of the first sub-control board 400B, to which the movable body motor drive IC 424i is connected, and the connector DC1 of the effect movable body unit 160U are connected by a harness SD. The direct current of 24V and the direct current of 5V supplied to the movable body motor drive IC 424i are supplied to the movable body unit 160U through the harness SD, and the motor 163m provided in the movable body unit 160U is driven. be possible. A control signal (command) for controlling the motor 163m is sent from the first sub-control board 400B through the harness SD.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 also includes a second sub-control section 500 as shown in FIG. 8, and although not shown in FIG. A direct current of 24 V and a direct current of 5 V are supplied through the harnesses shown. Also, the second sub-control board is connected to the first sub-control board 400B with a harness for control signals (for command transmission). Furthermore, the second sub-control board is also connected to the effect device (effect image display device 157) in the same manner as the first sub-control board 400B.

As described above, the main control board 300B and the hopper unit 180 are electrically connected by the harness MH, and the main control board 300B and the reel unit 700 are also electrically connected by the harnesses MR1-MR3. Also, the first sub-control board 400B and the effect movable body unit 160U are electrically connected by a harness SD.

FIG. 10 is a diagram showing how the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 in the power-off state is opened and the left reel 110 is manually rotated. The power-off state may be a state in which the power switch 244 is turned off, or a state in which the power switch 244 is turned on but the power cord 265 is not connected to the outlet. However, it may be in a state where no power is supplied from the island facility (the same shall apply hereinafter). If power is not supplied from the island facility, the power is cut off even if the power cord 265 is connected to the outlet and the power switch 244 is on. Each reel 110-112 can be manually rotated in either the forward or reverse direction even in such a power failure condition.

Any of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 9 (power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL shown in FIG. ) are also extinguished in the power failure state.

However, as shown in FIG. 10, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the motor 110m (see FIG. 9) that rotates the left reel 110 generates a current (induced current) due to back electromotive force. Continuing the description with reference to FIG. 9, the induced current generated by the motor 110m flows through the harness MR1 into the main control board 300B and is supplied from the reel drive IC 322i to the 24V power line and the 5V power line. A main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR is provided between the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the ground, and a main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR is provided between the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML and the ground. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML has its resistance adjusted by the main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR, so that it is lit by the induced current, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML has its resistance adjusted by the main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR. Lights up due to induced current. Further, even if manual rotation is stopped, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML continues lighting for a while because the main control 24V capacitor 24MC is provided in the 24V power supply line. On the other hand, since the 5V power supply line is not provided with a capacitor, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML immediately turns off when the manual rotation is stopped. That is, when manual rotation is stopped, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML is turned off before the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML. A capacitor having a lower capacity than the main control 24V capacitor 24MC may also be provided on the 5V power supply line.

The induced current that has flowed into the main control board 300B this time flows through the harness PM into the power supply control board 252B, and is supplied from the connector PC2 to the 24V power line and the 5V power line. A power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR is provided between the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the ground, and a power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR is provided between the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the ground. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL has its resistance adjusted by the power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, so that it is lit by the induced current, and the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL has its resistance adjusted by the power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Lights up due to induced current. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of boards such as the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B emit light. Further, even if manual rotation is stopped, the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL continues lighting for a while because the power control 24V capacitor 24PC is provided in the 24V power line. In addition, since the power control 5V capacitor 5PC is also provided on the 5V power line, the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL also continues lighting for a while.

The induced current that has flowed into the power control board 252B further flows through the harness PS1 into the first sub-control board 400B and is supplied from the connector SC1 to the 24V power line. A secondary control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR is provided between the secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the ground. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and the ground. The secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL is lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the secondary control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR. Also, the induced current that has flowed into the power control board 252B flows through the harness PS2 into the first sub-control board 400B, and is supplied from the connector SC2 to the 5V power line. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and the ground. The sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL is lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of substrates such as the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control substrate 300B, the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control substrate 252B, and the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control substrate 400B emit light. There will be Even if manual rotation is stopped, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL continues lighting for a while because the sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC is provided in the 24V power supply line. On the other hand, since the 5V power supply line is not provided with a capacitor, the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL immediately turns off when the manual rotation is stopped.

The above description is a description of the phenomenon that occurs when the harnesses MR1, PM, PS1, and PS2 are normally connected to the connectors and are not disconnected. On the other hand, if the harness MR1 is broken or not properly connected to the connector RC1 and/or the connector MC2 (disconnected or insufficiently inserted), no matter how much the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the None of the monitor LEDs shown in 9 are illuminated, and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML remain off. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, if none of the monitor LEDs, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML shown in FIG. connection failure can be suspected.

Also, if the harness PM is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector MC5 and/or the connector PC2, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML lights up, but the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL do not light up. As a result, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, although the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML are lit, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and If the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL is not lit, an abnormality in the harness PM or poor connection with the connectors MC5 and PC2 can be suspected.

Even when the main control board 300B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B are lit by manually rotating the left reel 110. It is possible.

Further, if the harness PS1 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector PC3 and/or the connector SC1, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the secondary control 24V of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. Only the monitor LED 24SL does not light up. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, if only the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. can be done. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector PC4 and/or the connector SC2, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the sub control 5V of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. Only the monitor LED5SL does not light up. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, if only the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL out of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. can be done.

Here, the case where the left reel 110 is manually rotated in the power failure state has been described, but even when the middle reel 111 is manually rotated in the power failure state, the right reel 112 can be manually rotated in the power failure state. The same is true when rotating. In addition, when the number of reels to be manually rotated increases, the monitor LED emits bright light. For example, when the left reel 110, middle reel 111 and right reel 112 are manually rotated at the same time, the monitor LED emits brighter light than when only the left reel 110 is manually rotated.

In addition, the main control 24V monitor LED24ML, the main control 5V monitor LED5ML, the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL, the power control 24V monitor LED24PL and the power control 5V monitor LED5PL LEDs used for different purposes from the monitor LED ( For example, even if an error monitoring LED that emits light when an error occurs, or a signal monitoring LED, etc.), if it is provided with an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line or 5V power line, it can be manually operated in the power failure state. When the left reel 110 is rotated, light is emitted if there is no electrical connection failure. Therefore, even if the LED is used for a purpose other than the monitor LED, it is possible to check for an electrical connection failure.

FIG. 11(a) is a perspective view of the hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 3 as viewed obliquely from above.

The connector HC1 shown in FIG. 9 is also shown in the hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 11(a). The hopper unit 180 has a storage tank 181 for storing medals and a disk-shaped hopper disc 182 provided on the bottom surface of the storage tank 181 . Part of the hopper disk 182 is visible in FIG. 11(a). The hopper disk 182 is provided with six medal passing holes 1821 spaced apart in the circumferential direction. The medal passage hole 1821 is a hole of a size through which medals, which are game media, can pass. The hopper disk 182 is rotated by the motor 180m (see FIG. 9), and the medals stored in the storage tank 181 are dispensed through the medal passage holes 1821.

FIG. 11(b) is a diagram showing how the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated.

FIG. 11(b) shows the hopper disk 182 viewed from directly above, and six medal passage holes 1821 can be confirmed. Even in the power-off state, the hopper disk 182 can be manually rotated in both forward and reverse directions by inserting a finger into the medal passage hole 1821 .

When the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated, the motor 180m (see FIG. 9) that rotates the hopper disk 182 generates a current (induced current) due to back electromotive force. Continuing the description with reference to FIG. 9, the induced current generated by the motor 180m flows through the harness MH into the main control board 300B and is supplied from the hopper motor drive IC 326i to the 24V power line and the 5V power line. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML has its resistance adjusted by the main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR, so that it is lit by the induced current, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML has its resistance adjusted by the main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR. Lights up due to induced current. On the other hand, if the harness MH is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector HC1 and/or the connector MC1, no matter how much the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated, none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. However, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML remain off. As a result, even if the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated, if none of the monitor LEDs, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML shown in FIG. connection failure can be suspected.

After that, the induced current generated by the motor 180m of the hopper disk 182 flows through the power control board 252B to the first sub-control board 400B in the same way as the induced current generated by the motor 110m of the left reel 110 described above. If so, the monitor LEDs (24PL, 5PL, 24SL, 5SL) provided on the boards 252B and 400B are lit. Therefore, similarly to when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, even when the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated, it is possible to check for an electrical connection failure on the downstream side of the main control board 300B.

When the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated and the left reel 111 is also manually rotated while the power is off, the number of movable bodies to be manually rotated increases, so that the monitor LED emits bright light. Become.

Moreover, even in the power-off state, the shutter 163 shown in FIG. 1 can be manually opened and closed.

When the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the motor 163m (see FIG. 9) that opens and closes the shutter 163 generates a current (induced current) due to back electromotive force. Continuing the description with reference to FIG. 9, the induced current generated by the motor 163m flows through the harness SD into the first sub-control board 400B, and is supplied from the movable body motor drive IC 424i to the 24V power line and the 5V power line respectively. be done. The secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL is lit by the induced current because the resistance value is adjusted by the secondary control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR, and the secondary control 5V monitor LED 5SL is also adjusted in resistance value by the secondary control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. Lights up due to induced current.

The induced current that has flowed into the first sub-control board 400B this time flows through the harness PS1 into the power supply control board 252B and is supplied from the connector PC3 to the 24V power line. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL is lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR. In addition, the induced current that has flowed into the first sub-control board 400B also passes through the harness PS2, flows into the power supply control board 252B, and is supplied from the connector PC4 to the 5V power line. The power control 5V monitor LED 5PL is also lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of substrates such as the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control substrate 400B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power control substrate 252B emit light.

The induced current that has flowed into the power control board 252B further flows through the harness PM into the main control board 300B, and is supplied from the connector MC5 to the 24V power line and the 5V power line. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL has its resistance adjusted by the power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, so that it is lit by the induced current, and the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL has its resistance adjusted by the power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Lights up due to induced current. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of boards such as the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power control board 252B, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B, and the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B emit light. There will be

The above explanation is for the phenomena that occur when the harnesses SD, PS1, PS2, and PM are normally connected to the connectors and are not disconnected. On the other hand, if the harness SD is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector DC1 and/or the connector SC3, none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. , the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL remain off. As a result, even if the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, if none of the monitor LEDs, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL shown in FIG. A bad connection can be suspected.

Also, if the harness PS1 is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector SC1 and/or the connector PC3, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the secondary control 24V monitor LED24SL and the secondary control 5V monitor LED5SL Although it lights up, the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML do not light up. As a result, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL are lit, but the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML are not lit. , an abnormality in the harness PS1 and a poor connection with the connectors SC1 and PC3 can be suspected. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector SC2 and/or the connector PC4, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL Although it lights up, the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up. As a result, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL are lit, but the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML are not lit. , an abnormality in the harness PS2 or a poor connection with the connectors SC2 and PC4 can be suspected.

Even when the first sub-control board 400B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B can be controlled by manually opening and closing the shutter 163. ) can be lit.

Also, if the harness PM is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector PC2 and/or the connector MC5, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the main control 24V monitor of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. Only LED24ML and main control 5V monitor LED5ML do not light up. As a result, if only the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML out of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. connection failure can be suspected.

FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 9 and the hopper unit 180 and reel unit 700 also shown in FIG. In the following, differences from the connection example described with reference to FIG. 9 will be mainly described, and redundant description may be omitted.

In FIG. 12, the connector MC5 and the connector MC6 provided on the main control board 300B are omitted. A hopper relay board 901B is shown between the main control board 300B and the hopper unit 180 shown in FIG. 12, and a reel relay board 902B is shown between the main control board 300B and the reel unit 700. It is

The hopper relay board 901B is provided with a connector HRM to which the harness MH1 connected to the connector MC1 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector HRH to which the harness MH2 connected to the connector HC1 of the hopper unit 180 is connected.

The reel relay board 902B is provided with a connector RRM1 to which the harness MR11 connected to the connector MC2 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR1 to which the harness MR12 connected to the connector RC1 of the reel unit 700 is connected. Also provided are a connector RRM2 to which the harness MR21 connected to the connector MC3 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR2 to which the harness MR22 connected to the connector RC2 of the reel unit 700 is connected. Further, a connector RRM3 to which the harness MR31 connected to the connector MC4 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR3 to which the harness MR32 connected to the connector RC3 of the reel unit 700 is connected are also provided.

Even in the connection example in FIG. 12, when the reels 110 to 112 are manually rotated in the power failure state, the monitor LEDs such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML light up if normal. However, if the plurality of harnesses MR11, MR12, MR21, MR22, MR21, and MR32 between the main control board 300B and the reel unit 700 are broken or not properly connected, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and Monitor LEDs such as the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up.

Also, even if the hopper disk 182 is manually rotated in the power failure state, the monitor LEDs such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML light up if normal. However, if the plurality of harnesses MH1 and MH2 between the main control board 300B and the hopper unit 180 are disconnected or not connected properly, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, etc. LED does not light up.

In the connection example in FIG. 12, the number of harnesses and the number of connectors are increased compared to the connection example shown in FIG. 9 by providing the hopper relay board 901B and reel relay board 902B. It is more likely that a poor physical connection will occur. However, an induced current can be generated by manual operation in a power-off state, and poor electrical connection can be easily confirmed from the lighting state of the monitor LED.

The hopper relay board 901B and the reel relay board 902B may also be provided with a 24V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line, and a 5V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 5V power line. An induced current is generated by manual operation in the power-off state, and if the monitor LED is normal, these monitor LEDs are also turned on, so that it is possible to confirm the electrical connection failure.

In the description here, the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, the right reel 112, the hopper disk 182 and the shutter 163 are used as the movable bodies, but the movable bodies are not limited to these, and any movable body driven by a motor can be used. good.

FIG. 13(a) is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the slot machine of the second embodiment. The following description will focus on points that differ from the internal configuration described with reference to FIG. 3, and redundant description may be omitted. In addition, the same reference numerals as those used so far may be used for the constituent elements having the same names as those of the constituent elements described so far.

FIG. 13(a) shows a state in which the front door 102 is opened up to 180 degrees with respect to the main body 101. FIG. As a result, both the inner side of the main body 101 and the inner side of the front door 102 face forward (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 13).

A reel unit 700 is attached to the central portion in the vertical direction of the main body 101 shown in FIG. 13(a). A main control board storage case 210 is arranged above the reel unit 700 . The main control board storage case 210 is a transparent or translucent resin case and has translucency. A main control board 300B is housed in the main control board housing case 210 . The main control board 300B shown in FIG. 13A has the same configuration as the main control board 300B shown in FIG. LED5ML is shown. Further, on the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 13A, an LED 3ML for error monitoring and a setting key switch 281 and a setting change button 292, which are operating means, are also mounted. That is, these LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) as light emitting means and the setting key switch 281 and setting change button 292 as operating means are provided on a common board (main control board 300B). Also, the light from these LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) passes through the transparent or translucent main control board storage case 210, and the light emission of the LEDs can be confirmed through the main control board storage case 210. FIG. Further, the main control board storage case 210 is provided with openings and notches so that these operation means (281, 292) can be operated. In addition, on the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 13(a), identification display is provided for each circuit component (substrate component) such as a connector, resistor, capacitor, LED, IC, LSI, CPU, ROM, RAM, and switch. is displayed. Here, it is displayed by silk printing, and as shown in FIG. 13A, "LED1" is displayed under the main control 24V monitor LED24ML, and "LED2" is displayed under the main control 5V monitor LED5ML. "LED3" is displayed under the LED3ML for error monitoring, "setting key SW" is displayed under the setting key switch 281, and "setting change button" is displayed under the setting change button 292. is displayed. These displays are visible through the transparent or translucent main control board housing case 210 . Note that "24V monitor LED" may be displayed instead of "LED1", and "SW1" may be displayed instead of "setting key SW". That is, the name or abbreviation of each component may be displayed, or the identification number or identification symbol may be displayed. At the lower left corner of the main control board storage case 210, a sticker 210S with the control number of the housed board printed thereon is affixed. Although this seal 210S is non-translucent, it may be transparent or translucent. Moreover, the seal may be a sticker with a seal or a handwritten display. Alternatively, it may be a display printed directly on the main control board housing case 210 instead of a sticker.

A power supply device 252 and a hopper unit 180 are arranged below the reel unit 700 . The power supply device 252 includes a power control board 252B having the same configuration as the power control board 252B shown in FIG. The power control board 252B shown in FIG. 13A is housed in a transparent or translucent resin case. 13A shows a power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, a power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, and a power switch 244. FIG. That is, these LEDs (24PL, 5PL) as light emitting means and the power switch 244 as operating means are provided on a common board (power control board 252B). Light from the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) mounted on the power control board 252B also passes through the transparent or translucent case, and the light emission of the LEDs can be confirmed through the case. The case of the power supply device 252 is also provided with openings and notches so that the power switch 244 can be touched. Further, on the power supply control board 252B shown in FIG. 13(a), as with the main control board 300B, an identification display is displayed for each circuit component (board component). Here, they are displayed by silk printing, and as shown in FIG. 13A, "LED7" is displayed under the power control 24V monitor LED24PL, and "LED8" is displayed under the power control 5V monitor LED5PL. “POWER SW” is displayed below the power switch 244 . These indications are visible through a transparent or translucent case. The case of the power supply device 252 may be an opaque metal case. In this case, the LED as the light emitting means and the switch as the operating means are provided on the surface of the metal case so that the light emitting means can be visually recognized and the operating means can be operated. An identification mark is also displayed on the surface of the metal case.

The positions of the main control board 300B, the sub-control board 400B', and the power supply device 252 may be above or below the movable units such as the reel unit 700 and the hopper unit 180. Alternatively, some or all of them may be at the same height position.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 3, the first sub-control board storage case 220 is arranged on the left side plate 260 of the main body 101, but in the slot machine 100 of the second embodiment, the sub-control part storage case 220 ′ is located on the top of the front door 102 . That is, it is arranged behind the production device 160 . The sub-control unit storage case 220' is also a transparent or translucent resin case and has translucency. A sub control board 400B' is housed in the sub control board housing case 220'. The sub-control board 400B' is an effect control board combining the first sub-control board 400B shown in FIG. 9 and the control board of the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG. , or the configuration may include only the control board of the second sub-controller 500 . FIG. 13(a) shows the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL. Further, the sub-control board 400B′ shown in FIG. 13A also includes a second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL for monitoring the voltage of the control board of the second sub-control section 500 and a first selection switch 190 as operation means. Implemented. That is, these LEDs (24SL', 5SL', 6SL) as light emitting means and the first selection switch 190 as operating means are provided on a common board (sub control board 400B'). Also, the light from these LEDs (24SL', 5SL', 6SL) passes through the transparent or translucent sub-control board storage case 220', and the light emission of the LEDs is confirmed through the sub-control board storage case 220'. be able to. The sub-control board storage case 220' is also provided with openings and notches so that the first selection switch 190 can be operated. Further, on the sub-control board 400B' shown in FIG. 13(a), as with the main control board 300B, an identification display is displayed for each circuit component (board component). Here, it is displayed by silk printing, and as shown in FIG. 13A, "LED4" is displayed under the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, and "LED5" is displayed under the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL. "LED6" is displayed under the second sub-control voltage monitoring LED6SL, and "selection SW" is displayed under the first selection switch 190. FIG. At the lower right corner of the sub-control board 400B', a display 4001 of "board control number 0002" printed in two stages on the resist layer of the board is displayed. The identification display for each circuit component and the display 4001 of "board control number 0002" are visible through the transparent or translucent sub control board storage case 220'.

FIG. 13(b) is a side view schematically showing the visual field range of a person H1 in a standing posture, and FIG. 13(c) is a side view schematically showing the visual field range of a person H2 in a sitting posture. be.

The slot machine 100 of the second embodiment shown in these side views is in a state where the front door 102 is opened 90 degrees with respect to the main body 101, and the side of the main body 100 is shown with the front door opened 90 degrees. 102 shows the front. Persons H1 and H2 shown in these side views are factory inspectors and amusement store personnel who need to manually operate the hopper disk 182 of the hopper unit 180 and the reels 110-112 of the reel unit 700. clerk, and is located directly in front of the main body 101 .

As shown in FIG. 13(b), the visual range V1 of a person H1 standing directly in front of the main body 101 with the front door 102 opened 90 degrees extends from the reel unit 700 to the main control board storage case 210 located above it. The reels 110 to 112 that are operated by hand and the respective LEDs such as the error monitoring LED 3ML mounted on the main control board 300B that emits light as a result can be visually recognized at the same time, or the line of sight is moved slightly upward. visible only.

As shown in FIG. 13(c), the visual field range V2 of a person H2 sitting directly in front of the main body 101 with the front door 102 opened 90 degrees extends from the reel unit 700 to the power supply 252 located therebelow. Then, the reels 110 to 112 operated by hand and the LEDs such as the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL provided in the power supply 252 that emits light as a result can be visually recognized at the same time, or can be visually recognized by simply moving the line of sight slightly up and down. is. Also, the power supply 252 and its adjacent hopper unit 180 (see FIG. 13(a)) are also within the field of view V2, and the manually actuated hopper disc 182 (see FIG. 11) and the resulting illuminating power supply Each LED such as the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL provided in the device 252 can be visually recognized at the same time, or can be visually recognized only by slightly moving the line of sight left and right.

13(b) and 13(c) schematically show the main control board 300B in an easy-to-understand manner. However, actually, as shown in FIG. be. That is, the movable body unit protrudes from the light emitting means toward the person who operates the movable body by hand. Therefore, it is difficult to see the main control board 300B from below the main control board 300B because the reel unit 700 becomes an obstacle.

FIG. 14 is a plan view showing the inside of the slot machine of the second embodiment. That is, FIG. 14 is a view of the slot machine of the second embodiment viewed from above, with the lower part of the figure being the front side and the upper part being the rear side.

FIG. 14(a) shows a state in which the front door 102 is completely closed, and FIG. A state in which the door 102 is opened 90 degrees is shown.

Main body 101 in FIG. 14(a) shows main control board storage case 210 in which main control board 300B is stored, and reel unit 700. Main control board 300B is housed in main control board storage case 210; Three LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) and a setting key switch 281 are shown on the main control board 300B. A sticker 210S affixed to the front surface of the main control board storage case 210 is also shown.

The front door 102 in FIG. 14(a) shows a sub control board storage case 220' in which the sub control board 400B' is stored. Three LEDs (24SL', 5SL', 6SL) and a first selection switch 190 are shown on the sub-control board 400B'.

In the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 completely closed, none of the light emitting means (main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, etc.) that emits light by manually operating the movable bodies such as the reels 110 to 112 and the hopper disc 182 is installed in the slot machine. It is not visible from the exterior of 100.

In the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened 90 degrees as shown in FIG. 14(b), the range where the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML due to the back electromotive force reaches is schematically shown in gray. It should be noted that the way in which the reachable range of light is indicated here is a way of indicating that emphasizes the directivity of the LED, and in fact, the closer to the LED, the more the surroundings of this range are illuminated. The light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML due to the back electromotive force reaches a part of the front door 102 opened 90 degrees. That is, the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML reaches the first selection switch 190 mounted on the sub-control board 400B', making it possible to operate the first selection switch 190 even in a dark place. In addition, light reaches other circuit components mounted on the sub-control board 400B' (the second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL in FIG. 14(b)), and the circuit components can be visually recognized even in a dark place. . Furthermore, the identification display displayed for each circuit component can also be visually recognized. In addition, the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML also reaches the display 4001 of "board control number 0002" printed on the sub control board 400B', so that the board control number can be confirmed even in a dark place. In addition, although the seal 210S described with reference to FIG. 132(a) is non-translucent, in a dark place, the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML illuminates the surroundings of the seal 210S. You will be able to see what is displayed in In addition, if the seal 210S is translucent, it is easier to confirm. In addition, the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML also reaches a part of the sub-control board storage case 220', and when a sticker is attached to that part, the contents displayed on the sticker can also be checked.

Although FIG. 14(b) schematically shows only the range where the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML due to the back electromotive force reaches, the light due to the back electromotive force also reaches from other LEDs, and the sub control board Most of the storage case 220' and most of the sub-control board 400B' are visible even in a dark place.

As described above, when the front door 102 is opened 90 degrees, the light generated by the back electromotive force from the LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) mounted on the main control board 300B is emitted from the LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML), which is a board different from the board on which the 3ML) is mounted, and the sub-control board storage case 220' that houses the sub-control board 400B'. The opening angle of the front door 102 is not limited to 90 degrees, and may be 80 degrees or 100 degrees. However, the closer to 180 degrees, the more difficult it is for the light to reach. Conversely, the light generated by the back electromotive force from the LEDs (24SL', 5SL', 6SL) mounted on the sub control board 400B' reaches the main control board housing case 210 and the main control board 300B.

In most of the sub-control board storage case 220' and most of the sub-control board 400B', light generated by the back electromotive force is also emitted from the LEDs (24SL', 5SL', 6SL) mounted on the sub-control board 400B'. reaches and becomes visible even in the dark. Furthermore, most of the main control board housing case 210 and most of the main control board 300B receive light from the LEDs (24ML, 5ML, 3ML) mounted on the main control board 300B due to the back electromotive force, making it dark. Visible anywhere.

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a modification of the connection example between each board and each unit shown in FIG. In the following, differences from the connection example shown in FIG. 9 will be mainly described, and redundant description may be omitted. Further, the same reference numerals as those used so far are used for the constituent elements having the same names as those of the constituent elements described so far.

In the modification of the connection example shown in FIG. 15, a protection circuit is provided to protect circuit components from a surge current flowing in the opposite direction. The main control board 300B is provided with protection circuits PT1 and PT2 for protecting the reel motor drive IC 322i as an example of a protection circuit for protecting various ICs. The protection circuit PT1 is arranged between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 24V power line, and the protection circuit PT2 is arranged between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 5V power line. Also, the main control 24V capacitor 24MC shown in FIG. 9 is changed to a large-capacity one to form a protection circuit PT3.

The first sub-control board 400B is also provided with protection circuits PT4 and PT5 for protecting the movable body motor drive IC 424i as an example of a protection circuit for protecting various ICs. The protection circuit PT4 is arranged between the movable body motor drive IC 424i and the 24V power supply line, and the protection circuit PT5 is arranged between the movable body motor drive IC 424i and the 5V power supply line. Also, the sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC shown in FIG. 9 is changed to a large-capacity one to form a protection circuit PT6.

In the power control board 252B, a protection circuit PT7 is arranged between the connector PC2 and the 24V power line, and a protection circuit PT8 is arranged between the connector PC2 and the 5V power line. Further, the power control 24V capacitor 24PC shown in FIG. 9 is changed to a large capacity to form a protection circuit PT9, and the power control 5V capacitor 5PC is also changed to a large capacity to form a protection circuit PT10.

The protection circuits PT3, PT6, PT9, and PT10 with large-capacity capacitors can absorb the charge amount of the surge power, and can prevent circuit breakage due to the surge current. These protection circuits PT3, PT6, PT9, and PT10 absorb the charge amount of the back electromotive force, and the current due to the back electromotive force does not flow. As a result, even if the hopper disk 182 and the reels 110 to 112 are manually operated, none of the LEDs emit light when these protection circuits PT3, PT6, PT9 and PT10 are functioning. On the other hand, if a part of these protection circuits PT3, PT6, PT9, PT10 is damaged, the damaged protection circuit cannot absorb the back electromotive force, and current due to the back electromotive force flows. , a luminous LED comes out. Therefore, it may be possible to identify the protection circuits PT3, PT6, PT9, PT10 suspected of being broken depending on which LED emits light when the disc 182 or the reels 110 to 112 are manually operated.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a specific example of a protection circuit provided between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 24V power supply line.

In the specific example shown in FIG. 16(a), the protection circuit PT11 is a diode connected in series between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 24V power supply line. A protection circuit PT12 shown in FIG. 16A is a diode connected in series between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 5V power line.

In the specific example shown in FIG. 16(b), the protection circuit PT21 is connected in parallel with another element (a resistor in this figure, but may be a coil or the like) between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 24V power supply line. with diodes connected. The protection circuit PT22 shown in FIG. 16(b) is connected in parallel with another element (resistor in this figure, but may be a coil or the like) between the reel motor drive IC 322i and the 5V power supply line. diode.

By using a diode in the protection circuit, the reverse surge current can be prevented from flowing due to the rectifying action of the diode.

The current due to the back electromotive force generated by manually operating the movable body such as the reel 110 also stops flowing due to the rectifying action of the diodes employed in the protection circuits PT11, PT12, PT21, PT22, and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and main control The 5V monitor LED5ML does not emit light. On the other hand, if the diodes of the protection circuits PT11, PT12, PT21, and PT22 are damaged or disconnected, the current will not flow in either direction due to the insulated state, and the current due to the back electromotive force will not flow either. Even if the movable body such as 110 is operated by hand, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not emit light, but if the diodes of the protection circuits PT21 and PT22 are damaged, they become insulated. A current flows through other elements connected in parallel, and a current due to back electromotive force also flows. be. Therefore, unless the protection circuit PT3 with a large capacity capacitor is used (in the main control board 300B shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B, the same main control 24V capacitor 24MC shown in FIG. 9) control 24V capacitor 24MC is used), and when the movable body such as the reel 110 is operated by hand and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML emit light, the protection circuits PT11, PT12, PT21, PT22 It is suspected that the diodes of the protection circuits PT11 and PT12 are damaged or disconnected, and that an unauthorized person has installed an unauthorized circuit that bypasses the diodes of the protection circuits PT11 and PT12.

The above description is the same for the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34, and the movable body includes a sprocket rotated by the payout motor in the payout device 152P shown in FIG. The payout motor rotates and stops under the control of the payout control board 170P (see FIG. 34), and when the sprocket is manually rotated in a de-energized state, an induced current is generated in the payout motor. The LED provided on the payout control board 170P and the LED provided on the main control board 156P (see FIG. 34) connected to the payout control board 170P with a harness are turned on by this induced current if normal. do. Also, as in the above description, the induced current flowing into the main control board 156P passes through the power supply control board 182P (see FIG. 34) and flows to the first sub-control board 160P (see FIG. 34). If there is, LEDs provided on the substrates 182P and 160P are turned on. Furthermore, as the movable body, two movable parts are driven by two motors whose rotation is controlled by the first sub-controller, and the effect movable body (for example, Kroon) that is driven by the motor whose rotation is controlled by the main controller. It may be a production movable body or the like.

Furthermore, in place of the LED lamp which is lit by an induced current in the power failure state, a light emitting means such as a 7-segment (SEG) display may be used. For example, it may be a 7-segment display that displays setting values (for example, setting 1 to setting 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A requirement for the light emitting means is that it be visible.

In the above description, the adjustment resistors (24MR, 5MR, 24PR, 5PR, 24SR, 5SR) are used to cause the monitor LED to emit light by the induced current in the power-off state. That is fine, and it is not limited to the adjustment resistor. However, if a large amount of induced current flows even when the power is on, it will cause problems. need to be adjusted. That is, the light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, Sub-control 24V monitor LEDs 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML, second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED , 7-segment display, set value display 293, etc.], a motor [eg, motor 180 m, 110 m to 112 m, motor 163 m, payout motor, etc.] and a movable body operable by driving the motor [eg, hopper disk 182 , left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, crew, etc.] , a detachable harness [for example, harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, and harness SD] relaying the board and the movable body unit, wherein the motor and the light emitting means connect the harness. The substrate is provided with impedance adjusting means [for example, adjusting resistors (24MR, 5MR, 24PR, 5PR, 24SR, 5SR)] between the light emitting means and the ground. The impedance adjusting means adjusts the impedance so that the light emitting means emits light by the induced current generated by the back electromotive force by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state. On the other hand, the impedance is adjusted so as to regulate the flow of the induced current in the energized state, and the light emitting means is generated by the motor by manually operating the movable body in the energized state to drive the motor. It may emit light when a current [for example, an induced current] due to counter electromotive force flows.

According to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
A game machine comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harnesses PM, harnesses PS1 and PS2, and harnesses SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by the back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this amusement machine, the movable body can be operated manually to check whether the harness is properly connected. , the light emitting means is easily visible.

again,
"A certain board [for example, a hopper relay board 901B] is provided,
The harness includes a motor-side harness [eg, harness MH2 or harnesses MR12, MR22, MR32] and a light-emitting means-side harness [eg, harness MH1 or harnesses MR11, MR21, MR31],
The certain board is electrically connected to the motor [for example, motor 180m or motors 110m, 111m, 112m] via the motor-side harness,
The certain substrate is electrically connected to the light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] via the light emitting means side harness.
It is characterized by 』
was also explained.

As the number of boards increases, the number of harnesses increases and the possibility of electrical connection failure increases. There is no problem even if the above possibility becomes high.

Also, according to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL, secondary control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED,
LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, setting value display, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
A game table comprising
The movable body unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, connected via a harness],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

That is, the light emitting means may emit light even when the power is off.

After the movable unit that has been removed from the game table for cleaning or maintenance is installed, whether or not the movable unit and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally is determined by the presence or absence of light emission from the light emitting means. can be checked even when the power is off. Further, by manually operating the movable body and causing the light emitting means to emit light, the game machine can be visually confirmed without the light projecting means. Also, when the movable unit is attached to the game machine at the factory, it is possible to confirm whether the movable unit and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally even if the game machine is in a power-off state. can. As described above, there is a special effect that it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the movable unit is electrically connected normally.

The power failure state may be a state in which the power switch of the game machine is turned off, or a state in which the power switch is turned on but the power cord is not connected to the outlet. Alternatively, it may be in a state where power is not supplied from the island facility.

Further, the movable body unit may be a rotating display unit [eg reel unit 700], a prize medium payout unit [eg hopper unit 180], or an effect operation unit [eg effect movable body unit 160U] (same hereafter).

again,
"The light-emitting means is provided on a board [for example, main control boards 300B, 156P, first sub-control boards 400B, 160P, power supply control boards 252B, 182P, relay boards (901B, 902B), payout control board 170P, etc.] and
A game machine comprising detachable harnesses (for example, various harnesses shown in FIG. 9 and various harnesses shown in FIG. 11) that relay the substrate and the movable unit. 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, after the movable unit that has been removed from the amusement machine for cleaning or maintenance is attached, the amusement machine electrically checks whether the harness is properly connected or whether the harness is disconnected. It can be checked even if it is disconnected.

The board may be a board having a main control section [for example, main control boards 300B and 156P], or a board having a sub-control section [for example, first sub-control boards 400B and 160P and second sub-control boards. control board 164P], a board having a payout control unit [for example, payout control board 170P], or a board having a power supply control unit [for example, power supply control boards 252B, 182P]. Alternatively, it may be a relay board [for example, a hopper relay board 901B, a reel relay board 902B].

Further, the board and the movable unit may be relayed by a plurality of harnesses [for example, a plurality of harnesses MR1 to MR3 in parallel, a plurality of harnesses MR11 and MR12 in series].

again,
``The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light in an energized state [e.g., constant light emission or periodic light emission, and light emission when conditions are met].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this game machine, the light emitting means can be used for different purposes depending on whether the power is turned on or off. That is, it can be used for its original purpose (for example, current monitor, voltage monitor, error monitor, and signal monitor) in the energized state, and can be used to confirm the electrical connection in the energized state.

again,
"The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, in the energized state, the light emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the operation of the movable body.

again,
"The light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [e.g., an induced current] generated by back electromotive force by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is easy to confirm whether or not the movable unit is electrically connected normally only by allowing the current to flow through the light emitting means.

According to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
A game table comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harnesses PM, harnesses PS1 and PS2, and harnesses SD],
When the light emitting means emits light when the motor is driven by manually operating the movable body in a power failure state, and a current [for example, an induced current] generated by a counter electromotive force generated by the motor flows in (hereinafter referred to as " In the first case, light emission continues even after the motor stops driving [for example, light emission is caused by the charges stored in the capacitors 24MC, 24SC, 24PC, and 5PC. If continuing],
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this amusement machine, the movable body can be operated manually to check whether the harness is properly connected. , the light emitting means is easily visible. In addition, the light emitting means may continue to emit light even when the current due to the back electromotive force does not flow in. Therefore, the light emitting means may continue to emit light while the movable body is being preoccupied with manual operation. Even if there is no time to confirm the light emission of the means, the light emission of the light emission means can be confirmed after the operation.

again,
"A certain board [for example, a hopper relay board 901B] is provided,
The harness includes a motor-side harness [eg, harness MH2 or harnesses MR12, MR22, MR32] and a light-emitting means-side harness [eg, harness MH1 or harnesses MR11, MR21, MR31],
The certain board is electrically connected to the motor [for example, motor 180m or motors 110m, 111m, 112m] via the motor-side harness,
The certain substrate is electrically connected to the light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] via the light emitting means side harness.
It is characterized by 』
also explained.

As the number of boards increases, the number of harnesses increases and the possibility of electrical connection failure increases. There is no problem even if the above possibility becomes high.

Also, according to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
A game table comprising
The movable body unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, connected via a harness],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state (hereinafter referred to as "first case"). There is a case where the light emission continues even after the motor stops driving [for example, the light emission continues due to the electric charge stored in the capacitor].
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this game machine, in addition to the above-mentioned special effects, the light emission of the light emitting means can be confirmed even if the movable body is stopped from being operated manually, and the light emission of the light emitting means can be easily confirmed. .

again,
"Capacitors capable of accumulating charges generated by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state [for example, main control 24V capacitor 24MC, power control 24V capacitor 24PC, power control 5V capacitor 5PC, A game machine characterized by comprising a sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC]. 』
was also explained.

A common electronic component called a capacitor can be used to make it easier to check the light emission of the light emitting means.

again,
"The light-emitting means is provided on a board [for example, main control boards 300B, 156P, first sub-control boards 400B, 160P, power supply control boards 252B, 182P, relay boards (901B, 902B), payout control board 170P, etc.] and
A game machine comprising a detachable harness (for example, various harnesses shown in FIG. 9 and various harnesses shown in FIG. 11) that relays the board and the movable unit. 』
also explained.

again,
``The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light in an energized state [e.g., constant light emission or periodic light emission, and light emission when conditions are met].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [e.g., an induced current] generated by back electromotive force by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
A game machine comprising a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m], ,
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor [for example, motor 110m] is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The third motor [for example, motor 112m] is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3],
The light emitting means manually operates the first movable body in a power failure state to drive the first motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows. It may emit light by
The light emitting means manually operates the third movable body in the de-energized state to drive the third motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor flows. It may also emit light by doing
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this amusement machine, by manually operating the first movable body, it is possible to confirm whether or not the first harness is properly connected, and manually operate the third movable body. When operated, it is possible to confirm whether the connection of the third harness is normally performed, and it is possible to independently confirm the connection of each of the two types of harnesses. Furthermore, since the light emitting means is provided on the stationary side (the non-moving side), the light emitting means can be easily visually recognized.

According to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display, etc.],
A game machine comprising a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m], ,
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor [for example, motor 110m] is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness [for example, one common harness in which three harnesses MR1 to MR3 are assembled]. ,
The third motor [for example, motor 112m] is electrically connected to the light emitting means via the harness,
The light emitting means manually operates the first movable body in a power failure state to drive the first motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows. It may emit light by
The light emitting means manually operates the third movable body in the de-energized state to drive the third motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor flows. It may also emit light by doing
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is possible to confirm whether the harness is properly connected whether the first movable body is operated manually or the third movable body is operated manually. Further, the connection of one common harness can be confirmed by operating the movable body, which is easier to manually operate, out of the first movable body and the third movable body. Furthermore, since the light emitting means is provided on the stationary side (the non-moving side), the light emitting means can be easily visually recognized.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, set value display, etc.],
A game machine comprising a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m], ,
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The movable unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, connected via harnesses MR1 to MR3],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body to drive the first motor in a de-energized state,
The light-emitting means may also emit light by manually operating the third movable body to drive the third motor in a power-off state.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
also explained.

After installing the movable unit that had been removed from the game table for cleaning or maintenance, whether or not each movable body and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally is determined by the presence or absence of light emission from the common light emitting means. It can be checked even when the power is off. Further, by manually operating each movable body and causing the light emitting means to emit light, the game machine can be visually confirmed without the light projecting means. Also, when the movable body unit is attached to the game machine at the factory, it is possible to confirm whether or not each movable body and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally even if the game machine is in a power-off state. . As described above, there is a special effect that it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the movable unit is electrically connected normally.

The movable body unit may have a fourth movable body [eg, the middle reel 111] that can be operated by driving a fourth motor [eg, the motor 111m].

again,
"The light-emitting means is provided on a board [for example, main control boards 300B, 156P, first sub-control boards 400B, 160P, power supply control boards 252B, 182P, relay boards (901B, 902B), payout control board 170P, etc.] and
A detachable harness [for example, harness MR1 and harnesses MR1 to MR3 or harness MR11 and harness MR12 or harness MR11 to MR31 and harness MR12 to 32] for relaying the substrate and the first motor is provided. playground. 』
was also explained.

According to this amusement machine, after the movable unit that has been removed from the amusement machine for cleaning or maintenance is attached, the first harness is normally connected or the second harness is also normally connected. Whether the first harness is broken or the second harness is also broken can be confirmed even when the power supply to the game machine is cut off.

A detachable first harness [for example, harness MR1, harness MR11 and harness MR12] that relays the board and the first motor, and a detachable third harness that relays the board and the third motor. harness [for example, harness MR3, harness MR31 and harness MR32].

again,
``The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light in an energized state [e.g., always emitting light or periodically emitting light, and emitting light when conditions are met].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the first movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.],
The light emitting means can emit light even when the third movable body is stopped in an energized state.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, in the energized state, the light emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the operation of the first movable body and the third movable body.

again,
"In a power failure state, the first movable body is manually operated to drive the first motor, so that the light emitting means emits light due to the current [eg, induced current] generated by the back electromotive force. is,
The light emitting means is configured to emit light also by the current [eg, induced current] generated by counter electromotive force by manually operating the third movable body to drive the third motor in a power failure state. has been
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display, etc.],
a first movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
a second movable body unit [e.g. hopper unit 180] having a second movable body [e.g. hopper disk 182] operable by driving a second motor [e.g. motor 180m];
A game machine comprising
The first motor [for example, motor 110m] is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The second motor [e.g., motor 180m] is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a second harness [e.g., harness MH],
The light emitting means manually operates the first movable body in a power failure state to drive the first motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor flows. It may emit light by
The light-emitting means manually operates the second movable body in the de-energized state to drive the second motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the second motor flows. It may also emit light by doing
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the second motor is driven.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this amusement machine, by manually operating the movable body (the first movable body) of the first movable body unit, it is possible to confirm whether the first harness is properly connected. By operating the movable body (the second movable body) of the second movable body unit, it is possible to confirm whether or not the connection of the second harness is normally performed. By operating the movable bodies of the two types of movable body units, the connection of each of the two types of harnesses can be confirmed separately. Furthermore, since the light emitting means is provided on the stationary side (the non-moving side), the light emitting means can be easily visually recognized.

again,
"A certain board [for example, a hopper relay board 901B] is provided,
The first harness includes a first motor-side harness [eg, harness MR12] and a first light-emitting means-side harness [eg, harness MR11],
The certain board is electrically connected to the first motor [e.g., motor 110m] via the first motor-side harness [e.g., harness MR12],
The certain substrate is electrically connected to the light emitting means [eg, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] via the first light emitting means side harness [eg, harness MR11]. can be,
The second harness includes a second motor-side harness [eg, harness MH2] and a second light-emitting means-side harness [eg, harness MH1],
The certain board is electrically connected to the second motor [e.g., motor 180m] via the second motor-side harness [e.g., harness MH2],
The certain substrate is electrically connected to the light emitting means [eg, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] via the second light emitting means side harness [eg, harness MH1]. be,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

As the number of boards increases, the number of harnesses increases and the possibility of electrical connection failure increases. There is no problem even if the above possibility becomes high.

Also, according to the above description,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, LED for error monitoring, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display, etc.],
a first movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
a second movable body unit [e.g. hopper unit 180] having a second movable body [e.g. hopper disk 182] operable by driving a second motor [e.g. motor 180m];
A game table comprising
The first movable unit is electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, connected via harnesses MR1 to MR3],
The second movable body unit is also electrically connected to the light emitting means [for example, connected via a harness MH],
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the first movable body to drive the first motor in a de-energized state,
The light emitting means may also emit light by manually operating the second movable body to drive the second motor in a power-off state.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this amusement machine, after each movable unit that has been removed from the amusement machine for cleaning or maintenance is installed, a common light emission is used to determine whether or not each movable unit and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally. Even if the game machine is in a power-off state, it can be confirmed by the presence or absence of light emission of the means. Further, by manually operating each movable body and causing the light emitting means to emit light, the game machine can be visually confirmed without the light projecting means. Also, when each movable unit is attached to the game machine at the factory, it is possible to confirm whether or not each movable unit and the light emitting means are electrically connected normally even if the game machine is in a power-off state. can. As described above, there is a special effect that it is easy to confirm whether or not the plurality of movable units are electrically connected normally.

again,
"The light-emitting means is provided on a board [for example, main control boards 300B, 156P, first sub-control boards 400B, 160P, power supply control boards 252B, 182P, relay boards (901B, 902B), payout control board 170P, etc.] and
a detachable first harness [for example, harness MR1] that relays the board and the first motor;
a detachable second harness [for example, harness MH] that relays the board and the second motor;
A game machine comprising: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, after each movable body unit that has been removed from the amusement machine for cleaning or maintenance is attached, the first harness is normally connected or the second harness is also normally connected. Whether the first harness is broken or the second harness is also broken can be confirmed even when the power supply to the game machine is cut off.

again,
``The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light in an energized state [e.g., always emitting light or periodically emitting light, and emitting light when conditions are met].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the first movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.],
The light emitting means can emit light even when the second movable body is stopped in an energized state.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, in the energized state, the light emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the operation of the first movable body and the operation of the second movable body.

again,
"In a power failure state, the first movable body is manually operated to drive the first motor, and the current [eg, induced current] generated by counter-electromotive force causes the light-emitting means to emit light. is,
The light emitting means is configured to emit light also by the current [eg, induced current] generated by counter electromotive force by manually operating the second movable body to drive the second motor in a power failure state. has been
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is possible to confirm whether or not the first movable unit is electrically connected normally and to confirm whether the second movable unit is normally connected only by allowing the current to flow through the light emitting means. It becomes easy to confirm whether or not is electrically connected normally.

According to the above description,
"First light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED , LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, setting value display, etc.],
Second light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, A light emitting means different from the first light emitting means among the LED for signal monitoring, the 7-segment display, the set value display, etc.];
Can be operated by driving a motor [eg motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via harnesses [for example, harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harness PM, harnesses PS1 and PS2, and harness SD],
The motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the harness,
The first light emitting means may emit light when the motor is driven by manually operating the movable body in a power failure state, and a current [eg, an induced current] generated by the counter electromotive force flows in. is something,
When the second light-emitting means also emits light by manually operating the movable body in the power-off state to drive the motor, and current [for example, induced current] generated by the counter-electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the second light-emitting means. and
The first light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the motor is driven.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this game machine, by manually operating the common movable body, whether or not the connection of the common harness is normally performed can be confirmed by both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, Even if one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means is damaged or out of order, it can be confirmed by the other light emitting means. Further, since both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are provided on the stationary side (non-moving side), the light emitting means can be easily recognized visually.

again,
"A certain board [for example, a hopper relay board 901B] is provided,
The harness includes a motor-side harness [eg, harness MH2 or harnesses MR12, MR22, MR32] and a light-emitting means-side harness [eg, harness MH1 or harnesses MR11, MR21, MR31],
The substrate is electrically connected to the motor [for example, motor 180m or motors 110m, 111m, 112m] via the motor-side harness [for example, harness MH2 or harnesses MR12, MR22, MR32]. can be,
The certain substrate is electrically connected to the first light emitting means [eg, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] via the light emitting means side harness [eg, harness MH1 or harnesses MR11, MR21, MR31]. and
The certain substrate is electrically connected to the second light emitting means [eg, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] via the light emitting means side harness [eg, harness MH1 or harnesses MR11, MR21, MR31]. is
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

As the number of boards increases, the number of harnesses increases and the possibility of electrical connection failure increases. There is no problem even if the above possibility becomes high.

Also, according to the above description,
"First light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED , LED for signal monitoring, 7-segment display, setting value display, etc.],
Second light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED, A light emitting means different from the first light emitting means among signal monitoring LEDs, 7-segment indicators, set value indicators, etc.];
Can be operated by driving a motor [eg motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.],
A game machine comprising
The movable unit is electrically connected to the first light emitting means [for example, connected via a harness],
The movable body unit is also electrically connected to the second light emitting means [for example, connected via a harness],
The first light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state,
The second light emitting means may also emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power-off state.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the first light emitting means may emit light even when power is cut off, and the second light emitting means may also emit light even when power is cut off.

After installing the movable unit that has been removed from the game table for cleaning or maintenance, whether or not the movable unit and the plurality of light emitting means are electrically connected normally is determined by the presence or absence of light emission from the plurality of light emitting means. It can be confirmed even when the game machine is in a power failure state. Further, by manually operating the movable body and causing the plurality of light emitting means to emit light, it becomes easier to visually confirm the game table even without the light projecting means. Also, when the movable unit is attached to the game table at the factory, it is confirmed whether the movable unit and the plurality of light emitting means are electrically connected normally even if the game table is in a power failure state. can be done. As described above, there is a special effect that it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the movable unit is electrically connected normally.

The first light emitting means is connected to a power line of a first voltage [for example, 24 V], and the second light emitting means is connected to a power line of a second voltage [for example, 5 V]. may be connected to The first light emitting means is provided on a first board [eg, main control board 300B], and the second light emitting means is provided on a second board [eg, power supply control board 252B]. may be provided in Alternatively, the first light emitting means may be an LED lamp and the second light emitting means may be a 7-segment display.

again,
"The first light-emitting means is provided on a board [for example, the main control boards 300B and 156P, the first sub-control boards 400B and 160P, the power supply control boards 252B and 182P],
The second light emitting means is also provided on the substrate,
A game machine comprising a detachable harness [for example, a harness for supplying power of both 24V and 5V] that relays the board and the movable body unit. 』
was also explained.

That is, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are provided on a common substrate.

According to this amusement machine, it becomes easy to visually check the periphery of the substrate when the plurality of light emitting means emit light without the light projecting means.

again,
"The first light emitting means [eg, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] is provided on the first board [eg, main control board 300B],
The second light emitting means [for example, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL] is provided on a second board [for example, power control board 252B],
The second substrate is a substrate different from the first substrate,
a detachable harness [for example, harness MH, MR1 to MR3] that relays the first substrate and the movable body unit;
a detachable harness [for example, a harness PM] that relays the first substrate and the second substrate;
A game machine comprising: 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the movable body unit and the first substrate and the first substrate and the second substrate are electrically connected normally.

again,
``The first light-emitting means is capable of emitting light when it is energized [for example, always emitting light or periodically emitting light, and emitting light when conditions are met],
The second light emitting means is also capable of emitting light in an energized state [e.g., constant light emission or periodic light emission, light emission when conditions are met].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this game machine, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be used for different purposes depending on whether the power is turned on or off. That is, it can be used for its original purpose (for example, current monitor, voltage monitor, error monitor, and signal monitor) in the energized state, and can be used to confirm the electrical connection in the energized state.

again,
``The first light emitting means is capable of emitting light even when the movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.],
The second light emitting means is also capable of emitting light even when the movable body is stopped in an energized state [for example, a current monitor LED, a voltage monitor LED, an error monitor LED, etc.]. Playground to play. 』
also explained.

According to this game machine, in the energized state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be used for purposes unrelated to the operation of the movable body.

again,
"The first light emitting means is configured to emit light by a current [e.g., induced current] generated by back electromotive force by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state,
The second light emitting means is also configured to emit light by a current [e.g., induced current] generated by back electromotive force by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is confirmed whether or not the movable unit is electrically connected normally only by causing the current to flow through the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means respectively. becomes easier to do.

again,
"First light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] provided on the first board [for example, main control board 300B],
a second light-emitting means [e.g., power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL] provided on a second board [e.g., power control board 252B];
A motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] and a movable body operable by driving the motor [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163 , sprockets, crews, etc.], and
A game machine comprising
a detachable first harness [for example, harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3] that relays the movable body unit and the first substrate;
a detachable second harness [for example, harness PM] that relays the first substrate and the second substrate;
with
wherein the motor and the first light emitting means are electrically connected via the one harness;
wherein the motor and the second light emitting means are electrically connected via the first harness, the first substrate and the second harness;
The first light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state,
The second light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power-off state.
A playground characterized by: ”
also explained.

again,
"First light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] provided on the first board [for example, main control board 300B],
a movable body unit [eg, hopper unit 180, reel unit 700] having a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m];
A game machine comprising
a relay board [for example, a hopper relay board 901B];
a detachable first harness [e.g., harness MH2, harness MR12, MR22, MR33] that relays the movable body unit [e.g., hopper unit 180] and the relay board;
a detachable second harness [for example, harness MH1, harness MR11, MR21, MR31] that relays the relay board and the first board;
with
The motor and the light emitting means are electrically connected via the first harness, the relay board and the second harness,
The light emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power failure state.
A playground characterized by: ”
also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, A movable body unit having a crew, etc.],
a door [e.g., front door 102];
A game table comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harnesses PM, harnesses PS1 and PS2, and harnesses SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
When the door is closed, the light emitting means is invisible [for example, FIG. 14(a)],
When the door is opened, the light emitting means and the movable body can be visually recognized [for example, FIG. 14(b) and FIG. 14(c)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
operation means [for example, setting key switch 281, setting change button 292, reset switch 291, first selection switch 190, power switch 244];
A game machine comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harnesses PM, harnesses PS1 and PS2, and harnesses SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
the light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven;
The light emitting means and the operating means are provided on a common board [for example, the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 13, the sub control board 400B shown in FIG. 13, and the power supply control board 252B of the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. is
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
also explained.

The operating means may be provided at a position where the light from the light emitting means reaches. In other words, the operating means may be illuminated by the light from the light emitting means, or may be provided within the irradiation range of the light emitting means. Further, the operation means may be operable by relying on the light emitted from the light emitting means, or may be visible even in a dark place by emitting light from the light emitting means. good.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
A game table comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harnesses PM, harnesses PS1 and PS2, and harnesses SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The light-emitting means is invisible from the appearance of the gaming machine [for example, FIG. 14(a)],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this game machine, since the illegitimate person cannot visually recognize the light emitting means, it is possible to confirm by the light emitting means that the power from the power source is not normally supplied and attempt to attach the illegitimate device to the game machine. It is possible to prevent the act of

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
A game table comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harnesses PM, harnesses PS1 and PS2, and harnesses SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
the light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven;
The light emitting means is provided above the movable body unit [for example, LEDs 24ML, 5ML, and 3ML provided on the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 13(b)],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The movable unit may be a reel unit. Further, the movable body unit may project from the light emitting means toward the side of the person who operates the movable body by hand.

The light emitting means may be provided at a position that can be visually recognized by a person who operates the movable body by hand in a standing posture.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
A game table comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harnesses PM, harnesses PS1 and PS2, and harnesses SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
the light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven;
The light emitting means is provided below the movable unit [eg, the reel unit 700] [eg, LEDs 24PL, 5PL provided in the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 13(c)],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The movable unit may be a reel unit.

The light-emitting means may be provided at a position that can be visually recognized by a person who operates the movable body by hand in a sitting posture.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
A main control board [for example, the main control board 300B] that controls the progress of the game;
A game table comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harnesses PM, harnesses PS1 and PS2, and harnesses SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
the light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven;
The light emitting means is provided on the main control board [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, error monitoring LED 3ML],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
A main control board [for example, the main control board 300B] that controls the progress of the game;
A sub-control board that controls game effects [eg, first sub-control board 400B, sub-control board 400B', second sub-control board, effect control board],
A game table comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harnesses PM, harnesses PS1 and PS2, and harnesses SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
the light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven;
The light-emitting means is provided on the sub-control board [eg, sub-control 24V monitor LEDs 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL'],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The sub control board may perform control based on commands transmitted from the main control board (the same shall apply hereinafter).

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
a power supply [e.g., power supply 252];
A game table comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harnesses PM, harnesses PS1 and PS2, and harnesses SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided in the power supply device [for example, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The power supply device may supply power from the outside of the game machine (commercial power supply), or may convert current supplied from the outside of the game machine (commercial power supply) into a predetermined voltage. (same as below).

The power failure state may be a state in which power cannot be received from the outside of the gaming machine (commercial power source) (same below).

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
Certain printed indications [for example, the indication 4001 of "board number 0002" printed on the sub-control board 400B' shown in FIG. ]and,
A game table comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harnesses PM, harnesses PS1 and PS2, and harnesses SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The certain printed display is provided at a position where the light from the light emitting means reaches [for example, the light from the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL', the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL', and the light from Fig. 14 (b) , the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML also reaches],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The position to which the light from the light emitting means reaches may be, in other words, a position illuminated by the light from the light emitting means, or may be a position within the irradiation range of the light emitting means. However, it may be a position where the light emitting means emits light even in a dark place so that it can be visually recognized (the same shall apply hereinafter).

The certain printed display is, for example, a display (for example, display by silk printing) relating to any one of substrate components such as connectors, resistors, capacitors, LEDs, ICs, LSIs, CPUs, ROMs, RAMs, switches, etc. management number (for example, a display printed on the resist layer of the substrate) (hereinafter the same).

It should be noted that a certain display (for example, display by stamping or display by handwriting) may be used instead of a certain print display.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
certain circuit components [for example, various connectors MR1, etc., various resistors 24MR, etc., capacitors 24MC, etc., LEDs 5ML, etc., various ICs 322i, etc., various switches 281, etc., LSI, CPU, ROM, RAM, etc.];
A game machine comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harnesses PM, harnesses PS1 and PS2, and harnesses SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
the light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven;
The certain circuit component is provided at a position where light from the light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] reaches [e.g., first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 14(b)],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
also explained.

The certain circuit components may be, for example, connectors, resistors, capacitors, LEDs, ICs, LSIs, CPUs, ROMs, RAMs, switches, etc. (same below).

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
A board case [for example, the main control board storage case 210, the sub control board storage cases 220 and 220', the case of the power supply device 252],
A game table comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harnesses PM, harnesses PS1 and PS2, and harnesses SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
the light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven;
The certain board case [for example, the sub-control board storage case 220'] receives the light from the light emitting means [for example, the light from the LED provided on the board housed in itself, as well as the light shown in FIG. 14(b). , When the front door 102 is opened 90 degrees with respect to the main body 101, the light from the LED 24ML provided in the main control board 300B housed in the main control board housing case 210 with a positional relationship of 90 degrees] reaches. A game machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by being provided at a position. 』
was also explained.

Management information such as the management number of the board may be displayed on the certain board case. For example, a sticker on which management information or the like is printed, management information is written, or a seal is displayed (for example, "board number 0001" affixed to the main control board storage case 210 shown in FIG. 13 is displayed. 210S) is attached (the same shall apply hereinafter).

The certain substrate case may be the main control substrate storage case 210, the sub control substrate storage case 220, the first sub substrate case 162P, or the second sub substrate. It may be the case 165P, the payout board case 172P, the ejection board case 176P, or the power board case 184P (the same shall apply hereinafter).

The certain substrate case may be a translucent case (e.g., a transparent resin case) or a non-translucent case (e.g., a metal case (case of a power supply device). Good (same hereafter).

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
a power supply [e.g., power supply 252];
A game machine comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harnesses PM, harnesses PS1 and PS2, and harnesses SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The light emitting means [for example, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] is supplied with power from the power supply device without passing through the harness [for example, the harness MH, the harnesses MR1 to MR3] [for example, the harness PM supplied via],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, a power supply device [for example, a power supply device 252] that converts a current supplied from the outside [for example, commercial power] into a predetermined voltage is provided, and the current converted to a predetermined voltage in the power supply device is transferred to the harness [for example, a harness MH and harnesses MR1 to MR3] may be supplied to the light emitting means [for example, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML]. According to this aspect, when the power is off, the motor can be manually driven to check whether the harness is connected or not by checking the presence or absence of light emission from the light emitting means. It is possible to check whether or not the power is normally supplied separately from whether or not the harness is connected.

In addition, the movable unit [eg, hopper unit 180, reel unit 700] can be removed from the gaming machine with the connector of the harness [eg, harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3] unplugged. good too. When inspecting or cleaning the movable unit, the harness connector is unplugged before it is removed. Therefore, it is easy for the harness to be connected incorrectly or forgotten to be connected. It is possible to easily check whether or not connection has been forgotten.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
a power supply [e.g., power supply 252];
A game machine comprising
The motors [for example, motors 180m, 110m to 112m] are connected via the light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] and first harnesses [for example, harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3]. is electrically connected to the
The light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] is electrically connected to the power supply device via a second harness [e.g., harness PM],
The light emitting means [eg, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] emits light even if a connection failure occurs in the second harness [eg, harness PM], the movable body [eg, hopper disk 182, left The reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112] may be manually operated to drive the motor, and a current [for example, an induced current] generated by the counter electromotive force generated by the motor may flow in, thereby emitting light. ,
The light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
A game machine comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via harnesses [for example, harnesses MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3, harnesses PM, harnesses PS1 and PS2, and harnesses SD],
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) generated by the back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means. can be,
the light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven;
The game machine is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1],
The movable body unit is a reel unit [e.g., reel unit 700],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the movable body is a reel.

According to previous descriptions,
"First light emitting means [for example, an LED (main control 24V monitor LED 24ML) provided on a board];
Second light emitting means [for example, different LEDs (main control 5V monitor LED 5ML) provided on a certain board or LEDs provided on a board different from a certain board (secondary control 24V monitor LEDs 24SL, 24SL', secondary control 5V monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL)],
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
A game table comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a harness [eg, harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3],
the motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the harness,
When the first light emitting means emits light when the motor is driven by manually operating the movable body in a power-off state, and a current [for example, an induced current] generated by the counter electromotive force flows in ( hereinafter referred to as "the first case"),
When the second light-emitting means also emits light when the motor is driven by manually operating the movable body in the power-off state, and a current [for example, an induced current] generated by the counter-electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the second light-emitting means. (hereinafter referred to as "second case"),
The first light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the motor is driven,
Even if the driving of the motor is stopped in the first case and the second case, at least one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means continues to emit light [for example, a capacitor 24MC, 24SC, 24PC, and 5PC continue to emit light due to the charge accumulated]
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The harness may be, for example, the harness MR1. In this case, the motor 110m is electrically connected to the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML or the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML via the harness MR1. Also, the motor 110m is electrically connected to the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL or the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL at least via a harness MR1. That is, the motor 110m is electrically connected to the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL via the harness MR1, the harness PM and the harness PS1, and the motor 110m is connected to the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, the harness MR1 and the harness PM. and a harness PS2. Therefore, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be provided on the same substrate or may be provided on different substrates.

According to previous descriptions,
"First light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, error monitoring LED 3ML],
Second light emitting means [for example, sub-control 24V monitor LEDs 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL', second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED];
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
A game table comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a harness [eg, harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3],
the motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the harness,
The first light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current flows due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor.
The second light-emitting means may also emit light when the motor is driven by manually operating the movable body in the power-off state, and a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows in,
The first light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the motor is driven,
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are provided on different substrates [for example, different substrates such as the main control board 300B, the first sub control board 400B, and the sub control board 400B'].
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"First light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL],
second light emitting means [for example, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 5V monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL', power control 5V monitor LED 5PL];
a power supply [e.g., power supply 252];
A movable body operable by driving a motor [eg, motor 180m, 110m to 112m, motor 163m, payout motor, etc.] [eg, hopper disk 182, left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, shutter 163, sprocket, a movable body unit [for example, a hopper unit 180, a reel unit 700, an effect movable body unit 160U, a payout device 152P, etc.] having a crew, etc.];
A game machine comprising
The motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a harness [eg, harness MH, harnesses MR1 to MR3],
The motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the harness,
The first light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current flows due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor.
The second light-emitting means may also emit light when the motor is driven by manually operating the movable body in the power-off state, and a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows in,
The first light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move even when the motor is driven,
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are supplied with different voltages from the power supply device [for example, 24 V and 5 V are different],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"First light emitting means [for example, an LED (main control 24V monitor LED 24ML) provided on a board];
Second light emitting means [for example, different LEDs (main control 5V monitor LED 5ML) provided on a certain board or LEDs provided on a board different from a certain board (secondary control 24V monitor LEDs 24SL, 24SL', secondary control 5V monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL)],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
A game machine comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The first motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the first harness,
the third motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The third motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the third harness,
The first light emitting means is configured to operate the first movable body by hand to drive the first motor in a power failure state, and to generate a current (eg, an induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor. There is a case where light is emitted due to the inflow (hereinafter referred to as "first case"),
The second light emitting means also operates the first movable body by hand in the de-energized state to drive the first motor, and the current generated by the back electromotive force [for example, the induced current] is generated by the first motor. ] may emit light due to the inflow (hereinafter referred to as "second case"),
The first light emitting means is configured to operate the third movable body by hand to drive the third motor in the de-energized state, and to generate a back electromotive force generated by the third motor (e.g., induced current). ] may emit light due to the inflow (hereinafter referred to as the "third case"),
The second light emitting means also operates the third movable body by hand in the de-energized state to drive the third motor, and the current generated by the counter electromotive force [for example, the induced current] is generated by the third motor. ] may emit light due to the inflow (hereinafter referred to as the "fourth case"),
The first light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move when driven by the first motor, and does not move when driven by the third motor,
When at least one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means continues to emit light even when the driving of the first motor is stopped in the first case and the second case [ For example, when light emission is continued by electric charges stored in capacitors 24MC, 24SC, 24PC, and 5PC],
In the third case and the fourth case, even if the driving of the third motor stops, at least one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means continues to emit light [ For example, when light emission is continued by the charges stored in capacitors 24MC, 24SC, 24PC, and 5PC],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
also explained.

The first harness may be, for example, the harness MR1, and the first motor may be, for example, the motor 110m. In this case, the motor 110m is electrically connected to the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML or the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML via the harness MR1. Also, the motor 110m is electrically connected to the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL or the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL at least via a harness MR1. That is, the motor 110m is electrically connected to the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL via the harness MR1, the harness PM and the harness PS1, and the motor 110m is connected to the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, the harness MR1 and the harness PM. and a harness PS2. Therefore, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be provided on the same substrate or may be provided on different substrates.

The third harness may be, for example, the harness MR3, and the third motor may be, for example, the motor 112m. In this case, the motor 112m is electrically connected to the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML or the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML via the harness MR3. Also, the motor 112m is electrically connected to the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL or the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL at least via a harness MR3. That is, the motor 112m is electrically connected to the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, the harness MR3, the harness PM and the harness PS1. and a harness PS2. Therefore, here too, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be provided on the same substrate, or may be provided on different substrates.

According to previous descriptions,
"First light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, error monitoring LED 3ML],
Second light emitting means [for example, sub-control 24V monitor LEDs 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL', second sub-control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED];
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
A game table comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The first motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the first harness,
the third motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The third motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the third harness,
The first light emitting means is configured to operate the first movable body by hand to drive the first motor in a power failure state, and to generate a current (eg, an induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor. may emit light due to the inflow of
The second light emitting means also operates the first movable body by hand in the de-energized state to drive the first motor, and the current generated by the back electromotive force [for example, the induced current] is generated by the first motor. ] may emit light when it flows in,
The first light emitting means is configured to operate the third movable body by hand to drive the third motor in the de-energized state, and to generate a back electromotive force generated by the third motor (e.g., induced current). ] may emit light when it flows in,
The second light emitting means also operates the third movable body by hand in the de-energized state to drive the third motor, and the current generated by the counter electromotive force [for example, the induced current] is generated by the third motor. ] may emit light when it flows in,
The first light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move when driven by the first motor, and does not move when driven by the third motor,
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are provided on different substrates [for example, different substrates such as the main control board 300B, the first sub control board 400B, and the sub control board 400B'].
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"First light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL],
second light emitting means [for example, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 5V monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL', power control 5V monitor LED 5PL];
a power supply [e.g., power supply 252];
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
A game machine comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
The first motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the first harness,
the third motor is electrically connected to the first light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The third motor is electrically connected to the second light emitting means via the third harness,
The first light emitting means is configured to operate the first movable body by hand to drive the first motor in a power failure state, and to generate a current (eg, an induced current) due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor. may emit light due to the inflow of
The second light emitting means also operates the first movable body by hand in the de-energized state to drive the first motor, and the current generated by the back electromotive force [for example, the induced current] is generated by the first motor. ] may emit light when it flows in,
The first light emitting means is configured to operate the third movable body by hand to drive the third motor in the de-energized state, and to generate a back electromotive force generated by the third motor (e.g., induced current). ] may emit light when it flows in,
The second light emitting means also operates the third movable body by hand in the de-energized state to drive the third motor, and the current generated by the counter electromotive force [for example, the induced current] is generated by the third motor. ] may emit light when it flows in,
The first light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The second light emitting means also does not move when driven by the first motor, and does not move when driven by the third motor,
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are supplied with different voltages from the power supply device [for example, 24 V and 5 V are different],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
a door [e.g., front door 102];
A game table comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means is driven by manually operating the first movable body in a power failure state to drive the first motor, and a current (for example, an induced current) flows due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor. It may emit light by
In the power-off state, the third movable body is operated by hand to drive the third motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] flows into the light-emitting means due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
When the door is closed, the light emitting means is invisible [for example, FIG. 14(a)],
When the door is opened, the light emitting means, the first movable body, and the third movable body can be visually recognized [for example, FIG. 14(b)],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
operation means [for example, setting key switch 281, setting change button 292, reset switch 291, first selection switch 190, power switch 244];
A game table comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means is driven by manually operating the first movable body in a power failure state to drive the first motor, and a current (for example, an induced current) flows due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor. It may emit light by
In the power-off state, the third movable body is operated by hand to drive the third motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] flows into the light-emitting means due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means and the operating means are provided on a common board [for example, the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 13, the sub control board 400B shown in FIG. 13, and the power supply control board 252B of the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. is
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The operating means may be provided at a position where the light from the light emitting means reaches. In other words, the operating means may be illuminated by the light from the light emitting means, or may be provided within the irradiation range of the light emitting means. Further, the operation means may be operable by relying on the light emitted from the light emitting means, or may be visible even in a dark place by emitting light from the light emitting means. good.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
A game table comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light-emitting means is driven by manually operating the first movable body in a power failure state to drive the first motor, and a current (eg, an induced current) flows due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor. It may emit light by
The light emitting means is driven by manually operating the third movable body in the de-energized state to drive the third motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor flows into the light emitting means. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The light-emitting means is invisible from the appearance of the gaming machine [for example, FIG. 14(a)],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this game machine, since the illegitimate person cannot visually recognize the light emitting means, it is possible to confirm by the light emitting means that the power from the power source is not normally supplied and attempt to attach the illegitimate device to the game machine. It is possible to prevent the act of

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
A game machine comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means is driven by manually operating the first movable body in a power failure state to drive the first motor, and a current (for example, an induced current) flows due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor. It may emit light by
In the power-off state, the third movable body is operated by hand to drive the third motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] flows into the light-emitting means due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided above the movable body unit [for example, LEDs 24ML, 5ML, and 3ML provided on the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 13(b)],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
also explained.

The movable unit may be a reel unit. Further, the movable body unit may project from the light emitting means toward the side of the person who operates the movable body by hand.

The light emitting means may be provided at a position that can be visually recognized by a person who operates the movable body by hand in a standing posture.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
A game table comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means is driven by manually operating the first movable body in a power failure state to drive the first motor, and a current (for example, an induced current) flows due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor. It may emit light by
In the power-off state, the third movable body is operated by hand to drive the third motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] flows into the light-emitting means due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided below the movable unit [eg, the reel unit 700] [eg, LEDs 24PL, 5PL provided in the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 13(c)],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The movable unit may be a reel unit.

The light-emitting means may be provided at a position that can be visually recognized by a person who operates the movable body by hand in a sitting posture.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
A main control board [for example, a main control board 300B] that controls the progress of the game;
A game machine comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current flows in due to the back electromotive force generated by the first motor. is something,
When the light emitting means emits light when the third movable body is manually operated in the de-energized state to drive the third motor, and current due to counter electromotive force generated by the third motor flows in. and
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided on the main control board [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, error monitoring LED 3ML],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
A main control board [for example, the main control board 300B] that controls the progress of the game;
A sub-control board that controls game effects [eg, first sub-control board 400B, sub-control board 400B', second sub-control board, effect control board],
A game table comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current flows in due to the back electromotive force generated by the first motor. is something,
When the light emitting means emits light when the third movable body is manually operated in the de-energized state to drive the third motor, and current due to counter electromotive force generated by the third motor flows in. and
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The light-emitting means is provided on the sub-control board [eg, sub-control 24V monitor LEDs 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LEDs 5SL, 5SL'],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
a power supply [e.g., power supply 252];
A game machine comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current flows in due to the back electromotive force generated by the first motor. is something,
When the light emitting means emits light when the third movable body is manually operated in the de-energized state to drive the third motor, and current due to counter electromotive force generated by the third motor flows in. and
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means is provided in the power supply device [for example, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
Certain printed indications [for example, the indication 4001 of "board number 0002" printed on the sub-control board 400B' shown in FIG. ]and,
A game machine comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current flows in due to the back electromotive force generated by the first motor. is something,
When the light emitting means emits light when the third movable body is manually operated in the de-energized state to drive the third motor, and current due to counter electromotive force generated by the third motor flows in. and
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The certain printed display is provided at a position where the light from the light emitting means reaches [for example, in addition to the light from the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL' and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL', When the front door 102 is opened 90 degrees with respect to the main body 101, the light from the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML also reaches (Fig. 14(b))],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
also explained.

It should be noted that a certain display (for example, display by stamping or display by handwriting) may be used instead of a certain print display.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
certain circuit components [for example, various connectors MR1, etc., various resistors 24MR, etc., capacitors 24MC, etc., LEDs 5ML, etc., various ICs 322i, etc., various switches 281, etc., LSI, CPU, ROM, RAM, etc.];
A game machine comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current flows in due to the back electromotive force generated by the first motor. is something,
When the light emitting means emits light when the third movable body is manually operated in the de-energized state to drive the third motor, and current due to counter electromotive force generated by the third motor flows in. and
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The certain circuit component is provided at a position where light from the light emitting means [e.g., main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] reaches [e.g., first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 14(b)],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
A board case [for example, the main control board storage case 210, the sub control board storage cases 220 and 220', the case of the power supply device 252],
A game machine comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current flows in due to the back electromotive force generated by the first motor. is something,
When the light emitting means emits light when the third movable body is manually operated in the de-energized state to drive the third motor, and current due to counter electromotive force generated by the third motor flows in. and
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
In addition to the light from the light emitting means [for example, the light from the LED provided on the board housed in the certain substrate case, the front door 102 shown in FIG. In the open state, the light from the LED 24ML provided in the main control board 300B housed in the main control board housing case 210 which has a positional relationship of 90 degrees] reaches.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
a power supply [e.g., power supply 252];
A game table comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means is driven by manually operating the first movable body in a power failure state to drive the first motor, and a current (for example, an induced current) flows due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor. It may emit light by
In the power-off state, the third movable body is operated by hand to drive the third motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] flows into the light-emitting means due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] is supplied with power from the power supply device without passing through the first harness [for example, harness MR1] [for example, via harness PM supplied],
The light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML] is supplied with power from the power supply device without passing through the third harness [for example, harness MR3] [for example, via harness PM supplied],
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
a power supply [e.g., power supply 252];
A game machine comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means is electrically connected to the power supply device via a second harness [for example, a harness PM],
The light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML] allows the first movable body to be operated by hand even if connection failure occurs in the second harness [for example, harness PM]. and driving the first motor, and the inflow of current [for example, induced current] due to the counter electromotive force generated by the first motor may cause light emission,
The light emitting means operates the third movable body by hand to drive the third motor even if the second harness [for example, the harness PM] has a connection failure, and the third motor causes the third motor to operate. It may emit light due to the inflow of current [for example, induced current] due to the generated back electromotive force,
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven.
A gaming machine [for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 34] characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to previous descriptions,
"Light emitting means [for example, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, 24SL', sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, 5SL', power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, error monitoring LED 3ML for second control voltage monitoring LED 6SL, signal monitoring LED, 7-segment display, setting value display 293, etc.],
a movable body unit [eg, reel unit 700] having a first movable body [eg, left reel 110] operable by driving a first motor [eg, motor 110m];
A game table comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body [e.g., right reel 112] operable by driving a third motor [e.g., motor 112m],
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness [for example, harness MR1],
the third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness [for example, harness MR3];
The light emitting means is driven by manually operating the first movable body in a power failure state to drive the first motor, and a current (for example, an induced current) flows due to a back electromotive force generated by the first motor. It may emit light by
In the power-off state, the third movable body is operated by hand to drive the third motor, and a current [eg, an induced current] flows into the light-emitting means due to a back electromotive force generated by the third motor. It may emit light when
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The game machine is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1],
The movable body unit is a reel unit [e.g., reel unit 700],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

For example, the first movable body may be a first reel, and the third movable body may be a third reel.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a demonstration animation displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the demonstration effect.

A predetermined time period during which no operation is performed by the player while the animation (non-demonstration animation) displayed on the effect image display device 157 is displayed continuously during the game or after the game ends. When the time (for example, 30 seconds) is reached, the animation is switched to display the demonstration animation. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the demo animation is roughly divided into five scenes. First, an opening animation (demo animation 1/5) is displayed. In this opening animation, the entire screen of the effect image display device 157 turns white once, and then the company logo gradually starts to appear from the back of the white display screen, and finally, as shown in FIG. 17(a). The company logo appears in full. When the opening animation ends, the animation in which the characters appear begins. First, an animation (demonstration animation 2/5) in which the main character, Lord appears, is displayed as shown in FIG. 17(b). Also, when an animation in which a character appears is started, a first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed at the lower left of the display screen of the effect image display device 157. FIG. This first guide display icon GI1 is an icon that is displayed only during the demonstration effect. That is, it is displayed only in the animation in which the character in the demo animation appears. However, non-demonstration animations may also be displayed. The display of the second selection switch 194 is displayed on the first guidance display icon GI1. That is, the display 167p of the left button 167 and the display 168p of the right button 168 are both displayed in black, and the letters "volume adjustment" are also displayed in black. It is suggested that the output sound from 272 and the output sound from the bass speaker 277 can be adjusted in volume. As described with reference to FIGS. 7A and 7B, when the left button 167 is pressed once while the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed, the third volume selection icon SI3 is displayed. When the right button 168 is pressed, the third volume selection icon SI3 is also displayed, and the volume level of the five steps is increased by one step. In addition, the display 166p of the second chance button 166 is displayed in white, and the characters "game information" are also displayed in white, suggesting that the game information will be displayed by operating the second chance button 166. ing.

FIG. 18(a) is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157, which is displayed when the second chance button 166 is pressed while the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed.

The game information displayed when the second chance button 166 is pressed while the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed is a payout table. The payout table shown in FIG. 18(a) indicates that 8 medals are paid out when the symbol combination of Bell-Bell-Bell is aligned on the activated line described with reference to FIG. - It is shown that three medals are paid out when the combination of watermelon symbols is complete. It also shows that two medals are paid out if the cherry symbol stops on the middle symbol. This payout table consists of a plurality of pages, and the payout table shown in FIG. 18(a) is the first page. The first guide display icon GI1 displayed at the lower left of the display screen is replaced with the second guide display icon GI2. In the second guidance display icon GI2, black characters of "move page" are displayed in contrast to the display 167p of the left button 167 and the display 168p of the right button 168, which are displayed in black, and the left button 167 and the right button 168 are operated. It is suggested that you can change the paytable page by doing. When the left button 167 is pressed once while the second guide display icon GI2 is displayed, the payout table page is returned by one page, and when the right button 168 is pressed once, the payout table page is advanced by one page. In addition, the characters "END" are displayed in white against the display 166p of the second chance button 166 displayed in white, and the display of the payout table can be terminated by operating the second chance button 166. is suggested. When the second chance button 166 is pressed, the display of the payout table disappears on the display screen of the effect image display device 157, and the non-demonstration animation starts to be displayed. That is, when the second chance button 166 is operated while the demonstration animation is being displayed, the demonstration effect ends, and when the display of the payout table ends, the display of the non-demonstration animation is started.

The first guidance display icon GI1 described above corresponds to an example of the second display, and the display of the payout table corresponds to an example of the response display.

In the demo animation, following the animation in which the main character, the lord, appears as shown in FIG. 17B, an animation in which a princess appears (demo animation 3/5) shown in FIG. In this animation as well, the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed at the lower left. Furthermore, in the demonstration animation, following the animation in which the princess appears, an animation in which an old man appears (demonstration animation 4/5) shown in FIG. 17(d) is displayed. In this animation as well, the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed at the lower left. At the end of the demonstration animation, an ending animation (demonstration animation 5/5) is displayed. In this ending animation, a warning display is displayed as shown in FIG. 17(e), and the first guidance display icon GI1 has disappeared. When the display of the ending animation is completed, the series of demonstration animations ends, and if the demonstration production continues, the above-mentioned opening animation (demonstration animation 1/5) returns, the entire screen turns white again, and after that, a series of animations Demonstration animation is displayed repeatedly until some operation is performed.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing, step by step, the state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when the power saving mode is selected while the non-demonstration animation is being displayed.

In FIG. 19A, the effect image display device 157 displays an animation in which the lord is sitting on the head seat and the old man is reading a letter. This animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157 continuously during the game, or is displayed on the effect image display device 157 after the game ends. It is a different animation (hereinafter referred to as "non-demo animation".) In addition, in this non-demonstration animation, the lord's eyes and fan move, and the hands of the old man move.In addition, this non-demonstration animation is displayed. The brightness of the layer on which the non-demonstration animation is displayed in the effect image display device 157 is normal brightness, and the non-demonstration animation is reproduced in a bright state. Button 165, second selection switch 194 (first chance button 166, left button 167, right button 168), left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, and three reels 110-112 are shown in FIG. In the first chance button 165 shown in a), the built-in first effect lamp is lit in white, and in the second chance button 166, the built-in second effect lamp is lit in white. Both the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R shown in (a) are lit in white, and the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 6) provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also lit in white. The three reels 110-112 shown in FIG. 19(a) are illuminated white.

The lighting mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the lighting mode of the right side lamp 144R may be the same. For example, they may be illuminated in the same color, blink at the same timing, or be extinguished. Alternatively, the lighting mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the lighting mode of the left side lamp 144L may be the same. Further, among the first effect lamp, the second effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 (see FIG. 6), only the left side lamp 144L may be turned off.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 19A, the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "6" shown in FIG. The volume is set to the volume level of the sixth tier.

In the example shown in FIG. 19 , in order to operate the first selection switch 190 , the store clerk inserts the key into the key hole 140 and turns the inserted key clockwise to unlock and open the front door 102 . Even when the key is used, when the front door 102 is opened, the opening sensor 294 detects that the front door 102 is opened, and the upper speaker 272 outputs the message "The door is open." The error annunciation sound for the opening error is repeatedly output, and the effect image display device 157 displays the error display for the door opening error by displaying characters such as "the door is being opened." The output of the error notification sound for the door opening error and the display of the error display are continued until the front door 102 is closed. Not a few players think that the error notification sound is too loud for other players to hear. Therefore, there is a case where the store clerk of the game store opens the front door 102 while holding down the opening/closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 is opened. By doing so, the opening/closing piece does not protrude, the opening of the front door 102 is not detected by the opening sensor 294, and the error notification of the door opening error is not performed. In the example shown in FIG. 19, the clerk operates the first selection switch 190 while the front door 102 is opened while holding down the opening/closing piece. The error display of the door opening error is not displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 19B and subsequent figures. Also, no error notification sound is output.

First, the switch operation (1) is performed by the store clerk to set the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "7" shown in FIG. 6(a).

When this switch operation (1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 19(b), the effect image display device 157 displays the same first volume selection icon SI1 as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 7(C). is displayed to notify that the seventh stage volume level is selected. Even if the front door 102 is opened, the non-demonstration animation continues to be displayed, and even if the first selection switch 190 is operated, the non-demonstration animation continues to be displayed.

FIG. 20 is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. In FIG. 20, time elapses from left to right in the figure, timing of (c) in FIG. 20 coincides with timing of FIG. 19 (c), and timing of (d) in FIG. 19(d), and the timing of (e) in FIG. 20 matches the timing of FIG. 19(e). FIG. 20 shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 and the brightness of the animation display on the effect image display device 157, as well as the first effect lamp and the second chance lamp built in the first chance button 165. The lighting modes of various lighting means such as the second effect lamp built into the button 166, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also shown. .

At the left end of the timing chart of FIG. 20, the effect image display device 157 displays the non-demonstration animation with normal brightness, and also displays the first volume selection icon SI1 with the characters "volume 7/7". is shown. Also shown is a state in which the above-described various light-emitting means are lit in white.

Next, the store clerk performs switch operation (2) to set the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "8" shown in FIG. 6(a).

When this switch operation (2) is performed, as shown in FIG. 19(c), the effect image display device 157 displays the same first volume selection icon SI1 as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 7(D). is displayed to notify that the exhibition volume is selected. Even at the timing of (c) in the timing chart of FIG. 20, the effect image display device 157 displays the non-demonstration animation and the first volume selection icon SI1 with the characters "exhibition volume" displayed. It is shown.

Subsequently, the store clerk performs switch operation (3) for setting the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "9" shown in FIG. 6(a).

Until now, the non-power-saving mode setting has been selected, but when this switch operation (3) is performed, the power-saving mode setting is selected, and the volume level is selected at the 7th level. state. FIG. 19(d) shows the state immediately after the switch operation (3) is performed. As shown in FIG. 20, the time from switch operation (3) to the state shown in FIG. 19(d) is as shown in FIG. The time from switch operation (2) to the state shown in FIG. 19(c) is shorter than the time from switch operation (3) to the state shown in FIG. ) is the same length as the time until the state shown in FIG.

In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 19(d), the same second volume selection icon SI2 as the second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 7(a) is attached to the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. are displayed in an overlapping manner, and in the subsequent effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 19(e), the first volume selection icon SI1 is completely replaced with the second volume selection icon SI2. This change of icons is also shown in the time chart shown in FIG.

The characters "power saving mode" are displayed on the second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. It does not indicate that the mode has been set. The non-demonstration animation continues to be displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 19(e), and the non-demonstration state remains. Therefore, the power saving mode is not set, and as shown in the timing charts of FIG. 19(e) and FIG. 144R, and the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 6) of each reel 110-112 remain lit white. In addition, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 also remains lit in white. Furthermore, the non-demonstration animation is played in a bright state without being darkened.

FIG. 21 shows the state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when the power saving mode is selected by opening the front door 102 while holding down the opening/closing piece while the demo animation is being displayed. It is a figure which shows step by step.

In FIG. 21(a), the demonstration effect has started, and the effect image display device 157 has started displaying the opening animation (demonstration animation 1/5) shown in FIG. 17(a). That is, on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 21(a), after the entire display screen turns white, the company logo, which gradually starts to appear from the back, is displayed in a completely appearing state. Also, the demo animation is played in a bright state without being dark. 21, similarly to FIG. 19, a first chance button 165, a second selection switch 194 (first chance button 166, left button 167, right button 168), left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, and three reels 110-112 are shown. In addition, the first effect lamp incorporated in the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. 21(a) is lit in white, and the second effect lamp incorporated in the second chance button 166 is also lit in white. . Further, both the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R shown in FIG. 21(a) are lit in white. Furthermore, the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 6) provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also illuminated in white, and the three reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 21(a) are illuminated in white. .

Also in the demonstration effect, the light emission mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the light emission mode of the right side lamp 144R may be the same. For example, they may be illuminated in the same color, blink at the same timing, or be extinguished. Alternatively, the lighting mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the lighting mode of the left side lamp 144L may be the same. Furthermore, only the left side lamp 144L of the first effect lamp, the second effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 (see FIG. 6) may be turned off. Alternatively, the first effect lamp may flash white, and the right side lamp 144R may light red.

21(a), the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "6" shown in FIG. The volume is set to the volume level of the sixth tier.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 21 as well as the example shown in FIG. 19, the amusement store clerk presses the first selection switch 190 while the front door 102 is opened while holding down the opening/closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 is opened. to operate. The error display of the door opening error is not displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 21(b) and subsequent figures. Also, no error notification sound is output.

First, in this example, as in the example shown in FIG. 19, the store clerk performs the switch operation (1) to set the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "7" shown in FIG. 6(a).

When this switch operation (1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 21(b), the effect image display device 157 displays the same first volume selection icon SI1 as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 7(C). is displayed to notify that the seventh stage volume level is selected. Even if the front door 102 is opened, the demonstration animation continues to be displayed, and even if the first selection switch 190 is operated, the demonstration animation continues to be displayed. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 21(b) displays an animation (demonstration animation 2/5) in which the main character appears, which was explained using FIG. 17(b). The display of the display icon GI1 has started. This first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed overlapping part of the first volume selection icon SI1, but on the contrary, the first volume selection icon SI1 overlaps part of the first guidance display icon GI1. May be displayed overlapping.

Next, the store clerk performs switch operation (2) to set the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "8" shown in FIG. 6(a).

When this switch operation (2) is performed, as shown in FIG. 21(c), the effect image display device 157 displays the same first volume selection icon SI1 as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 7(D). is displayed to notify that the exhibition volume is selected. In addition, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 21(c) displays the animation (demonstration animation 3/5) in which the princess appears, which has been described with reference to FIG. 17(c). The guidance display icon GI1 continues to be displayed. The first volume selection icon SI1 of the volume for the exhibition, which started to be displayed after the first guidance display icon GI1, overlaps the first guidance display icon GI1.

Subsequently, the store clerk performs switch operation (3) for setting the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "9" shown in FIG. 6(a).

Until now, the non-power-saving mode setting has been selected, but when this switch operation (3) is performed, the power-saving mode setting is selected, and the volume level is selected at the 7th level. state.

FIG. 22 is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. In FIG. 22 as well, time elapses from left to right in the figure, as in FIG. Also, the timing of (c) in FIG. 22 coincides with the timing of FIG. I am doing it. Further, FIG. 22 shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157, the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166, the left side Light emission modes of various light emitting means such as the lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also shown.

At the left end of the timing chart in FIG. 22, the effect image display device 157 displays an animation in which a princess appears (demonstration animation 3/5) in a bright state, and the first animation in which the characters "exhibition volume" are displayed. A state in which the volume selection icon SI1 and the first guidance display icon GI1 are also displayed is shown. Also shown is a state in which the above-described various light-emitting means are lit in white.

FIG. 21(d) is a diagram showing the state immediately after this switch operation (3) is performed, and the state shown stepwise after (d) in FIG. It becomes the one shown at a shorter time interval than the one shown.

When the power saving mode is selected while the demonstration effect is being executed, that is, the demonstration animation is being displayed, the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode. In FIG. 21(d), the power saving mode has already been set, and the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the three reels 110 to 112 The provided backlight module 740 is turned off to save power. That is, among the light-emitting means that have lit in white until now, the light-emitting means other than the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 are turned off. While the power saving mode is set, only this second effect lamp continues to light in white. Further, in the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 21(d), the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 21(c) has the same second volume selection as the second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. The icon SI2 is displayed overlapping.

Furthermore, when the power saving mode is selected while the demonstration animation is being displayed, the demonstration animation is displayed from the beginning. That is, as described above, if the power saving mode is selected while the demonstration animation is being displayed, the power saving mode is set. is started from the beginning. On the other hand, as described with reference to FIG. 19, even if the user selects to set the power saving mode while the demonstration animation is not displayed, the power saving mode is not set and the demonstration animation is displayed. It doesn't even start from the beginning. As shown in the timing chart of FIG. 22, at the timing of FIG. 21(d), while the demonstration animation 3/5 is displayed on the effect image display device 157, the opening animation of the demonstration animation (demonstration animation 1/5) is reproduced. is also started.

In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 21(e), the first volume selection icon SI1 is completely replaced with the second volume selection icon SI2. Also, the display of the demo animation 3/5 has ended, and the company logo has begun to appear faintly on the display screen that has become entirely white due to the start of the opening animation (demonstration animation 1/5). Also, the first guidance display icon GI1 has disappeared.

In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 21(f), the corporate logo appears quite clearly, but since the second volume selection icon SI2 overlaps, the corporate logo is It is more difficult to see than the state shown. Further, at the timing of FIG. 21(f), the display of the power saving mode setting display AI for notifying that the power saving mode is set to "power saving mode being set" at the bottom of the display screen is started.

At the timing shown in FIG. 21(g), the demo animation begins to darken. When the demo animation starts to darken, it becomes more difficult to see than before it starts to darken, but the visibility of the power saving mode setting AI and the second volume selection icon SI2 does not change, and the power saving mode setting AI and The second volume selection icon SI2 is clearly visible. That is, the brightness of the power saving mode setting display AI and the brightness of the second volume selection icon SI2 do not change.

At the timing shown in FIG. 21(h), the first guide display icon GI1 that disappeared once is displayed again. The re-displayed first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed in the foremost layer, and overlaps part of the second volume selection icon SI2 and also overlaps the power saving mode setting display AI. The visibility of the first guidance display icon GI1 is also the same as that of the first guidance display icon GI1 in FIG. 21(b), and the first guidance display icon GI1 is clearly visible. That is, the brightness of the first guidance display icon GI1 does not change either.

Note that the power saving mode setting display AI may be displayed in the foremost layer and partially overlap the first guidance display icon GI1. Alternatively, the second volume selection icon SI2 may be displayed in the foremost layer, partially overlapping the first guidance display icon GI1, and partially overlapping the power saving mode setting display AI.

The time from when the demo animation starts to darken to when it completely darkens on the effect image display device 157 (Fig. The time for which the side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight modules 740 provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are extinguished at the timing of FIG. 21(d) is longer. When the demonstration animation suddenly becomes dark, the player may think that the effect image display device 157 is malfunctioning or be surprised. may be noticed by the player.

It should be noted that even if the store clerk performs a switch operation to set the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 from "9" to "8" shown in FIG. Display of the demo animation starts from the beginning. That is, if it is selected to set the non-power saving mode while the demonstration animation is being displayed, the non-power saving mode is set, and when the non-power saving mode is set, the demonstration animation is displayed from the beginning. The demo animation that was started and played darkly will now play brightly. Before the demo animation becomes bright, the light emitting means (the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the three reels 110 to 112 The backlight modules 740) provided in each start to light up. On the other hand, even if you select to switch from power saving mode to non-power saving mode while the demo animation is not displayed, the setting will not change because the non-power saving mode is already set. display is not started from the beginning.

When the second chance button 166 lit in white is pressed in accordance with the first guidance display icon GI1 in the state where the power saving mode is set, the display returns to the non-power saving mode, the display of the demonstration animation ends, and the display of the demonstration animation ends. A payout table shown in 18(a) is displayed. Also, when the left button 167 or the right button 168 is pressed according to the first guidance display icon GI1, the non-power saving mode is restored and the demonstration animation is switched to the non-demonstration animation (for example, the animation of the lord and the old man shown in FIG. 19). ), and the third volume selection icon SI3 described with reference to FIGS. 7A and 7B is displayed.

Also, when the unlit first chance button 165 is pressed while the power saving mode is set, the mode returns to the non power saving mode. Toji's animation), and a certain production may be started.

FIG. 18(b) shows a display screen displayed when the first chance button 165 is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 21(h).

In the state shown in FIG. 21(h), the display screen of the effect image display device 157 displays the first guidance display icon GI1. As described above, the first guidance display icon GI1 does not include the display of the first chance button 165, and the first guidance display icon GI1 is not a display related to the first chance button 165. FIG. Also, since the power saving mode is being executed, the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 is turned off. In this state, not only is there no prompt to press the first chance button 165, but there is no suggestion regarding the first chance button 165 either. In spite of this, when the first chance button 165 is operated, a setting suggestion display for the slot machine 100 is displayed as the certain effect. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, set values are set for different degrees of advantage for the player. Setting values 1 to 6 are prepared. There is a tendency that the higher the set value, the higher the player's advantage. The player usually cannot know this setting value, but there are cases where a setting suggestion display is displayed as shown in FIG. 18(b). If only the Lord's character is displayed, it suggests an odd (settings 1, 3, 5) setting. If only the old man character is displayed, it suggests an even (settings 2, 4, 6) setting. If only the princess character is displayed, it suggests that the setting is 3 or higher. If both the lord and princess characters are displayed, it suggests setting 5 or setting 6. When such setting suggestion display is performed, the first chance button 165 corresponds to a hidden button.

Even if the first chance button 165 is pressed in the states of FIGS. 21(d) to 21(g), even if the first chance button 165 is pressed, the effect image display device 157 does not display the setting suggestion display. can be Further, whether or not the setting suggestion display is displayed may be determined by a lottery when the first chance button 165 is pressed, or may be determined by the pressing timing.

FIG. 23 shows the state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when the power saving mode is selected by opening the front door 102 without pressing the opening/closing piece while the demo animation is being displayed. It is a figure which shows step by step.

The example shown in FIG. 23 is an example in which the error notification of the door opening error is being performed. The following description focuses on differences from the example shown in FIG. 21 in which the error notification of the door open error is stopped.

In the example shown in FIG. 23, the store clerk opens the front door 102 before the demonstration animation starts. At this time, the store clerk opened the front door 102 without holding down the opening/closing piece protruding when the front door 102 is opened, so that the error notification of the door opening error is started. That is, the effect image display device 157 displays an error display of a door opening error by a character display such as "Door being opened", and an upper speaker 272 (not shown in FIG. 23) outputs a door opening error message such as "Door is open". is repeatedly output.

In FIG. 23A, the demonstration effect has started, and the effect image display device 157 has started displaying the opening animation (demonstration animation 1/5). At the upper left of the display screen of the effect image display device 157, there is displayed an error display EI1 indicating a door opening error by displaying characters such as "Door opening". This error display EI1 is displayed on the foremost layer and continues to be displayed until the front door 102 is closed.

In addition, the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. 23(a) has a built-in first production lamp lit in red, and the right side lamp 144R is also lit in red in conjunction with the first production lamp. . On the other hand, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 is lit in white. Also, the left side lamp 144L is lit in white. Furthermore, the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 6) provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also illuminated in white, and the three reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 23(a) are illuminated in white. .

The store clerk performs the switch operation (1) of the first selection switch 190, and as shown in FIG. A first volume selection icon SI1 with characters "/7" is displayed. Also, at the lower left, the display of the first guide display icon GI1 has started.

Next, the clerk performs the switch operation (2) of the first selection switch 190, and as shown in FIG. A first sound volume selection icon SI1 is displayed with the characters "Exhibition sound volume" displayed thereon. A first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed at the lower left.

Subsequently, the clerk performs switch operation (3) of the first selection switch 190, and the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode. In FIG. 23(d), the power saving mode has already been set, but only the backlight modules 740 provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are turned off. That is, the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 is still lit in red, and the right side lamp 144R is also lit in red. Also, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 is still lit in white, and the left side lamp 144L is still lit in white. The off state of the backlight module 740 continues until the setting of the power saving mode is completed.

Also, the display of the demonstration animation is started from the beginning, and while the demonstration animation 3/5 in which the princess appears is displayed, the opening animation of the demonstration animation (demonstration animation 1/5) is also started to be reproduced. Furthermore, in the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 23(d), the second volume selection icon SI2 is displayed so as to overlap the first volume selection icon SI1. Even if the power saving mode is set, the error display EI1 remains displayed. The following description is omitted because it is the same as the example shown in FIG. 21, except for the mode of various light emitting means and the fact that the error display EI1 is continuously displayed.

In this example as well, during the display of the demonstration animation in the power saving mode, the clerk operated the instruction portion 190b of the first selection switch 190 to switch from "9" to "8" shown in FIG. 6(a). Also in this case, the display of the demo animation is started from the beginning. That is, if it is selected to set the non-power saving mode while the demonstration animation is being displayed, the non-power saving mode is set, and when the non-power saving mode is set, the demonstration animation is displayed from the beginning. The demo animation that was started and played darkly will now play brightly. Before the demo animation becomes bright, the light emitting means (the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the three reels 110 to 112 The backlight modules 740) provided in each start to light up. On the other hand, even if you select to switch from power saving mode to non-power saving mode while the demo animation is not displayed, the setting will not change because the non-power saving mode is already set. display is not started from the beginning.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing, step by step, the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when a selection is made to set the power saving mode while the hopper empty error is still occurring.

A motor-driven medal discharge device 180 (see FIG. 3) is provided inside the slot machine 100, and during the medal payout operation, the game medals in the bucket run out, and the medal payout sensor detects the lapse of a predetermined first time. The hopper empty error is reported when the motor is not turned on even when the motor is turned on, and the recovery process for rotating the motor in the reverse direction cannot be recovered. If the hopper is empty error, open the front door 102 to replenish the bucket with tokens, press the reset button provided inside the slot machine 100, or close the front door 102 and turn the key inserted into the key hole 140 to the left. The error is cleared by turning to .

FIG. 24(a) is a diagram showing a state in which an empty hopper error has occurred. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 24(a), the error notification is displayed in the background display of the error notification (background display with diagonal hatching). That is, an error display EI2 such as "error occurred" that cannot identify the error that has occurred, and an error display EI3 that explains how to cancel the hopper empty error such as "replenish medals and press the reset switch". is displayed. It should be noted that an error display indicating an instruction to the player, such as "please call a clerk", may also be provided.

In addition, in the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. 24(a), the built-in first effect lamp is lit in red, and the right side lamp 144R is also lit in red in conjunction with the first effect lamp. . On the other hand, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 is turned off. Also, the left side lamp 144L is lit in white. Furthermore, the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 6) provided for each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also illuminated in white, and the three reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 24(a) are illuminated in white. .

The amusement store clerk opens the front door 102 without holding down the opening/closing piece, and performs switch operation (1) to set the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "7" shown in FIG. 6(a). Since the effect image display device 157 displays an error display EI2 such as "Error Occurred", this error display EI2 is also used to inform the door opening error, and characters such as "Door being opened" shown in FIG. The error display EI of the door opening error by display is not displayed. In addition, an error notification sound for a door opening error such as "the door is open" is not output. It is also possible to output an error notification sound indicating an instruction to the player, such as "Please replenish medals." Alternatively, an error display EI for a door opening error may be displayed, or an error notification sound for a door opening error may be output.

When the clerk performs the switch operation (1) of the first selection switch 190, as shown in FIG. A first volume selection icon SI1 displaying characters "7/7" is displayed overlapping an error display EI2 such as "error occurred". The first volume selection icon SI1 may be displayed in the foremost layer, and if an error display indicating an instruction to the player such as "Please call a clerk" is also displayed, this error display is displayed. are also displayed overlapping each other. Alternatively, an error display EI3 explaining how to remove the hopper empty error may be displayed in the foremost layer.

Next, the clerk performs the switch operation (2) of the first selection switch 190, and as shown in FIG. A first sound volume selection icon SI1 is displayed, which displays the characters "Meeting sound volume".

Subsequently, the store clerk performs the switch operation (3) of the first selection switch 190 to select the setting of the power saving mode, and the volume level is set to the seventh stage volume level. However, since the state shown in FIG. 24(d) is not a state in which the demonstration effect is being executed, the power saving mode is not set and the display of the demonstration animation is not started from the beginning. On the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 24(d), instead of the first volume selection icon SI1, a second volume selection icon SI2 displaying the characters "power saving mode" displays an error such as "error occurrence". It is displayed overlapping the display EI2.

Also, in FIG. 24(d), there is no change in the mode of various light emitting means, and only the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 remains off.

In the above explanation, the power saving mode is not set unless the demonstration effect is being executed. However, the power saving mode may be set.

In addition, when the power saving mode is set, the animation is reproduced in a dark state to save power, and the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the Although power is saved by turning off the backlight module 740 shown in FIG. 6, power saving may also be performed in other devices. For example, when the power saving mode is set, the output sound from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 may be lowered, the effect movable body may not be moved, or the movement may be restricted. Alternatively, the brightness of the entire display screen of the effect image display device 157 may be lowered, not limited to animation reproduction. Also, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 may be extinguished. Furthermore, instead of completely extinguishing the light emitting means such as the first effect lamp, the second effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740, the luminance (light amount) is lowered. Even in the dimmed state, it leads to power saving.

Furthermore, the timing for starting power saving depends on the first effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 (timing in FIG. 21(d)) and the effect image display device 157 (FIG. 21 ( Although the timing of g) is different from the timing of g), power saving is started first with the first effect lamp, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740, and then the right side lamp 144R and the effect image display device 157 are started. You may make it start power saving. In addition to the effect image display device 157, a second effect image display device having a small display screen is provided, and the second effect image display device starts power saving first, and the effect image display device 157 starts power saving later. You may do so. In addition, the combination of the light emitting means and the sound output means, the combination of the effect movable body and the display means, the combination of the light emitting means and the effect movable body, the combination of the effect movable body and the sound output means, the combination of the display means and the sound output means, etc. The timing of starting power saving may be varied.

In addition, although the brightness (light amount) of various lamps cannot be selected by operating the first selection switch 190, the brightness (light amount) level of each lamp can also be selected by the first selection switch 190 in the same way as the sound volume level. You may enable it to select by operation.

Next, operation effects in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 will be described.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing two examples of operation effects.

FIG. 25 shows an effect image display device 157, a first chance button 165, a second chance button 166, a left button 167, and a right button 168. FIG. The first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 is capable of displaying luminescent display of seven colors (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple) forming a rainbow. Luminescent display is also possible. This white luminous display becomes the default luminous display of the first chance button 165 . The second effect lamp built into the second chance button 166 is also capable of displaying luminous display of seven colors forming a rainbow like the first luminous display, and white light-emitting display is also available as a default light-emitting display. It is displayable. Note that the second chance button 165 may be configured to display only white light (default light emission).

In the state shown on the left side of FIG. 25(a), the operation presentation has started. This operation effect is an effect started after the end of the game, and is an effect executed only during a period in which the game is not played. That is, the operation effect is an effect that is started when the third stop operation is performed and all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped. is started. In addition, the operation effect may be an effect that is continuously executed during the game (while the reels are rotating), an effect that is continuously executed even after the game is started, or an effect that is continuously executed even after the game is started. ) may be executed only.

In the first chance button 165 shown on the left side of FIG. 25(a), the built-in first effect lamp lights up in a third color (for example, red), and a light emission display of the third color is displayed. The production image display device 157 displays an animation in which the lord is sitting on the upper seat and the old man is reading a letter (this animation is hereinafter referred to as the "large hall animation"). , a first operation prompting display HD1 prompting the user to operate the first chance button 165 is displayed. The first operation prompting display HD1 here is composed of a character display LD1 indicating that the first chance button 165 should be pressed, and a first button display 165D representing the first chance button 165. FIG. The first button display 165D is a display representing the first chance button 165 displaying the light emitting display of the third color, and is displayed in the same state as the actual first chance button 165. FIG.

The start timing of the operation effect may be the timing when the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 changes, or the timing when the display of the first operation prompting display HD1 is started. The timing at which the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 changes and the timing at which the display of the first operation prompting display HD1 is started may be the same timing, but the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 changes. The timing may be faster. Since the timing at which the light emission display changes is earlier, the player's attention is drawn to the first chance button 165, and the change in the light emission display functions as an advance notice of the first operation promotion display HD1. However, the timing at which the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 changes may be later.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the first chance button 165 is operated on the effect image display device 157 as shown on the right side of FIG. 25(a). An operation result display (response display) displayed in response to this is displayed. The operation result display will be described in detail later, but here, an operation result display RD20 of suggestive display is displayed. The operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display is a display that suggests the degree of expectation by the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the character display RD22 of Mr. Lord. Here, the frame display RD21 is the first color (eg, yellow). . Further, the operated first chance button 165 continues to display the luminous display of the third color (for example, red). That is, the display mode does not change after the operation.

Also in the first chance button 165 shown on the left side of FIG. 25(b), the built-in first effect lamp lights up in the third color (for example, red) as in FIG. A luminous display is displayed. As in FIG. 25(a), the effect image display device 157 has a first operation promotion display including a first button display 165D representing a first chance button 165 displaying a light emitting display of a third color. HD1 is displayed.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of FIG. A suggestive operation result display RD20 including a (eg, yellow) frame display RD21 is displayed. On the other hand, in this example, the operated first chance button 165 is turned off, and the light-emitting display of the third color (for example, red) is terminated.

Note that the first operation prompting display HD1 is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and even if the first chance button 165 is not operated within this predetermined period of time, the operation result display will be displayed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed. Is displayed. That is, the operation result display is displayed whether or not the first chance button 165 is operated. You can start the next game after watching. Note that if the first chance button 165 is not operated within a predetermined period of time, the operation result display may not be displayed.

Next, a characteristic operation presentation in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 will be described.

FIG. 26 is a table summarizing characteristic operation effects in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG.

There are two types of characteristic operation effects described here, which differ in the type of operation result display. One is the first operation effect, and when the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, an operation result display for notifying the number of AT-added games is displayed. The other is a second operation effect, and when the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, an operation result display of suggestive display is displayed.

In both the first operation effect and the second operation effect, the luminous display of the first chance button 165 before the operation, the luminous display of the first chance button 165 after the operation, and the frames included in the operation result display. There are multiple patterns of display color combinations.

FIG. 26(a) is a table summarizing the patterns when the first chance button 165 before the operation displays the third color (for example, red) light-emitting display in the first operation effect. (b) is a table summarizing patterns in the case where the first chance button 165 before the operation displays the fourth color (for example, rainbow color) light-emitting display in the first operation effect. The rainbow color may be a mode in which the display colors are changed one by one continuously to display each of the seven colors forming the rainbow, or the seven colors forming the rainbow may be displayed at once. A mode in which areas are separated and displayed may be used.

In the first operation effect, the effect image display device 157 displays the first operation prompting display HD1 prompting the user to operate the first chance button 165. However, even if the second chance button 166 is operated, the operation result is displayed. may be displayed. In other words, both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 may become operation valid buttons. The second chance button 166 is in a state where the default fifth color (eg, white) light-emitting display is displayed, but like the first chance button 165, the third color (eg, red) light-emitting display, or It may be displayed in a fourth color (eg, rainbow colors). Alternatively, the operation of the second chance button 166 is valid only when the second chance button 166 displays a third color (eg, red) light-emitting display or a fourth color (eg, rainbow color) light-emitting display. It can be a button.

The state in which the first chance button 165 before the operation displays the third color (for example, red) is the same as the state shown on the left side of FIGS. 25(a) and 25(b). In addition, in the first operation effect, there is also a state where the first chance button 165 before the operation displays a fourth color (for example, rainbow color) light-emitting display. In either state, the effect image display device 157 displays the same first operation prompting display HD1 as the first operation prompting display HD1 shown in FIG. When the first chance button 165 is operated, the effect image display device 157 displays an operation result display that notifies the number of AT-added games. The color of the frame display in this operation result display differs according to the number of AT-added games, as shown in the tables of FIGS. 26(a) and 26(b). Also, after being operated, the first chance button 165 changes to a light-emitting display of the same color as the color of the frame display in the operation result display.

If both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operation valid buttons, even if the second chance button 166 instead of the first chance button 165 is operated, the first chance button 165 However, the second chance button 166 changes to the same color as the color of the frame display in the operation result display, and the second chance button 166 may be the same light emitting display as the light emitting display before the operation, or the first chance button 165 and the Similarly, the luminous display may be changed to the same color as the color of the frame display in the operation result display. Alternatively, only when the second chance button 166 is operated, the light-emitting display may be changed to the same color as the color of the frame display in the operation result display.

Even if the first chance button 165 before the operation displays the third color (for example, red) luminous display (the table shown in FIG. 26(a)), the fourth color (for example, rainbow color) is displayed. ) is displayed (the table shown in FIG. 26(b)), the color of the frame display in the operation result display is displayed in a fourth color (for example, rainbow color) , the operation result display is not displayed even if the second chance button 166 is pressed, and the operation result display is not displayed unless the first chance button 165 is pressed. Note that the number of AT-added games is determined in advance by a lottery before the first operation effect is started, and the content of the operation result display for notifying the number of AT-added games is determined based on the result of the lottery. It is also decided whether or not the second chance button 166 is to be an operation enable button. When the color of the frame display in the operation result display is displayed in a fourth color (for example, rainbow color), the operation of the second chance button 166 is accepted in terms of control, but the operation result display is not displayed. Alternatively, the operation of the second chance button 166 itself may not be accepted for control purposes.

FIG. 26(c) is a table summarizing patterns when the first chance button 165 before the operation is displaying a light-emitting display of a third color (for example, red) in the second operation effect. (d) is a table summarizing patterns in the case where the first chance button 165 before the operation displays the fourth color (for example, rainbow color) light-emitting display in the second operation effect.

In the second operation effect as well, the effect image display device 157 displays the first operation promotion display HD1 prompting the user to operate the first chance button 165, but the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 Both may be operation enable buttons. The second chance button 166 is in a state where the default fifth color (eg, white) light-emitting display is displayed, but like the first chance button 165, the third color (eg, red) light-emitting display, or It may be displayed in a fourth color (eg, rainbow colors). Alternatively, the operation of the second chance button 166 is valid only when the second chance button 166 displays a third color (eg, red) light-emitting display or a fourth color (eg, rainbow color) light-emitting display. It can be a button.

In the second operation effect as well, before the first chance button 165 is operated, the effect image display device 157 displays the same first operation prompting display HD1 as the first operation prompting display HD1 shown in FIG. 25(a). there is In the second operation effect, when the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the effect image display device 157 displays an operation result display (see FIG. 25) of suggestive display. be. The color of the frame display in this operation result display differs according to the degree of expectation (reliability) of the suggestive display, as shown in the tables of FIGS. 26(c) and 26(d). Also, in the second operation effect, the first chance button 165 after being operated changes to a light-emitting display of the same color as the color of the frame display in the operation result display.

Furthermore, in the second operation effect, when both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operation valid buttons, the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165. However, the first chance button 165 may change to a luminous display in the same color as the color of the frame display in the operation result display, and the second chance button 166 may have the same luminous display as the luminous display before the operation. However, like the first chance button 165, it may change to a light-emitting display of the same color as the color of the frame display in the operation result display. Alternatively, only when the second chance button 166 is operated, the light-emitting display may be changed to the same color as the color of the frame display in the operation result display.

Also, even if the first chance button 165 before operation displays a third color (for example, red) luminous display (the table shown in FIG. 26(c)), a fourth color (for example, 26(d)), the color of the frame display in the operation result display of the suggestive display is the fourth color (for example, rainbow color). Only when the second chance button 166 is pressed, the suggestive display operation result display is not displayed, and unless the first chance button 165 is pressed, the suggestive display operation result display is not displayed. It should be noted that the result of the expectation (reliability) of the suggestive display (details will be described later, whether or not to shift to the AT state) is determined in advance by a lottery before the second operation effect is started, and the lottery result. In response, the degree of expectation (reliability) of the suggestive display is determined, and it is also determined whether or not the second chance button 166 is to be an operation valid button. When the color of the frame display in the operation result display of the suggestive display is displayed in a fourth color (for example, rainbow color), the operation of the second chance button 166 is accepted as a control, but the operation result of the suggestive display is displayed. It may not be displayed, or may not accept the operation of the second chance button 166 for control purposes.

It should be noted that in both the first operation effect and the second operation effect, the light emission display before the operation of the first chance button 165 is the first color, the second color, the fifth color, or other colors. The color of the frame display and the light-emitting display color of the first chance button 165 after the operation may be other colors.

Also, the first operation effect and the second operation effect may occur at the same time. In this case, both the operation result display for notifying the number of AT-added games and the operation result display for suggestive display are displayed. It becomes the same color as the frame display color. It should be noted that the color may be the same as the color of the frame display in the operation result display for notifying the number of additional games.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the relationship of colors in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG.

In FIG. 27, the luminous display mode of the first chance button 165 is shown in the vertical line on the left side.

The vertical line on the left side shows the light-emitting display state of the first chance button 165 .

The vertical line in the center shows the display mode of the operation result display RD10 that informs the number of AT-added games. For example, +25G displayed in the AT added game number display RD12 indicates that the number of games in which the AT state is maintained is added by 25 games. The color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the AT added game number display RD12 is a color corresponding to the number of games added to the number of games in which the AT state is maintained. Note that the color of the frame display RD11 may indicate the reliability of other benefits. For example, in the case of a game feature of accumulating points, the color of the frame display RD11 may be a color corresponding to the number of points.

The vertical line on the right shows the display mode of the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display. What is implied here is the level of expectation (reliability) with which the player is awarded a privilege (AT state in this example). When the character display RD22 of the lord inside the frame display RD21 is displayed, an effect for predicting whether or not the above privilege will be granted (in this example, if you win, the above privilege will be granted) The start of the battle effect) is confirmed, and the color of the frame display RD21 indicates the degree of expectation (in this example, the degree of expectation (reliability) of winning the battle effect) to transition to the state in which the above privilege is granted. ). In this sense, the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display also corresponds to the display regarding the player's privilege. In addition, the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display is also a notice display of the start of an effect that predicts whether or not the privilege will be given or not, or a notice display of the start of the effect in the next game. Furthermore, it corresponds to a notice display that a privilege will be given to the player or a notice display that the player will win the battle effect. Note that the privilege given to the player may be a big bonus or the like in addition to the AT state. Also, instead of the lord character display RD22, a princess character display or an old man character display may be displayed. In the case of displaying a princess character, there is a 50% chance that the effect will be started to predict whether or not the privilege will be granted, and the color of the frame display RD21 will also correspond to that probability (for example, , the first color), and in the case of the character display of the old man, the probability of starting the effect that predicts whether or not the privilege will be granted is 0%, and the color of the frame display RD21 is 0%. may also be colored according to its probability (for example, a fifth color).

In FIGS. 25 to 33, the state in which the first chance button 165 is turned off is represented by a plain state without hatching.

Also, in FIGS. 25 to 33, the fifth color (for example, white) is represented by vertical hatching. This fifth color corresponds to the default luminescent display color of the first chance button 165 . In addition, in the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT games added, the fifth color is displayed as the color of the frame display RD11, and corresponds to the color indicating that the number of games in which the AT state is maintained is 25 games added. do. Further, the fifth color corresponds to a color suggesting that the degree of expectation (reliability) is 0% in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display. That is, the fifth color corresponds to a color that indicates that the degree of expectation for the transition to the AT state is 0%, or that the reliability as an advance notice of the transition to the AT state is 0%. Corresponds to a color that suggests absolutely no migration.

In addition, in FIGS. 25 to 33, the first color (eg, yellow) is represented by hatching directed diagonally downward to the left. This first color corresponds to the first light-emitting display color of the first chance button 165 . In addition, in the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games, the first color is displayed as the color of the frame display RD11, and corresponds to the color indicating that the number of games in which the AT state is maintained is added by 50 games. do. The first color corresponds to a color suggesting that the degree of expectation (reliability) is 25% in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display. That is, the first color corresponds to a color that indicates that the degree of expectation for shifting to the AT state is 25%, or that the degree of reliability as an advance notice of shifting to the AT state is 25%.

In addition, in FIGS. 25 to 33, the second color (for example, blue) is represented by hatching directed obliquely downward to the right. This second color corresponds to the second light-emitting display color of the first chance button 165 . In addition, in the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT games added, the second color is displayed as the color of the frame display RD11, and corresponds to the color indicating that the number of games in which the AT state is maintained is 100 games added. do. The second color corresponds to a color suggesting that the degree of expectation (reliability) is 50% in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display. That is, the second color corresponds to a color that indicates that the degree of expectation for shifting to the AT state is 50%, or that the reliability as an advance notice of shifting to the AT state is 50%.

Also, in FIGS. 25 to 33, the third color (eg, red) is represented by diagonal cross-hatching. This third color corresponds to the third light-emitting display color of the first chance button 165 . In addition, in the operation result display RD10 that notifies the number of AT games added, the third color is displayed as the color of the frame display RD11, and corresponds to the color indicating that the number of games in which the AT state is maintained is 300 games added. do. The third color corresponds to a color suggesting that the degree of expectation (reliability) is 75% in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display. That is, the third color corresponds to a color that indicates that the degree of expectation for shifting to the AT state is 75%, or that the reliability as an advance notice of shifting to the AT state is 75%.

Also, in FIGS. 25 to 33, the fourth color (eg, rainbow color) is represented by cross-hatching of vertical and horizontal lines. This fourth color corresponds to the fourth light-emitting display color of the first chance button 165 . In addition, in the operation result display RD10 that notifies the number of AT games added, the fourth color is displayed as the color of the frame display RD11, and corresponds to the color indicating that the number of games in which the AT state is maintained is 500 games added. do. The fourth color corresponds to a color that suggests that the expectation level (reliability level) is 100% in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display. That is, the third color corresponds to a color indicating that the degree of expectation for shifting to the AT state is 100%, or that the reliability as an advance notice of shifting to the AT state is 100%. Corresponds to colors suggesting migration.

In addition, in the explanation here, it was explained that the degree of expectation (reliability) that the privilege is given to the player differs according to the color, but the fifth color, the first color, the second color, The third color, the fourth color, and so on, in order of description, may suggest that the player's degree of advantage increases, or that the degree of expectation (reliability) of various notices increases.

FIG. 28 is a diagram specifically showing some examples of the first operation effect 1 described with reference to FIG. 26(a). FIG. 28 also shows an effect image display device 157, a first chance button 165, a second chance button 166, a left button 167, and a right button 168 as in FIG. 25 (FIGS. 29-33). the same).

The state shown on the left side of each of FIGS. 28(a) to 28(c) is a state in which the operation effect is started after the game is over. The first chance button 165 displays a third color (for example, red) light-emitting display. A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap the large hall animation. As in the example shown in FIG. 25, the first operation prompting display HD1 here also includes a character display LD1 indicating that the first chance button 165 should be pressed, and the first chance button 165 displaying a light-emitting display of the third color. It is composed of a first button display 165D shown in FIG.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the state shown on the right side of FIGS. 28(a) to 28(c) is obtained. In the state shown on the right side of each figure, the effect image display device 157 displays an operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games. Also, the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 has changed from the light-emitting display before the operation. The light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 changes before the operation result display RD10 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (the same applies to the following examples). By doing so, the display mode of the operation result display RD10 can be suggested in advance by the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165. FIG.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 28(a), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the character display of +50G is displayed in the first color (for example, yellow), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the third color. A color (eg, red) is changing to a first color. Similarly, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 28(b), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the character display of +100G is displayed in the second color (for example, blue), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the third color. It is changing from a color (eg red) to a second color. Similarly, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 28(c), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the character display of +500G is displayed in the fourth color (for example, rainbow color), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the third color. color (eg, red) to a fourth color. It should be noted that when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the operation result display RD10 is not displayed, and the luminous display of the first chance button 165 is also changed, unlike the previous example. do not.

As described above, the luminous display of the first chance button 165 after being operated is the luminous display related to the display of the operation result of the first chance button 165. In some cases, it is possible to obtain information according to the operation. In addition, in the effect image display device 157, various images may be displayed at the same time or various display colors may be used at the same time. The effect represented by the luminous display of the one-chance button 165 may be easier for the player to understand. Furthermore, since the luminous display of the first chance button 165 after the operation and the display of the operation result of the first chance button 165 are related displays, cohesive effects are developed, and in this respect also, the player can enjoy the effects. easier to understand.

FIG. 29 is a diagram specifically showing some examples of the first operation effect 2 described with reference to FIG. 26(b).

The state shown on the left side of each of FIGS. 29(a) to 29(c) is a state in which the operation effect is started after the game is over. The first chance button 165 displays a light-emitting display of a fourth color (for example, rainbow color). A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap the large hall animation. Here, the first operation prompting display HD1 consists of a character display LD1 indicating that the first chance button 165 should be pressed, and a first button display 165D representing the first chance button 165 displaying the light emitting display of the fourth color. It is configured.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the state shown on the right side of FIGS. 29(a) to 29(c) is obtained. In the state shown on the right side of each figure, the effect image display device 157 displays an operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 29(a), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the character display of +25G is displayed in the fifth color (for example, white), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the fourth color. It is changing from a color (eg rainbow) to a fifth color. Similarly, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 29(b), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the character display of +300G is displayed in the third color (for example, red), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the fourth color. It is changing from a color (eg rainbow) to a third color. Similarly, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 29(c), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the character display of +500G is displayed in the fourth color (for example, rainbow color), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the fourth color. remains displayed in the color of Note that when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the operation result display RD10 is not displayed unlike the previous example.

FIG. 30 is a diagram specifically showing some examples of the second operation effect 1 described with reference to FIG. 26(c).

The state shown on the left side of each of FIGS. 30(a) to 30(c) is a state in which the operation effect is started after the game is finished. The first chance button 165 displays a third color (for example, red) light-emitting display. A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap the large hall animation. As in the example shown in FIG. 28, the first operation prompting display HD1 here also includes a character display LD1 indicating that the first chance button 165 should be pressed, and the first chance button 165 displaying a light-emitting display of the third color. It is composed of a first button display 165D shown in FIG.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the state shown on the right side of each of FIGS. 30(a) to 30(c) is obtained. In the state shown on the right side of each figure, the effect image display device 157 displays an operation result display RD20 of suggestive display. Also, the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 has changed from the light-emitting display before the operation.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 30(a), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the lord's character display RD22 is displayed in the first color (for example, yellow), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the third color. color (eg, red) to a first color. Similarly, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 30(b), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the lord's character display RD22 is displayed in the second color (for example, blue), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the third color. color (eg, red) to a second color. Similarly, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 30(c), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the lord's character display RD22 is displayed in the fourth color (for example, rainbow color), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the fourth color. It is changing from a third color (eg red) to a fourth color. Note that when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the operation result display RD20 is not displayed, and the luminous display of the first chance button 165 is also changed, unlike the previous example. do not.

FIG. 31 is a diagram specifically showing some examples of the second operation effect 2 described with reference to FIG. 26(d).

The state shown on the left side of each of FIGS. 31(a) to 31(c) is a state in which the operation effect is started after the game is over. The first chance button 165 displays a light-emitting display of a fourth color (for example, rainbow color). A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap the large hall animation. As in the example shown in FIG. 29, the first operation prompting display HD1 here consists of a character display LD1 telling the user to press the first chance button 165 and the first chance button 165 displaying the light emitting display of the fourth color. It is composed of a first button display 165D shown in FIG.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the state shown on the right side of FIGS. 31(a) to 31(c) is obtained. In the state shown on the right side of each figure, the effect image display device 157 displays an operation result display RD20 of suggestive display.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 31(a), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the character display RD22 of the lord is displayed in the fifth color (for example, white), and the luminous display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the fourth color. color (for example, rainbow colors) to a fifth color. Similarly, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 31(b), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the character display RD22 of the lord is displayed in a third color (for example, red), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in a fourth color. color (eg, rainbow) to a third color. Similarly, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side is obtained.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 31(c), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the lord's character display RD22 is displayed in the fourth color (for example, rainbow color), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the fourth color. It remains displayed in four colors. Note that when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the operation result display RD20 is not displayed unlike the previous examples.

Furthermore, another example of operation effects will be described.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing another example of operation presentation.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 32(a) is a state in which the operation effect is started after the game is finished. The first chance button 165 displays a third color (for example, red) light-emitting display. A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap the large hall animation. Here, the first operation prompting display HD1 is also similar to the example shown in FIG. It is composed of a first button display 165D representing .

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the first chance button 165 emits light of the third color as shown on the right side of FIG. The display has changed to a luminous display of a first color (eg, yellow). In addition, in the central portion of the display screen of the effect image display device 157, an operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games is displayed. This operation result display RD10 has the same size as the operation result display RD10 described so far, and the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the +100 G AT added game number display RD12 is different from the color of the light emission display of the first chance button 165. different and displayed in a second color (eg, blue). On the other hand, an operation result display RD20 of suggestive display is also displayed at the lower right of the display screen. The operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display displayed at the lower right is smaller than the operation result display RD20 described so far, and is displayed in a reduced size. It is displayed in the same first color as the light-emitting display color of the chance button 165 . In other words, although the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games is displayed with priority over the operation result display RD20 of the reduced suggestive display, the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is The suggestive display operation result display RD20 is given priority over the suggestive display operation result display RD10 that notifies the number of AT-added games, and is displayed in the same color as the frame display RD21 in the suggestive display operation result display RD20. As described above, although the priority of the operation result display RD10 and the operation result display RD20 are different, the operation result display RD10 and the operation result display RD20 may be displayed at the same time. When the operation result display RD10 and the operation result display RD20 are displayed at the same time, when the next game is started, the battle effect is started, and the right to shift to the AT state is stocked by winning the battle effect. That is, even if 100 games are added and the condition for ending the AT state is satisfied, the stocked right shifts to the AT state again. It should be noted that the battle effect is not started when the next game is started, but when the end condition of the AT state is satisfied (for example, when the added 100 games are completed), the battle effect is started and the battle is started. There may be a case where the player wins the performance and shifts to the AT state again.

Further, as in this example, the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the same color as the color of the frame display RD21 in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display, and also the light-emitting display of the first color and the light-emitting display of the first color. It is also possible to alternately display light emitting displays of two colors. Alternatively, half of the light emitting area may be displayed in the first color and the other half in the second color. Furthermore, the area of the light emitting region may be made larger for the priority color. For example, a first color may be displayed in a 3/4 luminous area and a second color may be displayed in a 1/4 luminous area.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 32(b) is also the same as the state shown on the left side of FIG. Then, as shown on the right side of FIG. 32(b), the luminous display of the first chance button 165 changes from the luminous display of the third color to the luminous display of the first color (for example, yellow). Further, the effect image display device 157 displays an operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games, but does not display an operation result display RD20 for suggestive display. In the operation result display RD10 shown on the right side of FIG. 32(b), the color of the frame display RD11 is the second color (for example, blue), unlike the color of the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165. FIG. In this example, the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games is displayed with priority over the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display. As a result, the frame display RD21 is displayed in the first color. The display of the operation result display RD20 is hidden. According to the home pages and strategy guides of game machine manufacturers introducing the slot machine 100, the color of the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 does not match the color of the frame display of the operation result display displayed on the effect image display device 157. In this case, a player who knows that the operation result display of the frame display of the same color as the color of the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 is hidden, can display the frame display RD21 in the first color. It can be guessed that the operation result display RD20 of the displayed suggestive display is hidden, which may improve the interest of the game. Also, when there are three or more types of operation result displays, the player cannot know which type of operation result display is hidden, and the desired type of operation result display is hidden. There is a case where the interest of the game is improved in anticipation of. Alternatively, it is possible to make it so that it is not necessarily hidden. It is possible that the color of the frame display will be inconsistent, and the player does not know whether the display is hidden or not. may improve.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 32C is also the same as the state shown on the left side of FIG. Then, as shown on the right side of FIG. 32(c), the luminous display of the first chance button 165 changes from the luminous display of the third color to the luminous display of the first color (for example, yellow). Further, the effect image display device 157 displays the operation result display RD20 of suggestive display, but does not display the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games. In the operation result display RD20 shown on the right side of FIG. 32(c), the color of the frame display RD21 is the second color (for example, blue), unlike the color of the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165. FIG. In this example, contrary to the previous example, the operation result display RD20 of the suggestive display is given priority over the operation result display RD10 that informs the number of AT-added games. The display of the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games displayed in color is hidden. According to the home pages and strategy guides of game machine manufacturers introducing the slot machine 100, the color of the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 does not match the color of the frame display of the operation result display displayed on the effect image display device 157. In this case, a player who knows that the operation result display of the frame display of the same color as the color of the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 is not displayed can display the frame display RD11 in the first color. It can be inferred that the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of displayed AT-additional games is not displayed, and the interest in the game may be improved. Also, when there are three or more types of operation result displays, the player cannot know which type of operation result display is hidden, and the desired type of operation result display is hidden. There is a case where the interest of the game is improved in anticipation of. Alternatively, it is possible to make it so that it is not necessarily hidden. It is possible that the color of the frame display will be inconsistent, and the player does not know whether the display is hidden or not. may improve.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an example in which an operation means other than the first chance button 165 is operated in the operation effect.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 33(a) is also a state in which the operation effect is started after the game is over, and the first chance button 165 is displayed with a third color (for example, red) luminous display. A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap the large hall animation. Here, the first operation prompting display HD1 is also similar to the example shown in FIG. It is composed of a first button display 165D representing .

When the start lever 135 is operated instead of the first chance button 165 while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the game is started. That is, the three reels 110-112 start rotating. The large hall animation continues to be displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of FIG. (response display) kind of display is not displayed. It should be noted that, when the game is started, other animation (for example, animation dedicated to the game) may be displayed instead of the large hall animation. Also, the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 has changed to the light-emitting display of the fifth color, that is, the default light-emitting display. Note that the first chance button 165 may be turned off. If the user wants to proceed with the game without looking at the light emitting display and the operation result displays RD10 and RD20 as in the example shown in FIG. 28 and the example shown in FIG. be.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 33(b) is also a state in which the operation effect is started after the game is over. The first chance button 165 displays a third color (for example, red) light-emitting display. On the other hand, second chance button 166 is in the off state. A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap the large hall animation. Here, the first operation prompting display HD1 is also similar to the example shown in FIG. It is composed of a first button display 165D representing .

Even if the second chance button 166 in the off state is operated instead of the first chance button 165 while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, as shown on the right side of FIG. , the luminous display of the first chance button 165 that has not been operated changes from the luminous display of the third color to the luminous display of the first color (for example, yellow). On the other hand, the operated second chance button 166 remains unlit. Further, on the effect image display device 157, an operation result display RD20 of suggestive display is displayed as an operation result display (response display) displayed in response to the second chance button 166 being operated. In the operation result display RD20 shown on the right side of FIG. 33(b), the color of the frame display RD21 is the same first color (for example, yellow) as the light-emitting display color of the first chance button 165. FIG. In this example, the second chance button 166 was operated without operating the first chance button 165, but the result is the same as the example (example shown in FIG. 30(a)) when the first chance button 165 is operated. It has become. If the second chance button 166 is operated without operating the first chance button 165, the result may be the same as the example shown in FIG. The result may be the same as the example shown in FIG.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 33(c) is also a state in which the operation effect is started after the end of the game. In this state, the first chance button 165 displays a light-emitting display of the second color (for example, blue). It is On the other hand, the second chance button 166 displays a fifth color (for example, white) light-emitting display. The first chance button 165 may also display a default fifth color (for example, white), or a color other than the first to fifth colors (sixth A color (eg, green) light emitting display may be displayed. Alternatively, the first chance button 165 may be turned off. A large hall animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and a second operation prompting display HD2 prompting the user to operate the second chance button 166 is displayed so as to overlap the large hall animation. The second operation prompting display HD2 here is composed of a character display LD2 indicating that the second chance button 166 should be pressed, and a second button display 166D representing the second chance button 166 on which the index finger is placed. The second button display 166D is a display including the second chance button 166 displaying the light emitting display of the fifth color, and is displayed in the same state as the actual second chance button 166.例文帳に追加Before the second operation prompting display HD2 is displayed, the first chance button 165 emits light in a sixth color (for example, green) to announce that the second operation prompting display HD2 will be displayed.

When the second chance button 166 is operated while the second operation prompting display HD2 is being displayed, the effect image display device 157 displays the operation result of the second chance button 166 as shown on the right side of FIG. 33(c). , an operation result display RD20 of suggestive display is displayed. Also in the operation result display RD20 shown on the right side of FIG. 33(c), the color of the frame display RD21 is the first color (for example, yellow). In this example, the second chance button 166 after being operated also displays a light-emitting display of the same first color as the color of the frame display RD21, and the operated means of operation indicates that the operated means of operation has been operated. A light-emitting display in a color common to the color included in the operation result display (response display) displayed in response is displayed. On the other hand, the first chance button 165 continues to display the light-emitting display of the second color (for example, blue), which is different from the light-emitting display color (first color) of the second chance button 166 after the operation. ing.

As described with reference to FIG. 33(b), even if the second chance button 166 is operated while the first operation prompting display HD1 is being displayed, the operation result display is displayed. Even if the first chance button 165 is operated during the display, the operation result display (response display) such as the operation result display RD10 for informing the number of AT-added games and the operation result display RD20 for suggestive display are not displayed.

It should be noted that when the second chance button 166 is operated, the first chance button 165 may also display light emission in the first color.

Further, after the operation, the second chance button 166 may remain illuminated in the fifth color, may be extinguished, or may be displayed in the second color (for example, blue). For example, the light-emitting display may change to another color.

Furthermore, in the case where the second chance button 166 is configured to perform only the fifth color light emission display, the second chance button 166 may remain in the fifth color light emission display after being operated. , may be turned off.

Note that both the first button display 165D and the second button display 166D are displayed on the display effect image display device 157 before the display of the operation prompting display such as the first operation prompting display HD1 and the second operation prompting display HD2. In some cases, it may be announced that either one of the first-operation prompting display HD1 and the second-operation prompting display HD2 will be displayed.

In addition, the color of the frame displays RD11 and RD21 changes in both the operation result display RD10 that notifies the number of AT-added games and the operation result display RD20 that is a suggestive display. may change, the color of the kimono of the lord's character may change, or the color of the character display and the color of the dialogue may change. That is, the main color of the operation result display, the most conspicuous color, and the color with the largest display area may change to the light-emitting display color of the operation means after the operation.

Furthermore, in the present specification, the common color does not have to be completely the same, and there may be a difference in shade, and there may be a difference due to different types of devices such as liquid crystal display devices and LEDs. good too. If the hues are similar, such as yellow, blue, and red, they are treated as common colors.

In addition, the display effects on the operating means after the operation may be display effects related to the operation result displays RD10 and RD20, or may be display effects matching the colors of the operation result displays RD10 and RD20. It may be a display effect that makes the result display RD10, RD20 image.

Furthermore, it may be a combination of the operation result display RD10 that notifies the number of AT-added games and the operation result display that suggests the degree of expectation for shifting to a state in which a big bonus is awarded, or an operation that notifies the number of AT-added games. Even if it is a combination of the result display RD10, the operation result display RD20 suggesting the degree of expectation of shifting to the state where the AT state is awarded, and the operation result display suggesting the degree of expectation of shifting to the state where the big bonus is awarded. good.

In summary, the display effects (e.g., light-emitting display) performed by the operation means (e.g., the first chance button 165) after the operation means are displayed on the display means (e.g., the effect image display device 157). It may be displayed during presentation display (for example, operation response display). For example, the color displayed by the display effect performed by the operation means is displayed in the effect display performed by the display means.

Further, the display effects (eg, light emitting display) performed by the operating means after the operating means (eg, first chance button 165) is operated are the first display effect (eg, light emitting display of the first color) and the second display effect (eg, light emitting display of the first color). It is selected from among a plurality of display effects including a display effect (e.g., light emitting display of a second color), and the first display effect is a first effect display A (e.g., , 50 game addition) may be displayed during the display of the operation result display RD10), and the second display effect (for example, a light emitting display in a second color) may be displayed by display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 ) during the display of the first effect display B (for example, the operation result display RD10 notifying that 100 games are added). For example, the color displayed in the first display effect is displayed during the display of the first effect display A (for example, the operation result display RD10 notifying that 50 games are added), and the color displayed in the second display effect is This is displayed during the display of the first effect display B (for example, the operation result display RD10 that informs of the addition of 100 games).

Alternatively, the first display effect (for example, light-emitting display of the first color) is the second effect display A (for example, the operation result display RD20 suggesting the degree of expectation of 25%) on the display means (for example, the effect image display device 157). ), and the second display effect (e.g., light-emitting display of a second color) is the second effect display B (e.g., expectation It may be displayed during the display of the operation result display RD20) suggesting a degree of 50%. That is, the color displayed in the first display effect is displayed during the display of the second effect display A (for example, the operation result display RD20 suggesting an expectation level of 25%), and the color displayed in the second display effect is , is displayed during the display of the second effect display (for example, the operation result display RD20 suggesting an expectation level of 50%).

Furthermore, the third display effect (e.g., luminous display of a third color) performed by operating means (e.g., first chance button 165) is changed to the first display effect (e.g., first color display) after operating the operating means. luminous display), and the third display effect (e.g., luminous display of a third color) performed by the operating means changes to a second display effect (e.g., a luminous display of a second color) after the operation of the operating means luminous display).

In addition, although the slot machine 100 has been described as an example in the description so far, the selection of the volume level by operating the first selection switch 190 described above, the selection of setting to the power saving mode, and the operation It is also applicable to pachinko machines to devise the luminous display after the operation of the means and to associate the luminous display after the operation of the operating means with the mode of the operation result displays RD10 and RD20.

FIG. 34 is a back view of a pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied, viewed from the back side.

The pachinko machine 100P has a ball tank 150P, which has an upwardly opening opening at the upper part of the rear surface, for temporarily storing game balls. A tank rail 154P is provided for guiding the falling ball through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152P located on the right side of the rear surface.

The payout device 152P is made of a cylindrical member, and has therein a payout motor, a sprocket and a payout sensor (not shown). The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, temporarily retains game balls that have flowed down into the payout device 152P through the tank rail 154P, and rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Thus, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one to the lower side of the payout device 152P.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball has passed, either a high or low signal, and when the game ball has not passed Either the high or low signal is output to the payout control unit. A game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach an upper tray provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 100P. A ball is paid out to the player.

On the left side of the payout device 152P in the drawing, there is a main board case 158P that houses a main control board 156P that constitutes a main control section that performs overall game control processing, and control processing related to performance based on processing information generated by the main control section. A first sub-board case 162P that houses the first sub-control board 160P that constitutes the first sub-control unit that performs A second sub-board case 165P that houses a second sub-control board 164P that constitutes a game ball, a payout control unit that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and an error cancellation switch 168P that cancels an error by the operation of a game clerk. A payout board case 172P that houses the payout control board 170P, a launch board case 176P that houses a launch control board 174P that constitutes a launch control unit that performs control processing related to launching game balls, and a power supply that supplies power to various electrical game machines. A power supply control board 182P comprising a power switch 178P that constitutes a control unit and turns on/off the power by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear switch 180P that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit by being operated when the power is turned on is housed. and a CR interface section 186P for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section and the card unit.

The RWM clear switch 180P is a switch that can perform RWM clear (initialization of RAM) by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 100P while operating. It should be noted that the RAM clear switch 180P, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on while being operated, gives a predetermined notification (for example, a character display or sound saying "Please press again to clear the RAM", or a character display). and sound), and if the operation is performed again, the RAM may be cleared.

A first selection switch 190P, which is the same as the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 6A, is arranged on the upper left of the first sub-board case 162P. Since this first selection switch 190P is arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 100P, a person who can unlock the front frame door of the pachinko machine 100P (for example, a store clerk, etc.) However, a person (for example, a player) who cannot unlock the front frame door cannot perform the operation.

The RWM clear switch 180P is arranged on the lower left side of the rear surface, and the first selection switch 190P is arranged on the upper left side of the rear surface. It may be placed at a position far from the gap created when the door is opened), or vice versa.

On the front side (player side) of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. A second effect button that replaces 166 is arranged.

According to the above description,
"Display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
a first operation means capable of displaying a light emitting display [for example, the first chance button 165];
A game table comprising
The display means is capable of displaying a first operation prompting display [for example, a first operation prompting display HD1] prompting an operation of the first operation means,
The display means displays a first operation result display [for example, an operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games] when the first operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed. may be displayed,
The first operating means may display a first light-emitting display [for example, a first color (yellow) light-emitting display] when operated during the display of the first operation prompting display. and
The first light-emitting display is a light-emitting display related to the first operation result display in the first mode [for example, a mode in which the frame display RD11 is the first color (yellow)] [for example, a common color system]. display] [for example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 28(a)],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

By looking at the first operation means even after the operation, it may be possible to obtain information corresponding to the operation. In addition, the display means may display various images at the same time or use various display colors at the same time. The effect represented by the light emission display may be easier for the player to understand. Further, since the first light-emitting display and the first operation result display are related displays, a coherent presentation is developed, which also makes it easier for the player to understand the presentation.

The first operating means may have a built-in light-emitting means (for example, LED) or a built-in image display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device or a dot matrix display device). There may be. Further, the first operation means may execute a display effect instead of the light emission display. For example, an effect in which a certain pattern is displayed may be executed.

again,
"The first operation result display is a display related to the player's privilege [for example, AT state],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Note that the first operation result display may be a display relating to the grant amount of the privilege granted to the player, may be a display relating to the granting period of the privilege granted to the player, or may be a display relating to the period during which the privilege is granted to the player. It may be a display related to the granting time of the privilege granted to the person.

again,
"Equipped with a second operating means [for example, the second chance button 166],
When the first operating means [for example, the first chance button 165] displays the first light emitting display when the second operating means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed. There is [for example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 33(b)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the player's hand does not cover the first operating means, the first light-emitting display can be easily seen. Further, the first light emitting display is performed by operating the second operation means, which may surprise the player and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second operation means may be capable of displaying a light-emitting display. For example, the second operation means may have a built-in light-emitting means (for example, LED) or a built-in image display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device or a dot matrix display device). There may be.

again,
"Equipped with a third operating means [e.g., start lever 135],
The first operation means does not display the first light emitting display when the third operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed. )],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the game can be played without looking at the first light-emitting display.

It should be noted that the third operation means may be operated to advance the game (for example, start the game).

again,
"When the first setting [e.g., power saving mode setting] is selected, the first operation means [e.g. ” to “F”], it may shift to the first state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a light-off state or a dimmed state],
When the first operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is displayed, even if the first setting is selected [for example, in a non-demo state (normal state)], There is a case where the first light emitting display is displayed,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player can confirm the first light-emitting display even when the power saving mode is set.

The power consumption of the first operating means may be reduced when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting. That is, the first setting may be the power saving mode, and the second setting may be the normal mode (non-power saving mode).

Further, the first operation means may shift to a first state corresponding to the first setting when the first setting is set. The first state may be a turned off state. That is, it may be in a state in which light emission display is not performed.

The display means displays a second display related to the second operation means [for example, the first guidance display icon GI1 ] can be displayed [for example, FIG. It may be characterized in that when an operation is performed, a display in response to the operation (for example, display of a payout table shown in FIG. 18(a)) is displayed on the display means.

again,
"The display means can display the first operation prompting display after the game ends [for example, after the third stop] [for example, the state shown on the left side of FIG. 28(a), etc.]. ,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The amusement machine is a slot machine, and includes a plurality of reels (for example, three reels) each of which stops rotating when a stop operation is performed, and the display means displays the first operation prompting display. can be displayed after a reel that has been rotating the slowest among the plurality of reels is stopped (for example, a third stop operation).

again,
"The first luminescent display has a main luminescent color that is the same color as the display color in the first mode [eg, the mode in which the frame display RD11 is the first color (yellow)] [eg, the first is the color (yellow) of
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to the above description,
"Display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
a first operation means capable of displaying a light emitting display [for example, the first chance button 165];
A game machine comprising
The display means is capable of displaying a first operation prompting display [for example, a first operation prompting display HD1] prompting an operation of the first operation means,
When the first operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed, the display means displays a second mode [for example, a mode where the frame display RD11 is in a second color (blue)]. A first operation result display [for example, an operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games] may be displayed,
When the first operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed, the display means displays the first mode [for example, the mode where the frame display RD21 is in the first color (yellow)]. A second operation result display [for example, a suggestive display operation result display RD20] may be displayed,
The first operating means may display a first light-emitting display [for example, a first color (yellow) light-emitting display] when operated during the display of the first operation prompting display. and
The first light emitting display is related to the second operation result display of the first aspect rather than the first operation result display of the second aspect [for example, the display color in the second aspect including a color closer to the display color in the first aspect than
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this amusement machine, it may be possible to suggest an operation result display by the luminous display (the first luminous display) of the first operating means after the operation. That is, if the first light-emitting display is displayed earlier than the operation result display, it is possible to suggest to the player that the operation result display displayed on the display means will be displayed in the first mode. . In addition, since the first light emitting display and the second operation result display of the first mode are associated displays, a coherent presentation is developed and the player can easily understand the presentation.

The first operating means may have a built-in light-emitting means (for example, LED) or a built-in image display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device or a dot matrix display device). There may be.

Further, the first light-emitting display may be a light-emitting display unrelated to the first operation result display of the second aspect. The first operating means may display a second light-emitting display when operated during the display of the first operation-promoting display, and the second light-emitting display is the second aspect. It may be a light-emitting display related to the first operation result display.

The second operation result display may be the same type of operation result display as the first operation result display, or may be a different type of operation result display.

The second operation result display may be a display suggesting the player's degree of expectation that a privilege will be awarded. Alternatively, it may be a display of advance notice that a privilege will be given to the player. In the case where it is regarded as the display of the notice in this way, it may be a display showing the reliability of the notice.

again,
"The display means displays both the first operation result display and the second operation result display when the first operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed. may be displayed,
The first operating means may display the first light-emitting display in a state in which both of the operation result displays are displayed on the display means [for example, the state shown on the right],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player can recognize the operation result display with a high priority by looking at the first operation means.

The first operation means displays both the first operation result display of the second mode and the second operation result display of the first mode on the display means. The first light-emitting display may be displayed in the state where the light-emitting display is being performed. Alternatively, the first operation means displays both the first operation result display of the second mode and the second operation result display of the first mode on the display means. The first light-emitting display may always be displayed in the state where the light-emitting display is on.

Further, the first operating means may display a third light-emitting display in a state in which both of the operation result displays are displayed on the display means, and the third light-emitting display A light emitting display different from the one light emitting display and the second light emitting display may be used. The third light-emitting display may be, for example, a light-emitting display related to the first operation result display and also a light-emitting display related to the second operation result display. good. More specifically, the third light emission display may be a display of alternate light emission of a color common to the display color in the second aspect and a color common to the display color in the first aspect. However, even if it is a display in which a part of the light-emitting region is light-emitting and displayed in the same color as the display color in the second aspect, and the remaining part is light-emitting and displayed in the same color as the display color in the first aspect. good.

again,
"The first operation means is such that the display means is the first operation result display of the second mode and the second operation result display of the first mode. The first light emission display may be displayed while only the second operation result display is displayed [for example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 30(a)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

In addition, the first operation means is such that the display means is the second mode of the first operation result display of the second mode and the second operation result display of the first mode. The first light emitting display may not be displayed while only the first operation result display is being displayed.

again,
"Both of the operation result displays displayed on the display means are displays in which the second operation result display is displayed smaller than the first operation result display."
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this amusement machine, even if it is difficult for the player to see the high-priority display (the second operation result display) on the display means, the player can see the high-priority operation result display by looking at the first operation means. can be recognized.

again,
"The first operating means may display the first light-emitting display when operated during the display of the first operation-promoting display [for example, the right side of FIG. indicated state],
The first light emitting display is the first operation result display [for example, an operation result display for notifying the number of AT-added games] in a first mode [for example, a mode in which the frame display RD11 is the first color (yellow)]. RD10], which is a light emitting display related to [e.g., a light emitting display including a color common to the display color in the first aspect];
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The display color in the first aspect of the first operation result display and the display color in the first aspect of the second operation result display are a common first color [e.g., yellow],
The first light-emitting display is a light-emitting display in which a main emission color is the first color,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The first operation result display is a display related to the player's privilege [for example, AT state],
The second operation result display is a display of advance notice that a certain effect [for example, a battle effect that shifts to AT state when winning] will start.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"Equipped with a second operating means [for example, the second chance button 166],
The first operation means [for example, the first chance button 165] displays the first light-emitting display when the second operation means is operated while the first operation-promoting display is being displayed. There is [for example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 33(b)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"Equipped with a third operating means [e.g., start lever 135],
The first operation means does not display the first light emitting display when the third operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed. )],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"When the first setting [e.g., power saving mode setting] is selected, the first operation means [e.g. " to "F"], it may shift to the first state corresponding to the first setting [for example, extinguished state or dimmed state],
When the first operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is displayed, even if the first setting is selected [for example, in a non-demo state (normal state)], There is a case where the first light emitting display is displayed,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The display means can display the first operation prompting display after the game ends [for example, after the third stop] [for example, the state shown on the left side of FIG. 28(a), etc.]. ,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to the above description,
"Display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
a first operation means capable of displaying a light emitting display [for example, the first chance button 165];
A game table comprising
The display means is capable of displaying a first operation prompting display [for example, a first operation prompting display HD1] prompting an operation of the first operation means,
The first operating means may display a third light-emitting display during display of the first operation-promoting display [for example, the state shown on the left side of FIG. 28(a)],
The first operating means may display a first light-emitting display when operated during display of the first operation-promoting display [for example, the right side of FIG. situation],
The first operating means may display a second light-emitting display when operated during the display of the first operation-promoting display [for example, the right side of FIG. situation],
The first luminescent display is a display including a luminescent color of a first color [e.g., yellow],
The second luminescent display is a display including a luminescent color of a second color [e.g., blue],
The third luminescent display is a display that includes a luminescent color of a third color [e.g., red].
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

It would be uninteresting if the state after operation of the operating means is either to continue the light emission display before operation or to turn off the light, but according to this game machine, you can expect a change in color after operation. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The first light emission display is display in which a main emission color is a first color; the second light emission display is display in which a main emission color is a second color; The third luminous display may be a display in which the main luminous color is the third color.

Moreover, the display including the emission color of the first color may be the display not including the emission color of the second color and the emission color of the third color. Alternatively, even if at least one of the emission color of the second color and the emission color of the third color is included, the display including the emission color of the first color most often or the first color It is acceptable if the color of is most conspicuous.

The display including the emission color of the second color may be a display that does not include the emission color of the first color and the emission color of the third color. Alternatively, even if at least one of the first emission color and the third emission color is included, a display that includes the second emission color most often or the second emission color is included. Any display in which the luminescent color of the color of .

The display including the third luminescent color may be a display that does not include the first luminescent color and the second luminescent color. Alternatively, even if at least one of the emission colors of the first color and the second color is included, the display including the emission color of the third color most often or the third emission color is used. Any display in which the luminescent color of is most conspicuous may be used.

Further, the first operating means may display the third light-emitting display when operated during display of the first operation-promoting display.

again,
"The display means is capable of displaying a first suggestive display that suggests the degree of expectation that a privilege [for example, AT state] will be granted to the player,
The display means is capable of displaying a second suggestive display suggesting the degree of expectation,
The display means is capable of displaying a third suggestive display suggesting the degree of expectation,
the first suggestion display is a display including the first color [for example, the operation result display RD20 in which the frame display RD21 is the first color (yellow)];
the second suggestive display is a display including the second color [for example, an operation result display RD20 in which the frame display RD21 is the second color (blue)];
the third suggestive display is a display including the third color [for example, an operation result display RD20 in which the frame display RD21 is a third color (red)];
The degree of expectation [for example, 25%] suggested by the first suggestive display is different from the degree of expectation [for example, 50%] suggested by the second suggestive display,
The degree of expectation suggested by the first indication of suggestion is different from the degree of expectation suggested by the third indication of suggestion [for example, 75%],
The degree of expectation suggested by the second suggestive display is different from the degree of expectation suggested by the third suggestive display,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player can recognize the degree of expectation by the color of the light-emitting display after operating the first operating means.

The first suggestive display corresponds to the first aspect of the second operation result display, the second suggestive display corresponds to the second aspect of the second operation result display, The third suggestion display may correspond to a third aspect of the second operation result display.

Further, the first suggestive display is a display in which the first color is the most conspicuous among the included colors, and the second suggestive display is a display in which the second color is the most conspicuous among the included colors. The most prominent display, and the third suggestive display may be the display in which the third color is the most prominent among the included colors. The first suggestive display is a display that matches the first color, the second suggestive display is a display that matches the second color, and the third suggestive display is a display that matches the second color. It may be displayed in three colors. The first suggestive display is a display that gives an image of the first color, the second suggestive display is a display that gives an image of the second color, and the third suggestive display is a display that gives an image of the second color. It may be a display that gives an image of three colors.

again,
"The degree of expectation [for example, 25%] suggested by the first suggestion is smaller than the degree of expectation [for example, 75%] suggested by the third suggestion,
the degree of expectation suggested by the second suggestive display [for example, 50%] is less than the degree of expectation suggested by the third suggestive display [for example, 75%];
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The first color is a color that suggests that the degree of expectation is smaller than the third color, and the second color is a color that suggests that the degree of expectation is smaller than the third color. It may be a suggestive color.

By performing light emitting display with low expectation after operating the first operation means (by changing from the third light emitting display to the first light emitting display or the second light emitting display), the player is kept calm. may be able to

again,
"When the first operating means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed, the display means displays a first operation result [for example, an operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT-added games]. and
The first light-emitting display is a light-emitting display related to the first operation result display in the first mode [for example, a mode in which the frame display RD11 is the first color (yellow)] [for example, a common color system]. display] [for example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 28(a)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The first operation result display is a display related to the player's privilege [for example, AT state],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The first operation result display has a second mode and a third mode in addition to the first mode,
The first aspect is an aspect including the first color [for example, an aspect in which the frame display RD11 is the first color (yellow)],
The second aspect is an aspect including the second color [for example, an aspect in which the frame display RD11 is the second color (blue)],
The third aspect is an aspect including the third color [for example, an aspect in which the frame display RD11 is a third color (red)].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

Note that the aspect including the first color may be an aspect that does not include the second color and the third color. Alternatively, even if at least one of the second color and the third color is included, the aspect in which the first color is included most or the first color is the most conspicuous Any form is acceptable.

The mode including the second color may be a case in which the first color and the third color are not included. Alternatively, even if at least one color of the first color and the third color is included, the aspect in which the second color is included the most or the second color is the most conspicuous Any form is acceptable.

The mode including the third color may be a case in which the first color and the second color are not included. Alternatively, even if at least one of the first color and the second color is included, a mode in which the third color is included most or the third color is most conspicuous Any form is acceptable.

again,
"Equipped with a second operation means [for example, the second chance button 166],
The first operation means [for example, the first chance button 165] displays the first light-emitting display when the second operation means is operated while the first operation-promoting display is being displayed. There is [for example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 33(b)],
The first operating means may display the second light emitting display when the second operating means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Even if the first operating means may display the third light-emitting display when the second operating means is operated while the first operation-promoting display is being displayed, good.

again,
"Equipped with a third operating means [e.g., start lever 135],
The first operating means does not display the first light-emitting display when the third operating means is operated while the first operation prompting display is being displayed [for example, FIG. )],
The first operating means does not display the second light-emitting display when the third operating means is operated while the first operation-promoting display is displayed. )],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"When the first setting [e.g., power saving mode setting] is selected, the first operation means [e.g. ” to “F”], it may shift to the first state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a light-off state or a dimmed state],
When the first operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is displayed, even if the first setting is selected [for example, in a non-demo state (normal state)], There is a case where the first light emitting display is displayed,
When the first operation means is operated while the first operation prompting display is displayed, even if the first setting is selected [for example, in a non-demo state (normal state)], There is a case where the second light emitting display is displayed,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The display means can display the first operation prompting display after the game ends [for example, after the third stop] [for example, the state shown on the left side of FIG. 28(a), etc.]. ,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to the above description,
"A first device [for example, a first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, a left side lamp 144L, a right side lamp 144R, and a backlight module 740];
a second device [for example, effect image display device 157];
The first setting [for example, power saving mode setting] can be selected according to the operation [for example, the instruction part 190b is set to either “9” or “A” to “F” shown in FIG. case] selection operation means [for example, the first selection switch 190],
A game machine comprising
When the operation means for selection is operated and the first setting is selected, the first device shifts to a first state corresponding to the first setting [eg, extinguished state or dimmed state]. and
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the second device enters a second state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a state in which the demo animation is reproduced in a dark state. ],
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, after the first device transitions to the first state [for example, FIG. 21(d)], the second device It may shift to the second state [for example, FIG. 21 (g) to (h)],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be easier to confirm that the first device has transitioned to the first state and that the second device has transitioned to the second state. That is, due to the time lag, it may be possible to check the first state of the first device and then check the second state of the second device.

again,
"Even if the first setting is selected by operating the selection operating means, the first device does not shift to the first state unless it is in a certain state [for example, a demo state." ,
The second device does not shift to the second state unless the state is the certain state [for example, the demo state] even if the operation means for selection is operated and the first setting is selected. ,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The certain state means a state (demonstration state) in which a demonstration effect is being performed.

again,
``The selection operation means can select a second setting [for example, a non-power saving mode (normal mode) setting] according to the operation [for example, the instruction unit 190b is set to "0" shown in FIG. ~ When matched to any of "8"],
the first device consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting;
The second device consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

That is, the first setting is a power saving setting, while the second setting is a non-power saving setting (normal setting).

again,
"the number of first devices [e.g., six] is greater than the number of second devices [e.g., one];
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to preferentially shift to the first state the first device, which has a large number, and reduce power consumption.

again,
"The power consumption [e.g., 0] of the first device in the first state is less than the power consumption of the second device in the second state,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

That is, the power saving effect of the first device is higher than that of the second device.

Power consumption in the first device during execution of a certain effect may be greater than power consumption in the second device during execution of the certain effect. Power consumption can be reduced by preferentially shifting the first device, which consumes a large amount of power, to the first state.

again,
``The selection operation means is provided at a position where the player cannot operate [for example, the inside of the main body 101 or the back side of the game table].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"A first control means [for example, a first sub-controller 400] for controlling the first device;
a second control means [e.g. VDP 516] for controlling said second device;
with
The first control means transmits a first signal regarding the first setting,
The first device receives the first signal from the first control means without going through the second control means,
the second device receives the first signal via the second control means;
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

In addition, it comprises a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control means for receiving a command transmitted from the main control means and performing control based on the command, the sub-control means being the first and the second control means. Further, the sub-control means may be means for controlling an effect.

again,
"The time required for the second device to transition from a state different from the second state to the second state [for example, FIGS. longer than the time it takes for the device to transition from a state different from the first state to the first state [e.g., FIG. 21(d)];
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The first device is a first rendering means [e.g., first light emitting means, first display means],
The second device is a second effect means [e.g., second light emitting means, second display means],
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the second effect means shifts to the second state after the first effect means shifts to the first state. may,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
``The gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 25],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

note that,
"A game machine comprising a first notification means, a second notification means, and an operation means capable of setting a first effect setting, wherein the operation means is operated to set the first effect setting is set, the first notification means becomes a notification mode corresponding to the first effect setting, and thereafter the second notification means becomes a notification mode corresponding to the first effect setting. A playground characterized by
was also explained.

again,
"The operation means is a means that can set a second effect setting by being operated, and the first effect setting is a setting in which the power consumption of the notification means is suppressed more than the second effect setting. A game machine characterized by:
also explained.

again,
"A gaming machine characterized in that the number of said first notification means is greater than the number of said second notification means."
was also explained.

again,
"A gaming machine characterized in that the power consumption of said first notification means during notification of a certain notification is greater than the power consumption of said second notification means during notification of said certain notification."
was also explained.

again,
"A gaming machine characterized in that said operating means are means that cannot be operated by a player."
was also explained.

again,
" A first control means and a second control means are provided, and the first notification means transmits a signal related to the first effect setting from the first control means through the second control means. and the second notification means receives a signal related to the first effect setting from the first control means via the second control means. Characteristic game table." was also explained.

again,
"The time taken from the notification mode not corresponding to the first effect setting to the notification mode corresponding to the first effect setting is longer for the second notification means than for the first notification means. A playground characterized by a long."
was also explained.

According to the above description,
"Display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
selection operation means [for example, first selection switch 190] capable of selecting a first setting [for example, power saving mode setting] according to an operation;
A game machine comprising
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected [for example, when the instruction part 190b is set to either "9" or "A" to "F" shown in FIG. ], the display means may start displaying the first animation [e.g., demo animation] from the beginning [e.g., FIG. 21(d)],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this game machine, it becomes easy to check the first animation from the beginning.

again,
"When the selection operation means is operated [for example, switch operation (3) shown in Fig. 21] and the first setting is selected, the display means displays the first animation." is to restart the display of the animation from the beginning [for example, FIG. 21(d)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Note that the first animation may be a demonstration animation. The demo animation is an animation that is started to be displayed on the display means after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses without restarting the game after the end of one game. In other words, the demo animation is started when the player does not perform any operation while the second animation (non-demonstration animation) is being displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds). It is an anime that will be played.

again,
``The display means is configured so that the selection operation means is operated [for example, switch operation (3) shown in FIG. 19] while the second animation [for example, the non-demonstration animation shown in FIG. Even if the setting is selected, the display of the first animation does not start from the beginning [for example, the example shown in FIG. 20],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"Even if the selection operation means is operated [for example, switch operation (3) shown in FIG. 19] and the first setting is selected during display of the second animation, the display means to continue displaying the animation [for example, FIG. 19(d)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

The second animation may be an animation that is not displayed in the certain state (for example, demo state).

again,
"When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected during the display of the first animation, the display means displays the first animation that has started to be displayed from the beginning. Display in a display mode [for example, a darkened display mode] corresponding to the setting [for example, FIG. 21 (g) to (h)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"Producing means [for example, the first production lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, the backlight module 740],
When the operation means for selection is operated and the first setting is selected, the effect means shifts to a first state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a light-off state or a dimmed state]. and
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the display means changes to a second state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a state in which the demo animation is reproduced in a dark state]. may migrate,
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the display means changes to the second state after the effect means shifts to the first state [for example, FIG. 21(d)]. state [for example, FIG. 21 (g) to (h)]
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Note that the effect means may be a light emitting means. Also, the first state may refer to a state in which the effect means executes the effect corresponding to the first setting. Also, the second state refers to a state in which the first animation is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the first setting.

again,
"Even if the selection operating means is operated and the first setting is selected, the rendering means is not in a state where the first animation is displayed [for example, a demonstration state]. does not transition to
Even if the first setting is selected by operating the selection operation means, the display means is in the second state unless the first animation is being displayed [for example, a demonstration state]. which does not migrate,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
``The selection operation means can select a second setting [for example, a non-power saving mode (normal mode) setting] according to the operation [for example, the instruction unit 190b is set to "0" shown in FIG. ~ When matched to any of "8"],
wherein the effect means consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting;
The display means consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the first setting is a power saving setting, while the second setting is a non-power saving setting (normal setting).

again,
"The number of the production means [for example, 6] is greater than the number of the display means [for example, 1],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is possible to preferentially shift to the first state the production means having a large number, thereby suppressing the power consumption.

again,
"The power consumption [for example, 0] of the rendering means in the first state is smaller than the power consumption of the display means in the second state.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the power saving effect is higher with the presentation means than with the first display means.

Power consumption of the effect means during execution of a certain effect may be greater than power consumption of the display means during execution of the certain effect. Power consumption can be reduced by preferentially shifting to the first state for the presentation means that consumes a large amount of power.

again,
``The selection operation means is provided at a position where the player cannot operate [for example, the inside of the main body 101 or the back side of the game table].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
`` A first control means [for example, a first sub-controller 400 ] that controls the effect means,
a second control means [e.g. VDP 516] for controlling said display means;
with
The first control means transmits a first signal regarding the first setting,
The effect means receives the first signal from the first control means without passing through the second control means,
A gaming machine, wherein the display means receives the first signal via the second control means. 』
also explained.

In addition, it comprises a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control means for receiving a command transmitted from the main control means and performing control based on the command, the sub-control means being the first and the second control means. Further, the sub-control means may be means for controlling an effect.

again,
"The time required for the display means to transition from a state different from the second state to the second state [for example, FIGS. longer than the time required to transition from a state different from one state to the first state [e.g., FIG. 21(d)];
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
``The gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 25],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to the above description,
"first light emitting means [for example, the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, the backlight module 740];
a second light emitting means [for example, a second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166];
The first setting [for example, power saving mode setting] can be selected according to the operation [for example, the instruction part 190b is set to either “9” or “A” to “F” shown in FIG. case] selection operation means [for example, the first selection switch 190],
A game machine comprising
When the selection operating means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first light emitting means shifts to a state corresponding to the first setting [for example, an extinguished state or a dimmed state]. is [for example, FIG. 21(d)],
Even if the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the second light emitting means does not shift to a state corresponding to the first setting [for example, an extinguished state or a dimmed state]. [e.g., remains lit white in FIG. 21(d)],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this game machine, the difference between the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be recognized by simultaneously recognizing that the state corresponding to the first setting will be changed and that the state will not be changed. It may become easier.

again,
"First operation means [eg, first chance button 165],
a second operating means [for example, the second chance button 166];
with
The first operating means has the first light emitting means [for example, a first effect lamp],
The second operating means has the second light emitting means [for example, a second effect lamp],
The selection operation means can select a second setting [for example, a non-power saving mode (normal mode) setting] according to the operation [for example, the instruction part 190b can be set to "0" to "0" shown in FIG. When combined with any of "8"],
The first setting is a setting that suppresses the power consumption of the first light emitting means more than the second setting.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The player can easily recognize that the first operating means can be operated by lighting or blinking the first light emitting means. Also, the player can easily recognize that the second operating means can be operated by lighting or blinking the second light emitting means. Further, the first setting is a power saving setting, and the second operating means having the second light emitting means that does not transition to a state corresponding to this setting is operated even if the first setting is set. The player can be made to recognize that it is possible. Moreover, as a result, the load on the first operating means can be reduced.

again,
"Equipped with display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
The display means can display a second display [for example, a first guidance display icon GI1] related to the second operation means in a state in which the first setting is set [for example, FIG. (b) to (d) and (h) in the same figure],
When the second display is displayed on the display means in a state where the first setting is set, and the second operation means is operated, a response display to the operation on the display means [for example, The payout table shown in FIG. 18(a)] is displayed.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The second display may be an operation-promoting display that prompts the operation of the second operating means, or may be an operation-promoting display that suggests the operation of the second operating means. , the second operation means may be displayed. For example, the first guidance display icon GI1 corresponds to this second display.

again,
"When the second display is displayed on the display means in the state where the first setting is set, and the first operation means is operated, a response display to the operation on the display means [for example, , setting suggestion display shown in FIG. 18(b)] may be displayed.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it may be possible to surprise the player by performing the response display by operating the operating means that is considered to be invalid.

Note that the state in which the first setting is set may be a demonstration state. That is, the power saving setting is set in the demo state. The state in which the response display may be displayed on the display means may be a non-demonstration state (normal state) shifted from the demonstration state. That is, when the first operation means is operated, the demo state is changed to the non-demonstration state (normal state), and even if the first operation means is operated instead of the second operation means, The response display may be performed as an effect, or the first operation means may be a hidden operation means and the game information may be displayed as the response display.

Further, the response display to the operation of the first operation means performed while the second display is displayed may be the same display as the response display to the operation of the second operation means, or may be a different display. There may be.

again,
"When the first operation means is operated in a state where the first setting is set [for example, whether or not the second display is displayed], the display means In response to the operation [for example, the setting suggestion display shown in FIG. 18(b)] may be displayed.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it may be possible to surprise the player by performing the response display by operating the operating means that is considered to be invalid.

Here, the second display may or may not be displayed on the display means. The response display to the operation of the first operation means performed with the second display hidden may be the same display as the response display to the operation of the second operation means, or may be a different display. good too.

again,
"When the first operation means is operated while the first setting is set, the response display to the operation may not be displayed on the display means.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the display means may shift to a state corresponding to the first setting,
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first light emitting means is in a state corresponding to the first setting (hereinafter referred to as "first state") [for example, 21(d)], the display means is in a state corresponding to the first setting (hereinafter referred to as “second state”) [for example, demo A state in which animation is played back in a dark state] [for example, FIG. 21 (g) to FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"Even if the selection operating means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first light-emitting means is in a state corresponding to the first setting unless it is in a certain state [for example, a demonstration state]. is non-migratory and
The display means does not shift to a state corresponding to the first setting unless the certain state [for example, demonstration state] is selected even if the first setting is selected by operating the operation means for selection. is
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

A certain state means a state (demonstration state) in which a demonstration effect is being performed.

again,
"The power consumption of the first light emitting means is reduced when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting, and
The display means consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the first setting is a power saving setting, while the second setting is a non-power saving setting (normal setting).

again,
"The number of said first light emitting means [for example, 6] is greater than the number of said display means [for example, 1],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to preferentially shift to the first state the first light emitting means, which are numerous in number, and to suppress the power consumption.

again,
"The power consumption [e.g., 0] of the first light emitting means in the first state is less than the power consumption of the display means in the second state,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

That is, the power saving effect of the first light emitting means is higher than that of the display means.

Power consumption in the first light emitting means during execution of a certain effect may be greater than power consumption in the display means during execution of the certain effect. Power consumption can be suppressed by preferentially shifting the first light emitting means, which consumes a large amount of power, to the first state.

again,
`` A first control means [for example, a first sub-controller 400] that controls the first light emitting means;
a second control means [e.g. VDP 516] for controlling said display means;
with
The first control means transmits a first signal regarding the first setting,
The first light emitting means receives the first signal from the first control means without going through the second control means,
A gaming machine, wherein the display means receives the first signal via the second control means. 』
also explained.

In addition, it comprises a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control means for receiving a command transmitted from the main control means and performing control based on the command, the sub-control means being the first and the second control means. Further, the sub-control means may be means for controlling an effect.

again,
"The time required for the display means to transition from a state different from the second state to the second state [for example, FIGS. is longer than the time required to transition from a state different from the first state to the first state [e.g., FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
``The selection operation means is provided at a position where the player cannot operate [for example, the inside of the main body 101 or the back side of the game table].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
``The gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 25],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The prefixes for identification such as "first . For example, "second .." may be replaced with "first ..".

It should be noted that the actions and effects described in the embodiments described so far are only the most preferred actions and effects, and the actions and effects of the present invention are limited to those described here. isn't it. In addition, even if the constituent elements are included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. described above, the constituent elements may be used in other embodiments, examples, or It may be applied to modified examples, various examples, additional remarks, and the like. That is, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the constituent features included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. Even if it is applied to an example, various examples, notes, etc., it can be established as a unified technical idea.

A slot machine according to an embodiment of the gaming machine will be described below with reference to FIGS. 35 to 86. FIG.

In the slot machine of the present embodiment described below, a predetermined number of game media are inserted, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols are started to rotate when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. At the same time, based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of internal winning of a plurality of types of combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels receives a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation to individually rotate. If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game ends. This is a game machine that advances a series of games that end without paying out game media.

First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG. FIG. 35 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of winning lines.

A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 35 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front side of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101 . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of patterns are printed on strip-like members at equal intervals, and the strip-like members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . The symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed approximately three times in the vertical direction from the display window 113 when viewed from the player, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Specifically, with reference to FIG. 36, the symbols displayed on the upper row of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure) are displayed on the left reel upper row symbols and the middle row of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the figure). The symbol to be displayed is the left reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the figure) is the left reel lower stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (position 4 shown in the figure) is displayed. The symbol is the upper symbol of the middle reel, the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure) is the middle reel symbol, and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure) is the symbol. The bottom symbol of the middle reel, the top symbol of the right reel 112 (position 7 in the drawing) is the top symbol of the right reel, and the right reel 112 is the top symbol of the right reel 112 (position 8 in the figure). The symbols displayed on the middle row and the bottom row of the right reel 112 (the position of 9 shown in the figure) are called the right reel bottom row symbols, respectively. Three of each are displayed in the vertical direction, and a total of nine are displayed. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. That is, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating each pattern displayed on the display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. An optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112 inside the slot machine 100. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through the space between them. Based on the detection result of the optical sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotation direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line. The winning line is a line on which it is determined whether or not a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 39, is displayed. Only one middle prize line L1 composed of reel middle symbols is provided. FIG. 36 shows this winning line L1. A valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “valid line”) is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 35 requires 2 to 3 medals, and when the number of inserted medals is less than 2, none of the winning lines become valid, and when 2 medals are bet and 3 medals are bet. , the winning line L1 becomes valid. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135 . Note that the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, a right-down winning line composed of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel lower symbols, or composed of left reel lower symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel upper symbols. A total of 3 lines of the rising right pay lines may be set as valid pay lines, or the number of pay lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as valid pay lines.

The notification lamp 123 indicates, for example, that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination 1, a special combination 2) is internally elected in an internal lottery to be described later, or a special combination internal winning state (special combination 1 internal winning state or special combination 2 internal winning state) or a special game state (BB1 operating state or BB2 operating state). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later), which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, is won. ) is a lamp that informs the player. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, one card is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. ing. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during the special game state) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In the following description, it may be expressed as “given to the player” in the same sense as “payout to the player”. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

A start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112 . That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 including a left stop button 137 , a middle stop button 138 and a right stop button 139 . The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112, respectively. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as the second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as the third stop operation. Also, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations will be referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel, respectively. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as the operation order or pressing order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker 277 (see FIG. 37) provided below inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged above the front door 102. Above the production device 160, the sound of a speaker 272 (see FIG. 37) provided inside the slot machine 100 is output to the outside. A sound hole 143 is provided for this purpose. The production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a production image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (player side, front side). ). It should be noted that any display device other than the liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it is capable of displaying various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface. Note that the effect image display device 157 corresponds to an example of display means.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 . Here, regarding the main control unit 300, if the data volume becomes large, it becomes difficult to confirm the program, and there is a problem of security deterioration such as becoming a hotbed for unauthorized modification. and the data capacity of the RAM 308 is limited. It should be noted that the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of first updating means, state setting means, advantage setting means, storage means, and privilege lottery means. Also, the first sub-controller 400 corresponds to an example of a second update means.

<Main control part>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and reel patterns. A ROM 306 storing arrays, stop positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. and a WDT (watchdog timer) 314 are mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start signal when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). Start).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 138 sensor, right stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, left reel 110 , the optical sensor of the middle reel 111, the optical sensor of the right reel 112, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generating circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, the middle stop button 138 sensor, and the right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the player's operation of the stop buttons.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed on the corresponding bet buttons 130 to 132, respectively, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are used as the medals to be inserted into the game. Detects the submit operation when submitting. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The optical sensor of the left reel 110, the optical sensor of the middle reel 111, and the optical sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the respective reels 110 to 112, and the light shield provided on the reel frame. It becomes L level every time a piece passes. Rotational position information indicating how much the reel rotates from the reference position from when it once goes to L level until it goes to L level again is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, the CPU 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 .

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and a drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 for driving a motor, various lamps 336 (a winning line display lamp 120, a notification lamp 123, a game medal insertion possible lamp 124, a re-game lamp 122, a game medal insertion lamp 129, a game start lamp 121, a stored number display A driving circuit 328 for driving the device 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127) is provided.

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the state of the game) is output.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 monitors the voltage of the power supply. If the value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-controller 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main controller 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via the input interface. The first sub-controller 400 comprises a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on this control command. , an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-controller 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

A drive circuit 422 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel lamp, bet button lamp, reel backlight, etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control section 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157 . The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effects (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. 512 and are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub-control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Pattern arrangement>
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the symbol arrangement applied to each of the reels 110 to 112 described above will be described. In addition, this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols provided on each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (20 frames numbered 0 to 19 in this embodiment) of a plurality of types (10 in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112 . For example, in this embodiment, the frame numbered 1 on the left reel 110 has a "watermelon pattern", the frame numbered 4 on the middle reel 111 has a "bell 1 pattern", and the frame numbered 6 on the right reel 112 has a "seven 1 pattern” are arranged respectively.

The slot machine 100 in this embodiment stops the corresponding reels 110 to 112 within the maximum retraction range (less than 5 frames in this embodiment) from the position where the stop operation is performed, in order to improve the amusement of the game. It is configured.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described. This figure shows types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and payouts (number of awards) for each winning combination.

Winning hands of the slot machine 100 include special hands 1-2, replay hands 1-3, and small hands 1-7. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Among the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special combination 1 is a combination (operating combination) that shifts to a special game state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as BB1 operating state) in which a predetermined profit is awarded to the player by winning. be. In this embodiment, only 48 medals are awarded in the BB1 operating state. This special combination 1 is a combination that is won only when three medals are inserted in the normal game state, which will be described later (see remarks column in FIG. 39).

The special combination 2 is a combination (operating combination) that shifts to a special game state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a BB2 operating state) in which a predetermined profit is awarded to the player by winning a prize. In this embodiment, only two medals are awarded in the BB2 operating state. This special combination 2 is a combination that is won only when two medals are inserted in the normal game state (see remarks column in FIG. 39).

Further, replay combinations 1 to 3 are combinations that can be replayed without inserting new medals. These special roles 1 to 2 and replay roles 1 to 3 may be called "operating roles". In addition, "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where a symbol combination of an operating combination that does not involve a payout of medals (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. 2. Winning of replay hands 1 to 3 is included. In addition, special roles 1 and 2 are special roles that are carried over to the next game when it is not determined to be winning, and other roles are not carried over to the next game when it is not determined to be winning. is a role.

For the special roles 1 and 2, medals are not paid out due to winning the role itself. The corresponding symbol combinations are "bell 2-watermelon-replay 2" for special role 1 and "bell 2-seven 1-replay 2" for special role 2. In the following explanation, special role 1 may be referred to as "BB1" and special role 2 may be referred to as "BB2", and special roles 1 and 2 may be collectively referred to as "special role" or "BB". be.

When the special combination 1-2 is internally won, the internal winning flag corresponding to each of the internally won special combinations is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag corresponding to the special combination 1 is set to ON, the main control unit 300 shifts the game state to the special combination 1 internal winning state. When the flag corresponding to the special combination 2 is set to ON, the main control unit 300 shifts the game state to the special combination 2 internal winning state. These flags are maintained in the on state until the corresponding working combination is won, and in the next and subsequent games, it becomes easy to win these working combinations. Specifically, even if the special roles 1 and 2 are not won in the game in which the special roles 1 and 2 are internally won, the same state as the special role 1 and 2 is internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the corresponding symbol combination is performed. It will be in a state where it is easy to win a prize.

Special role 1 internally elected state and special role 2 internally elected state will be described later in detail. The stop control of the reels is executed so that the symbols constituting the are aligned preferentially.

The re-playing hands 1 to 3 are prize-winning hands (operating hands) that can be played in the next game without inserting medals (game media) due to winning, and medals are not paid out. That is, the game can be played again with the same number of bets as the number of previously inserted coins. The corresponding symbol combinations are that replay 1 is "replay 1/2-replay 1/2-replay 1/2", replay 2 is "seven 1-seven 1-seven 1", and replay The role 3 is "seven 2-seven 2-seven 2". Among the above replay hands, the replay hand 1 may be referred to as "normal replay", the replay hand 2 may be referred to as "seven 1 matching replay", and the replay hand 3 may be referred to as "seven 2 matching replay". In addition, when the replay combination 2 is won in the AT state described later, the state shifts to the pseudo BB1 state described later, and when the replay combination 3 is won in the AT state, the state shifts to the pseudo BB2 state described later (see remarks column in FIG. 39). ). The symbol combination of the replay combination 2 is the pseudo BB1 transition symbol, and the symbol combination of the replay combination 3 is the pseudo BB2 transition symbol. The pseudo BB1 state continues for 50 games, while the pseudo BB2 state lasts only 20 games.

The replay hands 1 to 3 may be hands that allow the player to play the next game without inserting medals. Therefore, for example, if you win a replay, the insertion of medals in the next game may be automatically inserted (reset the number of inserted medals in the memory area for the number of inserted medals prepared in the RAM 308). The medals inserted in the winning game may be carried over to the next game and used as they are.

Small combinations 1 to 8 are winning combinations in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out upon winning. The corresponding symbol combinations are "BAR-Watermelon-Replay 1" for the small combination 1, "Watermelon-Cherry-Replay 1" for the small combination 2, and "Seven 1-Cherry-Bell 2" for the small combination 3. There, the small winning combination 4 is "BAR-Replay 1/2-Replay 1/2", the small winning combination 5 is "Bell 2-Bell 1-Bell 1", and the small winning combination 6 is "Bell 1-Bell 1/ 2-Bell 1/2", small win 7 is "Bell 1-Bell 1/2-Replay 1/2", and small win 8 is "Bell 1-Replay 1/2-Bell 1/2" be. Also, the corresponding number of payouts is as shown in FIG.

Among the above small roles, the small role 1 is "watermelon", the small role 2 is "weak cherry", the small role 3 is "strong cherry", the small role 4 is "chance eye", the small role 5 is "common bell", The small winning combination 6 may be referred to as "push order bell", and the small winning combination 7 and small winning combination 8 may be referred to as "one bell". A strong cherry is more likely to obtain a privilege than a weak cherry, and a role that is easier to obtain a privilege at the second chance. Further, the pressing order bell is a combination that, when internally won, does not win unless the order of operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is correct, and is a combination that always wins regardless of the operation timing as long as the order of operation is correct. A single bell is a win when the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated in the wrong order.

<Types of internally elected roles>
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the types of internal winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described. This figure shows a lottery table of internal winning combinations in the state of internal winning special combination 2 together with types of internal winning combinations.

FIG. 40 shows 12 types of condition devices (condition device numbers 1 to 12) that combine the roles explained in FIG. The winning combination in the game is one of the combinations corresponding to this conditional device. These conditional devices are determined by lottery at the time of the game start operation. At this time, the combination corresponding to the condition device is called an internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combination is determined by a lottery at the time of the game start operation. In the following description of this operation, it may be referred to as internal winning of a role.

As will be described later, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 35 is a gaming machine that tends to have the longest playing period in the special combination 2 internal winning state (RT2). FIG. 40 shows a lottery table for each internal winning combination in the special combination 2 internal winning state (RT2).

Conditional device number 1 is a conditional device constituted by a replay combination. As described above, in the present embodiment, the replay combination includes the replay combination 1 to the replay combination 3, and if the pseudo BB1 state schedule flag described later is set to ON, the symbol combination of the replay combination 2 can be stopped. , and if a pseudo BB2 state schedule flag, which will be described later, is set to ON, the symbol combination of the replay combination 3 can be stopped. If none of these pseudo BB state schedule flags are set to ON, the symbol combination of the replay combination 1 can be stopped.

Condition device numbers 2 to 12 are internal winning hands composed of small hands. Among them, the conditional device numbers 7 to 12 are internally won by overlapping with the small winning combination 6, the small winning combination 7, and the small winning combination 8, and six kinds of A to F are prepared. The combination of the operation order (push order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is six patterns: "left-right center", "left-center right", "right-left center", "right-center left", "center-left-right", and "center-right-left". The six patterns A to F correspond to each of these six patterns as the correct operation order. That is, the correct answers for the pushing order are different for the condition device numbers 7 to 12. When conditional device numbers 7 to 12 are internally elected, if the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated in the correct operation order, the symbol combination of the small winning combination 6 is stopped (payout of 15 cards). On the other hand, when the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated in an operation order different from the correct operation order (incorrect operation order), the symbol combination of the small winning combination 7 or the small winning combination 8 is stopped (one payment).

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 35, set values are set for different degrees of advantage for the player. Setting values 1 to 6 are prepared. There is a tendency that the higher the set value, the higher the player's advantage.

In the internal winning combination lottery table shown in FIG. 40, the value obtained by dividing the displayed numerical value by 65536 is the internal winning probability. This internal winning probability is determined for each set value, but in the special winning 2 internal winning state (RT2), only the internal winning probability of the small winning combination 5 of the condition device 6 is different. In other game states (for example, normal state, special game state, etc.), the higher the set value of the internal winning probability, the higher the player's advantage.

Further, in the present embodiment, the internal winning probabilities of the condition devices with condition device numbers 7 to 12 are uniform, but the internal winning probabilities may be biased.

If you do not win the role of each condition device, you will lose, and basically the symbol combination corresponding to the role will not be displayed. It should be noted that the fact that the symbol combination relating to the winning line is not stopped may be referred to as "losing". In addition, there is a case where the fact that you did not win the role of any of the conditional devices is expressed as "won wrong".

As described above, in the state where the special combination 2 is internally elected, if a combination other than the special combination 2 is internally won, the reels are stopped and controlled so that the symbols constituting the other combination are preferentially aligned. is executed. Therefore, in order to shift from the special role 2 internal winning state to the BB2 operating state which is a special game state, it is necessary to insert two medals, internally win without losing, and then win the special role 2.例文帳に追加

<Types of game state>
Next, the types of game states of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 35 and changes in the game states will be described. FIG. 41(a) is a transition diagram of the game state of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 35, as shown in FIG. 41(a), the game states include a normal game state, a special combination 1 internal winning state, a special combination 2 internal winning state, a BB1 operating state, and a BB2 operating state. It is configured so that five game states with different degrees of advantage for the player can be switched, and the degree of advantage is changed by switching between these states, thereby improving the interest of the game. In addition, in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 35, five states RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4 are provided as states having different types and probabilities of internally winning replay combinations. and RT have a one-to-one relationship. That is, RT0 in the normal game state, RT1 in the state of winning the special prize 1, RT2 in the state of winning the special prize 2, RT3 in the state of BB1 operation, and RT4 in the state of BB2 operation. The game state is controlled by the main control section 300 . It should be noted that RT1 and RT2 are more likely to be internally elected as a replay combination than RT0. Further, RT1 is more likely to internally win a replay role than RT3, and RT2 is more likely to internally win a replay role than RT4. Further, the internal winning probabilities of the replayed hands of RT1 and RT2 may be the same or different, and the internal winning probabilities of the replayed hands of RT3 and RT4 may be the same or different. may

In the normal game state, the internal winning probability of the replay combination is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous state for the player. Note that this is also the initial state in this embodiment.

The special combination internal winning state (special combination 1 internal winning state and special combination 2 internal winning state) is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to the special combination is set to ON. In this game state, it is easy to shift to the special game state (BB1 operating state and BB2 operating state), which is more advantageous than the normal game state. However, as described above, in the special role 2 internal winning state (RT2), if a role other than the special role 2 is internally won, the symbols constituting the other role are arranged preferentially. , the reel stop control is executed, so that the BB2 operating state cannot be entered.

The special game state (BB1 operation state and BB2 operation state) is an advantageous game state in which it is easier to win a small role than in the normal game state and the special role internal winning state, and it is easy to obtain medals. However, as described above, only 48 medals are given in the BB1 operating state, and only 2 medals are given in the BB2 operating state.

FIG. 41(a) shows the above-described game states, and symbols (A) to (F) attached to arrows are transition conditions between game states. When each transition condition is satisfied, the game state transitions in the direction of the arrow. The transition from the normal game state (RT0) to the special combination 1 internal winning state (RT1) indicated by the arrow (A) is performed by internally winning the special combination 1, and the normal game state indicated by the arrow (D). The transition from (RT0) to the special combination 2 internal winning state (RT2) is performed by internally winning the special combination 2. In the normal game state (RT0), the internal winning probability of the special combination 2 is higher than the internal winning probability of the special combination 1, and the internal winning probability of the special combination 2 is considerably high, and the slot machine shown in FIG. 100 is a gaming machine where the period of playing in the special role 2 internal winning state (RT2) tends to be the longest. The transition from the special role 1 internal winning state (RT1) to the BB1 active state (RT3) indicated by the arrow (B) is performed by winning the special role 1. As described above, in order to win the special role 1, it is necessary to perform a 3-coin bet. The transition from the special combination 2 internal winning state (RT2) to the BB2 active state (RT4) indicated by the arrow (E) is performed by winning the special combination 2. As described above, in order to win the special role 2, it is necessary to win the special role 2 after performing a two-coin bet and winning an internal win. The transition from the BB1 active state (RT3) to the normal game state (RT0) indicated by the arrow (C) is performed by paying out 48 medals as the specified number. Also, the transition from the BB2 active state (RT4) to the normal game state (RT0) indicated by the arrow (F) is performed by paying out two medals as the prescribed number.

<Types of production state>
Next, the types of the effect state of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 35 and the transition of the effect state will be described. As described above, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 35 is a gaming machine in which the period during which the game is played in the internal winning state of the special combination 2 tends to be the longest. It should be noted that the transition of the presentation state in other game states is the same as the transition described here. FIG. 41(b) is a transition diagram of the effect state in the state where the special combination 2 is internally elected in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 35, as shown in FIG. 41(b), the production states are the initial state, the point specialization A state, the normal state, the point specialization B state, the sign state, the confrontation state, AT (assist It is configured to be able to switch between a total of eight production states, namely, the time) state and the pseudo BB state. In this embodiment, the initial state goes through the normal state to the confrontation state, and if the AT lottery is won in this confrontation state, the state returns to the initial state via the AT state, and if the AT lottery is not won, the confrontation state occurs. It adopts a configuration that repeats a series of loops from the initial state to the initial state. Hereinafter, a period from starting from the initial state to returning to the initial state may be expressed as a cycle. In addition, in this embodiment, items that make it easier to transition to the AT state ("Defeat 1 body" item, "Defeat rate UP" item, which will be described later) are provided, and the accumulated points earned in the game during the lap (hereinafter referred to as the accumulated point ), this item can be acquired according to the configuration. Information on these cumulative points and items is stored in the RAM 308 . Each effect state will be described below based on the above description.

The initial state is set in the first game after changing the setting or clearing the RAM (at the start of a cycle). It is also set when the confrontation state or AT state ends (at the start of the next cycle). In this initial state, the confrontation mode (described later) and the number of games to transition to the precursor state are set (FIG. 48). That is, in this initial state, it can be said that the scheduling for the premonitory state and the confrontation state is executed at the start of the cycle. Only one game is set in this initial state, and the state immediately shifts to the point specialization A state.

The point specialization A state is a state in which the points for acquiring items are more likely to increase than in the normal state. After 30 games have passed in this point specialization A state, the state shifts to the normal state.

The normal state is a presentation state in which the player mainly stays during the round. Points may be obtained in this production state. In the normal state, when the accumulated points reach a predetermined number (1000 in this embodiment), a lottery for the acquired item is executed in exchange for the predetermined number of accumulated points, and an effect indicating this is executed (item acquisition effect). . In addition, in this normal state, the state shifts to the premonitory state according to the schedule set in the initial state, but apart from that, the state may shift to the point specialization B state by lottery.

The point specialization B state is a state in which the points for acquiring items are more likely to increase than in the normal state. After 5 games have passed in this point specialization B state, the state shifts to the normal state.

There are two types of precursory states: a true precursory state and a false precursory state. The difference is that the true portent state shifts to the confrontation state after the set number of games has passed, while the false portent state returns to the normal state after the set number of games has passed. That is, it can be said that the false portent state is a presentation state provided to increase the expectation of transition to the confrontation state. You may be able to earn points even in this premonitory state.

In the confrontation state, an effect indicating that the state has shifted to the confrontation state is executed in the first game, and further, a confrontation effect (up to three games) between the main character and the enemy character is executed. Here, in the first game in the confrontation state, an item may be acquired in exchange for the remaining accumulated points, and an effect (item acquisition effect) indicating this may be executed. Further, when the player has the "destruction rate UP" item, an effect (item use effect) for using the "defeat rate UP" item is executed in the second game. In addition, when there is no "killing rate UP" item in the first game, the confrontation effect is started from the second game (item use effect is not executed). When the result of the confrontation presentation is a complete victory, the state shifts to the AT state, and when the main character loses in the confrontation presentation, the state shifts to the initial state. When shifting to the AT state, the number of remaining AT games is set.

In the AT state, when the condition devices 7 to 12 (duplicate combination of minor combinations 6 to 8) are internally elected, the pressing order of the correct answer is informed. Therefore, the player can obtain more profits. This AT state shifts to the initial state when the set AT remaining game number becomes 0, but this AT remaining game number may be added. In addition, in the AT state, a lottery is executed to enable a shift to the pseudo BB state, and when the lottery is won, an effect is executed to urge the player to stop the replay combination 2 or the replay combination 3, which is a pseudo BB symbol. Then, when the pattern of the replay combination 2 or the replay combination 3 is stopped, the state shifts to the pseudo BB state.

In the pseudo BB state, in the same way as in the AT state, when the conditions devices 7 to 12 (duplicate wins of minor wins 6 to 8) are internally won, the order of pressing the correct answer is reported, and the player can obtain more profit. becomes. This pseudo BB state includes two types of pseudo BB1 state which is shifted by the replay combination 2 and pseudo BB2 state which is shifted by the replay combination 3 . The pseudo BB1 state shifts to the AT state after 50 games have passed, and the pseudo BB2 state shifts to the AT state after 20 games have passed.

FIG. 41(b) shows the effect states described above, and the symbols (a) to (l) attached to the arrows are transition conditions between the effect states. When each transition condition is satisfied, the production state transitions in the direction of the arrow.

<Overview of processing>
The processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

When the power is turned on, first, in step S101, initial setting processing of the main control unit is performed. In this main control unit initial setting process, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupt inhibition is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is initialized. Allow operation and set initial values. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S103, a game start process is executed. In this process, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted (maintenance or operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132), and if medals have been inserted, preparations are made to send an insert command indicating this. If the player wins the replay in the previous game, the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous game are inserted, so the player does not need to insert medals. Also, it checks whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated while the specified number (2 or 3) of medals has been used. Confirm and start playing.

In step S105, various lottery processes including internal winning combination lottery process and the like are executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S107, reel stop data corresponding to the first stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300 .

In step S109, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started under the condition that the game interval timer (subtracted by the timer updating process described later) is 0, and the initial value is set to the game interval timer. Also, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to transmit a reel rotation start command to the first sub-controller 400 . After that, when the reels 110-112 reach a predetermined rotational speed, the optical sensors provided on each reel are detected, and the symbol position of each reel is grasped, the stop operation to the stop buttons 137-139 is enabled. The game interval counter secures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) to suppress gambling.

In step S111, a reel stop control process is executed. In this processing, when one of the stop buttons 137-139 is pressed after the stop operation is validated, the reels 110-112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137-139 are stopped. Specifically, every time a stop operation is performed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of pull-in frames set in the stop table. Further, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared for the first stop operation, and reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared for the second stop operation. For each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, the corresponding command (first 1st to 3rd stop commands) to the first sub-controller 400. When all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S113, a winning determination process is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Seven 1-Cherry-Bell 2" are aligned on the activated pay line, it is determined that a small win 3 has been won. After determining the winning combination, preparations are made to transmit the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S 115 , if a winning combination with a payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is given (paid out), and the given number is displayed using the payout number display 127 .

In step S117, state update processing is executed. Details of this state update processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-described processing.

<Main control unit 300 timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area. Note that the state of the optical sensor is confirmed in this process.

In step S207, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S209, timer update processing is performed. For example, a process of updating various timers in units of time, such as subtracting a game interval timer, is executed.

In step S<b>211 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission in main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc. of the main control section 300 are transmitted to the first sub-control section 400 . The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes strobe information (if it is ON, it indicates that data is set), command type (in this embodiment, basic command, input command, start lever Receipt command, internal winning command, effect command accompanying effect lottery processing, reel rotation start command accompanying start of rotation of reels 110 to 112, first to third press commands accompanying acceptance of operation of stop buttons 137 to 139, reel 1st to 3rd stop commands associated with the stop of 110 to 112, winning command, payout number command and payout end command accompanying medal payout processing, status update command, item addition command, acquisition point command, setting change command, power recovery command ) and command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S213, an external signal setting process is performed. In this external signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S205, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of an error related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low voltage signal is received (power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and if a low voltage signal is not received (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219. move on.

In step S219, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, processing such as setting the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S221, information that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power failure when power is restored, is saved in a predetermined area of RAM 308. A checksum value for the area is derived and stored in the RAM 308, and a power supply flag indicating that power-off processing has been performed is set to ON.

Next, details of the main controller initial setting process (step S101) in the main controller main process of FIG. 42 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller initial setting process (step S101) in FIG.

First, in step S1001, which is executed first, initialization is performed at startup. In this initial setting, processes such as setting (temporary setting) of stack initial value to stack pointer (SP) of CPU 304, setting of interrupt mask, initial setting of I/O 310, and initial setting of various variables stored in RAM 308 are performed. conduct.

In step S1003, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 330 detects that the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment). monitor whether it outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped in the case. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects power cutoff), this step S1003 is repeatedly executed, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect power cutoff). to step S1005. Note that step S1003 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches or exceeds the predetermined value even if the voltage does not reach the predetermined value (9 V) immediately after the power is turned on.

In step S1005, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch is on. Here, the setting key switch is a switch for setting the player's advantage in the slot machine 100 (for example, six kinds of advantages from 1 to 6), and can be operated when the front door 102 is opened. If this switch is on (the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch and turned right by 90 degrees), the process proceeds to step S1013; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1007, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch is on. If this switch is on, the process proceeds to step S1009; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1011.

In step S1009, the RAM 308 is initialized, and the main controller initial setting process ends. In this initialization, for example, item information and accumulated point values are deleted.

In step S1011, RAM data write-back processing is executed. In this process, first, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the RAM 308 is abnormal. The data determined here is the data saved in the RAM 308 when the power of the slot machine 100 is turned off or momentary interruption (voltage drop temporarily below the operating voltage) (see step S221 in FIG. 43). In other words, it is determined in step S1011 whether or not the data is definitely saved in the RAM 308. FIG. Specifically, it determines whether the power supply flag is normal (on) and whether the calculation result using the checksum is normal. It is judged that there is no abnormality.

If it is determined that there is no abnormality in the restoration data in the RAM 308, processing is executed to restore the state of the register to the state immediately before the power-off processing is executed. In this RAM data write-back process, for example, the data stored in the RAM 308 is written back to the register of the CPU 304, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer saving area provided in the RAM 308 is read out when power is cut off, and the stack Reset the pointer (this setting). Also, when power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read out, and after resetting in each register, interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the slot machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power failure. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction executed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process immediately before the power failure. Furthermore, here, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 . This power restoration command is a command indicating that the state at the time of power failure has been restored. This power recovery command includes information such as RT, game state, and presentation state at the time of power failure, and is transmitted by the main control section timer interrupt processing (step S211 in FIG. 43).

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an error in the return data of the RAM 308, after making preparations such as clearing all storage areas of the RAM 308 except for the used stack area, the system shifts to an infinite loop state (RAM error processing). . From this state, it is necessary to turn on the power again with the RAM clear switch or setting key switch turned on. In other words, this embodiment is configured such that the progress of the game is stopped when an error occurs in the RAM 308 .

In step S1013, which is followed when the setting key switch is ON in step S1005, setting change processing is executed according to the state of the setting key, and this main control unit initial setting processing ends. The details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, details of the setting change process (step S1013) in the main control unit initial setting process of FIG. 44 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the setting change process (step S1013) in FIG.

First, in step S1101 executed first, the data in the RAM 308 is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S1103. The data cleared here includes item information and accumulated point values.

In step S1103, preparations are made to send a setting change command indicating that the setting change has started to the first sub-controller 400 (sent in step S211 in FIG. 43), and the process proceeds to step S1105.

In step S1105, the interrupt status is set during setting change, and the process proceeds to step S1107.

In step S1107, the temporary setting value is set as the display setting value. By the processing here, a temporary set value is displayed on the effect image display device 157 . After that, the process proceeds to step S1109.

In step S1109, it is determined whether or not the setting switch has been accepted. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1111; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1113. In this embodiment, the bet button is used as the setting switch, but the operating means related to the game may be used as in this configuration, or the setting switch may be provided separately.

In step S1111, the provisional set value is updated. In the present embodiment, the temporary set value is incremented by 1 each time the setting switch is operated, and the temporary set value is set to 1 when the setting switch is operated while the temporary set value is 6. After that, the process proceeds to step S1113.

In step S1113, it is determined whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1115; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1107.

In step S1115, a process of confirming the temporary set value as a set value is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1117.

In step S1117, it is determined whether or not the front door 102 is closed and the setting key switch is off (the setting key switch is turned counterclockwise 90 degrees and the setting key is pulled out). If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1119; otherwise, step S1117 is repeatedly executed.

In step S1119, preparation for transmitting a setting change command indicating that the setting change is completed to the first sub-controller 400 (sent in step S211 in FIG. 43) is executed. Also, in this process, the interrupt status is returned to the status before it was changed in step S1105. After this process, this setting change process ends.

Next, details of various lottery processes (step S105) in the main control unit main process of FIG. 42 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of various lottery processes (step S105) in FIG.

First, in step S1201 executed first, an internal winning combination lottery is executed. In this process, the internal lottery table of the internal winning combination stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current game state and RT, and the internal lottery (lottery of the combination) is performed using this table and the random number obtained from the random number generation circuit 316. to determine an internal winning combination. For example, in the RT2 state in which the special combination 2 is internally elected, the internal winning combination lottery table shown in FIG. 40 is read. As a result of the internal lottery, if any combination (including the active combination) is internally won, the flag for that combination is turned on.

In step S1203, item addition processing is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1205, confrontation setting processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1207, point specialization B state transition lottery processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1209, AT-related processing is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

At step S1211, preparation for transmission of an internal winning command (sent at step S211 in FIG. 43) is executed, and various lottery processes are terminated. The internal winning command includes the internal winning hand, the current rendering state (if the period is finite, including information on the number of remaining games such as the number of remaining games in the state and the number of remaining AT games), the result of the confrontation, Information that can specify the results of the AT lottery and the AT additional lottery is included. Of the above information, the information relating to the number of AT remaining games may not be included in the internal winning command in the non-AT state, and may be included in the internal winning command only in the AT state. Furthermore, in the AT state or pseudo BB state, the correct operation order (push order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 for the internal winning command of the internal winning combination including the small combination 6 (condition devices 7 to 12 shown in FIG. 40) It also includes operation instruction information representing the operation order of .

Next, details of the item addition process (step S1203) in various lottery processes in FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47(a) is a flowchart showing the flow of item addition processing (step S1203) in FIG.

First, in step S1301 executed first, it is determined whether or not the rendering state is the normal state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1303; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1311.

In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the accumulated points are 1000 or more. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1305; otherwise, the item addition process ends.

In step S1305, a lottery for items to be acquired is performed. In this embodiment, either the "defeat 1 body" item or the "defeat rate UP" item is selected. Here, the "destroy one" item is an item that ensures that one win will be achieved in the confrontation state, and the "defeat rate UP" item is an item that increases the probability of winning in the confrontation state. There are 5 types of "destruction rate UP" items in order from the lowest defeat rate: "destruction rate? UP", "destruction rate small UP", "destruction rate UP medium", "destruction rate large UP", and "destruction rate super UP". is provided.

47(b) and 47(c) are diagrams showing tables used for the lottery in step S1305. First, the item lottery table A shown in FIG. 47(b) is used to select either the "kill one" item or the "defeat rate UP" item. In this table, the "defeat 1 enemy" item is selected with a probability of 25%, and the "defeat rate UP" item is selected with a probability of 75%. If the "destruction rate UP" item is selected here, the type of "destruction rate UP" item is further selected using the "destruction rate UP" lottery table A in FIG. 47(c). In this table, if you don't have a "destruction rate UP" item (the "destruction rate UP" item you get here is the first item), there is a 75% chance that the "medium defeat rate UP" item will be selected, and 24% , and 1% chance to select the item "Great Destruction Rate UP". On the other hand, if you have a "destruction rate UP" item (the "destruction rate UP" item obtained here is the second or later), there is a 70% chance that the "destruction rate small UP" item will be selected, and 25% , a 4% chance to select a ``Major kill rate UP'' item, and a 1% chance to select a ``Super kill rate UP'' item.

In step S1307, 1000 is subtracted from the accumulated points, and the process proceeds to step S1321.

In step S1301, which is executed first, in step S1311, which is followed when the presentation state is not the normal state, it is determined whether or not it is the first game in the confrontation state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1313; otherwise, the item addition process ends.

In step S1313, it is determined whether or not the accumulated points are 1 or more. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1315; otherwise, the item addition process ends.

In step S1315, a lottery for items to be acquired is performed. 47(d) and 47(e) are diagrams showing tables used for the lottery in step S1315. First, the item lottery table B of FIG. 47(d) is used to select either the "defeat 1 body" item or the "defeat rate UP" item. In this table, the "defeat 1 enemy" item is selected with a probability of 10%, and the "defeat rate UP" item is selected with a probability of 90%. If the "destruction rate UP" item is selected here, the type of "destruction rate UP" item is selected using the "defeat rate UP" lottery table B shown in FIG. 47(e). In this table, the "defeat rate? UP" item is selected with a probability of 90%, and the "defeat rate small UP" item is selected with a probability of 10%. For the item lottery here, the same table as that used in step S1305 may be used so that the items obtained in the normal state and the items obtained in the confrontation state are the same.

In step S1317, the accumulated points are cleared (set to 0), and the process proceeds to step S1321.

In step S1321, a process of acquiring the item selected in step S1305 or step S1315 is executed. In this process, the acquired item information is stored (added) in the RAM 308 . In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of "defeat 1 body" items possessed is set to 3, and the upper limit of the number of "defeat rate UP" items possessed is set to 8, respectively. When the number of possession of the selected item reaches the upper limit, no new item is acquired.

At step S1323, preparation for transmission of an item addition command is executed (transmitted at step S211 in FIG. 43), and this item addition process is terminated. This item addition command includes information on the number of items possessed, the acquisition order, and the current accumulated points. This item addition command is sent even when no new items have been acquired.

Next, details of the confrontation setting process (step S1205) in various lottery processes in FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing the flow of the confrontation setting process (step S1205) in FIG.

First, in step S1401, which is executed first, it is determined whether or not the confrontation setting condition is established. Here, the confrontation setting condition is established in the initial state. More specifically, it corresponds to the first game after setting change, the first game after RAM clearing, the first game after being defeated in confrontation state, and the first game after AT state ends. If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1403; otherwise, this confrontation setting process ends.

In step S1403, the confrontation mode setting process is performed using the table shown in FIG. 49(a). FIG. 49(a) is a diagram showing a table used for setting the confrontation mode. In this embodiment, two types of battle modes are provided: a normal mode and a chance mode. In chance mode, the number of games required for laps is smaller than in normal mode (shorter from the initial state to the confrontation state), it is easier to transition to point specialization B state than in normal mode, and pseudo BB lottery is more likely than normal mode. It has become easier to be elected to The table shown in FIG. 49(a) is set such that the setting probability of the chance mode increases as the set value increases. For example, in setting 1 where the player's advantage is the lowest, the setting probability of the chance mode is 20% (remaining 80% is the normal mode), but in setting 6 where the player's advantage is relatively highest, chance Mode setting probability is increased to 50% (remaining 50% is normal mode).

In step S1405, the precursor start zone setting process is performed using the table shown in FIG. 49(b). FIG. 49(b) is a diagram showing a table used for setting the precursor start zone. In the present embodiment, zones are defined by dividing the number of games being played in a certain range, and zones 1 to 12 are shown in FIG. 49(b). In this step S1405, a zone is set to transition to the portent state (true portent state and false portent state) with a lottery probability corresponding to the confrontation mode.

First, the setting of the true precursor state will be described. Only one of a plurality of zones is set as the zone that transitions to the true precursor state. In the table of FIG. 49(b), any one of zones 6 to 12 (the number of games being played is 201 or more) is set when the confrontation mode is the normal mode, whereas when the chance mode is the zone Any one of 2 to 4 (the number of games being played is 1 to 150) is set. Therefore, the number of games required to reach the confrontation state is smaller in the chance mode.

Next, the setting of the false portent state will be described. Zones that transition to the false portent state are set by lottery for each of a plurality of zones. In the table of FIG. 49(b), when the confrontation mode is the normal mode, zones 3 to 11 (the number of games being played is 51 to 499) may each be set as a false omen start zone, and the chance mode In the case of , only zone 3 (the number of games being played is 51 to 100) may be set as the false portent start zone. As a result of this lottery, there are cases where a plurality of zones that transition to the false portent state are set, and there are cases where only one zone is set. In addition, after transitioning to the true precursor state, it transitions to the confrontation state and returns to the initial state, so the true precursor state is the final precursor state among the precursor states that transition during the cycle. Therefore, the zones subsequent to the zone transitioning to the true precursor state may be excluded from the zones transitioning to the false precursor state.

In step S1407, the start game of the premonitory state is set for each zone set in step S1405, and the confrontation setting process ends. In this process, for example, when zone 6 is set as the zone to transition to the false portent state, the start game of the false portent state is set within the range of 201-250. Further, when zone 4 is set as the zone to shift to the true precursor state, the starting game of the true precursor state is set within the range of 101-150. Although the lottery probabilities of the starting game for the zones are equal, the probabilities may be biased.

In the confrontation setting process shown in FIG. 48, a zone is selected once and then a starting game is selected from within the zone. Any configuration may be used as long as the starting game is selected.

Next, the details of the point specialization B state transition lottery process (step S1207) in the various lottery processes of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50(a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the point specialization B state transition lottery process (step S1207) in FIG.

First, in step S1501 executed first, it is determined whether or not the rendering state is the normal state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1503; otherwise, the point specialization B state transition lottery process is terminated.

In step S1503, it is determined whether or not a specific combination is internally won. Here, the specific combination means condition devices 2 to 5 (small combination 1 to 4). If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1505; otherwise, the point specialization B state transition lottery process is terminated.

In step S1505, lottery processing for transition to the point specialization B state is executed using the table shown in FIG. 50(b). FIG. 50(b) is a diagram showing a table used for a lottery for transition to the point specialization B state. For example, if the condition device 2 (small hand 1, watermelon) is internally elected, if the confrontation mode is normal mode, it will be elected with a probability of 3/100 (shift to point specialization B state), and the confrontation mode is a chance If it is the mode, it wins with a probability of 50/100 (shifts to the point specialization B state). Then, when winning, the point specialization B state schedule flag is set to ON. After that, this point specialization B state transition lottery process is terminated.

Next, details of AT-related processing (step S1209) in various lottery processing in FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing the flow of AT-related processing (step S1209) in FIG.

First, in step S1601 executed first, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the confrontation state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1603; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1621.

In step S1603, it is determined whether or not a specific combination (condition devices 2 to 5 (small combination 1 to 4)) is internally won. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1605; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1607.

In step S1605, the acquisition lottery process for the "defeat 1 body" item is executed using the table shown in FIG. 52(a). In this table, there is a probability of 1% if a small win 1 (watermelon) is internally won, and a small win 3 (strong cherry) is a 1% probability if a small win 2 (weak cherry) is won internally. 100% probability when internal winning is made in 2, and 13% probability when internal winning is made in small combination 4 (chance 4). In addition, when the number of possession of the "destroy 1 body" item has already reached the upper limit, the "destroy 1 body" item is not acquired. Further, when the confrontation between the main character and the enemy character has started in the confrontation state, the result of the confrontation has been determined in the confrontation result lottery process (step S1615) which is executed prior to this, so the "defeat one character" is performed. ” Instead of the process of obtaining items, the result of this confrontation is rewritten. Specifically, if one of the three games includes a defeat of the main character, this one is overwritten as a victory of the main character. As a result, when the main character wins all three games, the AT state schedule flag is turned on, and the number of remaining AT games is set by lottery. The AT remaining game number lottery is the same as the AT remaining game number lottery in the confrontation result lottery process to be described later.

In step S1607, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining games in confrontation state is five. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1609; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1613.

In step S1609, it is determined whether or not the player possesses the "defeat rate UP" item. If the player does not possess the "killing rate UP" item, the process advances to step S1611; otherwise, the process advances to step S1613.

In step S1611, 1 is subtracted from the number of remaining games in confrontation state, and the process proceeds to step S1613.

In step S1613, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of remaining games in confrontation state is four. This condition is satisfied in the game immediately before the start of the showdown between the main character and the enemy character (starting when the number of remaining games in the showdown state is 3). If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1615; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1617.

In step S1615, a competition result lottery process is executed. In this process, a lottery is executed as to whether or not the main character will win each of the three games. The initial value of the victory probability (destruction rate) of this hero character is 50%, but 6% is added as a basic addition for each "destruction rate UP" item, and the table shown in FIG. 52(b) is added. is used to increase the kill rate. For example, if there is a "destruction rate? UP" item, there is a 50/100 probability of 6% (6% base increase + 0% increase from the table), and a 50/100 probability of 11% (6% base increase). % + 5% table top-up) is added to the kill rate. Based on this added kill rate, a lottery is executed as to whether the main character will win each of the three games. Incidentally, if the result of the previous game is a loss, the lottery for the subsequent game may not be performed.

Also, if there is one "defeat one" item, the victory of the main character is determined instead of conducting a lottery for one game. That is, when there are three "destroy one" items, it is determined that the main character will win without lottery in all three games, and the transition to the AT state is ensured.

By the above processing, when the result of the confrontation in which the main character wins in all three games is obtained, the AT state schedule flag is set to ON, and the number of remaining AT games is calculated using the table of FIG. 52(c). lottery and setting.

In step S1617, it is determined whether or not the AT state schedule flag is set to ON. If this condition is satisfied, the AT-related processing is terminated; otherwise, the process advances to step S1619.

In step S1619, the AT direct hit lottery process is executed using the table of FIG. 52(d). Here, apart from the lottery processing in step S1615, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to shift to the AT state. In the table of FIG. 52(d), for example, when the set value is 1, the probability of winning the lottery is 1/7500, and when the set value is 6, the probability is 1/1000. If the lottery here is won, and if the result of the confrontation has been determined in the confrontation result lottery process (step S1615), the result of this confrontation is rewritten as the main character's unanimous victory, and the AT state schedule flag is set to ON. At the same time, the number of AT remaining games is selected and set using the table of FIG. 52(c) (similar to the case where the AT state schedule flag is set to ON in step S1615). On the other hand, if the result of the confrontation has not yet been determined, the processing is executed so that the main character wins all rounds (for example, the "defeat one" item is added up to the upper limit).

In step S1621 to which the production state is not the confrontation state in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the production state is the AT state. If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1623; otherwise, the AT-related processing ends.

In step S1623, a pseudo BB lottery process is executed using the table of FIG. 52(e). According to this table, there is a probability of 1/500 when the confrontation mode is the normal mode, and a probability of 1/100 when the confrontation mode is the chance mode. If the player wins the prize, the pseudo BB state schedule flag is set to ON, and the state becomes possible to shift to the pseudo BB state in a later game.

In step S1625, it is determined whether or not a specific combination (condition devices 2 to 5 (small combination 1 to 4)) is internally won. If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1627; otherwise, the AT-related processing ends.

In step S1627, lottery processing for adding the number of AT remaining games is executed using the table shown in FIG. 52(f). In this table, for example, when a small winning combination 1 (watermelon) is internally won, an addition is made with a probability of 1/13. Further, the number of additional games at that time is set to 20 with a probability of 9/100, 30 with a probability of 70/100, 50 with a probability of 20/100, and 100 with a probability of 1/100.

Next, details of the state update process (step S117) in the main control unit main process of FIG. 42 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the state update process (step S117) in FIG.

First, in step S1A01 executed first, a point acquisition process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1A03, RT is updated. As described above, in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 35, since the RT and the game state are in a one-to-one relationship, when the RT is updated, the game state is also updated.

In step S1A05, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the initial state, and if it is the initial state, the process proceeds to step S1A07, and if not the initial state, the process proceeds to step S1A09.

In step S1A07, initial state processing is executed. Here, the effect state is set to the point specialization A state, and 30 is set to the number of remaining games in the point specialization A state. After that, the process proceeds to step S1A35.

In step S1A09, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the point specialization A state.

In step S1A11, point specialization A state processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A35. The details of the point specialization A state processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 55(a).

In step S1A13, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the normal state. If the normal state, the process proceeds to step S1A15. If not the normal state, the process proceeds to step S1A17.

In step S1A15, normal state processing is performed, and the process proceeds to step S1A35. The details of the normal state processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 55(b).

In step S1A17, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the point specialization B state, and if it is the point specialization B state, the process proceeds to step S1A19.

In step S1A19, point specialization B state processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A35. Details of the point specialization B state processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 55(c).

In step S1A21, it is determined whether or not the effect state is a precursor state, and if it is a precursor state, the process proceeds to step S1A23, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1A25.

In step S1A23, precursor state processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A35. Details of the precursor state processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1A25, it is determined whether or not the presentation state is the confrontation state.

In step S1A27, confrontation state processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A35. Details of the confrontation state processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1A29, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT state, and if it is the AT state, the process proceeds to step S1A31, and if not the AT state, the process proceeds to step S1A33.

In step S1A31, AT state processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A35. The details of the AT state processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 58(a).

In step S1A33, pseudo BB state processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A35. Details of the pseudo BB state processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 58(b).

At step S1A35, preparation for transmission of a state update command including information on the game state, RT, and effect state (sent at step S211 in FIG. 43) is executed, and this state update process is terminated.

Next, the details of the point acquisition process (step S1A01) in the state update process of FIG. 53 will be described with reference to FIG. 54(a). This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the point acquisition process (step S1A01) in FIG.

First, in step S1B01 that is executed first, it is determined whether or not the point acquisition condition is satisfied. The point acquisition conditions here are conditions that are satisfied in the normal state, the point specialization A state, the point specialization B state, and the premonitory state. However, even in the normal state, the point earning condition is not met even in the normal state for a game (a game in which an item acquisition effect is executed) that is started when the accumulated points exceed 1000. If this point acquisition condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1B03, and if not, this point acquisition process is terminated.

In step S1B03, a point acquisition lottery process is executed using the table shown in FIG. 54(b). FIG. 54(b) is a diagram showing a table used for a lottery for determining the value of acquired points. For example, if you do not win internally in any of the condition devices in the normal state (if you lose), you will get 0 points with a probability of 90%, 5 points with a probability of 9%, and 1%. Gain 10 points with a probability. Then, the value of the acquired points is added to the accumulated points. In this description, the points acquired in one game will be referred to as acquired points, and the cumulative total of acquired points during a round will be referred to as accumulated points.

In step S1B05, preparations for transmitting acquisition point commands (sent in step S211 in FIG. 43) are executed. This command includes the value of acquired points and information on the presentation state. After that, the point acquisition process ends.

Next, the details of the point specialization A state processing (step S1A11) in the state update processing of FIG. 53 will be described with reference to FIG. 55(a). This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of point specialization A state processing (step S1A11) in FIG.

First, in step S1C01 executed first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number of points specialization A state remaining games, and the process proceeds to step S1C03.

In step S1C03, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining games in the point specialization A state is zero. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1C05; otherwise, the point specialization A state processing is terminated.

In step S1C05, the effect state is set to the normal state, and this point specialization A state processing is terminated.

Next, details of the normal state processing (step S1A15) in the state update processing of FIG. 53 will be described with reference to FIG. 55(b). This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the normal state process (step S1A15) in FIG.

First, in step S1C11 that is executed first, it is determined whether or not the point specialization B state schedule flag is set to ON. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1C13; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1C17.

In step S1C13, point specialization B state setting processing is executed. Here, the presentation state is set to the point specialization B state, and the number of remaining games in the point specialization B state is set to 5. After that, the process proceeds to step S1C15.

In step S1C15, the point specialization B state schedule flag is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to step S1C17.

In step S1C17, it is determined whether or not a transition condition to the precursor state has been established. This transition condition is established when the start game of the premonitory state set in the confrontation setting process (FIG. 48) is reached. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1C19; otherwise, the normal state processing is terminated.

In step S1C19, the effect state is set to the portent state, and any value from 1 to 32 is set by lottery (the probability of each value being selected is equal) as the value of the number of remaining games in the portent state. After that, this normal state processing ends.

Next, details of the point specialization B state processing (step S1A19) in the state update processing of FIG. 53 will be described with reference to FIG. 55(c). This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of point specialization B state processing (step S1A19) in FIG.

First, in step S1C21 executed first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number of points specialization B state remaining games, and the process proceeds to step S1C23.

In step S1C23, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining games in the point specialization B state is zero. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1C25; otherwise, the point specialization B state processing is terminated.

In step S1C25, the effect state is set to the normal state, and this point specialization B state processing is terminated.

Next, details of the precursor state processing (step S1A23) in the state update processing of FIG. 53 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the precursor state processing (step S1A23) in FIG.

First, in step S1D01, which is executed first, the number of precursor state remaining games is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1D03.

In step S1D03, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of precursor state remaining games is zero. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1D05; otherwise, the precursor state processing is terminated.

In step S1D05, it is determined whether or not the precursor state is a true precursor state. If it is a true portent state, the process proceeds to step S1D07, and if it is not a true portent state (if it is a false portent state), the process proceeds to step S1D09.

In step S1D07, the effect state is set to the confrontation state, and 5 is set as the number of remaining games in the confrontation state. After that, this precursor state processing ends.

In step S1D09, the effect state is set to the normal state, and the precursor state processing ends.

Next, details of the confrontation state process (step S1A27) in the state update process of FIG. 53 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the confrontation state process (step S1A27) in FIG.

First, in step S1E01, which is executed first, the value of the number of remaining games in confrontation state is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1E03.

In step S1E03, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of remaining games in confrontation state is zero. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1E05; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1E13.

In step S1E05, it is determined whether or not the AT state schedule flag is set to ON. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1E07; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1E11.

At step S1E07, the effect state is set to the AT state, and the process proceeds to step S1E09.

In step S1E09, the AT state schedule flag is set to OFF, and this confrontation state processing ends.

At step S1E11, the presentation state is set to the initial state, and the confrontation state processing ends.

In step S1E13, which proceeds when the value of the number of remaining games in the confrontation state is not 0 in step S1E03, it is determined whether or not the main character has been defeated in the confrontation effect being executed based on the result of the confrontation (set in the AT-related processing in FIG. 51). be judged. The values of the three confrontation effects and the number of remaining games in the confrontation state correspond to 3 for the first game, 2 for the second game, and 1 for the third game. Also, the confrontation results include information about the wins and losses of the three confrontations. Therefore, the number of games remaining in the current confrontation state is used to determine the number of the current battle, the win/loss corresponding to this is derived from the result of the confrontation, and it is determined whether or not the main character has been defeated. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1E11; otherwise, the confrontation state process ends.

Next, details of the AT state processing (step S1A31) in the state update processing of FIG. 53 will be described with reference to FIG. 58(a). This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the AT state processing (step S1A31) in FIG.

First, in step S1F01 executed first, 1 is subtracted from the number of remaining AT games, and the process proceeds to step S1F03.

In step S1F03, it is determined whether or not the pseudo BB state schedule flag is set to ON. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1F05; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1F11.

In step S1F05, it is determined whether or not the pseudo BB symbol has stopped. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1F07; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1F11.

In step S1F07, the rendering state is set to the pseudo BB state, and the process proceeds to step S1F09.

In step S1F09, the pseudo BB state schedule flag is set to OFF, and the number of remaining games in the pseudo BB state is set to a predetermined value (50 for pseudo BB1, 20 for pseudo BB2, see FIGS. 39 and 41(b)). is set. After that, the process proceeds to step S1F09.

In step S1F09, the pseudo BB state schedule flag is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to step S1F11.

In step S1F11, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining AT games is zero. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1F13; otherwise, the AT state processing is terminated.

In step S1F13, the presentation state is set to the initial state, and the AT state processing ends.

Next, details of the pseudo BB state processing (step S1A33) in the state update processing of FIG. 53 will be described with reference to FIG. 58(b). This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the pseudo BB state processing (step S1A33) in FIG.

First, in step S1F21 executed first, the value of the number of pseudo BB state remaining games is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1F23.

In step S1F23, it is determined whether or not the number of pseudo BB state remaining games is zero. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1F25; otherwise, the pseudo BB state processing is terminated.

At step S1F25, the effect state is set to the AT state, and the pseudo BB state processing is terminated.

<Processing of first sub-controller 400>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 59(a) is a flow chart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 59(b) is a flow chart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 59(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, in step S301, various initial settings are performed. This initialization is performed when the power is turned on. In this processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state. Note that the rendering state of the first sub-control unit 400 is set to the initial state.

In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305.

In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S307, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S309, effect control processing is performed. Here, the effect data is expanded, the processing of setting the device data in the effect execution area provided in the RAM 408, the process of setting the effect data in the effect reservation area provided in the RAM 408, and the received command And based on the information contained in the command, it performs processing such as setting effect data and executing control processing. Note that the effect data set in the effect reservation area and the device data set in the effect execution area may be updated (overwritten) with different data. In this case, the effect contents are changed based on the overwritten data. Details of this effect control processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from the device data set in the effect execution areas corresponding to the speakers 272 and 277 and outputting the acquired control data to the sound source IC 418, sound effects are executed.

In step S313, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to various lamps 420 and outputting the acquired control data to the driving circuit 422, the effect by the lamp is executed.

In step S315, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, the control data is acquired from the device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the shutter 163, and the acquired control data is output to the driving circuit 424, thereby executing the effect by the shutter 163.

In step S317, information output processing is performed to set transmission of the control command to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the effect image display device 157, preparations are made to transmit this device data to the second sub-controller 500, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 59(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S321 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 59(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S331, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 59(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S333, transmission of the device data to the second sub-control section 500 set in step S315, update processing of the random number value for effect, and the like are performed.

Next, details of the effect control process (step S309) in the first sub-control unit main process of FIG. 59 will be described with reference to FIG. The same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of the production|presentation control processing (step S309) in FIG.

First, in step S3001 executed first, information acquisition update processing is executed, and the process advances to step S3003. Various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. In this information acquisition update process, information included in the various commands (RT, game state, effect state, total points, acquired points, items , number of remaining AT games, number of AT additional games, etc.) and stores (updates) this information. The first sub-control section 400 executes various effects based on these pieces of information. When a power restoration command is transmitted from the main control unit 300, the information about the game state and the performance state is updated based on the information included in the power restoration command, but the performance state is the point specialization A state. Only when information indicating that is received, the presentation state of the first sub-control unit 400 is updated to the normal state instead of the point specialization A state. For this reason, when power failure and power recovery occurs when the presentation state of the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is the point specialization A state, after power recovery, the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 's production state becomes inconsistent. In addition, this state of inconsistency in the presentation state is maintained until the presentation state of the main control unit 300 thereafter shifts to the normal state.

In step S3003, display point management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3005. The details of this display point management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S3005, display item management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3007. The details of this display item management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S3007, navigation-related display processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3009. For example, when the production state is the AT state, the number of AT remaining games and the number of AT additional games are displayed, and the number of medals obtained in that state is displayed. In addition, if the condition devices 7 to 12 are internally won, an effect is set to inform the correct operation order, and if the condition device 1 is internally won with the pseudo BB state schedule flag turned on, this pseudo BB. An effect is set to prompt the player to stop the role corresponding to the scheduled state flag. Further, when the AT state shifts to the pseudo BB state, if the conditions devices 7 to 12 are internally won, an effect is set to notify the operation order of the correct answer, and medals are obtained continuously from the AT state. A number is displayed. Thus, in this embodiment, the number of medals obtained is displayed through the AT state and the pseudo BB state. In the pseudo BB state, the value of the pseudo BB state remaining game number is displayed instead of the AT remaining game number, and the AT remaining game number is not subtracted.

In step S3009, other production setting processing is executed, and this production control processing is terminated. Here, for example, a process of displaying a background according to the rendering state of the first sub-control unit 400 or executing an appropriate rendering is executed. In this process, if the display points have reached 1000 when all the reels have stopped, 1000 is subtracted from the display points, and a display indicating that the player has obtained the right to acquire an item in the next game (for example, "Roulette x 1") is included. Also, in the confrontation state, a process of executing a confrontation effect based on the result of the confrontation is included. It should be noted that, in displaying the background according to the effect state in this processing, if the effect states of the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 do not match, background is displayed.

Next, the details of the display point management process (step S3003) in the effect control process of FIG. 60 will be described with reference to FIG. 61(a). This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the display point management process (step S3003) in FIG.

First, in step S3101, which is executed first, it is determined whether or not an acquisition point command has been received. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3103; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3111.

In step S3103, it is determined whether or not the production states of the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 are inconsistent (the main control unit 300 is in the point specialization A state, and the first sub-control unit 400 is in the normal state). be done. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3105; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3107.

In step S3105, a point acquisition lottery process is executed using the table shown in FIG. 61(b). FIG. 61(b) is a diagram showing a table used for a lottery for determining the value of acquired points. This table is the same as the part of the table shown in FIG. 54(b) that is used when the rendering state is the normal state. For example, if none of the condition devices are internally elected (in the case of a loss), 0 points are obtained with a probability of 90%, 5 points are obtained with a probability of 9%, and 10 points are obtained with a probability of 1%. Earn points. Note that the lottery process may be configured to be executed by the main control unit 300 . For example, when the production states of the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 are inconsistent, the acquisition points sent by the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 are derived separately from the normal acquisition points. and this value may be used in the first sub-control section 400 .

In step S3107, the acquired point value is added to the display points, and the process proceeds to step S3121. For the acquired points to be added here, the value of acquired points included in the acquired point command is used as it is. specified value is used. A display point is a point displayed on the effect image display device 157 .

In step S3111, to which the acquired point information is not obtained in step S3101, it is determined whether or not an item addition command has been received. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3113; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3121.

In step S3113, the cumulative point value included in the item addition command is set as the display point value, and the process proceeds to step S3121. Note that if the accumulated points and the displayed points do not match, this process resolves the mismatch.

In step S3121, it is determined whether or not the condition for displaying the display point is satisfied. This condition is satisfied when the rendering state of the first sub-control section 400 is any of the initial state, point specialization A state, normal state, point specialization B state, portent state, and confrontation state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3123; otherwise, the display point management process ends.

In step S3123, processing for displaying the value of the display point is executed, and this display point management processing ends.

Next, details of the display item management process (step S3005) in the effect control process of FIG. 60 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the display item management process (step S3005) in FIG.

First, in step S3201, which is executed first, it is determined whether or not an item addition command has been received. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3203; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3211.

In step S3203, the information of the currently possessed item is updated based on the information included in the item addition command, and the process proceeds to step S3205.

In step S3205, it is determined whether or not the display point value is greater than 0, or whether or not "roulette x 1" is displayed. If any of these conditions are met, the process advances to step S3207; otherwise, the display item management process ends.

In step S3207, item acquisition effect setting processing is executed, and this display item management processing ends. Details of the item acquisition effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S3211, which is followed when it is determined in step S3201 that information on item addition has not been obtained, it is determined whether or not an internal winning command has been received. If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S3213; otherwise, the display item management process ends.

In step S3213, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of remaining games in confrontation state is four. When the effect state in the main control unit 300 is the showdown state, the internal winning command includes information on the value of the number of remaining games in the showdown state, and the value of the number of remaining games in the showdown state is included in the game immediately before the showdown effect. be 4. That is, the above determination is for determining whether or not the current game is the game immediately before the confrontation effect. If this condition is met, the process proceeds to step S3215; otherwise. This display item management process ends.

At step S3215, an effect is set to use the "killing rate UP" item among the displayed items. Specifically, an effect of erasing all of the displayed "defeat rate UP" items and displaying the probability of winning against the enemy character (match result determined in the AT-related processing of FIG. 51) is executed. Note that the above effect is not set when the "killing rate UP" item is not displayed.

In step S3217, the item information (possessed items and display items) stored in the RAM 408 is cleared, and the display item management process ends.

Next, details of the item acquisition effect setting process (step S3207) in the display item management process of FIG. 62 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the item acquisition effect setting process (step S3207) in FIG.

First, in step S3301 executed first, the item currently displayed in the effect image display 157 is compared with information on the item currently possessed, and the process proceeds to step S3303.

In step S3303, it is determined whether or not there is a difference between the two items as a result of the comparison in step S3301. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3305; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3311.

In step S3305, an item obtainment effect is set as a result of not obtaining an additional item, and the item obtainment effect setting process is terminated.

In step S3311, it is determined whether or not there is one item difference as a result of the comparison in step S3301. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3313; otherwise (when there are multiple item differences), the process proceeds to step S3321.

In step S3313, an item obtainment effect indicating that an item has been obtained is set, and the item obtainment effect setting process is terminated. When an item is acquired (acquired in step S1321 in FIG. 47A) during normal game progress, the acquired item information is added to the possessed item information included in the item addition command. Since this information is not reflected in the displayed items, only the newly obtained one will be different when compared with the information of the items in possession. Based on the above, when the displayed item is compared with the information of the currently possessed item, and only the newly acquired item is different, the newly acquired item is added in step S3313. A production (item acquisition production) is set. Note that when the number of items possessed reaches the upper limit, although the item addition command is transmitted, there is no newly acquired item, so there is no difference even if the above comparison is made. In this case, the effect is set in the same manner as the item acquisition effect, in which the final item is not added (step S3305).

In step S3321, it is determined whether or not there are a plurality of different items as a result of the comparison in step S3301. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3313; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3321.

In step S3321, it is determined whether or not the presentation state is the confrontation state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3313; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3323.

In step S3323, it is determined whether or not the player possesses the "defeat rate UP" item that is not displayed on the effect image display device 157. FIG. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3325; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3313.

In step S3325, an item acquisition effect is set to add the oldest of the "defeat rate UP" items that have not yet been displayed, and this item acquisition effect setting process is terminated. When the power is restored due to the end of business hours, etc., the information of the items possessed by the main control unit 300 is restored (step S1011 in FIG. 44), but the first sub-control unit 400 Information about the displayed item is cleared from RAM 408 . If a new item is acquired in this state, the item displayed on the effect image display device 157 and the possessed item information included in the item addition command may differ for a plurality of items including the newly acquired item. have a nature. In this way, if the displayed item and the information of the possessed item are different from the information of the newly acquired item (determination of No in step S3311), the 3325) to add the oldest item among the "destruction rate UP" items that have not yet been displayed (step S3325). If the player does not possess the "Killing Rate UP" item, an item acquisition rendering for adding a newly acquired item is set (step S3313). However, when the production state is the confrontation state, the items to be acquired are different from those in the normal state (steps S1305 and S1315 in FIG. 47), so the oldest item among the "defeat rate UP" items possessed is If the item acquisition effect is performed, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, when the effect state is the confrontation state, an item acquisition effect for adding a newly acquired item is set (Yes in step S3321).

<Processing of second sub-controller 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64(a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 64(b) is a flow chart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 64(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 64(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S401 of FIG. 64(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S403, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405.

In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S407, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S409, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S407, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S411, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S409. For example, if there is an instruction for image control in the effect data read in step S409, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). This image control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 64(d). When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S403.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 64(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 . In step S415 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 64(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S417, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S403 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 64(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S419, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing of step S411 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 64(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S421, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 518 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

At step S423, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S425, otherwise a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S425, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S421, the CPU 504 obtains information of the image data forming the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, and so on). , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516 . The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S427, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S429, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image rendering. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S431. wait for is entered.

In step S431, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

≪Explanation of operation≫
The features of the above-described slot machine 100 will be described below using an operation example.

[From the initial state to the normal state via the point specialization A state]
Hereinafter, the flow from the initial state to the normal state via the point specialization A state will be described with reference to FIG. This figure shows an example of the effect that is executed from the initial state to the normal state via the point specialization A state.

The initial state is set in the first game after changing the setting or clearing the RAM (at the start of a round, step S1009 in FIG. 44, step S1101 in FIG. 45). It is also set when the confrontation state or AT state ends (at the start of the next cycle, step S1E11 in FIG. 57, step S1F13 in FIG. 58(a)). FIG. 65(a) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when the initial state is set. "0000/1000" at the bottom left of this display indicates the total points on the display at the top and the upper limit of the total points on the display at the bottom. That is, the display of "0000/1000" indicates that the accumulated points are 0 points. This display of points is displayed in the confrontation state until the result of the confrontation is displayed, and is not displayed in the AT state or the pseudo BB state (steps S3121 and S3123 in FIG. 61(a)). In this embodiment, a value different from the accumulated points of the main control unit 300 may be displayed as the accumulated points on the display due to power failure and power restoration.

When the game is started in this state and one game ends (all reels are stopped), the display of the effect image display device 157 is changed to the state shown in FIG. 65(b). During this one game, the number of games to shift to the confrontation mode and the precursor state is set (FIG. 48). In FIG. 65(b), a message indicating that the confrontation mode has been set is displayed at the top of the screen. At the time of FIG. 65(a), the confrontation mode has not yet been set, and a message indicating that the confrontation mode setting has not been completed is displayed at the top of the screen. In accordance with the number of games set here, it shifts to the precursor state.

Only one game is set in the initial state, and when the next game is started from the state of FIG. 65(b), the state shifts to the point specialization A state (step S1A07 of FIG. 53). FIG. 65(c) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when this point specialization A state is set. This point specialization A state is a state in which the points for acquiring items are more likely to increase than in the normal state (see FIG. 54(b)). A message is displayed in the upper part of the screen indicating that it is in a state where it is easy to After 30 games have passed in this point specialization A state, the state shifts to the normal state (step S1C05 in FIG. 55(a)). FIG. 65(d) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when this normal state is set.

[From the normal state to the point specialization B state or the false portent state, until the production state returns to the normal state]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 66, the flow from the normal state to the point specializing B state or false portent state to the normal state again will be described. This figure shows an example of the effect that is executed until the effect state changes from the normal state to the point specialization B state or the false portent state and returns to the normal state.

The normal state is a presentation state in which the player mainly stays during the round. In this presentation state, points may be obtained based on the internal winning combination and the confrontation mode (see FIG. 54). FIGS. 66(a) and 66(b) show an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when this normal state is set. FIG. 66(a) is an example of a state in which no items are displayed, and FIG. 66(b) is an example of a state in which items are displayed. From this normal state, it shifts to any of the point specialization B state, the false portent state, and the true portent state. Of these, the point specialization B state and the false portent state transition to the normal state again, whereas the true portent state does not transition to the normal state. Here, the transition to the point-specific B state and the false portent state will be described.

In the normal state, a lottery for transition to the point specialization B state is executed based on the internal winning combination and the confrontation mode (Fig. 50). ) step S1C13). FIGS. 66(c) and 66(d) show an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when this point specialization B state is set. In addition, FIG.66(c) is an example of the state in which the item is not displayed, and FIG.66(d) is an example of the state in which the item is displayed. This point specialization B state is a state in which the points for acquiring items are more likely to increase than in the normal state (see FIG. 54(b)). A message is displayed at the top of the screen indicating that the number is likely to increase. After 5 games have passed in this point specialization B state, the state shifts to the normal state (step S1C25 in FIG. 55(c)).

In addition, in the normal state, when the number of games to start the false precursory state that has already been set is reached, the number of games in the false precursory state (the number of remaining precursory precursory games) is set, and the state shifts to the false precursory state (FIG. 55(b)). ) step S1C19). FIGS. 66(e) and 66(f) show an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when the false portent state is set. FIG. 66(e) is an example of a state in which no items are displayed, and FIG. 66(f) is an example of a state in which items are displayed. This false portent state is a state in which the points for acquiring items are more likely to increase than in the normal state (see FIG. 54(b)). In FIGS. 66(e) and 66(f), a message indicating a precursory state is displayed in the upper right of the screen. This screen is the same screen as the true precursor state, and is configured so that the type of the precursor state cannot be identified (or is difficult to identify) with this screen alone. This false portent state transitions to a normal state after the set number of games has passed (step S1D09 in FIG. 56).

[Acquisition of items when the production state is normal]
The flow of item acquisition when the rendering state is the normal state will be described below with reference to FIG. This figure is a diagram showing an example of the item acquisition effect when the effect state is the normal state.

In a normal state, when the accumulated points reach a predetermined number (1000 in this embodiment), a lottery for an acquired item is executed in exchange for this predetermined number of accumulated points (route of Yes in step S1303 in FIG. 47(a)). , an effect indicating this is executed (item acquisition effect, step S3207 in FIG. 62, FIG. 63). FIGS. 67(a) to (f) show an example of changes due to this item acquisition effect.

First, FIG. 67(a) shows that the cumulative points on the display have reached 1000 in the normal state. When all the reels are stopped in this state, 1000 is subtracted from the accumulated points on the display as shown in FIG. is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen.

Subsequently, by operating the start lever 135 to start the game, the display of "Roulette x 1" shown in Fig. 67(b) is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in Fig. 67(c). Further, as shown in FIG. 67(d), a roulette effect is executed in which one is selected from three of "destroy one", "defeat rate? UP", and "chance". Furthermore, when all the reels are stopped, an effect in which one of the options is determined is executed. FIG. 67(e) shows an example of displaying that the "defeat rate small UP" item has been obtained. Also, FIG. 67(f) shows that the display of the items acquired in the next game is added.

"Defeat 1" and "Defeat Rate? UP" in FIG. 67(d) indicate the obtainability of items with the same name. Also, the display of "chance" indicates the acquisition possibility of some item. In addition, when the number of items reaches the upper limit and cannot be obtained, this "chance" is selected and an effect that the item cannot be obtained is executed. In other words, the options displayed during the item acquisition effect are not limited to items with the same name. good too.

In addition, as explained above, there are cases where you can move from the normal state to the point specialization B state or the precursor state to acquire more points, but in the point specialization B state or the precursor state, items cannot be acquired. It's becoming For this reason, for example, when the accumulated points are 2000 or more, the point-specialized B state (or precursor state) may shift to the normal state, but only one item can be obtained in one game. there is For example, when the accumulated points are 2000 or more, the item acquisition process is executed continuously for two games.

[From the normal state to the true omen state, and then to the confrontation state]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 68, the flow from the normal state to the true omen state to the showdown state will be described. This figure shows an example of the effect that is executed until the effect state shifts from the normal state to the true omen state and shifts to the confrontation state.

FIG. 68(a) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when this normal state is set. In the normal state, when the number of games to start the true precursor state that has already been set is reached, the number of games in the true precursor state (the number of games remaining in the precursor state) is set and the state shifts to the true precursor state (see FIG. 55(b)). step S1C19). FIG. 68(b) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when this true precursor state is set. This true omen state is a state in which the points for acquiring items are more likely to increase than in the normal state (see FIG. 54(b)). In FIG. 68(b), a message indicating a precursory state is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. Note that this screen is the same screen as the false precursor state, and is configured so that the type of the precursor state cannot be identified (or is difficult to identify) with this screen alone. When the set number of games has passed, this true precursor state shifts to a confrontation state (step S1D07 in FIG. 56). FIG. 68(c) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when this confrontation state is set.

[Regarding item acquisition effects during confrontation]
The flow of item acquisition when the effect state is the confrontation state will be described below with reference to FIGS. 69(a) to (c). This figure is a diagram showing an example of the item acquisition effect when the effect state is the showdown state.

In the confrontation state, an effect is executed to indicate that the state has shifted to the confrontation state in the first game, but if there are accumulated points remaining in this game, items can be obtained in exchange for them (see FIG. 47(a)). Yes in step S1313), an effect indicating this (item acquisition effect, step S3207 in FIG. 62, FIG. 63) is executed. Since there is no route to transition from the confrontation state to the normal state, and item acquisition in the normal state is not performed in the current round, 130 points are wasted. For this reason, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which items can be acquired in exchange for the remaining points that do not reach 1000 points in the normal state.

First, FIG. 69(a) shows that there are 130 accumulated points on the display in the game (true precursor state) immediately before shifting to the confrontation state. Subsequently, by operating the start lever 135 to start the game, the accumulated points on the display are set to 0 as shown in FIG. ” is executed. Furthermore, when all the reels are stopped, an effect in which one of the options is determined is executed. FIG. 69(c) shows an example of displaying that the "Killing Rate? UP" item has been acquired. It should be noted that the content of the item acquisition effect here may be the same as the item acquisition effect in the normal state, or may be different.

The above is the effect executed in the first game in the confrontation state. In the second game, if the "killing rate UP" item is displayed, an effect using this item is executed (FIGS. 69(d) to (f)). On the other hand, if the "Killing Rate UP" item is not displayed, a confrontation effect starts (FIG. 69(g)).

[Regarding item use effect during showdown]
The flow of item use when the effect state is the confrontation state will be described below with reference to FIGS. 69(d) to (f). This figure shows an example of the item use effect when the effect state is the confrontation state.

In the showdown state, if the player possesses the "defeat rate UP" item, an effect (item use effect) using the "defeat rate UP" item is executed in the second game (Yes in step S3213 of FIG. 62). . First, by operating the start lever 135 at the start of the second game in the showdown state, the message "Defeat rate UP challenge" is displayed at the top of the screen as shown in FIG. 69(d). Further, when all the reels are stopped, a message "Press the 〇〇 button!" is displayed as shown in FIG. The victory probability (defeat rate) of the main character due to the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed, and the "defeat rate UP" item is erased. FIG. 69(f) shows that the winning probability (defeat rate) of the main character is 72% due to the "defeat rate UP" item. It should be noted that it is not limited to the example in which the kill rate is displayed by the button operation described above, and the configuration may be such that the kill rate is displayed without requiring such an operation. Further, the operation means used for button operation may be used for the progress of the game, or may be used for performance regardless of the progress of the game.

The confrontation effect is started from the next game after the game in which the item use effect is executed. It should be noted that if the "defeat rate UP" item is not displayed at the end of the first game of the confrontation effect, the above item use effect is not executed and the confrontation effect is started from the second game (Fig. 69(g)). is started.

[Regarding the case where all the confrontation effects in the confrontation state are won]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 70, a case in which the game is completely won in the confrontation effect in the confrontation state will be described. This figure is a diagram showing an example of a case where the showdown effect is completely won.

In the confrontation state, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not the main character will win against the enemy character (step S1615 in FIG. 51), and a confrontation effect is executed based on the result of this lottery (step S3009 in FIG. 60). It should be noted that the "defeat rate UP" item and the "defeat 1 body" item make it easier for the main character to win and transition to the AT state (see the process of step S1615 in FIG. 51).

FIG. 70(a) shows an example of the start of the first game of the confrontation effect, and FIG. 70(b) shows an example of the case where the first game of the confrontation effect is won. At this time, at the bottom right of the screen in FIG. 70(b), the characters "One body witnessed" indicating that the first game was won are displayed. The display of this character is maintained until the end of the confrontation effect.

FIG. 70(c) shows an example of the start of the second battle of the confrontation effect, and FIG. 70(d) shows an example of winning the second race of the confrontation effect. At this time, at the bottom right of the screen in FIG. 70(d), the characters "Double Witness Destroyed" are displayed to indicate that the player has won the second battle. The display of this character is maintained until the end of the confrontation effect.

FIG. 70(e) shows an example of the start of the third battle of the confrontation effect, and FIG. 70(f) shows an example of winning the third race of the confrontation effect. At this time, at the bottom right of the screen in FIG. 70(f), the characters "Three bodies witnessed" are displayed to indicate that the player has won the third battle. The display of this character is maintained until the end of the confrontation effect.

In the case where the confrontation effect is to win all games, the AT state schedule flag is set to ON at the time of lottery for the result of the confrontation preceding this. As a result, the next game in which all wins have been achieved in the confrontation effect is shifted to the AT state (Yes at step S1E05 in FIG. 57). FIG. 70(g) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when the AT state is set.

[Regarding the case of losing the showdown during the showdown]
A case where the player loses in the confrontation presentation in the confrontation state will be described below with reference to FIG. This figure is a diagram showing an example of a case in which the player loses in the confrontation effect.

In the confrontation state, a lottery is executed to determine whether the main character will win against the enemy character (step S1615 in FIG. 51), and a confrontation effect is executed based on the result of this lottery (step S3009 in FIG. 60).

FIG. 71(a) shows an example of the start of the first battle of the confrontation effect, and FIG. 71(b) shows an example of the defeat in the first race of the confrontation effect. As in the example of FIG. 70, when the confrontation effect is completely won, the state shifts to the AT state, but when the main character is defeated in the confrontation effect, the state shifts to the initial state from the next game (step S1E11 in FIG. 57). FIG. 71(c) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when the initial state is set. After shifting to the initial state, various settings are executed and the next cycle starts.

[Transition from AT state to pseudo BB or initial state]
The flow from the AT state to the pseudo BB state or the initial state will be described below with reference to FIG. This figure shows an example of the effects that are executed from the AT state to the pseudo BB state or the initial state.

In the AT state, the player can obtain more profit by notifying the order of pressing the correct answer (step S3007 in FIG. 60) when the condition devices 7 to 12 (duplicate hands of minor hands 6 to 8) are internally elected. It is in a state where it can be obtained. FIG. 72(a) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when the AT state is set. In the example of FIG. 72(a), three numbers are used to indicate the pressing order of the right, middle, correct answer. Also, at the bottom left of the screen, the number of remaining AT state games and the number of elapsed AT state games up to the present are displayed, and at the bottom right of the screen, the number of games won after shifting to AT state in this lap The number of medals is displayed. The AT state shifts to the initial state when the number of remaining AT games becomes 0 (step S1F13 in FIG. 58). FIG. 72(c) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when the initial state is set. Note that the number of AT remaining games may be added (step S1627 in FIG. 51).

Also, in the AT state, a lottery is executed to enable transition to the pseudo BB state (step S1623 in FIG. 51). If the lottery is won, the pseudo BB state schedule flag is set to ON, and an effect is executed to prompt the player to stop the replay role 2 or the replay role 3, which are pseudo BB symbols (step S3007 in FIG. 60). Then, when the pattern of the replay combination 2 or the replay combination 3 stops, the game moves to the pseudo BB state (step S1F07 in FIG. 58(a)).

In the pseudo BB state, in the same way as in the AT state, when the conditions devices 7 to 12 (duplicate wins of minor wins 6 to 8) are internally won, the order of pressing the correct answer is reported, and the player can obtain more profit. (step S3007 in FIG. 60). FIG. 72(b) shows an example of the display of the effect image display device 157 when the pseudo BB state is set. In the example of FIG. 72(b), three numbers are used to indicate the pressing order of the right, middle, correct answer. Further, the number of remaining games in the pseudo BB state and the number of elapsed games in the pseudo BB state up to the present are displayed at the lower left of the screen. Further, the number of earned medals is displayed continuously from the AT state at the bottom right of the screen. This pseudo BB state includes two types of pseudo BB1 state which is shifted by the replay combination 2 and pseudo BB2 state which is shifted by the replay combination 3 . The pseudo BB1 state shifts to the AT state after 50 games have passed, and the pseudo BB2 state shifts to the AT state after 20 games have passed (step S1F25 in FIG. 58(b)).

[Regarding the operation of reflecting the state of the main control unit 300 in the first sub-control unit 400]
The operations of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an operation example of the slot machine 1 of this embodiment.

As described in the operation examples of FIGS. 65 to 72, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, depending on the points acquired in the normal state, point specialization A state, point specialization B state, and precursor state, The cumulative points are increased, and items are acquired in exchange for a predetermined value (1000 in the embodiment) of cumulative points. In the example of FIG. 73 (the upper part of the figure), the production state changes from the initial state to the normal state through the point specialization A state, and in the next game after reaching 1000 points (cumulative P in the figure), 1000 It is shown that the item "Medium kill rate UP" was acquired in exchange for the cumulative points (Main control: Medium UP added to possessed item column). Also, after that (lower part of the figure), in the next game when the total points reached 1010, in exchange for 1000 total points, the "kill rate small UP" item (main control: small UP added to the possession item column) was acquired. is shown. It should be noted that only 10 accumulated points remain here and are used in subsequent games.

The above operations are executed in the main control section 300 , but these states are reflected by the first sub-control section 400 . First, the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 reflects the effect state of the main control unit 300 (step S1A35 in FIG. 53, step S3001 in FIG. 60), and the effect state such as the operation examples in FIGS. state according to

Also, in the first sub-control section 400, the points obtained for each game are added to the display points (step S3107 in FIG. 61(a)). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 73, the display points and the accumulated points of the main control section 300 are the same. By displaying the value of the display points, the player can grasp the accumulated points of the main control section 300 (step S3123 in FIG. 61(a)).

Further, in the first sub-control section 400, when an item is acquired in the main control section 300, the information of the possessed item is transmitted (step S1323 in FIG. 47(a)). is updated (step S3207 in FIG. 62, step S3313 in FIG. 63). FIG. 73 shows that in the game in which the possessed item is added in the main control section 300, the item acquisition effect is executed and the display item of the first sub-control section 400 is added.

[Handling of points in the event of a power outage/restoration]
74 and 75, the operation when the rendering states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be described below. 74 and 75 are diagrams showing an operation example in the case where the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment experiences power failure and power recovery.

In FIG. 73, the operation of reflecting the state of the main control section 300 in the first sub-control section 400 has been described. However, when the power is restored, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display point is cleared in the first sub-control unit 400. The accumulated points and the displayed points of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. FIG. 74(a) shows an example in which the power failure and power recovery occurred at the time when the cumulative point value reached 500. FIG. In this case, there is no change in the accumulated points of the main control section 300 before and after the power failure and power recovery, but the display points of the first sub-control section 400 are 0 after the power failure and power recovery. In this case, since the display points increase from this point, although the accumulated points of the main control unit 300 and the amount of increase are the same, the values do not match.

After that, when the total points reach 1000, the main control unit 300 transmits the information of the possessed item (step S1323 in FIG. 47(a)), and based on this information, the item acquisition effect and the displayed item are updated. (Step S3207 in FIG. 62, Step S3313 in FIG. 63). FIG. 74(a) shows that in a game in which a possessed item is added in the main control section 300, an item acquisition effect is executed and a display item of the first sub-control section 400 is added. there is Also, at this time, the value of the accumulated points is reflected in the value of the displayed points (step S3113 in FIG. 61(a)). Therefore, from this point on, the cumulative points of the main control section 300 and the display points of the first sub-control section 400 will match. In this case, the item acquisition effect is executed before the display points reach 1,000.

Unlike the above example, if power failure and power recovery occurs when the production state is the point specialization A state, it is configured so that not only the points but also the production state will be inconsistent ( Step S3001 in FIG. 60). FIG. 74(b) shows an example in which power supply is interrupted and restored when the effect state is the point specialization A state and the cumulative point value reaches 500. In FIG. In this case, there is no change in the accumulated points of the main control section 300 before and after the power failure and power recovery, but the display points of the first sub-control section 400 are 0 after the power failure and power recovery. Also, it is shown that the effect state of the main control unit 300 remains the point specialization A state before and after the power failure and power recovery, but the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is the normal state. ing. In this case, the amount of increase in the display points does not reflect the amount of increase in the accumulated points of the main control unit 300, and the amount of increase is drawn separately (step S3105 in FIG. 61(a)). FIG. 74(b) shows that there are cases where the amount of increase in cumulative points and the amount of increase in display points do not match. Specifically, after the power failure, the cumulative points increase in the order of 20, 200, 0, 0 from 500, while the display points increase in the order of 0, 5, 20, 5, 0. ing. After that, when the production state of the main control unit 300 shifts to the normal state, it becomes a state that matches the production state of the first sub-control unit 400, and from here on, as in FIG. , the amount of increase in the display points of the first sub-controller 400 is the same. Then, when the total points reach 1000, the main control unit 300 transmits the information of the possessed item (step S1323 in FIG. 47(a)), and based on this information, the item acquisition effect and the displayed item are updated ( Step S3207 in FIG. 62, step S3313 in FIG. 63), and the accumulated point value is reflected in the display point value (step S3113 in FIG. 61(a)). From this point on, the cumulative points of the main control section 300 and the display points of the first sub-control section 400 will match.

FIG. 75 shows an example in which the power failure and power recovery occurred immediately after the presentation state shifted from the initial state to the point specialization A state. In this example, both the accumulated points and the display points immediately after power restoration are zero. 74(b), the effect state of the main control unit 300 remains the point specialization A state, but the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is normal. ing. In this case, as in FIG. 74(b), the amount of increase in display points does not reflect the amount of increase in accumulated points of main control unit 300, and the amount of increase is drawn separately (step S3105 in FIG. 61(a)). ). FIG. 75 shows that the amount of increase in total points and the amount of increase in display points may not match. After that, when the effect state of the main control unit 300 shifts to the normal state, it becomes a state that matches the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400, and from here the main control unit 300 , and the amount of increase in the display points of the first sub-control unit 400 become the same. Then, when the total points reach 1000, the main control unit 300 transmits the information of the possessed item (step S1323 in FIG. 47(a)), and based on this information, the item acquisition effect and the displayed item are updated ( Step S3207 in FIG. 62, step S3313 in FIG. 63), and the accumulated point value is reflected in the display point value (step S3113 in FIG. 61(a)). From this point on, the cumulative points of the main control section 300 and the display points of the first sub-control section 400 will match.

[Regarding the handling of additional items in the event of a power failure (1)]
Hereinafter, the operation when the rendering states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment.

In the examples of FIGS. 74 and 75, when power is restored after a power failure, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display point is cleared in the first sub-control unit 400. Although the operation for holding items has been described, the same operation occurs for information on possessed items. Specifically, the possessed item information managed by the main control unit 300 is restored to the state before the power failure, but the displayed item information in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the possessed item information of the main control unit is restored. and the display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 76, as a result of a power outage and restoration in the state in which the item "medium defeat rate UP" is possessed and in the state in which this item is displayed, the main control unit 300 has possession information of the "medium defeat rate UP" item. An example is shown in which this item is not displayed (there are no displayed items).

After that, when the accumulated points reach 1000, the information of the possessed item is transmitted from the main control section 300 (step S1323 in FIG. 47(a)). In the example of FIG. 76, an example of acquiring a "small kill rate UP" item is shown, and in this case, information is transmitted indicating that the item "medium kill rate UP" and "small kill rate UP" item are possessed. . Based on this information, the first sub-control unit 400 executes item acquisition effects and update of displayed items (step S3207 in FIG. 62). Here, when the possessed item and the displayed item do not match as shown in FIG. 76, the oldest item among the possessed "defeat rate UP" items that are not displayed is displayed (see FIG. 76). 63 step S3325). In the example of FIG. 76 , an effect is executed in which the oldest item, which is the oldest item among the “medium kill rate UP” item and the “small kill rate UP” item, is acquired. It will be. In the example of FIG. 76, it is shown that the item "improved kill rate" has been added as a display item.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 76, it is shown that the production state has shifted to the confrontation state after that. In this example, when there are a "medium kill rate UP" item and a "low kill rate UP" item as possessed items, and a "medium kill rate UP" item is displayed, an item use effect in a confrontation state is executed. (Item acquisition effect may be executed in the confrontation state, but it is omitted here for convenience of explanation). First, this item use effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 62). Here, since the "defeat rate increase" item is displayed, all the "defeat rate increase" items are erased, and an effect of displaying the probability of defeating the enemy character (defeat rate) is executed (Fig. 69). (d) to (f), lower half of FIG. 76). It should be noted that the defeat rate displayed at this time is derived from the "defeat rate UP" item possessed, so the defeat rate also reflects the "defeat rate small UP" item that is not displayed here (Fig. 51 step S1615). FIG. 76 shows an example in which 6% is added for each "defeat rate UP" item to the initial value of 50%, resulting in a total defeat rate of 62%.

[Regarding the handling of additional items in the event of a power failure/recovery (2)]
Hereinafter, the operation when the rendering states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be described with reference to FIG. 77A and 77B are diagrams showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occur in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment.

In the examples of FIGS. 74 and 75, when power is restored after a power failure, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display point is cleared in the first sub-control unit 400. Although the operation for holding items has been described, the same operation occurs for information on possessed items. Specifically, the possessed item information managed by the main control unit 300 is restored to the state before the power failure, but the displayed item information in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the possessed item information of the main control unit is restored. and the display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 77, as a result of a power outage and restoration in the state in which the item "medium defeat rate UP" is possessed and in the state in which this item is displayed, the main control unit 300 has possession information of the "medium defeat rate UP" item. An example is shown in which this item is not displayed (there are no displayed items).

After that, when the accumulated points reach 1000, the information of the possessed item is transmitted from the main control section 300 (step S1323 in FIG. 47(a)). The example of FIG. 77 shows an example in which the "destroy 1 body" item is acquired, and in this case, the information that the "improved kill rate" item and the "defeat 1 body" item are transmitted. Based on this information, the first sub-control unit 400 executes item acquisition effects and update of displayed items (step S3207 in FIG. 62). Here, when the possessed item and the displayed item do not match as shown in FIG. 77, the oldest item among the possessed "defeat rate UP" items that are not displayed is displayed (see FIG. 77). 63 step S3325). In the example of FIG. 77, an effect is executed in which the oldest item that has not yet been displayed is the "medium defeat rate UP" item. In the example of FIG. 77, it is shown that the item "improved kill rate" has been added as a display item.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 77, it is shown that the production state has shifted to the confrontation state after that. In this example, there are a "Medium Destruction Rate UP" item and a "Defeat 1 body" item as possessed items, and a "Medium Destruction Rate UP" item is a display item, and the item use effect in the confrontation state is executed. I will explain (the item acquisition effect may be executed in the confrontation state, but it is omitted here for convenience of explanation). First, this item use effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 62). Here, since the "defeat rate increase" item is displayed, all the "defeat rate increase" items are erased, and an effect of displaying the probability of defeating the enemy character (defeat rate) is executed (Fig. 69). (d) to (f), lower half of FIG. 77). It should be noted that the defeat rate displayed at this time is derived from the possessed "defeat rate UP" item (step S1615 in FIG. 51). FIG. 77 shows an example in which 6% is added for each "killing rate UP" item to the initial value of the killing rate of 50%, resulting in a total killing rate of 56%. In this example, since the player has the "defeat 1 body" item, the victory of the main character is confirmed in the first battle of the subsequent confrontation production.

[Regarding the handling of additional items in the event of a power outage (3)]
Hereinafter, the operation when the rendering states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment.

In the examples of FIGS. 74 and 75, when power is restored after a power failure, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display point is cleared in the first sub-control unit 400. Although the operation for holding items has been described, the same operation occurs for information on possessed items. Specifically, the possessed item information managed by the main control unit 300 is restored to the state before the power failure, but the displayed item information in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the possessed item information of the main control unit is restored. and the display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 78, as a result of a power failure and restoration in a state in which two items of "Medium Destruction Rate UP" are possessed and a state in which these items are displayed, the main control unit 300 possesses the "Medium Destruction Rate UP" item. An example is shown in which there is information but this item is not displayed (there is no display item).

After that, when the accumulated points reach 1000, the information of the possessed item is transmitted from the main control section 300 (step S1323 in FIG. 47(a)). In the example of FIG. 78, an example of acquiring a "small kill rate UP" item is shown, and in this case, information is sent that two "medium kill rate UP" items and a "small kill rate UP" item are possessed. be done. Based on this information, the first sub-control unit 400 executes item acquisition effects and update of displayed items (step S3207 in FIG. 62). Here, when the possessed item and the displayed item do not match as shown in FIG. 78, the oldest item among the possessed "defeat rate UP" items that are not displayed is displayed (see FIG. 78). 63 step S3325). In the example of FIG. 78, an effect is executed in which the oldest item, which has not yet been displayed, of the two items "Medium Destruction Rate UP" and "Small Destruction Rate UP" item is obtained. will be In the example of FIG. 78, it is shown that the item "improved kill rate" has been added as a display item.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 78, it is shown that the production state has shifted to the confrontation state after that. In this example, there are two "Medium Destruction Rate UP" items and a "Small Destruction Rate UP" item as possessed items, and the item use effect in the confrontation state is executed with the "Medium Destruction Rate UP" item as the displayed item. (In the confrontation state, an item acquisition effect may be executed, but it is omitted here for convenience of explanation). First, this item use effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 62). Here, since the "defeat rate increase" item is displayed, all the "defeat rate increase" items are erased, and an effect of displaying the probability of defeating the enemy character (defeat rate) is executed (Fig. 69). (d) to (f), lower half of FIG. 78). In addition, since the kill rate displayed at this time is derived from the "defeat rate UP" item that you have, the "defeat rate medium UP" item and the "defeat rate small UP" item that are not displayed here are also reflected. (Step S1615 in FIG. 51). FIG. 78 shows an example in which 6% is added for each "defeat rate UP" item to the initial value of 50%, resulting in a total defeat rate of 68%.

[Regarding the handling of additional items in the event of a power outage (4)]
Hereinafter, the operation when the rendering states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment.

In the examples of FIGS. 74 and 75, when power is restored after a power failure, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display point is cleared in the first sub-control unit 400. Although the operation for holding items has been described, the same operation occurs for information on possessed items. Specifically, the possessed item information managed by the main control unit 300 is restored to the state before the power failure, but the displayed item information in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the possessed item information of the main control unit is restored. and the display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 79, as a result of a power outage and restoration in the state in which the item "defeat 1" and the item "immediate kill rate UP" and in the state in which these items are displayed, the main control unit 300 "defeats 1". ' item and a 'medium kill rate UP' item, but this item is not displayed (there is no displayed item).

After that, when the accumulated points reach 1000, the information of possessed items is transmitted from the main control section 300 (step S1323 in FIG. 47(a)). The example of FIG. 79 shows an example in which the "defeat rate small UP" item is obtained. information is sent. Based on this information, the first sub-control unit 400 executes an item acquisition effect and updates display items (step S3207 in FIG. 62). Here, if the possessed item and the displayed item do not match as shown in FIG. 79, the oldest item among the possessed "defeat rate UP" items that are not displayed is displayed (see FIG. 79). 63 step S3325). In the example of FIG. 79, an effect is executed in which the oldest item, which has not been displayed yet, of the "Medium Destruction Rate UP" item and the "Small Destruction Rate UP" item is obtained. It will be. In the example of FIG. 79, it is shown that the item "improved kill rate" has been added as a display item.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 79, it is shown that the production state has shifted to the confrontation state after that. In this example, there are "defeat 1" item, "medium kill rate UP" item, and "small kill rate UP" item as possessed items, and in a state where there is a "medium kill rate UP" item as a display item, in the confrontation state A case where an item use effect is executed will be described (although an item acquisition effect may be executed in a confrontation state, it is omitted here for convenience of explanation). First, this item use effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 62). Here, since the "defeat rate increase" item is displayed, all the "defeat rate increase" items are erased, and an effect of displaying the probability of defeating the enemy character (defeat rate) is executed (Fig. 69). (d) to (f), lower half of FIG. 79). It should be noted that the defeat rate displayed at this time is derived from the "defeat rate UP" item possessed, so the defeat rate also reflects the "defeat rate small UP" item that is not displayed here (Fig. 51 step S1615). FIG. 79 shows an example in which 6% is added for each "defeat rate UP" item to the initial value of 50%, resulting in a total defeat rate of 62%. In this example, since the player has the "defeat 1 body" item, the victory of the main character is confirmed in the first battle of the subsequent confrontation production.

[Regarding the handling of additional items in the event of a power outage (5)]
Hereinafter, the operation when the rendering states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an operation example in the case where the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment experiences power failure and power recovery.

In the examples of FIGS. 74 and 75, when power is restored after a power failure, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display point is cleared in the first sub-control unit 400. Although the operation for holding items has been described, the same operation occurs for information on possessed items. Specifically, the possessed item information managed by the main control unit 300 is restored to the state before the power failure, but the displayed item information in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the possessed item information of the main control unit is restored. and the display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 80, as a result of a power outage and restoration in the state in which the "defeat 1 body" item is possessed and in the state in which this item is displayed, the main control unit 300 has the possession information of the "defeat 1 body" item, but this An example is shown in which no items are displayed (there are no displayed items).

After that, when the accumulated points reach 1000, the information of the possessed item is transmitted from the main control section 300 (step S1323 in FIG. 47(a)). The example of FIG. 80 shows an example in which the "defeat rate small UP" item is acquired, and in this case, the information that the player possesses the "defeat 1 body" item and the "defeat rate small UP" item is transmitted. Based on this information, the first sub-control unit 400 executes item acquisition effects and update of displayed items (step S3207 in FIG. 62). Here, if the possessed item and the displayed item do not match as shown in FIG. 80, the oldest item among the possessed "defeat rate UP" items that are not displayed is displayed (see FIG. 80). 63 step S3325). In the example of FIG. 80, an effect is executed in which the oldest item that has not yet been displayed is the "small kill rate UP" item. In the example of FIG. 80, it is shown that the item "defeat rate small UP" has been added as a display item.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 80, it is shown that the production state has shifted to the confrontation state after that. In this example, there are a "defeat 1" item and a "small kill rate UP" item as possessed items, and a "small kill rate UP" item is displayed, and an item use effect is executed in a confrontation state. I will explain (the item acquisition effect may be executed in the confrontation state, but it is omitted here for convenience of explanation). First, this item use effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 62). Here, since the "defeat rate small UP" item is displayed, all the "defeat rate UP" items are erased, and an effect of displaying the probability of defeating the enemy character (defeat rate) is executed (Fig. 69). (d)-(f), lower half of FIG. 80). It should be noted that the defeat rate displayed at this time is derived from the possessed "defeat rate UP" item (step S1615 in FIG. 51). FIG. 80 shows an example in which 6% is added for each "defeat rate UP" item to the initial value of 50%, resulting in a total defeat rate of 56%. In this example, since the player has the "defeat 1 body" item, the victory of the main character is confirmed in the first battle of the subsequent confrontation production.

[Regarding the handling of additional items in the event of a power failure/recovery (6)]
Hereinafter, the operation when the rendering states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an operation example when power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment.

In the examples of FIGS. 74 and 75, when power is restored after a power failure, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display point is cleared in the first sub-control unit 400. Although the operation for holding items has been described, the same operation occurs for information on possessed items. Specifically, the possessed item information managed by the main control unit 300 is restored to the state before the power failure, but the displayed item information in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the possessed item information of the main control unit is restored. and the display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 81, as a result of a power outage and restoration in the state in which the "medium kill rate UP" item is possessed and in the state where this item is displayed, the main control unit 300 has possession information of the "medium kill rate UP" item. An example is shown in which this item is not displayed (there are no displayed items). Also, it is shown that the accumulated points of the main control unit 300 are maintained at 130 before and after the power failure and the power is restored, while the display points of the first sub-control unit 400 are 0 after the power failure and the power is restored. ing.

In the example of FIG. 81, it is shown that the production state has changed from the true precursor state to the confrontation state after that. In the first game in this confrontation state, if there is a surplus in the accumulated points (135 in the example of FIG. 81) in the main control unit 300, a process of acquiring an item is executed (step S1315 in FIG. 47A), and this acquisition is performed. Possessed item information including item information is transmitted (step S1323 in FIG. 47(a)). The example of FIG. 81 shows an example in which the "destruction rate? UP" item is acquired, and in this case, the information that the "destruction rate is medium UP" item and the "defeat rate? UP" item are transmitted. . Based on this information, the first sub-control unit 400 executes item acquisition effects and update of displayed items (step S3207 in FIG. 62). In the item acquisition effect in this confrontation state, the effect for the acquired item is executed regardless of whether or not the possessed item and the displayed item are in a mismatched state (Yes in step S3321 of FIG. 63). In the example of FIG. 81, the effect of acquiring the "Killing Rate? UP" item is executed. In this respect, it differs from the item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 76) when the possessed item and the displayed item do not match in the normal state. In the example of FIG. 81, it is shown that the item "defeat rate? UP" has been added as a display item.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 81, there are a "defeat rate medium UP" item and a "defeat rate? UP" item as possessed items, and there is a "defeat rate? UP" item as a display item. executed. This item use effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 62). Here, since the "Killing Rate? UP" item is displayed, all the "Killing Rate UP" items are erased, and the effect of displaying the probability of winning against the enemy character (Killing Rate) is executed (Fig. 69). (d)-(f), lower half of FIG. 81). It should be noted that the defeat rate displayed at this time is derived from the "defeat rate UP" item possessed, so the defeat rate also reflects the "medium defeat rate UP" item that is not displayed here (Fig. 51 step S1615). FIG. 81 shows an example in which 6% is added for each "defeat rate UP" item to the initial value of 50%, resulting in a total defeat rate of 62%.

[Regarding the handling of additional items in the event of a power outage (7)]
Hereinafter, the operation when the rendering states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an example of operation in the case where the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment experiences power failure and power recovery.

In the examples of FIGS. 74 and 75, when power is restored after a power failure, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display point is cleared in the first sub-control unit 400. Although the operation for holding items has been described, the same operation occurs for information on possessed items. Specifically, the possessed item information managed by the main control unit 300 is restored to the state before the power failure, but the displayed item information in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the possessed item information of the main control unit is restored. and the display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 82, as a result of a power outage and restoration in the state in which the item "medium defeat rate UP" and the item "small defeat rate UP" are possessed and in the state where this item is displayed, the main control unit 300 reads "medium defeat rate UP” item and “Small kill rate UP” item are present, but these items are not displayed (there are no displayed items). Also, it is shown that the accumulated points of the main control unit 300 are maintained at 130 before and after the power failure and the power is restored, while the display points of the first sub-control unit 400 are 0 after the power failure and the power is restored. ing.

In the example of FIG. 82, it is shown that the production state has changed from the true precursor state to the confrontation state after that. In the first game in this confrontation state, if there is a surplus in the total points (135 in the example of FIG. 82) in the main control unit 300, a process of acquiring an item is executed (step S1315 in FIG. 47A), and this acquisition is performed. Possessed item information including item information is transmitted (step S1323 in FIG. 47(a)). The example of FIG. 82 shows an example in which the "Killing Rate? UP" item is acquired, and in this case, the player possesses the "Medium Killing Rate UP" item, the "Small Killing Rate UP" item, and the "Killing Rate? UP" item. information is sent. Based on this information, the first sub-control unit 400 executes item acquisition effects and update of displayed items (step S3207 in FIG. 62). In the item acquisition effect in this confrontation state, an effect for the acquired item is executed regardless of whether or not the possessed item and the displayed item are in a mismatched state (Yes in step S3321 of FIG. 63). In the example of FIG. 82, the effect of acquiring the "Killing Rate? UP" item is executed. In this respect, it differs from the item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 76) when the possessed item and the displayed item do not match in the normal state. The example of FIG. 82 shows that the item "Killing Rate? UP" has been added as a display item.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 82, there are a "defeat rate medium UP" item and a "defeat rate? UP" item as possessed items, and there is a "defeat rate? UP" item as a display item. executed. This item use effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 62). Here, since the "Killing Rate? UP" item is displayed, all the "Killing Rate UP" items are erased, and the effect of displaying the probability of winning against the enemy character (Killing Rate) is executed (Fig. 69). (d)-(f), lower half of FIG. 82). In addition, since the kill rate displayed at this time is derived from the "defeat rate UP" item that you have, the "defeat rate medium UP" item and the "defeat rate small UP" item that are not displayed here are also reflected. (Step S1615 in FIG. 51). FIG. 82 shows an example in which 6% is added for each "defeat rate UP" item to the initial value of 50%, resulting in a total defeat rate of 68%.

[Regarding the handling of additional items in the event of a power failure (8)]
Hereinafter, the operation when the rendering states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an example of operation in the case where the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment experiences power failure and power recovery.

In the examples of FIGS. 74 and 75, when power is restored after a power failure, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display point is cleared in the first sub-control unit 400. Although the operation for holding items has been described, the same operation occurs for information on possessed items. Specifically, the possessed item information managed by the main control unit 300 is restored to the state before the power failure, but the displayed item information in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the possessed item information of the main control unit is restored. and the display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 83, as a result of a power outage and restoration in the state in which the "defeat 1 body" item is possessed and in the state in which this item is displayed, the main control unit 300 has possession information of the "defeat 1 body" item, but this An example is shown in which no items are displayed (there are no displayed items). Also, it is shown that the accumulated points of the main control unit 300 are maintained at 130 before and after the power failure and the power is restored, while the display points of the first sub-control unit 400 are 0 after the power failure and the power is restored. ing.

In the example of FIG. 83, it is shown that the production state has changed from the true precursor state to the confrontation state after that. In the first game in this confrontation state, if there is a surplus in the accumulated points (135 in the example of FIG. 83) in the main control unit 300, a process of acquiring an item is executed (step S1315 in FIG. 47A), and this acquisition is performed. Possessed item information including item information is transmitted (step S1323 in FIG. 47(a)). The example of FIG. 83 shows an example in which the "Killing Rate? UP" item is acquired, and in this case, the information that the "Killing 1 Body" item and the "Killing Rate? UP" item are possessed are transmitted. Based on this information, the first sub-control unit 400 executes item acquisition effects and update of displayed items (step S3207 in FIG. 62). In the item acquisition effect in this confrontation state, the effect for the acquired item is executed regardless of whether or not the possessed item and the displayed item are in a mismatched state (Yes in step S3321 of FIG. 63). In the example of FIG. 83, the effect of acquiring the "Killing Rate? UP" item is executed. In this respect, it differs from the item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 76) when the possessed item and the displayed item do not match in the normal state. The example of FIG. 83 shows that the item "Killing Rate? UP" has been added as a display item.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 83, the item use effect in the confrontation state is executed in a state in which the possessed items include the "Defeat 1 body" item and the "Defeat rate? UP" item, and the displayed item is the "Defeat rate? UP" item. be done. This item use effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 62). Here, since the "Killing Rate? UP" item is displayed, all the "Killing Rate UP" items are erased, and the effect of displaying the probability of winning against the enemy character (Killing Rate) is executed (Fig. 69). (d) to (f), lower half of FIG. 83). It should be noted that the defeat rate displayed at this time is derived from the possessed "defeat rate UP" item (step S1615 in FIG. 51). FIG. 83 shows an example in which 6% is added for each "defeat rate UP" item to the initial value of 50%, resulting in a total defeat rate of 56%. In this example, since the player has the item "Defeat 1 body", the victory of the main character is confirmed in the first battle of the following confrontation production (right side of FIG. 83).

[Regarding the handling of additional items in the event of a power outage (9)]
Hereinafter, the operation when the rendering states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an operation example in the case where power failure and power recovery occurs in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment.

In the examples of FIGS. 74 and 75, when power is restored after a power failure, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display point is cleared in the first sub-control unit 400. described the operation of Similarly, in the example of FIG. 84, the accumulated points of the main control unit 300 are maintained at 130 before and after the power failure and power recovery, while the display points of the first sub-control unit 400 become 0 after the power failure and power recovery. It is shown that In this example, the item is not in possession at the time of power failure.

In the example of FIG. 84, it is shown that the rendering state has changed from the true precursor state to the confrontation state after that. In the first game in this confrontation state, if there is a surplus in the accumulated points (130 in the example of FIG. 84) in the main control unit 300, a process of acquiring an item is executed (step S1315 in FIG. 47A), and this acquisition is performed. Possessed item information including item information is transmitted (step S1323 in FIG. 47(a)). In the example of FIG. 84, an example of acquiring the "defeat 1 body" item is shown, and in this case, the information that the "defeat 1 body" item is possessed is transmitted. Based on this information, the first sub-control unit 400 executes item acquisition effects and update of displayed items (step S3207 in FIG. 62). However, the item acquisition effect in this confrontation state is not executed when the display point is 0 (No in step S3205 of FIG. 62). The example of FIG. 84 shows that the item "defeated 1 body" is obtained, but is not displayed.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 84, there is a "Defeat 1 body" item as a possessed item, but there is no display item, so the item use effect in the confrontation state is not executed, and the confrontation effect is started. In the example of FIG. 84, it is shown that the first game of the confrontation effect is executed in the second game in the confrontation state. In this example, since the player has the "defeat 1 body" item, the victory of the main character is confirmed in the first battle of the subsequent confrontation production.

[Features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted (1)]
The slot machine 100 of this embodiment employs a configuration in which cumulative points are obtained as the game progresses, items are acquired according to the cumulative points, and an item acquisition effect is executed at that time. When the item is used, it becomes easier for the player to shift to an AT state that is advantageous to the player. In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the accumulated points increase (count up) as the game progresses. The point update is not limited to addition. Also, the initial value and the target value can be appropriately set. That is, it is sufficient that the value of the provided counter is updated in the direction of approaching the target value.

Also, what can be obtained when the points reach the target value may be an item that brings an advantageous state to the player, such as the item of the present embodiment, or an item that provides information about the gaming machine. There may be, and some effect may be executed like the item acquisition effect of the present embodiment.

Further, in this embodiment, a display point is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and this display point is updated to the same value as the accumulated points, and the value of this display point is displayed on the effect image display device 157. By doing so, a configuration is adopted in which the cumulative point value is indirectly displayed. In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the display points are set to have the same initial value and update amount as the total points. Any configuration is acceptable. The display points are managed by the first sub-controller 400, and are cleared to the initial value (0) when power is restored. On the other hand, the accumulated points are managed by the main control unit 300, and the value is maintained even if the power is cut off and restored (except when reset processing is involved). Due to this difference in operation, when a power failure or power recovery occurs, the total points and the display points do not match (the value of the total points is different from the value displayed on the effect image display device 157). However, since acquisition of items is based on accumulated points, items may be acquired even when the number of points (display points) displayed on the effect image display device 157 is less than 1,000. By adopting a configuration in which the accumulated points and the displayed points do not match when some condition (in this embodiment, power failure and power recovery) is established like this configuration, the displayed points (display points) Even when is less (or more) than the target value, an event such as item acquisition can be expected to occur.

In the above description, the case where the value of the accumulated points is maintained even if the power is cut off and the power is restored has been described. is pressed and the setting is changed), and in this case, the value of the accumulated points is cleared to the initial value (0) after the power failure and power recovery (step S1009 in FIG. 44, step S1101 in FIG. 45). . In this case, even if power is cut off and restored, the accumulated points and the displayed points will match. In other words, as states after power failure and power restoration, there are a state in which the total points and the display points match (accompanied by reset processing) and a state in which they do not match (without reset processing). For this reason, for example, when a power failure occurs at all the game machines in the store when the shop closes and resumes business, the states of the game machines can be changed so that the player can grasp the state of the game machines. can be made difficult. In addition, as a state after a power failure and power recovery in the case of reset processing, a configuration in which the initial value of the display points is different from the initial value of the total points (for example, the initial value of the display points is randomly determined, Alternatively, the initial value may be a value obtained by adding a predetermined value to the initial value of the total points. In this case, the accumulated points and the displayed points do not match whether the reset process is involved or not, so it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the state of the gaming machine.

In this embodiment, the update amount of the accumulated points when the production state is the point specialization A state, the point specialization B state, and the premonition state is larger than the update amount of the accumulated points when the production state is the normal state. (Fig. 54(b)). It is not necessary to adopt such a configuration that causes a difference in the update amount of the cumulative points depending on the state, but by providing such a state, the game is sharp and the interest in the game is improved. Even if the number of points is small, if the update amount is large, the player may be expected to continue playing the game enthusiastically.

Further, in the present embodiment, if power failure and power recovery occurs when the production state is the point specialization A state, the normal states of the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 are inconsistent. The update amounts of the points and the display points are different (step S3105 in FIG. 61(a), FIGS. 74 and 75). In this case, the change in the amount of update of the displayed points (display points) makes it appear that the player is at a disadvantage, but actually the player is in an advantageous state. In this way, when the power is interrupted and the power is restored in a state in which the update of the total points and the display points is advantageous to the player, the update amount of the points (display points) displayed after the power is restored is By making it different, it is possible to hide a state that is actually advantageous to the player. In addition, players who are familiar with this configuration can expect that even if the situation appears to be disadvantageous, it is actually advantageous. In the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the above operation occurs when a power failure and power recovery occurs in the point special A state. The above operation should be performed when a power failure occurs in the state B). Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or power recovery occurs in the point specialization A state, the background of the normal state is displayed instead of the background of the point specialization A state, which is actually advantageous to the player. This further enhances the effect of hiding the state where the user is in the state (step S3009 in FIG. 60).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the set value is changed, a configuration is adopted in which the initial state changes to the point specialization A state and then the normal state. In other words, after the setting change, the update amount of the accumulated points is in an advantageous state before the player is in a disadvantageous state. In this case, if the settings are left as they are after the settings are changed, there is a risk that the player who sees that the point specialization A state will be recognized as to whether or not the settings have been changed. However, in this embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the setting has been changed by causing a power failure and power recovery at the point of transition to the point specialization A state.

[Features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted (2)]
The slot machine 100 of this embodiment acquires accumulated points as the game progresses, and when an item is obtained according to the accumulated points, an item obtaining effect is executed and the item is displayed. Also, when using an item, a configuration is adopted in which an item use effect using the displayed item is executed. When an item is used, it becomes easier for the player to shift to an AT state that is advantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, items are obtained according to accumulated points. There may be, and the conditions for acquiring items are not limited. Also, in this embodiment, the use of an item makes it easier for the player to transition to an AT state that is advantageous to the player. There may be, or information on the game machine may be obtained.

In addition, in this embodiment, the item information displayed in the first sub control unit 400 is managed, and this information is updated to the same information as the possessed item information managed in the main control unit 300. In addition, by displaying the information of the displayed item on the effect image display device 157, a configuration is adopted in which the state of the possessed item is indirectly displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the information of all possessed items is sent and the information of the displayed items is made the same as the information of the possessed items. Any configuration may be used as long as the item information can be updated to the same information as the possessed item information.

The displayed item information will be cleared when the power is restored, but the information of the items in your possession will remain the same as it was before the power failure (except when reset processing is involved). ). Due to this operation, the possessed items are not displayed on the effect image display device 157 when the power is cut off and restored. In this case, the player may feel uncomfortable if the item use effect is executed in spite of the existence of the information of the possessed item. In this embodiment, by re-displaying the item that was not displayed when a new item is acquired in the normal state, it is possible to execute the item use effect without any sense of incongruity (FIGS. 76 to 79). Note that the timing of redisplay is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment, but if the timing of the item use effect is determined in advance, it may be earlier. In any case, it is sufficient that the items that were displayed before the power failure are displayed again after the power is restored and before the item use effect is executed. In addition, if there are multiple items that are not displayed due to a power outage, by redisplaying less than this number of items at once, a large number of items can be redisplayed at once. It is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort from being displayed (FIG. 78). In addition, as in the present embodiment, by determining the content displayed in the item use effect and the degree of advantage (defeat rate) for the player based on the possessed items, there may be items that are not displayed among the possessed items. However, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In the present embodiment, the item "Kill Rate UP" is to be redisplayed, but the item "Kill 1 body" is not to be redisplayed. In this manner, items to be redisplayed and items not to be redisplayed may be provided, and a configuration in which items are uniformly redisplayed may be adopted. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, items to be redisplayed are targeted for the item use effect, while items not to be redisplayed are not targeted for the item use effect. In this configuration, by redisplaying the item that is the target of the item use effect, it may be possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

It should be noted that by redisplaying an item that has not been displayed due to a power outage at the timing of the item acquisition effect as in the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce discomfort during redisplay. Also, by storing the information about acquired items, it may be possible to prevent the player from being put in a disadvantageous state.

It should be noted that, for example, even in the case of a configuration in which the possessed item of the main control unit 300 changes to a more advantageous item based on the internal winning condition device, the above-described item re-display configuration can be employed. In this case, the re-displayed item becomes more advantageous, and the interest in the game may be enhanced. Note that, in this configuration, the items displayed before the power failure and the items displayed after the power failure are displayed differently.

[Features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted (3)]
The slot machine 100 of this embodiment acquires accumulated points as the game progresses, and when an item is obtained according to the accumulated points, an item obtaining effect is executed and the item is displayed. Also, when using an item, a configuration is adopted in which an item use effect using the displayed item is executed. When an item is used, it becomes easier for the player to shift to an AT state that is advantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, items are obtained according to accumulated points. There may be, and the conditions for acquiring items are not limited. Also, in this embodiment, the use of an item makes it easier for the player to transition to an AT state that is advantageous to the player. There may be, or information on the game machine may be obtained.

In addition, in this embodiment, the item information displayed in the first sub control unit 400 is managed, and this information is updated to the same information as the possessed item information managed in the main control unit 300. In addition, by displaying the information of the displayed item on the effect image display device 157, a configuration is adopted in which the state of the possessed item is indirectly displayed. In this embodiment, the configuration is adopted in which the information of all possessed items is sent and the displayed item information is made the same information as the possessed item information. Any configuration may be used as long as the item information can be updated to the same information as the possessed item information.

The displayed item information will be cleared when the power is restored, but the information on the items in your possession will remain the same as it was before the power failure (except when reset processing is involved). ). Due to this operation, the possessed items are not displayed on the effect image display device 157 when the power is cut off and restored. In this case, the player may feel uncomfortable if the item use effect is executed in spite of the existence of the information of the possessed item. In this embodiment, an opportunity to obtain a new item is provided in the first game in a confrontation state, and a configuration is adopted in which the item used in the item use effect can be displayed (step S1315 in FIG. 47(a)). With this configuration, it is possible to create a state in which no sense of incongruity is caused even if the item use effect is subsequently executed (FIGS. 81 to 83).

Note that in this embodiment, the types of items that can be obtained in the confrontation state are different from the types of items that can be obtained in the normal state. There is For this reason, the items that are shown to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect in the confrontation state are the items acquired in the confrontation state, not the items that are no longer displayed due to the power failure and power restoration. The timing of item acquisition and item acquisition effect is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, but if the timing of item use effect is predetermined, it may be earlier. In any case, after the item that was displayed before the power failure is no longer displayed due to the restoration of power and before the item use effect is executed, the item acquisition effect will be executed for the newly obtained item and the item will be used. Any configuration can be used as long as it is used for display. Note that in the present embodiment, regardless of the number of items that are not displayed due to a power failure, only one item can be obtained and displayed as a result in the confrontation state. In this configuration, if there are multiple items that are not displayed, a smaller number of items will be newly displayed. If new items can be acquired in accordance with the number of items that are not displayed, there is a risk that the player's interests will not be balanced or that the player will feel uncomfortable. If the number of newly displayed items is set to be smaller than the number of items that are not displayed, as in , it may be possible to prevent the item use effect from giving a sense of incongruity. In addition, as in the present embodiment, by determining the content displayed in the item use effect and the degree of advantage (defeat rate) for the player based on the possessed items, there may be items that are not displayed among the possessed items. However, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In the present embodiment, the item "Kill Rate UP" is targeted for the item use effect, but the item "Defeat 1 body" is not targeted for the item use effect. In this way, not all items are subject to the item use effect, but some items may be subject to the item use effect and others may not. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the "Kill Rate UP" item, which is the object of the item use effect, may be displayed in the item acquisition effect in the confrontation state (FIGS. 81 to 83). With this configuration, when there is an item that is not displayed, the item that is the object of the item use effect can be displayed, and the item use effect can be executed without a sense of incongruity. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, there are cases where the item that is the target of the item use effect is not displayed due to the power failure and power recovery. is reflected in (FIGS. 81 and 82). As in this configuration, even if an item that is the target of the item use effect is not displayed due to power failure and power restoration, it may be possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

In addition, after the item that was displayed before the power failure is no longer displayed due to the power restoration, until the item use effect is executed, the item acquisition effect is executed for the newly obtained item and the item is displayed. In this case, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which an item of the same type as the item displayed before the power failure is newly acquired. As a specific example, a configuration may be adopted in which, when the "small kill rate UP" item is no longer displayed, a new "medium kill rate UP" item is acquired.

[Features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted (4)]
The slot machine 100 of this embodiment acquires accumulated points as the game progresses, and when an item is obtained according to the accumulated points, an item obtaining effect is executed and the item is displayed. Acquisition of an item makes it easier for the player to shift to an AT state that is advantageous to the player. In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the accumulated points increase (count up) as the game progresses. The point update is not limited to addition. Also, the initial value and the target value can be appropriately set. That is, it is sufficient that the value of the provided counter is updated in the direction of approaching the target value. In this embodiment, items are obtained according to accumulated points. There may be, and the conditions for acquiring items are not limited. Also, in this embodiment, the use of an item makes it easier for the player to transition to an AT state that is advantageous to the player. There may be, or information on the game machine may be obtained.

Further, in this embodiment, a display point is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and this display point is updated to the same value as the accumulated points, and the value of this display point is displayed on the effect image display device 157. By doing so, a configuration is adopted in which the cumulative point value is indirectly displayed. In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the display points are set to have the same initial value and update amount as the total points. Any configuration is acceptable. The display points are managed by the first sub-controller 400, and are cleared to the initial value (0) when power is restored. On the other hand, the accumulated points are managed by the main control unit 300, and the value is maintained even if the power is cut off and restored (except when reset processing is involved). Due to this difference in operation, when a power failure or power recovery occurs, the total points and the display points do not match (the value of the total points is different from the value displayed on the effect image display device 157). However, since acquisition of items is based on accumulated points, items may be acquired even when the number of points (display points) displayed on the effect image display device 157 is less than 1,000. Here, when the display point is 0, a configuration is adopted in which the item acquisition effect is not executed when the item is acquired (FIG. 84). As in this configuration, by setting a case where the item acquisition effect is executed and a case where it is not executed when an item is acquired, it is possible to know that the item is being acquired even if the item acquisition effect is not executed. can be expected.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, on the condition that the display point is 0, a configuration is adopted in which the item acquisition effect is not executed even when the item is acquired. Even if the display point is 0, if the item acquisition effect is performed, there is a possibility that a sense of incongruity may occur. However, as in the configuration of the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which whether or not to execute the item acquisition effect is determined according to some displayed value, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable. Furthermore, the case where the display point is 0 means that the value of the display point has not changed after the power failure and power recovery. sometimes it is possible.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of games for transition to the true omen state is set, and the number of games for transitioning to the showdown state from there is set separately. That is, it can be said that the timing of transition to the confrontation state is set based on the number of games. Also, in this confrontation state, a new item may be acquired in the first game. These configurations can be said to be configurations in which items may be obtained based on the number of elapsed games. By combining this configuration with a configuration that provides a case where the item acquisition effect is executed and a case where it is not executed when an item is acquired, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the number of games while expecting that the item has been acquired. .

It should be noted that the advantage of the acquired item may differ depending on whether or not the item acquisition effect is executed when the item is acquired. For example, the acquired item may be more advantageous when the item acquisition effect is not executed than when the item acquisition effect is executed. In the case of this configuration, expectations can be heightened even when the item acquisition effect is not executed.

In addition, as in the present embodiment, by determining the content displayed in the item use effect and the degree of advantage (defeat rate) for the player based on the possessed items, there may be items that are not displayed among the possessed items. However, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

[Features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted (5)]
In this embodiment, if there is an item that has been hidden due to a power outage, and the showdown state is entered, the hidden item will not be displayed. is derived, the player is not in a disadvantageous state. Here, unlike the present embodiment, when a state in which there is an item that has been hidden due to a power outage is shifted to a confrontation state, this item is displayed before the item is deleted by the item use effect. may be An example of this configuration will be described below with reference to FIG. This figure shows an example of redisplaying an item that has been hidden before the item is used (erased).

In this FIG. 85, it is assumed that the state is shifted to the confrontation state in the same flow as in FIG. 82 and the item acquisition effect is executed. Specifically, when the total points are 130 and the power is cut off and restored while the player has the "medium kill rate UP" item and the "small kill rate UP" item, the main control unit 300 cannot read this information. is retained, but the display will be in a state where there are no items or total points, and then the production state will transition to a confrontation state via the true sign state, and the item acquisition production by the total points will be "defeat rate ?UP” item is acquired.

In the example of FIG. 82, the item use effect is executed in the next game, and the kill rate is displayed at the timing of the third stop, and the "defeat rate UP" item is erased (see FIGS. 69(d)-(f)). ). At this time, the hidden "Medium Destruction Rate UP" item and "Small Destruction Rate UP" item are not displayed again. On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 85, at the timing of the next game start operation, the item acquisition effect and re-display are executed for the hidden "Medium Destruction Rate UP" item and the "Low Destruction Rate UP" item. After the kill rate is displayed at the timing of the stop, all "defeat rate UP" items are deleted. The lower half of FIG. 85 shows changes in display and non-display of items in this game.

In the example of FIG. 85, items that are hidden due to a power outage are redisplayed at an unusual timing. It is good also as a structure provided. In this configuration, there are a plurality of display timings for the items, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. For example, in the example of FIG. 85 above, when the item display timing is after the third stop operation (display associated with item acquisition), and when it is after the game start operation (display of hidden items in confrontation state). There are two ways. That is, there are cases where the stop operation in the game has ended (after the third stop operation) and cases where it has not ended yet (after the start operation and before the third stop operation). By displaying the items, the interest in the game can be improved. Especially in the example of FIG. 85, the frequency of item display at the end of the game is higher than the frequency of item display during the game, which may surprise the player during the game. Also, as in the example of FIG. 85, items are displayed in a game in which an item use effect is executed, and by associating one of a plurality of display timings, item display at this timing can be displayed. Anticipation can be improved. Also, as in the example of FIG. 85, by associating one of a plurality of display timings with the timing of redisplaying an item that has been hidden due to a power outage, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for item display at this timing. can be improved. In the example of FIG. 85, depending on the item display timing, the number of displayed items may be one (item display based on accumulated points), or may be one or more (redisplay of hidden items). ), however, by configuring the number of items to be displayed differently depending on a plurality of display timings in this way, it may be possible to improve expectations for item display.

[Features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted (6)]
As described in [Handling of points when power failure and power recovery occurs] and [Handling of items when power failure and power recovery occurs (1)], etc., in this embodiment, When power is applied, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display points and display items are cleared in the first sub-control unit 400 . Further, when power failure occurs when the effect state is the point specialization A state, the normal state effect is executed after the power is restored. FIG. 86(a) shows that the display points and display items before power failure (FIG. 86(a1)) are cleared after power is restored (FIG. 86(a2)). Furthermore, it is shown that the effect of the point specialization A state that was executed before the power failure is changed to the normal state effect after the power is restored.

With the above configuration, for example, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the state of the slot machine 100 at the end of business hours at the start of business hours on the following day. However, for example, if power is cut off due to a lightning strike during a game, the display after the power is restored will not match the display before the power cut off, which may confuse the player or reduce his motivation to play. be. Therefore, if power failure occurs while one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating (during a game), the display after power recovery may be configured to match the display before power failure. good. FIG. 86(b) shows that the display points and display items before power failure (FIG. 86(b1)) are still displayed after power is restored (FIG. 86(b2)). Furthermore, it is shown that the effect of the point specialization A state that was executed before the power failure is still being executed after the power is restored. In this example, the characters "reel spinning" are displayed in the center of the screen so that the player can understand that the game is in progress after the power is restored, but this display may be omitted. . In the example of FIG. 86(b), the display points, display items, and background all match before and after the power failure. Even when the display before and after the power is restored is made to match, it may be possible to prevent confusion and loss of motivation to play. That is, when power failure occurs while any one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating (during a game), the display before the power failure is executed after the power is restored, and the reels 110 to 112 are all stopped. In that case, after the power is restored, a display different from the display before the power failure may be executed. In this case, the target display is not limited to the display including all of the display point, the display item, and the background as in the example of FIG. 86, and may be a display including any of these.

In order to realize the above operation, for example, in the present embodiment, the information in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared due to power failure, so when the reels 110 to 112 resume rotation when power is restored, the main control unit 300 Information may be transmitted to the first sub-controller 400, and the state before the power failure may be restored based on this information. Further, in the case where the information of the first sub-controller 400 is not cleared by power failure, the information of the first sub-controller 400 is maintained when the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is restarted when power is restored, The above operation can also be realized by a configuration in which the information in the first sub-controller 400 is cleared when it is not accompanied. Note that the configuration for realizing the above operation is not particularly limited.

≪Others≫
In the embodiment using FIGS. 35 to 86, the slot machine 100 using medals (coins) as a game medium is shown as an example of a game table, but the game is not limited to this, and game balls ( For example, it can be applied to a slot machine using pachinko balls as a game medium, a pachinko machine, an arrange ball game machine, a Jankyu game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

In addition, the slot machine is a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals, such as running on mobile terminals (smartphones, game machines) and personal computers by a program that simulates the operation based on the above configuration. In this case, the game medium contains digitized data corresponding to medals, and the game medium is inserted by inputting the digitized data from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device). Payout of game media includes outputting digitized data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Although the present embodiment has been described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 86, it is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and changes can be made without departing from the gist of the technical idea. can. And, it can be said that those accompanied by such deformations and changes are based on the same technical idea and are included in the same technical scope. Moreover, the actions and effects described in the embodiments are merely enumerations of the most preferable actions and effects, and the actions and effects are not limited to those described in the embodiments.

<<Correspondence between the configuration of the invention and the embodiment>>
The configuration of the invention described in the description using FIGS. 35 to 86 will be described below with reference to the corresponding configuration.

In the above description,
a first updating means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of updating the value of the first counter (for example, total points) in the direction of approaching a predetermined value (for example, 1000) according to the progress of the game;
second updating means (eg, first sub-controller 400) capable of updating the value of the second counter (eg, display points) according to the progress of the game;
a display means (for example, effect image display device 157) capable of displaying the value of the second counter;
A game machine comprising
The display means is
It is possible to display a predetermined effect (for example, an item acquisition effect in a normal state) based on the value of the first counter reaching the predetermined value,
The second updating means is
When the value of the first counter is updated, when updating the value of the second counter to the same value as the value of the first counter (for example, FIG. 73), the value of the first counter There are cases (e.g., FIGS. 74 and 75) that do not update the value of the second counter to the same value as
(See [Features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted (1)]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
State setting means (e.g., main control unit 300) capable of setting a first state (e.g., normal state) and a second state (e.g., point specialization A state) different from the first state,
The second state is a state in which the update amount of the value of the first counter tends to be larger than in the first state.
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When power is restored in the second state, the update amount of the first counter value and the update amount of the second counter value are different (for example, the Step S3105, FIG. 74, FIG. 75),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means is
It is possible to display the first background in the first state (for example, the normal state background in FIG. 65(d)),
It is possible to display a second background in the second state (for example, the background of the point specialization A state in FIG. 65(c)),
When the power is restored in the second state, the first background is displayed (for example, when the power is restored in the point specialization A state, the background of the point specialization A state is not displayed. Displaying the background of the normal state, step S3009 of FIG. 60) is a means capable of
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Advantage setting means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different advantages,
The state setting means
When the setting value is changed, the second state is set before the first state is set (for example, when the setting value is changed, the point specialization A state is changed from the initial state). is a configuration that becomes a normal state from
A game machine characterized by:

In the above description,
A first updating means (for example, , main control unit 300);
second updating means (eg, first sub-controller 400) capable of updating the value of the second counter (eg, display points) according to the progress of the game;
a display means (for example, effect image display device 157) capable of displaying the value of the second counter;
A game machine comprising
The display means is
It is possible to display a predetermined effect (for example, an item acquisition effect in a normal state) based on the value of the first counter reaching the predetermined value,
The second updating means is
When the value of the first counter is updated, when updating the value of the second counter to the same value as the value of the first counter (for example, FIG. 73), the value of the first counter There are cases where the value of the second counter is not updated to the same value as (for example, FIGS. 74 and 75),
The first update means is
It may or may not be accompanied by reset processing after power failure and power recovery (for example, reset processing is accompanied by pressing the RAM clear button and changing settings),
When reset processing is required after power failure and power recovery, the value of the first counter is set to the initial value, while when power failure and power recovery is not accompanied by reset processing, the first counter before power failure is set (For example, when reset processing is involved, the total points are set to 0 in step S1009 in FIG. 44 and step S1101 in FIG. 45),
The second updating means is
After the power is restored, the value of the second counter is set to the initial value or an initial value different from the initial value (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 sets the display point to 0 after the power is restored). and the total points and the display points match, or the initial value of the display points is different from the initial value of the total points to make the total points and the display points not match),
(See [Features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted (1)]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The second updating means is
After power failure and power recovery, the value of the second counter is set to the initial value (for example, the display point becomes 0 in the first sub-control unit 400 after power failure and power recovery).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
State setting means (e.g., main control unit 300) capable of setting a first state (e.g., normal state) and a second state (e.g., point specialization A state) different from the first state,
The second state is a state in which the update amount of the value of the first counter tends to be larger than in the first state.
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When power is restored in the second state, the update amount of the first counter value and the update amount of the second counter value are different (for example, the Step S3105, FIG. 74, FIG. 75),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means is
It is possible to display the first background in the first state (for example, the normal state background in FIG. 65(d)),
It is possible to display a second background in the second state (for example, the background of the point specialization A state in FIG. 65(c)),
When the power is restored in the second state, the first background is displayed (for example, when the power is restored in the point specialization A state, the background of the point specialization A state is not displayed. Displaying the background of the normal state, step S3009 of FIG. 60) is a means capable of
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Advantage setting means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different advantages,
The state setting means
When the setting value is changed, the second state is set before the first state is set (for example, when the setting value is changed, the point specialization A state is changed from the initial state). is a configuration that becomes a normal state from
A game machine characterized by:

In the above description,
display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
a storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information on the acquired items (for example, the "defeat rate UP" item, the "defeat 1 body"item);
A game machine comprising
The display means is
Based on the information that the item has been acquired, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (eg, FIG. 67) indicating that the item has been acquired,
The item indicated to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect can be displayed (for example, the "defeat rate small UP" item acquired in FIG. 67(e) is displayed in FIG. 67(f)),
A means capable of executing an item use effect (for example, FIGS. 69(d) to (f)) using the displayed item,
The storage means is a means for maintaining the state in which the information of the item before the power failure is stored when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. No change in item information),
The display means is means for not displaying the items that were displayed before the power failure when the power is restored. ” item is not in the display item column after power failure),
The display means is a means for redisplaying the item that was displayed before the power failure during a period from power restoration to execution of the item use effect (for example, in FIG. The item acquisition effect was executed before, and the "Medium kill rate UP" item that was displayed before the power cut was added again to the display item column),
(See (2) for features of the present embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The items include items to be redisplayed by the display means (for example, "Kill Rate UP" item) and items not to be redisplayed by the display means (for example, "Defeat 1 body" item). be,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Items that are not to be redisplayed by the display means are items that are not used in the item use effect (for example, the "defeat 1 body" item is not used in the item use effect),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means, in the item acquisition effect which is executed after the power is restored and before the item use effect is executed, indicates that the item that was displayed before the power failure has been acquired, and then displays the item. (For example, in FIG. 76, the item acquisition effect is displayed again, and the "destruction rate UP" item that was displayed before the power cut is displayed again),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means executes the item acquisition effect based on the information that a new item has been acquired during the period from when the power is restored until the item use effect is executed, and displays the item acquisition effect before the power is cut off. (For example, in FIG. 76, an item acquisition effect is executed by acquiring the "defeat rate small UP" item. However, the "defeat rate UP" item that was displayed before the power cut is displayed again),
The storage means is a means capable of storing the information of the new item (in FIG. 76, the "defeat rate small UP" item is added to the possessed item column),
A game machine characterized by:

In the above description,
display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
a storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information on the acquired items (for example, the "defeat rate UP" item, the "defeat 1 body"item);
A game machine comprising
The display means is
Based on the information that the item has been acquired, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (eg, FIG. 67) indicating that the item has been acquired,
The item indicated to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect can be displayed (for example, the "defeat rate small UP" item acquired in FIG. 67(e) is displayed in FIG. 67(f)),
A means capable of executing an item use effect (for example, FIGS. 69(d) to (f)) using the displayed item,
The storage means is a means for maintaining the state in which the information of the item before the power failure is stored when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. No change in item information),
The display means is means for not displaying the items that were displayed before the power failure when power is restored. Medium UP" item is not in the display item column after power failure),
The display means is
During the period from power restoration to execution of the item use effect, the item that was displayed before the power failure can be redisplayed (for example, in FIG. 78, the item acquisition effect is performed before the item use effect Executed, and one of the two "defeat rate UP" items displayed before the power cut is added again to the display item column),
If there are a plurality of items that have not been displayed due to a power failure, the items less than this number are subject to one redisplay (for example, in FIG. 78, One of the two "defeat rate increase" items that were displayed in ) is displayed again),
(See (2) for features of the present embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The items include items to be redisplayed by the display means (for example, "Kill Rate UP" item) and items not to be redisplayed by the display means (for example, "Defeat 1 body" item). be,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Items that are not to be redisplayed by the display means are items that are not used in the item use effect (for example, the "defeat 1 body" item is not used in the item use effect),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means, in the item acquisition effect which is executed after the power is restored and before the item use effect is executed, indicates that the item that was displayed before the power failure has been acquired, and then displays the item. (For example, in FIG. 78, the item "defeat rate UP" that was displayed before the power cut is displayed again by the item acquisition effect),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means executes the item acquisition effect based on the information that a new item has been acquired during the period from when the power is restored until the item use effect is executed, and displays the item acquisition effect before the power is cut off. (For example, in FIG. 78, an item acquisition effect is executed by acquiring the "defeat rate small UP" item. However, the "defeat rate UP" item that was displayed before the power cut is displayed again),
The storage means is a means capable of storing the information of the new item (in FIG. 78, the "defeat rate small UP" item is added to the possessed item column),
A game machine characterized by:

In the above description,
display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
a storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information on the acquired items (for example, the "defeat rate UP" item, the "defeat 1 body"item);
A game machine comprising
The display means is
Based on the information that the item has been acquired, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (eg, FIG. 67) indicating that the item has been acquired,
The item indicated to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect can be displayed (for example, the "defeat rate small UP" item acquired in FIG. 67(e) is displayed in FIG. 67(f)),
Means capable of executing an item use effect (eg, FIGS. 69(d) to (f)) indicating the degree of advantage (eg, ease of transition to AT state) for benefits using the displayed item and
The storage means is a means for maintaining the state in which the information of the item before the power failure is stored when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. No change in item information),
The display means is means for not displaying the items that were displayed before the power failure when the power is restored. ” item is not in the display item column after power failure),
The display means is a means capable of re-displaying the item that was displayed before the power failure during a period from power restoration to execution of the item use effect (for example, in FIG. 76, the item use effect is displayed. The item acquisition effect was executed before, and the "Medium kill rate UP" item that was displayed before the power cut was added again to the display item column),
The advantage is derived based on the information of the item stored in the storage means (for example, the advantage (defeat rate) regarding AT transition is determined based on the possessed item),
(See (2) for features of the present embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The items include items to be redisplayed by the display means (for example, "Kill Rate UP" item) and items not to be redisplayed by the display means (for example, "Defeat 1 body" item). be,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Items that are not to be redisplayed by the display means are items that are not used in the item use effect (for example, the "defeat 1 body" item is not used in the item use effect),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means, in the item acquisition effect which is executed after the power is restored and before the item use effect is executed, indicates that the item that was displayed before the power failure has been acquired, and then displays the item. (For example, in FIG. 76, the item acquisition effect is displayed again, and the "destruction rate UP" item that was displayed before the power cut is displayed again),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means executes the item acquisition effect based on the information that a new item has been acquired during the period from when the power is restored until the item use effect is executed, and displays the item acquisition effect before the power is cut off. (For example, in FIG. 76, an item acquisition effect is executed by acquiring the "defeat rate small UP" item. However, the "defeat rate UP" item that was displayed before the power cut is displayed again),
The storage means is a means capable of storing the information of the new item (in FIG. 76, the "defeat rate small UP" item is added to the possessed item column),
A game machine characterized by:

In the above description,
display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
a storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information on the acquired items (for example, the "defeat rate UP" item, the "defeat 1 body"item);
A game machine comprising
The display means is
Based on the information that the item has been acquired, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 69 (b) and (c)) indicating that the item has been acquired,
The item indicated to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect can be displayed (for example, the "defeat rate? UP" item acquired in FIG. 69(c) is displayed in FIG. 69(d)),
A means capable of executing an item use effect (for example, FIGS. 69(d) to (f)) using the displayed item,
The storage means is a means for maintaining the state in which the information of the item before the power failure is stored when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. No change in item information),
The display means is means for not displaying the items that were displayed before the power failure when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. ” item is not in the display item column after power failure),
The display means indicates that the new item different from the item that is not displayed has been acquired during the period from when the item is not displayed due to power restoration until when the item use effect is executed. It is means for executing an item acquisition effect and displaying the item (for example, in FIG. 81, before the item use effect, an item acquisition effect indicating that the item has been acquired is "defeat rate? UP", and power is cut off). Instead of the previously displayed "Medium Destruction Rate UP" item, the "Destruction Rate? UP" item has been added to the display item column),
(See (3) for features of the present embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The items include items to be used in the item use effect (e.g., "defeat rate UP" item) and items not to be used (e.g., "defeat 1 body" item).
During a period from when the item is not displayed due to power restoration until when the item use effect is executed, the display means displays the new item, which is different from the item not being displayed, and the item is used. It is means for executing the item acquisition effect indicating that the item to be used in the effect has been acquired and displaying the item (for example, in FIG. 81, before the item use effect, the target item for the item use effect An item acquisition effect is executed to indicate that you have acquired the "destruction rate? UP" item, and instead of the "destruction rate medium UP" item that was displayed before the power cut, the "destruction rate? UP" item is displayed in the item column. ),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The item to be used in the item use effect may not be displayed due to the power failure and power recovery (for example, in FIG. item is not visible)
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means is a means capable of re-displaying the item that was displayed before the power failure until the item use effect is executed after the item is not displayed due to power restoration (for example, 76, before the item use effect, the item acquisition effect (normal state) is executed, and the "defeat rate increase" item that was displayed before the power cut is added again to the display item column),
A game machine characterized by:

In the above description,
display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
a storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information on the acquired items (for example, the "defeat rate UP" item, the "defeat 1 body"item);
A game machine comprising
The display means is
Based on the information that the item has been acquired, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 69 (b) and (c)) indicating that the item has been acquired,
The item indicated to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect can be displayed (for example, the "defeat rate? UP" item acquired in FIG. 69(c) is displayed in FIG. 69(d)),
A means capable of executing an item use effect (for example, FIGS. 69(d) to (f)) using the displayed item,
The storage means is a means for maintaining the state in which the information of the item before the power failure is stored when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. No change in item information),
The display means is means for not displaying the items that were displayed before the power failure when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. ” item and ”Small kill rate UP” item are not in the display item column after power failure),
The display means displays the new items different from the items not displayed during the period from when the plurality of items are not displayed due to power restoration until when the item use effect is executed. means for executing the item acquisition effect indicating that the number of items obtained is less than the number of items that have not been acquired, and displaying the item (for example, in FIG. An item acquisition effect that indicates that the item has been acquired is executed, and the "Defeat rate? UP" item is displayed instead of the "Medium kill rate UP" item or the "Small kill rate UP" item that was displayed before the power cut. has been added to the Display Items column),
(See (3) for features of the present embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The items include items to be used in the item use effect (e.g., "defeat rate UP" item) and items not to be used (e.g., "defeat 1 body" item).
During the period from when the plurality of items are not displayed due to power restoration until when the item use effect is executed, the display means displays the new items different from the items not displayed, It is a means that can execute the item acquisition effect indicating that the item to be used in the item use effect has been acquired and display the item (for example, in FIG. 82, before the item use effect, the item use effect An item acquisition effect that indicates that you have acquired the target item "Kill Rate? UP" item is executed, and instead of the "Medium Kill Rate UP" and "Small Kill Rate UP" items that were displayed before the power cut, Destruction rate? UP" item has been added to the display item column),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The item to be used in the item use effect may not be displayed due to power failure and power recovery (for example, in FIG. Items and "defeat rate small UP" items are not displayed),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means is means for redisplaying the items that were being displayed before the power failure, after the plurality of items are not displayed due to power restoration and before the item use effect is executed. (For example, in FIG. 76, before the item use effect, the item acquisition effect (normal state) is executed, and the "defeat rate increase" item that was displayed before the power outage is added again to the display item column),
A game machine characterized by:

In the above description,
display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
a storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information on the acquired items (for example, the "defeat rate UP" item, the "defeat 1 body"item);
A game machine comprising
The display means is
Based on the information that the item has been acquired, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 69 (b) and (c)) indicating that the item has been acquired,
The item indicated to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect can be displayed (for example, the "defeat rate? UP" item acquired in FIG. 69(c) is displayed in FIG. 69(d)),
Means capable of executing an item use effect (eg, FIGS. 69(d) to (f)) indicating the degree of advantage (eg, ease of transition to AT state) for benefits using the displayed item and
The storage means is a means for maintaining the state in which the information of the item before the power failure is stored when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. No change in item information),
The display means is means for not displaying the items that were displayed before the power failure when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. ” item is not in the display item column after power failure),
The display means indicates that the new item different from the item that is not displayed has been acquired during the period from when the item is not displayed due to power restoration until when the item use effect is executed. It is a means that can execute an item acquisition effect and display the item (for example, in FIG. 81, before the item use effect, an item acquisition effect indicating that the item has been acquired is "defeat rate? UP", and power is cut off). Instead of the previously displayed "Medium Destruction Rate UP" item, the "Destruction Rate? UP" item has been added to the display item column),
The advantage is derived based on the information of the item stored in the storage means (for example, the advantage (defeat rate) regarding AT transition is determined based on the possessed item),
(See (3) for features of the present embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The items include items to be used in the item use effect (e.g., "defeat rate UP" item) and items not to be used (e.g., "defeat 1 body" item).
During a period from when the item is not displayed due to power restoration until when the item use effect is executed, the display means displays the new item, which is different from the item not being displayed, and the item is used. It is means for executing the item acquisition effect indicating that the item to be used in the effect has been acquired and displaying the item (for example, in FIG. 81, before the item use effect, the target item for the item use effect An item acquisition effect is executed to indicate that you have acquired the "destruction rate? UP" item, and instead of the "destruction rate medium UP" item that was displayed before the power cut, the "destruction rate? UP" item is displayed in the item column. ),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The item to be used in the item use effect may not be displayed due to the power failure and power recovery (for example, in FIG. item is not visible)
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means is a means capable of re-displaying the item that was displayed before the power failure until the item use effect is executed after the item is not displayed due to power restoration (for example, 76, before the item use effect, the item acquisition effect (normal state) is executed, and the "defeat rate increase" item that was displayed before the power cut is added again to the display item column),
A game machine characterized by:

In the above description,
display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
a storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information on the acquired items (for example, the "defeat rate UP" item, the "defeat 1 body"item);
A game machine comprising
The display means may execute an item acquisition effect indicating that the item has been acquired or may not execute the item acquisition effect when the storage means stores the acquired item information. Yes (For example, in FIG. 73, the item acquisition effect is executed when a possessed item is added, but in FIG. 84, the item acquisition effect is not executed even if the "defeat 1 body" item is acquired),
The display means is a means capable of displaying the item indicated to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect (for example, the "small kill rate UP" item acquired in FIG. 67(e) is displayed, and the "defeat rate? UP" item obtained in Fig. 69(c) is displayed in Fig. 69(d)),
(See (4) for features of the present embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
a first updating means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of updating the value of the first counter (for example, total points) in the direction of approaching a predetermined value (for example, 1000) according to the progress of the game;
second updating means (eg, first sub-controller 400) capable of updating the value of the second counter (eg, display points) according to the progress of the game;
with
The storage means is means for storing the information of the item based on the value of the first counter (for example, when the accumulated points reach 1000 or when the accumulated points are not 0 in a confrontation state, the item ),
The value of the second counter may be the same value as the value of the first counter (eg, FIG. 73),
The value of the second counter may become different from the value of the first counter after power failure and power recovery (for example, FIG. 74),
The display means is means capable of displaying the value of the second counter (for example, in FIG. 65 etc., the display point is shown at the lower left of the effect image display device 157),
The display means may not execute the item acquisition effect according to the value of the second counter when the storage means stores the acquired item information (for example, FIG. 84 Then, if the display point is 0, the item acquisition effect is not executed, the determination in step S3205 in FIG. 62 is No, and step S3207 is not executed),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means does not perform the item acquisition effect if the value of the second counter does not change after power is restored (for example, in FIG. 84, the display point is 0 after power is restored). The item acquisition effect is not executed until),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The storage means may store the information of the item acquired based on the number of games that have passed (for example, the item may be acquired in the first game of a confrontation state that transitions with the number of games that have passed). ),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The item stored by the storage means when the item acquisition effect is not executed may be more advantageous to the player than the item stored by the storage means when the item acquisition effect is executed (for example, item acquisition A configuration with a difference in the advantage of the item obtained depending on whether the effect is executed or not),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A privilege lottery means capable of executing a lottery related to a privilege based on the item stored in the storage means (for example, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for transition to the AT state using the possessed item).
A game machine characterized by:

In the above description,
display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
a storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information on the acquired items (for example, the "defeat rate UP" item, the "defeat 1 body"item);
A game machine comprising
The display means is
Based on the information that the item has been acquired, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 67) indicating that the item has been acquired,
It is possible to display the item indicated to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect (for example, the "defeat rate small UP" item acquired in FIG. 67(e) is displayed in FIG. 67(f)),
A means capable of executing an item use effect (for example, FIGS. 69(d) to (f)) using the displayed item,
The timing for displaying a new item includes a first timing between the start of a game and the start of the next game, and a second timing between the start of a game and the start of the next game.
The first timing is a timing different from the second timing,
(See (5) for features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a start operation means (for example, a start lever 135) for receiving a start operation for starting rotation of the plurality of reels;
stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) for receiving a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels;
A stop control means (for example, a main control unit 300) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop operation after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven,
The first timing is a timing after the last stop operation on the plurality of reels,
The second timing is a timing after the timing of the start operation and before the final stop operation on the plurality of reels,
The frequency at which new items are displayed at the first timing is higher than the frequency at which new items are displayed at the second timing;
(See (5) for features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
In the game in which the item use effect is executed, a new item may be displayed at the second timing (for example, FIG. 85).
(See (5) for features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means is means for not displaying the items displayed before the power failure when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. item is not in the display item column after power failure),
Before the game in which the item use effect is executed, if the power is cut off and restored while the item is being displayed, a new item may be displayed at the second timing. (for example, FIG. 85),
(See (5) for features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The storage means is a means for maintaining the state in which the information of the item before the power failure is stored when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. no change in information),
The display means is a means for displaying items that are not displayed due to power failure and power recovery when displaying new items at the second timing (for example, FIG. 85).
(See (5) for features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The number of items newly displayed at the first timing is 1,
The number of items newly displayed at the second timing is 1 or more,
(See (5) for features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The storage means is a means for maintaining a state in which information of an item (hereinafter referred to as "first item") before power failure is stored when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. 85, power failure There is no change in the possessed item information of the main control unit 300 before and after the power is restored),
The display means is means for not displaying the first item that had been displayed before the power failure when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. 85, "Defeat Rate UP" item is not in the display item column after power failure),
The display means executes the item acquisition effect based on information that a new item (hereinafter referred to as a "second item") has been acquired during the period from when the power is restored to when the item use effect is executed. Then, after indicating that the first item has been acquired in the item acquisition effect, the first item can be displayed again (for example, in FIG. Acquiring the item executes the item acquisition effect, but the "defeat rate increase" item that was displayed before the power cut is displayed again),
The storage means is a means capable of storing the information of the second item (in FIG. 76, the "defeat rate small UP" item is added to the possessed item column),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
the first item may be different from the second item,
the first item may be the same as the second item;
A game machine characterized by:

In the above description,
display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a start operation means (for example, a start lever 135) for receiving a start operation for starting rotation of the plurality of reels;
stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) for receiving a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels;
After the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, main control unit 300) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop operation,
The display means is
In a period after receiving the start operation and before all the plurality of reels are stopped by the stop control, the first display (for example, FIG. 86(a1) and FIG. 86(b1)) is displayed. When power failure occurs, after the power is restored, the first display that was displayed before the power failure is displayed (for example, FIG. 86(b)),
In the period in which all of the plurality of reels are stopped by the stop control, if a power failure occurs while the first display is displayed, the first display that was displayed before the power failure after the power is restored is a means for displaying a second display without displaying the display of (for example, FIG. 86(a)),
(See (6) for features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means is
In the period after receiving the start operation and before all of the plurality of reels are stopped by the stop control, if a power failure occurs while the second display is displayed, the power failure occurs after the power is restored. means for displaying the previously displayed second display (in the event that a power failure occurs during a game, the display after the power is restored matches the display before the power failure);
(See (6) for features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first display is a display including items (for example, "defeat rate UP" item, "defeat 1 body" item) (eg, FIG. 86(a1)),
The second display is a display that does not contain items (for example, FIG. 86 (a2)),
(See (6) for features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first display is a display including that the points updated based on the progress of the game are values different from the initial values (for example, FIG. 86(a1)),
The second display is a display including that the point is an initial value (for example, FIG. 86 (a2)),
(See (6) for features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first display is a display including a background suggesting that the player is in an advantageous state (for example, FIG. 86(a1)),
The second display is a display including a background different from the background suggesting that the player is in an advantageous state (for example, FIG. 86(a2)),
(See (6) for features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information on the acquired items (for example, the "defeat rate UP" item, the "defeat 1 body" item),
The display means is
Based on the information that the item has been acquired, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 67) indicating that the item has been acquired,
It is possible to display the item indicated to have been acquired in the item acquisition effect (for example, the "defeat rate small UP" item acquired in FIG. 67(e) is displayed in FIG. 67(f)),
A means capable of executing an item use effect (for example, FIGS. 69(d) to (f)) using the displayed item,
The storage means is a means for maintaining a state in which the information of the item before the power failure (hereinafter referred to as "first item") is stored when the power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. 76, the power failure There is no change in the possessed item information of the main control unit 300 before and after the power is restored),
The display means is a means for not displaying the first item that was displayed before the power failure when power failure and power recovery occurs (for example, in FIG. 76, "Defeat Rate UP" item is not in the display item column after power failure),
The display means executes the item acquisition effect based on information that a new item (hereinafter referred to as a "second item") has been acquired during the period from when the power is restored to when the item use effect is executed. and after indicating that the first item has been acquired in the item acquisition effect, the first item can be displayed again (for example, in FIG. 76, the item acquisition The effect is executed, and the "defeat rate UP" item that was displayed before the power cut is added again to the display item column),
The storage means is a means capable of storing the information of the second item (in FIG. 76, the "defeat rate small UP" item is added to the possessed item column),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
the first item may be different from the second item,
the first item may be the same as the second item;
A game machine characterized by:

An embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

In the slot machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of reels, into which a predetermined number of game media are inserted and on which a plurality of types of symbols are respectively applied, start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the receipt of the rotation start instructing operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of wins is determined by a lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instructing operation, If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if not, the game medium is discarded. It is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 87 corresponds to an example of the gaming table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown) are housed in the center of the main body 101 and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, generally three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the reel window 113 when viewed from the player, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating each pattern displayed on the reel window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided. and a light-receiving portion, a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 114 to be activated. The valid winning line 114 is determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are five winning lines 114 . For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal prize line will be valid, and if two medals are bet, three lines will be valid with the addition of the upper horizontal prize line and the lower horizontal prize line, and the medal will be awarded. When 3 coins are bet, 5 lines obtained by adding a lower right pay line and an upper right pay line may be effective as pay lines. The number of pay lines 114 is not limited to 5. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, the right Five lines, ie, a downward pay line and an upward pay line may be set as valid pay lines, or the same number of pay lines may be uniformly set as valid pay lines regardless of the number of bets.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (more specifically, a bonus combination) has been internally won in an internal winning combination lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. be. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a production lamp.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up. Hereinafter, in this embodiment, a game in which three medals are inserted is a "three bet game," a game in which two medals are inserted is a "two bet game," and a game in which one medal is inserted. is sometimes referred to as "one bet game".

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the term "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an effect device that notifies information about the stop operation (for example, the operation order of the stop buttons 137 to 139, etc.).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push-down switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 110 to 112. . More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped.

Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be called the first stop reel, the reel to be stopped by the second stop operation may be called the second stop reel, and the reel to be stopped by the third stop operation may be called the third stop reel. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137-139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110-112 is called the operation order or the pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order of the stop operation with the middle reel 111 as the first stop reel is called " The operation sequence for the stopping operation with the right reel 112 as the first stop reel is called the "reverse pressing operation sequence" or simply "reverse pressing". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be lit to inform the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (on the side of the player). It is a structure that appears.

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment functions as a effect device that executes effects (for example, panel attack effect, bonus symbol notification effect, etc.) to be described later.

It should be noted that, even if the display device is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen is rectangular, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control units of the slot machine 100 can be broadly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control part>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and stopping of the reels. A ROM 306 for storing positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A WDT (watchdog timer) 314 is mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a random number generation circuit 316 that is activated when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). ).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110, index sensor of the reel 111, index sensor of the reel 112, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detects a put operation when The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, the L become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (win line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, accumulated number display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 for driving the indicator 126 and the payout number indicator 127) is provided.

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output. In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 detects that the voltage value of the power supply is a predetermined value (this embodiment). 9v), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. Signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on the control commands. there is This basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. are doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various displays, and the like. are provided.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 . The speakers 272 and 277 of this embodiment function as an effect device that executes an effect (for example, a bonus symbol stop effect) to be described later.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is connected to various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input/output interface. 123, etc.) are connected.

A drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163 is provided in the first sub-control section 400, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. A timer 512 is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The second sub-controller 500 also has a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the second sub-controller 500 as a whole, image display data, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub-control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to this VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Pattern arrangement>
With reference to FIG. 89(a), the symbol arrangement applied to each of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. In addition, this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of the symbols applied to each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (21 frames numbered 0 to 20 in this embodiment) of a plurality of types (eight types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112 . For example, in the present embodiment, the number 1 piece on the left reel 110 has a "replay" symbol, the number 0 piece on the middle reel 111 has a "bell" symbol, and the number 2 piece on the right reel 112 has a "replay" symbol. "Watermelon" pattern is placed on each.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, with reference to FIG. 89(b), the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described. The figure shows the types of winning combinations (including activated combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the activation or payout of each winning combination. Of the winning combinations in this embodiment, the big bonus (BB1, BB2) and the regular bonus (RB) are bonus combinations that shift to a bonus game, and the replay is a replay without inserting new medals. Winning hands may be called "working hands" to distinguish them from winning hands. included. In addition, "winning" in the present embodiment includes a case where a symbol combination of an operating combination that does not involve a payout of medals (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. Bonuses and prizes for replays are included.

Winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include big bonuses (BB1, BB2), regular bonuses (RB), small combinations (cherry, watermelon, bell), and replays. It goes without saying that the type of winning combination is not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

"Big bonus (BB1, BB2)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "BB") is a special combination (operating combination) in which a big bonus game (BB game) is started by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combinations are "BB1 symbol (also referred to as white 7)-BB1 symbol-BB1 symbol" for BB1 and "BB2 symbol (also referred to as blue 7)-BB2 symbol-BB2 symbol" for BB2. Further, the flag carryover is performed for BB1 and BB2. That is, when BB1 or BB2 is internally won, a flag indicating this is set (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). The state in which the flag indicating the internal winning is set (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the bonus internal winning state) is maintained until the next game is played, and the internal winning of BB1 and BB2 is in progress even after the next game. White 7-White 7" and the symbol combination "Blue 7-Blue 7-Blue 7" corresponding to BB2 are in a winning state.

"Regular bonus (RB)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "RB") is a special role (operating role) in which a regular bonus game (RB game) is started by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combination is "RB symbol (also called bonus)-RB symbol-RB symbol". It should be noted that flag carrying over is performed for RB in the same manner as for BB described above. However, in the big bonus game (BB game), the start of the big bonus game is not based on the internal winning of the regular bonus game (RB game) or the display of the symbol combination on the winning line. A regular bonus game may be started later, and the regular bonus game may be automatically started such that when one regular bonus game is finished, the next regular bonus game is immediately started.

The RB game of this embodiment consists of 8 games, and the RB game ends when the 8 games of the RB game are finished.

“Small wins (cherry, watermelon, bell) (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “cherry”, “watermelon”, and “bell”) are winning wins in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbols The combination is "cherry pattern-ANY pattern-ANY pattern" for cherry, "watermelon pattern-watermelon pattern-watermelon pattern" for watermelon, and "bell pattern-bell pattern-bell pattern" for bell. Also, the corresponding number of payouts is as shown in FIG. In the case of "cherry symbol-ANY symbol-ANY symbol", the symbol on the left reel 110 may be a "cherry" symbol, and the symbols on the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 may be any symbols.

"Replay" is a prize-winning combination (operating combination) that allows the next game to be played without inserting medals (game media) due to winning, and medals are not paid out. The corresponding symbol combination for the replay is "replay symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol".

Here, the internal winning probability of the winning combination will be outlined.

The internal winning probability of each role is obtained by combining numerical data corresponding to the range of lottery data associated with each role with numerical data within the range of random numbers acquired during internal lottery (65536 in this embodiment). It is obtained by the value divided by The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each winning combination and loss. In the winning combination internal lottery process to be described later, it is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery corresponds to the lottery data corresponding to any combination, and the internal winning combination is determined. In practice, this lottery data is prepared with settings 1 to 6 that differ in the winning probability of at least one combination, and the game parlor staff can arbitrarily select and set any of the set values. .

In this embodiment, the bonus combination is a simultaneous winning combination that is internally won at the same time as watermelon or cherry.

In the present embodiment, watermelon and cherry are respectively won when the winning combination is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process and when the operation timing of the stop operation is suitable. Hereinafter, watermelon and cherry are also referred to as chance roles. Further, Bell wins a prize when the winning combination is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process and the stop operation is performed in the correct stop operation order. Hereinafter, the bell is also referred to as a pushing role.

The AT state is a game state in which information (details of stop operation) that is advantageous to the player is notified when the player wins an internal win for a chance combination or a push-up combination. In the AT state, the effect image display device 157 and the payout number display 127 are used to execute the operation navigation for informing the content of the stop operation to help win a prize. Specifically, when the winning combination is internally won in the AT state, the stop operation order is announced, and when the chance combination is internally won in the AT state, the timing of the stop operation (suggestion of the internally won combination) is notified. Since the operation navigation is executed, the player can easily win a predetermined small winning combination by following the details of the stop operation of the operation navigation. That is, the AT state is a state in which a large profit is given to the player by operation navigation.

On the other hand, the normal state is a state in which operation navigation is not executed even if the player wins internally for a chance combination or a push-up combination.

In this embodiment, when the AT lottery is won in the normal state, the state is shifted to the AT state. In the AT lottery, for example, it may be possible to determine whether or not a winning combination is won based on the result of an internal winning combination lottery. Further, in this embodiment, when the number of games played in the normal state after the end of the AT state reaches a predetermined threshold value (hereinafter referred to as the ceiling number of games), the state is shifted to the AT state. That is, when the AT lottery is won in the normal state, or when the number of games played in the normal state reaches the ceiling number of games, the state is shifted to the AT state, and a predetermined number of AT games is awarded. In the AT state, an AT add-on lottery for adding the number of AT games is performed, and when winning the AT add-on lottery, a predetermined number of AT games is added. On the other hand, in the AT state, when all the given AT game numbers are consumed, the AT state ends and shifts to the normal state.

<Operation of the slot machine>
Next, the processing of the main control section 300, the first sub-control section 400, and the second sub-control section 500 will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

When the slot machine 100 is powered on, first, in step S101, various initial setting processes are performed. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt is disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables to be stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the WDT 314 is permitted to operate, and the initialization is performed. Set values, etc.

In step S102, medal insertion/start operation acceptance processing is executed. Here, it is determined by detection by the sensor circuit 320 whether or not there is an electronic medal insertion operation by the bet buttons 130 to 132 or a direct medal insertion operation from the medal insertion slot 141, and if there is an insertion operation lights up the winning line display lamp 120 in accordance with the number of inserted medals. Also, preparations are made to transmit a medal insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-control section 400 . When the player wins the replay role in the previous game, the processing of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so the player does not need to insert medals.

In addition, it checks whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated based on the detection of the sensor circuit 320, and if it is determined that the start operation has been made, the number of inserted medals is determined, and the first sub-control section 400 In response, preparations are made to transmit a start lever acceptance command indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated.

In step S103, a valid pay line is determined.

In step S104, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is acquired.

In step S105, an internal lottery process for a winning combination is performed. In the internal lottery process for the winning combination, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current game state, and the internal lottery is performed using this table and the random number acquired in step S104. As a result of the internal lottery, when any winning combination (including an operating combination) is internally won, the condition device (flag) of the internally winning combination is operated (the flag of the winning combination is turned ON). Also, in this step S105, preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating the result of the internal winning combination lottery to the first sub-control section 400. FIG. For example, when the watermelon is internally won, preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating that the watermelon is internally won to the first sub-control unit 400, and the result of the internal winning combination lottery is lost (the winning combination is In the case of non-winning), preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating a loss to the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S106, reel stop data is selected based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery in step S105. Operation conditions are also set for the reel stop data of the winning combination for which the order of stop operation is required, and when the reel stop data corresponding to these are selected, the operation conditions are also set.

In step S107, reel rotation start processing for starting rotation of all the reels 110 to 112 is executed based on the start operation.

In step S108, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, it is possible to accept the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when one of the stop buttons is pressed, the stop data of the reel stop data is changed in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. One of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of frames to be drawn set in the stop data. If all the reels 110-112 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S109. In this step S108, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been stopped (more specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command, the second stop operation, and the for the stop button reception 2 command, and for the third stop operation, prepare to transmit the stop button reception 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel (Specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop command for the third stop operation 3 command) to the first sub-controller 400.

In step S109, a winning determination process is performed. In the winning determination process, the winning of the symbols stopped by pressing the stop buttons 137 to 139 is determined, and when a combination of symbols corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, the winning. judged to have won the role. For example, if "watermelon pattern - watermelon pattern - watermelon pattern" is aligned on the activated prize line, it is determined that the watermelon prize has been won. Also, in this step S109, preparations are made to transmit a display determination command indicating the result of winning determination to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S110, medal payout processing is performed. In the medal payout process, if the player wins some winning combination with payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out. In step S110, preparations are made to transmit a medal payout command indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S111, game state control processing is performed. In this game state control process, control for shifting the game state is performed. For example, in the case of BB winning, preparations are made so that the BB game can be started from the next time. Also, in this step S111, preparations are made to transmit a game state command indicating the game state to the first sub-control section 400. FIG.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing. Various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206 in FIG. 91) of the main controller timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S203, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S204, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S205, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S<b>206 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S207, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S203, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of an error related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S209, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low-voltage signal is on (power-off is detected), the process proceeds to step S211, and if the low-voltage signal is off (power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, various processes for ending the timer interrupt ending process are performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S211, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 90 is returned to.

<Processing of the first sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92(a) is a flow chart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 92(b) is a flow chart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 92(c) is a flow chart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, the main processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 92(a).

When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state.

In step S302, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S303.

In step S303, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S304, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S305, effect control processing (details will be described later) is performed. Here, production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408 . This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing updating processing of the effect data when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S307, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for various lamps 420 in the performance data read out in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 422. FIG.

In step S308, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to the shutter 163 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. FIG.

In step S309, information output processing is performed to set the command to be transmitted to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to be sent to the second sub-controller 500 in the effect data read out in step S305, the setting for outputting this control command is made, and the process returns to step S302.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 92(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S401 of command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 92(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S501, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 92(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S502, the command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S309, the random number value for effect is updated, and the like.

<Processing of the second sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93(a) is a flow chart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 93(b) is a flow chart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 93(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 93(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S3001 of FIG. 93(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S601. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, initialization processing of storage areas in the VRAM 518, and the like are performed.

In step S602, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S603.

In step S603, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S604, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines each command received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S605, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S604, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S606, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S605. For example, if there is an image control instruction in the effect data read in step S605, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S602.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 93(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 93(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S801, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S602 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 93(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S802, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing in step S4006 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 93(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S901, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 536 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S902, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S903; otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S903, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S901, the CPU 504 obtains image data information (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, etc.) forming the display image. , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516 . The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S905, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image rendering. wait for is entered.

In step S906, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Example L1>
Example L1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 103. FIG. In embodiment L1, a panel attack effect is executed under a certain time limit during eight games of RB. The panel attack effect is an image effect using the effect image display device 157 . More specifically, the panel attack effect is performed by moving the cursor (indicated by C in the drawing) on a grid-like panel (indicated by P in the drawing) provided on the screen of the effect image display device 157, and moving. When the cursor stops, the panel at the position of the stopped cursor is erased, and the hidden image behind the erased panel is exposed (on the drawing The exposed image is indicated as d1). Among the panel attack effects, the effect that the panel disappears is referred to as a panel erasing effect. The panel attack effect is a effect related to the stop operation, and can be said to include both this panel erase effect and the reel stop effect of stopping the reels 110-112.

FIG. 94(a) is a diagram showing the appearance of a panel provided on the screen of the effect image display device 157, and FIG. 94(b) shows the movement path of the cursor (indicated by RT on the drawing). It is a diagram. In Example L1, it is composed of 7×7=49 panels, and some of the panels are special panels (panels marked with the letter B, indicated by BP on the drawing). . Hereinafter, the panel on which the letter B is displayed is called a bomb panel, and the other panels are called normal panels. On such a panel, the cursor moves in a horizontal zigzag direction from the upper left corner of the screen to the lower right corner of the screen, as indicated by the movement path.

In addition, in Example L1, 49 panels of 7×7 are used, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be more or less than 7×7. For example, the player may be allowed to select the difficulty level, and the number of vertical and horizontal panels may be changed according to the difficulty level. In addition, although the moving speed of the cursor is constant in the embodiment L1, it is not limited to this, and the moving speed may be variable. For example, the moving speed of the cursor may be changed according to the number of remaining RB games, the remaining time limit, and the difficulty level.

In Example L1, when the cursor stops at the position of the normal panel, the region of the stopped panel is erased and the rear image of the panel region is displayed. On the other hand, when the cursor stops at the position of the bomb panel, the areas of multiple panels including the stopped panel (for example, the top, bottom, left, and right panels adjacent to the bomb panel) are erased, and the rear image of the multiple panel areas is displayed. be done. FIG. 94(c) is an example of the overall image d10 arranged behind the panel, and the image d1 is an image displayed by partially exposing the overall image d10. The overall image d10 may be, for example, an image that informs the player of advantageous information, or may be an image that suggests setting values, for example. That is, the panel attack effect (panel erasing effect) may be an effect for giving a predetermined privilege to the player.

FIG. 94(d) is a diagram for explaining the image display of the panel erasing effect (hereinafter referred to as "panel erasing effect display"). The panel erasing effect display d20 is a display in which a cloud-like balloon image suddenly displayed on the entire screen in response to the stop operation gradually becomes smaller and finally disappears. As the cloudy image disappears, the image behind is exposed and displayed. The display time of the panel erasing effect display d20 is the execution time TA of the panel erasing effect. The execution time TA in Example L1 is the same regardless of whether the cursor stops at the normal panel position or at the bomb panel position.

Here, in the panel attack effect of embodiment L1, it is possible to stop the cursor a maximum of 24 times (=8G×3) within the time limit. There is a need to. Therefore, the panel attack effect is a effect that requires careful stopping operations.

Further, in the panel attack effect of Example L1, an operation invalid time TB is provided between the first stop operation and the second stop operation and between the second stop operation and the third stop operation. The operation invalid time TB is a period in which the target reel is stopped even if a stop operation is received during this period, but the panel erase effect is not executed based on this stop operation. In the embodiment L1, the operation invalid time TB is the same time as the execution time TA of the panel clear effect. In other words, it is possible to execute the next panel erasing effect after the currently executed panel erasing effect is completed. As a result, the player can clearly see the entire panel erasing effect.

FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an overview of the panel erasing effect based on the first stop operation when the left reel 110 is used as the first stop reel. FIG. 95(a) shows an overview of the panel erasing effect when the cursor stops at the normal panel, one panel at the position where the cursor has stopped is erased, and the image d1 for one panel is displayed. It shows the mode of production in this case. On the other hand, FIG. 95(b) shows the case where the cursor stops at the bomb panel, and not only the panel where the cursor stopped but also the eight adjacent panels are erased, and the panel It shows a rendering mode when nine images d1 are displayed.

FIG. 96 shows that in a game in which a panel attack effect is being executed, the operation interval time T1 between the first stop operation and the second stop operation>the operation invalid time TB, and the time interval between the second stop operation and the third stop operation 4 is a timing chart showing the operation of each device when operation interval time T2>operation invalid time TB. In this case, since the second stop operation and the third stop operation are the stop operations after the panel erase effect is completed, the panel erase effect is performed based on each of the second stop operation and the third stop operation. Execution is started.

Note that the cursor movement display shown in FIG. 96 refers to an image display in which the cursor is moving, and the cursor stop display refers to an image display in which the cursor is stopped (the same applies hereinafter). In the embodiment L1, as shown in FIG. 96, while the panel erasing effect display is being performed, the cursor stop display is performed, and after the execution time TA (operation invalid time TB) elapses, the cursor movement display is started. It has become.

FIG. 97 shows the case where the first stop reel is the left reel 110 and the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the operation interval time T1 between the first stop operation and the second stop operation<operation invalid time TB. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an outline of a panel clear effect based on the first stop operation and the second stop operation in the case. In this case, first, the left reel 110 is stopped based on the first stop operation, and the panel erasing effect is also started to be executed. Subsequently, the middle reel 110 is stopped based on the second stop operation, but since the panel elimination effect started based on the first stop operation is still being executed, a new panel elimination effect based on the second stop operation is not executed. Not executed.

As described above, in Example L1, even if there is a stop operation, there is a case where the panel clear effect is not executed. This is to show the player the panel erasing effect. That is, in the panel attack effect, (1) when both the effect of stopping the reels 110 to 112 and the panel erasing effect are executed based on one stop operation, (2) the reels 110 to 112 are executed based on one stop operation. There is a case where an effect to stop only is executed.

FIG. 98 shows that in a game in which a panel attack effect is being executed, the operation interval time T1 between the first stop operation and the second stop operation < operation invalid time TB, and the time interval between the second stop operation and the third stop operation 4 is a timing chart showing the operation of each device when operation interval time T2<operation invalid time TB. In this case, the panel clear effect based on the first stop operation ends at time t1 when the operation invalid time TB has passed from time t0 of the first stop operation. The panel erasing effect based on the 3 stop operation is not executed. Note that the stopped cursor starts to move and display from time t1.

It should be noted that, in the embodiment L1, when the panel erasing effect being executed ends, that is, when the execution time TA (=operation invalid time TB) elapses from the stop operation, the panel erasing effect based on the next stop operation is executed. Apart from this, if a stop operation is performed during the operation invalid time TB, the measurement of the operation invalid time TB is reset and the operation invalid time TB has elapsed since the time of the stop operation. may be re-measured (Modification 1).

FIG. 99 shows a game in which the panel attack effect of Modification 1 is executed, in which the operation interval time T1<operation invalid time TB between the first stop operation and the second stop operation, and the second stop operation and the second stop operation 10 is a timing chart showing the operation of each device when operation interval time T2 between three stop operations<operation invalid time TB. In this case, since the second stop operation and the third stop operation are performed in a period in which the operation invalid time TB does not elapse from the previous stop operation, the panel is erased based on the second stop operation and the third stop operation in the game. No performance is performed. In addition, since the measurement of the operation invalid time TB is reset each time the second stop operation and the third stop operation are performed, the cursor movement display is started at the time t1 when the operation invalid time TB has passed from the time t0 of the third stop operation. do.

In the embodiment L1, as shown in FIG. 100(a), the execution time TA of the panel clear effect and the operation invalid time TB are set to be the same, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 100(b), execution time TA of panel clear effect<operation invalid time TB, or as shown in FIG. 100(c), execution time TA of panel clear effect>operation invalid time TB may be used. In the case of FIG. 100(b), it is possible to pay attention to and enjoy the effect after the panel erasing effect is finished. Also, in the case of FIG. 100(c), the user can enjoy the panel erasing effect from the beginning to the middle.

In the embodiment L1, the execution time TA of the panel erasing effect is the same when the cursor stops on the normal panel and when the cursor stops on the bomb panel. Good (Modification 2).

FIG. 101 shows each device when the cursor stops on the normal panel based on the first stop operation and stops on the bomb panel based on the second stop operation in the game executing the panel attack effect of the modification 2. is a timing chart showing the operation of In FIG. 101, the execution time TA1 of the panel erasing effect when the cursor stops on the normal panel and the execution time TA2 of the panel erasing effect when the cursor stops on the bomb panel are indicated.

For example, execution time TA1<execution time TA2 as shown in FIG. 101(a), or execution time TA1>execution time TA2 as shown in FIG. 101(b). The panel erasing effect shown in FIG. 101(a) has an execution time that matches the size of the panel area to be erased, so that a natural effect with a sense of unity can be achieved whether the player stops at the normal panel or the bomb panel. can be realized. On the other hand, in the panel erasing effect shown in FIG. 101(b), the more panel areas to be erased, the shorter the execution time.

In addition, in the panel attack effect of the above embodiment L1, the number of panels to be erased in the panel erasing effect varies depending on whether the cursor is stopped at the normal panel or the bomb panel. You may perform an attack production.

For example, when the cursor moves along a movement path on a grid-like panel as shown in FIG. A benefit that is advantageous to the player who stops the cursor at a closer position may be given. Also, if the cursor is stopped at a position closer to the special bomb panel, an operation response effect with a longer execution time may be executed. In this case, the operation response effect with a long execution time may suggest giving a privilege more advantageous to the player than the operation response effect with a short execution time.

Specifically, the benefits when the cursor is stopped on the panel (denoted as NP in the drawing) one before or one after on the movement path of the special bomb panel shown in FIG. 20(c), the special bomb panel shown in FIG. good.

In the above embodiment L1, the panel attack effect is executed in the RB game, but the game in which the panel attack effect is executed is not limited to RB. For example, it may be executed in a game state advantageous to the player, such as an AT state or a BB game. In addition, in the above-described embodiment L1, the panel clear effect is executed for one operation of each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, but other operations such as simultaneous operation of multiple buttons and slide operation of multiple buttons are executed. may apply. In this case, for example, the panel clear effect may be executed for the operation detected first in the simultaneous operation or the slide operation, or the panel clear effect may be executed for the operation detected later. . In the latter case, a reel stop effect of stopping the reels is executed for the previous operation, and a reel stop effect of stopping the reels and a panel erasing effect are executed for the subsequent operation.

Further, the panel attack effect of Example L1 has been described as an effect on the effect image display device 157 of the slot machine 100, but the target of the panel attack effect is not limited to the slot machine 100. FIG. For example, the panel attack effect shown in FIG. 102 may be applied to a game machine.

FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the panel attack effect executed by the game machine. The panel attack effect shown in FIG. 103 is a effect in which a cursor falling from top to bottom is stopped based on a stop operation, and a better evaluation is obtained as the cursor is stopped at a position closer to a predetermined line TL. be. For example, PERFECT (good evaluation) is given when the cursor is stopped on a predetermined line TL, and GOOD (ordinary evaluation) is given when the cursor is stopped within a predetermined range R1 near the predetermined line TL. evaluation), and when the cursor is stopped outside the predetermined range R1, an evaluation of BAD (bad evaluation) is given, and an effect according to the evaluation is executed, or a privilege according to the evaluation is given. good.

Also, a panel attack effect may be executed on a pachinko machine equipped with a chance button. For example, the panel attack effect may be executed during 15 rounds of the jackpot, and the panel elimination effect may be executed based on the operation of the chance button. As a rule, for example, the chance button can be operated up to three times in one round, and an operation invalid time is provided between chance button operations. When the chance button is operated after the operation invalid time has elapsed, the panel clear effect is executed based on the operation of the chance button, but the next chance button is operated before the operation invalid time has elapsed. In this case, the panel clear effect may not be executed based on the operation of the chance button.

<Example M1>
Example M1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 108. FIG. In the embodiment M1, in the internal bonus winning state (BB1 and BB2), there is an effect (e.g., bonus combination symbol combination) that notifies the symbol of the internally won bonus combination and instructs to align the symbol combination of the internally won bonus combination. , an effect that instructs one symbol among the stop modes including the symbol combination of the bonus combination, hereinafter referred to as a bonus symbol notification effect) may be executed. Then, in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect is being executed, one symbol constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the internally won bonus combination is stop-displayed on the active line based on the player's first stop operation. In this case, a bonus symbol stop effect indicating that the bonus symbol has stopped on the active line is executed.

FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the bonus symbol notification effect and the bonus symbol stop effect in the BB1 internal winning state. The bonus symbol notification effect is an image display effect, and as shown in FIGS. 104(a) to 104(c), the image d30 showing the symbol combination of BB1 is displayed as the effect image from the first stop operation to the third stop operation. This is an effect displayed on the display device 157 . The bonus pattern stop effect is a voice output effect, and as shown in FIGS. 104(a) to 104(c), the effect of outputting predetermined sounds v1 to v3 congratulating the stopping of the bonus symbols from the speakers 272 and 277. is.

FIG. 104(a) shows a bonus symbol stop effect when the left reel 110 is stopped based on the first stop operation. In this case, since the BB1 symbol has stopped on the activated line of the left reel 110, the slot machine 100 outputs the first voice v1 (for example, "I'm sure!~") from the speakers 272 and 277. FIG.

FIG. 104(b) shows a bonus symbol stop effect when the middle reel 111 is stopped based on the first stop operation. In this case, since the BB1 symbol has stopped on the activated line of the middle reel 111, the slot machine 100 outputs the second voice v2 (for example, "I did it!") from the speakers 272 and 277. FIG.

FIG. 104(c) shows a bonus symbol stop effect when the right reel 112 is stopped based on the first stop operation. In this case, since the BB1 symbol has stopped on the activated line of the right reel 112, the slot machine 100 outputs the third voice v3 (eg, "Let's go~") from the speakers 272 and 277. FIG.

As described above, the slot machine 100 of the embodiment M1 executes different bonus symbol stop effects in accordance with the reel targeted by the first stop operation in the BB1 internal winning state. Various performances can be provided to the player in the executed game, and interest in the stop operation can be further improved.

In addition, in the BB1 internal winning state of the embodiment M1, in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect was executed, when the symbol of BB1 was stopped and displayed on the activated line, the bonus symbol stop effect was executed. A bonus symbol stop effect may be executed at a predetermined rate even when a specific symbol other than the symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

FIG. 105(a) is a diagram for explaining the effect outline of the small winning symbol notification effect in the BB1 internal winning state. In this embodiment, the bonus combination is a simultaneous winning combination in which Watermelon or Cherry is internally won at the same time, so there is a case where Watermelon or Cherry is won in the BB1 internal winning state. Therefore, in the BB1 internal winning state, there is a case where the small winning symbol notification effect is executed. The small winning pattern notification effect is a presentation image display effect for notifying the internally won small winning pattern and instructing to align the small winning pattern combination, and the simultaneously winning small winning pattern (for example, a watermelon pattern). is displayed on the effect image display device 157 from the first stop operation to the third stop operation.

FIG. 105(a) shows a case where the middle reel 111 is stopped based on the first stop operation in a game in which the minor winning symbol notification effect is executed. In this case, the symbol of BB1 is stopped on the active line of the middle reel 111, but the slot machine 100 does not output the sound of the bonus symbol stop effect from the speakers 272 and 277.例文帳に追加That is, in the game in which the BB1 internal winning state of the minor winning symbol notification effect is executed, even if the player ignores the content of the notification and stops the BB1 symbol on the effective line for the predetermined reel, the bonus symbol is stopped. No performance is performed.

FIG. 105(b) is a diagram (the same diagram as FIG. 104(b)) for comparison with FIG. 105(a). As described above, in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect in the BB1 internal winning state is executed, when the symbol of BB1 is stopped on the effective line for a predetermined reel, the bonus symbol stop effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 105(a) and (b), in Example M1, even if the symbols of BB1 stop on the activated line on the same predetermined reel, the bonus symbols are displayed in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect is executed. Although the stop performance is executed, the bonus symbol stop performance is not executed in the game in which the bonus symbol notification performance is not executed (specifically, the game in which the minor winning symbol notification performance is executed). As a result, it is possible to improve consistency between the symbol notification effect and the bonus symbol stop effect, and to increase the reliability of the symbol notification effect.

In the embodiment M1, when the BB1 symbol stops on the active line in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect is executed, the bonus symbol stop effect is executed with a probability of 100%, and in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect is not executed. When the symbol of BB1 stops on the active line, the bonus symbol stop effect is not executed with a probability of 100%, but it is not limited to this. In a broad sense, when the BB1 symbol stops on the active line on the same predetermined reel, the probability of executing the bonus symbol notification effect in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect is executed>Bonus in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect is not executed It suffices if it is the probability of executing the symbol notification effect.

FIG. 105(c) is a diagram showing a modification of the effect image displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the minor winning symbol notification effect. An image d32 shown in FIG. 105(c) is an image displaying the symbol combination of BB1 together with the symbols of the minor winning combination. In this way, in the small win symbol notification effect, a symbol different from BB1 may be displayed together with the symbol combination of BB1. It may not be executed. That is, in the minor winning symbol notification effect, at least a symbol different from the bonus symbol should be displayed in the displayed effect image.

FIG. 106(a) is a diagram for explaining an example of an overview of the bonus symbol notification effect and the bonus symbol stop effect in the BB2 internal winning state. Even in the BB2 internal winning state, there is a case where the bonus symbol notification effect is executed in the same manner as in the BB1 internal winning state. The bonus symbol notification effect in the BB2 internal winning state is an effect of displaying the image d40 showing the symbol combination of BB2 on the effect image display device 157 from the first stop operation to the third stop operation.

FIG. 106(a) shows a bonus symbol stop effect when the middle reel 111 is stopped based on the first stop operation. In this case, since the BB2 symbol has stopped on the active line of the middle reel 111, the slot machine 100 outputs a second voice v1 (for example, "Ichika!~") from the speakers 272 and 277 as a bonus. Execute the pattern stop effect.

FIG. 106(b) is a diagram (the same diagram as FIG. 104(a)) for comparison with FIG. 106(a). As described above, in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect in the BB1 internal winning state is executed, when the symbol of BB1 is stopped on the activated line with respect to the left reel 110 based on the first stop operation, the slot machine 100 , to execute a bonus symbol stop effect for outputting a second voice v1 (for example, “Ichika!~”) from the speakers 272 and 277 .

As described above, in the embodiment M1, the slot machine 100 executes the bonus symbol notification effect in the BB2 internal winning state, as shown in FIGS. 106(a) and 106(b). 111), when the symbol of BB2 stops on the activated line, the bonus symbol notification effect of outputting the second sound v1 is executed. For example, when the BB1 symbol stops on the active line on the left reel 110), the bonus symbol stop effect of outputting the second sound v1, that is, the same bonus symbol stop effect is executed. As a result, even if the content of the bonus symbol notification effect is different, the same bonus symbol stop effect is executed for different stop operations, so the interest in the stop operation can be further improved.

FIG. 107(a) is a diagram for explaining another example of the effect outline of the bonus symbol notification effect and the bonus symbol stop effect in the BB2 internal winning state.

FIG. 107(a) shows a bonus symbol stop effect when the right reel 112 is stopped based on the first stop operation. In this case, since the BB2 symbol has stopped on the activated line of the right reel 112, the slot machine 100 outputs the second sound v3 (for example, "Let's go~") from the speakers 272 and 277 as a bonus symbol. Execute the stop effect.

FIG. 107(b) is a diagram (the same diagram as FIG. 104(c)) for comparison with FIG. 107(a). As described above, in the game in which the bonus symbol notification effect in the BB1 internal winning state is executed, when the symbol of BB1 is stopped on the activated line with respect to the right reel 112 by the first stop operation, the slot machine 100 operates as a bonus symbol. A symbol stop effect is executed, and a bonus symbol stop effect of outputting a third voice v3 (for example, "Let's go~") from the speakers 272 and 277 is executed.

As described above, in the embodiment M1, the slot machine 100 executes the bonus symbol notification effect in the BB2 internal winning state, as shown in FIGS. 107(a) and 107(b). 112), when the symbol of BB2 stops on the active line, the first bonus symbol notification effect of outputting the sound v3 is executed, while the BB1 is on the first reel (for example, the right reel 112) in the BB1 internal winning state. symbol stops on the activated line, the first bonus symbol notification effect of outputting a voice v3, that is, the same bonus symbol stop effect is executed. As a result, even if the content of the bonus symbol notification effect is different, the same bonus symbol stop effect is executed for the same stop operation, so the interest in the stop operation can be further improved.

In addition, in the BB2 internal winning state of the embodiment M1, the bonus symbol notification effect is executed, and when the BB2 symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the bonus symbol stop effect is executed. Even when a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the bonus symbol stop performance may be executed at a predetermined rate.

104 to 107 explained the bonus symbol stop effect for the first stop operation, but the bonus symbol stop effect is not executed only for the first stop operation. The bonus symbol stop effect is executed also for the second stop operation and the third stop operation.

FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the effect outline of the bonus symbol stop effect from the first stop operation to the third stop operation in the BB1 internal winning state. Specifically, in FIG. 26, stop operations are performed with the first stop reel as the middle reel 111, the second stop reel as the right reel 112, and the third stop reel as the left reel 110, and the bonus symbol is stopped and displayed in any stop operation. indicates the case. It should be noted that FIG. 108(a) shows an outline of an effect when a bonus symbol notification effect is executed, and FIG. 108(b) shows an effect outline when a minor symbol symbol notification effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 26(a), when the bonus symbol notification effect is executed, the bonus symbol stop effect of outputting the sound v2 for the first stop operation (see FIGS. 104(b) and 105(b)). , a bonus pattern stop effect (see FIG. 104(c)) that outputs a voice v3 for the second stop operation, and a bonus that outputs a voice v4 (for example, "Big bonus!") for the third stop operation Execute the symbol stop effect. A bonus symbol stop effect (see FIG. 104(a)) for outputting a voice v1 may be executed for the third stop operation.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 108(b), when the minor winning symbol notification effect is executed, the bonus symbol stop effect is not executed for the first stop operation (see FIG. 105(a)), A bonus symbol stop effect that outputs a voice v3 for the second stop operation (see FIG. 104(c)), and a bonus symbol that outputs a voice v4 (for example, "Big bonus!") for the third stop operation Execute the stop effect. A bonus symbol stop effect (see FIG. 104(a)) for outputting a voice v1 may be executed for the third stop operation.

As described above, in the embodiment M1, even when the symbol combination of BB1 is stopped and displayed with the same stop operation content, when the bonus symbol notification effect and the minor winning symbol notification effect are executed, the first stop operation is performed. There is a difference regarding whether or not the bonus symbol stop effect is executed. However, for the second stop operation and the third stop operation, the same bonus symbol stop effect is executed.

Examples L1 and M1 of the present embodiment have been described above, but the example of the present embodiment is not limited to this, and each example may be combined.

<Summary of embodiment>
(1) As described above, according to the amusement machine (e.g., slot machine 100, pachinko machine, game machine, etc.) of the above-described embodiment (e.g., Example L1),
Operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, operation buttons such as stop buttons 137 to 139, main control unit 300, production buttons, and chance buttons);
Effect means (for example, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277 , various lamps 336, 420, etc.);
A game table comprising
When the operation means receives a first operation (for example, a first stop operation, etc.) during execution of the first effect (hereinafter referred to as a first case), the effect means performs the first Means capable of executing an operation response effect (for example, a panel deletion effect based on the first stop operation) (for example, FIG. 95, FIG. 96, etc.),
In the first case, when a second operation (e.g., second stop operation, etc.) is performed after the first time (e.g., operation invalid time TB, etc.) has elapsed after the first operation is performed (hereinafter , the second case), the effect means executes a second operation response effect (for example, a panel erase effect based on the second stop operation) (for example, FIG. 95, FIG. 96, etc.),
In the first case, if the second operation is performed before the first time elapses after the first operation is performed, the second operation response effect is not executed (for example, FIG. 97, Figure 98, etc.),
This is the first basic configuration.

According to this first basic configuration, the second operation response effect may or may not be executed depending on the second operation timing, but the first operation response effect is reliably executed. , the first operation response performance is prioritized over the second response performance, and the player can firmly confirm it. In other words, it is possible to execute a novel effect that has never existed before.

In the first basic configuration,
The rendering means is means for executing at least part of the first operation response rendering during at least part of the first time (for example, FIG. 96, FIG. 100, etc.),
This is the first preferred configuration.

According to the first preferred configuration, it is possible to clearly show the player the first operation response effect at the first time.

The first time may be the same as the execution time of the first operation response effect, the first time may be shorter than the execution time of the first operation response effect, The first time may be longer than the execution time of the first operation response effect.

In the first basic configuration or the first preferred configuration,
The effect means is a means capable of changing the execution time of the first operation response effect according to the timing when the operation means receives the first operation (for example, FIG. 101),
This is the second preferred configuration.

According to the second preferred configuration, since the execution time of the first operation response effect is the time intended by the player, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the timing of the first operation.

In the first basic configuration, first preferred configuration, or second preferred configuration,
The effect means is means capable of changing the first time according to the execution time of the first operation response effect (for example, FIG. 101),
This is the third preferred configuration.

According to the third preferred configuration, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the timing of the second operation as well.

In the first basic configuration, first preferred configuration, second preferred configuration, or third preferred configuration,
The effect means is means capable of executing the first operation response effect requiring a second time (for example, execution time TA),
The effect means is means capable of executing the first operation response effect by requiring a third time longer than the second time (for example, execution time TA2 in FIG. 101(a)). ,
When the effect means executes the first operation response effect taking the third time (hereinafter referred to as the third case), the effect means takes the second time and executes the first operation response effect. There is a high possibility that the player will be more advantageous than when one operation response effect is executed (hereinafter referred to as the fourth case) (for example, FIG. 101 (a), etc.),
This is the fourth preferred configuration.

According to the fourth preferable configuration, since the execution time of the first operation response effect is lengthened, it is possible to concentrate on the timing of the first operation.

In the fourth preferred configuration,
The production means includes display means (for example, production image display device 157, display, etc.),
The first effect is a display effect in which a cursor display (for example, the cursor display in FIGS. 102 and 103) moves on a route including the target display,
The fourth case is a case where the cursor display position is the first position (for example, panel FP, area R1, etc.) and the first operation is received,
The third case is a case where the cursor display position is the second position (for example, panel NP, line TL, etc.) and the first operation is accepted,
The second position is closer to the target display than the first position,
This is the fifth preferred configuration.

According to the fifth preferred configuration, it is possible to make the player concentrate on performing the first operation at a position close to the target display.

In the first basic configuration, first preferred configuration, second preferred configuration, third preferred configuration, fourth preferred configuration, or fifth preferred configuration,
The rendering means performs a third operation response rendering when a third operation (for example, a third stop operation, etc.) is received after the first time has elapsed from the second operation in the second case. (For example, a panel erasing effect based on the third stop operation, etc.) can be executed,
After receiving the second operation before the first time elapses from the first operation in the first case, the effect means elapses the first time from the second operation. Means that does not execute the third operation response effect if the third operation is received before
This is the sixth preferred configuration.

According to the sixth preferred configuration, it is possible to make the player firmly confirm the first operation response effect.

In the sixth preferred configuration,
After receiving the second operation before the first time elapses from the first operation in the first case, the effect means elapses the first time from the second operation. Execution of the first operation response effect may be terminated before
This is the seventh preferred configuration.

According to the seventh preferred configuration, it is possible to carefully operate the operating means.

The first basic configuration, the first preferred configuration, the second preferred configuration, the third preferred configuration, the fourth preferred configuration, the fifth preferred configuration, the sixth preferred configuration, or in a seventh preferred configuration,
The game table is a slot machine,
This is the eighth preferred configuration.

According to the eighth preferred configuration, the above effects can be applied to slot machines.

The first basic configuration, the first preferred configuration, the second preferred configuration, the third preferred configuration, the fourth preferred configuration, the fifth preferred configuration, the sixth preferred configuration, or in a seventh preferred configuration,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
This is the ninth preferred configuration.

According to the ninth preferred configuration, the above effects can be applied to the pachinko machine.
(2) As described above, according to the gaming machine (eg, slot machine 100, pachinko machine, game machine, etc.) of the above-described embodiment (eg, Example L1),
Operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, operation buttons such as stop buttons 137 to 139, main control unit 300, production buttons, and chance buttons);
Effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, reels 110-112, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 336 , 420, etc.) and
A game machine comprising
The directing means is
First effect means (for example, first sub-control means 400, second sub-control means 500, effect image display device 158, etc.) capable of executing a first response effect (for example, panel erasing effect, etc.);
Second effect means (for example, main control unit 300, reels 110 to 112, etc.) capable of executing a second response effect (for example, stopping reels 110 to 112);
with
The effect means executes both the first response effect and the second response effect when the operation means receives a first operation (for example, a first stop operation, a second stop operation, etc.). There is a case (hereinafter referred to as the first case),
The effect means is such that the operation means performs a second operation (for example, if the first operation is the first stop operation, the second stop operation; if the first operation is the second stop operation, the first stop operation, etc.). ) is received, there is a case where only the second response effect is executed (hereinafter referred to as the second case) (for example, FIG. 98),
This is the second basic configuration.

According to the second basic configuration, since the response performance can be varied according to the operation of the operating means, it is possible to improve the interest of the player and to execute a new performance that has never existed before. can.

In the above second basic configuration,
The effect means, in the first case, when the second operation is performed before a first time (for example, operation invalid time TB) elapses after the first operation is performed A means for the second case,
This is the tenth preferred configuration.

In addition, in the above second basic configuration,
The effecting means is means for becoming the first case when the first operation is performed before the first time elapses after the second operation is performed in the second case. is
This is the tenth-1 preferred configuration.

According to the tenth preferred configuration or the tenth-1 preferred configuration, when the operation interval between the first operation and the second operation is less than the first time, the first operation and the second Since different response effects can be executed by the operation of , it is possible to provide diverse response effects.

In the tenth preferred configuration or the tenth-1 preferred configuration,
In the first case, the effect means is means for executing at least part of the first response effect in at least part of the first time,
This is the eleventh preferred configuration.

According to the eleventh preferred configuration, it is possible to clearly show the player the first response effect at the first time.

In the eleventh preferred configuration,
Equipped with a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of patterns are applied and driven to rotate,
The operation means are stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and individually stopping the rotation of the reels,
The second effect means are the plurality of reels,
This is the twelfth preferred configuration.

According to the twelfth preferable configuration, the first response effect may or may not be executed in response to the stop operation, but the reels can always be stopped.

In the eleventh preferred configuration or the twelfth preferred configuration,
The effect means is means capable of changing the execution time of the first response effect in accordance with the timing at which the operation means receives the first operation.
This is the thirteenth preferred configuration.

According to the thirteenth preferable configuration, since the execution time of the first response effect is the time intended by the player, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the timing of the first operation.

In the eleventh preferred configuration, the twelfth preferred configuration, or the thirteenth preferred configuration,
The effect means is means capable of changing the first time according to the execution time of the first response effect,
This is the 14th preferred configuration.

According to the fourteenth preferred configuration, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the timing of the second operation as well.

In the eleventh preferred configuration, the twelfth preferred configuration, the thirteenth preferred configuration, or the fourteenth preferred configuration,
The effect means is a means capable of executing the first response effect requiring a second time (for example, execution time TA),
The effect means is a means capable of executing the first response effect by requiring a third time longer than the second time (for example, execution time TA2 in FIG. 101(a)),
When the effect means takes the third time to execute the first response effect (hereinafter referred to as the third case), the effect means takes the second time to execute the first response effect. is more likely to be advantageous to the player than when the response effect is executed (hereinafter referred to as the fourth case) (for example, FIG. 101 (a), etc.),
This is the fifteenth preferred configuration.

According to the fifteenth preferable configuration, since the execution time of the first response effect is lengthened, it is possible to concentrate on the timing of the first operation.

In the fifteenth preferred configuration above,
The production means includes display means (for example, production image display device 157, display, etc.),
The effect means is a means capable of executing a display effect in which a cursor display (for example, the cursor display in FIGS. 102 and 103, etc.) moves on a path including the target display,
The fourth case is a case where the first operation is accepted while the cursor display position is the first position (for example, panel FP, area R1, etc.) during execution of the display effect,
The third case is a case where the first operation is received while the display effect is being executed and the cursor is displayed at a second position (for example, panel NP, line TL, etc.),
the second position is closer to the target display than the first position;
This is the sixteenth preferred configuration.

According to the sixteenth preferred configuration, it is possible to make the player concentrate on performing the first operation at a position close to the target display.
(3) As described above, according to the gaming machine (eg, slot machine 100) of the above-described embodiment (eg, Example M1),
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
Stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
Internal winning result determination means (eg, main control unit 300, internal winning combination lottery processing S105, etc.) for determining the result of internal winning based on lottery information;
Stop control means (for example, main control unit 300, reel stop data selection processing S106, reel stop control processing S108, etc.);
Notification means capable of executing predetermined notification (for example, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, speakers 272, 277, effect image display device 157, various lamps 336, 420, etc.) ,
Effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, speakers 272, 277, effect image display device 157, various lamps 336, 420, etc.) ,
A game machine comprising
The notification means is means capable of executing notification regarding a first instruction (e.g., instruction to stop the symbol corresponding to BB1) in a first state (e.g., BB1 internal winning state);
the first state is a state in which a first result (for example, BB1) is internally won by the internal winning result determining means;
The first instruction can stop the first symbol (eg, BB1 symbol) among the stop modes including the first symbol combination (eg, symbol combination corresponding to BB1) corresponding to the first result. is an instruction indicating that
The effect means performs a first symbol stop effect (e.g., " It is a means that can execute voice output such as "I did it",
The effect means, when the notification means executes notification regarding the first instruction, executes the first symbol stop effect more than when the notification means does not execute notification regarding the first instruction. is a means with a high probability of
This is the third basic configuration.

According to this third basic configuration, when the first instruction is executed, the probability of executing the first symbol stop effect is higher than when the first instruction is not executed, so the effect consistency can be improved, and a novel production that has not existed in the past can be executed.

In the third basic configuration above,
The notification means is means capable of executing notification regarding a second instruction (for example, an instruction to stop the watermelon pattern) in the first state,
the second instruction is an instruction to prompt the player to stop and display a symbol (for example, a watermelon symbol) that corresponds to the first result and is different from the first symbol combination;
When the notification regarding the first instruction is not executed, including the case where the notification means executes the notification regarding the second instruction (for example, FIG. 105 (b), (c), etc.),
This is the seventeenth preferred configuration.

According to the seventeenth preferred configuration, no instruction information that is disadvantageous to the player is given.

In the seventeenth preferred configuration,
The notification means executes notification regarding the second instruction until a stopping operation (for example, a third stopping operation) is performed on a reel to be stopped last (for example, a third stop reel) among the plurality of reels. do,
This is the eighteenth preferred configuration.

According to the eighteenth preferable configuration, the player can understand that the combination corresponding to the different symbols can be arranged.

In the third basic configuration, the seventeenth preferred configuration, or the eighteenth preferred configuration,
When the certain symbol (for example, BB1 symbol) is stop-displayed on a reel other than the certain reel among the plurality of reels, the effect means performs a second symbol stop effect (for example, "Let's go!"). such as voice output) is a viable means,
The effect means, when the notification means executes the notification regarding the first instruction, and when the notification means does not execute the notification regarding the first instruction, among the plurality of reels Means capable of executing the second symbol stop effect (for example, FIG. 108) on reels other than the first stopped reel (for example, second stop reel, third stop reel),
This is the 19th preferred configuration.

According to the nineteenth preferred configuration, for example, the pattern stop effect is executed also in the second stop operation and the third stop operation, so the interest can be improved.

In the third basic configuration, the seventeenth preferred configuration, the eighteenth preferred configuration, or the nineteenth preferred configuration,
The stop control means is capable of stop-displaying the first symbol combination even when the notification means does not perform notification regarding the first instruction in the first state (for example, FIG. 105(a), etc.)
This is the twentieth preferred configuration.

According to the twentieth preferred configuration, even if the first instruction is not executed, the first symbol combination can be stop-displayed at one's own will, so the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In the third basic configuration, the seventeenth preferred configuration, the eighteenth preferred configuration, the nineteenth preferred configuration, or the twentieth preferred configuration,
The probability that the first symbol stop effect is executed when the notification means does not execute the notification regarding the first instruction is 0.
This is the 20th-1 preferred configuration.
(4) As described above, according to the gaming machine (eg, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (eg, Example M1),
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
Stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
Internal winning result determination means (eg, main control unit 300, internal winning combination lottery processing S105, etc.) for determining the result of internal winning based on lottery information;
Stop control means (for example, main control unit 300, reel stop data selection processing S106, reel stop control processing S108, etc.);
Effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, speakers 272, 277, effect image display device 157, various lamps 336, 420, etc.) ,
A game table comprising
The effect means is a means capable of executing a second symbol stop effect (e.g., voice output such as "Ichikoku") in the first state (e.g., BB1 internal winning state),
The effect means is a means capable of executing the second symbol stop effect (e.g., voice output such as "Ichikoku") in a second state (e.g., BB2 internal winning state),
the first state is a state in which a first result (for example, BB1) is internally won by the internal winning result determining means;
the second state is a state in which a second result (for example, BB2) is internally won by the internal winning result determining means;
The effect means selects the first symbol (for example, BB1 symbol) among the stop modes including the first symbol combination (for example, symbol combination corresponding to BB1) corresponding to the first result in the first state. ) is stop-displayed on the first reel (for example, the left reel 110) of the plurality of reels, means for executing the second symbol stop effect,
The effect means selects the second symbol (eg, BB2 symbol) among the stop modes including the second symbol combination (eg, symbol combination corresponding to BB1) corresponding to the second result in the second state. ) is stop-displayed on the second reel (for example, the middle reel 111) of the plurality of reels, a means for executing the second symbol stop effect,
This is the fourth basic configuration.

According to the fourth basic configuration, the symbols constituting the first symbol combination or the symbols constituting the second symbol combination are stopped and displayed on different reels to execute the second symbol stop effect. Therefore, it may be possible to specify the result of internal winning by grasping the stop reel in the second symbol stop effect. In other words, it is possible to execute a novel effect that has never existed before.

Further, according to the gaming machine (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, Example M1),
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
Stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
Internal winning result determination means (eg, main control unit 300, internal winning combination lottery processing S105, etc.) for determining the result of internal winning based on lottery information;
Stop control means (for example, main control unit 300, reel stop data selection processing S106, reel stop control processing S108, etc.);
Effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, speakers 272, 277, effect image display device 157, various lamps 336, 420, etc.) , and
A game table comprising
The effect means is a means capable of executing a second symbol stop effect (e.g., voice output such as "Ichikoku") in the first state (e.g., BB1 internal winning state),
The effect means is a means capable of executing a third pattern stop effect (for example, outputting a sound such as "Let's go") in the first state,
the first state is a state in which a first result (for example, BB1) is internally won by the internal winning result determining means;
The effect means selects a first symbol among the stop modes including a first symbol combination (eg, a symbol combination corresponding to BB1) corresponding to the first result (eg, BB1) in the first state. means for executing the second symbol stop effect when (for example, BB1 symbol) is stop-displayed on the first reel (for example, left reel 110) of the plurality of reels,
The effect means produces the third symbol stop effect when the first symbol is stop-displayed on a third reel (for example, the right reel 112) of the plurality of reels in the first state. is the means to carry out
This is the fifth basic configuration.

According to the fifth basic configuration, different symbol stop effects are executed according to the reels on which the symbols constituting the first symbol combination are stop-displayed, so that the symbol stop effects are varied according to the stop reels. be able to. In other words, it is possible to execute a novel effect that has never existed before.

In the fourth basic configuration or the fifth basic configuration,
The effect means produces the second symbol based on a stop operation (for example, a first stop operation) for stopping a first reel (for example, a first stop reel) of the plurality of reels in the first state. It is a means that can execute the stop production,
This is the 21st preferred configuration.

According to the twenty-first preferred configuration, it is possible to grasp that the first result is internally won at the time of the first stop operation.

In the fourth basic configuration above,
The effect means is a means capable of executing a third pattern stop effect (for example, outputting a sound such as "Let's go") in the first state,
The effect means produces the third symbol stop effect when the first symbol is stop-displayed on a third reel (for example, the right reel 112) of the plurality of reels in the first state. is a means of carrying out
The effect means stops the third symbol when the second symbol is stop-displayed on the third reel (for example, the right reel 112) of the plurality of reels in the second state. is a means of carrying out the performance,
This is the 22nd preferred configuration.

According to the twenty-second preferred configuration, the same symbol stop effect is executed for the same reel even if the internal winning results are different, so the symbol stop effect can be shared.

In the twenty-second preferred configuration,
The effect means provides the third symbol stop effect based on a stop operation (for example, a first stop operation, a second stop operation, or a third stop operation) for stopping one of the plurality of reels. is a viable means of
This is the 23rd preferred configuration.

According to the twenty-third preferred configuration, the third symbol stop effect can be executed for any stop operation, so that the sense of anticipation for each stop operation can be improved.

In the 22nd preferred configuration or the 23rd preferred configuration,
A notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, the effect image display device 157, etc.) is provided,
The notification means is means capable of executing notification regarding a first instruction (for example, an instruction to stop the symbol corresponding to BB1) in the first state,
The notification means is means capable of executing notification regarding a second instruction (for example, an instruction to stop the symbol corresponding to BB2) in the second state,
the first instruction is an instruction to prompt the player to stop and display the first symbol combination corresponding to the first result;
The second instruction is an instruction to prompt the player to stop and display the second symbol combination corresponding to the second result.
This is the twenty-fourth preferred configuration.

According to the twenty-fourth preferred configuration, since an instruction is issued according to the internal winning result, consistency of presentation can be enhanced.

<Other game machines>
In the above-described embodiment, the slot machine 100 using medals (coins) as game media is shown as an example of the game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and game balls (for example, pachinko balls) are used in the game. It can be applied to slot machines, pachinko machines, arranged ball game machines, Jankyu game machines, smart balls, casino machines, etc., which are used as media.

For example, a pachinko machine consists of "a launching device that shoots game balls into a predetermined game area, a start winning hole configured to allow the game balls fired from the launching device to enter, and a game in which a ball enters the start winning hole. Detecting means for detecting a ball, payout means for paying out a game ball when the detecting means detects the game ball (or awarding means for awarding a value equivalent to the game ball), and predetermined patterns (identification information) are varied. A pachinko machine equipped with a variable display device for displaying, and triggered by the detection of a game ball by a detection means, the variable display device changes the pattern and then stops displaying to announce the transition of the game state. There may be.

The slot machine may be a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals. In this case, the game medium includes electronic data corresponding to medals. Input is from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device with a function that can store the number of lent medals by an electronic method or a function that can store the number of medals won by an electronic method) , includes inputting digitized data, and paying out game media includes outputting digitized data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiments of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. Modifications can be made and those involving such variations and modifications are also intended to be within the scope of the present invention. In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the invention. It is not limited to

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

In the slot machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of reels, into which a predetermined number of game media are inserted and on which a plurality of types of symbols are respectively applied, start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the receipt of the rotation start instructing operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of wins is determined by a lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instructing operation, If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game is finished, and if not, the game medium is discarded. It is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

Next, the slot machine of this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 109 to 117. FIG. 109 to 117 are used only in the description of this embodiment in principle, and even if overlapping codes are shown in other drawings, the description of this embodiment will be 109 to 117 have priority. Also, each example of this embodiment and each example of another embodiment can be applied in combination with each other.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 109 corresponds to an example of the game table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown) are housed in the center of the main body 101 and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided. and a light-receiving portion, a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line. The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 114 to be activated.

The notification lamp 123 informs the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in an internal winning combination lottery, which will be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. It's a lamp to let you know. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment lights up until the bonus game ends after the bonus notification for notifying the bonus determination. Note that the notification lamp 123 may be lit before the bonus is announced (during the bonus or just before the bonus is announced). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The bet button 132 also functions as an effect button that can start a certain effect when an operation is received. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as the production button 132 .

The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation executing device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push-down switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 110 to 112. .

More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped.

Light emitters 137a, 138a and 139a are provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139. When the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitters 137a, 138a and 139a are turned on. In addition to notifying the player of the change, the light may also be turned on when performing various notifications described later.

Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be called the first stop reel, the reel to be stopped by the second stop operation may be called the second stop reel, and the reel to be stopped by the third stop operation may be called the third stop reel.

Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137-139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110-112 is called the operation order or the pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order of the stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push".

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the AT system game state of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can recognize the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190 .

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. An upper lamp 142 (a first upper lamp 142a and a second upper lamp 142b shown in FIG. 112, etc.) provided on the upper part of the front door 102 and side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 make the game exciting. In addition to being a decorative lamp, it may be turned on when performing various notifications to be described later.

A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) changes to the front of the slot machine 100 (game display). (user side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of this embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information about the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139, etc.), and will be described later. It may be displayed when performing various notifications to be performed.

It should be noted that, even if the display device is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen is rectangular, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Note that the notification lamp 123 and the high-navigation state lamp 190 notify the predetermined information by lighting the lamps, but the manner of notification is not limited to the lighting of the lamps. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a partial area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a full liquid crystal slot machine, the area near the reels 110 to 112 may be used). In the following description, the lighting of the notification lamp 123 or the high-navigation state lamp 190 is meant to include notification by other production devices (for example, a display device, etc.) having the same function.

<Inside the housing>
FIG. 110 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. The main body 101 is a box-shaped body surrounded by an upper plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a lower plate 264 and a rear plate 242, and having an open front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board housing case 210 containing a main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242. Three reels 110-112 are arranged below. On the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the left side plate 260, a first sub control board housing the first sub control board constituting the first sub control unit is stored. A case 220 is provided. In addition, an external centralized terminal board 248 connected to the main control board and outputting information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in the bucket) is disposed on the lower plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is arranged, and a power switch 244 is arranged in front of the power supply device 252 . The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate when the door is closed.

The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies power to each of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, etc., which will be described later. Supplied to the control unit and each device. In addition, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) is provided for supplying power to predetermined parts (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after external power is cut off. there is

A medal auxiliary storage box 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal dispensing device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind it (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting a power cord 265 , and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101 . there is

The front door 102 is hinged to the side plate 260 on the left side of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276. Above the liquid crystal display device 157, a production device 160 and a production control board (illustrated) for controlling the production device 160 are provided. omitted), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. Below the liquid crystal display device 157, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting inserted medals, and a path 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals onto the medal receiving tray 161. there is Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 180 .

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control part>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and stopping of the reels. A ROM 306 for storing positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A WDT (watchdog timer) 314 is mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a random number generation circuit 316 that is activated when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). ).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110, index sensor of the reel 111, index sensor of the reel 112, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detects a put operation when The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the respective reels 110 to 112. Each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, the L become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (win line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, accumulated number display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 for driving the indicator 126, the payout number indicator 127, and the high navigation status lamp 190) is provided.

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output. In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 detects that the voltage value of the power supply is a predetermined value (this embodiment). 9v), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. Signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on the control commands. there is This basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. are doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various displays, and the like. are provided.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is connected to various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input/output interface. 123, etc.) are connected.

A drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163 is provided in the first sub-control section 400, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. A timer 512 is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The second sub-controller 500 also has a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the second sub-controller 500 as a whole, image display data, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 516 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Error display/overview during reel rotation>
Next, an overview of error display during reel rotation will be described.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 109) includes notification means, and the notification means detects when the second error is detected in the first period. a first error annunciation in which the detected error is not identifiable as the second error, and during a second time period after the first time period, the detected error is the second error; A second error notification that can be identified as an error can be executed.

Here, the "informing means" according to the present invention means means capable of informing, for example, display means capable of informing an error by display (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 109), , sound output means (in this example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 111) capable of announcing errors by sound, and light emitting means (in this example, a first upper part shown in FIG. 112) capable of announcing errors by emitting light. In addition to the lamp 142a and the second upper lamp 142b, the side lamp 144, the light emitters 137a, 138a, and 139a of the stop buttons 137 to 139, the backlight of each reel 110 to 112), and the error notification due to the movement of the movable body. Possible movable means (reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 109 in this example) and the like correspond.

Errors that can occur in slot machines include, for example, door open errors, hopper empty errors, medal insertion errors 1-4, medal payout errors 1-3, overflow errors, RAM defects, winning errors, and the like.

The door open error is an error that notifies the opening of the door of the gaming machine, occurs when the front door 102 is opened, and is resolved when the front door 102 is closed. A hopper empty error is a payout error related to the payout of medals, and occurs when the number of medals stored in the hopper accommodated inside the main body 101 falls below a prescribed number, and the prescribed number of medals or more is delivered to the hopper. Resolved by supplementing.

Medal insertion error 1 occurs when the inserted medals are accumulated, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is received after removing the cause of the error. Medal insertion error 2 occurs when the number of inserted medals exceeds a specified number, and can be resolved by changing the set value or clearing the RAM.

Medal insertion error 3 occurs when either insertion sensor 1 or insertion sensor 2 is turned on other than during medal insertion processing. This occurs when the path does not pass normally, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error.

Medal payout error 1 occurs when no medals are paid out for a certain period of time when the medal payout device is driven, medal payout error 2 occurs when medals remain while the medal payout device is driven, and medal payout error 3 occurs. occurs when either the payout sensor 1 or payout sensor 2 is turned on other than during medal payout processing, and both are resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error. .

The overflow abnormality occurs when the overflow terminal of the medal auxiliary storage box is turned on, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error. A RAM failure occurs when an abnormality is detected by checking the RAM, and is resolved when an operation of the error release switch is accepted. The winning abnormality occurs when a winning symbol different from the winning determined by the internal lottery wins after the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and is canceled when the operation of the error release switch is accepted.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to slot machines, and can also be applied to pachinko machines. Errors that can occur in a pachinko machine include, for example, lower tray full error, payout device error, overpayment error, illegal payout error, main control unit communication error, magnetic abnormality error, magnetic field abnormality error, frame open error, RAM clear error , impact sensor errors, etc. These errors are also resolved when the operation of the error release switch is received after removing the cause of the error.

Further, the “first period” according to the present invention is, for example, the period of one game, and as a specific example, after the reels 110 to 112 start rotating by pressing the start lever 135, the stop button 137 139 until the reels 110 to 112 stop rotating. In addition, it is preferable that the game cannot proceed until the second error is resolved in the second period after the first period.

Further, the "first error notification" is an error notification in which it is impossible to specify that the detected error is the second error. "An error has occurred", "Anomaly detected", "Please call the staff", "Please clear the error", etc.

In addition, the "second error notification" is a notification that can identify that the detected error is the second error. , "Error code: E3" display and voice), and notifications that suggest the location of the error (e.g., "Please check the medal selector", "Door is open", etc.). do.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine and pachinko machine shown in FIG. 109) includes display means, and the display means is capable of displaying a first display showing game information, means capable of displaying a first error display, the first error display being a display executed when a second error is detected during the first period, and the display means displaying the first When the second error is detected during the execution of the first display during the period, the player can visually recognize the first display even if the first error display is executed.

Here, the "display means" according to the present invention means means capable of displaying the first display, the first error display, and the second error display, for example, the liquid crystal display shown in FIG. Apparatus 157 etc. correspond.

Further, the "first display" according to the present invention is a display showing game information, for example, an operation instruction display (operation navigation) showing information for instructing the operation of the player, or Display of the total number of acquired game media, display of the number of AT sets, display of the initial number of AT games, display of the number of AT additional games, display of the number of times operation navigation has been performed, display of the number of times the player has This includes display of acquired points and items, display of the number of game media paid out, and the like.

Further, the "first error display" according to the present invention is a display executed when the second error is detected in the first period, for example, "an error has occurred", " This applies to displays such as "Anomaly detected", "Please call the staff", "Please clear the error", etc. Even if the first error display is executed, the player can still see the first display. Therefore, display having transparency is preferable.

Further, the "second error display" according to the present invention is a display that is executed when a second error is detected during the first period. For example, a display representing an error name or error code ( For example, displays such as "error in the number of medals passed" and "error code: E3"), and displays suggesting where the error occurred (for example, displays such as "please check the medal selector" and "the door is open"). ) applies, and execution of the second error display makes the first display invisible, preferably the display is non-transmissive (non-transmissive).

<Error display during reel rotation/Embodiment 1>
Next, Example 1 of error display during reel rotation will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. FIG.

FIG. 112 is a diagram showing an example of the notification mode of the notification means when a second error occurs in a certain game and the first error notification and the second error notification are executed, and FIG. It is a diagram showing a flow from lever-on to error cancellation when a second error occurs in a certain game and the first error notification and the second error notification are executed.

Here, the “display device” in FIG. 113 is display means capable of announcing errors by display (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 112), and the “speaker” is capable of announcing errors by sound. Sound output means (in this example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 111), and lamp 1 and lamp 2 are light emitting means (in this example, speaker 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 112) capable of emitting (outputting) light. 1 upper lamp 142a and second upper lamp 142b), which are one of the notification means. Also, the payout number display is payout display means (in this example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 109).

Figure 112 (a) and Figure 113 (a) is a state in which the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received in the AT game.

In this state, when the start lever 135 is pushed down, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating and the AT effect is executed. In the AT effect of this example, the display area of the liquid crystal display device (display means) 157 includes a background display including a character image, etc., and an operation instruction display (first display, first game information) for instructing the player's operation. A display) SD and a total win number display (first display, second game information display) GD indicating the total number of medals won by the player are displayed.

Also, from the speaker (sound output means), background sound (BGM) corresponding to the AT production is output, and from the first upper lamp 142a and the second upper lamp 142b (light emitting means), in a normal light emission mode corresponding to the AT production. emit light.

Figures 112(b) and 113(b) show that a medal passing number error (second error), which is one of the selector errors, occurred during reel rotation, and the first error notification was started. state.

Since this state is during the rotation of the reels and is within the first period (in this example, the period of one game), the detected error is the number of medals passed error (second error). Execute an unspecified first error notification.

In the first error notification of this example, as the first error display, a translucent background image with a character string "An error has occurred" is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device (display means) 157. and light is emitted from the second upper lamp 142b (light emitting means) in an error light emission mode.

On the other hand, background display and operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD and total winning number display (first display, second game information display) by liquid crystal display device (display means) 157 ) GD display, background sound output by the speaker (sound output means), and light emission in the normal light emission mode by the first upper lamp 142a (light emission means) continue.

According to this example, the first error notification is a notification in which it is impossible to specify that the detected error is the second error (in this example, the error in the number of medals passed). If the fraudulent person who attempted to commit the fraud causes a second error, an error notification that does not specify the second error can make the fraudulent person feel uneasy and discourage the fraudulent act. Sometimes we can. Also, when a second error occurs while the player is playing a game, the player only needs to know that some kind of error has occurred in order to call the store clerk. You may be able to call a store clerk.

Also, the first effect means (in this example, the first upper lamp 142a) detects a second error (in this example, an error in the number of medals passed) while executing the first effect in the first period. In this case, since the first effect is continuously executed, the player can continue playing the game even under the condition that the error is notified, and the player's desire to play is limited by the occurrence of the error. can be prevented.

In addition, the second effect means (in this example, the second upper lamp 142b) detects a second error (in this example, an error in the number of medals passed) during execution of the second effect in the first period. In this case, since the second effect is not executed, there is a case where the clerk who is nearby can notice the occurrence of the error before the player calls the clerk of the game parlor, and the error must be dealt with quickly. can be done.

In addition, when the notification means (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 and the speaker) detects a second error (in this example, an error in the number of medals passed) during execution of the third effect during the first period. Since the third performance is continuously executed, the player can continue playing the game even under the condition that the error is reported, and the player's willingness to play is prevented from being limited by the occurrence of the error. be able to.

Also, even if the first error display (in this example, a translucent background image with a character string "An error has occurred" is applied) is executed, the first display (in this example, operation instruction display Since the player can visually recognize the SD and the total acquired number display GD), the player can continue the game even under the condition that the error occurs, and the player's willingness to play is limited by the occurrence of the error. can be prevented.

Also, the second error (in this example, the number of medals passed error) is detected while the sound output means (in this example, the speaker) is outputting a certain sound (in this example, background sound) during the first period. In this case, since the certain sound is continuously output, the player can continue the game while listening to the sound even under the condition that the error occurs, and the player's desire to play is limited by the occurrence of the error. can be prevented.

FIG. 112(c) and FIG. 113(c) show a state in which the second error notification is started, triggered by the end of the game (completion of the third stop operation) in which the medal passing number error (second error) has occurred. is.

This state is a state in which the reels are stopped, and since it is within the second period after the first period, it is possible to identify that the detected error is the medal number error (second error). Execute the second error notification.

In the second error notification of this example, as the second error display, an opaque (non-transparent ) By displaying the background image, the operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD and the total number of wins display (first display, second game information display) GD are invisible. It becomes possible.

In this way, in the second period, the second error display causes the operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD and total win number display (first display, second game information display) to be displayed. Display) Since the display of GD becomes invisible, the game cannot proceed until the second error is resolved.

According to this example, in the second period after the first period, the game cannot proceed until the second error (in this example, the error in the number of medals passed) is resolved. During the period, the player can call the store clerk to solve the error.

In addition to the second upper lamp 142b (light emitting means), the first upper lamp 142a (light emitting means) also emits light in an error light emission mode, and an error sound is output from the speaker (sound output means). , the payout number display 127 displays an error code (E2 in this example) corresponding to the medal number error (second error).

According to this example, in the second period after the first period, the first display (in this example, the operation instruction display SD and the total acquired number display GD) becomes invisible. During the period, the player can continue playing the game, and during the second period, the player can call the store clerk to deal with the error.

Also, the second error (in this example, the number of medals passed error) is detected while the sound output means (in this example, the speaker) is outputting a certain sound (in this example, background sound) during the first period. In this case, since the error sound is output without outputting the certain sound during the second period, the player can continue playing the game during the first period, but during the second period, By outputting an error sound, the player can call a store clerk at the game parlor to deal with the error.

FIG. 112(d) and FIG. 113(d) show the state in which the medal passing number error (second error) has been resolved and the error has been cancelled.

In the same state, the AT effect is resumed when the error is resolved. In the AT effect after the restart, the background display and the total winning number display (first display, second game information display) GD are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device (display means) 157, and the speaker (sound output means) is displayed. ) outputs a background sound corresponding to the AT effect, and the first upper lamp 142a and the second upper lamp 142b (light emitting means) emit light in a normal light emission mode corresponding to the AT effect. In addition, the payout number display 127 displays the number of payout medals (0 in this example) corresponding to the winning combination (Bell in this example).

<Error display during reel rotation/Embodiment 2>
Next, a second embodiment of error display during reel rotation will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115. FIG.

FIG. 114 is a diagram showing an example of the notification mode of the notification means when the third error occurs in a certain game and the first error notification and the third error notification are executed, and FIG. It is a diagram showing a flow from lever-on to error cancellation when a third error occurs in a certain game and the first error notification and the third error notification are executed.

Note that the second embodiment differs from the first embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113 only in the types of errors that occur, so description of other contents will be omitted.

114(b) and 115(b), a medal passing time error (third error), which is one of the selector errors, occurred during reel rotation, and the first error notification was started. state.

Since this state is during rotation of the reel and within the first period (in this example, the period of one game), the detected error is the medal passing time error (third error). Execute an unspecified first error notification.

In the first error notification of this example, as the first error display, a translucent background image with a character string "An error has occurred" is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device (display means) 157. and light is emitted from the second upper lamp 142b (light emitting means) in an error light emission mode.

On the other hand, background display and operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD and total winning number display (first display, second game information display) by liquid crystal display device (display means) 157 ) GD display, background sound output by the speaker (sound output means), and light emission in the normal light emission mode by the first upper lamp 142a (light emission means) continue.

According to this example, the first error notification is a notification in which it is not possible to specify that the detected error is the second error (in this example, the medal passing time error), so that the gaming machine is notified of fraudulent activity. If the fraudulent person who attempted to commit the fraud causes a second error, an error notification that does not specify the second error can make the fraudulent person feel uneasy and discourage the fraudulent act. Sometimes you can. Also, when a second error occurs while the player is playing a game, the player only needs to know that some kind of error has occurred in order to call the store clerk. You may be able to call a store clerk.

Also, the first effect means (in this example, the first upper lamp 142a) detects a second error (in this example, a medal passing time error) while executing the first effect in the first period. In this case, since the first effect is continuously executed, the player can continue playing the game even under the condition that the error is notified, and the player's desire to play is limited by the occurrence of the error. can be prevented.

Also, the second effect means (in this example, the second upper lamp 142b) detects a second error (in this example, a medal passing time error) while executing the second effect in the first period. In this case, since the second effect is not executed, there is a case where the clerk who is nearby can notice the occurrence of the error before the player calls the clerk of the game parlor, and the error must be dealt with quickly. can be done.

In addition, when the notification means (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 and the speaker) detects a second error (in this example, a medal passing time error) during execution of the third effect in the first period Since the third performance is continuously executed, the player can continue playing the game even under the condition that the error is reported, and the player's willingness to play is prevented from being limited by the occurrence of the error. be able to.

Also, even if the first error display (in this example, a semi-transparent background image with a character string "An error has occurred" is applied) is executed, the first display (in this example, the operation instruction display SD Since the player can visually recognize the display of the total number of winnings (GD), the player can continue the game even under the condition that the error occurs, and the player's willingness to play is limited due to the occurrence of the error. can be prevented.

Further, the second error (medal passing time error in this example) is detected while the sound output means (speaker in this example) is outputting a certain sound (background sound in this example) during the first period. In this case, since the certain sound is continuously output, the player can continue the game while listening to the sound even under the condition that the error occurs, and the player's desire to play is limited by the occurrence of the error. can be prevented.

In addition, the occurrence of the second error (in this example, the number of medals passed error) and the third error (in this example, the medal passing time error) can be notified by the common (same mode) first error notification. can improve convenience.

FIG. 114(c) and FIG. 115(c) are states in which the third error notification is started, triggered by the end of the game (completion of the third stop operation) in which the medal passing time error (third error) has occurred. is.

This state is a state in which the reels are stopped, and since it is within the second period after the first period, it is possible to identify that the detected error is the medal passing time error (third error). Execute the third error notification.

In the third error notification of this example, as the third error display, an opaque (non-transparent ) By displaying the background image, the operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD and the total number of wins display (first display, second game information display) GD are invisible. It becomes possible.

In this way, in the second period, the third error display causes the operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD and the total winning number display (first display, second game information display). Display) Since the display of GD becomes invisible, the game cannot proceed until the third error is resolved.

According to this example, in the second period after the first period, the game cannot proceed until the third error (in this example, the medal passing time error) is resolved. During the period, the player can call the store clerk to solve the error.

In addition to the second upper lamp 142b (light emitting means), the first upper lamp 142a (light emitting means) also emits light in an error light emission mode, and an error sound is output from the speaker (sound output means). , the payout number display 127 displays an error code (E3 in this example) corresponding to the medal passing time error (third error).

According to this example, in the second period after the first period, the first display (in this example, the operation instruction display SD and the total acquired number display GD) becomes invisible. During the period, the player can continue playing the game, and during the second period, the player can call the store clerk to deal with the error.

<Error display during reel rotation/Embodiment 3>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117, a third embodiment of error display during reel rotation will be described.

FIG. 116 is a diagram showing an example of the notification mode of the notification means when the fourth error occurs in a certain game and the fourth error display is executed, and FIG. is a diagram showing a flow from lever-on to error cancellation when error 1 occurs and a fourth error display is executed.

In this example, in order to avoid duplication of explanation, only the contents different from those in the first and second embodiments will be explained.

116(b) and 117(b), during reel rotation, a medal passing number error (fourth error), which is one of the selector errors, occurred, and the first error notification was started. state.

Since this state is during the rotation of the reels and within the first period (in this example, the period of one game), the detected error is the number of medals passed error (fourth error). Execute an unspecified first error notification.

In the first error notification of this example, as the fourth error display, an opaque background image with a character string "selector error" is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device (display means) 157. , the operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD and the display of the total winning number display (first display, second game information display) GD become invisible. Further, the second upper lamp 142b (light emitting means) emits light in an error light emission mode.

On the other hand, output of background sound by the speaker (sound output means) and light emission in the normal light emission mode by the first upper lamp 142a (light emission means) continue.

FIG. 116(c) and FIG. 117(c) are states in which the second error notification is started, triggered by the end of the game (completion of the third stop operation) in which the medal passing number error (fourth error) has occurred. is.

This state is a state in which the reels are stopped, and since it is within the second period after the first period, it is possible to identify that the detected error is the medal number error (fourth error). Execute the second error notification.

In the second error notification of this example, as the second error display, an opaque (transparent By overlapping and displaying the background image without ), operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD, total winning number display (first display, second game information display) GD and the fourth error indication become invisible.

From the fourth error display, which is the first error notification, only the information that "a selector error has occurred" can be obtained, but from the second error display, which is the second error notification, " You can get the information "A medal passing error, which is one of the selector errors, has occurred."

That is, since the second error notification includes error notification with more detailed content than the first error notification, the second error notification provides detailed information about the error (for example, the location of the error, the cause of the error, etc.). , countermeasures, etc.) can be specified, and it is possible to respond appropriately to the error. In addition, after preparing for the occurrence of an error with the first error notification, it is possible to deal with the error with the second error notification, so it is possible to quickly respond to the error. Become.

In addition, in this example, the fourth error display and the second error display provide operation instruction display (first display, first game information display) SD and total win number display (first display, second display). Game information display) Since the display of GD becomes invisible, the game cannot proceed after the occurrence of the fourth error until the fourth error is resolved.

According to this example, after the error occurs, the game cannot proceed until the fourth error (in this example, the error in the number of medals passed) is resolved. It is possible to call a store clerk and resolve the error.

In addition, in the second error notification, in addition to the second upper lamp 142b (light emitting means), the first upper lamp 142a (light emitting means) also emits light in an error light emitting mode, and the speaker (sound output means) outputs an error sound, and the payout number display 127 displays an error code (E2 in this example) corresponding to the medal number error (fourth error).

According to this example, from the first period to the second period, the first display (in this example, the operation instruction display SD and the total acquired number display GD) becomes invisible. From the period to the second period, the player is asked to call the store clerk of the game shop, and the error can be quickly dealt with.

<Error display during reel rotation/Summary>
As described above, the amusement machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 109 or the pachinko machine) includes notifying means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 109 and the speaker 272 shown in FIG. 111). , 277, the first upper lamp 142a and the second upper lamp 142b shown in FIG. 112, the side lamp 144, the light emitters 137a, 138a, and 139a of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the backlight of the reels 110 to 112, FIG. reels 110 to 112 shown in ), wherein the notification means detects a second error (e.g., medal number error) during a first period (e.g., one game period) When the first error notification (e.g., the first error notification shown in FIG. 112 (b)) can be executed, and the second error notification is performed in the second period after the first period (e.g., second error notification shown in FIG. 112(c)), wherein the first error notification is notification that the detected error is the second error and cannot be specified; The gaming machine is characterized in that the second error notification is a notification that can identify that the detected error is the second error.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, the first error notification is a notification in which it is impossible to specify that the detected error is the second error. When a person causes a second error, an error notification that does not specify the second error may make the person uneasy and discourage the person from committing the fraudulent act. Also, when a second error occurs while the player is playing a game, the player only needs to know that some kind of error has occurred in order to call the store clerk. You may be able to call a store clerk.

Further, the first period is a period during which the game can proceed (for example, after the reels 110 to 112 start rotating by pressing the start lever 135, the reels 110 by the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 112 until the rotation stops).

With such a configuration, during the period of one game, an unidentifiable notification is given that the detected error is the second error. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In addition, the first error notification is a notification indicating that an error has been detected (for example, ``an error has occurred'', ``anomaly has been detected'', ``please call a staff member'', ``cancel the error''). Please,” may be displayed or voiced).

With such a configuration, it may be possible to call the store clerk with the minimum necessary information.

Further, the notification means can execute the first error notification when a third error (for example, medal passing time error) is detected during the first period, and after the first period means capable of executing a third error notification during the second period of , and the first error notification is a notification in which it is impossible to specify that the detected error is the third error (for example, FIG. 114(b)), and the third error notification is a notification that can specify that the detected error is the third error (for example, It may be the first error notification shown).

With such a configuration, the occurrence of the second error and the third error can be notified by the common (in the same mode) first error notification, and the convenience can be improved.

Further, the notification means is means including at least display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 109), and the first error notification indicates that the detected error is the second error. The first error notification is notification by an unspecified indication that the detected error is the third error, and the second error notification is an indication that the detected error is the third error. The error is reported by a display capable of specifying that the error is the second error, and the third error report is a report by a display capable of specifying that the detected error is the third error. may

With such a configuration, since the first error notification and the second error notification can be performed using the display means, the error can be noticed more reliably through vision.

The notification means includes sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 111) and light emitting means (for example, first and second upper lamps 142a and 142b, side lamps 144, and a stop button shown in FIG. 112). Illuminators 137a, 138a, 139a of each of 137-139, backlight of each of reels 110-112).

With such a configuration, the error can be more reliably noticed through hearing and sight.

Further, a first effect means capable of executing a first effect (for example, the first upper lamp 142a) is provided, and the first effect means is during the first period during the execution of the first effect. It may be means for continuously executing the first effect when the second error is detected.

With such a configuration, the player can continue playing the game even when the error is being reported, and the player's willingness to play can be prevented from being limited by the occurrence of the error.

Further, a second effect means capable of executing a second effect (for example, a second upper lamp 142b) is provided, and the second effect means is during the second effect during the first period. It may be means for not executing the second effect when the second error is detected.

With such a configuration, there is a case where a store clerk nearby can notice the occurrence of an error before the player calls the store clerk, and the error can be dealt with quickly.

Further, the notifying means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157, the speaker) is a means capable of executing a third effect, and the notifying means is capable of executing the third effect during the first period. It may be means for continuing to execute the third effect when the second error is detected.

With such a configuration, the player can continue playing the game even when the error is being reported, and the player's willingness to play can be prevented from being limited by the occurrence of the error.

Further, the notification means is means for not executing the third effect during the second period when the second error is detected while the third effect is being executed during the first period. may

With such a configuration, it may be possible to call the store clerk of the game parlor by not executing the effect.

Further, when the second error is detected during the second period, the notification means executes the second error notification without going through the execution of the first error notification. may

With such a configuration, it is possible to promptly respond to the error by not performing the first error notification.

In addition, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 109) includes notification means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 109, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. The first upper lamp 142a and the second upper lamp 142b shown in 112, the side lamp 144, the light emitters 137a, 138a and 139a of the stop buttons 137 to 139, the backlights of the reels 110 to 112, and the reel 110 shown in FIG. 112), wherein the notifying means detects the first error notification (for example, the first error notification shown in FIG. 112(b)) can be executed, and a second error notification (for example, FIG. 112(c ) is a means capable of executing a second error notification shown in ), the first error notification is a notification that the detected error is the second error, and the second error notification The error notification is notification capable of specifying that the detected error is the second error, and the second error notification has a larger amount of information than the first error notification. It is a playground to play.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, the first error notification is a notification in which it is impossible to specify that the detected error is the second error. When a person causes a second error, an error notification that does not specify the second error may make the person uneasy and discourage the person from committing the fraudulent act. Also, when a second error occurs while the player is playing a game, the player only needs to know that some kind of error has occurred in order to call the store clerk. You may be able to call a store clerk. Further, since the second error notification has a larger amount of information than the first error notification, after noticing the occurrence of the error by the first error notification, the error is dealt with according to the second error notification having a large amount of information. and respond quickly and appropriately to errors.

Further, the second error notification may be notification including the first error notification.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to call the store clerk with the minimum necessary information.

In addition, the second error notification (for example, an opaque background image with a character string "selector error, number of medals passed error" shown in FIG. 116(c)) is the same as the first error notification (for example, More detailed content than the opaque (non-transparent) background image with the character string "selector error" shown in FIG. Identifiable content) may be included in the error notification.

With such a configuration, it is possible to specify the location of the error by the second error notification, and it is possible to appropriately deal with the error. In addition, after preparing for the occurrence of an error with the first error notification, it is possible to deal with the error with the second error notification, so it is possible to quickly respond to the error. Become. Also, the contents of the corresponding error can be recognized at the timing when the store clerk of the game shop called by the player checks the game machine.

Further, the notification means executes the first error notification when a fourth error (for example, a door open error) is detected during the first period, and executes the first error notification after the first period. Only the first error notification may be continuously executed during the two periods.

With such a configuration, if the player wants to give priority to time, such as when the store is about to close, it may be possible to continue the game in the case of a minor error.

Further, the player can continue playing the game during the second period after the fourth error is detected during the first period, and the second error is detected during the first period. The player may not be able to continue playing the game during the second period of time.

With such a configuration, the game can be continued with respect to minor errors, and the degree of importance of the error can be notified to the player or the store clerk depending on whether or not the game can be continued. can be done.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 109) is a gaming machine having a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and the display means First display (for example, operation instruction display SD and total win number display GD shown in FIGS. 112(a) and 114(a), AT set number display, AT initial game number display, AT additional game number, display of the number of executions of operation navigation, display of points and items acquired by the player, display of the number of game media paid out), and the first display is game information. The display means is a first error display (for example, a translucent display with a character string "An error has occurred" shown in FIGS. 112(b) and 114(b). background image), and the first error display means that the second error (for example, the number of medals passed or the number of medals passed) is displayed during the first period (for example, the period of one game). The first error display is performed when the second error is detected while the display means is performing the first display during the first period. The game machine is characterized in that the player can visually recognize the first display even if the game is played.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, since the player can visually recognize the first display even if the first error display is executed, the player can continue the game even under the condition that the error occurs. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being limited due to the occurrence of an error.

Note that "a player can visually recognize the first display even if the first error display is executed" means that at least a part of the first display is visible. A case in which at least part of one error display overlaps at least part of the first display is also included.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 109) is a gaming machine having a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and the display means First display (for example, operation instruction display SD and total win number display GD shown in FIGS. 112(a) and 114(a), AT set number display, AT initial game number display, AT additional game number, display of the number of executions of operation navigation, display of points and items acquired by the player, display of the number of game media paid out), and the first display is game information. The display means is a first error display (for example, a translucent display with a character string "An error has occurred" shown in FIGS. 112(b) and 114(b). background image), and the first error display means that the second error (for example, the number of medals passed or the number of medals passed) is displayed during the first period (for example, the period of one game). The first error display is performed when the second error is detected while the display means is performing the first display during the first period. that the player can visually recognize the first display even if the error is detected, and the game cannot proceed until the second error is resolved in the second period after the first period. It is a game table characterized by

It should be noted that ``during the second period after the first period, the game cannot proceed until the second error is resolved'' means that the first display overlaps the error display, etc. In addition to the case where it is displayed and the game cannot proceed, the case where all the display areas of the display means are overlapped with an error display etc. and the game cannot proceed, or alternatively (or in addition) , when the operation of the operating means (for example, the stop buttons 137 to 139) becomes invalid and the game cannot proceed, when an error sound is output from the sound output means and the game cannot proceed, or when the light emitting means This also includes the case where light is emitted to indicate an error and the game cannot proceed.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, since the player can visually recognize the first display even if the first error display is executed, the player can continue the game even under the condition that the error occurs. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being limited due to the occurrence of an error. Also, during the second period after the first period, the game cannot proceed until the second error is resolved. It is possible to eliminate the error.

Also, the first display may be invisible during a second period after the first period.

With such a configuration, the player can continue playing the game during the first period, and the player can call the game parlor clerk during the second period to deal with the error. .

Also, the first period may be a period during which a game can proceed.

With such a configuration, at least the game can be continued, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the occurrence of an error.

Further, the game information may be information that instructs the operation of the player.

With such a configuration, the game can be continued based on the game information, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the occurrence of an error.

Further, the first error display is a display having transparency, and the above-mentioned "a player can visually recognize the first display even if the first error display is executed" The first error indication may overlap the first indication.

With such a configuration, while the first error notification is displayed in front, the player can visually recognize the first display in the back, so that the player can play the game even under the condition that the error occurs. The game can be continued, and it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from being limited due to the occurrence of an error.

In addition, the display means can display a second error display (for example, an opaque background image with a character string "Error in the number of passed medals" shown in Figs. 112(c) and 114(c)). and the second error display is non-transparent display, and the second error is detected while the display means is performing the first display during the first period. , the second error display is executed without executing the first error display during the second period, and the above-mentioned "the first display becomes invisible" means that the first The display may be overlapped with the second error display.

With such a configuration, the player can continue playing the game during the first period, but during the second period, the second error display is overlapped before the first display. By doing so, the first display becomes invisible, so that the player can call the store clerk of the game parlor to deal with the error.

Further, sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277) are provided, the sound output means is means capable of outputting a certain sound (for example, background sound), and the sound output means is capable of outputting during the first period When the second error is detected while the certain sound is being output, the certain sound may be continuously output.

With such a configuration, the player can continue the game while listening to the sound even under the condition that the error occurs, and it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being limited by the occurrence of the error. can.

Further, the sound output means is means capable of outputting an error sound, and when the second error is detected while the sound output means is outputting the certain sound during the first period, the The error sound may be output without outputting the certain sound during the second period.

With such a configuration, while the player can continue playing the game during the first period, an error sound is output during the second period, thereby discouraging the player from playing the game parlor. You can call us and deal with the error.

In addition, the configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the gaming machine according to the above embodiment. Therefore, for example, the "first period" and the "second period" according to the present invention are not limited to consecutive periods. When that has elapsed (eg, after 3 seconds have passed since the reels 110-112 have stopped), a second time period may begin.

In addition, the start timing of the second period is not particularly limited, but when game media are to be paid out, a second error notification is sent before paying out in order to prevent fraudulent payouts by fraudulent players. preferably.

In addition, the "notification indicating that an error has been detected" is not limited to display notification (in this example, the display of "an error has occurred"), notification by sound, notification by light emission, notification by movement of the movable body It may be a notification or the like.

Also, "the second error notification has a larger amount of information than the first error notification" means, for example, that there are multiple types of errors classified into multiple categories (insertion error, payout error, winning error, etc.). In this case, in the first error notification, only the error category (e.g., payout error) is notified, and in the second error report, the error category and name (e.g., payout error: medal payout error 1) are notified. case is included.

Also, for example, in the first error notification, only the name of the error (for example, medal payout error 1) is notified, and in the second error report, the error name and cancellation method (for example, medal payout error 1: remove medals , please operate the error release switch).

Also, the game machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one that circulates game balls enclosed in the game machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured on a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub-control unit may be configured to allow two-way communication. good. Further, while bi-directional communication is enabled between the main control section and the first sub-control section, communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be unidirectional communication.

Moreover, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. are not limited to those listed. Further, by applying the content described in one configuration among the multiple configurations described in the embodiments to another configuration, the width of the game may be expanded.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

In the game machine (slot machine in this example) of the present embodiment, a predetermined number of game media are inserted, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols are subjected to a predetermined rotation start instruction operation (for example, described later). When a start lever operation) is received, rotation is started, and based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation (for example, operation by a stop button described later), the propriety of internal winning of multiple types of hands is determined by lottery. Then, each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation, and the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the symbol combination when the plurality of reels stop. This game machine advances a series of games in which if a predetermined payout condition is met, game media are paid out and the game is terminated, and if the game is not met, the game is terminated without paying out the game media.

Next, the slot machine of this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 118 to 122. FIG. 118 to 122 are used only for the description of this embodiment in principle, and even if overlapping codes are shown in other drawings, the description of this embodiment will be 118 to 122 have priority. Also, each example of this embodiment and each example of another embodiment can be applied in combination with each other.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 118 corresponds to an example of the gaming table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown) are housed in the center of the main body 101 and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided. and a light-receiving portion, a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line. The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 114 to be activated.

The notification lamp 123 informs the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in an internal winning combination lottery, which will be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. It's a lamp to let you know. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment lights up until the bonus game ends after the bonus notification for notifying the bonus determination. Note that the notification lamp 123 may be lit before the bonus is announced (during the bonus or just before the bonus is announced). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The bet button 132 also functions as an effect button that can start a certain effect when an operation is received. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as an effect button.

The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation executing device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push-down switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 110 to 112. . More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped.

Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be called the first stop reel, the reel to be stopped by the second stop operation may be called the second stop reel, and the reel to be stopped by the third stop operation may be called the third stop reel.

Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137-139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110-112 is called the operation order or the pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order of the stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be lit to inform the player.

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the AT system game state of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can recognize the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190 .

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals from a medal payout device (not shown) (a device for paying out medals accumulated in a bucket).

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) changes to the front of the slot machine 100 (game display). (user side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

It should be noted that, even if the display device is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen is rectangular, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Note that the notification lamp 123 and the high-navigation state lamp 190 notify the predetermined information by lighting the lamps, but the manner of notification is not limited to the lighting of the lamps. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a partial area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a full liquid crystal slot machine, the area near the reels 110 to 112 may be used). In the following description, the lighting of the notification lamp 123 or the high-navigation state lamp 190 is meant to include notification by other production devices (for example, a display device, etc.) having the same function.

<Refill production / overview>
Next, an overview of the “refill effect” that can be executed by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment (slot machine in this example) provides a first grant effect for granting a privilege, and the first grant effect in the game following the game in which the first grant effect is executed. A second giving effect (refilling effect) of giving the same kind of privilege as the given privilege can be executed. In addition, in the first giving effect and the second giving effect, it is possible to display the privilege display regarding the privilege given to the player.

Here, the "privilege" according to the present invention means a profit advantageous to the player, such as points, items, bonuses, AT, addition of AT games, mini games, payout of game media (medals), Operation navigation, internal winning of prizes, prize winning, special effects, etc. correspond to this. In addition, the "privilege display" according to the present invention is a display related to a privilege granted to a player, for example, a display including points, a display including items, and an operation navigation suggesting an operation mode of operation means. This includes a display including the number of operation instructions indicating the number of executions, a display announcing an AT-additional game, a display announcing the provision of a bonus, and the like.

Examples of the "display including points" include a display including numbers and character strings such as "+10" indicating the number of points given, and a display including numbers and character strings such as "0010/1000" indicating the number of accumulated points. Applies to indications that include In addition, the "display including items" includes, for example, a display including an image showing the given item (for example, an image imitating the appearance of fruits such as bananas, apples, grapes, etc.), and a display including characters indicating the given item. (For example, a display including a character string such as "banana", "apple", "grape", etc.). Further, as the "operation navigation suggesting the operation mode of the operation means", for example, symbols or character strings such as "←", "right center left", "321" suggesting reverse pressing of the stop buttons 137 to 139. For example, "15 times", "●● (* represents 2 times)", etc. Applies to indications that include

<Refill production / Example 1>
Next, with reference to FIG. 119, Example 1 of the “refill effect” executable by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

In this example, in the point specialization state production, the first grant performance and the second grant performance (replacement performance) are executed, and the same type of privilege is performed in the first grant performance and the second grant performance (replacement performance) (in this example, bananas of the first value).

Here, the point-specific state effect is a progress effect that may progress for each game, and in this example, is continuously executed over a plurality of games (at least 10 games), and This is an effect in which items are always given in the game. In addition, the "progress effect" according to the present invention is not limited to this example, and may not be continuous games (may be discontinuous games), and items may not be awarded in any game. There may be.

FIG. 119(a) is a diagram showing items given in the special point state rendering and the points corresponding to each item.

The item in this example is composed of a group consisting of multiple types of points (values). Also, in this example, there are a plurality of types of groups, and one type of group, "banana", is a group (item) to which points (values) of 10, 20, or 30 are given. Another type of group, “apples,” is a group (item) to which points (values) of 30, 40, or 50 are given. is a group (item) to which either 100, 200 or 300 points (value) are given.

The points (second value) that can be given by the item "grape" in this example are either 100, 200, or 300, and any of the points that can be given by the item "apple" (first points of value greater than 30, 40, or 50, which is the value). Needless to say, the type and number of items (groups) and the type and number of points given by each item (group) are not limited to this example.

FIG. 119(b) is a diagram showing an example of the first addition effect in the point specialization state effect in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 119(b)(1) is a state in which the point specialization state effect has been started in an N (N is a positive integer) game, and before the pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 is accepted. .

In this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a display suggesting that the point specialization state effect is being executed (in this example, a display including a character string "point specialization in progress") and a point specialization state A display suggesting the number of remaining games for the effect (in this example, a display including the character string “remaining 10G”) and a point number display indicating the number of points earned by the player (in this example, the character string “0000/1000”) ) is running.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 119(b)(2) is the state after receiving the depression operation of the start lever 135 in the N game.

In this example, N games are started with the pressing operation (lever on) of the start lever 135, and since one game has been completed, the display suggesting the number of remaining games in the point specialization state effect is changed from "remaining 10 G". It is updated to "Remaining 9G".

Also, since the item (privilege) "banana" was granted in the N game, a privilege display SP1 (in this example, displaying an image imitating the appearance of a banana) suggests the item (privilege) granted to the player. running

The method of selecting one item from a plurality of types of items is not particularly limited. You can select items.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 119(b)(3) is the state after receiving the third stop operation in the N game.

In this example, the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 ends the N game, so the privilege display suggests points (privileges) corresponding to the item (privilege) "banana" given to the player. SP2 (in this example, a display including a character string "+10" suggesting that 10 points have been awarded) is executed. Also, since 10 points have been awarded, the point number display indicating the number of points acquired by the player is updated from "0000/1000" to "0010/1000".

In addition, in this example, when the number of points acquired by the player reaches 1000, in the performance (judgment performance) for judging whether or not to shift to AT, so that it is easy to shift to AT (If you win the AT lottery, to make it easier).

The method of selecting one point from a plurality of types of points included in the item is not particularly limited. For example, one point may be selected by lottery. A point may be selected based on

FIG. 119(c) is a diagram showing an example of the second addition effect (refill effect) in the point specialization state effect in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 119(c)(1) is a state in which the point specializing state effect is continued in the N+1 game and before the pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 is accepted.

In this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a display suggesting that the point specialization state effect is being executed (in this example, a display including a character string "point specialization in progress") and a point specialization state A display indicating the number of remaining games in the effect (in this example, a display including the character string "9 G left"), and a point number display indicating the number of points earned by the player (in this example, the character string "0010/1000"). ) is running.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 119(c)(2) is the state after receiving the depression operation of the start lever 135 in the N+1 game.

In this example, the N+1 game is started with the pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 as a trigger, and one game is completed, but in the game in which the second giving effect (replacement effect) is executed, the progress effect is not allowed to proceed. Therefore, the display suggesting the number of remaining games in the point specialization state effect is not updated, and remains as "remaining 9G".

According to this example, in the game in which the second grant effect is executed, the progress effect is not progressed, and the opportunity for awarding the privilege in the progress effect can be increased, so whether the second grant effect is executed It is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation as to whether or not the game is to be played, and to maintain the player's desire to play.

In addition, the N+1 game executes a second grant effect (refill effect) that grants the same type of benefit (item "banana" in this example) as the benefit granted in the first grant effect (N game). Since it is a game, an effect suggestion display RD (in this example, a display including a character string "Refill!") is performed to suggest that it is a second giving effect (refill effect), and is given to the player. The privilege display SP1 suggesting the item (privilege) "banana" (in this example, the display of an image simulating the appearance of a banana) is executed.

Note that the effect suggestion display RD is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a display such as "KEEP" or "LOCK" that suggests that the progress effect is not to proceed.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 119(c)(3) is the state after receiving the third stop operation in the N+1 game.

In this example, since the effect suggestion display RD is continued and the N+1 game is completed with the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 as a trigger, the points (privileges) corresponding to the items (privileges) given to the player ) (in this example, a display including a character string “+10” indicating that 10 points have been awarded) is executed. Also, since 10 points have been awarded, the point number display indicating the number of points acquired by the player is updated from "0010/1000" to "0020/1000".

According to this example, in the game following the game in which the first grant effect is executed, the second grant effect that grants the same type of benefit as the benefit granted in the first grant effect can be executed. Even in the game immediately after executing the first giving performance, the player's expectation for the privilege can be heightened, and the player's willingness to play can be maintained from the first giving performance to the second giving performance. be able to.

In addition, in the second grant effect, in order to grant the privilege of the same value as the privilege granted in the first grant performance, it is guaranteed that the privilege of the same value is granted in the second grant performance, and the game It is possible to give the player a sense of security and prevent the player's desire to play from declining.

FIG. 119(c3′) shows a case where the same item “banana” as in the first imparting effect is imparted in the second imparting effect, but points (30 points) different from those in the first imparting effect are imparted. It is the figure which showed the example of.

In this example, a privilege display SP3 that suggests points (privileges) corresponding to the item (privilege) "banana" granted to the player (in this example, the characters "+30" suggesting that 30 points have been granted) column) is executed, and since 30 points have been awarded, the point number display indicating the number of points earned by the player is updated from "0010/1000" to "0040/1000".

According to this example, the privilege is composed of a group consisting of multiple types of values, and the same group is selected again in the second giving effect, so if the value of the privilege given in the first giving effect is low Even so, in the second giving effect, the player can have a feeling of anticipation that a privilege with a greater value than that in the first giving effect may be given.

<Refill production / Example 2>
Next, with reference to FIG. 120, Example 2 of the “refill effect” executable by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

In this example, in the point specialization state production, the first grant performance and the second grant performance (replacement performance) are executed, and the same type of privilege is performed in the first grant performance and the second grant performance (replacement performance) (In this example, the second value item "grape" which is higher in value than the first value item "banana") is given.

FIG. 120(a) is a diagram showing an example of a first imparting effect in a point specializing state effect in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 120(a)(1) is a state in which the point specializing state effect has been started in the N+2 game, and before the depression operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 is accepted.

In this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a display suggesting that the point specialization state effect is being executed (in this example, a display including a character string "point specialization in progress") and a point specialization state A display indicating the number of remaining games in the effect (in this example, a display including the character string “9G left”) and a point number display indicating the number of points earned by the player (in this example, the character string “0020/1000”). ) is running.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 120(a)(2) is the state after receiving the depression operation of the start lever 135 in the N+2 game.

In this example, N+2 games are started with the pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135, and since one game has been completed, the display suggesting the number of remaining games of the point specialization state effect is changed from "remaining 9G". It is updated to "Remaining 8G".

In addition, since the item (privilege) "grape" was granted in the N game, a privilege display SP4 (in this example, an image imitating the appearance of the grape) suggesting the item (privilege) "grape" granted to the player display) is running.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 120(a)(3) is the state after receiving the third stop operation in the N+2 game.

In this example, the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 ended the N+2 game, so the privilege display suggesting points (privileges) corresponding to the item (privilege) "grape" given to the player. SP5 (in this example, a display including a character string of "+100" suggesting that 100 points have been awarded) is executed. Also, since 100 points have been awarded, the point number display indicating the number of points acquired by the player is updated from "0020/1000" to "0120/1000".

FIG. 120(b) is a diagram showing an example of the second addition effect (refill effect) in the point specialization state effect in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 120(b)(1) is a state in which the point specializing state effect is continued in the N+3 game, and before the depression operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 is accepted.

In this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a display suggesting that the point specialization state effect is being executed (in this example, a display including a character string "point specialization in progress") and a point specialization state A display indicating the number of remaining games in the effect (in this example, a display including the character string "remaining 8G") and a point number display indicating the number of points earned by the player (in this example, the character string "0120/1000") ) is running.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 120(b)(2) is the state after receiving the depression operation of the start lever 135 in the N+3 game.

In this example, the N+3 game is started with the pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 as a trigger, and one game is completed, but in the game in which the second giving effect (replacement effect) is executed, the progress effect is not allowed to proceed. Therefore, the display suggesting the number of remaining games in the point specialization state effect is not updated, and remains as "remaining 8G".

According to this example, in the game in which the second grant effect is executed, the progress effect is not progressed, and the opportunity for awarding the privilege in the progress effect can be increased, so whether the second grant effect is executed It is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation as to whether or not the game is to be played, and to maintain the player's desire to play.

In addition, the N+3 game is a game that executes a second grant effect (refill effect) that grants the same type of benefit (the item “grape” in this example) as the benefit granted in the first grant effect (N game). Therefore, an effect suggestion display RD (in this example, a display including a character string "Refill!") is performed to suggest that it is a second giving effect (refill effect), and the effect given to the player A privilege display SP4 suggesting the item (privilege) "grape" (in this example, displaying an image imitating the appearance of a grape) is executed.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 120(b)(3) is the state after receiving the third stop operation in the N+3 game.

In this example, since the effect suggestion display RD is continued and the N+3 game is ended with the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 as a trigger, A privilege display SP5 suggesting points (privileges) (in this example, a display including a character string "+100" suggesting that 100 points have been awarded) is executed. Also, since 100 points have been awarded, the point number display indicating the number of points acquired by the player is updated from "0120/1000" to "0220/1000".

According to this example, in the game following the game in which the first grant effect is executed, the second grant effect that grants the same type of benefit as the second benefit granted in the first grant effect is executed. Therefore, in the game immediately after executing the first imparting effect, the player's expectation for the second privilege, which is a value greater than the first value, can be increased, and the first imparting effect can be changed to the second privilege. The player's desire to play can be maintained over the two giving performances.

In addition, in the second grant effect, in order to grant the privilege of the same value as the privilege granted in the first grant performance, it is guaranteed that the privilege of the same value is granted in the second grant performance, and the game It is possible to give the player a sense of security and prevent the player's desire to play from declining.

FIG. 120(c) is a diagram showing an example of the third addition effect (refill effect of refill effect) in the point specialization state effect in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 120(c)(1) is a state in which the point specialization state effect is continued in the N+4 game, and before the pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135 is accepted.

In this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a display suggesting that the point specialization state effect is being executed (in this example, a display including a character string "point specialization in progress") and a point specialization state A display indicating the number of remaining games in the effect (in this example, a display including the character string "8G remaining") and a point number display indicating the number of points earned by the player (in this example, the character string "0220/1000"). ) is running.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 120(c)(2) is the state after receiving the depression operation of the start lever 135 in the N+4 game.

In this example, the N+4 game is started with the pressing operation (lever ON) of the start lever 135, and one game is completed. Since the progress is not made, the display suggesting the number of remaining games of the point specialization state effect is not updated, and remains as "remaining 8G".

According to this example, in the game in which the third imparting effect is executed, the progress effect is not progressed, and the opportunity for awarding the privilege in the progress effect can be increased, so whether the third imparting effect is executed It is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation as to whether or not the game is to be played, and to maintain the player's desire to play.

In this example, an example is shown in which the progress effect is not progressed in the third grant effect. It may be configured to advance the progress effect in the refill effect of the effect).

In addition, in the N+4 game, a third grant effect (refill effect of refill effect) that grants the same type of benefit (item “grape” in this example) as the benefit granted in the first grant effect (N game) is performed. Since it is a game to be executed, an effect suggestion display RD (in this example, a display including a character string of "Refill!") is performed to suggest that it is a third giving effect (refill effect of refill effect), A privilege display SP4 (in this example, the display of an image imitating the appearance of grapes) that suggests the item (privilege) granted to the player is executed.

In addition, the display mode of the effect suggesting display suggesting the third imparting effect and the effect suggesting effect display suggesting the second imparting effect may be different. ), a display including a character string of "Refill! Refill!" may be executed.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 120(c)(3) is the state after receiving the third stop operation in the N+4 game.

In this example, since the effect suggestion display RD is continued and the N+4 game is ended with the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 as a trigger, A privilege display SP6 suggesting points (privileges) (in this example, a display including a character string "+300" suggesting that 300 points have been awarded) is executed. Also, since 300 points have been awarded, the point number display indicating the number of points acquired by the player is updated from "0220/1000" to "0520/1000".

According to this example, in the game following the game in which the second grant effect is executed, the third grant effect that grants the same type of benefit as the benefit granted in the second grant effect can be executed. Even in the game immediately after executing the second giving performance, the player's expectation for the privilege can be heightened, and the player's willingness to play can be maintained from the second giving performance to the third giving performance. be able to.

In addition, the privilege is composed of a group consisting of multiple types of values, and the same group is selected again in the third giving effect, so even if the value of the privilege given in the first giving effect is low In the third giving performance, the player can have a sense of anticipation that a privilege with a greater value than that in the first giving performance may be given.

<Refill production / Summary>
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 118) is a gaming machine equipped with display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157). A first giving effect (for example, FIG. 119 (b) (1) to the same figure that gives one of the types of benefits (for example, 10 points of the item “banana” shown in FIG. 119 (a)) (b) (first giving effect shown in (3)) can be executed, and the display means displays a privilege related to the privilege given to the player (for example, in FIG. 119 (b) (2) and the privilege display SP2 shown in FIG. 119(b)(3)), and the display means is means for displaying the second A second grant effect (for example, FIG. 119 (c) (1) to FIG. 119 (c) that grants the same type of benefit (for example, 10 points for the item “banana”) as the benefit granted in one grant effect It is a game machine characterized in that it is a means capable of executing (2nd given effect shown in (3)).

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, in the game following the game in which the first giving effect is executed, the second giving effect to give the same kind of privilege as the privilege given in the first giving effect can be executed, even in the game immediately after the first grant effect is executed, the player's expectation for the privilege can be increased, and the player's expectation is increased from the first grant effect to the second grant effect. It is possible to maintain the desire to play.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 118) is a gaming machine having a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and the display means displays a plurality of types of benefits. First grant effect (eg, FIG. 120 (a) (1) to FIG. 120 (a) ( 3) is a means capable of executing the first giving effect shown in FIG. , privilege display SP5 shown in FIG. 120(a)(3)), and the privilege is a first type of privilege that is a first value (for example, an item shown in FIG. 119(a) 10 points of "banana") and a second type of privilege that is a second value greater than the first value (for example, 100 points of the item "grape" shown in FIG. 119 (a)), The display means provides the same type of privilege (for example, 100 points of the item “grape”) as the privilege given in the first giving effect in the game subsequent to the game in which the first giving effect is executed. A game machine characterized by being a means capable of executing a second grant effect (for example, the second grant effect shown in FIGS. 120 (b) (1) to (b) (3)). be.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the game following the game in which the first grant effect is executed, the second benefit of the same type as the second benefit granted in the first grant effect is granted. can be executed, the player's expectation for the second privilege, which is a value greater than the first value, can be increased in the game immediately after the first grant effect is executed. It is possible to keep the player's willingness to play from the second giving performance to the second giving performance.

In addition, the display means, in the game subsequent to the game in which the second imparting effect is executed, the privilege of the same type as the privilege imparted in the second imparting effect (for example, 300 points of the item "grape") 120(c)(1) to FIG. 120(c)(3)).

With such a configuration, in the game subsequent to the game in which the second imparting effect is executed, the third imparting effect of imparting the same type of privilege as the privilege imparted in the second imparting effect can be executed. Therefore, even in the game immediately after the execution of the second giving effect, the player's expectation for the privilege can be increased, and the player's willingness to play is increased from the second giving effect to the third giving effect. can be sustained.

Moreover, said 1st provision production|presentation may be the production|presentation which always provides the said privilege.

With such a configuration, the player will not be discouraged even if the second imparting effect is executed after the first imparting effect.

Further, the display means is a means capable of executing a progress effect that may progress for each game (for example, point specialization state effects shown in FIGS. 119 and 120). In the game, the progress effect may not progress.

With such a configuration, in the game in which the second grant effect is executed, the progress effect is not progressed, and the chances of granting the privilege in the progress effect can be increased, so the second grant effect is executed. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation as to whether or not the game will be played, and to maintain the player's desire to play.

Further, the display means is a means capable of executing the second giving effect in the next game when the power is restored before the game next to the game in which the first giving effect was executed is started. may be

With such a configuration, it is possible to give a surprise to a player who has started a game at the opening of a game parlor or the like.

Further, the privilege is composed of a group (for example, item "banana", "apple", or "grape") consisting of a plurality of types of values (for example, three types of points), and the above-mentioned "first The "same type as the privilege given in the giving effect" may refer to one type of group selected again from among the plurality of types of groups.

With such a configuration, even when the value of the privilege given in the first giving performance is low, the second giving performance gives a privilege with a greater value than the first giving performance. It is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that it may be possible.

Moreover, said 2nd provision production|presentation may be production|presentation which provides the said privilege of the same value (for example, point) as the said privilege provided by said 1st provision production|presentation.

With such a configuration, it is guaranteed that the privilege of the same value is given even in the second giving performance, so that the player can be given a sense of security and the player's willingness to play can be reduced. can be prevented from occurring.

Further, the privilege may include points, and the privilege display may be a display including the points (for example, privilege display SP2 shown in FIG. 119(b)(3)).

With such a configuration, even in the game immediately after the execution of the first giving effect, the player's expectation for re-giving points can be increased, and the first giving effect can be changed to the second giving effect. It is possible to keep the player's desire to play for a long time.

Further, the privilege may include an item, and the privilege display may be a display including the item (for example, privilege display SP1 shown in FIG. 119(b)(2)).

With such a configuration, even in the game immediately after the execution of the first grant effect, the player's expectation for re-delivery of the item can be heightened, and the first grant effect can be changed to the second grant effect. It is possible to keep the player's desire to play for a long time.

Further, an operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 118) is provided, the privilege includes operation navigation suggesting an operation mode of the operation means, and the privilege display indicates the number of times the operation navigation is executed. The display may include the number of operation instructions to be displayed.

With such a configuration, even in the game immediately after the execution of the first imparting effect, the player's expectation for the operation navigation can be increased, and from the first imparting effect to the second imparting effect, It is possible to keep the player's desire to play.

The configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the above embodiment. Therefore, for example, the "privileges" according to the present invention are not limited to items or points, and include, for example, bonuses, ATs, AT game additions, mini games, game media (medal) payouts, operation navigation, inside prizes Winning, winning a prize, special performance, or the like may be used.

In addition, the "privilege display" according to the present invention may be a display related to benefits, such as a display that foretells that a privilege will be granted, or a false notice that a privilege will be granted (a false notice that does not actually grant a privilege). Alternatively, it may be a display (tutorial display) or the like that explains the content of the privilege.

In addition, the "progress effect" according to the present invention is not limited to a point-specific effect, and may be, for example, a game section effect in which the number of AT-added games can be obtained, or a special winning role can be won. It may be a production of a game section or the like.

Also, the "value" according to the present invention is not limited to points, and may be, for example, the ease of transitioning to an advantageous state, the number of game media paid out, the winning percentage of mini games, and the like.

<Disbursement after power failure / summary>
Next, an overview of “payout after power failure and power recovery” that can be executed by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

A gaming machine (slot machine in this example) according to the present embodiment includes payout means capable of executing payout of game media, and sound output means capable of outputting a payout sound during the payout period of the game media. Further, the payout means is capable of executing the rest of the payout when power is restored during execution of the payout of game media, and the sound output means is capable of executing the rest of the payout by the payout means. is configured so as not to output the payout sound. Further, the sound output means is capable of outputting a background sound, and is configured not to output the background sound during the remaining execution of the payout by the payout means.

Here, the "payout means" according to the present invention means a means capable of paying out game media (for example, medals). Apparatus, etc. fall under this category. The 'sound output means' is a means capable of outputting sound such as payout sound and background sound, and corresponds to, for example, a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 118, a musical instrument, and the like.

The “payout sound” corresponds to, for example, a sound effect such as “charin” that is output in accordance with the payout of game media, or a voice such as “medals are being paid out”. Also, the "background sound" corresponds to, for example, BGM that is output together with effects using lamps or the like, effect sounds for livening up the game, and the like.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes display means capable of displaying a return display after power is turned on, and a period during which the return display is displayed by the display means is a silent period during which no sound is output by the sound output means. , the payout means executes the remainder of the payout in the silent period.

Here, the "display means" according to the present invention is means capable of displaying a return display after power-on, and corresponds to, for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 or the like. Further, the "recovery display" according to the present invention is a display suggesting that it is a period (recovering) from after power is restored to the slot machine to when the normal game can be started. This includes a display including character strings such as "medium" and "please wait for a while", and a display in which the entire display area is set to a certain color (for example, black or white).

In addition, the game machine according to the present embodiment includes payout display means capable of displaying the number of payouts indicating the number of game media to be paid out, and the payout display means displays the payout amount during execution of the rest of the payout by the payout means. Execute the display of the number of payouts.

Here, the 'payout display means' according to the present invention is a means capable of displaying the number of payouts indicating the number of game media to be paid out. . Note that the payout display means is not limited to the 7-segment (SEG) display, and may be other display means such as a liquid crystal display device.

<Payment after power failure / Example 1>
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, Example 1 of “payout after power failure and power recovery” executable by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 121 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, processes such as payouts before and after power interruption/restoration of the slot machine.

Here, the "display device" in the figure is display means (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157), the "speaker" is sound output means, and the lamp is light output means capable of outputting light ( In this example, it is a side lamp (decorative lamp) 144) shown in FIG. The payout number display is payout display means (in this example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 118), and the payout device is payout means (payout device not shown in this example).

Before the power interruption shown in FIG. 121(b), the slot machine 100 is normally energized.

In this example, before the settlement button 134 is pressed, a background display is displayed on the display device, a background sound is output from the speaker, and light is output from the lamp in a normal light emission mode. Further, since 50 medals are stored, the number 50 is displayed on the display for the number of tokens to be paid out, and since medals are not being paid out, the state of the payout device is non-payout.

The state shown in FIG. 121(a) is a state in which a pressing operation of the settlement button 134 is accepted during a game and payout of betted medals is started. This state may be a state in which a winning combination is won in a certain game, a third stop operation is accepted, and payout of medals corresponding to the winning combination is started.

In this example, the state of the payout device is changed from the non-payout state to the payout state when the operation of pressing the settlement button 134 is accepted, and the payout device starts to pay out the medals, and the payout device also pays out the medals. During the period, a sound to be played (for example, a sound effect of "charin") is output from the speaker.

In addition, the number of payout display device displays the number by subtracting 1 in the order of 50→49→48→47→... each time one medal is paid out by the payout device.

It should be noted that the background display by the display device, the background sound output by the speaker, and the light output in the normal light emission mode by the lamp are all continued during the medal payout period.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 121(b) is a state in which a power failure has occurred (a state in which power supply to the slot machine 100 is interrupted).

In this state, since the power supply to various devices is stopped, background display by the display device, background sound output by the speaker, light output in the normal light emission mode by the lamp, payout number display by the payout number indicator, and payout The payout of medals by the device will be in a state where none are executed.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 121(c) is the power recovery state (the power supply to the slot machine 100 is restarted).

In this example, when the power is restored, the return display is started on the display device, and the display period of the return display is a silent period during which no sound is output from the speaker.

In addition, during this silent period, the rest of the payout (in this example, the payout of the remaining 46 medals) is executed by the payout device, and the number of payout display is displayed each time one medal is paid out by the payout device. , 46->45->...3->2->1. After the payout of all medals is completed, the state of the payout device is changed from the payout state to the non-payout state, the payout by the payout device is stopped, and the number 0 is displayed on the payout number display.

According to this example, since it is possible to confirm the operation sound of the payout means by the payout means without accompanying the payout sound and the background sound, it is possible to check whether the payout means is operating normally outside business hours. To easily confirm whether or not a player is wrong by an operation sound, and to prevent a fraudulent act by allowing a store clerk of a game parlor to notice the occurrence of fraudulent payout by a fraudulent person during business hours. becomes possible.

In addition, since the payout by the payout means can be visually confirmed by the payout number indicator, the payout by the payout means can be confirmed more reliably.

In addition, as in the case of a power failure and power recovery, even after the power is turned on, the operating sound of the payout means can be confirmed in a silent state. Whether or not it is operating normally can be easily confirmed by the operation sound.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 121(d) is a state in which the game can be started after power is restored.

In this example, when it becomes possible to start a game after the power is restored, instead of the return display by the display device, the background display before the power failure is resumed, the background sound is output by the speaker, and the normal sound is generated by the lamp. By restarting the output of the light in the light emission mode, the state before the power failure is restored.

<Payment after power failure / Example 2>
Next, with reference to FIG. 122, Example 2 of “payout after power failure and power recovery” executable by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 122 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, processes such as payout and error notification before and after power interruption/recovery of the slot machine. The states shown in FIGS. 121(a) to 121(c) are the same as those in FIGS. 121(a) to 121(c).

In this example, in addition to the contents of the first embodiment described using FIG. device) may output an error sound during the remaining execution of the payout.

Errors that can occur in the slot machine 100 include door open errors, hopper empty errors, medal insertion errors 1 to 4, medal payout errors 1 to 3, overflow errors, RAM errors, winning errors, and the like.

The door open error is an error that notifies the opening of the door of the gaming machine, occurs when the front door 102 is opened, and is resolved when the front door 102 is closed. A hopper empty error is a payout error related to the payout of medals, and occurs when the number of medals stored in the hopper accommodated inside the main body 101 falls below a prescribed number, and the prescribed number of medals or more is delivered to the hopper. Resolved by supplementing.

Medal insertion error 1 occurs when the inserted medals are accumulated, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is received after removing the cause of the error. Medal insertion error 2 occurs when the number of inserted medals exceeds a specified number, and can be resolved by changing the set value or clearing the RAM.

Medal insertion error 3 occurs when either insertion sensor 1 or insertion sensor 2 is turned on other than during medal insertion processing. This occurs when the path does not pass normally, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error.

Medal payout error 1 occurs when no medals are paid out for a certain period of time when the medal payout device is driven, medal payout error 2 occurs when medals remain while the medal payout device is driven, and medal payout error 3 occurs. occurs when either the payout sensor 1 or payout sensor 2 is turned on other than during medal payout processing, and both are resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error. .

The overflow abnormality occurs when the overflow terminal of the medal auxiliary storage box is turned on, and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after removing the cause of the error. A RAM failure occurs when an abnormality is detected by checking the RAM, and is resolved when an operation of the error release switch is accepted. The winning abnormality occurs when a winning symbol different from the winning determined by the internal lottery wins after the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and is canceled when the operation of the error cancellation switch is accepted.

It should be noted that the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the slot machine 100, and can also be applied to a pachinko machine. Errors that can occur in pachinko machines include, for example, lower tray full error, payout device error, overpayment error, illegal payout error, main control unit communication error, magnetic abnormality error, magnetic field abnormality error, frame open error, RAM clear error , impact sensor errors, etc. These errors are also resolved when the operation of the error release switch is received after removing the cause of the error.

The state shown in FIG. 122(e) is a state in which an error is detected during recovery display after power recovery.

In this example, since a door open error or a hopper empty error was detected during recovery display after power restoration, instead of recovery display, an error display is performed on the display device, an error sound is output from the speaker, and a lamp is displayed. is outputting light in an error light emission mode.

Even when an error is detected, the payout of medals by the payout device and the display of the number of payouts by the payout number display are both continued.

The mode of error display by the display device is not particularly limited, but for example, an error display that notifies the content of the error by a character string (for example, a character string such as "Door open error occurred!", "Hopper empty error occurred!" error display), error display prompting error resolution (for example, display including a character string such as "Please call a clerk"), and error display showing an error with a still image or video.

In addition, the mode of the error sound by the speaker is not particularly limited. This includes an error sound (for example, a voice or warning sound such as "Please call the store clerk") that prompts to eliminate the problem.

In addition, the error light emission mode of the lamp is not particularly limited. , the lighting of an error-dedicated lamp, etc.

According to this example, the operation sound of the payout means not accompanied by the payout sound overlaps with the output timing of the error sound, so that the game store clerk more reliably notices that the fraudulent payout has occurred. becomes possible.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 122(f) is a state in which the cause of the error has been resolved and the error has been cancelled.

In this example, the error display by the display device, the output of the error sound by the speaker, and the output of the light in the error light emission mode by the lamp are all stopped, while the recovery display is resumed on the display device.

<Disbursement/summary after power failure/recovery>
As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 118) according to the present embodiment includes a payout means (for example, a payout device) capable of paying out game media (for example, medals), A game machine provided with sound output means (e.g., a speaker) capable of outputting a payout sound during the payout period of the medium, wherein the payout means is powered off and restored during the payout of the game medium. the sound output means does not output the payout sound while the payout means is executing the rest of the payout (while the payout means is operating) The gaming machine is characterized by means for not outputting the audio signal of the sound, and temporarily blocking (muting) the audio signal of the payout sound while outputting the audio signal.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, since it is possible to confirm the operation sound of the payout by the payout means without accompanying the payout sound, the clerk of the game parlor can confirm that the payout means operates normally outside business hours. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not the game is being played by the operation sound, and during business hours, the store clerk can notice that the illegal payout has been made by the fraudulent person, thereby preventing the fraudulent act. It becomes possible to

In addition, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 118) according to the present embodiment includes a payout means (for example, a payout device) capable of paying out game media (for example, medals), and a game medium payout unit. and a sound output means (for example, a speaker) capable of outputting a payout sound (for example, a sound effect of "charin") during a period, wherein the payout means is during the payout of the game medium. means for executing the rest of the payout in the event of a power failure and power recovery, and the sound output means outputs the payout sound while the rest of the payout is being performed by the payout means (while the payout means is operating). Means that does not output (for example, does not output the sound signal of the payout sound, temporarily blocks (mutes) the sound signal while outputting the sound signal), and the sound output means is an error (for example, , a door open error for informing the opening of the door of the game table, and a hopper empty error for payout), and the sound output means is capable of outputting an error sound for announcing the payout by the payout means during the rest of the payout. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is means for outputting the error sound.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, since it is possible to confirm the operation sound of the payout by the payout means without accompanying the payout sound, the clerk of the game parlor can confirm that the payout means operates normally outside business hours. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not the game is being played by the operation sound, and during business hours, the store clerk can notice that the illegal payout has been made by the fraudulent person, thereby preventing the fraudulent act. It becomes possible to In addition, by overlapping the output timing of the error sound with the operation sound of the payout means that is not accompanied by the payout sound, it is possible for the store clerk to more reliably notice that the fraudulent payout has occurred. Become.

Further, the sound output means is a means capable of outputting background sound (for example, BGM), and the sound output means does not output the background sound during the remaining execution of the payout by the payout means (for example, Means for not outputting the audio signal of the background sound or temporarily blocking (muting) the audio signal of the background sound while outputting the audio signal of the background sound may be used.

With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the operation sound of the payout by the payout means without background sound, so that the staff of the game parlor can check whether the payout means is operating normally outside business hours. This makes it possible to easily confirm whether or not the game is being played by the operation sound, and during business hours, the store clerk can notice that an illegal payout has been made by a fraudulent person, thereby preventing fraudulent activity. It becomes possible.

Further, display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157) capable of displaying a return display after power-on is provided, and during the display period of the return display by the display means, no sound is output by the sound output means (for example, no sound is output). a silent period (for example, the silent period shown in FIGS. 121 and 122) in which no audio signal is output, the audio signal is temporarily cut off (muted) while the audio signal is output, and the payout means , means for executing the remainder of said payout in said silent period.

With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the operation sound of the payout means by the payout means in a silent state after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not it is in operation by the operation sound.

Further, a payout display means (e.g., a payout number display device) capable of displaying the number of payouts indicating the number of game media to be paid out is provided, and the payout display means displays the payout amount during execution of the rest of the payout by the payout means. It may be a means for executing the display of the number of payouts.

With such a configuration, the payout by the payout means can be visually confirmed, so the payout by the payout means can be confirmed more reliably.

Further, the error may be a door open error that notifies the opening of the door of the gaming machine.

With such a configuration, even if power is restored by a fraudulent person during business hours, the door open error sound may alert the store clerk of the fraudulent act.

Also, the error may be a payout error related to the payout.

With such a configuration, the store clerk can check both the operation of payout and the operation of error detection outside business hours, thereby enhancing convenience.

Further, a main control section and a sub-control section may be provided, the main control section may control the payout means and the payout display means, and the sub-control section may control the display means. good.

With such a configuration, when the recovery time of the main control unit is earlier than that of the sub-control unit after power failure or after power is turned on, the payout of game media and the display of the number of payouts can be started with priority. is possible, the game media can be paid out quickly, and the convenience can be improved.

The configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the above embodiment. Therefore, for example, errors that can be notified by the sound output means are not limited to door open errors and hopper empty errors, but medal insertion errors 1 to 4, medal payout errors 1 to 3, overflow errors, RAM defects, prize winning errors, and the like. There may be. Also, the payout error related to payout is not limited to the hopper empty error, and may be, for example, medal payout errors 1 to 3, overflow error, or the like.

Further, the "silent period" according to the present invention may be a period in which no sound is output by the sound output means. It may be a period during which it is cut off (muted).

Further, the "payout number display" according to the present invention is not limited to subtraction display (eg 50→49→...), and may be addition display (eg 1→2→...).

Also, the game machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one in which the game balls enclosed in the game machine are circulated. Further, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured on a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub-control unit may be configured to allow two-way communication. good. Further, while bi-directional communication is enabled between the main control section and the first sub-control section, the communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be one-way communication.

Moreover, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. are not limited to those listed. Further, by applying the content described in one configuration among the multiple configurations described in the embodiments to another configuration, the width of the game may be expanded.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
<Overall composition>
FIG. 123 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention. The slot machine 100 starts a game by inserting medals, and pays out medals according to the result of the game.

A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 123 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101 . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown in FIG. 123) are housed in the central inside of the main body 101. It is configured so that it can rotate inside. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. That is, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, there is provided an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through the space between them. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line. A valid winning line is determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are 5 pay lines. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line is activated, and when two medals are bet, an upper horizontal pay line and a lower horizontal pay line are added. When the book becomes valid and 3 medals are bet, the 5 lines added with the lower right winning line and the upper right winning line become valid as the winning lines. The number of pay lines is not limited to 5. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, and the bottom right pay line The five lines of the winning line and the rising winning line may be effective as the winning lines. Hereinafter, an effective winning line may be referred to as an effective line.

FIG. 124 is a diagram showing the relationship between the nine display areas 1 to 9 of the symbol display window 113 and the above five pay lines. In this embodiment, an upper horizontal winning line (horizontal winning line L2) composed of display areas 1, 4, and 7, a middle horizontal winning line (horizontal winning line L1) composed of display areas 2, 5, and 8 are displayed. A lower horizontal winning line (horizontal winning line L3) composed of areas 3, 6, and 9, a rising winning line (diagonal winning line L4) composed of display areas 3, 5, and 7, display areas 1, 5, 9 (diagonal pay line L5).

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery, which will be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The medal insertion buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the insert medal button 130 is pressed, one medal is inserted up to a maximum of three, two medals are inserted when the insert medal button 131 is depressed, and three medals are inserted when the insert medal button 132 is depressed. It is designed to be loaded. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 132 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically by means of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. is. The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the medal insertion buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137-139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110-112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the respective reels 110-112. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are called stop operations, the first stop operation is called the first stop operation, the next stop operation is called the second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called the third stop operation. Also, the reel targeted by the first stop operation is called the first stop reel, the reel targeted by the second stop operation is called the second stop reel, and the reel targeted by the third stop operation is called the third stop reel. Light emitters 137a to 139a are provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitters 137a to 139a are turned on to notify the player. . In other words, the light emitters 137a to 139a inform that the stop buttons 137 to 139 are in a state in which a stop operation can be accepted, in other words, that the rotation of each reel can be stopped. It is a thing. Each of the light emitters 137a to 139a is, for example, an LED, and has a plurality of light emission modes (for example, blinking, turning off, light emission in a first color, light emission in a second color, light emission while continuously changing the color, etc.). ).

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加The production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a production image display device 157 (shown in the figure) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 100. It has a structure that appears on the player's side.

It should be noted that, even if the display device is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen is rectangular, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.
<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .
<Main control part>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and stopping of the reels. A ROM 306 for storing positions and the like, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. Installed. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 314b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 314b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time for interrupt is 256×47/8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535, and a start signal output circuit 332 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control (starts the main control unit main process described later) when a start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 332 .

In addition, the basic circuit 302 is provided with a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (a medal insertion button 130 sensor, a medal insertion button 131 sensor, a medal insertion button 132 sensor, a medal insertion port 141 sensor) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for inserted medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, a stop button 139 sensor, an adjustment button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, and a reel 110 index sensor, reel 111 index sensor, reel 112 index sensor, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generating circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop buttons by the player.

A medal insertion button 130 sensor, a medal insertion button 131 sensor, and a medal insertion button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted into a game. Detects the submit operation when submitting as The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor for the left reel 110, the index sensor for the middle reel 111, and the index sensor for the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and the light shielding pieces provided on the reel frame pass through them. It becomes L level every time. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero, and can calculate the stop position of the reel.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 338 (winning line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, accumulated number display 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127).

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. Signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300 .
<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on the control commands. there is This basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. are doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various displays, and the like. are provided.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

The first sub-controller 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.) are provided to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface. is connected.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the effect image display device 157, the shutter 163, and the like. The second sub-controller 500 may be composed of a plurality of controllers, such as a controller that controls the effect image display device 157 and a controller that controls the shutter 163 .

Next, the second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. A timer 512 is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The second sub-controller 500 also has a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the second sub-controller 500 as a whole, image display data, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A drive circuit 530 for driving the shutter 163 is provided in the second sub-control section 500, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 530 via an output interface. This drive circuit 530 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 504 .

A sensor circuit 532 is provided in the second sub control unit 500, and a shutter sensor 538 is connected to the sensor circuit 532 via an input interface. The CPU 504 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 538 every interrupt time.

A VDP 534 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 536 are connected to the VDP 534 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .
<Pattern arrangement>
With reference to FIG. 126(a), the pattern arrangement applied to each of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. In addition, this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of the symbols applied to each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

Each of the reels 110 to 112 has a plurality of types (eight types in this embodiment) of symbols of a predetermined number of frames (in this embodiment, 21 frames of which the symbol number counter numbers are 0 to 20). As for the number counter, only the number counter will be described in detail later). Numbers 0 to 20 shown on the left side of FIG. For example, in this embodiment, the number 0 piece on the left reel 110 has a BB symbol, the number 1 piece on the middle reel 111 has a replay symbol, and the number 2 piece on the right reel 112 has a bell symbol. ing.

When the symbol combination stop-displayed on the activated line becomes the symbol combination of the predetermined winning combination, it is determined that the winning combination has won. Winning hands in the present embodiment include a small winning combination in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out, an actuating combination, that is, a big bonus that transitions to a bonus game, and a replayable combination without inserting new medals. It also includes replays that are different roles. In other words, "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the working combination that does not accompany the payout of medals (does not accompany payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. including winning a prize. The winning combination will be described in detail below. <Types of winning roles>
FIG. 126(b) is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including activated combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and activation or payout of each winning combination.

Of the winning combinations in this embodiment, the big bonus (BB) is a combination that transitions to a bonus game, and the replays (replay, replay 2, replay 3) can be replayed without inserting new medals. Such a winning combination may be called a "working combination" to be distinguished from a winning combination, but the "winning combination" in the present embodiment includes a big bonus and a replay, which are working combinations. In addition, "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operating combination that does not accompany the payout of medals (does not accompany payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. Winning and winning for replay are included.

Winning combinations in this embodiment include a big bonus (BB), small combinations (cherry, watermelon, bell), and replays (replay, replay 2, replay 3). Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these, and can be arbitrarily adopted. For example, a regular bonus may be provided separately from the big bonus. Alternatively, AT (assist time) or ART (assist replay time) may be used without providing a big bonus or a regular bonus.

"Big bonus (BB)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "BB") is a special combination (operating combination) in which a big bonus game (BB game), which is a special game, is started by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combination is BB "7-7-7". Also, the flag is carried over for BB. That is, when the BB is internally won, a flag indicating this is set (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). is maintained (BB internal winning state), the BB is internally winning even after the next game, and the symbol combination "7-7-7" corresponding to the BB is complete to win the BB. It is in.

"Small wins (Bell, Watermelon, Cherry)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "Bell", "Watermelon", and "Cherry") are winning wins in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning. The symbol combinations are "bell-bell-bell" for bell, "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" for watermelon, and "cherry-ANY-ANY" for cherry. Also, the corresponding number of payouts is as shown in FIG. 126(b). In the case of "cherry-ANY-ANY", the symbol on the left reel 110 should be "cherry", and the symbols on the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 may be any symbols.

"Replay" is a prize-winning combination (operating combination) that allows the next game to be played without inserting medals (game media) due to winning, and medals are not paid out.

The corresponding symbol combination is "replay-replay-replay (normal replay)" for replay role 1 (replay), and "replay-replay-bell (high probability replay entry replay)" for replay role 2 (replay 2). )”, and the replay combination 3 (replay 3) is “replay-bell-replay (high probability replay puncture replay)”. If replay 2 is won in the normal game state, the internal winning probability of the replay (replay role) shifts to a high probability state (replay high probability state), but replay 3 is won in the replay high probability state. If you put it away, it will return to the normal game state.
<Reel rotating device>
Next, the reel rotating device 10 for rotating the reels 110 to 112 of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 127 to 129. FIG. FIG. 127 is an external perspective view showing the reel rotating device 10 of the slot machine 100. The reel rotating device 10 is generally composed of reel driving units 20 to 40 and a case member 12 for housing them. The reel drive units 20 to 40 are structurally made up of the same parts, with the only difference being the pattern arrangement (see FIG. 126(a)) printed on the reel band 610 (see FIG. 128). there is Each of the reel drive units 20 to 40 (because of the same configuration, the reel drive unit 20 will be described below) is detachably housed in the case member 12 individually.

128 is an exploded perspective view of the reel drive unit 20. FIG. Also, FIG. 129(a) is a schematic side view showing the state in which the reel drive unit 20 is assembled, and FIG. 129(b) is a schematic front view thereof. In addition, in FIGS. 129(a) and 129(b), illustration of some members is omitted for convenience of explanation. The reel drive unit 20 has a structure for moving and displaying symbols, and includes a reel 110, a drive device 604 for rotationally driving the reel 110, a rotation detection device 606 for detecting the rotational position of the reel 110, and an inside of the reel 110. and a reel illumination device 608 for illuminating the symbols applied to each reel 110 from the reel illumination device 608 .

The reel 110 includes a thin cylindrical reel band 610, a first reel frame 612 attached to the left side of the reel band 610 and supporting the left side of the reel band 610, and the right side of the reel band 610. It is composed of a second reel frame 614 that supports the right side surface of the reel band 610 .

The first reel frame 612 includes an annular frame portion 612A, six support portions 612B extending from the frame portion 612A toward the center of the frame portion 612A, and these six support portions 612B. It is composed of a cylindrical mounting portion 612C projecting toward the driving device 604 with the distal end of the portion 612B as the base end.

A plate-shaped light blocking piece 612D is formed on one of the six supporting portions 612B so as to protrude toward the rotation detection device 606. It is configured so that the light shielding piece 612D passes through. The cylindrical mounting portion 612C is formed with four engagement recesses at approximately equal intervals (in this example, at intervals of about 90 degrees) at four locations in the circumferential direction. The four engaging concave portions are fitted to the four engaging convex portions of the movable gear 620 respectively, whereby the first reel frame 612 is engaged and fixed to the movable gear 620 .

The second reel frame 614 is made of an annular member having substantially the same diameter as the frame portion 612A of the first reel frame 612, and is arranged on the opposite side of the first reel frame 612 with the reel belt 610 interposed therebetween.

The drive device 604 includes a drive motor 616, a drive gear 618 attached to a motor shaft 616A of the drive motor 616, a movable gear 620 meshing with the drive gear 618, a support member 623 and a washer. It is composed of a pedestal 622 that rotatably supports via 621 . The drive motor 616 and the pedestal 622 are fixedly supported by a plate-like metal frame 626 with a plurality of mounting screws 624 .

In this embodiment, the drive motor 616 is composed of a 1-2 phase excitation type stepping motor 700 (details will be described later). Movable gear 620 is composed of a gear having a larger diameter than driving gear 618 , and movable gear 620 and driving gear 618 constitute a gear set. Further, as described above, the movable gear 620 is fixed to the first reel frame 612 by using the mounting screw 624 and the washer 621 after being engaged with the mounting portion 612C of the first reel frame 612. It is rotatably supported by 622 and has a structure capable of rotating together with the first reel frame 612 .

The rotation detection device 606 is composed of an optical index sensor 606A consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion, and a mounting base 606B to which the index sensor 606A is attached. is configured to pass through the light shielding piece 612D provided on the first reel frame 612 (see FIG. 129(b)). The mounting base 606B is fixed to the metal frame 626 with mounting screws 624. As shown in FIG. The slot machine 100 determines the positions of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 in the rotational direction based on the detection result of the rotation detection device 606, and rotates the reels 110 to 112 so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line 114. 112 is stopped. That is, when the index sensor 606A detects the light shielding piece 612D of the rotating reel 110, the main control unit 300 resets the reel rotation position information to zero and can control the reel stop position.

The reel lighting device 608 includes a lighting substrate 608B having one cold cathode tube arranged in the center, and a guide for guiding the light emitted from the cold cathode tube in a predetermined direction with the lighting substrate 608B attached. It is composed of a lighting case 608C including a light plate and a back cover 608A covering the back of the lighting board 608B. The lighting case 608C is fixed to the metal frame 626 with mounting screws 624 with the lighting board 608B and the back cover 608A attached.
<Stepping motor>
130 is an exploded perspective view of stepping motor 700. FIG. As shown in FIG. 130, the stepping motor 700 includes a motor shaft 710, a case member 720 that supports the motor shaft 710, a first bearing 722 and a second bearing that are disposed in the case member 720 and support the motor shaft 710. , a stator 730 composed of an electromagnet disposed and fixed inside the case member 720 , and a rotor 740 rotatably attached to the motor shaft 710 . The stepping motor 700 of this embodiment is a PM (Permanent
Magnet) type stepping motor, and is constructed so that the motor rotates once in 96 steps of a 1-2 phase excitation type. In this embodiment, since the gear ratio between the reel and the motor is 1:5.25, the reel rotates once in 504 steps (=5.25×96).

The motor shaft 710 is a shaft on which a drive gear 618 shown in FIGS. 128 and 129 is attached and which outputs power. Hereinafter, the end of the motor shaft 710 to which the driving gear 618 is attached is called the output end 710A, and the opposite end is called the rear end 710B.

The case member 720 is a bottomed hollow cylindrical body composed of a substantially cylindrical base portion 720A with one end open and a lid portion 720B arranged to close the opening of the base portion 720A. Case member 720 accommodates stator 730 and rotor 740 inside, and supports motor shaft 710 penetrating from the bottom of base portion 720A to lid portion 720B via first bearing 722 and second bearing 724. ing. The base portion 720A is also provided with a fixing member 720C having a hole through which a mounting screw 624 is inserted for fixing and supporting a metal frame 626 shown in FIG.

The first bearing 722 is a substantially cylindrical sliding bearing that is disposed substantially in the center of the lid portion 720B of the case member 720 and rotatably supports the motor shaft 710 in the vicinity of the output end 710A.

The second bearing 724 is a substantially cylindrical sliding bearing that is disposed substantially in the center of the bottom of the base portion 720A of the case member 720 and rotatably supports the motor shaft 710 near the rear end 710B.

The stator 730 is arranged so as to surround the rotor 740, and is wound with drive coils (phase A and phase B) in two upper and lower stages. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 130, the magnetic pole teeth form a triangle (the upward direction is called A phase and B phase, and the downward direction is called A-phase and B-phase. A phase relationship of 90 degrees, A phase and A-phase and B phase and B-phase have a phase relationship of 180 degrees in electrical angle), each magnetic pole (A phase, A-phase, B phase, B-phase) has 12 turns They are teeth. FIG. 131 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the magnetic poles of stator 730. FIG. As shown in FIG. 131, the magnetic poles are circumferentially arranged clockwise in the order of A-phase, B-phase, A-phase, and B-phase.

In this embodiment, the rotor 740 is composed of permanent magnets and has 24 magnetic poles.

Here, the principle of operation of stepping motor 700 will be described. The stepping motor 700 rotates the rotor 740 by passing current through the coils wound around the stator 730 to sequentially magnetize each phase of the stator 730 based on an excitation pattern described later, and attracting the rotor 740 with magnetic force. is configured as

In the 1-2 phase excitation type, the four phases of the stator 730 described above are, for example, A phase (1 phase excitation) → A phase and B phase (hereinafter referred to as AB phase. 2 phase excitation) → B phase (1 phase excitation). ) → A-phase and B-phase (hereinafter referred to as AB-phase, 2-phase excitation) → A-phase (1-phase excitation) → A-phase and B-phase (hereinafter referred to as AB-phase, 2-phase excitation) → B-phase (1-phase excitation) → A-phase and B-phase (hereinafter referred to as AB-phase. 2-phase excitation) → A-phase (1-phase excitation) → . Rotor 740 is rotated in a fixed direction.

More specifically, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 outputs an on-level pulse signal (for example, a high-level signal) to the phase that excites the stator 730 of the stepping motor 700 via the drive circuit 322 shown in FIG. At the same time, a predetermined phase is excited by outputting an off-level pulse signal (for example, a low level signal) to the phase not to be excited. Thereby, the rotor 740 of the stepping motor 700 is rotated by a predetermined angle (one step). For example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 outputs an on-level pulse signal to the A-phase of the stator 730 of the stepping motor 700, and simultaneously outputs an off-level pulse signal to the B-phase, A-phase, and B-phase. , the rotor is rotated by one pulse (one step) by exciting only the A phase, and thereafter, the rotor is rotated by a predetermined pulse by switching the excitation in the order described above. In addition, A phase → AB phase → B phase → AB phase → A- phase → AB- phase → B- phase → AB- phase (or A phase → AB- phase → B- phase → AB- A rotation for 8 pulses (8 steps) of phase→A-phase→AB phase→B phase→AB phase) is hereinafter referred to as one cycle.

In this embodiment, as described above, the number of pulses required to rotate the reel once (rotate 360 degrees) is set to 504 pulses (504 pulses/8 pulses=63 cycles). Therefore, the rotation angle of rotor 740 per pulse is approximately 0.71428 degrees (=360/504).

The number of steps (number of pulses) required to rotate the reel once (rotate 360 degrees) is 504 steps, and as described with reference to FIG. are arranged, the number of steps for one frame is 504/21=24 steps.
<Excitation table>
Drive signals output from the CPU 304 to the drive circuit 322 are stored in the ROM 306 as an excitation table. By referring to this excitation table, the CPU 304 outputs an instructed drive signal. FIG. 132 is a table showing the contents of the excitation table of this embodiment. The data of each excitation table (data for controlling the rotation of the reel, so it is also called rotation control data) consists of six bit data (specifically, AI0, AI1, A-Phase, BI0 , B-I1, B-Phase) are combined to represent the phase to be excited and the excitation force. Specifically, the combination of A-I0 and A-I1 indicates the magnitude of the current (excitation force) for exciting the A-phase or A-phase coil, where A-I0 is 0 and A- 0% if I1 is 0, 20% if A-I0 is 1, A-I1 is 0, 60% if A-I0 is 0, A-I1 is 1, A-I0 is When A-Phase is 1 and AI1 is 1, it indicates 100%, when A-Phase is 1, it indicates A-phase excitation, and when it is 0, it indicates A-phase excitation. Similarly, the combination of B-I0 and B-I1 indicates the magnitude of the current (excitation force) for exciting the B-phase or B-phase coil, where B-I0 is 0 and B-I1 0% if B-I0 is 1, B-I1 is 0 then 20%, if B-I0 is 0 and B-I1 is 1 then 60%, B-I0 is 1 , B-I1 of 1 indicates 100%, B-Phase of 1 indicates B-phase excitation, and B-Phase of 0 indicates B-phase excitation.

For example, in the excitation table "55H" with the table number "B0", A-I0 is 1, AI1 is 0, A-Phase is 1, BI0 is 1, BI1 is 0, and B-Phase is Since it is 1, it indicates that the AB phase is excited at 20%. In the excitation table "26H" with the table number "C2", A-I0 is 0, AI1 is 1, A-Phase is 1, BI0 is 0, BI1 is 0, and B-Phase is Since it is 0, it indicates that the A-phase is excited at 60% (the B-phase is not excited because it is 0%). Therefore, when the table numbers are switched in the order of "C0"→"C1"→"C2"→"C3"→"C4"→"C5"→"C6"→"C7", AB phase→A phase→ Each phase is excited 60% in the order of AB-phase, B-phase, AB-phase, A-phase, AB phase, and B phase, and the rotor 740 can be rotated by an angle corresponding to one cycle. can. As described above, in this embodiment, the rotation of the reel is controlled by outputting 6-bit excitation table data (rotation control data) to the drive circuit 322 as a drive signal. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 132, an excitation force of 0% is also expressed as no excitation, an excitation force of 20% as weak excitation, an excitation force of 60% as medium excitation, and an excitation force of 100% as strong excitation.
<Rotation control table>
FIG. 133 is a table showing the contents of the rotation control table of this embodiment. The rotation control table is stored on the ROM 306, and stores the contents of rotation control for each reel control status (specifically, composed of general-purpose offset counter values, excitation tables, and holding parameters). The reel control status is information about the control state of the reels stored independently for each of the reels 110 to 112, and is information indicating that each of the reels 110 to 112 is in a stopped state. "stop control state (stop control in progress)", "acceleration state (acceleration control in progress)" which is information indicating that each of the reels 110 to 112 is in an accelerated state, and "acceleration state (in acceleration control)", when each of the reels 110 to 112 is in a constant speed state. "constant speed state (under constant speed control)" which is information indicating that the reels 110 to 112 are in the retracted state, "retracted state (under retraction control)" which is information indicating that each of the reels 110 to 112 is in the retracted state. Information indicating that each reel 112 is in a brake state "brake state (under brake control)", information indicating that each reel 110 to 112 is in a reel effect (details will be described later) " Any information of "reel effect control in progress" is stored. In this embodiment, the constant speed state is further classified into two states with different excitation forces: the "constant speed 1 state (under constant speed 1 control)" set immediately after the acceleration state and the constant speed 1 state ( There is a "constant speed 2 state (constant speed 2 control in progress)" that is set immediately after "constant speed 1 control in progress". The constant speed 1 state is provided to stably rotate the reels 110 to 112 and to save power, and the constant speed 2 state is to weaken the excitation force and suppress the heat generation of the reels 110 to 112. is provided in The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment changes the reel control status as follows: stop control→acceleration control→constant speed 1 control→constant speed 2 control→pull-in control→brake control→stop control, Rotation control of the reels 110 to 112 is performed by selecting an excitation table (rotation control data) corresponding to each reel status.

For example, when the reel control status is "under acceleration control", as shown in FIG. , the rotation control data of the excitation table "07H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "1" is set to "12" holding time, and then the rotation control data of the excitation table "37H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "2" is set to " 3" holding time, then the rotation control data of the excitation table "30H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "3" is changed to "3" holding time... and so on from the top row to the bottom row of the table. set the data. The reels 110 to 112 are accelerated by gradually decreasing the holding time of the rotation control data that is set in sequence.

The general-purpose offset counter value is a number indicating the order in which each rotation control data is executed in each reel control status (0 origin), and is a cyclic value returning to 0 after 7. A holding time (holding parameter) indicates a time for holding set rotation control data, and one holding time indicates one interrupt time (for example, 1.49 ms). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 133, 1-2 phase 100% excitation (strong excitation) is performed during “acceleration control” in this embodiment, and it takes 89.4 ms (=1.49×60). is configured as

When the reel control status is "constant speed 1 control", as shown in FIG. Next, the rotation control data of the excitation table "07H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "1" is set to "1" retention time, and then the rotation control data of the excitation table "37H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "2". "1" holding time, . In other words, the reels are stably rotated at a constant speed by executing 16 sets of rotation control data that are sequentially set by switching them in one holding time. As a result, the "during constant speed 1 control" of this embodiment is configured to require 190.72 ms (=1.49×8×16 sets) for 1-2 phase 100% excitation (strong excitation). ing. During the constant speed 1 control described above, the control pattern such as one set of rotation control data is always repeated a predetermined number of times.

When the reel control status is "constant speed 2 control", as shown in FIG. Next, the rotation control data of the excitation table "06H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "1" is set to "1" retention time, and then the rotation control data of the excitation table "26H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "2". is "1" holding time, . In other words, the reels are rotated at a constant speed by switching the rotation control data that are sequentially set every holding time. As a result, in the "constant speed 2 control" of the present embodiment, the 1-2 phase 60% excitation (medium excitation) state is continued until a stop operation is performed in the stop possible state, which will be described later in detail. It is In the constant speed 2 control described above, a control pattern such as rotation control data with a general-purpose offset counter value of "0" to "7" is repeated an indefinite number of times. Even if there is, the constant speed 2 control is terminated.

Further, when the reel control status is "pull-in control", the rotation control data used in "constant speed 2 control" are successively set. For example, in "constant speed 2 control", after setting the rotation control data of the excitation table "42H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "5" to "1" holding time, transitioning to "pull-in control" , the rotation control data of the excitation table "62H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "6" is set to "1" holding time, and then the rotation control data of the excitation table "64H" corresponding to the general-purpose offset counter value "7". is set to "1" holding time, the number of steps corresponding to the number of pull-in frames (number of pull-in frames × 24), and the rotation control data of each excitation table corresponding to the general offset counter value of 0 to 7 are set to "1" holding time The setting is sequentially repeated one by one (in this embodiment, to stop at the AB phase).

In the following explanation, the processing is divided into the second constant speed control process (Fig. 143) and the pull-in control process (Fig. 146). , the "second constant speed control" is being executed.

In addition, when the reel control status is "under brake control", as shown in FIG. 133, the rotating reel is braked by performing 1-2 phase 100% excitation (strong excitation) for 74.5 ms. , the reels are stopped.

Furthermore, when the reel control status is "under reel stop control", as shown in FIG. 133, the stop state is maintained by continuing the 1-2 phase 20% excitation (weak excitation).
<Action>
Next, the operation of the slot machine 100 including the stepping motor 700 described above will be described.
<Main control unit main processing>
First, main processing of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 3. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit 300. As shown in FIG.

The basic control of the game is mainly performed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the CPU 304 repeatedly executes the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG.

When the power is turned on, first, in step S101, various initial settings are performed. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 shown in FIG. Allow operation and set initial values.

In step S102, medal insertion/start operation acceptance processing is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted, and the winning line display lamp 120 shown in FIG. 123 is lit according to the insertion of medals. Also, preparations are made to transmit a medal insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-control section 400 shown in FIG. When the player wins the replay in the previous game, the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous game are inserted, so the player does not need to insert medals. In addition, it checks whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if it is determined that the start operation has been made, the number of inserted medals is determined, the effective winning line is determined, and the random number generation circuit 316 generates a random number. Random numbers (first random number and second random number) are acquired. Also, in this step S102, preparations are made to transmit a start lever acceptance command indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated to the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S103, internal winning combination lottery processing is performed. The details of this winning combination internal lottery process will be described later.

In step S104, reel stop preparation processing is performed. In the reel stop preparation process, reel stop data is selected for each of the reels 110 to 112 based on the result of the winning combination internal lottery process in step S103.

In step S105, reel rotation start processing for starting rotation of all the reels 110 to 112 is executed based on the start operation. The details of this reel rotation start processing will also be described later.

Steps S106 and S107 are performed for each reel and are performed for the three reels 110 to 112, so they are repeated three times. A stop button reception flag is prepared for each reel in the RAM 308 . Each reel is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 in a one-to-one relationship, and the stop button reception flag also corresponds to the stop buttons 137 to 139 in a one-to-one relationship. This stop button reception flag is set to either reception enabled or reception prohibited. In step S106, since the reel rotation start process (step S105) has started, the stop button acceptance flag is set to accept. The stop button acceptance flag is set to prohibit acceptance when the corresponding stop button is operated during the stop button acceptance process in the reel rotation control process executed in the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later. In step S107, it is determined whether or not the stop button acceptance flag that was set to allow acceptance in step S106 has returned to prohibition of acceptance. This step S107 is repeatedly executed until the stop button reception flag returns to reception prohibition. That is, in step S107, it waits for the operation of the stop buttons 137-139 to be accepted. When the determination in step S107 becomes Yes for all three reels 110-112, all three reels 110-112 are stopped.

In the following step S108, the winning of the symbols stopped by operating the stop buttons 137 to 139 is determined. Here, it is determined that the winning combination is won when the winning combination corresponding to the internally won winning combination or the winning combination with the flag being carried over is arranged (displayed) on the activated winning line. For example, if "replay-replay-replay" is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the player has won a replay prize. Also, in this step S108, preparations are made to transmit a display determination command indicating the result of winning determination to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S109, medal payout processing is performed. In this medal payout process, if the player wins any winning combination with payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out.

In step S110, game state control processing is performed. In this game state control processing, control for shifting the game state is performed. , Prepare to start the normal game from the next time. Also, in this step S110, preparations are made to transmit a game state command indicating the game state to the first sub-control section 400. FIG.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing. Various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S209 shown in FIG. 137) of the main controller timer interrupt process, which will be described later.
<Winner internal lottery process>
FIG. 135 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of the internal winning combination lottery process in step S103 shown in FIG.

At step S1031, the internal lottery for the winning combination shown in FIG. As a result of this internal lottery, if any winning combination is internally won, the flag for that winning combination is internally turned on.

Subsequently, in step S1032, a lottery for execution of reel effect is performed. The reel effect is a effect in which the spinning reels appear to be stopped. Strictly speaking, in the reel effect, the reels are not stopped but are swaying. The reel effects in this embodiment include a first reel effect that does not require the player's operation, and a second reel effect that requires the player to operate the stop buttons 137-139. The first reel effect is a so-called reel action, and the second reel effect is a so-called pseudo game. The lottery here uses the second random value obtained in step S102 and the reel effect execution possibility lottery table stored in the ROM 306 to execute the first reel effect, the second reel effect, and the reel effect. Any one lottery result is derived from the lottery results such as not executing the

In step S1033, it is determined whether or not the first reel effect (reel action) is won, and if it is won, the presence of the first reel effect is set in the reel effect information prepared in the RAM 308 (step S1034), The process proceeds to step S1035. On the other hand, if the lottery has not been won, the process proceeds directly to step S1035.

In step S1035, it is determined whether or not the second reel effect (pseudo game) is won, and if it is won, the presence of the second reel effect is set in the reel effect information prepared in the RAM 308 (step S1036), The process proceeds to step S1037. On the other hand, if the prize has not been won, the process proceeds directly to step S1037.

In step S1037, preparations are made to transmit an internal lottery result command indicating the results of the internal lottery for the winning combination and the reel effect to the first sub-control unit 400, and the internal lottery processing for the winning combination ends.
<Reel rotation start processing>
FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of reel rotation start processing in step S105 shown in FIG.

In step S1050, a game time monitoring timer value is obtained. The game time monitoring timer is a timer stored in a specific storage area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and sets the time necessary for one game to a predetermined time (for example, the minimum game time of 4.1 seconds). This is a timer that is set for the purpose of restricting the number of game media obtained or lost per unit time and restricting the gambling aspect of the game. The gaming time monitoring timer is set to a predetermined timer value (for example, a timer value corresponding to 4.1 seconds) in step S1052, which will be described later. Decremented.

In step S1051, it is determined whether or not the obtained gaming time monitoring timer value has passed 4.1 seconds or more. That is, if the value of the game time monitoring timer is 0, it means that 4.1 seconds or more have passed, but if the value of the game time monitoring timer is greater than 0, 4.1 seconds have passed. There will be no. When the game time monitoring timer value has passed 4.1 seconds or more, the current game may be started, so the process proceeds to step S1052. On the other hand, when the game time monitoring timer value has not passed 4.1 seconds, the process returns to step S1050 and is repeated. While repeating the process, the timer value of the game time monitoring timer is decremented for each timer interrupt of the main control unit 300, and when the game time monitoring timer reaches 0, the process proceeds to step S1052.

In step S1052, the game time monitoring timer value is reset. Specifically, a timer value corresponding to 4.1 seconds is stored in a specific area of RAM 308 . In the present embodiment, the time when the game time monitoring timer value is set is the start timing of one game. The end timing of one game is when the game time monitoring timer value is set next time. That is, one game is from setting the game time monitoring timer value to setting the next game time monitoring timer value. In addition, since the game time monitoring timer value is set each time the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, the period between when each reel 110 to 112 starts rotating and when each reel 110 to 112 next starts rotating is It can also be a single game. Incidentally, the end timing of one game may be when the value of the game time monitoring timer becomes 0 and the game state control process of S110 of FIG. 134 is finished. In addition, the start timing of one game is when an effective start lever is accepted, the end timing of one game is when an effective bet button operation can be accepted, and the start lever becomes effective from the time when the bet button operation can be accepted. The period until the time of acceptance may be used as a preparation period for the start of the next game.

In step S1053, a reel rotation start command to be transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 is set, and preparations for transmission are made. The reel rotation start command is a command indicating the start of rotation of the reels 110-112.

In step S1054, the status of the left reel 110 is set to "rotation start".

In step S1055, the status of the middle reel 111 is set to "rotation start".

In step S1056, the status of the right reel 112 is set to "rotation start".

In step S1057, it is determined whether or not the reel effect information set in step S1034 or step S1036 shown in FIG. , the reel control status is set to "reel effect control in progress" (step S1058), and the reel rotation start processing is terminated. If not set, the reel control status is set to "accelerated state (acceleration control in progress)" (step S1058), and this reel rotation start processing ends. As described above, the reel control status is information about the control state of each reel 110 to 112 independently stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Control state (during stop control)", "Acceleration state (during acceleration control)", "Constant speed 1 state (constant speed 1 control)", "Constant speed 2 state (constant speed 2 control)", "Retraction state" (during pull-in control)", "brake state (during brake control)", and "during reel performance control" is stored. Also, in step S1059, the acceleration start request flag is turned ON. The acceleration start request flag is flag information stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and is referred to in acceleration control processing, which will be described later.
<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 1.5 ms in this embodiment). Interrupt processing is executed at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the WDT is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 1.49 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S203, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 shown in FIG. is stored in the signal state storage area provided by partitioning.

In step S204, various game processes are performed. Specifically, an interrupt status is acquired (various interrupt statuses are acquired based on signals from various sensors 318 shown in FIG. 125), and processing according to this status is performed. For example, if the interrupt status is medal insertion processing, medal insertion acceptance processing is performed, and if the interruption status is payout processing, medal payout processing is performed.

In step S205, timer update processing is performed. Various timers are updated according to their respective time units. Specifically, in this embodiment, the game time monitoring timer described above is updated by subtraction.

In step S206, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S1003, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion errors, medal payout errors, etc. is monitored. performs error handling. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 338, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S207, stop button display control processing is performed. Details of the stop button display control process will be described later.

In step S208, if the status of each reel stored in the RAM 308 is "rotation start", reel rotation control processing (details will be described later) is performed. In this reel rotation control process, the rotation of the reels is controlled, and from a plurality of reel stop data candidates selected in step S106 of the main control unit main process, the actual After determining the reel stop data used for reel stop control, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop buttons 137 to 139 is stopped based on the determined reel stop data.

In step S<b>209 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . In this embodiment, the output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 consists of 16 bits. Bit 15 is strobe information (if ON, indicates that data is set) ~ 14 are command types (in this embodiment, basic command, start lever reception command, internal lottery command, rotation start command accompanying start of rotation of reels 110-112, stop button accompanying reception of operation of stop buttons 137-139 reception command, stop position information command accompanying the stop processing of reels 110-112, payout number command and payout end command accompanying medal payout processing, etc.), bits 0-10 are command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). Configure.

The first sub-control unit 400 can determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300 according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of effect control.

In step S210, external signal output processing is performed. In this external signal output process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 shown in FIG.

In step S211, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. When the low voltage signal is on (when the power shutdown is detected), the process proceeds to step S213, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power shutdown is not detected), the process proceeds to step S212.

In step S212, various processes (timer interrupt end process) for ending the timer interrupt process are performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S213, a specific variable and a stack pointer for restoring the state at the time of power failure are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 134 is returned to.
<Stop button display control processing>
Next, the stop button display control process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the stop button display control process in step S207 shown in FIG.

In step S2071, it is determined whether even one of the stop button acceptance flags corresponding to each of the three reels 110 to 112 is set to accept. As described above, the stop button acceptance flag is set to accept for each reel (for each stop button) in step S106 of the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. If all the stop button reception flags are set to prohibit reception, this stop button display control process ends. It is determined by referring to the reel control status of each reel whether or not the reels 110 to 112 have been shifted to the constant speed 2 state (step S2702). In this step S2702, if the reel control status of each reel is one of "constant speed 2 state", "pull-in state", and "brake state", the determination result is Yes, and the process proceeds to step S2703. On the other hand, if the reel control status of even one reel is "acceleration state" or "constant speed 1 state", the stop button display control processing ends.

In step S2703, it is determined whether or not the light shielding pieces have been detected by the index sensors for all the reels 110-112. The RAM 308 is provided with an index sensor detection storage area for storing detection information indicating whether or not the index sensor has detected the light shielding piece for each reel. The detection storage area is referred to and judgment is made. If undetected detection information is stored even for one reel, this stop button display control process ends. On the other hand, if the detected detection information is stored for all the reels 110 to 112, the process proceeds to step S2704.

The RAM 308 is also provided with a light emission mode storage area for storing the light emission modes of the light emitters 137a to 139a provided inside the stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively. That is, a lighting mode storage area is prepared for each reel (stop button). The initial light-emitting mode of the light emitters 137a to 139a is, for example, a non-light-emitting mode (turned-off mode) or a first-color light-emitting mode. Hereinafter, the initial light emission mode will be referred to as the first light emission mode. The lighting mode storage area initially stores the first lighting mode as the lighting mode information. At step S2704, all the reels 110 to 112 are not stopped (at least one reel is rotating), and all the reels 110 to 112 have already transitioned to the constant speed 2 state, In addition, the light shielding piece is detected. In this state, the light emission mode of the light emitter provided inside the stop button for the reel that continues to rotate in the constant speed 2 state is changed from the first light emission mode to the second light emission mode. The second light emission mode is, for example, a blinking mode or a second color light emission mode. Further, when the first light emission mode is the light emission mode of the first color, it may be a non-light emission mode (lighted out mode). Furthermore, when the second light emission mode is the second color light emission mode, the first light emission mode may be a flashing mode. In this manner, the first light emission mode and the second light emission mode may be different from each other including the extinguished mode and the blinking mode. The second lighting mode is a mode for notifying that the operation of the stop button in the second lighting mode is accepted. That is, it is a form informing that the reel corresponding to the stop button in the second light emitting form is in a stoppable state by operating the stop button. In step S2704, the light emitter information in the light emission mode storage area of the reel for which the stop button acceptance flag is set to be accepted is updated to the second light emission mode, and this stop button display control process ends. By executing this step S2704, for example, all the reels 110 to 112 are not stopped, all the reels 110 to 112 have already been shifted to the constant speed 2 state, and the light shielding piece has been detected. In this state, the light emission modes of the light emitters 137a to 139a provided inside all the stop buttons 137 to 139 change to the second light emission mode in unison. In addition, if some of the reels are stopped and the remaining reels have already transitioned to the constant speed 2 state and the light shielding piece is detected, the remaining reels (rotating Only the lighting mode of the light emitter provided inside the stop button of the reel) changes to the second lighting mode.
<Reel Rotation Control Processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 139, reel rotation control processing will be described in detail. FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of reel rotation control processing in step S208 shown in FIG.

Steps S208a to S208c are performed for each reel and are performed for the three reels 110 to 112, so step S208a is repeated at least three times. In this step S208a, it is determined whether or not the stop button acceptance flag is set to accept. That is, it is determined whether or not the target reel is rotating. If the stop button reception flag is set to prohibit reception, step S208a is executed for the remaining reels, or if step S208a is executed for all reels, the process proceeds to step S208d. On the other hand, if the stop button acceptance flag is set to accept, it is determined whether or not the light blocking piece of the target reel has been detected by the index sensor (step S208b). In this determination, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the index sensor has been received. If not, step S208a is executed for the remaining reels, or step S208a is executed for all reels. If so, the process proceeds to step S208d. On the other hand, if it has been received, the index sensor detection storage area of the target reel is updated with the detection information that has already been detected (step S208c), and the process proceeds to step S208d. As described above, in the present embodiment, every time the reel rotation control process is executed, if the stop button reception flag is set to accept reception, it is determined whether or not the light shielding piece of the target reel has been detected by the index sensor. Therefore, even if the reel control status is "accelerating state" or "constant speed 1 state", the light shielding piece of the target reel can be detected. However, if the light shielding piece is detected only in "a certain state" (for example, "constant speed 1 state" or "constant speed 2 state"), refer to the reel control status between steps S208a and S208b. If Yes, step S208b is executed, and if No, step S208a is executed for the remaining reels, or step S208a is executed for all reels. If S208a is being executed, the process should proceed to step S208d.

In step S208d, stop button acceptance processing is executed. This stop button reception processing will be described later.

Steps S208f to S208k are performed for each reel, and are performed for the three reels 110-112. In step S208f, reel control information is acquired. Here, the reel control information means all information relating to rotation control of the reels 110 to 112 and is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 . In this embodiment, the reel control information includes values such as the reel control status described above, the general-purpose offset counter, the reel control status transition counter described later, and the holding counter.

In step S208g, reel control determination processing (details will be described later) is performed based on the acquired reel control information.

In step S208h, it is determined whether or not the reel drive signal switching request flag is ON. The reel driving signal switching request flag is flag information stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and indicates whether or not to switch the currently set rotation control data. When the reel driving signal switching request flag is ON, the currently set rotation control data is switched, and when the reel driving signal switching request flag is OFF, the currently set rotation control data is not switched. Note that the reel driving signal switching request flag is set in the acceleration control process. If the reel driving signal switching request flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S208i, and if the reel driving signal switching request flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S208k.

In step S208i, rotation control data is acquired based on the reel control status and general-purpose offset counter value contained in the acquired reel control information. Specifically, the corresponding excitation table (rotation control data) is acquired from the table shown in FIG. 133 based on the reel control status and the general-purpose offset counter value. For example, if the reel control status is "under acceleration control" and the general-purpose offset counter value is "0", the rotation control data of the excitation table "77H" is obtained.

At step S208j, the rotation control data obtained at step S208i is set.

In step S208k, since the contents of the reel control information have been changed according to the processing described above, the reel control information is updated.
<Reel control determination processing>
FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of reel control determination processing in step S208g shown in FIG. The reel control determination process is a process of sequentially switching reel rotation control according to the reel control status described above. Specifically, the processes are executed in the order of acceleration control process, reel effect control process, first constant speed control process, second constant speed control process, pull-in control process, and brake control process.

In step S301, the reel control status is acquired.

In step S302, it is determined whether or not the acquired reel control status is "under control to stop", and when the acquired reel control status is "under control to stop", the reel control determination process ends. On the other hand, when the acquired reel control state is not "stopping control", the process proceeds to S303.

In step S303, it is determined whether or not the acquired reel control state is "reel effect control". When the reel control state is "under reel effect control", the process proceeds to step S304, and reel effect control processing is performed. As described above, the reel effects include the first reel effect (so-called reel action) that does not require player operation, and the reel effect (so-called pseudo game) that allows the player to operate the left, middle, and right stop buttons 137 to 139. There is. In the control of the first reel effect, at least one of control processing of acceleration control, first constant speed control, second constant speed control, and brake control of this game may be diverted, or first reel effect control Each dedicated control process may be prepared. Also, in the first reel effect, the reels may be accelerated and then decelerated (executed brake control) before maintaining the constant speed state. In the control of the second reel effect, at least one of control processing of acceleration control, first constant speed control, second constant speed control, brake control, and pull-in control of this game may be diverted, or reel effect Each control process dedicated to control may be prepared. In addition, pull-in control may be performed by the number of sliding frames of 5 or more, which cannot be done in this game. After the end of the reel presentation, the reel control status is set to acceleration control after performing random delay processing for delaying the rotation start timing of each reel and preventing a plurality of reels from simultaneously starting to rotate. On the other hand, when the reel control state is not "reel effect control", the process proceeds to step S305.

In step S305, it is determined whether or not the obtained reel control state is "under acceleration control". When the reel control state is "under acceleration control", the process advances to step S306 to perform acceleration control processing (control processing for accelerating the rotation of the reel; details will be described later). On the other hand, when the reel control state is not "under acceleration control", the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S307, it is determined whether or not the obtained reel control state is "constant speed 1 control". When the reel control state is "constant speed 1 control", the process advances to step S308 to perform a first constant speed control process (control process for maintaining reel rotation at a constant speed; details will be described later). On the other hand, when the reel control state is not "constant speed 1 control", the process proceeds to step S309.

In step S309, it is determined whether or not the obtained reel control state is "constant speed 2 control". When the reel control state is "constant speed 2 control", the process advances to step S310 to perform the second constant speed control process (control process for maintaining the rotation of the reels at a constant speed; details will be described later). On the other hand, when the reel control state is not "constant speed 2 control", the process proceeds to step S311.

In step S311, it is determined whether or not the acquired reel control state is "under brake control". When the reel control state is "under brake control", the process proceeds to step S312, and brake control processing (control processing for stopping the rotation of the reel; details will be described later) is performed. On the other hand, when the reel control state is not "under brake control", the process proceeds to step S313.

In step S313, since the reel control state is "in control of retraction", retraction control processing (processing for controlling reel retraction to the stop position; details will be described later) is performed.
<Acceleration control processing>
FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of acceleration control processing in step S306 shown in FIG.

In step S306a, it is determined whether or not there is an acceleration start request based on the acceleration start request flag. Since the acceleration start request flag is set to ON in step S1059 of the reel rotation start process shown in FIG. 136, YES is determined in step S306a of the first timer interrupt process. Since the acceleration start request flag is set to OFF in step S306d, which will be described later, NO is determined in step S306a of the second and subsequent timer interrupt processes. If there is an acceleration start request, the process proceeds to step S306b, and if there is no acceleration start request, the process proceeds to step S306f.

In step S306b, the value of the reel control status transition counter is set to 0, which is the initial value. Here, the reel control status transition counter is a counter that measures the number of repetition sets (the number of cycles) of the rotation control data of 8 steps per cycle, and in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. and terminate the acceleration control process.

In step S306c, 0, which is the initial value, is set to the value of the general-purpose offset counter.

In step S306d, the reel driving signal switching request flag is turned ON. Also, the acceleration start request flag is set to OFF.

In step S306e, a dummy value of 0 is set to the symbol interval counter (details will be described later). The value of the symbol interval counter set in step S306e is used in the second constant speed control process, which will be described later. After completing the process of step S306e, the process proceeds to step S306q.

In step S306f, 1 is subtracted from the value of the holding counter. The value of the holding counter is set in step S306q, which will be described later, and is decremented by 1 in one timer interrupt process. Note that the initial value set in the holding counter in step S306q is the holding parameter value corresponding to the set general-purpose offset counter value. For example, as shown in FIG. , 12 is set in the holding counter as an initial value.

In step S306g, the reel driving signal switching request flag is set to OFF.

In step S306h, it is determined whether or not the decremented holding counter value is zero. If the value of the hold counter is 0, it is time to switch the rotation control data, so the process proceeds to step S306i. become.

In step S306i, since it is time to switch the rotation control data, the reel driving signal switching request flag is set to ON.

In step S306j, 1 is added to the value of the general-purpose offset counter in order to set the next rotation control data.

In step S306k, it is determined whether or not the added value of the general-purpose offset counter is eight. If the value of the general-purpose offset counter is 8, the rotation control of the set (cycle) is finished, so the process proceeds to step S306l. Since the control has not ended, the process proceeds to step S306q.

In step S306l, 0, which is the initial value, is set to the general-purpose offset counter value in order to shift to the rotation control of the next set (cycle).

In step S306m, 1 is added to the value of the reel control status transition counter.

In step S306n, it is determined whether or not the added value of the reel control status transition counter is 3. When the value of the reel control status transition counter is 3, the process proceeds to step S306o, and when the value of the reel control status transition counter is not 3, the process proceeds to step S306q.

In step S306o, since all rotation controls set during acceleration control have been performed, the reel control status is set to "constant speed 1 control".

In step S306p, 0, which is the initial value, is set to the value of the reel control status transition counter. After the process of step S306p ends, the acceleration control process ends.

In step S306q, the rotation control table shown in FIG. 133 is referred to, and the retention parameter value corresponding to the set reel control status transition counter value and general-purpose offset counter value is acquired when the reel control status is "under acceleration control". and sets the obtained retention parameter value as the initial value of the retention counter. For example, as shown in FIG. 133, when the reel control status transition counter value is 0 and the general offset counter value is 0, 12 is set as the initial value of the hold counter, the reel control status transition counter value is 1, and the general offset counter value is 12. If 7, then 1 is set as the initial value of the hold counter. After the process of step S306q ends, the acceleration control process ends.
<First constant speed control process>
FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing in detail the first constant speed control process of step S308 shown in FIG.

In step S308a, 1 is added to the value of the general-purpose offset counter. That is, in the first constant speed control process, as shown in FIG. 133, the rotation control data is switched every interrupt time, so the value of the general-purpose offset counter is incremented for each timer interrupt process. Since the reel drive signal switching request flag is set to ON in step S1309 of the acceleration control process, the switching process is not performed. It remains ON during the second constant speed control process. Therefore, in the reel rotation control process of FIG. 139, the rotation control data corresponding to the added general-purpose offset counter value is set for each timer interrupt process (see step S208j of FIG. 139).

In step S308b, it is determined whether or not the added value of the general-purpose offset counter is eight. If the value of the general-purpose offset counter is 8, the process advances to step S308c to shift to rotation control for the next set (cycle). Since rotation control has not ended, the first constant speed control process ends.

In step S308c, the value of the general-purpose offset counter is set to 0, which is the initial value, in order to shift to the rotation control of the next set (cycle).

In step S308d, 1 is added to the value of the reel control status transition counter.

In step S308e, it is determined whether or not the added value of the reel control status transition counter is 16. If the value of the reel control status transition counter is 16, 16 sets of rotation control have been completed (see FIG. 133), so the process proceeds to step S308f. The constant speed control process ends.

In step S308f, since all rotation controls set during constant speed 1 control have been performed, the reel control status is set to "constant speed 2 control".
<Second constant speed control process>
FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing in detail the second constant speed control process of step S310 shown in FIG. The second constant-speed control process mainly carries out the process of tracking the symbol positions on the reels. In order for the main control unit 300 to grasp the symbol positions on the reels, the symbol positions are monitored using two counters, a "symbol number counter" and a "symbol interval counter". Here, the "symbol number counter" and the "symbol interval counter" will be explained.

FIG. 126 is also a diagram showing the relationship between the symbol number counter and the symbol interval counter. The symbol number counter is a counter provided in the RAM 308 for storing and holding the symbol positioned at the middle stage of the symbol display window 113, which is the reference position. BB pattern is the reference position, and counting starts when the index sensor 606A passes the light blocking piece 612D. Each symbol and a count value are associated in advance, and the main control unit 300 can identify the symbols stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113 from the value of the symbol number counter when the reels are stopped, and judge winning. can. The pattern interval counter is also a counter provided in the RAM 308, and counts the number of driving pulses (the number of times of timer interrupt processing) per one pattern. The main control unit 300 sets the number of driving pulses per symbol (here, 24) in the symbol interval counter, subtracts each time the driving pulse is output, and when the value of the symbol interval counter becomes 0, the symbol number counter. is updated by 1.

In step S310a, 1 is added to the value of the general offset counter. That is, in the second constant speed control process, as shown in FIG. 133, the rotation control data is switched every interrupt time, so the value of the general-purpose offset counter is incremented for each timer interrupt process. In addition, since the reel drive signal switching request flag remains ON, in the reel rotation control processing of FIG. 139 step S208l).

In step S310b, it is determined whether or not the added value of the general-purpose offset counter is eight. If the value of the general-purpose offset counter is 8, the process advances to step S310c to shift to rotation control for the next set (cycle). Since the rotation control has not ended, the process proceeds to step S310d.

In step S310c, the value of the general-purpose offset counter is set to 0, which is the initial value, in order to shift to the rotation control of the next set (cycle).

In step S310d, 1 is subtracted from the value of the pattern interval counter. That is, the value of the pattern interval counter is decremented for each interrupt time.

In step S310e, it is determined whether or not the subtracted value of the pattern interval counter is zero. When the value of the pattern interval counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S310f, and when the value of the pattern interval counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S310h.

In step S310f, when the value of the pattern interval counter is 0, the value of the pattern interval counter is set to 24, which is the initial value, because it is replaced by the next pattern.

At step S310g, 1 is subtracted from the value of the symbol number counter so as to update to the next symbol.

In step S310h, detection information of the index sensor is obtained from the index sensor detection storage area of the RAM308. As described above, this detection information is updated in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 139 (step S208c). In each of the three reels, the light shielding piece is provided at the position where the symbol number counter value is 0 and the pattern interval counter value is 0. When it passes through, it is considered to be detected.

In step S310i, when the acquired detection information of the index sensor has been detected, the process proceeds to step S310j, and when not detected, the process proceeds to step S310n.

In step S310j, since the symbol position on the reel has been searched, the stop button validity information is set in a predetermined area of the RAM308. That is, when the light shielding piece provided at the position where the symbol number counter value is 0 and the symbol interval counter value is 0 is detected in a constant speed state, the stop position of the reel can be controlled, and the reel can be stopped. become. When the stop button valid information is set (when the stop is enabled), the operation of the stop button can be accepted. When a stop button for which stop button valid information is not set is operated, even if the operation itself is accepted, the operation is invalidated and the reel corresponding to the stop button does not stop. Alternatively, the operation itself may not be accepted.

In this embodiment, the stop button validity information is set in the second constant speed control process, but steps S310h to S310j are executed in the first constant speed control process, so that the stop button validity information is set in the second constant speed control process. may be set in the first constant speed control process.

In step S310k, the value of the pattern interval counter is set to 24, which is the initial value.

In step S310l, 0, which is the initial value, is set to the value of the pattern number counter.

In step S310m, the value of the step-out detection counter provided in the RAM 308 is set to 0, which is the initial value. After the process of step S310m ends, the second constant speed control process ends.

In step S310n, step-out detection processing is performed based on the value of the step-out detection counter. In the step-out detection process, the value of the step-out detection counter is incremented by 1 for each interrupt to obtain a specific value (for example, the number of pulses required to rotate the reel once (360 degrees), here 504). ), step-out (so-called out-of-step) is determined, and acceleration control is restarted for all reels that are not operated, but only the stepped-out reels may be restarted from acceleration control. In this embodiment, the step-out detection process is performed only in the second constant-speed control process. In this case, the step-out detection process is not performed, and the main control unit 300 cannot detect the step-out. However, the step-out detection process may be performed during this period as well. In addition to the step-out, processing for detecting other abnormal states (for example, resonance, misstep, motor stoppage) may be performed. After the process of step S310n ends, the second constant speed control process ends.
<Stop button reception processing>
FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing in detail the stop button acceptance process of step S208d shown in FIG. The stop button acceptance process is executed after the stop button validity information is set in the state where the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, that is, in step S310j of the second constant speed control process shown in FIG. It is what is done. The stop button acceptance process is a process of determining the stop position of the corresponding reel based on the operation of the stop buttons 137-139.

In step S208d1, stop acceptance information is acquired. Here, the stop acceptance information is stop button valid information or a part of the reel control information, and means all information necessary for determining stop acceptance.

In step S208d2, a stoppable reel is determined from the obtained stop reception information, and stoppable reel information is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 (for example, when it is determined that the left reel 110 is a stoppable reel, , set the left reel 110).

In step S208d3, it is determined whether or not the stop button corresponding to the reel represented by the set stoppable reel information has been operated. That is, it is determined whether or not the operation of the stop button corresponding to the stoppable reel has been accepted. If there is an operation (acceptance) of the stop button, the process proceeds to step S208d4, and if there is no operation (acceptance) of the stop button, the process proceeds to step S208d8.

In step S208d4, data on the reel to be stopped (reel data to be stopped) is obtained.

In step S208d5, a pull-in counter setting process (details will be described later) is performed.

In step S208d6, by operating the stop button corresponding to the stoppable reel, the status of the stopped reel is updated to "stop".

In step S208d7, the stop button acceptance flag, which has been set to allow acceptance, is set to prohibit acceptance.

In step S208d8, the lighting mode information stored in the lighting mode storage area prepared for each reel in the RAM 308 is updated. That is, the lighting mode of the light emitter built into the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped is updated from the second lighting mode (eg, blue lighting mode) to the first lighting mode (eg, red lighting mode). . When step S208d8 ends, the stop button acceptance process ends.
<Pull-in counter setting processing>
FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing in detail the pull-in counter setting process in step S208d5 shown in FIG.

In step S8d51, the value of the pattern number counter is acquired to detect the position where the stop operation was performed.

In step S8d52, the number of frames to be drawn is acquired from the selected reel stop control data based on the position where the stop operation was performed. That is, the reel stop control data is selected based on the result of the winning combination internal lottery process (internal lottery result) shown in FIG. In the reel stop control data, the number of drawing frames corresponding to the symbol position number at the symbol position (middle stage reference) when the stop operation is performed is defined.

In step S8d53, the excitation table is referenced to obtain the remaining number of interrupts. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the motor is stopped at a position corresponding to the AB phase, so that the excitation phase following the excitation phase indicated by the previously set rotation control data (the last rotation control data set during the constant speed 2 control) is stopped. The number of steps from the excitation phase to the excitation phase one ahead of the AB phase is obtained as the remaining number of interrupts. For example, if a stop operation is performed during control using the excitation table 22H during constant speed 2 control, the remaining number of interrupts is 3 steps.

In step S8d54, a pull-in counter value is calculated from the acquired pull-in frame number and interrupt remaining number, and the calculated pull-in counter value is set in the pull-in counter. Specifically, a predetermined pre-determined position (for example, the AB phase corresponding to the stop-holding position) before the stop-holding position (for example, a position corresponding to a predetermined AB phase) where the rotor 740 is scheduled to be stopped and held. The value up to the position corresponding to the AB phase one cycle before) becomes the step number corresponding to the pull-in frame number, and the value obtained by adding the interrupt remaining number to this value is set in the pull-in counter.

In step S8d55, the reel control status is set to "pull-in control".
<pull-in control processing>
FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing in detail the pull-in control process of step S313 shown in FIG. Here, the pull-in control process is to realize stop control according to the result of the internal lottery. In this embodiment, it refers to a process of sliding and stopping 0 to 4 frames. As a result, for a winning combination internally won in an internal lottery or a winning combination whose flag is being carried over, the corresponding symbol combinations are allowed to be displayed together, otherwise each winning combination is allowed. The symbol combinations corresponding to are not displayed together.

In step S3131, 1 is added to the value of the general-purpose offset counter. That is, in the pull-in control process, the rotation control data is switched every interrupt time, so the value of the general-purpose offset counter is updated for each timer interrupt process. In addition, since the reel drive signal switching request flag remains ON, in the reel rotation control processing shown in FIG. See step S208j in FIG. 139).

In step S3132, it is determined whether or not the added value of the general-purpose offset counter is eight. If the value of the general-purpose offset counter is 8, the rotation control for the rest of the set (cycle) has ended, so the process advances to step S3133. Since the remaining rotation control has not ended, the process proceeds to step S3134.

In step S3133, 0, which is the initial value, is set to the value of the general-purpose offset counter.

In step S3134, the value of the pull-in counter is updated. Specifically, the value of the pull-in counter is decremented by one.

In step S3135, it is determined whether or not the updated pull-in counter value is zero. If the value of the attraction counter is 0, the process advances to step S3136, and if the value of the attraction counter is not 0, the attraction control process ends.

In step S3136, the pull-in counter value becomes 0 and the stop position is reached, so the reel control status is set to "under brake control".

In step S3137, an initial value of 50 is set as the value of the holding counter. Here, this set holding counter value 50 is the holding time of the rotation control data when the general-purpose offset counter value is 0 when the reel control status is "under brake control" (see FIG. 133). After the process of step S3137 ends, the pull-in control process ends.
<Brake control processing>
FIG. 147 is a flow chart showing in detail the brake control process of step S312 shown in FIG.

In step S3121, 1 is subtracted from the value of the holding counter. The value of the holding counter is initialized at step S3137 shown in FIG. 146, and is decremented by 1 in one timer interrupt process.

In step S3122, it is determined whether or not the decremented holding counter value is zero. If the value of the holding counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S3123, and if the value of the holding counter is not 0, the brake control process ends.

In step S3123, since rotation control in brake control is completed, the reel control status is set to "reel stop control in progress". When the reel control status is "reel stop control", weak excitation (20% excitation) is continued at the stop holding position (for example, predetermined AB phase) (see FIG. 133). After the process of step S3123 ends, the brake control process ends.
<Processing of first sub-controller 400>
The processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 4A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. 3B is a flowchart of command input processing of the first sub-controller 400, FIG. 4C is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400, ) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S2001. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S2002, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S2003.

In step S2003, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S2004, first sub-control unit command input processing (details will be described later) is performed. In the first sub-controller command input process, it is determined whether or not a command has been received from the main controller 300 .

In step S2005, effect update processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S2004, based on the results of each event processing corresponding to this command (for example, effect setting processing, game state control processing, etc.), effect data is read from the ROM 406, etc. , and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data of each effect device (speaker, lamp, liquid crystal image display device, shutter, etc.) is updated.

In step S2006, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command for the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read out in step S2005, this command is output to the sound source IC 418 .

In step S2007, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 420 in the effect data read in step S2005, this command is output to the drive circuit 422. FIG.

In step S2008, information output processing is performed. In the information output process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S2005, the setting for outputting this control command is performed, and the process returns to step S2002. As a result, the set control command is transmitted to the second sub-controller 500 .

Next, the command input processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 26(b). This first sub-controller 400 command input process is a flow chart showing the flow of the first sub-controller 400 command input process in step S2004 of FIG. 148(a).

In step S2101, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed command in the command storage area of the RAM 408. FIG. If there is an unprocessed command, the process proceeds to step S2102, and if there is no unprocessed command, the first sub-controller 400 command input processing ends.

In step S2102, the process jumps to the process according to the unprocessed command. For example, when the unprocessed command is a medal insertion command, processing when inserting medals, processing when receiving a start lever when receiving a start lever, processing when receiving a start lever when an internal lottery command, processing when an internal lottery is performed, stop button In the case of the reception command, the processing jumps to the stop button reception processing, the display judgment command jumps to the display judgment processing, and the game state command jumps to the game state control processing.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 148(c). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S2201 of command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 148(d). The first sub-control unit 400 has a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S2301, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S2002 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 148(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S2002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S2302, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, a specific example in which the reels 110 to 112 start rotating from a stopped state will be described.

First, a conventional example will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 149 shows the changes in the state of the three reels, the changes in the detection state of the light shielding pieces provided on each reel in the index sensor, and the changes in the operation-acceptable state of the stop button corresponding to each reel. 4 is a timing chart showing changes in the light emission mode of light emitters built into each stop button.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 149 shows start lever operation, left reel, middle reel, and right reel in order from the top. At the top of the timing chart, symbols indicating timings (a) to (f) are marked, and below them are arrows (a), (b), and (c). Arrows are indicated. The arrow (A) indicates the period during which the acceleration control shown in FIG. 133 is being executed. Before the period indicated by the arrow (A), each of the reels 110 to 112 was in a state of being stopped after rotating. The (C) arrow represents the period during execution of the first constant speed control shown in FIG. 133, and the (C) arrow represents the period during execution of the second constant speed control shown in FIG. be.

At the timing of (a), the start lever is turned on, and the left reel, middle reel, and right reel start rotating all at once. As indicated by the arrow (A), all the reels are in the period during which acceleration control is being executed. Acceleration control ends at the timing (b), and all the reels enter the period during which the first constant speed control is being executed as indicated by the (i) arrow. At the timing of (c), the first constant speed control ends, and all the reels are in the period of execution of the second constant speed control as indicated by the (c) arrow. In this example, neither the acceleration control nor the first constant-speed control is detected, and the light-shielding strips of the reels are not detected during the second constant-speed control. The light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected at the timing of (d), the light shielding piece of the middle reel is detected at the timing of (e), and the light shielding piece of the right reel is detected at the timing of (f). The timing at which the light shielding piece of each reel is detected varies, and the detection timing differs depending on the position at which the reel was stopped before starting rotation.

Conventionally, in the period during which the second constant-speed control shown in FIG. 133 is being executed, all the stop buttons are brought into the operation-acceptable state all at once at the timing when all the light shielding pieces are detected. Until then, each stop button cannot be operated even if it is operated, but after the timing of (f), any stop button can be operated. The timing chart shown in FIG. 149 indicates whether the operation of the left stop button is acceptable/not acceptable, the operation of the middle stop button is acceptable/not acceptable, and the operation of the right stop button is acceptable/not acceptable. In addition, even if the operation of the stop button is accepted, the operation may be handled invalidly or effectively for control purposes. Acceptable/unacceptable represents a reel stoppable state/stoppable state.

Furthermore, below it, the light emission mode of the light emitter (hereinafter referred to as "stop button LED") built in each stop button is shown. The first light emission mode of each stop button LED is, for example, a red light emission mode, and the second light emission mode is, for example, a blue light emission mode. All of the stop button LEDs change to the second light emission mode after the timing of (f). That is, in the stop button operation unacceptable state (reels unstoppable state), all of the stop button LEDs are in the first light emitting mode, and when the stop button operation acceptable state (reel stop possible state) is shifted, any stop The button LED also changes to the second lighting mode. In the conventional example shown in FIG. 139, the stop button LED notifies that the operation of the stop button is unacceptable (the reel cannot be stopped) in the first light emission mode, and the stop button operation is acceptable (the reel can be stopped). state) in the second light emission mode.

FIG. 150 shows changes in the states of the reels 110 to 112, changes in the detection state of the respective light shielding pieces, changes in the states in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, and the LEDs 137a to 137b of the stop buttons in this embodiment. 139a is a timing chart showing changes in the light emission mode of 139a. 149 will be omitted, and differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 149 will be mainly described.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 150, when the light shielding piece is detected on any one of the three reels 110 to 112, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 corresponding to the reel on which the light shielding piece is detected is accepted. Move to enabled state. That is, after starting rotation, it is possible to shift from the reel stop impossible state to the reel stop possible state for each reel. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 150, the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected first (detected at the timing of (d)), so that the left stop button 137 is first detected (at the timing of (d)). ), and then the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected (detected at the timing of (e)), so that the middle stop button 138 transitions to the operation-acceptable state at the timing of (e). Finally, the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected (detected at the timing of (f)), so that the right stop button 139 shifts to the operation-acceptable state at the timing of (f). However, any of the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a does not change from the first light emission mode to the second light emission mode until the timing (timing (f)) when all the light shielding pieces are detected, as in the conventional art. . In other words, the reel-to-reel non-stoppable state can be shifted to the reel-stoppable state for each reel, but the stop button LEDs change to the second emission mode collectively at the timing when the last reel shifts to the reel-stoppable state. . Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the stop button LED is in the first light emission mode, the corresponding stop button may be in the operation-acceptable state. The arrow (H) shown in FIG. 150 represents a period in which only some of the three stop buttons are in an operation-acceptable state. On the other hand, the (O) arrow represents the period during which all of the three stop buttons 137 to 139 are in an operation-acceptable state.

According to the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, by accepting the stop operation from the reel whose stop position can be controlled by detecting the light shielding piece, the operation of the stop button is accepted earlier than before. will be available. Therefore, the game progresses at a good tempo without the player feeling any stress. In addition, there is a case where the presence of the game can be heightened by immediately responding to the player's operation.

FIG. 151 is a timing chart when a step-out occurs on the spinning right reel in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment. 150 will be omitted, and differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 150 will be mainly described.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 151, a step-out occurs in the right reel 112 at the stage when the light shielding piece of any reel is not detected. That is, while all reels 110 to 112 are under the second constant speed control, only the right reel 112 is stepped out (timing (g)). After the step-out occurs on the right reel 112, the step-out is detected by the step-out detection process (step S310n) shown in FIG. 143 (timing of (a')). Detected (at the timing of (d)), the left stop button 137 is ready to be operated (the left reel 110 is ready to be stopped). In addition, the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is also detected before the step-out is detected (timing (e)), and the middle stop button 138 is also ready for operation before the step-out is detected (the middle reel 111 is also ready to be stopped). ). Even if some of the stop buttons are ready to be operated (during the period of the arrow (e)), some of the stop buttons are not operated, and eventually the right reel 112 steps out at the timing of (a'). is detected. When the step-out of the right reel 112 is detected, both the left reel 110 and the middle reel 111 continue to rotate at a constant speed. become. That is, not only the stepped-out right reel 112 but also the remaining two reels (110, 111) rotating at a constant speed are accelerated again. The step-out and re-acceleration have changed the positional relationship of the light-shielding pieces on the respective reels, and during the execution of the second constant speed control after re-acceleration, the light-shielding piece of the right reel 112 is first detected. ((d') timing), then the light blocking piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected ((e') timing), and finally the middle reel 111 light blocking piece is detected ((f') timing). Therefore, after re-acceleration, the order in which the stop buttons become ready to accept operations (the order in which the reels become stop-ready) is different from that before re-acceleration. The stop button LEDs 137a to 139a remain in the first light emission mode before reacceleration, but change to the second light emission mode at the timing (f') after reacceleration.

FIG. 152 is a timing chart when step-out occurs in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment and the stop button is operated before re-acceleration. 151 will be omitted, and differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 151 will be mainly described. Fig. 152 shows left stop button actuation, middle stop button actuation, and right stop button actuation at the bottom.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 152, after stepping out of the right reel 112 (timing (g)), the light blocking piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected (timing (d)), and the left stop button 137 is operated. become acceptable. The left stop button 137 is operated at the timing (h) before the step-out occurring in the right reel 112 is detected, and the left reel 110 is brake-controlled and stopped. Note that the timing chart of FIG. 152 shows the state of the left reel 110 ignoring the reel pull-in control (the same applies to subsequent timing charts). Before the step-out that occurred on the right reel 112 is detected, the light blocking piece of the middle reel 111 is also detected (timing (e)), but the middle stop button 138 is not operated, and the middle reel 111 remains stationary. Keep spinning fast.

Before long, the step-out of the right reel 112 is detected at the timing of (a'). At the timing (a'), the left reel 110 is in a stopped state, the middle reel 111 is in a constant speed rotation state, and the right reel 112 is in a step-out state. When the step-out of the right reel 112 is detected, acceleration control is restarted except for the stopped reel, that is, only the rotating reel. As a result, the stepped-out right reel 112 and the middle reel 111 are accelerated again, and the previously stopped left reel 110 maintains the stopped state.

The left reel 110 maintains a stopped state even when the re-accelerated right reel 112 and middle reel 111 shift to constant speed rotation. will not be ready for operation.

The light shielding piece of the re-accelerated right reel 112 is detected at the timing (d'), and the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 which is re-accelerated is detected at the timing (f'). When the light-shielding pieces of all the rotating reels except the stop reel are detected, the stop button LED corresponding to the rotating reel changes from the first light emission mode to the second light emission mode. In the example shown in FIG. 152, the right stop button LED 139a and the middle stop button LED 138a change to the second light emission mode at the timing (f') when the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected. Note that the left stop button LED 137a remains in the first light emission mode.

FIG. 153 is a timing chart in the case where power failure and power recovery occur during execution of the second constant speed control in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment. 150 will be omitted, and differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 150 will be mainly described.

During execution of the second constant speed control, the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is first detected (timing (d)), then the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected (timing (e)), and finally The light blocking piece on the right reel 112 is detected (timing (f)). During the period indicated by the arrow (O), all three reels 110 to 112 are in a stoppable state. However, when none of the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated and the three reels 110 to 112 continue to rotate at a constant speed, power failure occurs. All of the three reels 110 to 112 rotating by inertia stop until the power is restored. Eventually, the power is restored at the timing of (a'), the three reels 110 to 112 all start acceleration control, and after the first constant speed control, the second constant speed control is being executed. When each reel stops due to power failure, the positional relationship of the light shielding pieces on each reel changes, and during the execution of the second constant speed control after the power is restored, the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is first detected ( (d') timing), then the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected ((e') timing), and finally the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected ((f') timing). Therefore, after the power is restored, the order in which the stop buttons become ready to accept operations (the order in which the reels become ready to be stopped) is different from that before the power failure.

The example of FIG. 153 described above is an example in which a period of time has elapsed from when the power was cut off to when the power was restored so that the reels would stop. When the power is restored immediately after the power is cut off, that is, when the power is restored before stopping even though the rotation speed of the reel is reduced, each reel is detected in the step-out detection process (step S310n) shown in FIG. 143 after the power is restored. Step-outs of reels 110 to 112 are detected, and like the right reel 112 described in the example shown in FIG.

The power failure/recovery example described with reference to FIG. 153 may occur after the examples shown in the timing charts of FIG. 150 and subsequent figures are completed, before the examples are started, or during the examples.

FIG. 154 is a timing chart when the operation of the stop button is accepted before the stop button LED changes to the second light emission mode in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment. 150 will be omitted, and differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 150 will be mainly described. FIG. 154 also shows left stop button actuation, middle stop button actuation, and right stop button actuation at the bottom.

During execution of the second constant speed control, the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected at the timing of (d), and the left stop button 137 becomes ready for operation. Note that the left stop button LED 137a remains in the first light emission mode. The left stop button 137 is operated at the timing (h) before the light shielding pieces of all the reels are detected, and the left reel 110 is brake-controlled and stopped. At the timing of (e), the light blocking piece of the middle reel 111 is detected. At the timing of (f), the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected, and the light shielding pieces of all the reels are detected. The middle reel 111 continues rotating at a constant speed even at the timing of (f). In other words, the middle stop button 138 is not operated even when it becomes ready for operation at the timing of (e). At this timing (f), the middle stop button LED 138a and the right stop button LED 139a change to the second lighting mode, but the left stop button LED 137a remains in the first lighting mode. In this way, the stop button LED of the reel stopped before changing to the second light emission mode remains in the first light emission mode. If the middle stop button 138 is operated between the timing (e) and the timing (f), the middle stop button LED 138a remains in the first light emission mode even at the timing (f). , and only the right stop button LED 139a changes to the second light emission mode.

FIG. 155 is a timing chart when the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment detects the light shielding piece and stops the game at the shortest number of frames. 150 will be omitted, and differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 150 will be mainly described. FIG. 155 also shows left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, and right stop button 139, respectively, at the bottom.

As indicated by the values of the hold parameters in FIG. 133, acceleration control requires 60 interrupts and first constant speed control requires 128 interrupts. Further, in this example, even if the light shielding piece is detected, the stop button cannot shift to the operation-acceptable state unless the state shifts to the second constant-speed control. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 155, the light blocking piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected at the timing (timing (b)) at which the first constant speed control is started. It is possible that the light blocking piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected during the acceleration control (the period indicated by the arrow (A)). However, the light blocking piece may not be detected during the acceleration control, and may be detected only during the constant speed state (during the first constant speed control or the second constant speed control).

FIG. 156 shows the state of the left reel at each timing. FIG. 156 shows FIG. 156(b), FIG. 156(b′), FIG. 156(c′), FIG. 156(c″-1), and FIG. In both figures, the left reel 110 is shown on the left side, the right reel 112 is shown on the right side, and the middle reel 111 is shown in the center.

In FIG. 156(b), the left reel 110, the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 are all rotating, but only the left reel 110 is shown so that the pattern can be seen (FIG. 156(b')). and (c') in the same figure). FIG. 156(b) shows the left reel 110 at the timing of FIG. 155(b). That is, when the first constant speed control is started (when the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected), the value of the symbol number counter shown in FIG. 0 BB pattern is located.

24 drive pulses must be output to move one symbol. On the left reel 110, the middle stage of the symbol display window 113 is displayed with a symbol with a symbol number counter value of 20 (cherry symbol) and a symbol with a symbol number counter of 19 (BB symbol). , 18 symbols (replay symbols), and 17 symbols (bell symbols) pass in order. When the symbol (bell symbol) whose value of the symbol number counter is 17 has passed through the middle stage of the symbol display window 113 (the timing of (b') shown in FIG. 155), 120 drive pulses are generated from the timing of (b). (24 drive pulses×5 symbols) are output. FIG. 156(b') shows the left reel 110 at the timing of this (b'), and the watermelon symbol whose value of the symbol number counter is 16 is positioned in the middle row of the symbol display window 113. are doing.

Furthermore, when 8 drive pulses are output, the control is switched to the second constant speed control. In the time chart shown in FIG. 155, the timing at which the 8 drive pulses are output is shown as timing (c). At the timing of (c), the left stop button 137 shifts to an operation-acceptable state due to the start of the second constant speed control. That is, in this example, even if the light shielding piece is detected first, the stop button will not be ready to be operated until the second constant speed control is started. However, as a condition for transitioning to the state where the stop button can be operated, the condition that the light shielding piece is detected is the same, but if the control state is the first constant speed control, the stop button can be operated. You may make it transfer to a state.

Also, in the time chart shown in FIG. 155, the timing (c') indicates the timing at which the second constant speed control is started and the first one drive pulse is output. At this timing (c'), the left stop button 137 is operated, and the left reel 110 is brake-controlled and stopped.

FIG. 156(c') shows the left reel 110 at the timing of (c'), and in the middle row of the symbol display window 113, a bar symbol whose value of the symbol number counter is 15 is displayed. /24 frames. The bar pattern is a so-called DDT pattern, and if the stop button is operated with the aim of stopping the bar pattern in the middle stage, a small winning combination will not be missed. Incidentally, the bar pattern may be called a specific pattern or a certain pattern.

FIG. 156(c''-1) and FIG. 156(c''-2) are diagrams showing the stop symbol mode of the left reel 110 that is stopped at the timing of (c'). When the small winning combination of watermelon shown in FIG. 126(b) is internally won, as shown in FIG. stops at the bottom. On the other hand, when the small combination of cherry shown in FIG. 126(b) is internally won, the bar pattern is stopped in the middle of the pattern display window 113 as shown in FIG. 156(c''-2). Instead, pull-in control is performed, and after two frames slide, the cherry symbol stops at the upper row.

FIG. 157 is a timing chart when an effect relating to reels is performed by the effect device in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment. 150 will be omitted, and differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 150 will be mainly described. At the bottom of FIG. 157, the rendering device is shown. This effect device is, for example, the effect image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device).

The first effect in the effect device is started when the start lever 135 is operated. Alternatively, it starts when all reels 110-112 start spinning. Alternatively, it is started when the acceleration control of all the reels 110-112 is started. As will be described later, the reels may be subject to random delay processing for delaying the rotation start timing of each reel. do not have. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 157, the operation timing of the start lever 135, the rotation start timing of all the reels 110 to 112, and the acceleration control start timing for all the reels 110 to 112 are the same, and the timing of (a). is. The first effect in the effect device is started from the timing of (a).

FIG. 158 is a diagram showing an example of the first effect in the effect device.

158, the effect image display device 157, which is an example of the effect device, is shown at the top, and the left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112 are shown below it. . Furthermore, below each reel, stop buttons 137 to 139 corresponding to each reel are shown. Stop button LEDs 137a to 139a are built into each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively.

FIG. 158(A) shown on the left side is a diagram showing an example in which a small combination suggesting effect is executed as the first effect in the effect image display device 157 . On the other hand, FIG. 158(B) shown on the right side is a diagram showing an example in which the navigation effect is executed as the first effect in the effect image display device 157 .

First, the small role suggesting production will be described. (a1) in FIG. 158(A) shows the effect image display device 157 and the like at the timing (a) shown in FIG. 157 (the start timing of the first effect). In the effect image display device 157 shown in (a1), a watermelon pattern is displayed, suggesting that the small winning combination of watermelon shown in FIG. 126(b) is internally won. Also, all three reels 110 to 112 shown in (a1) have started to rotate. Furthermore, it is shown that the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a emit light in the first light emission mode through the respective stop buttons 137 to 139. FIG.

(d1) in FIG. 158(A) shows the timing (d) shown in FIG. ), the effect image display device 157 and the like are shown. Also in the effect image display device 157 shown in (d1), the small combination suggesting effect continues and the watermelon pattern is displayed. Also, all three reels 110 to 112 shown in (d1) continue to rotate under the second constant speed control. Furthermore, it is shown that the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a emit light in the first light emission mode through the respective stop buttons 137 to 139. FIG. That is, it is shown that the stop button LED 137a built into the left stop button 137 that is ready to be operated also emits light in the first light emission mode like the other stop button LEDs 138a and 139a.

(f1) in FIG. 158(A) shows an effect at the timing (f) shown in FIG. An image display device 157 and the like are shown. Also in the effect image display device 157 shown in (f1), the small combination suggesting effect continues and the watermelon pattern is displayed. Also, all three reels 110 to 112 shown in (f1) continue to rotate under the second constant speed control. Furthermore, the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a are shown through the respective stop buttons 137 to 139 to change to the second light emission mode and emit light.

In addition, in the small combination suggestion effect, the watermelon pattern may be continuously displayed, or the watermelon pattern may be repeatedly displayed and hidden.

Next, the navigation effect will be described. The navigation effect is a effect for instructing the order of the stop operation of the stop button for winning a prize combination. (a2) in FIG. 158(B) shows the effect image display device 157 and the like at the timing (a) shown in FIG. 157 (the start timing of the first effect). In the effect image display device 157 shown in (a2), numbers indicating the order of the stop operation are displayed at locations directly above the reels 110-112. That is, 3 is displayed on the left reel 110 , 2 is displayed on the middle reel 111 , and 1 is displayed on the right reel 112 . Also, all three reels 110 to 112 shown in (a2) have started to rotate. Furthermore, it is shown that the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a emit light in the first light emission mode through the respective stop buttons 137 to 139. FIG.

(d2) in FIG. 158(B) shows the timing (d) shown in FIG. ), the effect image display device 157 and the like are shown. In the effect image display device 157 shown in this (d2) as well, the navigation effect continues, and numbers representing the order of stop operations are displayed. Also, all three reels 110 to 112 shown in (d2) continue to rotate under the second constant speed control. Furthermore, it is shown that the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a emit light in the first light emission mode through the respective stop buttons 137 to 139. FIG. That is, it is shown that the stop button LED 137a built into the left stop button 137 that is ready to be operated also emits light in the first light emission mode like the other stop button LEDs 138a and 139a.

(f2) in FIG. 158(B) shows an effect at the timing (f) shown in FIG. An image display device 157 and the like are shown. Also in the effect image display device 157 shown in (f2), the navigation effect continues, and the numbers representing the order of the stop operation are displayed. Also, all three reels 110 to 112 shown in (f2) continue to rotate under the second constant speed control. Furthermore, the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a are shown through the respective stop buttons 137 to 139 to change to the second light emission mode and emit light.

In the navigation effect shown in FIG. 158(B) described above, the order of stop operations different from the order in which the light shielding pieces of the reels are detected is displayed. However, the order in which the light shielding pieces of the reel are detected may coincide with the order in which the stop operation is instructed in the navigation effect.

Also in the navigation effect, the number representing the order of the stop operation may be continuously displayed, or the display and non-display of the number may be repeated.

FIG. 159 is a timing chart in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment when slide push operations are performed on the three stop buttons 137 to 139, but only part of the operations are accepted. 150 will be omitted, and differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 150 will be mainly described. Figure 159 shows left stop button actuation, middle stop button actuation, and right stop button actuation at the bottom.

The operation of slide push is to operate a plurality of stop buttons 137-139 in a short time. In the example of FIG. 159, the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected during execution of the second constant speed control (timing (d)), and after the left stop button 137 becomes ready for operation, (h1) , a slide push operation is performed on the three stop buttons 137-139. That is, the left stop button 137 is first operated, then the middle stop button 138 and the right stop button 139 are successively operated (forward pressed) so as to trace in a short period of time. When the slide push is performed, neither the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 nor the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected, and the middle stop button 138 and the right stop button 139 remain in the operation unacceptable state. Therefore, only the operation of the left stop button 137 in the slide push operation is accepted, and the operations of the remaining middle stop button 138 and right stop button 139 are not accepted. Therefore, the left reel 110 is brake-controlled and stopped, but the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 continue to rotate at a constant speed. Eventually, the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected (timing (e)), and finally the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is also detected (timing (f)). and the operation of the right stop button 139 remain disabled, and to stop the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112, the middle stop button 138 and the right stop button 139 need to be operated again. Note that, as described above, the arrow (d) indicates a period in which only some of the three stop buttons are in an operation-acceptable state. Also, at the timing of (f), the middle stop button LED 138a and the right stop button LED 139a change to the second light emission mode, but the left stop button LED 137a, which has already stopped the reels, remains in the first light emission mode.

While the middle stop button LED 138a and the right stop button LED 139a are emitting light in the second light emission mode (the period indicated by the arrows in (e)), the two stop buttons, middle stop button 138 and right stop button 139, can be slide-pushed. perform an operation. That is, the middle stop button 138 is operated at the timing of (h2), and the right stop button 139 is operated at the timing of (h3). Both the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 are brake-controlled and stopped.

After each of the three reels 110 to 112 is brake-controlled and stopped, the start lever 135 is operated again, and each of the three reels 110 to 112 starts rotating ((a') ting). That is, the next game is started. In this next game as well, after the first constant speed control is executed, the second constant speed control is started (timing of (c')). During execution of the second constant speed control, the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected (timing (d')), and the left stop button 137 becomes ready for operation. Next, the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is also detected (timing (e')), and the middle stop button 138 is also ready for operation. Finally, the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is also detected (timing (f')), and the right stop button 139 is also ready for operation. In addition, when the light blocking pieces of all the three reels 110 to 112 are detected while none of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is operated, the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a built in each stop button are illuminated in the second light emission mode. change to The first stop button LED 137a remained in the first light emission mode in the previous game, but changes to the second light emission mode in the current game.

FIG. 160 is a timing chart in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment when slide push operations performed on the three stop buttons 137 to 139 are all accepted. 159 will be omitted, and differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 159 will be mainly described.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 160, the slide push operation is performed after all the light shielding pieces of the three reels 110-112 are detected. Therefore, when all three stop buttons 137 to 139 are ready to be operated and all three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a emit light in the second light emission mode (the period indicated by the (o) arrow), A slide push operation is started. Here too, the operation is performed continuously in a short time in the order of pressing from the left stop button 137, and the operation timings ((h), (h'), (h'') of the respective stop buttons 137 to 139 are ), brake control is executed for the corresponding reel, the corresponding reel stops, and the built-in stop button LED returns to the first light emission mode. The execution period of brake control for each reel may overlap.

FIG. 161 is a timing chart in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment when the real game is played after the pseudo game is played. 150 will be omitted, and differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 150 will be mainly described. FIG. 161 also shows left stop button actuation, middle stop button actuation, and right stop button actuation at the bottom.

The pseudo-game is a kind of reel effect (the second reel effect described above), and similar to the main game, it is an effect that makes it look as if the reel corresponding to the operated stop button is stopped by operating the stop button. . In this game, medals are given according to the derived stop mode after the reels are completely stopped, but in the pseudo game, medals are not given according to the derived stop mode.

Even in a pseudo game, each reel 110 to 112 starts rotating by operating the start lever 135, and acceleration control, first constant speed control, and second constant speed control are executed. The light shielding pieces of the reels 110 to 112 are detected in the order of the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112, and the stop button corresponding to the reel on which the light shielding piece is detected. 137 to 139 are ready for operation. Then, the three stop button lamps 137a to 139a change to the second lighting mode only when the light shielding pieces of all the reels 110 to 112 are detected. Therefore, even if the pseudo-game is started, there is no change from the main game, and the player cannot distinguish between the pseudo-game and the main game. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 161, after the three stop button lamps 137a to 139a change to the second light emitting mode, the left stop button 137 is slide pushed, and the operation timing ((h) of each stop button 137 to 139 is , (h'), (h'')), the corresponding reel starts brake control, and the built-in stop button LED returns to the first light emission mode. In the pseudo-game, stop control is not executed, instead vibration control is performed to slightly vibrate the reels. Vibration control is performed for about several seconds so that the symbols can be clearly seen by the player. In the pseudo-game, it is also possible to draw more than the maximum drawing number of symbols. For example, in the case of the BB internal winning state, the BB pattern matching ("7-7-7") is vibrated (waved). In addition, if a small winning combination is internally won, a vibrating display is made of the complete bar pattern. The player notices through the vibration display that the previous game was a pseudo game.

When the vibration display is performed for several seconds, the pseudo-game ends and the main game is started. This game is started without operating the start lever 135 . When the BB pattern matching ("7-7-7") is vibrated in the pseudo-game, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating simultaneously, the reel 110 keeps the positional relationship in which the BB patterns are arranged side by side. ~112 will rotate. In such a positional relationship, the BB symbols of all the reels 110 to 112 appear in the symbol display window 113 at the same timing, so that a skilled player who is good at aiming at symbols can easily aim at the BB symbols. For this reason, it becomes impossible to ensure the fairness of the game with beginners who are not good at aiming at symbols. In addition, since it becomes easier to aim at the symbols, the interest in the game is reduced for the player who is looking forward to performing the stop operation aiming at the symbols. Therefore, random delay control is performed to randomly delay the rotation start timing of the reels between the reels, thereby breaking the positional relationship in which the BB symbols are arranged side by side. The game was started at the timing of (i), but none of the reels 110 to 112 started to rotate. after a lapse of time), the right reel 112 starts to rotate. Next, after n2 interrupts (n2>n1) from the start of the game (after the second time has passed), the middle reel 111 starts rotating. Finally, after n3 interrupts (n3>n2) from the start of the game (after the third time has passed), the left reel 110 starts rotating. When the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, the acceleration control is executed for 60 interrupts, but the execution period is shifted. The (A) arrow shown in this game represents the period from the start of the acceleration control on the right reel 112 to the end of the acceleration control on the last left reel 110 . Next, in each reel, when the acceleration control ends, the first constant speed control is started. The (b) arrow shown in this game indicates the period from the start of the first constant speed control on the right reel 112 to the end of the last constant speed control on the left reel 110. It represents Subsequently, in each reel, when the first constant speed control ends, the second constant speed control is started. The period during which the reels 110 to 112 are subjected to the second constant speed control in this game is indicated by the (U) arrow. Before the last left reel 110 finishes the first constant speed control, the first right reel 112 starts the second constant speed control. By performing pseudo-game and random delay processing, the positional relationship of the light shielding pieces on each reel changes, and during the execution of the second constant speed control in this game, the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected first. ((f') timing), then the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected ((e') timing), and finally the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected ((d') timing). Therefore, the order in which the stop button becomes ready for operation (the order in which the reels become ready to be stopped) is different between this game and the pseudo-game. Also in this game, the three stop button lamps 137a to 139a change to the second light emitting mode only when the light shielding pieces of all the reels 110 to 112 are detected (timing (d')).

FIG. 162 is a timing chart in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment when the main game is played after the reel action is performed. 162 will be omitted, and differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 162 will be mainly described.

The reel action is a type of reel effect (the first reel effect described above), and unlike this game, it is an effect that makes it appear as if the reels have stopped without operating the stop button. It should be noted that reel action, like pseudo-game, medals are not given.

In the reel action, each reel 110 to 112 starts rotating by operating the start lever 135, and acceleration control, first constant speed control, and second constant speed control are executed. Further, the light shielding pieces of the reels 110 to 112 are detected in order of the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110, the middle reel 111 light shielding piece, and the right reel 112 light shielding piece. However, even if the light blocking piece is detected, the stop buttons 137 to 139 do not enter the operation-acceptable state and remain in the operation-unacceptable state. Also, even if the light blocking pieces of all the reels 110-112 are detected, the three stop button lamps 137a-139a remain in the first light emission mode. Before long, the reels 110-112 automatically start brake control without the operation of the stop buttons 137-139. In this reel action as well, stop control is not performed, and instead vibration control is performed to slightly vibrate the reel. Vibration control is performed for about several seconds so that the symbols can be clearly seen by the player. For example, in the case of the BB internal winning state, the BB pattern matching ("7-7-7") is vibrated (waved). In addition, if a small winning combination is internally won, a vibrating display is made of the complete bar pattern.

When the vibration display is performed for several seconds, the reel action ends and the game starts. This game is the same as the game described with reference to FIG. 161, random delay control is performed, and acceleration control, first constant speed control, and second constant speed control are performed. By performing the reel action and the random delay process, the positional relationship of the light shielding pieces on each reel changes, and during the execution of the second constant speed control in this game, the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected first. ((f') timing), then the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected ((e') timing), and finally the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected ((d') timing). Therefore, in this game and the reel action, the order of the reels in which the light shielding pieces are detected may differ. However, since there is no need to operate the stop button in the reel action, even if this order is changed, the effect on the player is small.

Next, simultaneous pressing will be described. Simultaneous pressing here means that all the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated at the same time or almost at the same time. For example, when the time required from the first stop button operation to the last stop button operation is within a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms), it is determined as "simultaneous press". The predetermined time is set in consideration of the average time required for continuous operation of all the stop buttons 137 to 139, and can be arbitrarily changed within the time range judged to be a relatively quick stop operation. is.

In the case of simultaneous pressing, in order for a specific combination of symbols to win, the symbols of each reel constituting the specified combination of symbols should not be adjacent to each other within a maximum of four symbols between the reels. I can't.

FIG. 163 is a diagram showing the relative positional relationship of symbols forming a specific symbol combination with reference to the symbol display window 113. FIG.

FIG. 163(a) is a diagram showing an example in which replay is internally won in the BB internal winning state, and the symbol combination of "replay-replay-replay" is stop-displayed on the winning line L1. In FIG. 163(a), the replay symbols stopped and displayed on the pay line L1 are replay symbols with a symbol number counter value of 2 on the left reel 110 and replay symbols with a symbol number counter value of 1 on the middle reel 111. , the value of the symbol number counter on the right reel 112 is 14, which is the replay symbol. In the case of this stop symbol mode, the BB symbol is located at the second frame from the replay symbol on the left reel 110, is located at the second frame from the replay symbol on the middle reel 111, and is located at the second frame from the replay symbol on the right reel 112. It is located in the first frame. Therefore, the replay symbol alignment state shown in FIG. 163(a) is a state in which symbols (herein, BB symbols) forming a specific symbol combination are brought close to each other between the reels, and hereinafter, this state is prepared. called eye condition. It is possible to easily win a specific symbol combination by ending the game in the preparation state and performing simultaneous pressing in the next game. That is, the preparatory state means a state in which the symbols of each reel constituting a specific symbol combination are within a certain range. In FIG. 163(a), by performing simultaneous pressing in the next game, it is possible to stop and display the BB pattern alignment on either the winning line L1 or any of the other winning lines L2 to 5 shown in FIG. is.

FIG. 163(b) is a diagram showing an example in which Bell is internally won in the BB internal winning state, and the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is stop-displayed on the winning line L1. In FIG. 163(b), the bell symbols stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 are a bell symbol with a symbol number counter value of 1 on the left reel 110 and a bell symbol with a symbol number counter value of 19 on the middle reel 111. , the value of the symbol number counter on the right reel 112 is 15, which is the bell symbol. In the case of this stop symbol mode, the BB symbol on the left reel 110 is located in the second and fourth frames from the BB symbol on the middle reel 111, and the BB symbol on the right reel 112 is three frames from the BB symbol on the middle reel 111. located in the eye. Therefore, the state of bell pattern matching shown in FIG. 163(b) is also a preparatory state, and the game is terminated in this preparatory state. is possible.

In this example, the configuration for entering the preparatory state is the configuration of the replay symbol with a specific value of the symbol number counter and the configuration of the bell symbol with a specific value of the symbol number counter. may be a watermelon pattern, a cherry pattern with a specific value of the pattern number counter, or a losing pattern with a specific value of the pattern number counter.

Also, the symbol combination that is in the preparation state does not need to be displayed in the symbol display window 113, and the relative positional relationship of the symbols (BB symbols) that make up the specific symbol combination is shown in FIG. 163(a). or the relative positional relationship shown in FIG.

It should be noted that, when the preparatory state is reached in the BB internal winning state, the effect image display device 157, the speakers 272 and 277, or the like may notify the preparatory state.

FIG. 164 is a timing chart in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment when three stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed simultaneously, but only some of the operations are accepted. 150 will be omitted, and differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 150 will be mainly described. At the bottom of FIG. 164 are left stop button actuation, middle stop button actuation, and right stop button actuation.

In the example in FIG. 164, the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected during execution of the second constant speed control (timing (d)), and after the left stop button 137 becomes ready for operation, (h) , the three stop buttons 137 to 139 are simultaneously pressed. At the time of simultaneous pressing, neither the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 nor the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is detected, and the middle stop button 138 and the right stop button 139 remain in the operation unacceptable state. Therefore, only the operation of the left stop button 137 in the simultaneous pressing operation is accepted, and the operations of the remaining middle stop button 138 and right stop button 139 are not accepted. Therefore, the left reel 110 stops at the timing (h), but the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 continue rotating at a constant speed. Eventually, the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected (timing (e)), and finally the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is also detected (timing (f)). and the operation of the right stop button 139 remain disabled, and to stop the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112, the middle stop button 138 and the right stop button 139 need to be operated again. At the timing of (f), the middle stop button LED 138a and the right stop button LED 139a change to the second light emission mode, but the left stop button LED 137a, which has already stopped the reels, remains in the first light emission mode.

FIG. 165 is a timing chart in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment when all the three stop buttons 137 to 139 are simultaneously pressed. 164 will be omitted, and differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 164 will be mainly described.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 165, the simultaneous pressing operation is performed after all the light shielding pieces of the three reels 110 to 112 are detected. Therefore, when all three stop buttons 137 to 139 are ready to be operated and all three stop button LEDs 137a to 139a emit light in the second light emission mode (the period indicated by the (o) arrow), A simultaneous pressing operation is performed (timing of (h)). In response to the simultaneous pressing operation, brake control is performed on each of the three reels 110 to 112, and the three reels 110 to 112 are stopped simultaneously. That is, at least a part of the period during which the brake control is performed for each of the reels 110 to 112 overlaps with each other. Note that all periods may overlap. Also, the stop button LEDs 137a to 139a built in the three stop buttons 137 to 139 respectively return to the first light emitting mode at the same time. In addition, it stops at the same time. Strictly speaking, they seem to have stopped at the same time. and return at the same time. And to see the decrease, it seems to have returned at the same time. is.

FIG. 166 is a timing chart when simultaneous pressing is performed during a pseudo game in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment. 161 will be omitted, and differences from the timing chart shown in FIG. 161 will be mainly described.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 166, after the three stop button lamps 137a-139a change to the second light emitting mode, the three stop buttons 137-139 are simultaneously pressed, and the three reels 110-112 appear to be simultaneous in terms of timing and stopped in terms of state. That is, the vibrating display is started almost simultaneously. For example, in the BB internal winning state, the BB pattern matching ("7-7-7") is vibrated (waved). That is, here, a pseudo-game (simultaneous reel effect) is performed in which the three rotating reels 110 to 112 appear to stop at the same time as a effect by the simultaneous pressing operation.

When the vibration display is performed for several seconds, the pseudo-game ends and the main game is started. In this game, random delay control is performed, and acceleration control, first constant speed control, and second constant speed control are executed. In this game, even if the three stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed simultaneously, random delay processing is performed, and the BB pattern matching ("7-7-7") is stopped and displayed. is very unlikely to be possible. During execution of the second constant speed control in this game, the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 is first detected ((f') timing), and then the light shielding piece of the middle reel 111 is detected ((e' ) timing), and finally the light shielding piece 612D of the left reel 110 is detected ((d') timing), and the order of the reels in which the light shielding pieces are detected differs between the pseudo game and the main game.

Also, in the present embodiment, the embodiment relates to the game of the slot machine 100, but the present invention is not limited to the slot machine, and can also be applied to other gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

In the above description,
"a plurality of reels [e.g., two or more of left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112, or all of these reels];
A stop operation means (e.g., left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control for shifting from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 133], constant speed for maintaining the constant speed state Control [for example, first constant speed control or second constant speed control, or a combination of first constant speed control and second constant speed control shown in FIG. 133], and brake control for shifting from the constant speed state to the stopped state reel control means [for example, main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, brake control shown in FIG. 133];
with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped while the acceleration control is being executed even if the stop operation means is operated [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only in processing],
The reel control means is means capable of executing the brake control after shifting to the stoppable state [for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 143)],
For each reel constituting the plurality of reels [for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. In FIG. 150, the left stop button 137 transitions to the acceptable state at the timing of (d), the middle stop button 138 transitions to the acceptable state at the timing of (e), and the right stop button 139 is accepted at the timing of (f). transition to possible state],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, by accepting the stop operation from the ready reel, the operation of the stop operation means can be accepted earlier than before. Therefore, the game progresses at a good tempo without the player feeling any stress. In addition, there is a case where the presence of the game can be heightened by immediately responding to the player's operation. These effects are common to the gaming machines described below, and may be hereinafter referred to as the first common effect.

The unstoppable state may be a state in which the operation of the stop operation means provided corresponding to the reel cannot be accepted, or the operation can be accepted but is treated as a valid operation. It may also be a state in which it is not possible (the same applies below). On the other hand, the "stoppable state" refers to a state in which the operation of the stop operation means provided corresponding to the reel is accepted and the operation is treated as a valid operation (the same applies hereinafter).

Further, when the stop position of the reel becomes controllable, the rotating reel shifts from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state (the same applies hereinafter).

Further, the reel control means may be means capable of transitioning to a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled during execution of the constant speed control, may be a means capable of shifting to a controllable state (the same shall apply hereinafter).

again,
"The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled.
The stop possible state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when the light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. reset and the stop position of the reel can be calculated].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the first reel [for example, the left reel 110],
One reel constituting the plurality of reels is the second reel [for example, the middle reel 111],
In the first case [for example, the example shown in FIG. 150], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, the Timing of (d) shown in 150],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

In some cases, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel [for example, (d ') timing] (same below).

Further, the stop operation means is a means including a first stop operation means [eg, left stop button 137] and a second stop operation means [eg, middle stop button 138]. The means [for example, the left stop button 137] is a means for stopping the rotating first reel by operating the first reel [for example, the left reel 110] in a stoppable state, The second stop operation means [for example, the middle stop button 138] is operated in a state where the second reel [for example, the middle reel 111] can be stopped, so that the rotating second reel It may be a means for stopping (the same applies below).

again,
"The first case means that the reel control means makes the stop position of the first reel controllable before the stop position of the second reel is controllable. This is the case of transition [for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 150],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
``The first reel [for example, the left reel 110] is a reel on which a plurality of types of patterns [for example, the arrangement of "left" patterns shown in FIG.
The second reel [for example, the middle reel 111] is also a reel on which a plurality of types of patterns [for example, the arrangement of “middle” patterns shown in FIG.
The state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs first detection for identifying the position of the stop display of the plurality of types of symbols provided on the first reel. A state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 transmitted from the index sensor] is received,
The state in which the stop position of the second reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs second detection for identifying the position of the stop display of the plurality of types of symbols provided on the second reel. A state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 sent from the index sensor] is received.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The first detection signal is received while the reel control means is executing the constant speed control for all of the plurality of reels [for example, the period indicated by the (c) arrow in FIG. 150]. when the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"After the first case, the braking control of the first reel [eg, the left reel 110] has not been started, and the braking control of the second reel [eg, the middle reel 111] has not been started. 153], the second reel moves from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel. [for example, the timing of FIG. 153(d′)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
" A first reel with multiple types of patterns,
a second reel with multiple types of patterns;
a first reel rotation driving means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation driving means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
Regarding rotation control executed for each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control for shifting to a constant speed state, constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and stop reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for shifting to a state;
stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation in any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means can be accepted;
stop operation control means for controlling one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
A game table comprising
In the first case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation by the second stop operation means,
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the stop button can be operated earlier than before by accepting the stop operation from the ready reel.

again,
"The first case means that the output of the detection signal from the first symbol position detection means is faster than the output of the detection signal from the second symbol position detection means.
A playground characterized by: "
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to start receiving a stop operation from the reel whose symbol position has been detected.

again,
"When the constant speed control of the plurality of reels is executed and the detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is output, the reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is started. ,
A playground characterized by: ”
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to start accepting the stop operation of the reels earlier than before.

again,
"After the first case, if there is a power failure and power recovery in a state where the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated, the stop operation by the second stop operation means may be earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation in the first stop operation means,
A playground characterized by: ”
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is possible to give a sharpness to the game by changing the operation reception order before and after the power failure and power recovery.

In the above description,
"a plurality of reels [e.g., two or more of left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112, or all of these reels];
A stop operation means (e.g., left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control for shifting from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 133], constant speed for maintaining the constant speed state Control [for example, first constant speed control or second constant speed control, or a combination of first constant speed control and second constant speed control shown in FIG. 133], and brake control for shifting from the constant speed state to the stopped state reel control means [for example, main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, brake control shown in FIG. 133];
with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped while the acceleration control is being executed even if the stop operation means is operated [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only in processing],
The reel control means is means capable of executing the brake control after shifting to the stoppable state [for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 143)],
For each reel constituting the plurality of reels [for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. In FIG. 150, the left stop button 137 transitions to the acceptable state at the timing of (d), the middle stop button 138 transitions to the acceptable state at the timing of (e), and the right stop button 139 is accepted at the timing of (f). transition to possible state],
While the constant speed control is being performed on one reel [e.g., the left reel 110] of the plurality of reels, another reel [e.g. , right reel 112] is in the first abnormal state [for example, at the timing of (g) shown in FIG. In some cases [for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 151],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, in addition to the first common effect, even if some of the reels are in the first abnormal state, the game can be continued with the remaining reels. In addition, the player may be able to concentrate on the game without wasting the rotation of the reels that did not cause the first abnormal state.

If the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled, the one reel will not shift from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state.

again,
`` A first abnormal state detection means [for example, a main control unit 300 that executes a step-out detection process shown in FIG.
While the constant speed control is being performed on one of the plurality of reels, a reel other than the one reel among the plurality of reels is in the first abnormal state. 151 until the first abnormal state detecting means detects the first abnormal state of the other reel [for example, (a' shown in FIG. 151). )], the one reel can transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, timing (d) shown in FIG. 151],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled.
The stop-possible state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant-speed state [for example, when the light-shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the rotation position information of the reel is set to zero. reset and the stop position of the reel can be calculated].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the first reel [for example, the left reel 110],
One reel constituting the plurality of reels is the second reel [for example, the middle reel 111],
In the first case [for example, the example shown in FIG. 150], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, the Timing of (d) shown in 150],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The first case means that the reel control means makes the stop position of the first reel controllable before the stop position of the second reel is controllable. This is the case of transition [for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 150],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
``The first reel [for example, the left reel 110] is a reel on which a plurality of types of patterns [for example, the arrangement of "left" patterns shown in FIG.
The second reel [for example, the middle reel 111] is also a reel on which a plurality of types of patterns [for example, the arrangement of “middle” patterns shown in FIG.
The state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs first detection for identifying the position of the stop display of the plurality of types of symbols provided on the first reel. A state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 transmitted from the index sensor] is received,
The state in which the stop position of the second reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs second detection for identifying the position of the stop display of the plurality of types of symbols provided on the second reel. A state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 sent from the index sensor] is received.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The first detection signal is received while the reel control means is executing the constant speed control for all of the plurality of reels [for example, the period indicated by the (c) arrow in FIG. 150]. when the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"After the first case, the braking control of the first reel [eg, the left reel 110] has not been started, and the braking control of the second reel [eg, the middle reel 111] has not been started. 153], the second reel moves from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel. [for example, the timing of FIG. 153(d′)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The first reel with multiple types of patterns,
a second reel with multiple types of patterns;
a first reel rotation driving means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation driving means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
Regarding rotation control executed for each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control for shifting to a constant speed state, constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and stop reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for shifting to a state;
stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation in any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means can be accepted;
stop operation control means for controlling one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
A game table comprising
In the first case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation by the second stop operation means,
Even if the second reel rotation drive means steps out during the period in which the reel control means executes the constant speed control on the second reel, the stop by the first stop operation means Acceptance of operations is started,
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the stop button can be operated earlier than before by accepting the stop operation from the prepared reel, and in addition, the player can play on some of the plurality of reels.

again,
"The first case means that the output of the detection signal from the first symbol position detection means is earlier than the output of the detection signal from the second symbol position detection means.
A playground characterized by: ”
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to start receiving a stop operation from the reel whose symbol position has been detected.

again,
"When the constant speed control of the plurality of reels is executed and the detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is output, the reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is started. ,
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to start accepting the stop operation of the reels earlier than before.

again,
"After the first case, if there is a power failure and power recovery in a state in which the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated, the stop operation in the second stop operation means may be earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation in the first stop operation means,
A playground characterized by: ”
was also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is possible to give a sharpness to the game by changing the operation reception order before and after the power failure and power recovery.

In the above description,
"a plurality of reels [e.g., two or more of left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112, or all of these reels];
A stop operation means (e.g., left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control for increasing the rotation speed of the reel from a stopped state toward a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 133]; Second constant speed control for maintaining a constant speed state [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 133], and brake control for shifting from the constant speed state to the stopped state [for example, brake control shown in FIG. 133] a reel control means [e.g., main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute at least
with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped while the acceleration control is being executed even if the stop operation means is operated [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only in processing],
The reel control means is means capable of executing the brake control after shifting to the stoppable state [for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 143)],
For each reel constituting the plurality of reels [for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. In FIG. 155, the left stop button 137 transitions to the acceptable state at the timing of (c), the middle stop button 138 transitions to the acceptable state at the timing of (e), and the right stop button 139 is accepted at the timing of (f). transition to possible state],
The reel control means may shift to a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled before the second constant speed control is started [for example, timing (b) shown in FIG. ],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is not necessary to wait until the second constant speed control is started before the stop position of the reel can be changed to a controllable state, and the operation of the stop operation means is accepted at an earlier timing. will be available. Therefore, the first common effect is further enhanced.

The reel control means may be means capable of transitioning to a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled during execution of the second constant speed control, or during execution of the acceleration control, the reel control means It may be a means capable of shifting to a controllable state of the stop position of.

Further, the second constant speed control may be control for maintaining the constant speed state by being repeatedly executed.

again,
"When the rotational speed of the reel reaches the constant speed in the constant speed state, the reel control means performs the first constant speed control [for example, the first constant speed control shown in FIG. 133] after completing the acceleration control. Execute, and then execute the second constant speed control,
The second constant speed control is control that is repeatedly executed,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Note that the first constant-speed control may be control using a current value (strong excitation) higher than the current value (for example, medium excitation) used in the second constant-speed control (the same applies below). .).

In the first constant speed control, the first control pattern [for example, the control pattern in which the general-purpose offset counter value is from 0 to 7 in the first constant speed control shown in FIG. 16 times], the second constant-speed control always shifts to the second constant-speed control. After the control pattern with a counter value of 0 to 7] is repeatedly executed an indefinite number of times [for example, until the light shielding piece is detected and the stop button is operated], the brake control is started.

Further, the reel control means is means capable of shifting to a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled during execution of the first constant speed control [for example, the timing of (b) shown in FIG. 155]. good too.

again,
"The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled.
The stop possible state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when the light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. reset and the stop position of the reel can be calculated].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the first reel [for example, the left reel 110],
One reel constituting the plurality of reels is the second reel [for example, the middle reel 111],
In the first case [for example, the example shown in FIG. 150], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, the Timing of (c) shown in 155],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The first case means that the reel control means makes the stop position of the first reel controllable before the stop position of the second reel is controllable. This is the case of transition [for example, the timing of (c) shown in FIG. 155],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
``The first reel [for example, the left reel 110] is a reel on which a plurality of types of patterns [for example, the arrangement of "left" patterns shown in FIG.
The second reel [for example, the middle reel 111] is also a reel on which a plurality of types of patterns [for example, the arrangement of “middle” patterns shown in FIG.
The state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs first detection for identifying the position of the stop display of the plurality of types of symbols provided on the first reel. A state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 transmitted from the index sensor] is received,
The state in which the stop position of the second reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs second detection for identifying the position of the stop display of the plurality of types of symbols provided on the second reel. A state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 transmitted from the index sensor] is received.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"In a state where the reel control means is executing the second constant speed control for all of the plurality of reels [for example, the period indicated by the (c) arrow in FIG. 155], the first detection signal is received, the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state;
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"After the first case, the braking control of the first reel [eg, the left reel 110] has not been started, and the braking control of the second reel [eg, the middle reel 111] has not been started. 153), the second reel moves from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel. [for example, the timing of FIG. 153(d′)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The first reel with multiple types of patterns,
a second reel with multiple types of patterns;
a first reel rotation driving means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation driving means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
Regarding rotation control executed for each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control for shifting to a constant speed state, constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and stop reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for shifting to a state;
stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation in any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means can be accepted;
stop operation control means for controlling one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
A game table comprising
In the first case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation by the second stop operation means,
The reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is such that the detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is detected within a predetermined period of time after the start of the acceleration control for the first reel. When output, it may start after the predetermined time has elapsed,
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to detect the reel index before the constant speed flag is turned on, and it is possible to start accepting the reel stop operation earlier than performing the reel index detection after the constant speed flag is turned on.

again,
"The first case means that the output of the detection signal from the first symbol position detection means is earlier than the output of the detection signal from the second symbol position detection means.
A playground characterized by: ”
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to start receiving a stop operation from the reel whose symbol position has been detected.

again,
"When the constant speed control of the plurality of reels is executed and the detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is output, the reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is started. ,
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to start accepting the stop operation of the reels earlier than before.

again,
"After the first case, if there is a power failure and power recovery in a state in which the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated, the stop operation in the second stop operation means may be earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation in the first stop operation means,
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is possible to give a sharpness to the game by changing the operation reception order before and after the power failure and power recovery.

again,
"The reel control means is capable of executing a first constant-speed control and a second constant-speed control as the constant-speed control,
The reel control means executes the first constant-speed control on the first reel during at least a part of the period until the predetermined time elapses, and performs the second constant-speed control after the elapse of the predetermined time. exercising control over the first reel;
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, reel index detection during the first constant speed control becomes effective.

In the above description,
"a plurality of reels [e.g., two or more of left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112, or all of these reels];
A stop operation means (e.g., left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control for shifting from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 133], constant speed for maintaining the constant speed state Control [for example, first constant speed control or second constant speed control, or a combination of first constant speed control and second constant speed control shown in FIG. 133], and brake control for shifting from the constant speed state to the stopped state reel control means [for example, main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, brake control shown in FIG. 133];
with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped while the acceleration control is being executed even if the stop operation means is operated [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only in processing],
The reel control means is means capable of executing the brake control after shifting to the stoppable state [for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 143)],
For each reel constituting the plurality of reels [for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. In FIG. 150, the left stop button 137 transitions to the acceptable state at the timing of (d), the middle stop button 138 transitions to the acceptable state at the timing of (e), and the right stop button 139 is accepted at the timing of (f). transition to possible state],
When a plurality of stop operation means corresponding to each of the plurality of reels are operated continuously [for example, when a slide push is performed], the reels corresponding to all the operated stop operation means In the case of a stop possible state [for example, the example shown in FIG. 160], only reels corresponding to some stop operation means [for example, the left stop button 137] among all the operated stop operation means In the case of the stoppable state [for example, the example shown in FIG. 159],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, even if the slide push operation is performed, the first common effect can be obtained.

In addition, it may be the case that a plurality of stop operation means corresponding to each of the plurality of reels constituting the plurality of reels are continuously operated. The “plurality of reels” may be two reels out of three reels or three reels out of three reels.

Further, when a plurality of stop operation means corresponding to each of the plurality of reels constituting the plurality of reels are operated continuously, all of the reels corresponding to all the operated stop operation means In other cases, the brake control is executed only for a part of the reels corresponding to all the operated stop operation means.

Further, when a plurality of stop operation means corresponding to each of the plurality of reels constituting the plurality of reels are operated in succession, the brake is applied to the reel corresponding to the stop operation means operated first. Even when the control is being executed, the brake control may be executed also for the reel corresponding to the stop operation means operated next.

Further, when a plurality of stop operation means corresponding to each of the plurality of reels constituting the plurality of reels are operated in succession, the brake is applied to the reel corresponding to the stop operation means operated first. Even in a state where control is being executed, there are cases where the stop operating means to be operated next is in the above-mentioned unstoppable state.

Further, when a plurality of stop operation means corresponding to each of the plurality of reels constituting the plurality of reels are operated in succession, the brake is applied to the reel corresponding to the stop operation means operated first. Even in a state where control is being executed, the stop operation means to be operated next may also be in the stop possible state.

again,
``The above-mentioned ``when a plurality of stop operation means are operated in succession'' refers to a case in which an operation of continuously operating a plurality of stop operation means is performed by tracing.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled.
The stop possible state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when the light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. reset and the stop position of the reel can be calculated].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the first reel [for example, the left reel 110],
One reel constituting the plurality of reels is the second reel [for example, the middle reel 111],
In the first case [for example, the example shown in FIG. 150], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, the Timing of (d) shown in 150],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The first case means that the reel control means makes the stop position of the first reel controllable before the stop position of the second reel is controllable. This is the case of transition [for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 150],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
``The first reel [for example, the left reel 110] is a reel on which a plurality of types of patterns [for example, the arrangement of "left" patterns shown in FIG.
The second reel [for example, the middle reel 111] is also a reel on which a plurality of types of patterns [for example, the arrangement of “middle” patterns shown in FIG.
The state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs first detection for identifying the position of the stop display of the plurality of types of symbols provided on the first reel. A state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 transmitted from the index sensor] is received,
The state in which the stop position of the second reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs second detection for identifying the position of the stop display of the plurality of types of symbols provided on the second reel. A state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 transmitted from the index sensor] is received.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The first detection signal is received while the reel control means is executing the constant speed control for all of the plurality of reels [for example, the period indicated by the (c) arrow in FIG. 150]. when the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"After the first case, the braking control of the first reel [eg, the left reel 110] has not been started, and the braking control of the second reel [eg, the middle reel 111] has not been started. 153), the second reel moves from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel. [for example, the timing of FIG. 153(d′)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The first reel with multiple types of patterns,
a second reel with multiple types of patterns;
a first reel rotation driving means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation driving means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
Regarding rotation control executed for each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control for shifting to a constant speed state, constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and stop reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for shifting to a state;
stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation in any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means can be accepted;
stop operation control means for controlling one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
A game table comprising
In the first case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation by the second stop operation means,
If the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are operated during the first period in the first case, the second stop operation means is invalidated. becomes,
When the operation to the first stop operation means and the operation to the second stop operation means are performed during the second period after the first period in the first case, the second stop operation means The operation to the stop operation means is valid,
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to make a player who is enthusiastic about a game calm down by creating a situation in which even if a plurality of buttons are operated (slide push) in a short period of time, some of the games do not stop.

again,
"The first case means that the output of the detection signal from the first symbol position detection means is earlier than the output of the detection signal from the second symbol position detection means.
A playground characterized by: ”
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to start receiving a stop operation from the reel whose symbol position has been detected.

again,
"When the constant speed control of the plurality of reels is executed and the detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is output, the reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is started. ,
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to start accepting the stop operation of the reels earlier than before.

again,
"After the first case, if there is a power failure and power recovery in a state in which the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated, the stop operation in the second stop operation means may be earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation in the first stop operation means,
A playground characterized by: "
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is possible to give a sharpness to the game by changing the operation reception order before and after the power failure and power recovery.

In the above description,
"a plurality of reels [e.g., two or more of left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112, or all of these reels];
A stop operation means (e.g., left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control for increasing the rotation speed of the reel from the stopped state toward the constant speed state [for example, the acceleration control shown in FIG. 133] is repeated. A second constant speed control [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. 133 ] that is executed to maintain the constant speed state, and a brake control that transitions from the constant speed state to the stopped state [for example, FIG. brake control shown in 133] and reel control means [for example, main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute at least
with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped while the acceleration control is being executed even if the stop operation means is operated [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only in processing],
The reel control means is means capable of executing the brake control after shifting to the stoppable state [for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 143)],
For each reel constituting the plurality of reels [for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. In FIG. 150, the left stop button 137 transitions to the acceptable state at the timing of (d), the middle stop button 138 transitions to the acceptable state at the timing of (e), and the right stop button 139 is accepted at the timing of (f). transition to possible state],
When the rotation speed of the reel reaches the constant speed in the constant speed state, the reel control means executes the first constant speed control [for example, the first constant speed control shown in FIG. 133] after completing the acceleration control. and then the second constant speed control is executed,
One of the plurality of reels (hereinafter referred to as "first reel") [eg, left reel 110] has a plurality of types of symbols [eg, shown in FIG. 126(a)] along the rotation direction. "Left" pattern arrangement] is applied,
One pattern among the plurality of types of patterns is the first pattern [for example, the watermelon pattern shown in FIG. 156(c''-1) or the cherry pattern shown in FIG. 156(c''-2)]. can be,
The first symbol is a symbol that is advantageous to the player when displayed stopped [for example, a symbol that wins a small winning combination];
Even if the stop operation means is operated, the reel cannot be stopped while the first constant speed control is being executed [for example, in the second constant speed control process shown in FIG. Only stop button valid information is set],
When the reel control means shifts to a state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled (hereinafter referred to as "first state") during execution of the first constant speed control [for example, Timing of (b) shown in FIG. 155],
When the first state is entered during execution of the first constant-speed control [for example, timing (b) shown in FIG. 155], the second constant-speed control is started and the stop operation means is When operated [for example, the timing of (c′) shown in FIG. 155] When the first symbol is stopped and displayed [for example, FIG. 156 (c″-1) or FIG. 156 (c″-2 )]
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, even reels provided with so-called DDT symbols can obtain the above-mentioned first common effect, and furthermore, an expert who can ascertain changes in speed of the reels can achieve the fastest timing. You will be able to win prizes in

It should be noted that, for example, when the first state is shifted to when the first constant-speed control is started, if the stop operation means is operated aiming at the start timing of the second constant-speed control, There is a case where the first symbol is stopped and displayed.

again,
"The first reel [for example, the left reel 110] has a first detection piece [for example, the light shielding piece 612D],
The first detection piece is detectable during execution of the first constant speed control [for example, the timing of (b) shown in FIG. 155],
The reel control means shifts to the first state when the first detection piece is detected.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled.
The stop-possible state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant-speed state [for example, when the light-shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the rotation position information of the reel is set to zero. reset and the stop position of the reel can be calculated].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"Among the plurality of reels, one reel that is different from the first reel [for example, the left reel 110] is the second reel [for example, the middle reel 111],
In the third case [for example, the example shown in FIG. 155], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, the Timing of (c) shown in 155],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The third case means that the reel control means makes the stop position of the first reel controllable before the stop position of the second reel is controllable. This is the case of transition [for example, the timing of (c) shown in FIG. 155],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
``The first reel [for example, the left reel 110] is a reel on which a plurality of types of patterns [for example, the arrangement of "left" patterns shown in FIG.
The second reel [for example, the middle reel 111] is also a reel on which a plurality of types of patterns [for example, the arrangement of “middle” patterns shown in FIG.
The state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs first detection for identifying the position of the stop display of the plurality of types of symbols provided on the first reel. A state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 transmitted from the index sensor] is received,
The state in which the stop position of the second reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs second detection for identifying the position of the stop display of the plurality of types of symbols provided on the second reel. A state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 sent from the index sensor] is received.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"In a state where the reel control means is executing the second constant speed control for all of the plurality of reels [for example, the period indicated by the (c) arrow in FIG. 155], the first detection signal is received, the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state;
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"After the third case, the brake control of the first reel [eg, the left reel 110] has not been started, and the brake control of the second reel [eg, the middle reel 111] has not been started. 153], the second reel moves from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel. [for example, the timing of FIG. 153(d′)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The second constant-speed control is started and the stop operation means is operated when the first state is entered while the first constant-speed control is being executed." The stop operation means is operated at a time when the first symbol can be stopped and displayed for the first time after the reel starts rotating.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The first reel with multiple types of patterns,
a second reel with multiple types of patterns;
a first reel rotation driving means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation driving means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
Regarding rotation control executed for each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control for shifting to a constant speed state, constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and stop reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for shifting to a state;
stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation in any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means can be accepted;
stop operation control means for controlling one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
A game machine comprising
In the first case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation by the second stop operation means,
a first detection piece provided on the first reel;
a second detection piece provided on the second reel;
with
The first pattern position detection means outputs the detection signal when the first detection piece is detected,
The second pattern position detection means outputs the detection signal when the second detection piece is detected,
One of the plurality of types of patterns is a first pattern,
The position of the first symbol is at least a position away from the position of the first detection piece toward the rear side in the rotating direction until a predetermined time has passed since the reel control means started the constant speed control. ,
A playground characterized by: ”
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the first symbol can be pressed at the fastest speed after receiving the operation.

again,
"The first case means that the output of the detection signal from the first symbol position detection means is earlier than the output of the detection signal from the second symbol position detection means.
A playground characterized by: ”
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to start receiving a stop operation from the reel whose symbol position has been detected.

again,
"When the constant speed control of the plurality of reels is executed and the detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is output, the reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is started. ,
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to start accepting the stop operation of the reels earlier than before.

again,
"After the first case, if there is a power failure and power recovery in a state in which the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated, the stop operation in the second stop operation means may be earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation in the first stop operation means,
A playground characterized by: ”
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is possible to give a sharpness to the game by changing the operation reception order before and after the power failure and power recovery.

In the above description,
"a plurality of reels [e.g., two or more of left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112, or all of these reels];
A stop operation means (e.g., left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control for shifting from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 133], constant speed for maintaining the constant speed state Control [for example, first constant speed control or second constant speed control, or a combination of first constant speed control and second constant speed control shown in FIG. 133], and brake control for shifting from the constant speed state to the stopped state reel control means [for example, main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, brake control shown in FIG. 133];
with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped while the acceleration control is being executed even if the stop operation means is operated [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only in processing],
The reel control means is means capable of executing the brake control after shifting to the stoppable state [for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 143)],
After the brake control is executed and stopped, each reel constituting the plurality of reels that have started to rotate [for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 139 is executed for each reel], and then stops. It is possible to shift from the disabled state to the stoppable state [for example, shown in FIG. Transition to possible state, right stop button 139 transition to acceptable state at timing (f')],
The reel control means is a means capable of executing a reel effect [for example, a reel action (first reel effect) or a pseudo-game (second reel effect)],
The reel control means is means capable of executing random delay control for randomly delaying the start of rotation after execution of the reel effect for each reel constituting the plurality of reels,
It is possible to shift from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state for each reel on which the random delay control is performed and the rotation is started [for example, timing (f′), (e′) shown in FIG. 161 or FIG. ) timing, (d′) timing],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this game machine, even a game machine equipped with random delay control can exhibit the above-mentioned first common effect. It is possible to give sharpness to the game.

Incidentally, the reel effect may be a effect in which the spinning reels are made to look like they are stopped.

again,
``The reel effect is a pseudo-game effect that seems to have stopped according to the operation of the stop operation means [for example, the timing of (h), the timing of (h'), and the timing of (h'')] in FIG. is
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled.
The stop possible state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when the light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. reset and the stop position of the reel can be calculated].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the first reel [for example, the left reel 110],
One reel constituting the plurality of reels is the second reel [for example, the middle reel 111],
In the first case among the cases where the plurality of reels start rotating after being stopped by the brake control [for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 150 or in the case of the example shown in FIG. One reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel [for example, timing (d) shown in FIG. 150 or timing (d′) shown in FIG. ],
In the second case of the case where the plurality of reels start spinning after the random delay control is performed after the reel effect is executed [for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 161 or the example shown in FIG. case], the second reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel [for example, the timing of (e′) shown in FIG. 161 or FIG. 162] ,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The first case means that the reel control means makes the stop position of the first reel controllable before the stop position of the second reel is controllable. This is the case of transition [for example, timing (d) shown in FIG. 150 or timing (d′) shown in FIG. 159],
In the second case, the reel control means transitions to a state in which the stop position of the second reel can be controlled before transitioning to a state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled. [for example, the timing of (e') shown in FIG. 161 or FIG. 162],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
``The first reel [for example, the left reel 110] is a reel on which a plurality of types of patterns [for example, the arrangement of "left" patterns shown in FIG.
The second reel [for example, the middle reel 111] is also a reel on which a plurality of types of patterns [for example, the arrangement of “middle” patterns shown in FIG.
The state in which the stop position of the first reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs first detection for identifying the position of the stop display of the plurality of types of symbols provided on the first reel. A state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the left reel 110 transmitted from the index sensor] is received,
The state in which the stop position of the second reel can be controlled means that the reel control means performs second detection for identifying the position of the stop display of the plurality of types of symbols provided on the second reel. A state in which a signal [for example, a detection signal of the light shielding piece of the right reel 112 sent from the index sensor] is received.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The first detection signal is received while the reel control means is executing the constant speed control for all of the plurality of reels [for example, the period indicated by the (c) arrow in FIG. 150]. when the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"After the first case, the braking control of the first reel [eg, the left reel 110] has not been started, and the braking control of the second reel [eg, the middle reel 111] has not been started. 153], the second reel moves from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel. [for example, the timing of FIG. 153(d′)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The first reel with multiple types of patterns,
a second reel with multiple types of patterns;
a first reel rotation driving means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation driving means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
Regarding rotation control executed for each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control for shifting to a constant speed state, constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and stop reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for shifting to a state;
stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation in any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means can be accepted;
stop operation control means for controlling one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
A game machine comprising
In the first case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation by the second stop operation means,
The reel control means is means capable of executing random delay control for randomly delaying the rotation start timing of the plurality of reels for each reel,
When the random delay control is executed after the first game in which the first case occurs, in the second game after the first game, the stop operation by the second stop operation means The acceptance start time may be earlier than the acceptance start time of the stop operation in the first stop operation means.
A playground characterized by: "
also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to give the game a sharpness by making the acceptance start timing of each stop operation means for the first game and the second game different.

again,
"The first case means that the output of the detection signal from the first symbol position detection means is earlier than the output of the detection signal from the second symbol position detection means.
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to start receiving a stop operation from the reel whose symbol position has been detected.

again,
"When the constant speed control of the plurality of reels is executed and the detection signal of the first symbol position detection means is output, the reception of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is started. ,
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to start accepting the stop operation of the reels earlier than before.

again,
"After the first case, if there is a power failure and power recovery in a state in which the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated, the stop operation in the second stop operation means may be earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation in the first stop operation means,
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is possible to give a sharpness to the game by changing the operation reception order before and after the power failure and power recovery.

In the above description,
"a plurality of reels [e.g., two or more of left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112, or all of these reels];
A stop operation means (e.g., left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and notifying that the rotating corresponding reel is in the stoppable state [for example, by a second light emitting mode (blue light emitting mode) notification] [for example, left stop button LED 137a, middle stop button LED 138a, right stop button LED 139a];
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control for shifting from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 133], constant speed for maintaining the constant speed state Control [for example, first constant speed control or second constant speed control, or a combination of first constant speed control and second constant speed control shown in FIG. 133], and brake control for shifting from the constant speed state to the stopped state reel control means [for example, main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, brake control shown in FIG. 133];
with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped while the acceleration control is being executed even if the stop operation means is operated [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only in processing],
The reel control means is means capable of executing the brake control after shifting to the stoppable state [for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 143)],
Of the plurality of reels, a certain reel [for example, the left reel 110 or the middle reel 111] for which the notification is started by the notification means starts the notification [for example, (f) shown in FIG. Timing], there is a case where the stop impossible state transitions to the stop possible state [for example, timing (d) or timing (e) shown in FIG. 159],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this amusement machine, if the stop operation means is operated without waiting for the notification by the notification means, the reels may be stopped, and the player's operation may be given priority, increasing the realism of the game. be. Also, the game progresses at a good tempo without the player feeling any stress. These effects are common to the gaming machines described below, and may be hereinafter referred to as a second common effect.

The certain reel may always transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the notification is started (the same applies hereinafter).

Further, the notification means may start notification that each reel is in the stoppable state when all of the plurality of reels are in the stoppable state. At the point when all the stop positions are changed to a controllable state, notification that each reel is in the stoppable state may be started (the same shall apply hereinafter).

again,
"The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled.
The stop possible state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when the light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. reset and the stop position of the reel can be calculated].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the first reel [for example, the left reel 110],
The notification means is means including a first notification means [eg, left stop button LED 137a],
The first notification means is means capable of executing a first notification [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)] indicating that the first reel is in the stoppable state. ,
In the fourth case [for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 159], the first reel is moved from the unstoppable state before the first notification is started by the first notification means. Transitioning to the stoppable state [for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 159],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

In addition, one reel constituting the plurality of reels is a third reel [for example, the middle reel 111], and the notification means also includes third notification means [for example, the middle stop button LED 138a]. and the third notification means is capable of executing a third notification [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)] indicating that the third reel is in the stoppable state. In some cases, the third reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the third notification is started by the third notification means. For example, the timing of (e) shown in FIG. 159] may be used (the same applies hereinafter).

again,
"One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the second reel [for example, the right reel 112],
The notification means is means that also includes a second notification means [for example, the right stop button LED 139a],
The second notification means is means capable of executing a second notification [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)] indicating that the second reel is in the stoppable state. ,
In the fourth case, the second notification may be started by the second notification means and the second reel may shift from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, FIG. Timing of (f) shown in],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

In the fourth case, the second reel may shift from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state at the same time when the second notification is started by the second notification means. There may be.

again,
``The second reel is a reel whose stop position can be controlled at the latest timing among the plurality of reels [for example, the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 159].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"At the timing when the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 159], the second notification by the second notification means is also started,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The timing at which the first notification is started by the first notification means and the timing at which the second notification is started by the second notification means may be the same (hereinafter the same). .

again,
"After the fourth case, power failure and power recovery [for example, power failure and power recovery shown in FIG. In this case, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second notification is started by the second notification means [for example, Timing of FIG. 153(e′)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Incidentally, among the plurality of reels, a reel [for example, the right reel 112] different from the certain reel [for example, the left reel 110 or the middle reel 111] for which the notification is started by the notification means There may be a case where the stop-impossible state transitions to the stop-possible state along with the start of the notification (the same applies hereinafter). That is, of the plurality of reels, the reel other than the certain reel for which the notification is started by the notification means is changed from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state at the same time when the notification is started. (The same shall apply below.)

Furthermore, the another reel may be the last reel among the plurality of reels to be able to control the stop position of the reel (the same applies hereinafter).

Further, at the timing when the notification is started for the certain reel, the notification for the other reel may also be started (the same applies hereinafter). The start timing of the notification and the start timing of the notification regarding the other reel in the notification means may be the same timing (the same applies hereinafter).

again,
"The first reel with multiple types of patterns,
a second reel with multiple types of patterns;
a first reel rotation driving means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation driving means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
Regarding rotation control executed for each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control for shifting to a constant speed state, constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and stop reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for shifting to a state;
stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation in any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means can be accepted;
stop operation control means for controlling one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying a first display indicating that the first stop operation means can accept an operation;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying the first display indicating that the second stop operation means can accept an operation;
A game table comprising
In the second case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than the display start timing of the first display by the first operation reception display means.
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this game machine, it can be stopped earlier than the conventional game machine, and the time between waits can be shortened.

again,
"In the second case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the second stop operation means is the same as the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means.
A playground characterized by: ”
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player feels the operation start timing of the first stop operation means earlier than the second stop operation means.

again,
"The display start time of the first display by the first operation reception display means is the same as the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means.
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player feels the operation start timing of the first stop operation means earlier than the second stop operation means.

again,
"When a power failure/recovery occurs after the second case, the start timing of acceptance of the stop operation by the second stop operation means is the same as the display of the first display by the second operation reception display means. It may be earlier than the start time,
A playground characterized by: ”
was also explained.

According to this game machine, before and after power failure and power recovery, different operation means can be operated earlier than the first display, so that the game can be given a variety.

In the above description,
"a plurality of reels [e.g., two or more of left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112, or all of these reels];
A stop operation means (e.g., left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and notifying that the rotating corresponding reel is in the stoppable state [for example, by a second light emitting mode (blue light emitting mode) notification] [for example, left stop button LED 137a, middle stop button LED 138a, right stop button LED 139a];
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control for shifting from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 133], constant speed for maintaining the constant speed state Control [for example, first constant speed control or second constant speed control, or a combination of first constant speed control and second constant speed control shown in FIG. 133], and brake control for shifting from the constant speed state to the stopped state reel control means [for example, main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, brake control shown in FIG. 133];
with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped while the acceleration control is being executed even if the stop operation means is operated [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only in processing],
The reel control means is means capable of executing the brake control after shifting to the stoppable state [for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 143)],
Of the plurality of reels, a certain reel [for example, the left reel 110 or the middle reel 111] for which the notification is started by the notification means starts the notification [for example, (f) shown in FIG. Timing], the state may shift from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, timing (d) or timing (e) shown in FIG. 159],
Before the notification about the certain reel (hereinafter referred to as "some notification") is executed, the brake control of the certain reel is started (timing (h1) shown in FIG. 159). , the certain notification is not executed at the time when the notification about the reel other than the certain reel [for example, the right reel 112] is executed ((f) to (h3) shown in FIG. 159),
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this gaming machine, in addition to the above-mentioned second common effect, misunderstandings are caused to the players by preventing the notification of the reel corresponding to the stop operation means that has been operated at an early stage. Consideration is made so as not to

Also, the notification of the certain reel [for example, the left reel 110 or the middle reel 111] [for example, notification by the second light emission mode (blue light emission mode) of the left stop button LED 137a or the middle stop button LED 138a] is executed. 159 before the brake control of the certain reel is started [for example, the timing of (h1) shown in FIG. is not executed [for example, the timing of FIG. 159(f')].

That is, the brake control of the certain reel is started before the informing means executes notification that the certain reel that has shifted to the stoppable state is in the stoppable state [for example, FIG. The timing of (h1) shown in 159] and the notification is not executed until after the constant speed control of the certain reel is started [for example, the timing of FIG. 159(f')].

It should be noted that if the brake control for the certain reel is started before the informing means executes the notification that the certain reel that has shifted to the stoppable state is in the stoppable state, the certain reel may The notification is not executed until after the constant speed control of all of the plurality of reels including the reel with the number of reels is started. Alternatively, if the braking control of the certain reel is started before the informing means executes the notification that the certain reel that has shifted to the stoppable state is in the stoppable state, The notification is not executed unless the stop positions of all of the plurality of reels including the reel to be stopped are shifted to a controllable state. Alternatively, if the braking control of the certain reel is started before the informing means executes the informing means that the certain reel that has transitioned to the stoppable state is in the stoppable state, The notification is not executed unless all of the plurality of reels including the reel to be stopped shift from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state.

Further, if the braking control of the certain reel is started before the informing means executes the notification that the certain reel that has shifted to the stoppable state is in the stoppable state, the plurality of The notification is not executed until after the brake control of all the reels other than the certain reel is completed.

again,
"The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled.
The stop-possible state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant-speed state [for example, when the light-shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the rotation position information of the reel is set to zero. reset and the stop position of the reel can be calculated].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the first reel [for example, the left reel 110],
The notification means is means including a first notification means [eg, left stop button LED 137a],
The first notification means is means capable of executing a first notification [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)] indicating that the first reel is in the stoppable state. ,
In the fourth case [for example, the example shown in FIG. 159], in a certain game [for example, a game in which the reels start rotating from the timing (a) shown in FIG. Before the first notification is started by one notification means, the stop impossible state is shifted to the stop possible state [for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 159],
In the certain game, the brake control of the first reel is started before the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, (d) shown in FIG. Timing], the first notification by the first notification means is not executed in the certain game,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the second reel [for example, the right reel 112],
The notification means is means that also includes a second notification means [for example, the right stop button LED 139a],
The second notification means is means capable of executing a second notification [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)] indicating that the second reel is in the stoppable state. ,
In the fourth case, the second notification may be started by the second notification means and the second reel may shift from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, FIG. Timing of (f) shown in],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
``The second reel is a reel whose stop position can be controlled at the latest timing among the plurality of reels [for example, the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 159].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"At the timing when the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 159], the second notification by the second notification means is also started,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"After the fourth case, power failure and power recovery [for example, power failure and power recovery shown in FIG. In this case, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second notification is started by the second notification means [for example, Timing of FIG. 153(e′)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The first reel with multiple types of patterns,
a second reel with multiple types of patterns;
a first reel rotation driving means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation driving means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
Regarding rotation control executed for each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control for shifting to a constant speed state, constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and stop reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for shifting to a state;
stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation in any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means can be accepted;
stop operation control means for controlling one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying a first display indicating that the first stop operation means can accept an operation;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying the first display indicating that the second stop operation means can accept an operation;
A game machine comprising
In the second case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than the display start timing of the first display by the first operation reception display means,
In the second case, if the first stop operation means is operated before the display start time of the first display by the first operation reception display means, the game in the second case The first display by the first operation reception display means is not displayed,
A playground characterized by: ”
also explained.

This game machine does not mislead the players.

again,
"In the second case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the second stop operation means is the same as the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means.
A playground characterized by: ”
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player feels the operation start timing of the first stop operation means earlier than the second stop operation means.

again,
"The display start time of the first display by the first operation reception display means is the same as the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means.
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player feels the operation start timing of the first stop operation means earlier than the second stop operation means.

again,
"When a power failure/recovery occurs after the second case, the start timing of acceptance of the stop operation by the second stop operation means is the same as the display of the first display by the second operation reception display means. It may be earlier than the start time,
A playground characterized by: "
also explained.

According to this game machine, before and after power failure and power recovery, different operation means can be operated earlier than the first display, so that the game can be given a variety.

In the above description,
"a plurality of reels [e.g., two or more of left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112, or all of these reels];
A stop operation means (e.g., left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and notifying that the rotating corresponding reel is in the stoppable state [for example, by a second light emitting mode (blue light emitting mode) notification] [for example, left stop button LED 137a, middle stop button LED 138a, right stop button LED 139a];
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control for shifting from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 133], constant speed for maintaining the constant speed state Control [for example, first constant speed control or second constant speed control, or a combination of first constant speed control and second constant speed control shown in FIG. 133], and brake control for shifting from the constant speed state to the stopped state reel control means [for example, main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, brake control shown in FIG. 133];
with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped while the acceleration control is being executed even if the stop operation means is operated [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only in processing],
The reel control means is means capable of executing the brake control after shifting to the stoppable state [for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 143)],
Of the plurality of reels, a certain reel [for example, the left reel 110 or the middle reel 111] for which the notification is started by the notification means starts the notification [for example, (f) shown in FIG. Timing], the state may shift from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, timing (d) or timing (e) shown in FIG. 159],
Of the plurality of reels, the notification [for example, the notification by the second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)] for a reel [for example, the right reel 112] other than the certain reel is started [for example , timing (f) shown in FIG. 159], the other reel may be in the unstoppable state, and the notification [for example, the notification by the second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)] is being executed [ For example, during the period started at the timing (f) shown in FIG. 159], the other reel is in the stoppable state.
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

That is, notification that a reel other than the certain reel [e.g., the right reel 112] among the plurality of reels is in the stoppable state [e.g., by the second light emission mode (blue light emission mode) 159] is started by the notification means [for example, the right stop button LED 139a] [for example, the timing of (f) shown in FIG. While the notification that the reel is in the stoppable state [for example, notification by the second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)] is being executed by the notification means [for example, the right stop button LED 139a] [for example, During the period started at the timing (f) shown in 159], the other reel is in the stoppable state.

Further, the other reel may always be in the non-stoppable state before the informing means starts informing that the other reel is in the stoppable state.

According to this game machine, while the second common effect is achieved, the stopping operation means can be operated while waiting for the notification, so that a beginner can play the game calmly, and the notification can be used to play the game. You can play games with peace of mind.

again,
"The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled.
The stop-possible state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant-speed state [for example, when the light-shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the rotation position information of the reel is set to zero. reset and the stop position of the reel can be calculated].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the first reel [for example, the left reel 110],
One reel constituting the plurality of reels is the second reel [for example, the middle reel 111],
The notification means is means including first notification means [eg, left stop button LED 137a] and second notification means [eg, middle stop button LED 137b],
The first notification means is means capable of executing a first notification [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)] indicating that the first reel is in the stoppable state. ,
The second notification means is means capable of executing a second notification [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)] indicating that the second reel is in the stoppable state. ,
In the fourth case, the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first notification is started by the first notification means,
In the fourth case, the second reel is in the unstoppable state before the second notification is started, and the second reel is stopped after the second notification is started. is possible,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"In the fourth case, the second notification may be started by the second notification means and the second reel may shift from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, Timing of (f) shown in 159],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
``The second reel is a reel whose stop position can be controlled at the latest timing among the plurality of reels [for example, the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 159].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"At the timing when the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 159], the second notification by the second notification means is also started,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"After the fourth case, power failure and power recovery [for example, power failure and power recovery shown in FIG. In this case, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second notification is started by the second notification means [for example, Timing of FIG. 153(e′)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"first reel rotation driving means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation driving means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
Regarding rotation control executed for each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control for shifting to a constant speed state, constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and stop reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for shifting to a state;
stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation in any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means can be accepted;
stop operation control means for controlling one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying a first display indicating that the first stop operation means can accept an operation;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying the first display indicating that the second stop operation means can accept an operation;
A game table comprising
In the second case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than the display start timing of the first display by the first operation reception display means,
When the operation to the second stop operation means is performed during the third period in the second case, the operation to the second stop operation means becomes invalid,
When the operation to the second stop operation means is performed during the fourth period after the third period in the second case, the operation to the second stop operation means becomes valid,
The third period is a period during which the first display is not displayed by the second operation reception display means,
The fourth period is a period during which the first display is displayed by the second operation reception display means.
A playground characterized by: ”
was also explained.

According to this amusement machine, a period during which only the first stop operation means out of the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means is accepted and a period during which both are accepted are set by the display of the second operation reception display means. It may be suggested.

again,
"In the second case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the second stop operation means is the same as the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means.
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player feels the operation start timing of the first stop operation means earlier than the second stop operation means.

again,
"The display start time of the first display by the first operation reception display means is the same as the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means.
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player feels the operation start timing of the first stop operation means earlier than the second stop operation means.

again,
"When a power failure/recovery occurs after the second case, the start timing of acceptance of the stop operation by the second stop operation means is the same as the display of the first display by the second operation reception display means." It may be earlier than the start time,
A playground characterized by: ”
also explained.

According to this game machine, before and after power failure and power recovery, different operation means can be operated earlier than the first display, so that the game can be given a variety.

In the above description,
"Multiple reels and
A stop operation means (e.g., left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and notifying that the rotating corresponding reel is in the stoppable state [for example, by a second light emitting mode (blue light emitting mode) notification] [for example, left stop button LED 137a, middle stop button LED 138a, right stop button LED 139a];
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control for shifting from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 133], constant speed for maintaining the constant speed state Control [for example, first constant speed control or second constant speed control, or a combination of first constant speed control and second constant speed control shown in FIG. 133], and brake control for shifting from the constant speed state to the stopped state reel control means [for example, main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, brake control shown in FIG. 133];
internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination [for example, the main control unit 300 executing the internal winning combination lottery process shown in FIG. 135];
effect means [for example, effect image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device)] capable of executing a suggesting effect suggesting the determined internal winning combination [for example, a minor combination suggesting effect shown in FIG. 158(A)];
with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped while the acceleration control is being executed even if the stop operation means is operated [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only in processing],
The reel control means is means capable of executing the brake control after shifting to the stoppable state [for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 143)],
Of the plurality of reels, a certain reel [for example, the left reel 110 or the middle reel 111] for which the notification is started by the notification means starts the notification [for example, (f) shown in FIG. timing], the state may shift from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, timing (d) or timing (e) shown in FIG. 157],
The effect means performs the suggestive effect [for example, a small combination suggestive effect shown in (a1) in FIG. When starting execution [for example, the timing of (a) shown in FIG. 157] is a means,
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this gaming machine, the second common effect is more effectively exhibited. That is, the suggestive effect makes it possible to grasp the discard game, and in the case of the discard game, it is possible to quickly finish the game by performing a stop operation at a quick timing. It should be noted that the suggestive effect makes it possible to grasp the game of collecting a small winning combination, and in the game of collecting a small winning combination, it is possible to operate the stop operation means with care so as not to make a mistake in operation.

The effect means may be means for starting execution of the suggestive effect at the same time as the acceleration control of the certain reel is started, or the suggestive effect may be started when the certain reel starts rotating. may be a means for starting the execution of

Further, the effect means may always start execution of the suggestive effect before the certain reel shifts from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state.

again,
"The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled.
The stop-possible state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant-speed state [for example, when the light-shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the rotation position information of the reel is set to zero. reset and the stop position of the reel can be calculated].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the first reel [for example, the left reel 110],
The notification means is means including a first notification means [eg, left stop button LED 137a],
The first notification means is means capable of executing a first notification [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)] indicating that the first reel is in the stoppable state. ,
In the fifth case [for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 157], the first reel is moved from the unstoppable state before the first notification is started by the first notification means. Transitioning to the stop possible state [for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 157],
In the fifth case, the effect means, before the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, the timing of (a) shown in FIG. is a means of initiating the execution of a rendition,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the second reel [for example, the right reel 112],
The notification means is means that also includes a second notification means [for example, the right stop button LED 139a],
The second notification means is means capable of executing a second notification [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)] indicating that the second reel is in the stoppable state. ,
In the fifth case, the second notification may be started by the second notification means and the second reel may shift from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state. Timing of (f) shown in],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The second reel is a reel whose stop position can be controlled at the latest timing among the plurality of reels [for example, the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 157].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"At the timing when the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 157], the second notification by the second notification means is also started,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"After the fifth case, power failure and power recovery [for example, power failure and power recovery shown in FIG. In this case, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second notification is started by the second notification means [for example, Timing of FIG. 153(e′)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The first reel with multiple types of patterns,
a second reel with multiple types of patterns;
a first reel rotation driving means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation driving means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
Regarding rotation control executed for each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control for shifting to a constant speed state, constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and stop reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for shifting to a state;
stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation in any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means can be accepted;
stop operation control means for controlling one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying a first display indicating that the first stop operation means can accept an operation;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying the first display indicating that the second stop operation means can accept an operation;
A game table comprising
In the second case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than the display start timing of the first display by the first operation reception display means,
internal winning combination determination means for determining an internal winning combination;
production means capable of executing a suggestive production suggesting the determined internal winning combination;
with
The effect means may execute the suggestive effect in the second case,
In the second case, the execution start timing of the suggestive effect by the effect means is earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation by the first stop operation means,
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to quickly complete a discard game and prevent an erroneous operation in a small combination recovery game.

again,
"In the second case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the second stop operation means is the same as the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means.
A playground characterized by: "
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player feels the operation start timing of the first stop operation means earlier than the second stop operation means.

again,
"The display start time of the first display by the first operation reception display means is the same as the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means.
A playground characterized by: ”
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player feels the operation start timing of the first stop operation means earlier than the second stop operation means.

again,
"When a power failure/recovery occurs after the second case, the start timing of acceptance of the stop operation by the second stop operation means is the same as the display of the first display by the second operation reception display means." It may be earlier than the start time,
A playground characterized by: "
also explained.

According to this game machine, before and after power failure and power recovery, different operation means can be operated earlier than the first display, so that the game can be given a variety.

In the above description,
"a plurality of reels [e.g., two or more of left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112, or all of these reels];
A stop operation means (e.g., left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and notifying that the rotating corresponding reel is in the stoppable state [for example, by a second light emitting mode (blue light emitting mode) notification] [for example, left stop button LED 137a, middle stop button LED 138a, right stop button LED 139a];
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control for shifting from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 133], constant speed for maintaining the constant speed state Control [for example, first constant speed control or second constant speed control, or a combination of first constant speed control and second constant speed control shown in FIG. 133], and brake control for shifting from the constant speed state to the stopped state reel control means [for example, main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, brake control shown in FIG. 133];
internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination [for example, the main control unit 300 executing the internal winning combination lottery process shown in FIG. 135];
Effect means [for example, effect image display device 157] capable of executing an instruction effect [for example, a navigation effect shown in FIG. (liquid crystal display device)],
with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped while the acceleration control is being executed even if the stop operation means is operated [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only in processing],
The reel control means is means capable of executing the brake control after shifting to the stoppable state [for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 143)],
Of the plurality of reels, a certain reel [for example, the left reel 110 or the middle reel 111] for which the notification is started by the notification means starts the notification [for example, (f) shown in FIG. Timing], the state may shift from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, timing (d) or timing (e) shown in FIG. 157],
The effect means, before the certain reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state, causes the stop operation means to stop the reel corresponding to the certain reel as execution of the instruction effect. When starting execution of an effect including an operation instruction of the operation means [for example, the navigation effect shown in (a2) in FIG. 158(B)] [for example, the timing of (a) shown in FIG. 157] ,
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this gaming machine, there are other effects in addition to the second common effect. That is, not only can a quick stop operation be performed while following the instruction performance, but even if a certain stop operation means is operated by mistake, the reel corresponding to the certain stop operation means will be in the unstoppable state. If so, the player will not lose the chance of winning a prize.

In addition, the effect means corresponds to the certain reel of the stop operation means as the execution of the instruction effect before the certain reel shifts from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state. It may be a means for always starting execution of an effect including an operation instruction of the stop operation means.

again,
"The order in which the respective reels constituting the plurality of reels transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, in the example shown in FIG. The order of operating the stop operation means provided for each of the reels constituting the plurality of reels instructed by the instruction effect [for example, in the navigation effect shown in FIG. order] may be different,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The order in which the respective reels constituting the plurality of reels transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state, and the instruction effect are provided for each reel constituting the plurality of reels. In some cases, the order of operating the respective stop operation means may be the same.

again,
"The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled.
The stop possible state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when the light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. reset and the stop position of the reel can be calculated].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the first reel [for example, the left reel 110],
The notification means is means including a first notification means [eg, left stop button LED 137a],
The first notification means is means capable of executing a first notification [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)] indicating that the first reel is in the stoppable state. ,
In the fifth case [for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 157], the first reel is moved from the unstoppable state before the first notification is started by the first notification means. Transitioning to the stop possible state [for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 157],
In the fifth case, the effect means, before the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, the timing of (a) shown in FIG. As the execution of the effect, execution of the effect [for example, the navigation effect shown in (a2) in FIG. is a means to initiate
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the second reel [for example, the right reel 112],
The notification means is means that also includes a second notification means [for example, the right stop button LED 139a],
The second notification means is means capable of executing a second notification [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)] indicating that the second reel is in the stoppable state. ,
In the fifth case, the second notification may be started by the second notification means and the second reel may shift from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state. Timing of (f) shown in],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The second reel is a reel whose stop position can be controlled at the latest timing among the plurality of reels [for example, the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 157].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"At the timing when the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, the timing of (f) shown in FIG. 157], the second notification by the second notification means is also started,
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"After the fifth case, power failure and power recovery [for example, power failure and power recovery shown in FIG. In this case, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second notification is started by the second notification means [for example, Timing of FIG. 153(e′)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The first reel with multiple types of patterns,
a second reel with multiple types of patterns;
a first reel rotation driving means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation driving means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
Regarding rotation control executed for each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control for shifting to a constant speed state, constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and stop reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for shifting to a state;
stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation in any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means can be accepted;
stop operation control means for controlling one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying a first display indicating that the first stop operation means can accept an operation;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying the first display indicating that the second stop operation means can accept an operation;
A game table comprising
In the second case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than the display start timing of the first display by the first operation reception display means,
internal winning combination determination means for determining an internal winning combination;
effect means capable of executing an instruction effect capable of stopping the plurality of reels in a stop mode corresponding to the determined internal winning combination;
with
The effect means may execute the instruction effect in the second case,
The instruction effect in the second case may include an operation instruction for the first stop operation means,
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this game machine, the navigation game can be digested quickly.

again,
"In the second case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the second stop operation means is the same as the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means.
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player feels the operation start timing of the first stop operation means earlier than the second stop operation means.

again,
"The display start time of the first display by the first operation reception display means is the same as the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means.
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player feels the operation start timing of the first stop operation means earlier than the second stop operation means.

again,
"When a power failure/recovery occurs after the second case, the start timing of acceptance of the stop operation by the second stop operation means is the same as the display of the first display by the second operation reception display means." It may be earlier than the start time,
A playground characterized by: ”
also explained.

According to this game machine, before and after power failure and power recovery, different operation means can be operated earlier than the first display, so that the game can be given a variety.

In the above description,
"a plurality of reels [e.g., two or more of left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112, or all of these reels];
A stop operation means (e.g., left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Provided in a one-to-one correspondence for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, and notifying that the rotating corresponding reel is in the stoppable state [for example, by a second light emitting mode (blue light emitting mode) notification] [for example, left stop button LED 137a, middle stop button LED 138a, right stop button LED 139a];
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control for shifting from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 133], constant speed for maintaining the constant speed state Control [for example, first constant speed control or second constant speed control, or a combination of first constant speed control and second constant speed control shown in FIG. 133], and brake control for shifting from the constant speed state to the stopped state reel control means [for example, main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, brake control shown in FIG. 133];
with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped while the acceleration control is being executed even if the stop operation means is operated [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only in processing],
The reel control means is means capable of executing the brake control after shifting to the stoppable state [for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 143)],
Of the plurality of reels, a certain reel [for example, the left reel 110 or the middle reel 111] for which the notification is started by the notification means starts the notification [for example, (f) shown in FIG. timing], the state may shift from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, timing (d) or timing (e) shown in FIG. 161],
The reel control means is a means capable of executing a reel effect [for example, a reel action (first reel effect) or a pseudo-game (second reel effect)],
The reel control means is means capable of executing random delay control for randomly delaying the start of rotation after execution of the reel effect for each reel constituting the plurality of reels [for example, shown in FIG. 161 or 162, Executed between the timing of (i) and the timing of (f')],
Of the plurality of reels that have been subjected to the random delay control and have started to rotate, a reel other than the certain reel [for example, the right reel 112] is set before the notification of the other reel is started. 161 or 162, the transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state may occur before
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

That is, the notification is started by the notification means among the plurality of reels that are started to rotate after the random delay control is performed for each of the reels that constitute the plurality of reels on which the reel effect is executed. A reel other than the reel on which the reel is connected [e.g., the right reel 112] may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [e.g., FIG. 161 or FIG. timing of (f') shown in ].

According to this gaming machine, even a gaming machine equipped with random delay control can exhibit the above-mentioned second common effect. It is possible to give sharpness to the game.

Incidentally, the reel effect may be a effect in which the spinning reels are made to look like they are stopped.

again,
"The reel effect is a effect of a pseudo-game [for example, the pseudo-game shown in FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled.
The stop possible state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when the light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. reset and the stop position of the reel can be calculated].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the first reel [for example, the left reel 110],
One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the second reel [for example, the right reel 112],
The notification means is means including first notification means [eg, left stop button LED 137a] and second notification means,
The first notification means is means capable of executing a first notification [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)] indicating that the first reel is in the stoppable state. ,
The second notification means is means capable of executing a second notification [for example, notification by a second light emission mode (blue light emission mode)] indicating that the second reel is in the stoppable state. ,
In the sixth case [for example, the example shown in FIG. 161 or 162], the first notification is started by the first notification means for the first reel [for example, the left reel 110]. 161 or 162 (d) shown in FIG. 161], and then the reel effect [for example, pseudo effect or reel action] is executed. is,
In the sixth case, the random delay control is performed following the reel effect [for example, between the timing (i) and the timing (f') shown in FIG. 161 or 162]. The second reel [for example, the right reel 112] that started the transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, FIG. 161 or FIG. Timing of (f') shown in 162],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"After the random delay control in the sixth case is performed, the first notification is started by the first notification means, and the first reel changes from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state. [for example, the timing of (d′) shown in FIG. 161 or FIG. 162],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

It should be noted that, at the same time that the second notification is started by the second notification means, the first reel, which has been subjected to the random delay control in the sixth case and has started to rotate, is released from the unstoppable state. It may shift to the stop possible state.

again,
``The first reel is the reel whose stop position can be controlled at the latest timing among the plurality of reels [for example, the timing of (d') shown in FIG. 161 or 162]. is
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"At the timing when the first notification is started by the first notification means [for example, the timing (f) shown in FIG. 161 or the timing (d') shown in FIG. 161 or FIG. 162], the first The second notification by two notification means is also started,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"After the sixth case, power failure and power recovery [for example, power failure and power recovery shown in FIG. In this case, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second notification is started by the second notification means [for example, Timing of FIG. 153(e′)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The first reel with multiple types of patterns,
a second reel with multiple types of patterns;
a first reel rotation driving means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation driving means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
Regarding rotation control executed for each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control for shifting to a constant speed state, constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and stop reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for shifting to a state;
stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation in any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means can be accepted;
stop operation control means for controlling one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying a first display indicating that the first stop operation means can accept an operation;
a first operation acceptance display means capable of displaying the first display indicating that the second stop operation means can accept an operation;
A game machine comprising
In the second case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than the display start timing of the first display by the first operation reception display means,
The reel control means is means capable of executing random delay control for randomly delaying the rotation start timing of the plurality of reels for each reel,
When the random delay control is executed after the third game in which the second case occurs, in the fourth game after the third game, the stop operation by the second stop operation means The reception start time may be earlier than the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means.
A playground characterized by: "
also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to give the game a sharpness by making the receiving start timings of the stop operation means for the third game and the fourth game different.

again,
"In the second case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the second stop operation means is the same as the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means.
A playground characterized by: ”
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player feels the operation start timing of the first stop operation means earlier than the second stop operation means.

again,
"The display start time of the first display by the first operation reception display means is the same as the display start time of the first display by the second operation reception display means.
A playground characterized by: ”
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player feels the operation start timing of the first stop operation means earlier than the second stop operation means.

again,
"When a power failure/recovery occurs after the second case, the start timing of acceptance of the stop operation by the second stop operation means is the same as the display of the first display by the second operation reception display means. It may be earlier than the start time,
A playground characterized by: ”
was also explained.

According to this game machine, before and after power failure and power recovery, different operation means can be operated earlier than the first display, so that the game can be given a variety.

In the above description,
"a plurality of reels [e.g., two or more of left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112, or all of these reels];
A stop operation means (e.g., left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control for shifting from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 133], constant speed for maintaining the constant speed state Control [for example, first constant speed control or second constant speed control, or a combination of first constant speed control and second constant speed control shown in FIG. 133], and brake control for shifting from the constant speed state to the stopped state reel control means [for example, main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, brake control shown in FIG. 133];
with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped while the acceleration control is being executed even if the stop operation means is operated [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only in processing],
The reel control means is means capable of executing the brake control after shifting to the stoppable state [for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 143)],
For each reel constituting the plurality of reels [for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 164 and 165, the left stop button 137 transitions to the acceptable state at timing (d), the middle stop button 138 transitions to the acceptable state at timing (e), and the right stop at timing (f). button 139 transition to acceptable state],
In the first period [for example, the period shown by the arrow (e) in FIG. (h) timing shown in ], only some of the plurality of reels [for example, only the left reel 110] are stopped, while the second period [for example, (o) in FIG. In the period indicated by the arrow of], when the simultaneous stop operation is performed [for example, the timing of (h) shown in FIG. 165], all of the plurality of reels may be stopped.
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, while responding to the quick operation of simultaneous pressing, there are cases where some of the reels do not stop, so that the player who is enthusiastic about the game can calm down.

In addition, in the second period, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, all of the plurality of reels may be necessarily stopped (the same applies hereinafter).

Also, the second period may be a period later than the first period (the same applies hereinafter).

again,
"The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled.
The stop possible state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when the light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. reset and the stop position of the reel can be calculated].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the first reel [for example, the left reel 110],
One reel constituting the plurality of reels is the second reel [for example, the middle reel 111],
In the second period, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, at least a part of the period during which the brake control is performed for the first reel, and a period during which the brake control is performed for the second reel. may overlap at least part of the period of
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

In the second period, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, the brake control is performed for at least a part of the period during which the brake control is performed for the first reel and the second reel. At least a part of the period of time may necessarily overlap (the same shall apply hereinafter).

Further, the stop operation means is a means including a first stop operation means [eg, left stop button 137] and a second stop operation means [eg, middle stop button 138]. The means is means for stopping the rotating first reel by operating the first reel [for example, the left reel 110] in a stoppable state, and the second stop operation means , the rotating second reel may be stopped by operating the second reel [for example, the middle reel 111] in a stoppable state (the same shall apply hereinafter).

again,
``In the seventh case [for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. Timing of FIG. 164(d)],
The first period [for example, the period indicated by the arrow in (e) of FIG. 164] is a partial period in the seventh case,
In the first period, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, only the first reel [for example, the left reel 110] of the first reel and the second reel is stopped,
In the eighth case [for example, the example shown in FIG. 165], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel [for example, Timing of FIG. 165(d)],
The second period [for example, the period indicated by the arrow (o) in FIG. 165] is a partial period in the eighth case,
In the second period, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, both the first reel [e.g., left reel 110] and the second reel [e.g., middle reel 111] are stopped.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"Electric power failure and power recovery [for example, in a state where the brake control for the first reel [for example, the left reel 110] has not started and the brake control for the second reel [for example, the middle reel 111] has not started , Power failure and power recovery shown in FIG. , the timing of FIG. 153(e′)],
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"The first reel with multiple types of patterns,
a second reel with multiple types of patterns;
first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation driving means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
Regarding rotation control executed for each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control for shifting to a constant speed state, constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and stop reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for shifting to a state;
stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation in any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means can be accepted;
stop operation control means for controlling one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
A game machine comprising
The stop operation receiving means is configured to be able to receive simultaneous stop operations in the plurality of stop operation means,
In the third case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation by the second stop operation means,
During the fifth period in the third case, when the operation to the first stop operation means and the simultaneous stop operation to the second stop operation means are performed, the operation to the second stop operation means is performed. is invalid and
When the operation to the first stop operation means and the simultaneous stop operation to the second stop operation means are performed during the sixth period after the fifth period in the third case, The operation to the second stop operation means is effective,
A playground characterized by: "
also explained.

According to this game machine, a situation is created in which a part of the machines does not stop even if the simultaneous stop operation is performed, and the players who are absorbed in the game are calmed down.

again,
"When the simultaneous stop operation is performed in the sixth period, at least one of the period during which the stop control is performed for the first reel and at least one of the period during which the stop control is performed for the second reel The period of the part overlaps,
A playground characterized by: "
also explained.

again,
"After the third case, if there is a power failure and recovery in a state in which the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated, the stop operation in the second stop operation means may be earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation in the first stop operation means,
A playground characterized by: ”
also explained.

According to this amusement machine, it is possible to give a sharpness to the game by changing the operation reception order before and after the power failure and power recovery.

In the above description,
"a plurality of reels [e.g., two or more of left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112, or all of these reels];
A stop operation means (e.g., left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, right stop button 139],
Regarding the rotation control executed for each reel constituting the plurality of reels, acceleration control for shifting from a stopped state to a constant speed state [for example, acceleration control shown in FIG. 133], constant speed for maintaining the constant speed state Control [for example, first constant speed control or second constant speed control, or a combination of first constant speed control and second constant speed control shown in FIG. 133], and brake control for shifting from the constant speed state to the stopped state reel control means [for example, main control unit 300] configured to be able to execute [for example, brake control shown in FIG. 133];
with
The reels constituting the plurality of reels cannot be stopped while the acceleration control is being executed even if the stop operation means is operated [for example, the second constant speed control shown in FIG. Stop button enable information is set only in processing],
The reel control means is means capable of executing the brake control after shifting to the stoppable state [for example, a state in which the index sensor detects the light shielding piece of the target reel (step S310i shown in FIG. 143)],
For each reel constituting the plurality of reels [for example, step S208c in the reel rotation control process shown in FIG. 164 and 166, the left stop button 137 transitions to the acceptable state at timing (d), the middle stop button 138 transitions to the acceptable state at timing (e), and the right stop at timing (f). button 139 transition to acceptable state],
In the first period [for example, the period shown by the arrow (e) in FIG. (h) timing shown in FIG. 166], only some of the plurality of reels [for example, only the left reel 110] are stopped, while a second period [for example, (o) in FIG. In the period indicated by the arrow of], when the simultaneous stop operation is performed [for example, the timing of (h) shown in FIG. 166], all of the plurality of reels may be stopped,
The reel control means is a means capable of executing a reel effect [for example, reel simultaneous effect],
The reel control means is means capable of executing random delay control for randomly delaying the start of rotation for each reel constituting the plurality of reels [for example, shown in FIG. ') timing],
After a certain reel among the plurality of reels [for example, the left reel 110] first shifts from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [for example, the timing of (d) shown in FIG. 166], and when the plurality of reels start rotating by performing the random delay control [for example, from the timing (i) shown in FIG. 166 to (f ')], among the plurality of reels, a reel different from the certain reel [for example, the right reel 112] may first transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state [ For example, the timing of (f′) shown in FIG. 166],
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

Even with this gaming machine, while responding to a quick operation of simultaneous pressing, there are cases where some of the reels do not stop, so that the player who is enthusiastic about the game can calm down. In addition, with random delay control in between, the situation of the reels changes, and the game can be given sharpness.

Incidentally, the reel effect may be a simultaneous reel effect in which the plurality of rotating reels appear to stop at the same time [for example, timing (h) shown in FIG. 166].

again,
"The unstoppable state is a state in which the stop position of the reel cannot be controlled.
The stop possible state is a state in which the stop position of the reel can be controlled in the constant speed state [for example, when the light shielding piece is detected, it is determined that the reel has made one rotation, and the reel rotation position information is set to zero. reset and the stop position of the reel can be calculated].
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
"One reel that constitutes the plurality of reels is the first reel [for example, the left reel 110],
One reel constituting the plurality of reels is the second reel [for example, the middle reel 111],
In the second period, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, at least a part of the period during which the brake control is performed for the first reel, and a period during which the brake control is performed for the second reel. may overlap at least part of the period of
A playground characterized by: 』
was also explained.

again,
``In the seventh case [for example, the example shown in FIG. 164], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel Timing of FIG. 164(d)],
In the seventh case, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, only the first reel [for example, the left reel 110] of the first reel and the second reel is stopped [for example, FIG. Timing of (h) shown in],
In the eighth case [for example, the example shown in FIG. 165], the first reel transitions from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the second reel [for example, Timing of FIG. 165(d)],
In the eighth case, when the simultaneous stop operation is performed, both the first reel [eg, left reel 110] and the second reel [eg, middle reel 111] are stopped [eg, FIG. Timing of (h) shown in],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"A power failure or power recovery occurs in a state in which the braking control of the first reel [for example, the left reel 110] is not started and the braking control of the second reel [for example, the middle reel 111] is not started. 153, the second reel may transition from the unstoppable state to the stoppable state before the first reel [for example, the timing of FIG. 153(e′)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

again,
"The first reel with multiple types of patterns,
a second reel with multiple types of patterns;
first reel rotation drive means for rotating the first reel;
a second reel rotation driving means for rotating the second reel;
a first stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating first reel;
a second stop operation means for receiving a stop operation for stopping the rotating second reel;
first symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the first reel;
second symbol position detection means for outputting a detection signal for identifying display positions of the plurality of types of symbols on the second reel;
Regarding rotation control executed for each of a plurality of reels including the first reel and the second reel, acceleration control for shifting to a constant speed state, constant speed control for maintaining the constant speed state, and stop reel control means configured to be able to execute stop control for shifting to a state;
stop operation acceptance determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation in any one of a plurality of stop operation means including the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means can be accepted;
stop operation control means for controlling one of the plurality of stop operation means based on a result of determination by the stop operation reception determination means;
A game table comprising
The stop operation receiving means is configured to be able to receive simultaneous stop operations in the plurality of stop operation means,
In the third case, the reception start timing of the stop operation by the first stop operation means is earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation by the second stop operation means,
During the fifth period in the third case, when the operation to the first stop operation means and the simultaneous stop operation to the second stop operation means are performed, the operation to the second stop operation means is performed. is invalid and
When the operation to the first stop operation means and the simultaneous stop operation to the second stop operation means are performed during the sixth period after the fifth period in the third case, The operation to the second stop operation means becomes effective,
The reel control means is means capable of executing random delay control for randomly delaying the rotation start timing of the plurality of reels for each reel,
When the random delay control is executed after the fifth game in which the third case occurs, in the sixth game after the fifth game, the stop operation in the second stop operation means The acceptance start time may be earlier than the acceptance start time of the stop operation in the first stop operation means.
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this game machine, the reception start timing of each stop operation means for the fifth game and the sixth game is made different to give a sharpness to the game.

again,
"When the simultaneous stop operation is performed in the sixth period, at least one of the period during which the stop control is performed for the first reel and at least one of the period during which the stop control is performed for the second reel The period of the part overlaps,
A playground characterized by: ”
also explained.

again,
"After the third case, if there is a power failure and recovery in a state in which the first stop operation means and the second stop operation means are not operated, the stop operation in the second stop operation means may be earlier than the reception start time of the stop operation in the first stop operation means,
A playground characterized by: "
was also explained.

According to this game machine, the operation reception order is different before and after the power failure and power recovery, thereby giving the game a sharpness.

The prefixes for identification such as "first . For example, "seventh case" may be changed to "first case".

The embodiments of the present invention have been described above, and each of the embodiments has a special effect peculiar to the gaming machine. The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiments of the present invention without departing from the scope of the present invention. Any modification is also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the invention. are not limited to those listed.

167 to 191, a slot machine according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described below. 167 to 191 are used only for explanations using FIGS. 167 to 191 in principle. In the explanation using FIG. 191, the symbols shown in FIGS. 167 to 191 are prioritized.

In the slot machine of the present embodiment described below, a predetermined number of game media are inserted, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols are started to rotate when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. At the same time, based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of internal winning of a plurality of types of combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels receives a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation to individually rotate. If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game ends. This is a game machine that advances a series of games that end without paying out game media.

First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 167 and 168. FIG. FIG. 167 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 168 is a diagram showing an example of winning lines.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 167 corresponds to an example of the gaming table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front side of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. Prepare. Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. 168, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure) is displayed on the left reel upper stage symbol and the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the figure). The symbol to be displayed is the left reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the figure) is the left reel lower stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (position 4 shown in the figure) is displayed. The symbol is the upper symbol of the middle reel, the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure) is the middle reel symbol, and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure) is the symbol. The bottom symbol of the middle reel, the top symbol of the right reel 112 (position 7 in the drawing) is the top symbol of the right reel, and the right reel 112 is the top symbol of the right reel 112 (position 8 in the figure). The symbols displayed on the middle row and the bottom row of the right reel 112 (the position of 9 shown in the figure) are called the right reel bottom row symbols, respectively, and the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed on the reels 110 to 112 through the display window 113. Three of each are displayed in the vertical direction, and a total of nine are displayed. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

Backlights for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the display window 113 are arranged on the rear surfaces of the respective reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, there is provided an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through the space between them. Based on the detection result of the optical sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line. The winning line is a line on which it is determined whether or not a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 171, is displayed. Only one middle prize line L1 composed of reel middle symbols is provided. FIG. 168 shows this winning line L1. A valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “valid line”) is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 167 requires 3 medals, and when the number of inserted medals is less than 3, none of the pay lines are activated. validate. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135 . Note that the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, a right-down winning line composed of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel lower symbols, or composed of left reel lower symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel upper symbols. A total of 3 lines of the rising right pay lines may be set as valid pay lines, or the number of pay lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as valid pay lines. Incidentally, the area on the winning line L1 (the area consisting of numbers 2, 5 and 8 in FIG. 168) may be referred to as an active line area S1. Also, the area other than the effective line area S1 of the symbol display window 113 (area consisting of numbers 1, 3, 4, 6, 7 and 9 in FIG. 168) may be referred to as a non-effective line area S2.

The notification lamp 123 indicates, for example, that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination 1, a special combination 2) has been internally elected in an internal lottery to be described later, or a special combination internal winning state or special game to be described later. It is a lamp that informs the player of the status. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later), which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, is won. ) is a lamp that informs the player. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 and 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, one card is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed (upper limit is three). The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The chance button 190 is a button for production.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 and 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the term "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during the special game state) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In the following description, it may be expressed as “given to the player” in the same sense as “payout to the player”. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 and 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 composed of a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138 and a right stop button 139. As shown in FIG. The stop buttons 137-139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110-112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the respective reels 110-112. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped. Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. Also, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations will be referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel, respectively. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be lit to inform the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker 277 (see FIG. 169) provided below inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged above the front door 102. Above the production device 160, the sound of a speaker 272 (see FIG. 169) provided inside the slot machine 100 is output to the outside. A sound hole 143 is provided for this purpose. The production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a production image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (player side, front side). ). It should be noted that any display device other than the liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it is capable of displaying various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the circuit configuration of the control section of slot machine 100 will be described in detail. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 . Here, regarding the main control unit 300, if the data volume becomes large, it becomes difficult to confirm the program, and there is a problem of security deterioration such as becoming a hotbed for unauthorized modification. and the data capacity of the RAM 308 is limited.

<Main control part>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and reel patterns. A ROM 306 storing arrays, stop positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. and a WDT (watchdog timer) 314 are mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start signal when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). Start).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 controls various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal reception sensor for medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. , start lever 135 sensor, left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 138 sensor, right stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, optical sensors for reels 110-112 (index sensor 80), etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generating circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, the middle stop button 138 sensor, and the right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor and a bet button 132 sensor are installed on the corresponding bet buttons 130 and 132, respectively, and an insertion operation when medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into a game. to detect The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The optical sensor (index sensor 80) of the reels 110 to 112 is installed at a predetermined position on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and each time the light shielding piece (detection piece 50) provided on the reel frame passes, L become a level. Rotational position information indicating how much the reel rotates from the reference position from when it once goes to L level until it goes to L level again is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, the CPU 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 .

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, various lamps 336 (the winning line display lamp 120, the notification lamp 123, the game medal insertion possible lamp 124, the re-game lamp 122, the game medal insertion lamp 129, the game start lamp 121, the accumulated number display device 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127).

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the state of the game) is output.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 monitors the voltage of the power supply. If the value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-controller 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main controller 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via the input interface. The first sub-controller 400 comprises a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on this control command. , an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-controller 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

A drive circuit 422 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel lamp, bet button lamp, chance button lamp, reel backlight 94, etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control section 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157 . The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effects (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. 512 and are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub-control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Pattern arrangement>
Next, with reference to FIG. 170, the pattern arrangement applied to each of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. In addition, this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols provided on each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (21 frames numbered 0 to 20 in this embodiment) of a plurality of types (10 in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112 . For example, in this embodiment, the frame numbered 1 on the left reel 110 has a "watermelon pattern", the frame numbered 0 on the middle reel 111 has a "bell pattern", and the frame numbered 2 on the right reel 112 has a "seven 1 Designs” are arranged respectively.

The slot machine 100 in this embodiment stops the corresponding reels 110 to 112 within the maximum retraction range (less than 5 frames in this embodiment) from the position where the stop operation is performed, in order to improve the amusement of the game. It is configured.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, with reference to FIG. 171, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described. This figure shows types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and payouts (number of awards) for each winning combination.

Winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include a special combination 1, replay combinations 1-2, and small combinations 1-6. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Of the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special combination 1 is a combination (actuating combination) that shifts to a special game state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player by winning. Further, replay combinations 1 and 2 are combinations that can be replayed without inserting new medals. These special roles 1 and 2 and replay roles 1 and 2 may be called "operating roles". Further, "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where a symbol combination of an operating combination that does not involve a payout of medals (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. Winning of replay hands 1 and 2 is included. The special role 1 is a special role that is carried over to the next game if it is not determined as winning, and the other roles are general roles that are not carried over to the next game if it is not determined as winning. be.

The special combination 1 is a combination (operating combination) that shifts to a special game state (RT2) by winning a prize. However, medals will not be paid out due to winning these roles themselves. The corresponding symbol combination is "seven 1-seven 1-seven 1" for special role 1. In the following description, the special role 1 may be referred to as "BB1" or "BB".

When the special combination 1 is internally won, the internal winning flag corresponding to the internally won special combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag corresponding to the special combination 1 is set to ON, the main control unit 300 shifts the game state to the special combination internal winning state (RT1). This flag is maintained in the on state until the corresponding working role is won, and it becomes a state in which it is easy to win these working roles in the next and subsequent games. Specifically, even if the special role 1 is not won in the game in which the special role 1 is internally won, the same state as the special role 1 is internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the corresponding symbol combinations are all won. becomes easier.

The special role internally elected state will be described in detail later, but in the special role internally elected state, if a role other than the special role is internally elected, the symbols constituting the other role are arranged preferentially. , reel stop control is executed.

The re-playing hands 1 and 2 are prize-winning hands (operating hands) that can be played without inserting medals (game media) in the next game due to winning, and medals are not paid out. That is, the game can be played again with the same number of bets as the number of previously inserted coins. The corresponding symbol combination is "replay-replay-replay" for replay combination 1 and "replay-replay-watermelon" for replay combination 2. Among the replay hands, the replay hand 1 may be referred to as "normal replay" and the replay hand 2 may be referred to as "chance replay".

The replay hands 1 and 2 may be hands that allow the player to play the next game without inserting medals. Therefore, for example, if you win a replay, the insertion of medals in the next game may be automatically inserted (reset the number of inserted medals in the memory area for the number of inserted medals prepared in the RAM 308). The medals inserted in the winning game may be carried over to the next game and used as they are.

Small combinations 1 to 6 are winning combinations in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out upon winning. The corresponding symbol combinations are "ANY-Cherry-ANY" for the small combination 1, "Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon" for the small combination 2, and "Bell-Bell-Bell" for the small combination 3. 4 is "Replay-Bell-Bell", the small winning combination 5 is "Bell-Replay-Bell", and the small winning combination 6 is "Bell-Bell-Replay". Also, the corresponding number of payouts is as shown in FIG.

Among the above small roles, the small role 1 is "cherry", the small role 2 is "watermelon", the small role 3 is "bell", the small role 4 is "left bell", the small role 5 is "middle bell", and the small role 6 is sometimes referred to as the "right bell". In the case of "ANY-Cherry-ANY", the middle reel middle pattern of the middle reel 111 may be "Cherry", and the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 may have any pattern.

Here, the small winning combination 3 (bell) is a winning combination regardless of the order (push order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139, but the small winning combination 4 (left bell) and the small winning combination 5 (middle bell). And a small winning combination 6 (left bell) wins when the order of stop operations of the stop buttons 137 to 139 matches a predetermined order of stop operations. For example, a small win 4 (left bell) wins when the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 110, and a small win 5 (middle bell) wins when the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 111. A small win 6 (right bell) is won when the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 112 . Hereinafter, the small wins 4 to 6 may be collectively referred to as the pressing order bell. In addition, the order of stop operation for winning the internal winning push order bell is also called the correct order of stop operation.

<Types of internally elected roles>
Next, with reference to FIG. 172, the types of internal winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 172 is a diagram showing a lottery table for internal winning combinations for each RT.

FIG. 172 shows 12 types of internal winning combinations (condition device numbers 1 to 10), which are combinations of the combinations explained in FIG. The winning combination in the game is one of the combinations corresponding to this internal winning combination. These internal winning combinations are determined by lottery at the start of the game.

Condition device numbers 1 and 2 are both internally winning combinations including special combination 1. Of these, the condition device number 1 is an internal winning combination in which the special combination 1 is won alone and there is no duplication with other combinations. When this winning combination is won internally, it becomes possible to win a special winning combination 1 (transition to a special game state (RT2)), but if no prize is won, a transition is made to a special winning internal winning state (RT1). In this case, unless another winning combination is internally won in the next and subsequent games, the special winning combination 1 can be continuously won.

On the other hand, the condition device number 2 is an internal winning combination in which the special combination 1 and another combination are duplicated and internally won. In this embodiment, the small winning combination and the replay winning combination are stopped with priority over the special winning combination. Therefore, in a game in which the special role 1 and another role are duplicated and internally won, there is a possibility that this other role will win (in the case of a replay role, the prize will always be won), but the special role 1 will win. do not. It should be noted that the special combination internal winning state (RT1) is entered from the next game, and the special combination 1 can continue to be won as long as no other combination is internally won in the next and subsequent games.

Conditional device numbers 3 and 4 are internal winning hands made up of replayed hands.

In addition, in the condition device numbers 2 and 4, the replay combination 1 and the replay combination 2 are won in duplicate. When these conditional devices are internally won, if a predetermined stop operation is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 2 is displayed on the effective line, and if any other stop operation is performed, the replay combination 1 is displayed. Stop control is executed so that the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the activated line. In the present embodiment, the predetermined stop operation is the left first stop, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, not only the first stop operation but also the second stop operation may be included in the predetermined stop operation. Alternatively, the timing of the stop operation may be the predetermined stop operation described above, or a combination thereof, and any operation condition may be adopted.

Condition device numbers 5 to 10 are internal winning hands made up of small hands. Of these, the condition device numbers 8 to 10 are provided with operation conditions (push order here, correct push order below) for winning the corresponding minor combination (left bell, middle bell, right bell). In the following description, conditional device numbers 8 to 10 may be collectively referred to as push order bells. In the above configuration, if the stop operation does not match the order of pressing the correct answer, it may be lost. It is good also as a structure which carries out.

In the internal winning combination lottery table shown in FIG. 172, the horizontal axis represents each game state (RT), and the vertical axis represents each lottery value (size of lottery data range). In each RT to be described later, the internal winning probability of a role is determined by selecting numerical data corresponding to the range of lottery data associated with each role from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306, and using random values acquired during the internal lottery. is obtained by dividing by numerical data (for example, 65536) in the range of . For example, in the replay low probability state (RT0), the lottery value of special role 1 is 50, and the winning probability of special role 1 is 50/65536*100≈0.06%. The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each winning combination and loss. A random number value obtained as a result of executing an internal lottery is determined as a value corresponding to lottery data corresponding to which combination, and an internal lottery combination (internal winning combination) is determined. Setting 1 to setting 6 are prepared for the lottery data with different winning probabilities of at least one combination, and the staff of the game parlor can arbitrarily select and set any of the setting values.

In the present embodiment, the internal winning probabilities of the condition devices with condition device numbers 8 to 10 for each game state are uniform, but the internal winning probabilities may be biased.

If you do not win the role of each condition device, you will lose, and basically the symbol combination corresponding to the role will not be displayed. It should be noted that the fact that the symbol combination relating to the winning line is not stopped may be referred to as "losing". In addition, there is a case where the fact that you did not win the role of any of the conditional devices is expressed as "won wrong".

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 167, set values are set for different degrees of advantage for the player. Setting values 1 to 6 are prepared. There is a tendency that the higher the set value, the higher the player's advantage.

<Types of game status (RT)>
Next, the types of game states of the slot machine 100 and their transitions will be described. FIG. 173 is a transition diagram of the game state (RT) of the slot machine 100. FIG.

The slot machine 100 is configured to be able to switch between a plurality of types of states with different degrees of advantage, namely, a replay low probability state, a special role internal winning state, and a special game state. The degree is changed to improve the amusement of the game. In the following description, this game state may be referred to as RT, and the replay low probability state, the special role internal winning state, and the special game state may be referred to as RT0, RT1, and RT2, respectively. be. Also, when these RTs are switched, the corresponding lottery table is changed (described later). RT is controlled by the main controller 300 .

FIG. 173 shows each of the RTs described above, and their transition conditions are indicated on the arrows. When the transition condition corresponding to each arrow is met, RT transitions in the direction of that arrow. These transition conditions include, for example, winning a predetermined winning combination, internal winning of a predetermined winning combination, stop display of a specific symbol combination on a specific winning line, and completion of a specified number of games. , and a predetermined number of coins may be paid out.

Hereinafter, each RT will be described with appropriate reference to the drawings.

<Replay low probability state (RT0)>
RT0 has a lower internal winning probability of a replay role than RT1, and is the most disadvantageous RT for the player.

There are conditional device numbers 1 to 10 for the internally won hands in RT0. If the winning combination is not won, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. It should be noted that the fact that the symbol combination relating to the winning line is not stopped may be referred to as "losing". In addition, the fact that the role was not won may be expressed as "won't win".

FIG. 173 shows that when the special combination 1 is internally won while RT0 is set, the state shifts to the special combination internal winning state, which will be described later.

<Special part internal elected state (RT1)>
RT1 is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to the special combination 1 is set to ON. Also, the probability of winning a replay role is higher than RT0, and RT is more advantageous than RT0.

There are condition device numbers 3 to 10 in RT1 for internally won hands.

FIG. 173 shows that when the special combination 1 is won in RT1 (when the corresponding symbol combination is displayed), the process proceeds to RT2.

<Special game state (RT2)>
RT2 is an advantageous RT in which the internal winning probability of Bell (small combination 3) is higher than in other RTs, and medals can be easily obtained.

The condition device number 7 is the only internal winning combination in RT2. A small winning combination 3 that is internally won with the condition device number 7 is a winning combination that wins a bell regardless of operation conditions (operation timing, operation order) if internally won.

FIG. 173 shows that in RT2, when the payout exceeds the specified number (324, see the remarks column in FIG. 171), the process moves to RT0.

It should be noted that in this embodiment, RT2 ends when a specified number of payouts or more is executed, but for example, it ends when a predetermined combination (eg, single bonus) is won, or a predetermined number of times (eg, 8 times), or when a predetermined number of times (for example, 6 times) is played, the game may end.

<Unadvantageous Sections and Advantageous Sections>
In the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, apart from the above-described RT, the game state is divided into non-advantageous intervals and advantageous intervals for management. Of these, in the advantageous section, notification of the stop operation order for the internally won combination (hereinafter sometimes referred to as operation navigation) is allowed, and in the non-advantageous section, this operation navigation is not displayed. In addition, the operation navigation is displayed according to the conditions in the advantageous section, but the operation navigation may not be displayed even if the push order bell is internally elected. These states will be described below with reference to FIG. This figure shows the transition of the game state regarding the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section of the slot machine 100 .

In this embodiment, the initial state (for example, the state at the time of shipment from the factory) is set to the non-advantageous section. Also, when there is a RAM clear (setting change), this non-advantageous interval is set. The state of the non-advantageous section is referred to as normal state A. In addition, in this embodiment, three types of states of the advantageous section are provided: the normal state B, the chance state, and the AT state. FIG. 174 shows transitions between four states: normal state A, normal state B, chance state, and AT state. In this embodiment, the advantageous section flag is set to OFF for non-advantageous sections, and the advantageous section flag is set to ON for advantageous sections. distinguish. In addition, in order to prevent the gambling spirit, when the advantageous section continues over a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 games), or when the predetermined net increase number (for example, 2400) is exceeded is configured to be a non-advantageous section.

It should be noted that the state of the advantageous section may be only the AT state, or, for example, a premonitory state before shifting to the AT state may be further provided, and is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. . Similarly, there may be multiple types of states for the states of the non-advantageous sections.

Since the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section are set separately from the RT, for example, there are cases where the transition to RT2 occurs during the advantageous section. However, in RT2, the push order bell is not internally won, and the operation navigation is not displayed, so for RT2, a non-advantageous section may be set once, and after RT2 is completed, it may return to the advantageous section. . Further, the configuration is not limited to the above, and it may be configured such that an internal winning is made to the pressing order bell at RT2 and an operation navigation is displayed.

Each state of the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section will be described below.

<Normal state A>
In the non-advantageous section (normal state A), a lottery for transition to the advantageous section is executed based on the internal winning combination. If the lottery is won, the state shifts to the normal state B in the advantageous section.

<Normal state B>
In the normal state B, the state shifts to the chance state when the conditions for shifting to the chance state are satisfied. Further, when the transition condition is established, the number of games in the chance state is set. Regarding this transition condition, for example, a condition that is established by executing a predetermined number of games in the normal state B, a lottery for transition to each game chance state in the normal state B, and when this lottery is won , conditions to be established when points (any of 1 to 3) added according to the result of one game in normal state B accumulate up to a specified number (100 points), and so on. Conditions can be adopted.

<Chance state>
In the chance state, an AT lottery may be conducted according to the internally won combination. When the AT lottery is not won (the number of AT sets is 0) before the set number of games has passed, the game shifts to the normal state B, and when the number of AT sets is 0, the game shifts to the AT state. When shifting to the AT state, the AT set number is decremented by 1, and the AT remaining game number is set to a predetermined number of games (for example, 50).

In the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, the AT lottery is executed in the chance state. The AT lottery timing and execution conditions can be arbitrarily adopted.

<AT state>
Next, the AT state will be explained. Below, the AT state may be simply referred to as AT.

In the AT state, when the push order bell (condition device numbers 8 to 10) is internally won, an operation navigation showing the correct push order corresponding to each is displayed. Note that this operation navigation is not limited to indicating the pressing order, and may indicate the timing of the stop operation, such as a display such as "Aim for...", or the pressing order and timing. may indicate both. In addition, on the payout number indicator 127, the 7 segments are lit up in a manner corresponding to the pressing order of the correct answer (hereinafter sometimes referred to as navigation lighting). The display on the payout number indicator 127 may also be illuminated in a mode corresponding to the timing of the stop operation, or may be illuminated in a mode corresponding to both the pressing order and the timing. .

In this embodiment, the number of AT remaining games is subtracted as the AT state game progresses. Then, when the AT remaining game number becomes 0, if the AT set number is greater than 0, the AT remaining game number is set to a predetermined value (eg, 50) again, and if the AT set number is 0, the chance state is entered. conduct a lottery. When the lottery is won, the state shifts to the chance state, and when the lottery is not won, the advantageous section is shifted to the non-advantageous section (parameters related to the advantageous section are initialized). Incidentally, when the special game state (RT2) is entered in the middle of the AT state, the subtraction of the number of remaining AT games is stopped, and the subtraction is resumed when RT0 is reached. Note that the number of remaining AT games may be added by winning an additional lottery (executed at the time of internal lottery in this embodiment).

The AT state may be started and ended according to a predetermined condition (for example, when a specific game state is reached) without being limited to the configuration using the AT set number or the AT remaining game number.

<Overview of processing>
The processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received this start signal is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

When the power is turned on, first, in step S101, initial setting processing of the main control unit is performed. In this main control unit initial setting process, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupt inhibition is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is initialized. Allow operation and set initial values.

In step S103, a game start process is executed. In this process, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted (maintenance or bet buttons 130 and 132 have been operated), and the winning line display lamp 120 is lit according to the medals inserted. Also, when medals have been inserted, preparations are made to send an insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-control section 400 . If the player wins the replay in the previous game, the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous game are inserted, so the player does not need to insert medals. In addition, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated while the specified number (three) of medals has been used. Confirm and start playing.

In step S105, various lottery processes including internal winning combination lottery process and the like are executed. In this process, the internal winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current RT, and an internal lottery (lottery for the combination) is performed using this table and the random number obtained from the random number generation circuit 316. Determine internal winners. As a result of the internal lottery, if any combination (including the active combination) is internally won, the flag for that combination is turned on. Also, in this step S105, preparations are made to transmit an internal lottery command including internal winning information indicating the result of the internal winning combination lottery to the first sub-control section 400. FIG. For example, when a replay is internally won, preparations are made to transmit an internal lottery command indicating that the replay is internally won to the first sub-control unit 400, and the winning combination is executed. If the result of the internal lottery is a loss (non-winning role), preparations are made to transmit an internal lottery command indicating a loss to the first sub-control unit 400 . The internal winning command includes information on the internal winning combination, information on the current advantageous section (if the period is finite, including information on the number of remaining games such as the number of remaining AT games), and AT lottery. And information that can specify the result of the AT addition lottery is included. Of the above information, the information relating to the number of AT remaining games may not be included in the internal winning command in the non-AT state, and may be included in the internal winning command only in the AT state. Furthermore, in the AT state, the internal winning command including that the condition device numbers 8 to 10 have been internally won also includes operation instruction information representing the correct operation order of the operation order (push order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139. .

In step S111, reel stop data corresponding to the first stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300 .

In step S113, reel rotation start processing is executed on the condition that the game interval timer (subtracted in timer update processing, which will be described later) is 0, and the reels 110 to 112 are started to rotate. Also, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to transmit a reel rotation start command to the first sub-controller 400 . After that, when the reels 110-112 reach a predetermined rotational speed, the optical sensors provided on each reel are detected, and the symbol position of each reel is grasped, the stop operation to the stop buttons 137-139 is enabled. The game interval counter secures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) to suppress gambling.

In step S115, a reel stop control process is executed. In this processing, when one of the stop buttons 137-139 is pressed after the stop operation is validated, the reels 110-112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137-139 are stopped. Specifically, every time a stop operation is performed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of pull-in frames set in the stop table. Further, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared for the first stop operation, and reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared for the second stop operation. For each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, the corresponding command (first 1st to 3rd stop commands) to the first sub-controller 400. When all the reels 110-112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S117.

In step S117, a winning determination process is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" is aligned on the activated pay line, it is determined that the small win 2 has been won. After determining the winning combination, preparations are made to transmit the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S119, if the player wins any winning combination with a payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is given (paid out), and the payout number indicator 127 is used to display the given number.

In step S121, RT update processing is performed. In this process, RT is transitioned based on the conditions shown in the state transition diagram shown in FIG.

In step S123, game state update processing is performed. Here, based on the result of the game, the status of the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section described in FIG. 174 is updated. For example, when the normal state A shifts to the normal state B, the advantageous section flag is set to ON, and when the AT state shifts to the normal state A, the advantageous section flag is set OFF. In addition, preparations are made for transmission of the game state update command. This command includes information on RT, information on non-advantageous intervals and advantageous intervals (for example, advantageous interval flag, number of AT sets and number of AT remaining games).

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-described processing.

<Main control unit 300 timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area. Note that the state of the optical sensor is confirmed in this process.

In step S207, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to interrupt statuses (acquiring various interrupt statuses based on signals from various sensors 318) are executed. For example, if the interrupt status is medal insertion processing, medal insertion acceptance processing is performed, and if the interruption status is payout processing, medal payout processing is performed.

In step S209, timer update processing is performed. For example, a process of updating various timers in units of time, such as subtracting a game interval timer, is executed.

In step S<b>211 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission in main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc. of the main control section 300 are transmitted to the first sub-control section 400 . The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes strobe information (if it is ON, it indicates that data is set), command type (in this embodiment, basic command, input command, start lever Receipt command, internal winning command, effect command accompanying effect lottery processing, reel rotation start command accompanying start of rotation of reels 110-112, first to third press commands accompanying acceptance of operation of stop buttons 137-139, reel Consists of 1st to 3rd stop commands associated with the stop of 110 to 112, winning command, payout number command and payout end command accompanying medal payout processing, status update command), command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type) It is

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S213, an external signal setting process is performed. In this external signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S205, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of an error related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low voltage signal is received (power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and if a low voltage signal is not received (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219. move on.

In step S219, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, processing such as setting the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S221, information that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power failure when power is restored, is saved in a predetermined area of RAM 308. A checksum value for the area is derived and stored in the RAM 308, and a power supply flag indicating that power-off processing has been performed is set to ON.

<Processing of first sub-controller 400>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 177(a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. 177(b) is a flow chart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 177(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, in step S301, various initial settings are performed. This initialization is performed when the power is turned on. In this processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state.

In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305.

In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S307, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S309, effect control processing is performed. Here, the effect data is expanded, the processing of setting the device data in the effect execution area provided in the RAM 408, the process of setting the effect data in the effect reservation area provided in the RAM 408, and the received command And based on the information contained in the command, it performs processing such as setting effect data and executing control processing. Note that the effect data set in the effect reservation area and the device data set in the effect execution area may be updated (overwritten) with different data. In this case, the effect contents are changed based on the overwritten data.

In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from the device data set in the effect execution areas corresponding to the speakers 272 and 277 and outputting the acquired control data to the sound source IC 418, sound effects are executed.

In step S313, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to various lamps 420 and outputting the acquired control data to the driving circuit 422, the effect by the lamp is executed.

In step S315, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, the control data is acquired from the device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the shutter 163, and the acquired control data is output to the driving circuit 424, thereby executing the effect by the shutter 163.

In step S317, information output processing is performed to set transmission of the control command to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the effect image display device 157, preparations are made to transmit this device data to the second sub-controller 500, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 177(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S321 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 177(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S331, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 177(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S333, transmission of the device data to the second sub-control section 500 set in step S315, update processing of the random number value for effect, and the like are performed.

<Processing of second sub-controller 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 178(a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 178(b) is a flow chart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 178(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 178(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S401 of FIG. 178(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S403, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405.

In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S407, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S409, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S407, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S411, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S409. For example, if there is an instruction for image control in the effect data read in step S409, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). This image control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 178(d). When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S403.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 178(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 . In step S415 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 178(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S417, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S403 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 178(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S419, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing of step S411 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 178(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S421, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 518 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

At step S423, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S425, otherwise a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S425, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S421, the CPU 504 obtains information of the image data forming the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, and so on). , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516 . The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S427, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S429, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image rendering. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S431. wait for is entered.

In step S431, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

[Configuration of push button]
179 and 180, the push button 600 used as the bet buttons 130, 132, stop buttons 137-139, etc. will be described below. 179 is a perspective view showing a button body 610 constituting push button 600, and FIG. 180 is a sectional view showing push button 600. As shown in FIG.

The push button 600 has a button body 610 (left-down hatching in FIG. 180), a button base 620 (horizontal and vertical cross-hatching in FIG. 180), and a return spring 630 (diagonal cross-hatching in FIG. 180). The button body 610 includes a button head 611 having transparency, a trunk portion 612 having a slightly smaller diameter than the button head 611, and two buttons provided on the opposite side of the button head 611 with the trunk portion 612 interposed therebetween. It has legs 613 . The button body 612 is a hollow body, and light from a separately provided light emitter (for example, an LED 720 on a substrate 700 to be described later) passes through the button body 612 and hits the button head 611, causing the button head 611 to emit light. configured to be able to The two leg portions 613 are each provided with an engaging portion 614 that engages with the button base 620 . Further, the tip of the leg portion 613 serves as a detection piece for a detection sensor 710, which will be described later.

The push button 600 is in a state in which the button body 610 and the return spring 630 are housed inside the button base 620 . FIG. 180(A) shows push button 600 in a state in which button body 610 is not pressed (hereinafter referred to as a non-pressed state). In this non-pressed state, the elastic force of the return spring 630 pushes the button body 610 in the direction opposite to the pressing direction, but the locking portion 614 is locked to the button base 620, so the button body 610 can be pressed. It is in a fixed position. When the button body 610 is pressed from this state, the state shown in FIG. In this pressed state, the force of pressing the button body 610 causes the return spring 630 to contract, the locking portion 614 to separate from the button base 620 , and the button body 610 is pushed until the button head 611 is locked by the button base 620 . After that, when the button body 610 is no longer pressed, it returns to the non-pressed state shown in FIG. 180(A). With the configuration described above, the push button 600 allows the button body 610 to move within a certain range.

Next, a configuration for detecting movement due to pressing of the button body 610 described above will be described. 181 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between button body 610 and detection sensor 710. FIG. Of these, FIGS. 181(A1) and (B1) show the positional relationship when viewed from the same direction as in FIG. FIG. 181(A2) is a view from another angle (side view) so that the leg 613 is sandwiched between the detection sensors 710 in the state of FIG. 181(A1). FIG. 181(B2) is a view from another angle (side view) so that the leg 613 is sandwiched between the detection sensors 710 in the state of FIG. 181(B1). Note that the button base 620 and the return spring 630 are omitted in these figures.

This detection sensor 710 has a light-emitting element 711 and a light-receiving element 712, and a leg portion 613 that moves in the pressing direction when the button body 610 is pressed corresponds to a detection area ( By being inserted into the area connecting the light emitting element 711 and the light receiving element 712, light shielding is detected. FIGS. 181A1 and 181A2 show that the leg portion 613 is not in the detection area between the light emitting element 711 and the light receiving element 712 when the button body 610 is not pressed. 181(B1) and (B2) show that the leg portion 613 is in the detection area between the light emitting element 711 and the light receiving element 712 when the button body 610 is in the depressed state. With this configuration, pressing of the push button 600 is detected. In the non-pressed state, the leg 613 is not in the detection area between the light emitting element 711 and the light receiving element 712, but the leg 613 is in a standby state in the space defined by the detection sensor 710. ing. By standing by at this position in a non-pressed state, it is possible to quickly detect that the button body 610 has been pressed. In addition, since the amount of movement of the button body 610 can be reduced in this configuration, the durability of the push button 600 can be improved.

In the push button 600 described above, the leg portion 613 of the button body 610 plays two roles: a detection piece for detecting depression and a locking portion for locking to the button base 620 . In this way, the button body 610 can be made less likely to be damaged by simplifying the structure of both the detection piece and the locking portion. In the example of FIG. 179, the button body 610 is provided with a plurality of legs 613 (two in the figure), but the configuration is such that only one leg is provided in combination with the detection piece and the locking portion. may be Also, when a plurality of legs 613 are provided, one leg 613 may be the detection target as in the example of FIG. A person who intends to do so can be made to play the role of a dummy detection piece, making it difficult to commit fraud.

In the example of FIG. 179, the leg portion 613 of the button body 610 has a flat shape in the radial direction of the button body 610, but the shape of the leg portion 613 is not limited. As in the example of (A), the leg portion 613 may be flat in the circumferential direction. 182(B) and (C) show the positional relationship between the leg portion 613 and the detection sensor 710 when the button body 610 of FIG. 182(A) is employed. FIG. 182(B) shows that the leg portion 613 is not in the detection area between the light emitting element 711 and the light receiving element 712 when the button body 610 is not pressed, and FIG. 182(C). shows that the leg portion 613 is in the detection area between the light emitting element 711 and the light receiving element 712 when the button body 610 is in the depressed state.

179 and 182(A), the configuration in which the locking portion 614 protrudes inside the button body 610 has been described. The arrangement and orientation of the engaging portion 614 are not limited.

[Detection sensor and board placement for multiple button bodies]
When using the push button 600 described above, a plurality of push buttons 600 may be arranged side by side like the three stop buttons 137 to 139 of the stop button unit 136 in FIG. The positional relationship between the button body 610 and the detection sensor 710 when a plurality of push buttons 600 described above are arranged will be described below with reference to FIG. This figure is a diagram showing an example of the layout of the button body 610 and the detection sensor 710 . It should be noted that illustration of the button base 620 and the return spring 630 is omitted in this figure.

183(A), (B), and (C) show three button bodies 610 (hereinafter referred to as left button body 610L, middle button body 610C, and right button body 610R, respectively) arranged in a direction orthogonal to the pressing direction. )It is shown. These button bodies 610 are provided with a detection sensor 710 for detecting depression of one of the legs 613 . These detection sensors 710 are provided on a common substrate 700 . In addition to the detection sensor 710 , the substrate 700 is provided with three LEDs 720 for individually causing the three button bodies 610 to emit light from the inside, and a harness connector 730 . The harness connector 730 is connected to a harness (connection cable) that connects a device to which the detection signal of the push button 600 is to be sent, such as the substrate of the main control unit 300 .

183A, 183B, and 183C, all the leg portions 613 of the three button bodies 610 are in a straight line. In FIG. 183(A), the left button body 610L and the middle button body 610C are provided with the detection sensor 710 on the leg 613 on the side adjacent to each other, and the detection sensor 710 is provided on the left leg 613 of the right button body. is provided. In FIG. 183(B), similarly to FIG. 183(A), for the left button body 610L and the middle button body 610C, the detection sensor 710 is provided on the leg 613 on the side adjacent to each other. 183A in that a detection sensor 710 is provided on a leg portion 613 of FIG. In FIG. 183(C), the detection sensors 710 of the three button bodies 610 are all provided on the right leg 613 .

As shown in FIGS. 183A and 183B, when a structure in which two detection sensors 710 are arranged close to each other on the substrate 700 is adopted, the size of the substrate 700 can be reduced or a space can be secured on the substrate 700. can be For example, the substrate 700 in FIG. 183(A) is smaller than the substrate 700 in FIG. 183(C). In the example of FIG. 183(A), the size of the substrate 700 can be reduced while the connector 730 is arranged between the detection sensors 710 of the middle button main body 610C and the right button main body 610R. In addition, in FIG. 183(B), the distance between the detection sensors 710 of the middle button body 610C and the right button body 610R is wider than in the example of FIG. 183(C). In the example of FIG. 183(B), a larger connector 730 can be arranged between the detection sensors 710 of the middle button main body 610C and the right button main body 610R.

The effect of reducing the size of the substrate 700 or securing the space on the substrate 700 described above is achieved by the two adjacent button bodies 610 (the left button body 610L and the middle button body 610C in FIGS. 183A and 183B). It occurs by bringing the detection sensor 710 as close as possible. Such a configuration is not limited to the configuration in which all the leg portions 613 are arranged in a straight line as in the example of FIGS. Of these, a configuration in which the detection sensor 710 is provided on the leg portion 613 closer to the button body 610 may be adopted.

Also, when the detection sensors 710 of two adjacent button bodies 610 are configured to be as close as possible, the positional relationship between these detection sensors 710 is different from the positional relationship between the button bodies 610 . For example, in FIGS. 183A and 183B, the positional relationship (distance and direction) of the detection sensor 710 of the middle button body 610C with respect to the detection sensor 710 of the left button body 610L, and the position of the middle button body 610C with respect to the left button body 610L. Relationships are different. On the other hand, in FIG. 183C, the positional relationship (distance and direction) of the detection sensor 710 of the middle button body 610C with respect to the detection sensor 710 of the left button body 610L and the positional relationship of the middle button body 610C with respect to the left button body 610L are are the same.

In the configuration of FIG. 183(C), when the position of the detection sensor 710 with respect to one of the button bodies 610 is known, the position of the detection sensor 710 with respect to the other button bodies 610 can be easily guessed. can be done. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 183(A) and 183(B), when adopting a configuration in which the positional relationship between the detection sensors 710 in two adjacent button bodies 610 is different from the positional relationship between the button bodies 610, Since the position of the detection sensor 710 with respect to the button body 610 is different for each button body 610, fraud can be made difficult. In order to achieve this effect, it is not essential to bring the detection sensors 710 of the two adjacent button bodies 610 as close as possible.

In the example of FIG. 183, the thickness direction of the substrate 700 is the same as the pressing direction, but the orientation of the substrate is not particularly limited. It may be configured to FIG. 184 shows an example of a configuration in which the thickness direction of the substrate 700 is orthogonal to the pressing direction. Depending on the orientation of the substrate 700, the overall size can be made more compact in some cases.

[Operation example of additional notification effect]
As described above, in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, when the AT state is set, operation navigation may be executed. FIG. 185(A) shows an example of the background in the AT state, and FIG. 185(B) shows operation navigation superimposed on the background in the AT state shown in FIG. 185(A). An example is shown. In the AT state, the number of remaining AT games is decreased as the game progresses, but this number of remaining AT games may be added. At this time, a configuration is adopted in which an operation means including the chance button 190 is used to execute an effect for informing of the addition. FIG. 185(C) shows an example of an effect prompting the operation of the chance button 190 (hereinafter referred to as chance button operation display), and FIG. An example of numerical display) is shown. In addition, in the examples of FIGS. 185(C) and (D), backgrounds different from the backgrounds of FIGS. 185(A) and (B) are used. FIG. 185(B) shows an example of displaying operation navigation in a state where the background in the AT state shown in FIG. 185(A) is displayed. may be displayed.

The operation of these effects will be described below with reference to the drawings. In the following description of the operation example, the AT state is set unless otherwise specified. In addition, operations (corresponding to timings T1 to T6) are performed in the order of start operation, first stop operation, second stop operation, third stop operation, bet operation, and start operation, and the chance button 190 is pressed during these operations. A case where an operation (corresponding to timing TC) interrupts will be described.

[[Operation example (1)]]
FIG. 186 is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the second stop operation and the third stop operation (between timings T3 and T4) when the number of remaining AT games is added. be. In this example, it is assumed that a winning combination (including loss) other than a replaying combination is internally won by the first start operation (timing T1).

In the operation example of FIG. 186, an effect is executed in this game (a game starting at timing T1) that a lottery for adding the number of AT remaining games has been won at the time of the start operation or in the game before that. In this case, when the start operation is performed, the effect image display device 157 switches the display content from the background during AT (FIG. 185(A)) to the chance button operation display (FIG. 185(C)). Furthermore, the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the off state to the on state. These effects can prompt the player to operate the chance button 190 .

Next, assume that the chance button 190 is operated between the second stop operation and the third stop operation (between timings T3 and T4) (timing TC). At this time, the effect image display device 157 switches the display content from the chance button operation display to the additional G number display (FIG. 185(D)), and the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the ON state to the OFF state. In this example, the chance button 190 is operated between the second stop operation and the third stop operation (between timings T3 and T4). The same operation is executed by operating the chance button 190 of .

After that, when the third stop operation (timing T4) is performed, the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 are turned on. At this time, the effect image display device 157 continues to display the added G number. Then, when a bet operation is performed (timing T5), the display of the effect image display device 157 switches from the display of the number of G added to the background during AT (FIG. 185(A)), and the display inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 changes. The lamp is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. As for the number of remaining AT games after switching to the background during AT, the value after being added is displayed. In this example, at the time of the next start operation (timing T6), the push order bell (condition device number 8 to 10) is internally won, and operation navigation (Fig. 185 (B)) is being executed. there is

[[Operation example (2)]]
FIG. 187 is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the third stop operation and the bet operation (between timings T4 and T5) when the number of remaining AT games is added. In this example, it is assumed that a winning combination (including loss) other than a replaying combination is internally won by the first start operation (timing T1).

In the operation example of FIG. 187, an effect is executed in this game (a game starting at timing T1) that a lottery for adding the number of AT remaining games has been won in the game at or before the start operation. In this case, when the start operation is performed, the effect image display device 157 switches the display content from the background during AT (FIG. 185(A)) to the chance button operation display (FIG. 185(C)). Furthermore, the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the off state to the on state. These effects can prompt the player to operate the chance button 190 .

Subsequently, it is assumed that the third stop operation is operated without operating the chance button 190 (timing T4). At this time, the chance button operation display continues on the effect image display device 157, and the lighting state of the lamp inside the chance button 190 is maintained. Furthermore, the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 are turned on.

Then, it is assumed that the chance button 190 is operated between the third stop operation and the bet operation (between timings T4 and T5) (timing TC). At this time, the effect image display device 157 switches the display content from the chance button operation display to the additional G number display (FIG. 185(D)), and the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the ON state to the OFF state. The lighting state of the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 is maintained.

After that, when a bet operation is performed (timing T5), the display of the effect image display device 157 is switched from the display of the added G number to the background during AT (FIG. 185(A)), and the display inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 The lamp is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. As for the number of remaining AT games after switching to the background during AT, the value after being added is displayed. In this example, at the time of the next start operation (timing T6), the push order bell (condition device number 8 to 10) is internally won, and operation navigation (Fig. 185 (B)) is being executed. there is

[[Operation example (3)]]
FIG. 188 is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the bet operation and the start operation (between timings T5 and T6) when the number of AT remaining games is increased. In this example, it is assumed that a winning combination (including loss) other than a replaying combination is internally won by the first start operation (timing T1).

In the operation example of FIG. 188, it is assumed that an effect is executed in this game (a game starting at timing T1) that a lottery for adding the number of AT remaining games has been won in the game at or before the start operation. In this case, when the start operation is performed, the effect image display device 157 switches the display content from the background during AT (FIG. 185(A)) to the chance button operation display (FIG. 185(C)). Furthermore, the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the off state to the on state. These effects can prompt the player to operate the chance button 190 .

Subsequently, it is assumed that the third stop operation is operated without operating the chance button 190 (timing T4). At this time, the chance button operation display continues on the effect image display device 157, and the lighting state of the lamp inside the chance button 190 is maintained. Furthermore, the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 are turned on.

Further, it is assumed that a bet operation is performed without operating the chance button 190 (timing T5). At this time, in the effect image display device 157, the display is switched to the background during AT (FIG. 185(A)) without executing the additional G number display, and the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 are turned off. switch to. As for the number of remaining AT games after switching to the background during AT, the value after being added is displayed.

After that, when the chance button 190 is operated before the start operation (timing TC), the effect image display device 157 maintains the background display during AT, and the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the ON state to the OFF state. . If the chance button 190 is not operated until the next start operation (timing T6), the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the ON state to the OFF state when the start operation is performed. Also, in this example, it is shown that the push order bell (condition device number 8 to 10) is internally won at the time of the next start operation (timing T6), and operation navigation (Fig. 185 (B)) is being executed. there is

[[operation example (4)]]
FIG. 189 is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the second stop operation and the third stop operation (between timings T3 and T4) when the number of remaining AT games is added. be. In this example, it is assumed that the replay combination is internally won by the first start operation (timing T1).

In the operation example of FIG. 189, an effect is executed in this game (a game starting at timing T1) that a lottery for adding the number of AT remaining games has been won in the game at or before the start operation. In this case, when the start operation is performed, the effect image display device 157 switches the display content from the background during AT (FIG. 185(A)) to the chance button operation display (FIG. 185(C)). Furthermore, the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the off state to the on state. These effects can prompt the player to operate the chance button 190 .

Next, assume that the chance button 190 is operated between the second stop operation and the third stop operation (between timings T3 and T4) (timing TC). At this time, the effect image display device 157 switches the display content from the chance button operation display to the additional G number display (FIG. 185(D)), and the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the ON state to the OFF state. In this example, the chance button 190 is operated between the second stop operation and the third stop operation (between timings T3 and T4). The same operation is executed by operating the chance button 190 of .

After that, when the third stop operation (timing T4) is performed, the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 do not turn on, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. This is because the replay combination is internally won and no bet operation is required. At this time, the effect image display device 157 continues to display the added G number. Therefore, regarding the bet operation (timing T5) after the third stop operation, regardless of whether or not the operation is performed, the display contents of the effect image display device 157 and the lamp states of various buttons are maintained as they are (they do not change). ). Then, when the next start operation is performed (timing T6), the display of the effect image display device 157 is switched from the additional G number display to the background during AT (FIG. 185(A)). As for the number of remaining AT games after switching to the background during AT, the value after being added is displayed. In this example, at the time of the next start operation (timing T6), the push order bell (condition device number 8 to 10) is internally won, and operation navigation (Fig. 185 (B)) is being executed. there is

[[operation example (5)]]
FIG. 190 is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the third stop operation and the bet operation (between timings T4 and T5) when the number of remaining AT games is added. In this example, it is assumed that the replay combination is internally won by the first start operation (timing T1).

In the operation example of FIG. 190, an effect is executed in this game (the game starting at timing T1) to notify that the lottery for adding the number of AT remaining games has been won at the time of the start operation or in the game before that. In this case, when the start operation is performed, the effect image display device 157 switches the display content from the background during AT (FIG. 185(A)) to the chance button operation display (FIG. 185(C)). Furthermore, the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the off state to the on state. These effects can prompt the player to operate the chance button 190 .

Subsequently, it is assumed that the third stop operation is operated without operating the chance button 190 (timing T4). At this time, the chance button operation display continues on the effect image display device 157, and the lighting state of the lamp inside the chance button 190 is maintained. Furthermore, the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 are turned on. Here, since the replay role is internally won, no bet operation is required, but the player is prompted to perform the bet operation so as to secure an opportunity to switch the display contents by the bet operation.

Then, it is assumed that the chance button 190 is operated between the third stop operation and the bet operation (between timings T4 and T5) (timing TC). At this time, the effect image display device 157 switches the display content from the chance button operation display to the additional G number display (FIG. 185(D)), and the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the ON state to the OFF state. The lighting state of the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 is maintained.

After that, when a bet operation is performed (timing T5), the display of the effect image display device 157 is switched from the display of the added G number to the background during AT (FIG. 185(A)), and the display inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 The lamp is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. As for the number of remaining AT games after switching to the background during AT, the value after being added is displayed. Here, when the bet operation is not performed after the chance button 190 is operated, similar operations (switching of the display and switching of the lighting mode of the lamp) are executed by the subsequent start operation. In this example, at the time of the next start operation (timing T6), the push order bell (condition device number 8 to 10) is internally won, and operation navigation (Fig. 185 (B)) is being executed. there is

[[operation example (6)]]
FIG. 191 is a diagram showing an operation example when the chance button 190 is operated between the third stop operation and the bet operation (between timings T4 and T5) when the number of remaining AT games is added. In this example, it is assumed that the replay combination is internally won by the first start operation (timing T1).

In the operation example of FIG. 191, an effect is executed in this game (a game starting at timing T1) to notify that the lottery for adding the number of AT remaining games has been won at the time of the start operation or in the game before that. In this case, when the start operation is performed, the effect image display device 157 switches the display content from the background during AT (FIG. 185(A)) to the chance button operation display (FIG. 185(C)). Furthermore, the lamp inside the chance button 190 switches from the off state to the on state. These effects can prompt the player to operate the chance button 190 .

Subsequently, it is assumed that the third stop operation is operated without operating the chance button 190 (timing T4). At this time, the chance button operation display continues on the effect image display device 157, and the lighting state of the lamp inside the chance button 190 is maintained. Furthermore, the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 are turned on. Here, since the replay role is internally won, no bet operation is required, but the player is prompted to perform the bet operation so as to secure an opportunity to switch the display contents by the bet operation.

Further, it is assumed that a bet operation is performed without operating the chance button 190 (timing T5). At this time, in the effect image display device 157, the display content is switched from the chance button operation display to the additional G number display (FIG. 185(D)), and the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 are switched from the ON state to the OFF state. At this time, since the operation of the chance button 190 is no longer necessary due to the execution of the display of the number of G to be added, the lamp inside the chance button 190 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. Regarding the operation (timing TC) of the chance button 190 after the bet operation, the display contents of the effect image display device 157 and the status of the lamps of various buttons are maintained (not changed) regardless of whether or not the operation is performed. ).

After that, when the next start operation is performed (timing T6), the display of the effect image display device 157 is switched from the display of the added G number to the background during AT (FIG. 185(A)). As for the number of remaining AT games after switching to the background during AT, the value after being added is displayed. In this example, at the time of the next start operation (timing T6), the push order bell (condition device number 8 to 10) is internally won, and operation navigation (Fig. 185 (B)) is being executed. there is

It should be noted that if the next start operation is performed without performing either the bet operation or the chance button 190 operation after the third stop operation, the display of the effect image display device 157 changes from the chance button operation display to the background during AT. The display is switched to (FIG. 185(A)), the lamps inside the bet buttons 130 and 132 are switched from on to off, and the lamp inside the chance button 190 is switched from on to off.

[Regarding the configuration of the additional notification effect (1)]
The configuration of the additional notification effect described above makes it possible to display the additional G number using the chance button 190 (for example, FIG. 189), and for a certain period (from the start operation to the third stop operation in the above example). ), if the chance button 190 is not operated, then an opportunity is provided to display the additional G number by operating the chance button 190 or betting (for example, FIGS. 190 and 191). In this configuration, even if the player does not notice that the chance button 190 is operated to display the additional G number, the display of the additional G number can be executed by other operating means. There is, and it is possible to make it easier to execute the additional G number display. It should be noted that the above configuration may be applied not only to the display of the number of G to be added, but also to any notification. Further, the operation means in the above operation example is one example, and may be related to the progress of the game, or may be dedicated to effects.

It should be noted that, in the above configuration, a display prompting the user to operate the operating means, such as a chance button operation display, may be executed. In this case, it may be possible to more reliably perform the notification by operating the operating means. In addition, when the notification is executed by an operating means different from the prompting operating means, the player can be surprised.

Further, the above configuration may be configured such that each operation means is provided with a light emitting means, and the light emitting state can be switched to prompt the user to operate the operation means.

[Regarding the configuration of the additional notification effect (2)]
The configuration of the additional notification effect described above is such that when the chance button 190 is operated prior to the betting operation in a certain period (after the third stop operation in the above example), the operation of the chance button 190 and the subsequent betting operation are performed. 187, 190) is provided, and when the betting operation is performed first, the display content is switched by the betting operation, but the chance button 190 188 and 191 for example). With this configuration, it is possible to change the display contents according to the player's operation, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. Note that display contents to be switched are not limited to various notifications and background displays, and various displays can be used. Further, the operation means in the above operation example is one example, and may be related to the progress of the game, or may be dedicated to effects.

It should be noted that, in the above configuration, a display prompting the user to operate the operating means, such as a chance button operation display, may be executed. In this case, it may be possible to more reliably switch the display contents by operating the operating means. Also, when the display contents are switched by an operation means different from the prompted operation means, the player can be surprised.

Further, the above configuration may be configured such that each operation means is provided with a light emitting means, and the light emitting state can be switched to prompt the user to operate the operation means.

[Regarding the configuration of the additional notification effect (3)]
In the configuration of the additional notification effect described above, for a bet operation in a certain period (after the third stop operation in the above example), when executing an additional G number display (for example, FIG. 191) and displaying the background during AT There is a case (for example, FIG. 190), and in the former case, there is a case (for example, FIG. 191) in which the background is displayed during AT by the subsequent start operation.

With this configuration, the background can be easily displayed during AT, and the amusement of the game can be improved. Note that these display contents are only examples, and various types of display such as various notifications and background displays may be used. Further, the operation means in the above operation example is one example, and may be related to the progress of the game, or may be dedicated to effects. As for these operation means, each operation means may be provided with a light emitting means so that the light emission state can be switched in order to prompt the user to operate the operation means.

≪Others≫
In the present embodiment, the slot machine 100 using medals (coins) as a game medium is shown as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and game balls (for example, pachinko balls) are used as games. It can be applied to slot machines, pachinko machines, arranged ball game machines, rock-paper game machines, smart balls, etc., which are used as media.

In addition, the slot machine is a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals, such as running on mobile terminals (smartphones, game machines) and personal computers by a program that simulates the operation based on the above configuration. In this case, the game medium contains digitized data corresponding to medals, and the game medium is inserted by inputting the digitized data from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device). Payout of game media includes outputting digitized data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Although the present embodiment has been described above, it is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiment of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. , those involving such modifications and changes are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the invention. are not limited to those listed.

<<Correspondence between the configuration of the invention and the embodiment>>
Configurations of the invention described in the above description will now be described with reference to corresponding configurations.

In the above description,
a pressing portion (for example, a button body 610) to be pressed;
a base portion (e.g., button base 620) that engages with the pressing portion to enable the pressing portion to move;
a sensor (for example, a detection sensor 710) for detecting a pressing operation of the pressing portion;
An operating means (e.g., push button 600) comprising
The pressing part has a leg (for example, leg 613),
The leg portion is provided with a locking portion (locking portion 614) that locks to the base portion,
The sensor detects the movement of the leg (see, for example, FIG. 181),
An operating means is described which is characterized by:

Further, the operation means described above,
The sensor has a detection area (for example, a detection area between the light emitting element 711 and the light receiving element 712) in a space sandwiched between opposing walls (for example, in a space partitioned by the detection sensor 710), Detecting the passage of an object in the detection area,
When the pressing portion is in a non-pressing state, the leg portion enters a space sandwiched between the wall portions outside the detection area of the sensor (for example, FIG. 181 (A2)). reference),
An operating means is described which is characterized by:

Further, the operation means described above,
The pressing part has a plurality of legs (for example, FIG. 179),
one of the plurality of legs is the leg to be detected by the sensor (e.g., FIG. 181);
An operating means is described which is characterized by:

again,
a first operation means (for example, the left button main body 610L in FIGS. 183(A) and (B)), which is the operation means described above;
the second operating means (for example, the middle button main body 610C in FIGS. 183(A) and (B)), which is the operating means described above;
An operating unit comprising
The first operating means and the second operating means are arranged side by side,
The positional relationship of the sensor of the second operating means with respect to the sensor of the first operating means is different from the positional relationship of the second operating means with respect to the first operating means (for example, FIG. 183(A) ( B) see),
An operating unit is described, characterized in that

Further, the operation unit described above,
Among the legs of the first operation means, the leg closest to the second operation means is the detection target leg,
Among the legs of the second operation means, the leg closest to the first operation means is the detection target leg (see, for example, FIGS. 183 (A) and (B)),
An operating unit is described, characterized in that

Further, the operation unit described above,
the legs of the first operating means and the legs of the second operating means are arranged in a row (see, for example, FIGS. 183(A) and (B));
An operating unit is described, characterized in that

Further, the operation unit described above,
the third operation means (for example, the right button main body 610R in FIGS. 183(A) and (B)), which is the operation means described above;
The sensor of the first operation means, the sensor of the second operation means, the sensor of the third operation means, and a connector (for example, a harness connector) to which cables for transmitting signals from these sensors are connected 730) provided with a substrate (e.g., substrate 700),
The first operating means, the second operating means, and the third operating means are arranged in a row in this order,
The leg portion of the first operating means, the leg portion of the second operating means, and the leg portion of the third operating means are arranged in a row,
The connector is arranged between the sensor of the second operating means and the sensor of the third operating means (see, for example, FIGS. 183(A) and (B)),
An operating unit is described, characterized in that

Also, a game machine is described, which is characterized by having the operating means described above.

Also, a game machine is described, which is characterized by having the operation unit described above.

Also, in the description above,
a first operating means (for example, the chance button 190);
a second operating means (eg, bet buttons 130, 132);
A notification means (for example, effect image display device 157) capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, display of added G number in FIG. 185 (D));
A game machine comprising
The notification means may execute the predetermined notification based on the operation of the first operation means during a first period (for example, from the start of reel rotation until the third stop operation is performed). means (see, for example, FIG. 189),
The notifying means, when the first operating means is not operated during the first period, indicates that either the first operating means or the second operating means is operated during the subsequent second period. Means that may execute the predetermined notification based on what has been done (see, for example, FIG. 190, FIG. 191),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Display means (for example, effect image display device 157) is provided,
The display means can execute display prompting the operation of the first operation means (for example, display of chance button operation in FIG. 185(C)) until the first operation means is operated in the first period. is a means of
The display means is a means capable of displaying a prompt to operate the first operation means until the first operation means is operated during the second period (for example, FIGS. 190 and 191),
The display means is a means for not executing a display prompting the operation of the second operation means during the second period.
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first operating means has a first light emitting means (for example, a lamp inside the chance button 190),
The second operating means has a second light emitting means (for example, a lamp inside the bet buttons 130 and 132),
the first light emitting means is means capable of emitting light during the first period (for example, FIGS. 190 and 191);
the first light emitting means is means capable of emitting light during the second period (for example, FIGS. 190 and 191);
The second light emitting means is means capable of emitting light during the second period (for example, FIGS. 190 and 191),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first operation means is an operation means for executing production,
The second operating means is a bet button,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
a plurality of rotationally driven reels (eg, reels 110 to 112);
A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and receiving a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels,
The first period is a period including a period from when the plurality of reels start rotating to when the final stop operation is performed.
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the replay is given as a result of the game including the first period, the second period becomes (for example, FIGS. 189 to 191),
A game machine characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
a first operating means (for example, the chance button 190);
a second operating means (eg, bet buttons 130, 132);
display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
A game machine comprising
The display means changes or adds display content based on operation of either the first operation means or the second operation means during a predetermined period (for example, after the third stop operation). means that may be implemented (see, for example, FIGS. 187, 188, 190, 191),
The display means executes display content change or addition based on the operation of the first operation means during the predetermined period, and then displays based on the operation of the second operation means. means that may change or add content (see, for example, FIGS. 187 and 190);
The display means changes or adds display contents based on the operation of the second operation means during the predetermined period, and then displays the content based on the operation of the first operation means. is a means that does not change or add content (see, for example, FIGS. 188 and 191),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first operating means has a first light emitting means (for example, a lamp inside the chance button 190),
The second operating means has a second light emitting means (for example, a lamp inside the bet buttons 130 and 132),
the first light emitting means is means capable of emitting light during the predetermined period (see, for example, FIGS. 187, 188, 190, and 191);
The second light emitting means is means capable of emitting light during the predetermined period (see, for example, FIGS. 187, 188, 190, and 191),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first operation means is an operation means for executing production,
The second operating means is a bet button,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
a plurality of rotationally driven reels (eg, reels 110 to 112);
A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and receiving a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels,
The predetermined period is a period in which the plurality of reels are not rotationally driven.
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The predetermined period is a period in which a replay is granted as a result of the game (see, for example, FIGS. 190 and 191),
A game machine characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
a first operating means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
a second operating means (eg, start lever 135);
Display means (for example, effect image display device 157) capable of executing first display (for example, display of added G number in FIG. 185(D)) and second display (for example, background display in FIG. 185(A)) and,
A game machine comprising
The display means may execute the first display based on the operation of the first operation means for a predetermined period (for example, after the third stop operation) (for example, 191),
The display means is a means that may execute the second display based on the operation of the first operation means during the predetermined period (see, for example, FIG. 190),
The display means executes the first display based on the operation of the first operation means, and then executes the second display based on the operation of the second operation means. (See, for example, FIG. 191)
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first operating means is a bet button,
The second operating means is a start lever,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
a plurality of rotationally driven reels (eg, reels 110 to 112);
A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and receiving a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels,
The predetermined period is a period in which the plurality of reels are not rotationally driven.
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The predetermined period is a period in which a replay is granted as a result of the game (see, for example, FIGS. 190 and 191),
A game machine characterized by:

192 to 226, a game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel game machine such as the slot machine 100 or a pinball game machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail. 192 to 226 are used only in the explanation using FIGS. 192 to 226 in principle. In the explanation using FIG. 226, the symbols shown in FIGS. 192 to 226 are prioritized.

FIG. 192 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 192, a predetermined number of game media are inserted and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols are started to rotate when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winnings is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if not, the game medium is paid out. It is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out. Note that this payout of game media may be referred to as profit. Moreover, what makes acquisition of this profit easy may be called a privilege.

This slot machine 100 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101 . The front door 102 is a door member rotatably attached to the main body 101 . The front door 102 is provided with a locking function so that the front door 102 cannot be opened by anyone other than the staff of the game parlor.

Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

A proper number of each pattern is printed on a belt-shaped member at equal intervals, and this belt-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form each of the reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen.

FIG. 193 is a diagram showing an example of lines.

193, the pattern displayed on the upper row of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure) is the upper row pattern of the left reel, and the middle row of the left reel 110 (position 4 shown in the figure). The symbol to be displayed is the left reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 7 shown in the figure) is the left reel lower stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (position 2 shown in the figure). The symbol displayed on the middle reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure) is the middle reel symbol, and the symbol displayed on the middle reel 111 (position 8 shown in the figure) is the middle reel symbol. is the middle reel lower symbol, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the right reel 112 (position 3 shown in the figure) is the right reel upper symbol, and the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the right reel 112 (position 6 shown in the figure) is on the right The symbols displayed on the middle stage of the reel and the symbols displayed on the bottom of the right reel 112 (the position of 9 in the drawing) are called the right reel bottom stage symbols, respectively. 112, three in each vertical direction, nine in total. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. That is, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, although the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 192 has three reels inside the center of the slot machine 100, the number of reels and the reel installation positions are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is configured so that each pattern is shielded so that the individual patterns can be evenly illuminated. An optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting section and a light receiving section is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112 inside the slot machine 100. This optical sensor (the index sensor shown in FIG. 4) is provided. 730), a light blocking piece (not shown) provided on the reel and having a predetermined length passes between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion. The symbol position on the reel is determined based on the detection result of the sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the activated line.

A valid line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid line 114 . The active line is a line (a line on which a winning judgment is made) for determining whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has been displayed. It will be judged as winning. Here, a line is defined as an area corresponding to one symbol for each of the reels 110 to 112 in the area within the display window 113 . A line other than the valid line on which winning determination is not performed is referred to as an invalid line.

FIG. 193 shows a middle line L1 composed of a left reel middle symbol, a middle reel middle symbol and a right reel middle symbol, a right downward line L2 composed of a left reel top symbol, a middle reel middle symbol and a right reel bottom symbol, Rising right line L3 composed of left reel lower symbol, middle reel middle symbol and right reel upper symbol, upper line L4 composed of left reel upper symbol, middle reel upper symbol and right reel upper symbol, left reel lower symbol, Five lines of the lower line L5 composed of middle reel lower symbols and right reel lower symbols are shown. These lines are examples, and for example, a line composed of left reel upper symbols, middle reel lower symbols, and right reel upper symbols, each of the reels 110 to 112 defines an area for one symbol. Anything is fine.

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include a special combination 1 (BB1), a special combination 2 (BB2), replay combinations 1 to 3, and small combinations 1 to 7 (for example, watermelon, weak cherry, etc.). Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination) has been internally won in an internal lottery, or that the player is in a special game state, which will be described later. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later), which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, is won. ) is a lamp that informs the player. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, one card is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. ing. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a gaming machine that is premised on playing a game with a three-coin bet. However, the game can also be played with a two-coin bet. For this reason, it is designed so that playing a 3-bet game in the 2-bet bonus internal winning state is more advantageous for the player than performing a 2-bet game in the 3-bet bonus internal winning state. The bonus internal winning state is set as a normal game state, and the game is played with three bets as much as possible.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

A start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112 . That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 including a left stop button 137 , a middle stop button 138 and a right stop button 139 . The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112, respectively. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as the second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as the third stop operation. Also, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations will be referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel, respectively. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as the operation order or pressing order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 .

A key hole 140 is also provided in the front door 102. A key is inserted into the key hole 140 and turned clockwise to unlock, and counterclockwise to lock. The slot machine 100 is provided with an open sensor 294 (see FIG. 194(a)) for detecting that the front door 102 is opened. The open sensor 294 detects that the front door 102 is opened by detecting an opening/closing piece projecting when the front door 102 is opened.

A first chance button 165 and a second chance button 166 are provided between the bet button 132 and the medal slot 141 . A first chance button 165 incorporates a first performance lamp, and a second chance button 166 incorporates a second performance lamp. Both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operating means operated by the player in the performance. A left button 167 is provided on the left side of the second chance button 166, and a right button 168 is provided on the right side thereof. By operating the left button 167 and the right button 168, it may be possible to move the cursor displayed on the effect image display device 157. In this case, the second chance button 166 functions as a confirm button. Sometimes.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. This title panel 162 is illuminated from behind by a title panel lamp 164 . A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

A sound hole 145 provided at the bottom is a hole for outputting the sound of the bass speaker 277 (see FIG. 194) to the outside. A top lamp 144T provided on the top of the front door 102, a left side lamp 144L provided on the left side of the front door 102, and a right side lamp 144R provided on the right side are decorative lamps for livening up the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is also provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This sound hole 143 is a hole for outputting the sound of the upper speaker 272 (see FIG. 194) to the outside. The production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a production image display device 157 arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (on the side of the player). . Although the effect image display device 157 is a liquid crystal display device, any display device other than the liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it can display various effect images and various game information. display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display, reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 192, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Furthermore, although the display screen is a flat surface, it may be curved.

It should be noted that what has been referred to as a lamp is an example of light-emitting means, and in this specification, a device using an LED as a light source is also referred to as a lamp. It may be called a lamp, and a device that emits light corresponds to an example of a light emitting means.

194 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the slot machine 100. FIG. 194(a) is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened, and FIG. It is the figure which expanded the door relay board|substrate 290 arrange|positioned.

The main body 101 is a box-shaped body surrounded by an upper plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a lower plate 264 and a rear plate 242, and having an open front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board housing case 210 containing a main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242. Below, a reel unit 700 with three reels 110-112 is arranged. On the side of the main control board housing case 210 and the reel unit 700, that is, on the left side plate 260, a sub control board housing case 220 containing the sub control board is arranged. A first selection switch 190 is provided in the sub control board housing case 220 . Since the first selection switch 190 is provided inside the main body 101, a person who can unlock the front door 102 (for example, a store clerk at an amusement shop, etc.) can open the front door 102. However, a person (for example, a player) who cannot unlock the front door 102 cannot operate. That is, the first selection switch 190 is provided at a position where the player cannot operate it. By operating the first selection switch 190, the value of the sound output from the bass speaker 277 or the upper speaker 272 (for example, BGM, effect sound, error sound, etc.) can be changed, or the power saving mode can be set. can be set. In addition, an external centralized terminal board 248 connected to the main control board and outputting information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side. The external collective terminal board 248 is provided with an information output circuit 334 shown in FIG.

Further, on the right side of the reel unit 700, a setting key switch 281 is provided for changing the game mode (also referred to as set value) of the slot machine 100 and for confirming the changed set value. Here, the set value is a value related to the degree of advantage of the player, which will be described in detail later. , includes a value (“payout rate”) for adjusting the ratio of the total number of game media paid out by the gaming machine. This set value can be set in a plurality of steps, for example, in 6 steps.

The setting key switch 281 is a key switch that is electrically turned ON/OFF by inserting a predetermined setting key (not shown) and turning it. Specifically, when a predetermined setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned right, the setting key switch sensor provided in the setting key switch 281 detects the ON state, and when the setting key switch 281 is turned left, the setting key switch sensor is detected. Detect off state.

Since the setting key switch 281 is also provided inside the main body 101 like the first selection switch 190 described above, it can be operated only by a person who can unlock the front door 102. .

Each of the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248 is provided with a monitor LED that lights up when the setting key switch 281 is turned on. Further, when the setting key switch 281 is turned on, a setting key switch ON signal indicating that the setting key switch 281 is turned on is output from the external common terminal board 248 to an external device (for example, a hall computer). be done.

Note that the setting key switch 281 may be mounted on the main control board 300B.

A hopper unit 180 (a device for dispensing medals accumulated in a bucket 181) is arranged on the lower plate 264. Above the hopper unit 180, that is, below the reel unit 700, there is a power supply having a power supply control board. A device 252 is provided, and a power switch 244 is provided in front of the power device 252 . Power switch 244 is a toggle switch electrically connected to power supply 252 . With this power switch 244, the slot machine 100 can be powered on (power ON) or powered off (power OFF). Note that the power switch 244 may be mounted on the power control board. The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400, and each device. In addition, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) is provided for supplying power to predetermined parts (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after external power is cut off. there is

On the right side of the hopper unit 180, an auxiliary medal storage box 240 for storing medals overflowing from the hopper unit 180 is arranged, behind which an overflow terminal is arranged (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting a power cord 265 , and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101 . there is

The front door 102 is hinged to the side plate 260 on the left side of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and above the pattern display window 113 is a production device 160 and a production control board ( not shown), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. Below the pattern display window 113, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting inserted medals, and a return path 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals onto the medal tray 161. there is This medal selector 170 will be further described later. A bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145 . An open sensor 294 is provided on the rear surface of the front door 102 . The open sensor 294 is configured to be L (OFF) when the front door 102 is closed and H (ON) when the front door 102 is open.

A door relay board 290 is arranged below the design display window 113 on the rear surface of the front door 102 . This door relay board 290 is provided with a reset switch 291, a setting change button 292, and a set value display 293, as shown in FIG. 194(b). The reset switch 291 and the setting change button 292 can also be operated only by those who can unlock the front door 102, like the setting key switch 281 and the like.

The reset switch 291 is a push-button type switch, and by pressing (short-term pressing) the reset switch 291, the error of the slot machine 100 can be canceled. Further, by pressing the reset switch 291 for a long time (pressing for a long time), the RAM of the main control unit can be cleared.

The setting change button 292 is also a push button type switch similar to the reset switch 291 . An operation procedure for changing the setting value by using the setting change button 292 will be described later.

The set value display 293 is a display such as a 7-segment LED. The set value display 293 can display a display representing the game mode (set value) set by the setting change button 292 .

Although the reset switch 291 and the setting change button 292 are provided on the door relay board 290, they may be provided on the main control board 300B. Also, the set value display 293 may be provided on the main control board 300B.

FIG. 195 is a diagram for explaining the medal selector 170. FIG.

FIG. 195 schematically shows the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 192. As shown in FIG. 195, the medal selector 170 provided on the back side of the front door 102 and the hopper unit 180 provided inside the main body 101 shown in FIG. 194 are indicated by dotted lines. The medal selector 170 has a medal blocker 172 provided in the medal passage 171 . The medal blocker 172 distributes the medals inserted from the medal slot 141 and passing through the medal passage 171 to either the storage passage 173 or the return passage 266 . The medal blocker 172 shown in FIG. 195 protrudes into the medal passage 171, and the medals passing through the medal passage 171 are guided (guided) by the protruding medal blocker 172 to pass through the return passage 266. It is discharged from the medal payout port 155 . On the other hand, if the medal blocker 172 is retracted from the medal passage 171 , the medals passing through the medal passage 171 pass through the storage passage 173 and are stored in the bucket 181 . Projection of the medal blocker 172 into the medal passage 171 and withdrawal from the medal passage 171 are performed by a blocker solenoid (not shown). That is, when an actuation signal (control signal) is output to the blocker solenoid, the medal blocker 172 operates (displaces) to guide the inserted medals to the storage passage 173 . On the other hand, when the activation signal is not output to the blocker solenoid, the medal blocker 172 operates to guide the inserted medals to the discharge passage 19b.

FIG. 196(a) is a table showing the display order of the setting values displayed on the setting value display 293. FIG.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 192, six types of setting values, namely setting 1, setting 2, setting 4 to setting 6, and setting b, are prepared. Setting 1 is the default setting value initially displayed on the setting value display 293 . That is, immediately after shipment from the factory, after clearing the RAM containing the storage area for storing the set values (RAM of the main control unit), or when the backup power supply for continuing the storage of the storage area for storing the set values is lost, the default set values is displayed on the setting value display 293, and the setting 1 is set as the setting value.

The degree of advantage for the player's profit acquisition is higher in setting 2 than in setting 1, higher in setting 4 than in setting 2, higher in setting 5 than in setting 4, and higher in setting 6 than in setting 5. That is, setting 6 is the most advantageous setting for the player's gain.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 192, setting b is provided in place of setting 3. FIG. Setting b is more disadvantageous than setting 1 in terms of profit acquisition for the player. That is, the setting b is the most disadvantageous setting for the player's gain. In the display of the 7-segment LED, this setting b has a display that differs from setting 6 by only one segment, and is displayed next to setting 6, which is the most advantageous. That is, it is displayed last among the six types of setting values. If the unauthorized person thinks that the last displayed setting is the most advantageous setting and performs an unauthorized operation, and as a result, setting b is displayed on the setting value display 293, the unauthorized person misunderstands setting 6 and sets it. The setting may be changed to b. In this case, the dishonest person can be disadvantaged.

When changing the setting, the display of the setting value display 293 is updated as 1→2→4→5→6→b→1→2 . . . by operating the setting change button 292 . The display order other than "setting 1" which is displayed first may be any order. 2 . . . may be updated.

FIG. 196(b) is a table summarizing the difference in performance for each set value.

Performance A is payout rate (sometimes referred to as ball output rate), performance B is special role (BB) first hit probability, performance C is AT (assist time) first hit probability, performance D is AT continuation probability, Performance E is the expected number of AT wins, Performance F is the probability of a small win A (eg watermelon), Performance G is the frequency and probability of appearance of a notification that suggests a setting value (setting suggestion notification), Performance H is a setting suggestion as a fixed notification. It becomes the appearance frequency/appearance probability of the notification. The performances A to F correspond to the performances representing the degree of advantage in gaining profits for the player, and have the relationship of setting b<setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6 as described above. .

In the performance G setting suggestion notification, the notification suggesting the currently set setting value is the effect image display device 157, the title panel lamp 164, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, the bass speaker 277, and the like. This is performed using the upper speaker 272 or the like. The setting suggestion notification here includes not only a notification such as simply extinguishing a lamp or outputting a warning sound, but also a setting suggestion effect such as displaying a setting suggestion animation on the effect image display device 157. be In addition, suggesting a set value also includes a case of suggesting a false set value (setting-related effect, setting-related notification). Furthermore, the suggestion of a set value also includes the case of notifying that a certain set value is 100% true (notification of setting confirmation). When the setting b is set, the title panel lamp 164 is always turned off when the demonstration animation (demonstration animation) in the effect image display device 157 is started. , the title panel lamp 164 continues to light up. The demonstration animation is started when a predetermined time elapses without inserting medals (betting operation) after the game ends (after the third stop is performed). Also, if the power is restored (turned on) while no betting operations are being performed at the time of the power outage, the demo animation will start, but if the setting change is started, the demo animation will be displayed after the setting change is completed. is started. At the end of the chance zone, the end of the battle effect, the end of the BB, and the end of the AT, the setting suggestion notification is performed 100% in the state where the setting b is set. On the other hand, when setting values other than the setting b are set, setting suggestion notification is performed with a predetermined probability of less than 100%. Further, in a state where the setting b is set, the setting b confirmation notification may be performed once in a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games). It should be noted that in a state in which the setting b is set, the setting suggestion notification that the setting may be set b may not be performed, and only the setting b confirmation notification may be performed. Furthermore, in the state where the setting b is set, the notification mode may include contents suggesting that the player is disadvantageous (for example, text display or voice output such as "The tough battle will continue"). . The execution probability (appearance frequency) of the setting suggestion notification (performance G) described above is set when setting b is set, and when setting values other than setting b (settings 1, 2, 4 to 6) are set. state, and approximately the same among settings other than setting b.

For performance H, when setting b is set, only setting b is indicated as setting suggestion notification (setting b confirmation notification not suggesting settings 1, 2, 4 to 6), and setting other than setting b is performed. In the state in which the set value of is set, a notification suggesting a set value other than the set value may also be performed as the setting suggestion notification. For example, when setting 5 is set, an odd-number confirmation notification indicates that the setting of an odd-numbered setting value is confirmed. When setting 2 is set, an even-numbered setting value is set. There is an even confirmation notification that notifies that what is done is confirmed. In addition, in the state where setting 6 is set, a high setting confirmation notification for notifying that a setting value of 4 or more is confirmed, a setting of 4 or more confirmation notification, or a setting value of 2 or more is set. A setting 2 or more determination notification indicating that the setting value of 5 or more is confirmed, and a setting 5 or more determination notification indicating that the setting value of 5 or more is confirmed. In the state where the setting 6 is set, the effect of notifying only the setting 6 as the setting suggestion notification (setting 6 confirmation notification) may be performed with a probability lower than the execution probability of the setting b confirmation notification. The execution probability (appearance frequency) of the setting confirmation notification (performance H) described above is highest when setting b is set (for example, 100% or almost 100%), and when setting 6 is set Next higher (e.g., 50%), the states where the remaining settings (settings 1, 2, 4, 5) are set have approximately the same probability of execution (e.g., 30%) than the state where setting 6 is set. %).

FIG. 196(c) to (f) show setting-related notifications using the effect image display device 157 that may be performed at the end of the chance zone, the end of the battle production, the end of the BB, or the end of the AT ( FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of setting suggestion notification, setting confirmation notification). The setting-related notification here is a kind of notification effect.

FIG. 196(c) is a diagram showing an example of an even number setting suggestion notification. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 196(c), the character "May be set even" is displayed on the right side of the panda character PND. This character display "may be even number setting" suggests that the set value is likely to be 2, 4 or 6 (even number setting). In addition, this even-number setting suggestion notification may be performed only when the setting value is an even-number setting, or may be performed when the setting value is a setting other than an even-number setting (odd-number setting). may In this case, the setting value may be more likely to be notified when the even number setting is used than when the odd number setting is used.

FIG. 196(d) is a diagram showing an example of notification suggesting a setting of 5 or more. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 196(d), the character "I want to eat five or more sugar canes" is displayed on the right side of the panda character PND. This character display "I want to eat five or more sugar canes" suggests that the set value is likely to be 5 or 6. Note that the setting 5 or more suggestion notification may be performed only when the set value is 5 or 6, or may be performed when the set value is 4 or less. In this case, the set value may be set to be easier to notify when the set value is 5 or 6 than when the set value is 4 or less. Note that when the set value is 4 or less, the setting b may or may not be included.

FIG. 196(e) is a diagram showing an example of notification that the setting is two or more. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 196(e), first of all, the characters "Ah, business sorting" are displayed on the right side of the panda character PND. The character itself, "Ah, it's a business sorting", corresponds to a notification suggesting setting 2 or higher. After that, an old woman character BBA appears in the lower left portion of the display screen, and business sorting is performed. BBA, the character of the old woman, is displayed with characters such as "Isn't it better if it's 1? Is it better if it's 2 or more?" The notification by this dialogue denies that the setting is 1 and confirms that the setting is 2 or higher. Note that the confirmation notification of the setting of 2 or more may be performed only when the setting is 2 or more, or may be performed in the case of the setting of 1 as well. Alternatively, in the case of setting 1, the old woman character BBA may not appear.

FIG. 196(f) is a diagram showing an example of setting b confirmation notification. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 196(f), first of all, the characters "Oh, God's revelation" are displayed on the right side of the panda character PND. This character "Ah, God's revelation" itself corresponds to the notification suggesting the setting b. After that, a divine character KGG appears in the lower left portion of the display screen, and a revelation is issued. The god's character KGG is displayed with the message "A tough battle will continue" as a revelation. The notification by this notification is a notification that confirms that the setting is b. Note that the setting b confirmation notification is performed only when the setting is b, and is not performed in the case of other set values. However, in the case of setting values other than the setting b, the character PND of the panda and the character "Oh, God's revelation" may be displayed, and the character KGG of the god may not appear.

In the above, various explanations have been given assuming that the setting suggestion notification includes the setting suggestion effect, and the setting confirmation notification includes the setting confirmation effect, but the setting suggestion notification may be read as the setting suggestion effect, and the setting confirmation notification may be set. You may read it as a fixed production.

When the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise (setting key OFF→ON) in the power-on state (power ON), the setting value display 293 displays the currently set game mode (setting value ) is displayed numerically, it can be used to confirm the currently set game mode. That is, when the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise (setting key OFF→ON) in the power-on state (power ON), the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 executes the setting confirmation process for confirming the setting value. When the setting key switch 281 is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned counterclockwise (setting key ON→OFF), the setting confirmation process ends.

Here, the operating procedure for changing the setting value will be described. By inserting a setting key (not shown) into the setting key switch 281 and turning it clockwise (setting key OFF→ON), the power switch 244 is changed from the power cutoff state (power OFF) to the power ON state (power ON). The setting value change becomes effective (set value change processing is started), and each time the setting change button 292 is pressed, the game mode (set value) changes from 1→2→4→5→6→b→1→2→・, and the desired game mode can be selected. By operating the start lever 135, the game mode (set value) selected at that time is determined. Finally, by turning the setting key counterclockwise (setting key ON→OFF), the set value changing process is completed.

The period of setting value change operation, that is, the period from the first right-turning of the setting key to the last left-turning of the setting key in the setting value change operation is called a setting value change mode. , that is, the period from the first clockwise operation of the setting key to the last counterclockwise operation of the setting key in the setting value confirmation operation is also referred to as the setting value confirmation mode. The start and end of setting value change and setting value confirmation will be described in detail later, but the conditions for starting and ending the setting value change mode and setting value confirmation mode described in detail with reference to FIG. 3 may be applied.

Next, with reference to FIG. 197, the circuit configuration of the control section of slot machine 100 will be described in detail. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 . The main control section 300 controls the progress of the game, and the sub-control section consisting of the first sub-control section 400 and the second sub-control section 500 controls the presentation of the game.

<Main control part>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and reel patterns. A ROM 306 storing arrays and the like, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, and a WDT. (watchdog timer) 314 is installed. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start signal when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). Start).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, a right stop button 139 sensor, a checkout button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the hopper unit 180, and a left reel 110 sensor. index sensor, middle reel 111 index sensor, right reel 112 index sensor, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generating circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, the middle stop button 138 sensor, and the right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the player's operation of the stop buttons.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed on the corresponding bet buttons 130 to 132, respectively, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are used as the medals to be inserted into the game. Detects the submit operation when submitting. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the hopper unit 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor for the left reel 110, the index sensor for the middle reel 111, and the index sensor for the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through them. It becomes L level every time. Rotational position information indicating how much the reel rotates from the reference position from when it once goes to L level until it goes to L level again is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, the CPU 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 .

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving a motor provided for each of the reels 110 to 112 of the reel unit 700, a drive circuit 324 for driving a blocker solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, and a hopper. A drive circuit 326 for driving a motor provided in the unit 180, various lamps 339 (the effective line display lamp 120, the notification lamp 123, the game medal insertion possible lamp 124, the re-game lamp 122, the game medal insertion lamp 129, the game start lamp 121 , the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127).

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the game state) is output.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supplied to the main control unit 300 from the power supply device 252 (see FIG. 194). When the voltage value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal is output to the basic circuit 302 to indicate that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-controller 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main controller 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via the input interface. The first sub-controller 400 comprises a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on this control command. , an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-controller 400, lighting patterns of the backlight module 740, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-controller 400 . An upper speaker 272 and a bass speaker 277 are installed in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier, the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 .

A drive circuit 422 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface. 144R, title panel lamp 164, bet button lamp 200, backlight module 740, first effect lamp built in first chance button 165, second effect lamp built in second chance button 166, etc.) are connected. there is

Further, the first sub-controller 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor of the shutter 163 . The motor 163m of the shutter 163 is a stepping motor, and the drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to the motor 160m according to the command from the CPU404.

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time. Further, the first sub-control section 400 is provided with a switch sensor 427 which detects pressing of the first chance button 165 . The switch sensor 427 also detects pressing of each button of the second selection switch 194 consisting of the second chance button 166 , the left button 167 and the right button 168 . Detection signals from the shutter sensor 428 and switch sensor 427 are output to the basic circuit 402 by the sensor circuit 426 .

Further, although the first selection switch sensor 190 is directly connected to the basic circuit 402, the first selection switch sensor 190 may also be connected to the basic circuit 402 via the switch sensor 427 and the sensor circuit 426. .

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface.

The second sub-control section 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157 . The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effects (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. 512 and are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 534 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub-control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 536 are connected to this VDP 534 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Overview of processing>
The processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 which has received this activation signal is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

When the power is turned on, first, in step S101, initial setting processing of the main control unit is performed. In this main control unit initial setting process, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupt inhibition is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is initialized. Allow operation and set initial values. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S103, a game start process is executed. In this process, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted (maintenance or operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132), and if medals have been inserted, preparations are made to send an insert command indicating this. If the player wins the replay in the previous game, the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous game are inserted, so the player does not need to insert medals. Also, it checks whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated while the specified number (2 or 3) of medals has been used. Confirm and start playing.

In step S105, various lottery processes including internal winning combination lottery process and the like are executed.

In step S107, reel stop data corresponding to the first stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300 .

In step S109, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started under the condition that the game interval timer (subtracted by the timer updating process described later) is 0, and the initial value is set to the game interval timer. Also, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to transmit a reel rotation start command to the first sub-controller 400 . After that, when the reels 110-112 reach a predetermined rotational speed, the optical sensors provided on each reel are detected, and the symbol position of each reel is grasped, the stop operation to the stop buttons 137-139 is activated. The game interval counter secures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) to suppress gambling.

In step S111, a reel stop control process is executed. In this processing, when one of the stop buttons 137-139 is pressed after the stop operation is validated, the reels 110-112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137-139 are stopped. Specifically, every time a stop operation is performed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of pull-in frames set in the stop table. Further, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared for the first stop operation, and reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared for the second stop operation. For each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, the corresponding command (first 1st to 3rd stop commands) to the first sub-controller 400. When all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S113, a winning determination process is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. After determining the winning combination, preparations are made to transmit the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S 115 , if a winning combination with a payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is given (paid out), and the given number is displayed using the payout number display 127 .

In step S117, state update processing for updating various states in the slot machine 100 is executed.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-described processing.

<Main control unit 300 timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area. Note that the state of the optical sensor is confirmed in this process.

In step S207, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S209, timer update processing is performed. For example, a process of updating various timers in units of time, such as subtracting a game interval timer, is executed.

In step S<b>211 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission in main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc. of the main control section 300 are transmitted to the first sub-control section 400 . The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes strobe information (if it is ON, it indicates that data is set), command type (in this embodiment, basic command, input command, start lever Acceptance command, internal winning command, production command accompanying production lottery processing, reel rotation start command accompanying start of rotation of reels 110 to 112, first to third press commands accompanying reception of operation of stop buttons 137 to 139, reel 1st to 3rd stop command associated with the stop of 110 to 112, winning command, payout number command and payout end command accompanying medal payout processing, status update command, item addition command, acquisition point command, setting change command, power recovery command ) and command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S213, an external signal setting process is performed. In this external signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S205, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of an error related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Furthermore, the medal blocker 171, various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) displays are set according to the current game state.

In step S217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low voltage signal is received (power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and if a low voltage signal is not received (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219. move on.

In step S219, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, processing such as setting the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S221, information that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power failure when power is restored, is saved in a predetermined area of RAM 308. A checksum value for the area is derived and stored in the RAM 308, and a power supply flag indicating that power-off processing has been performed is set to ON.

Next, details of the main controller initial setting process (step S101) in the main controller main process of FIG. 198 will be described with reference to FIG. 198. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller initial setting process (step S101) in FIG.

First, in step S1001, which is executed first, initialization is performed at startup. In this initial setting, processes such as setting (temporary setting) of stack initial value to stack pointer (SP) of CPU 304, setting of interrupt mask, initial setting of I/O 310, and initial setting of various variables stored in RAM 308 are performed. conduct.

In step S1003, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 330 detects that the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment). monitor whether it outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped in the case. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects power cutoff), this step S1003 is repeatedly executed, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect power cutoff). to step S1005. Note that step S1003 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches or exceeds the predetermined value even if the voltage does not reach the predetermined value (9 V) immediately after the power is turned on.

In step S1005, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 281 shown in FIG. 194 is on. If the setting key switch 281 is on (the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch and turned right by 90 degrees), the process proceeds to step S1013; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1007.

At step S1007, it is determined whether or not the reset switch 291 shown in FIG. 194 is on. If this switch is on, the process proceeds to step S1009; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1011.

In step S1009, the RAM 308 is initialized, and the main controller initial setting process ends. Note that in this initialization, for example, the set values are deleted.

In step S1011, RAM data write-back processing is executed. In this process, first, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the RAM 308 is abnormal. The data determined here is the data saved in the RAM 308 when the power of the slot machine 100 is turned off or momentary interruption (voltage drop temporarily below the operating voltage) (see step S221 in FIG. 199). In other words, it is determined in step S1011 whether or not the data is definitely saved in the RAM 308. FIG. Specifically, it determines whether the power supply flag is normal (on) and whether the calculation result using the checksum is normal. It is judged that there is no abnormality.

If it is determined that there is no abnormality in the restoration data in the RAM 308, processing is executed to restore the state of the register to the state immediately before the power-off processing is executed. In this RAM data write-back process, for example, the data stored in the RAM 308 is written back to the register of the CPU 304, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer saving area provided in the RAM 308 is read out when power is cut off, and the stack Reset the pointer (this setting). Also, when power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read out, and after resetting in each register, interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the slot machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power failure. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction executed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process immediately before the power failure. Furthermore, here, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 . This power restoration command is a command indicating that the state at the time of power failure has been restored. This power recovery command includes information such as RT, game state, and presentation state at the time of power failure, and is transmitted by the main control unit timer interrupt processing (step S211 in FIG. 199).

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an error in the return data of the RAM 308, after making preparations such as clearing all storage areas of the RAM 308 except for the used stack area, the system shifts to an infinite loop state (RAM error processing). . From this state, it is necessary to turn on the power again with the RAM clear switch or setting key switch turned on. In other words, this embodiment is configured such that the progress of the game is stopped when an error occurs in the RAM 308 .

In step S1013, which is followed when the setting key switch 281 is ON in step S1005, setting change processing is executed according to the state of the setting key switch 281, and this main control unit initial setting processing ends. Details of this setting change processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, using FIG. 201, the details of the setting change process (step S1013) in the main control unit initial setting process of FIG. 200 will be described. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the setting change process (step S1013) in FIG.

First, in step S1101 executed first, the data in the RAM 308 is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S1103. Note that the data cleared here includes the value of the set value.

In step S1103, preparations are made to send a setting change command indicating that the setting change has started to the first sub-controller 400 (sent in step S211 in FIG. 199), and the process proceeds to step S1105. As a result, a setting changing display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 .

In step S1105, the interrupt status is set during setting change, and the process proceeds to step S1107.

In step S1107, the temporary setting value is set as the display setting value. A provisional set value is displayed on the set value display 293 by the processing here. After that, the process proceeds to step S1109.

In step S1109, it is determined whether or not the operation of the setting change button 292 has been accepted. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1111; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1113.

In step S1111, the provisional set value is updated. In this embodiment, each time the setting change button 292 is pressed once, the temporary setting values are updated one by one according to the display order described with reference to FIG. 196(a). is operated, the temporary set value is set to 1. After that, the process proceeds to step S1113.

In step S1113, it is determined whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1115; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1107.

In step S1115, a process of confirming the temporary set value as a set value is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1117. That is, the set value is determined by operating the start lever 135 . When the set value is determined, the set value display 293 displays a display indicating that the set value has been determined (here, number 0). When the setting value is determined, the setting value display 293 may continue to display the determined setting value, may switch to blinking display, or may not be displayed.

In step S1117, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 281 is off (the setting key switch 281 is turned counterclockwise 90 degrees and the setting key is pulled out). If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1119; otherwise, step S1117 is repeatedly executed.

In step S1119, preparation for transmitting a setting change command indicating that the setting change is completed to the first sub-controller 400 (sent in step S211 in FIG. 199) is executed. As a result, the effect image display device 157 ends the display of the display during setting change. Also, in this process, the interrupt status is returned to the status before it was changed in step S1105. After this process, this setting change process ends.

201, the opening/closing state of the front door 102 is irrelevant. good too. Further, although the set value is determined by operating the start lever 135, the set value may be determined by turning off the setting key switch 281. FIG.

Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 202(a) is a flow chart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 202(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 202(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, in step S301, various initial settings are performed. This initialization is performed when the power is turned on. In this processing, processing such as initialization of input/output ports and initialization of various variables stored in the RAM 408 is performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state. Note that the rendering state of the first sub-control unit 400 is set to the initial state. Further, if backup is performed at the time of power failure, the information backed up in step S301 is returned.

In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305.

In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S307, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S309, effect control processing is performed. Here, the effect data is expanded, the processing of setting the device data in the effect execution area provided in the RAM 408, the process of setting the effect data in the effect reservation area provided in the RAM 408, and the received command And based on the information contained in the command, it performs processing such as setting effect data and executing control processing. Note that the effect data set in the effect reservation area and the device data set in the effect execution area may be updated (overwritten) with different data. In this case, the effect contents are changed based on the overwritten data.

In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from the device data set in the effect execution areas corresponding to the speakers 272 and 277 and outputting the acquired control data to the sound source IC 418, sound effects are executed.

In step S313, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to various lamps 420 and outputting the acquired control data to the driving circuit 422, the effect by the lamp is executed.

In step S315, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, the control data is acquired from the device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the shutter 163, and the acquired control data is output to the driving circuit 424, thereby executing the effect by the shutter 163.

In step S317, information output processing is performed to set transmission of the control command to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the effect image display device 157, preparations are made to transmit this device data to the second sub-controller 500, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 202(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S321 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 202(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S331, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 202(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S333, transmission of the device data to the second sub-control section 500 set in step S315, update processing of the random number value for effect, and the like are performed.

<Processing of second sub-controller 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described using FIG. 203(a) is a flow chart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 203(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 203(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 203(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S401 of FIG. 203(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, input/output port initialization and initialization of various variables stored in the RAM 508 are performed. It should be noted that, if the backup has been performed at the time of power failure, the information backed up in this step S301 is returned.

In step S403, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405.

In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S407, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S409, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S407, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S411, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S409. For example, if there is an instruction for image control in the effect data read in step S409, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). This image control processing will be described later using FIG. When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S403.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 203(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 . In step S415 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 203(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S417, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S403 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 203(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S419, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing of step S411 in the main processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 203(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S421, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 518 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

At step S423, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S425, otherwise a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S425, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S421, the CPU 504 obtains information of the image data forming the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, and so on). , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516 . The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S427, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S429, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image rendering. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S431. wait for is entered.

In step S431, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

Next, setting changes in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 192 will be described. The setting change process is started by inserting the setting key into the setting key switch 281 shown in FIG. 194 and turning it clockwise to turn it on, and then turning on the power switch 244 .

FIG. 204 is a table summarizing the procedure for setting the setting b by changing the setting and the state of the related components. In FIG. 204, each stage is labeled from (A) to (B), and time elapses in the order of the Japanese syllabary. FIG. 205 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the constituent elements in each stage from (a) to (b) in FIG. 204. In FIG.

FIG. 204 shows, as items of components, a power switch 244, a front door 102, an open sensor 294, a setting key switch 281, a set value display 293, an effect image display device 157, a title panel lamp 164, a top lamp 144T, a left Items of side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R (top/side lamp), upper speaker 272 and bass speaker 277 (speaker) are shown. FIG. 205 schematically shows a set value display 293, effect image display device 157, title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, and speakers (272, 277). It is

In FIG. 204(a), the power switch 244 is off and the front door 102 is closed. Open sensor 294 is not functioning. A setting key is not inserted into the setting key switch 281, and the setting key switch 281 remains in the OFF state. Seven segments of the set value display 293 remain unlit and the set values are not displayed. Various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) are also turned off, and nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277). In FIGS. 205(a) and (b), various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) are shown in solid white with no pattern (same below).

In FIG. 204(a), the front door 102 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise, and the setting key switch 281 is turned on. That is, the setting key switch 281 is turned on before the power is turned on. Since the power has not yet been turned on, the open sensor 294 does not output a detection signal even if the front door 102 is opened.

In FIG. 204(c), the power switch 244 is turned on while the setting key switch 281 is on. As a result, the open sensor 294 begins to output a detection signal for open detection, and all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting. In FIG. 205(c), the state in which the title panel lamp 164 is lit in white is represented by left-downward hatching (the same applies hereinafter). As described above, the setting change processing in the main control unit 300 is started by inserting the setting key into the setting key switch 281 and turning it clockwise to turn it on, and then turning on the power switch 244 . . When the setting change process is started, the RAM is cleared (step S1101 shown in FIG. 201), and "1" is displayed on the setting value display 293 as the default setting value. Further, when the setting change process is started, the effect image display device 157 displays a setting changing display to inform that the setting is being changed, and the speaker (272, 277) also indicates that the setting is being changed. A voice (“Changing settings”) will be output to notify you of this.

In FIG. 204(d), the setting change button 292 is pressed once, and the setting value display 293 displays "2" as the temporary setting value.

In FIG. 204(e), the setting change button 292 is pressed twice, and the setting value display 293 displays "4" as the temporary setting value.

In FIG. 204(f), the setting change button 292 is pressed once, and the setting value display 293 displays "5" as the temporary setting value.

In FIG. 204(g), the setting change button 292 is pressed once more, setting 6 is displayed as a temporary setting value on the setting value display 293, and in FIG. It is pressed, and "b" is displayed on the set value display 293 as a temporary set value. Comparing the setting value display 293 shown in FIG. 205(g) with the setting value display 293 shown in FIG. A fraudulent person who tries to change the number to , may mistake the display of "b" for the display of "6".

In FIG. 204(vi), the start lever 135 is operated, the set value is determined (step S1115 shown in FIG. 201), and the set value display 293 displays the number 0 indicating that the set value has been determined. Here, the setting b is fixed. Incidentally, when the start lever 135 is operated, the set value display 293 may be hidden as described above. Alternatively, the set value may be determined by turning off the setting key switch 281 instead of determining the set value by operating the start lever 135 .

In FIG. 204(J), the setting key inserted into the setting key switch 281 is turned counterclockwise to turn it off. As a result, the setting change process is completed (step S1119 shown in FIG. 201), and the 7 segments of the setting value display 293 are turned off and are not displayed. Also, the effect image display device 157 starts displaying the demonstration animation. When the setting key switch 281 is turned off and the power is turned on, the display of the demonstration animation starts immediately after the power is turned on. is started after the In this case, the display of the demonstration animation starts from the beginning. Alternatively, the display of the demo animation was played immediately after the power was turned on, but the setting change display overlapped and could not be seen. good. Also, the sound from the speakers (272, 277) is switched to the sound "The door is open" warning that the front door 102 is being opened. Furthermore, among various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are lit in a demonstration lighting pattern (demo pattern). In FIG. 205(J), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are lit in a demo pattern, which is indicated by grid-like hatching (same below). On the other hand, only the title panel lamp 164 is extinguished. That is, the title panel lamp 164 is lit during the setting change, but is turned off when the setting change is completed, and remains in the off state until medals are inserted (until the number of bets of 1 or more is set). . Extinguishing of the title panel lamp 164 corresponds to notification regarding the setting value, more specifically, notification that the setting value is set to a certain setting value (the most disadvantageous setting value for the player). In addition, since the title panel lamp 164 normally remains on, the turning off of the title panel lamp 164 can also be regarded as notification of an abnormality (notification of an abnormality in the set value).

In FIG. 204 (S), the front door 102 is closed, and the detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the open sensor 294 (switched to an L level closed detection signal). The speaker (272, 277) outputs the sound "The door is closed". The effect image display device 157 continues to display the demonstration animation, and the title panel lamp 164 continues to be turned off.

In FIG. 204 (ch), medals are inserted. That is, the maintenance of the medals or the operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132 are performed. As a result, the speaker (272, 277) outputs a medal insertion sound, and the effect image display device 157 switches from the demonstration animation display to the normal effect background display (normal background display). Further, among various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R start lighting in the lighting pattern for normal effect (normal pattern). In FIG. 205(b), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are lit in a normal pattern, which is indicated by cross hatching (same below). On the other hand, the title panel lamp 164, which has continued to be turned off, also starts lighting up. In addition, the title panel lamp 164 may start lighting when the front door 102 is closed, may continue to turn off when the medal is inserted, and may start lighting when the game starts (operation of the start lever 135). It may start lighting at the third stop of the game, or may start lighting at the completion of the payout of the first game.

FIG. 206(a) is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is repeatedly opened and closed while the setting value is set to the setting b. In FIG. 206(a), each stage is labeled from (t) to (n), and time elapses in the order of the Japanese syllabary. In addition, FIG. 207 schematically shows the state of the constituent elements in each stage from (T) to (N) in FIG. 206(a).

In FIG. 206(a), the same items as those in FIG. 204 are shown as items of constituent elements, and in FIG. 207(a), each constituent element is schematically shown as in FIG.

FIG. 206 (T) may be a continuation from FIG. 204 (T), and the game has already started with the setting b. For example, the game is started while ignoring the notification that the title panel lamp 164 is turned off. In FIG. 206 (T), the third stop is performed, and reel stop sounds are output from the speakers (272, 277).

In FIG. 206 (h), a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) has passed without medals being inserted after the third stop was made. Then, the effect image display device 157 switches from the normal background display to the demonstration animation display. Among various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R are switched from normal pattern lighting to demo pattern lighting. Here, if the setting b remains set, when the effect image display device 157 starts displaying the demonstration animation, the title panel lamp 164 is extinguished and the setting-related notification is restored. It should be noted that the title panel lamp 164 may be extinguished and the setting-related notification may be started when a wide demonstration effect is started or when the demonstration state is entered, not limited to the display of the demonstration animation on the effect image display device 157. .

206(c), the front door 102 is opened, and the open sensor 294 outputs a detection signal (H level signal). All the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start door open pattern lighting. That is, the title panel lamp 164, which has been turned off, also ends the setting-related notification and starts lighting the door opening pattern. In FIG. 207(T), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are lit in the door open pattern, which is indicated by right-downward hatching (same below). These lamps (144T, 144L, 144R) may be lit in the same pattern as the normal pattern indicated by cross hatching in FIG. Since the opening of the front door 102 may change the setting, the setting-related notification by the title panel lamp 164 ends. From the speakers (272, 277), the sound "The door is open" begins to be output. Note that the effect image display device 157 continues to display the demonstration animation, but it is also possible to display the characters "Door is open" along with the demonstration animation.

In FIG. 206(T), a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) elapses without the setting being changed after the front door 102 is opened. In order to change the settings, the power switch 244 must be turned off and the setting key switch 281 must be turned on. If not, the title panel lamp 164 is turned off again and the setting-related notification is started. This setting-related notification prompts the user to change the setting. Among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are switched from the door opening pattern lighting so as to match the display of the demonstration animation on the effect image display device 157. Switches to demo pattern lighting. That is, the warning notification for a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) by lighting the door opening pattern is terminated, and the lighting of the demonstration pattern is restored.

In FIG. 206(g), the front door 102 is closed. The detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the open sensor 294 (switched to an L level closed detection signal). The speaker (272, 277) outputs the sound "The door is closed". The effect image display device 157 continues to display the demonstration animation, and the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R also continue to light up in the demonstration pattern. In addition, the title panel lamp 164 continues to be turned off, and the setting-related notification continues.

In FIG. 206(na), the front door 102 is opened again, and each component is in the same state as in FIG.

In FIG. 206(2), the front door 102 is closed again 1 second after the opening of the front door 102 in FIG. 206(na). The detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the open sensor 294 . In the speakers (272, 277), the voice "the door is open" is immediately switched to the voice "the door is closed". On the other hand, even if the front door 102 is closed, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) continue the door open pattern lighting for the predetermined time after the front door 102 is opened. As a result, the setting-related notification by extinguishing the title panel lamp 164 does not start until the predetermined time has passed since the front door 102 was opened. Note that the effect image display device 157 continues to display the demonstration animation.

In FIG. 206(J), a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) has passed since the front door 102 in FIG. 206(N) was opened. Again, as a result, a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the front door 102 was opened without the setting being changed, the title panel lamp 164 is turned off, and setting-related notification is started. . In addition, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are switched from door open pattern lighting to demo pattern lighting so as to match the display of the demonstration animation on the effect image display device 157. FIG. The title panel lamp 164 is turned off in FIG. 206(J) because the front door 102 is closed while the setting is set to b, and medals are not inserted until the predetermined time has elapsed. It can also be seen that the setting-related notification has started by turning off the lamp 164, and if medals are inserted before the predetermined time elapses, the setting-related notification by turning off the title panel lamp 164 is not started.

In the example shown in FIG. 206(a) described above, the title panel lamp 164 turns off when the demo animation is started with the setting value set to the setting b (FIG. 206(h)). The title panel lamp 164 may be turned off under certain conditions, for example, when entering a non-recommended game state (so-called penalty bonus) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal game state (for example, without following a specific pressing order navigation) After releasing the third stop button), the title panel lamp may be turned off. In the non-recommended game state, no lottery including the AT lottery is performed, and the number of medals for the player remains the same or slightly reduced, but the non-recommended game state continues until the predetermined number of medals is paid out. Therefore, it will take a considerable amount of time to return to a state where the number of medals can be increased. When entering the non-recommended gaming state, the effect image display device 157 may perform a suggestive display suggesting that the non-recommended gaming state is reached. It may be continuously displayed until the penalty bonus ends). Also, in the non-recommended game state, the demo animation may not be displayed, and the title panel lamp 164 may remain turned off both during the game and during the non-game. It should be noted that regardless of the set value (other than the setting b) it may enter the non-recommended game state, or the non-recommended game state may be entered only when the set value is set to the setting b. may

FIG. 206(b) is a table summarizing the states of related components when the settlement operation is performed immediately after the third stop in the state where the setting value is set to the setting b. In FIG. 206(b), the checkout button 134 is operated at the timing of (ne) one second after (t), which is the same state as (t) shown in FIG. 206(a). . That is, the settlement operation is performed before the predetermined time (30 seconds) elapses without medals being inserted after the third stop is performed. When the settlement operation is performed, the effect image display device 157 starts displaying the demonstration animation. Further, all of the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting in the settlement pattern. Furthermore, a game medium payout sound is output from the speakers (272, 277). In addition, FIG. 207(n) schematically shows the state of the constituent elements in FIG. 206(n). In FIG. 207(N), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R are hatched with horizontal lines to indicate that they are lit according to the settlement pattern (the same applies hereinafter). These lamps (144T, 144L, 144R) may be lit in the same pattern as the normal pattern indicated by cross hatching in FIG.

In FIG. 206 (no), the payout of game media is completed. FIG. 207(n) schematically shows the configuration elements in FIG. 206(n). Even after the payout is completed, the effect image display device 157 continues to display the demonstration animation, and the title panel lamp 164 is turned off. On the other hand, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are switched from the adjustment pattern lighting to the demonstration pattern lighting so as to match the display of the demonstration animation on the effect image display device 157. FIG. Output from the speakers (272, 277) is stopped.

To summarize the conditions for extinguishing the title panel lamp 164 described above, if the setting key switch 281 is turned off while the setting b is set ((C) in FIG. 204), the setting b is set. When the demonstration animation is started in (Fig. 206 (H), the result is the same in Fig. 204 (J)), when the payout corresponding to the payment operation is completed with the setting b set ( Fig. 206(f)) can be mentioned.

FIG. 208(a) is a table summarizing the states of related components when setting confirmation is performed in the state where setting 1, which is the default setting value, is set. In FIG. 208(a), each stage is labeled from (c) to (f), and time elapses in the order of the Japanese syllabary. In addition, the upper part of FIG. 209 schematically shows the state of the constituent elements in each stage from (c) to (f) in FIG. 208(a).

(C) in FIG. 208(a) is the same state as (T) shown in FIG. is not set to the setting b, the title panel lamp 164 is not turned off and remains lit in white. Note that the title panel lamp 164 is not illuminated in the demo pattern, but may be illuminated in white, in which case the demo pattern is illuminated. In FIG. 209(C), the state in which the title panel lamp 164 is lit in white is represented by left-down hatching.

In (H) in FIG. 208(a), the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise, and the setting key switch 281 is turned on. That is, the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the power is on, and confirmation of the set value is started. The set value display 293 displays "1" as the current set value. In addition, on the effect image display device 157, a setting confirmation display is displayed to inform that the setting is being confirmed, and a sound ("setting confirmation is”) will be output. The title panel lamp 164 continues to illuminate in white, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R also switch from demo pattern lighting to white lighting. The setting value display 293 shown in FIG. 209(H) displays “1” which is the current setting value. Also, the title panel lamp 164, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R shown in FIG. 209(H) are all lit in white.

(f) in FIG. 208(a) is the same as (j) shown in FIG. 206(a), in which the setting key switch 281 is turned off. The point at which confirmation is completed and the point at which the title panel lamp 164 continues to light in white without being extinguished because the set value is not set to the setting b. In FIG. 209(f), the set value display 293 is hidden. Also, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), only the title panel lamp 164 continues to light up in white, and the remaining lamps (144T, 144L, 144R) have a demonstration pattern represented by grid-like hatching. switched to lighting.

(F) in FIG. 208(a) is the same state as (S) shown in FIG. 206(a), in which the front door 102 is closed. It becomes a point that continues to light up in white.

FIG. 208(b) is a table summarizing the states of related components when setting confirmation is performed in the power saving mode with setting 1 set. In FIG. 208(b), each stage is labeled from (ka) to (ke), and time elapses in the order of the Japanese syllabary. In addition, the lower part of FIG. 209 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the constituent elements in each stage from (1) to (1) in FIG. 208(b).

Fig. 208(b) shows a state 30 seconds after the front door 102 is opened, which is the same as (c) shown in Fig. 208(a). Street. First, the display of the demonstration animation on the effect image display device 157 is displayed darker (lights are reduced) than in the non-power saving mode, as described with reference to FIG. 17(h). Also, the title panel lamp 164 is the same in that it continues to light in white without being extinguished, but the luminance is lowered (dimmed). On the other hand, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are turned off by setting the power saving mode. FIG. 209(f) shows that the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is darkened and the title panel lamp 164 is also darkened. It also shows that the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are turned off.

In FIG. 208(b), the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the power is on, and confirmation of the set value is started, similar to (h) in FIG. 208(a). . Even if the power saving mode is set, the lights are not dimmed or turned off while the settings are being checked, and the lighting is the same as in the non-power saving mode. The appearance of each component shown in FIG. 209(K) is the same as the appearance of each component shown in FIG. 209(H).

At (c) in FIG. 208(b), similarly to (f) shown at (a) in FIG. By completing the setting confirmation, each component returns to the state according to the power saving mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 209(c), the display screen of the effect image display device 157 where the display of the demonstration animation is started is darkened, and the title panel lamp 164 is also darkened. Also, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R are turned off.

FIG. 208(b) (v) is the same state as (f) shown in FIG. 208(a), with the front door 102 closed. The effect image display device 157 and various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) do not change from the previous state in which the setting key switch 281 is turned off.

FIG. 210(a) is a table summarizing the states of related components when setting confirmation is performed in the state set in setting b. In FIG. 210(a), time elapses in the order of (te), (b), (co), and (sa).

(Te) in FIG. 210(a) is the same state as (Te) shown in FIG. That is, the set value display 293 is not displayed, and the effect image display device 157 displays the demonstration animation. Also, the title panel lamp 164 is turned off, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R are turned on in a demo pattern.

At (b) in FIG. 210(a), the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the power is on, and confirmation of the set value is started. 208(a), the only difference is the setting value displayed on the setting value display 293. FIG. 210(a), the set value display 293 displays the current set value "b". The setting value display 293 shown in FIG. 211(b) displays "b" which is the current setting value. As in FIG. 209(H), in FIG. 211(B) as well, the setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the speaker (272, 277) also outputs a voice saying "Setting confirmation". It is The title panel lamp 164 is lit in white, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R are also lit in white.

(J) in FIG. 210(a) is the same state as (J) shown in FIG. 204, in which the setting key switch 281 is turned off, which is exactly the same state as (J). That is, since the setting is set to b, the title panel lamp 164 is extinguished, and the setting-related notification is executed.

(Sa) in FIG. 210(a) is the same state as (Sa) shown in FIG. That is, the title panel lamp 164 continues to be turned off, and the setting-related notification continues to be executed.

FIG. 210(b) is a table summarizing the states of related components when setting confirmation is performed in the power saving mode with the setting set to b. In FIG. 210(b), each stage is assigned a code from (ga) to (ge), and time elapses in the order of the Japanese syllabary. In addition, the lower part of FIG. 211 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the constituent elements in each stage from (ga) to (ge) in FIG. 210(b).

(g) in FIG. 210(b) is the same state as (te) shown in FIG. Street. First, the display of the demonstration animation on the effect image display device 157 is displayed darker (lights are reduced) than in the non-power saving mode. Also, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are turned off by setting the power saving mode. FIG. 211 (G) shows a state in which the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is dark. It should be noted that the title panel lamp 164 is off, and setting-related notification is being executed. Also, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are turned off.

At (g) in FIG. 210(b), similarly to (b) shown at (a) in FIG. , and (b) are exactly the same. That is, even if the power saving mode is set, the lights are not dimmed or extinguished while the setting is being checked, and the operation is the same as in the non-power saving mode. It should be noted that the contents of the display of the set value display 293 and the like are different from (i) in FIG. 208(b). That is, "b" is displayed like the set value display 293 shown in FIG.

At (g) in FIG. 210(b), the setting key switch 281 is turned off, similar to (j) shown at (a) in FIG. By completing the setting confirmation, each component returns to the state according to the power saving mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 211 (g), the display screen of the effect image display device 157 where the display of the demonstration animation is started is dark, and the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are turned off. are doing. Note that the state of the title panel lamp 164 is different from (c) in FIG. 208(b). That is, since the setting is set to b, the title panel lamp 164 is extinguished and the setting-related notification is executed as shown in FIG.

FIG. 210(b) shows a state in which the front door 102 is closed, which is the same as (sa) shown in FIG. 210(a). The effect image display device 157 and various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) do not change from the previous state in which the setting key switch 281 was turned off.

Next, a modified example of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 192 will be described.

<Regarding the size relationship of the payout rate>
First, examples of the winning probability and state transition of the winning hand group are shown, and the magnitude relationship between the total payout rate considering all hands including the replay which is a replay hand and the real payout rate considering the hand other than the replay. A slot machine capable of converging the payout rate within a suitable range by devising will be described. Specifically, in the slot machine according to this modified example, the states that can be controlled according to the progress of the game are a first state (RT2 described later) in which the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate, as described later. , and the second situation (RT1, which will be described later), which is the exact opposite of the first situation and in which the total payout rate is higher than the actual payout rate, so that the payout rate converges within a suitable range. can be made It is assumed that the slot machine in this modification also has the technical matters described with reference to FIGS. 192-211.

Here, the payout rate is the rate calculated by dividing the total number of medals paid out after the symbols corresponding to the minor win are stopped by the total number of medals bet set as the bet number. . In addition, the total payout rate considering all the combinations is, for example, when winning a replay in a game with a 3-bet wager, 3 medals are paid out due to the replay winning, and 3 medals are betted in the next game. means the payout rate (first payout rate) calculated as the first payout rate. On the other hand, the actual payout rate that takes into account roles other than replays is, for example, when a replay win is made in a game with a 3-bet bet, 0 medals are paid out due to the replay win, and 0 medals are paid out in the next game. It means a payout rate (second payout rate) calculated assuming that a coin is betted.

FIG. 212(a) is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state in the slot machine in this modified example. In the slot machine according to this modification, RT0, which is a basic game state (for example, a state in which most of the game is completed, or a state in which a setting change is triggered, etc.), and a predetermined The game state transitions between a plurality of types of states including RT1 which is shifted by winning a transitional combination A and RT2 which is shifted by winning a predetermined transitional combination B in RT0. In RT0 to RT2, one game can be started by setting the number of bets to be three. After shifting to RT1 or RT2, the game is shifted to RT0 again by completing 100 games defined as the prescribed number of games. At RT0 in the slot machine according to this modified example, in addition to the transitional hand A and the transitional hand B, a bonus hand, a replay hand, a small hand, etc. are selected by lottery to determine whether or not they will be won. It is determined to be In addition, in the slot machine according to this modified example, if a bonus combination is won in any of RT0 to RT2, the transition is made to a bonus state in which the payout rate is 1 or more. It is omitted from a). It should be noted that the slot machine in this modified example may transition the game state between states including RT1 and RT2 without providing RT0.

FIG. 212(b) is a diagram for explaining part of the winning combination that is the target of the winning combination lottery in RT1 and the level of the winning probability. In RT1, a bonus combination, a replay combination including replay a and replay b, a small combination including a 3-card combination with a 3-card payout, and a push-up combination with a 15-card payout, etc. are the targets of the role lottery. It is defined. The 3-card combination always wins in the winning game regardless of the pressing order or operation timing (operation mode). On the other hand, the pushing order combination wins when operated in a predetermined pushing order (equivalent to the above-described advantageous operation mode) and 15 coins are paid out, but does not win when operated in a predetermined pushing order (other than that). It may be a winning combination (for example, a single winning combination).

The winning probability of the bonus combination is determined to be 1/250 when the set values are 'b', '1' and '2', and 1/200 when the set values are '4' to '6'. is determined to be For this reason, the winning probability of the bonus combination in RT1 is set in two stages: set values "b", "1" and "2" and set values "4" to "6". there is In addition, the winning probability of the replay b among the replaying hands is determined to be low (for example, 5/200, etc.) regardless of the set value, while the winning probability of the winning hand among the small winnings is , is determined to be a high probability (for example, 60/200) regardless of the set value. It should be noted that even if the player wins the first prize in RT1, the navigation effect that makes it possible to specify the advantageous operation mode is not executed (that is, it is not controlled by the AT). Therefore, even if the player wins the winning role, for example, the player wins with a probability of 1/6 and does not win with a probability of 5/6.

On the other hand, with regard to the winning probability of Replay a among the replaying roles and the winning probability of the 3-card role among the small roles, the total winning probability is set to be uniform (for example, 50/200). , the ratio of the winning probability of the replay a and the three-card combination is determined to be different for each set value. Specifically, when the set values are "b" and "6", the replay a has a low probability (eg, 15/200), while the 3-card combination has a high probability (eg, 35/200). It is determined to be When the set values are "1" and "5", both the replay a and the 3-card combination are determined to have medium probabilities (for example, 25/200). When the set values are "2" and "4", the replay a has a high probability (eg, 35/200), while the 3-card hand has a low probability (eg, 15/200). ing.

FIG. 212(c) is a diagram for explaining a part of the winning combination that is the target of the winning combination lottery and the level of the winning probability in RT2. In RT2, as in RT1, bonus hands, replay hands including replay a and replay b, etc., 3-card hands with 3-card payouts, small wins including 15-card payouts, etc. are subject to lottery. is determined to be The winning probability of replay b in RT2 is determined to be higher than that in RT1 (for example, 45/200, etc.), but the winning probability of other hands is the same as in RT1. It is determined to be Further, when winning the pushing order in RT2, unlike in RT1, a navigation effect is executed that makes it possible to specify an advantageous operation mode. Therefore, when winning the winning combination in RT2, 15 medals will be paid out by winning the winning combination unless the operation mode is mistaken. Note that the winning combination to be drawn in RT2 is not limited to being determined in the same way as in RT1, and may be determined differently.

In addition, in RT1 and RT2, the combined winning probability of replay a and 3-card combination (also the combined winning probability because winning is guaranteed) is uniform regardless of the set value. However, if the total payout rate and the actual payout rate are compared, they differ for each set value. For example, when the set values are "b" and "6", the winning/winning probability of replay a is low, so the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate is relatively small, whereas the set value " When the set values are 1 and 5, the difference is relatively large, and when the set values are 2 and 4, the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate is maximum. Moreover, in any of the set values 1 to 3 and the set values 4 to 6, which affect the probability of winning the bonus combination, the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate becomes relatively small. It is determined so as to include a set value at which the difference from the actual payout rate is relatively large and a set value at which the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate is maximized.

An example of such payout rates for RT1 and RT2 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the number of medals used for setting the number of bets is 3, and FIG. 213 illustrates a case where no bonus combination is won in RT1 and RT2. The probability of winning the replay during RT1 when either the set value "b" or "6" is set is 10/100 (=(15+5)/200), so 100 games (G) You can expect to win an average of 10 prizes in between. For this reason, in FIG. 213(a), when the replay wins 10 times in 100 games (G) during RT1 when either the set value "b" or "6" is set, " Examples of total IN number, actual IN number, total OUT number, and actual OUT number are shown, and real payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers are shown. Note that "total number of wins" and "actual number of wins" are both the number of medals used to set the number of bets, but "total number of wins" is the number of medals including the number of bets automatically set after winning a replay. On the other hand, the "actual IN number" is the number excluding the number of bets automatically set after the replay win (the number of bets after the replay win is set to "0"). In addition, "total number of out" and "actual number of out" are both the number of medals paid out when winning a small role, but "total number of out" means that 3 medals were paid out when winning a replay. The difference is that the "actual IN number" is the number that is assumed to be 0 at the time of winning the replay.

As shown in FIG. 213(a), when 10 replays are won in RT1 over 100 games (G), the "total number of IN" is "300" (= 100 games (G) x 3). IN number" is "270" (=300 sheets - 10 times x 3 sheets). Also, the "total number of OUT sheets" is assumed to be "150", and the "actual number of OUT sheets" in this case is "120" (=150-10 times×3 sheets). Therefore, the actual payout rate is 0.444 (≈120/270), while the total payout rate is 0.500 (=150/300).

Next, FIG. 213(b) will be described. The probability of winning the replay during RT1 when either the setting value "2" or "4" is set is 20/100 (=(35+5)/200), so 100 games (G) You can expect to win an average of 20 prizes in between. Therefore, in FIG. 213(b), when the replay wins 20 times in 100 games (G) during RT1 when either the set value "2" or "4" is set, " Examples of total IN number, actual IN number, total OUT number, and actual OUT number are shown, and real payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers are shown. As shown in FIG. 213(b), when 20 replays are won in RT1 over 100 games (G), the "total number of IN" is "300" (= 100 games (G) x 3). IN number" is "240" (=300 sheets - 20 times x 3 sheets). Also, as shown in FIG. 212(b), the total probability of replay a and the 3-card hand is uniform, so the "total number of out" is assumed to be "150" as in FIG. 213(a). , the “substantial number of OUT sheets” in this case is “90” (=150−20 times×3 sheets). Therefore, the actual payout rate is 0.375 (=90/240), while the total payout rate is 0.500 (=150/300).

As described above, during RT1, although the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate varies depending on the set value, as shown in FIG. It can be said that the total payout rate is higher than the actual payout rate. 100 games (G) during RT1 when either the set value "1" or "5" is set is not shown. However, the "total IN number" and the "total OUT number" are the same as in FIG. 213(a), etc., because the total probability of the number of games played, replay a, and 3-card hand is uniform. Further, the number of replay wins, the "substantial number of IN" and the "substantial number of OUT" can be probabilistically between the values shown in FIGS. 213(a) and 213(b). Therefore, the total payout rate is higher than the actual payout rate for 100 games (G) during RT1 when either the set value "1" or "5" is set. Become. In addition, during RT1, although the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate regardless of the set value, both the total payout rate and the real payout rate are less than 1, which is disadvantageous to the player. state can be

On the other hand, during RT2, although the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate varies depending on the set value, the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate regardless of the set value (regardless of the set value). is higher. This will be explained below.

The probability of winning the replay during RT2 when either the set value "b" or "6" is set is 30/100 (=(15+45)/200), so 100 games (G) You can expect to win an average of 30 prizes in between. In FIG. 213(c), the "total IN number , "actual IN number", "total OUT number", and "real OUT number" are shown, and the actual payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers are shown. As shown in FIG. 213(c), if the replay wins 30 times in RT2 over 100 games (G), the "total number of IN" is "300" (= 100 games (G) x 3). IN number" is "210" (=300 sheets - 30 times x 3 sheets). Also, the "total number of out" is assumed to be "600" as a result of the navigation effect, and the "actual number of out" in this case is "510" (=600-30 times×3). Therefore, the actual payout rate is 2.429 (≈510/210), while the total payout rate is 2.000 (=600/300).

Next, FIG. 213(d) will be described. During RT2, the probability of winning the replay when either the setting value "2" or "4" is set is 40/100 (=(35+45)/200), so 100 games (G) You can expect to win an average of 40 times in between. In FIG. 213(d), the "total IN number , "actual IN number", "total OUT number", and "real OUT number" are shown, and the actual payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers are shown. As shown in FIG. 213(d), when 40 replays are won in RT2 over 100 games (G), the "total number of IN" is "300" (= 100 games (G) x 3). IN number" is "180" (=300 sheets - 40 times x 3 sheets). Also, as shown in FIG. 212(c), the "total number of out" is assumed to be "600" as in FIG. , the “substantial number of OUT sheets” in this case is “480” (=600−40 times×3 sheets). Therefore, the actual payout rate is 2.667 (≈480/180), while the total payout rate is 2.000 (=600/300).

As described above, during RT2, although the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate varies depending on the set value as described above, as shown in FIG. It can be said that the actual payout rate is higher than the total payout rate even at the set value of . Note that the 100 games (G) during RT2 when either the setting value "1" or "5" is set is not shown. However, the "total number of IN" and "total number of OUT" are the same as in FIG. 213(c), etc., because the total probability of the number of games played, replay a, and 3-card hand is uniform. Also, the number of replay wins, the "substantial number of IN" and the "substantial number of OUT" can be probabilistically between the values shown in Figs. 213(c) and 213(d). From this, it can be said that the actual payout rate is higher than the total payout rate for 100 games (G) during RT2 when either the set value "1" or "5" is set. Become. In addition, during RT2, even though the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate regardless of the set value, both the total payout rate and the real payout rate are 1 or more, which is advantageous for the player. state can be

As described above, in the slot machine according to this modified example, as a situation that can be controlled, attention is paid to the magnitude relationship between the total payout rate that takes into account all hands including replays and the real payout rate that takes into account hands other than replays, As shown in FIGS. 212(a) and 213(e), by providing a situation where the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate and a situation where the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate, For example, the payout rate can be converged within an appropriate range, compared to a gaming machine in which only one payout rate is high.

The transition from RT0 to RT1 is not limited to the winning of a predetermined winning combination such as the transition winning combination A, but the stopping of a specific losing symbol combination, the completion of a predetermined number of games, or the winning of a predetermined lottery. It may be established by such things as. In addition, the shift from RT0 to RT2 is not limited to the winning of a predetermined winning combination such as the transition winning combination B, but the stopping of a specific losing symbol combination, completion of a predetermined number of games, or winning in a predetermined lottery. It may be established by such things as. In addition, the shift from RT1 to RT0 is not limited to being established by completing the game a predetermined number of times, but may be winning a predetermined role, stopping a specific losing symbol combination, or winning a predetermined lottery. It may be established by doing. In addition, the transition from RT2 to RT0 is not limited to being established by completing the game a predetermined number of times. It may be established by doing.

In addition, the transitional combination A wins simultaneously with other winnings a, b, etc. in the combination lottery, and the operation mode of winning the transitional combination A according to the type of the other combination in which the transitional combination A is simultaneously won (for example, The pressing order) may be determined differently. Also, the transitional hand B is won at the same time as the other hand a, b, etc. in the hand lottery, and the transitional hand B is won according to the type of the other hand in which the transitional hand B is simultaneously won (for example, The pressing order) may be determined differently. In addition, the transition winning combination A, the transition winning combination B, and the other winning combinations a and b are simultaneously won in the winning combination lottery, and the transition winning combination A is won according to the types of other winning combinations simultaneously won. , and transitional combination B may be determined differently. In this case, when the transition winning combination A or the transition winning combination B is won at RT0, by generating a pushing order guessing game, the interest in the game at RT0 can be improved.

For example, the transition role A is an RT1 transition replay, and the other normal replay a, normal replay b, and other normal replays are simultaneously won in the lottery, and the RT1 transition replay is simultaneously won according to the type of other normal replay. may be determined to be different in operation mode (for example, the order of pressing) for winning a prize. Specifically, as winning situations in RT0, there are provided a winning situation a in which the RT1 transition replay is won at the same time as the normal replay a, and a winning situation b in which the RT1 transition replay is won at the same time as the normal replay b. Reel control is performed to win the RT1 transition replay by the first left stop at the time of a, while reel control to win the normal replay a is performed by the first stop other than the left. , reel control for winning the RT1 transition replay is performed by the first stop other than the left in the winning situation b, while reel control for winning the normal replay b is performed by the first stop on the left. can be

Further, the transition role B is an RT2 transition replay, and the other normal replay a, normal replay b, and other normal replays are simultaneously won in the lottery, and the RT2 transition replay is won simultaneously according to the type of other normal replays. may be determined to be different in operation mode (for example, the order of pressing) for winning a prize. Specifically, as winning situations in RT0, there are provided a winning situation c in which the RT2 transition replay is won at the same time as the normal replay a, and a winning situation d in which the RT2 transition replay is won at the same time as the normal replay b. While the reel control for winning the RT2 transition replay is performed by the left first stop at c, the reel control for winning the normal replay a is performed by the first stop other than the left. , reel control is performed to win the RT2 transition replay by first stopping other than the left in the winning situation d, while reel control is performed to win the normal replay b by making the left first stop. can be

At RT0 in this case, by notifying that it is a push order guessing game when one of the winning situations a to d occurs (for example, when winning situations a and b, "Pinch! Avoid pushing order!" Displaying a message, and displaying a message such as ``Chance! Give the correct answer on your own!'' in winning situations c and d), it is possible to provide the player with the fun of thinking about which order to perform the stop operation. , RT0 can be improved.

Also, FIG. 212(a) illustrates the game state transition between RT0 and RT2. Focusing on this, as shown in FIG. 213(e), if a situation where the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate and a situation where the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate are possible, then this is the case. is not limited to

212(b) and 212(c), when the total payout rate and the real payout rate are compared, the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate differs for each set value. Also, in any of the set values "b", "1", "2" and the set values "4" to "6" that affect the probability of winning the bonus combination, the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate is It has been explained that there are a relatively small set value, a set value with a relatively large difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate, and a set value with the maximum difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate. However, as shown in FIG. 213(e), the winning probability is such that a situation where the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate and a situation where the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate can occur. If a lottery is performed (for example, the winning probability of replay is not set to 0% or 100%), the game state transition shown in FIG. And it is not limited to the winning combination and winning probability of the winning combination lottery shown in FIG. 212(c) and the like.

To summarize the features of the slot machine according to the modified example described above,
"A gaming machine that can variably display a plurality of types of symbols by setting a predetermined number of game values as the number of bets for one game, and can provide game values according to the symbols when the variable display is stopped,
Determining whether or not a winning combination is won out of a plurality of combinations including a granting combination that accompanies the granting of the game value and a replay combination that enables the next game to be started without newly using the game value. A role lottery means for performing a role lottery,
Stop control means for performing stop control to stop the symbols according to the result of the winning lottery;
setting value setting means for setting one of a plurality of types of setting values with different degrees of advantage to the player;
A payout rate obtained by dividing the total awarded number, which is the total number of game values awarded when the symbol corresponding to the award combination is stopped, by the total number of bets, which is the total number of game values set as the bet number, In a game played with a predetermined number of bets set, when the symbol corresponding to the replaying combination is stopped, the predetermined number of game values is given as a result of the game, and the number of bets is set in the next game. A first payout rate that counts the gaming value set as the predetermined number as the predetermined number, and a predetermined number as the number of bets. The gaming value given in the next game is set to 0, and the gaming value set as the bet number in the next game is counted as 0. The second payout rate is higher than the first payout rate. A first situation in which the rate is higher and a second situation in which the first payout rate is higher than the second payout rate,
In the notification state for notifying the advantageous operation mode corresponding to the winning combination by the combination lottery, the second payout rate is higher than the first payout rate regardless of any set value among the plurality of types of set values. becomes high, and in the non-notification state in which the advantageous operation mode corresponding to the winning combination by the combination lottery is not notified, the first is higher than the payout rate of
At least a first set value with the most advantageous degree of advantage and a second set value with the most unfavorable degree of advantage are provided as the plurality of types of set values, and the second set value is set. The ratio of the first situation is higher when the first set value is set, and the second set value is set more than when the first set value is set. A game machine characterized in that the second situation is more likely to occur when the game machine is present. 』
become.

In addition, according to the description after FIG. 192,
``Setting change that changes the setting value that has been set so far to a new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, and b] that have different degrees of advantage for the player. setting change means for performing processing [for example, CPU 304 of main control unit 300 for executing setting change processing shown in FIG. 201];
Notification means capable of executing setting-related notification related to the setting value [for example, light-off notification for notifying that setting b is set, notification effects shown in FIGS. 196(c) to 196(f)] panel lamp 164, effect image display device 157, etc.],
A game machine comprising
The notification means, during a first period [for example, the period from the end of the setting change to the insertion of medals], the setting-related notification [for example, a light-off notification for notifying that the setting is set to b]. is executable and
The first period is a certain period after a certain operation [for example, an operation to turn off the setting key switch 281] is executed.
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information about the setting value by the setting-related notification after the certain operation is executed. This information can be obtained by both game shop clerks and players. In the case of a store clerk, this would be confirmation of setting changes before opening the store, and in the case of a player, it would be important information that would benefit oneself (the same applies hereinafter).

The notification means may continue to perform the setting-related notification during the first period (hereinafter the same).

The first period may be a period from when the operation for ending the setting change is performed until the number of bets of 1 or more is set (until medals are inserted) (hereinafter the same).

The setting-related notification may be a notification that ends when the number of bets of 1 or more is set (hereinafter the same). Further, the setting-related notification may be notification suggesting that a predetermined set value is set (selected) as the set value (the same shall apply hereinafter). The predetermined set value may be a set value that provides the lowest degree of advantage to the player among the plurality of types of set values (hereinafter the same). In this case, the clerk of the amusement parlor can notice the low degree of advantage before the opening of the store by the setting-related notification, and can change the set value to a higher degree of advantage. You can avoid the playground where is being done.

The setting-related notification can be read as setting-related effect, and the notification means can be read as effect means (hereinafter the same).

Also, according to the above description,
"A setting change that changes a setting value that has been set to a new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] with different degrees of advantage for the player. setting change means for performing processing [for example, CPU 304 of main control unit 300 for executing setting change processing shown in FIG. 201];
Notification means capable of executing setting-related notification related to the setting value [for example, light-off notification for notifying that setting b is set, notification effects shown in FIGS. 196(c) to 196(f)] panel lamp 164, effect image display device 157, etc.],
A game machine comprising
The notification means, during a first period [for example, the period from the end of the setting change to the insertion of medals], the setting-related notification [for example, a light-off notification for notifying that the setting is set to b]. is executable and
The notification means is capable of executing notification regarding one of the plurality of types of setting values [for example, setting b] as the setting-related notification,
The first period is a certain period after a certain operation [for example, an operation to turn off the setting key switch 281] is executed,
The notification means does not execute the setting-related notification when a setting value different from the certain setting value [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6] is set.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information about the setting value by the setting-related notification after the certain operation is executed. In addition, it becomes easy to specify that the one setting value is set by the setting-related notification.

The notification means executes the setting-related notification when a setting value different from the certain setting value [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6] is set in the first period. It may not be.

Also, according to the above description,
"A setting change that changes a setting value that has been set to a new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] with different degrees of advantage for the player. setting change means for performing processing [for example, CPU 304 of main control unit 300 for executing setting change processing shown in FIG. 201];
Notification means capable of executing setting-related notification related to the setting value [for example, light-off notification for notifying that setting b is set, notification effects shown in FIGS. 196(c) to 196(f)] panel lamp 164, effect image display device 157, etc.],
A game machine comprising
The notification means, during a first period [for example, the period from the end of the setting change to the insertion of medals], the setting-related notification [for example, a light-off notification for notifying that the setting is set to b]. is executable and
The notification means is capable of executing notification regarding one of the plurality of types of setting values [for example, setting b] as the setting-related notification,
The first period is a certain period after a certain operation [for example, an operation to turn off the setting key switch 281] is executed,
When the one set value is set rather than when a set value different from the one set value [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6] is set has a higher frequency of executing the setting-related notification [for example, performance G or performance H shown in FIG. 196(b)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information about the setting value by the setting-related notification after the certain operation is executed. In addition, it becomes easy to specify that the one setting value is set by the setting-related notification.

The setting-related notification is not executed when a setting value different from the certain setting value is set, and is executed only when the certain setting value is set. However, it may be executed when a set value different from the one set value is set, including false notification. However, the execution frequency is as above.

In the first period, the notifying means may be configured such that, in the first period, the set value is higher when the one set value is set than when the set value different from the one set value is set. The frequency of executing the related notification may be high, or a period different from the first period (for example, a period after the start of the game (at the end of the chance zone, at the end of the battle production, at the end of the BB) , at the end of AT, etc.), the setting-related notification is more likely to be given when the one set value is set than when the set value different from the one set value is set. It may be one that is frequently executed.

Also, according to the above description,
"A setting change that changes a setting value that has been set to a new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] with different degrees of advantage for the player. setting change means for performing processing [for example, CPU 304 of main control unit 300 for executing setting change processing shown in FIG. 201];
Notification means capable of executing setting-related notification related to the setting value [for example, light-off notification for notifying that setting b is set, notification effects shown in FIGS. 196(c) to 196(f)] panel lamp 164, effect image display device 157, etc.],
setting value display means [for example, setting value display 293] capable of displaying the plurality of types of setting values one by one in a predetermined display order [for example, the display order shown in FIG. 196(a)];
A game machine comprising
The notification means, during a first period [for example, the period from the end of the setting change to the insertion of medals], the setting-related notification [for example, a light-off notification for notifying that the setting is set to b]. is executable and
The first period is a certain period after a certain operation [for example, an operation to turn off the setting key switch 281] is executed,
The set value display means is capable of displaying a first set value, which is one of the plurality of types of set values,
The set value display means is capable of displaying a second set value, which is one of the plurality of types of set values,
The second set value is a set value [e.g., setting b] that provides a lower advantage to the player than the first set value [e.g., setting 1];
The predetermined display order is an order in which the second setting value [e.g., setting b] is displayed after the first setting value [e.g., setting 1] is displayed.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information about the setting value by the setting-related notification after the certain operation is executed. In addition, since the second set value with a lower degree of advantage for the player is prepared after the first set value, the fraudulent person who illegally changes the set value may is changed from the set value to the second set value, and a disadvantageous game may be played.

The second set value may be the one set value, and the notifying means may provide the setting-related notification related to one set value among the plurality of types of set values. It may be one capable of executing notification (hereinafter the same).

The set value display means may display the currently set set value (the same shall apply hereinafter).

setting value display means for displaying a setting value currently set; The values are changed in a predetermined order, and the second setting value may be a setting value changed after being changed to the first setting value.

Also, according to the above description,
"A setting change that changes a setting value that has been set to a new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] with different degrees of advantage for the player. setting change means for performing processing [for example, CPU 304 of main control unit 300 for executing setting change processing shown in FIG. 201];
Notification means capable of executing setting-related notification related to the setting value [for example, light-off notification for notifying that setting b is set, notification effects shown in FIGS. 196(c) to 196(f)] panel lamp 164, effect image display device 157, etc.],
setting value display means [for example, setting value display 293] capable of displaying the setting value;
A game machine comprising
The notification means, during a first period [for example, the period from the end of the setting change to the insertion of medals], the setting-related notification [for example, a light-off notification for notifying that the setting is set to b]. is executable and
The first period is a certain period after a certain operation [for example, an operation to turn off the setting key switch 281] is executed,
The set value display means is capable of displaying a first set value, which is one of the plurality of types of set values,
The set value display means is capable of displaying a second set value, which is one of the plurality of types of set values,
The second set value is a set value [e.g., setting b] that provides a lower degree of advantage to the player than the first set value [e.g., setting 1];
The setting value display means displays a default setting value to be displayed first [for example, a setting value to be displayed first immediately after shipment from the factory, a storage area (RAM of the main control unit) for storing the setting value, and a setting value to be displayed first after the RAM is cleared. display the first setting value [e.g., setting 1] as the setting value displayed first when the backup power supply is lost] is a means of
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information about the setting value by the setting-related notification after the certain operation is executed. Also, even if the game clerk forgets to change the setting and the default setting value remains, the player can easily play the game.

The default setting value to be displayed first is the setting value to be displayed first when the gaming machine is initialized. That is, when the gaming machine is initialized, the first set value is set.

setting value display means for displaying a setting value currently set; The values are changed according to a predetermined order, and the first setting value may be the setting value positioned at the top of the predetermined order.

again,
"The first period means that a game has not started even once [for example, from FIG. not] period,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player is not disadvantaged due to the execution of the setting-related notification during a period in which no game has been started.

The fact that the game has never started may mean that the start lever has never been operated while the number of bets is set to 1 or more.

again,
"The certain operation is an operation related to the setting change [for example, an operation to end the setting change].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information about the setting value by the setting-related notification when an operation regarding the setting change is performed.

The certain operation may be an operation to end the setting change (hereinafter the same).

again,
"The certain operation is an operation executed after the setting value is confirmed [for example, step S1115 in FIG. 201].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.
According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information about the setting value by the setting-related notification after the setting value is determined.

More specifically, the certain operation is an operation (setting change key (the same applies hereinafter).

again,
"Equipped with operating means [for example, setting key switch 281] that can be switched between an ON state and an OFF state by operation,
The certain operation is an operation to switch the operating means in the ON state to the OFF state [for example, FIG. 204 (ko)].
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.
According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information about the setting value by the setting-related notification after the operation means is switched to the OFF state.

The certain operation may be an operation of switching an operation means (for example, a setting change key) that is switched to an on state when starting the setting change to an off state, and the on state may be a start state. Alternatively, the off state may be the end state (the same shall apply hereinafter). That is, the operation means may be means for switching between the start and end of the setting change by being operated (the same shall apply hereinafter).

again,
``Equipped with setting value display means [for example, setting value display 293] capable of displaying the setting value,
The setting value display means does not display the setting value when the notification means executes the setting-related notification during the first period [for example, setting value display 293 shown in FIG. ],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.
According to this amusement machine, since the information about the setting value can be obtained by the notification means executing the setting-related notification, redundant display is not performed by the setting value display means, and the control load is reduced. be.

again,
"Equipped with a door [e.g., front door 102],
The notification means may execute the setting-related notification in the first period with the door opened [for example, FIG. 204 (ko)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.
According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information about the setting value from the setting-related notification even when the door is open.

The operation means may be one that can be operated when the door is in an open state (the same applies hereinafter).

Also, the setting value display means (for example, a dedicated 7-segment display) may not be visible when the door is closed (same below). In other words, it may be display means that is normally invisible to players (the same shall apply hereinafter).

The notification means may execute door opening notification when the door is opened, and may start the setting-related notification when the door opening notification ends (hereinafter referred to as same).

again,
"Equipped with a door [e.g., front door 102],
In the first period, the notification means may execute the setting-related notification while the door is closed [for example, FIG.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.
According to this gaming machine, even when the door body is closed, it may be possible to obtain information about the setting value by the setting-related notification.

Even if the door body is closed during execution of the door open notification, the notification means continues the door open notification until a predetermined period elapses from the start of the door open notification. (same below).

The notification means may perform the setting-related notification during the first period even when the door is open, and may perform the setting-related notification even when the door is closed during the first period. may be executed (hereinafter the same).

The setting-related notification may continue regardless of whether the door is opened or closed, and may end when the number of bets equal to or greater than 1 is set (hereinafter the same).

again,
"The notification means executes the setting-related notification only when a certain setting value [for example, setting b] is set as the setting value.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.
According to this gaming machine, by executing the setting-related notification, it is possible to notify that the certain set value is set as the set value.

The one set value may be a set value with the lowest degree of advantage for the player among the plurality of types of set values (the same shall apply hereinafter). In this case, the clerk of the amusement parlor can notice the low degree of advantage before the opening of the store by the setting-related notification, and can change the set value to a higher degree of advantage. You can avoid the playground where is being done.

I will continue to explain. As described above, the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that is premised on playing games with a three-coin bet. However, the game can also be played with a two-coin bet. For this reason, it is designed so that playing a 3-bet game in the 2-bet bonus internal winning state is more advantageous for the player than performing a 2-bet game in the 3-bet bonus internal winning state. The bonus internal winning state is set as a normal game state, and the game is played with three bets as much as possible.

As described above, the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment is in the normal game state that the two-coin bet bonus internal winning state is the normal game state. When the coin bet bonus game is completed, the gaming state becomes a two-coin bet bonus non-internal winning state. Alternatively, when the reset switch 291 is pressed, the double bet bonus non-internal winning state is entered. Also, when the setting change process is started, the RAM clear process (step S1101 shown in FIG. 201) is performed, and the initialization is automatically performed, resulting in a non-internal winning state of the double bet bonus.

It should be noted that when the setting change process is started, the initialization may not be automatically performed, but it may be possible to select whether or not to perform the initialization. For example, a setting change procedure may be used to initialize the setting values and the game state. More specifically, the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the power is off, as in the case of changing settings. Next, in turning on the power switch 244, if the power switch 244 is turned on while pressing the setting change button 292, the setting value becomes 1 and the game state becomes a double bet bonus non-internal winning state. You may do so. In addition, it may also be in a non-advantageous section state. Also, the initialization process (step S1009 shown in FIG. 201) is executed even when the reset switch 291 is pressed, but the initialization process may be executed even when the power is turned on while the setting change button 292 is pressed.

In the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, during the execution of the bet-two bonus game, the effect image display device 157 displays a display indicating that the bet-two bonus game is in progress (for example, display of a flower figure). ). In addition, the remaining number of payouts, which is the condition for ending the bonus, is also displayed (for example, "remaining cards during consumption"). Note that only one of them may be displayed.

In addition, in the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, a setting such as setting b, which is not originally set, which is extremely disadvantageous to the player, is prepared from the viewpoint of countermeasures against fraudulent players and the like. You can avoid this situation. However, even though the setting change process prevents the player from being significantly disadvantaged, the player remains at a disadvantage in the event that the two bet bonus is not won internally. Therefore, a notification is given to suggest that the two-coin bet bonus has not been won internally.

In the following description, the first gaming state refers to the non-internal winning state of the two-bet bonus, and the second gaming state refers to the internal winning of the two-coin bonus state. Note that the first gaming state includes a non-advantageous section state, a non-internal winning state not limited to double bets, the aforementioned non-recommended gaming state (penalty bonus state), a state in which no items or points have been obtained, or a setting b The second game state can be applied to a state that is more advantageous than those, such as an advantageous interval state, a bonus internal winning state, a normal game state, items and points or set to one of settings 1, 2, 4-6.

Also, the first voice is a warning notification of "Please confirm". The first display is a character display of "Please confirm", and this character display is also an alert notification.

On the other hand, the second voice is a voice notification of "completed". The second display is notification by text display of "Completed".

Further, when the game is started in the non-internally winning state of the two-bet bonus, a display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 suggesting that a transition to the internal winning state of the two-bet bonus is being attempted; A display suggesting that the player is in the non-internal winning state of the bet-on-one-piece bonus or a display prompting a shift to the internal winning of the two-piece-betting bonus state is displayed. Hereinafter, notifications by these displays are collectively referred to as "fourth notification". As the fourth notification, for example, "returning games" is displayed, and the number of games played in the state where the double bet bonus is not won is displayed. Players who know about this fourth notification know that this slot machine 100 is a disadvantageous slot machine and can avoid it. The fourth notification may be displayed only when the game is played with two bets, or may be displayed regardless of the number of bets.

FIG. 214 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed after the setting is changed. In FIG. 214, each stage is labeled from (1) to (11), and time elapses in ascending order of numbers.

FIG. 214 shows, as items of components, the power switch 244, the front door 102, the open sensor 294, the setting key switch 281, the set value display 293, the monitor LEDs provided on the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248, respectively. , effect image display device 157, title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R (top/side lamp), upper speaker 272 and bass speaker 277 (speaker). . Also, at the bottom, an item of game state is provided.

In FIG. 214(1), the power switch 244 is off and the front door 102 is closed. Open sensor 294 is not functioning. A setting key is not inserted into the setting key switch 281, and the setting key switch 281 remains in the OFF state. Seven segments of the set value display 293 remain unlit and the set values are not displayed. Various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) and the monitor LED are also turned off, and nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277).

In FIG. 214(2), the front door 102 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281, and the setting key switch 281 is turned to the ON state. That is, the setting key switch 281 is turned on before the power is turned on. Since the power has not yet been turned on, the open sensor 294 does not output a detection signal even if the front door 102 is opened.

In FIG. 214(3), the setting key switch 281 is on and the power switch 244 is turned on (power on). As a result, the setting change process in the main control unit 300 is started. The set value display 293 displays "1" as the default set value. In the case where it is possible to select whether or not to initialize as described above, if the initialization is not performed, the set value at the time of power-off stored in the power-off processing in step S221 is displayed. On the effect image display device 157, a setting change in progress display is displayed to inform that the setting is being changed, and a voice ("Setting is being changed") is also emitted from the speaker (272, 277) to inform that the setting is being changed. ) will be output. Since the power is turned on, the open sensor 294 starts outputting a detection signal indicating open detection, and the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) all start lighting. Furthermore, the monitor LED also starts to light as the setting key switch 281 is turned on. When the setting key switch 281 is turned on, a setting key switch ON signal is output from the external common terminal board 248 to the external device. Also, the gaming state is the first gaming state (double bet bonus non-internal winning state) due to the RAM clearing (step S1101 shown in FIG. 201). However, in the case where it is possible to select whether or not to initialize, if the initialization is not performed, the game state at the time of power interruption stored in the power interruption processing of step S221 is entered. Therefore, there may be a second gaming state (2-bet bonus internal win state).

Once the setting change is started, the setting value is updated each time the setting change button 292 is pressed.

In FIG. 214(4), the start lever 135 is operated, the set value is determined (step S1115 shown in FIG. 201), and the set value display 293 displays the number 0 indicating that the set value has been determined. Even if the setting value is determined, the monitor LED continues to light up because the setting key switch 281 remains on. Although the speaker (272, 277) outputs a voice such as "The setting is being changed", it may be configured to output a voice such as "The setting has been changed."

In FIG. 214(5), turning the setting key inserted into the setting key switch 281 to the left turns it off. As a result, the setting change process is completed (step S1119 shown in FIG. 201), and the 7 segments of the setting value display 293 are turned off. Also, the monitor LED is turned off. The sound from the speakers (272, 277) is switched to "the door is open" warning that the front door 102 is being opened. The voice output of "the door is open" switched here corresponds to an example of the third notification. It should be noted that instead of "the door is open", a voice output such as "the setting change is completed" or "the setting change is finished" may be used. Furthermore, the effect image display device 157 starts displaying the demonstration animation, and among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R start lighting in the demonstration pattern. . The title panel lamp 164 lights in white because the setting value is a setting value other than setting b. If the game state is the first game state when the setting change process is completed, the main control unit 300 transmits the first notification command to the first sub-control unit 400 . On the sub-controller side (first sub-controller 400 and second sub-controller 500), notification control (effect control) is executed based on this first notification command. As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the first character display such as "Please confirm" as an alert notification.

In FIG. 214 (6), the front door 102 is closed while the game state is the first game state, and the detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the open sensor 294 (switched to the L level close detection signal). ). The closing operation of the front door 102 in FIG. 214(6) corresponds to an example of a certain operation. When the detection signal from the open sensor 294 switches to the L-level closed detection signal, the main control unit 300 transmits a door close command to the first sub-control unit 400 . In the first sub-control unit 400, when the door closing command is transmitted, based on the fact that the first notification command is received first, the speaker (272, 277) outputs an alert notification " Please confirm." is output. Note that the effect image display device 157 continues to display the demonstration animation and also continues to display the first display.

In FIG. 214(7), the front door 102 is opened, and all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting in the door open pattern. Further, in the effect image display device 157, the display of the demonstration animation is continued, and since the game state remains the first game state, the first display such as "Please confirm" is also continuously displayed. However, the sound from the speakers (272, 277) returns to the warning sound "the door is open". That is, the output of the first sound is started when the front door 102 is closed and ended when the front door 102 is opened. In many cases, the game parlor clerk already notices that the first game state remains due to the output of the first voice and the first display at the timing of FIG. To avoid this, the output of the first voice is terminated. It should be noted that the process may end when the front door 102 is opened two or more predetermined times. However, it may be necessary to open the front door 102 even during the game due to a hopper error or ball clogging, etc., so if the predetermined number of times is two or more, the surrounding players may find it annoying. There is

In FIG. 214(8), the front door 102 is closed again while the game state is the first game state, and the detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the open sensor 294 (the L level close detection signal is switch). From the speakers (272, 277), a voice saying "The door is closed" is output, and repeated alerting notification is not executed. However, the effect image display device 157 continues to display the first display such as "Please confirm" along with the display of the demonstration animation. Of the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R restart demo pattern lighting, and the title panel lamp 164 restarts white lighting. .

In FIG. 214(9), medal insertion such as maintenance of medals or operation of bet buttons 130 to 132 is performed. The insertion of medals here is a bet of 2 medals. Since a player usually bets 3 coins, the 2-coin bet is often operated by a store clerk. Moreover, it is often a preparatory operation before opening the store. The speaker (272, 277) outputs a medal insertion sound, and the effect image display device 157 switches from the demonstration animation display to the normal effect background display (normal background display). However, the first display, which is an alerting notification that the player is in the first gaming state, continues to be displayed. In addition, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R start lighting in the lighting pattern for normal effect (normal pattern).

In FIG. 214 (10), the start lever 135 is operated in the state of betting two coins, and the game is started. That is, the reels 110-112 start rotating. In the effect image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed as the normal background display. Here, when the game is started, the first display may be switched to the above-described fourth notification such as "1 game during recovery". Alternatively, from the stage of FIG. 214(7), instead of or in addition to the first display, a fourth notification such as "0 games during recovery" is displayed, and when a game is started, "1 game during recovery" is displayed. may be displayed.

When the start lever 135 is operated in the state of betting two coins and an internal winning of the two-coin betting bonus is won, a notification is given indicating that the internal winning has been won. For example, an exclamation mark is displayed on the effect image display device 157 . In addition, a navigation effect is also performed to avoid winning a double bet bonus. In this navigation effect, a sound calling attention is output from the speakers (272, 277), and the effect image display device 157 displays information about the stop positions of the reels at which bonus winning can be avoided.

In FIG. 214(11), up to the third stop operation is performed. Here, the first operation of the start lever 135 obtains the two-bet bonus internal winning state, and the stop operation avoiding the winning of the bonus changes the game state to the second game state. On the effect image display device 157, a second character display such as "Completed" is displayed in the normal background display because the game state has shifted to the second game state. In addition, the second voice "Completed" is also output from the speakers (272, 277).

FIG. 215 summarizes the states of the relevant components when the reel is rotated before the front door 102 is closed after the setting is changed and the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed while the reel is rotating. It is a table. In FIG. 215, the steps (1) to (5), (21) to (23) and (11) are assigned reference numerals, and time elapses in the order of the reference numerals.

In FIG. 215 as well, the same items as in FIG. 214 are shown as items of constituent elements, and the item of game state is provided at the bottom (same up to FIG. 220).

Since FIGS. 215(1) to 215(5) are the same as FIGS. 214(1) to 214(5), the description of FIGS. , the setting change process is started and the setting change process ends.

In FIG. 215 (21), after the setting change process is completed, medal insertion such as maintenance of medals or operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132 is performed while the front door 102 remains open. The insertion of medals here is a bet of 2 medals. Since a player usually bets 3 coins, the 2-coin bet is often operated by a store clerk. Moreover, it is often a preparatory operation before opening the store. The speaker (272, 277) outputs the sound of inserting a medal, and the effect image display device 157 switches from the display of the demonstration animation to the background display of the normal effect (normal background display), indicating that the player is in the first game state. The first display, which is an alert notification, is continuously displayed. In addition, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start door open pattern lighting.

In FIG. 215 (22), the start lever 135 is operated in the state of betting two coins, and the game is started. That is, the reels 110-112 start rotating. In the effect image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed as the normal background display. Here, when the game is started, the first display may be switched to the above-described fourth notification such as "1 game during recovery". Alternatively, from the stage of FIG. 215 (21), instead of or in addition to the first display, a fourth notification such as "0 games during recovery" is displayed, and when the game is started, "1 game during recovery" is displayed. may be displayed. Since the front door 102 remains open, all lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) continue to light up in the door open pattern.

In FIG. 215 (23), the front door 102 is closed while the game state is the first game state while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, and the detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the open sensor 294 ( switch to an L-level closed detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 here also corresponds to an example of a certain operation. When the detection signal from the open sensor 294 switches to an L-level closed detection signal, the speaker (272, 277) outputs a first voice such as "Please confirm" as an alert notification. In the example in FIG. 215, the first sound is output while the reels are rotating. The first game state can be alerted by voice to the store clerk who is performing maintenance to check whether the reels 110 to 112 rotate. Among various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R start normal pattern lighting, and the title panel lamp 164 starts white lighting. Note that the effect image display device 157 continues to display the normal background and also continues to display the first display.

In FIG. 215 (11), up to the third stop operation is performed. This FIG. 215(11) is the same as FIG. 214(11), in which the 2-bet bonus internal winning state is obtained, and the game state becomes the second game state. In the effect image display device 157, a second character display such as "Completed" is displayed in the normal background display due to the transition of the game state to the second game state. In addition, the second voice "Completed" is also output from the speakers (272, 277).

FIG. 216 shows the relationship when the reel is rotated before the front door 102 is closed after the setting is changed, power failure and power recovery occur during rotation of the reel, and the front door 102 is closed while the reel is rotating after power recovery. It is a table summarizing the states of the components that In FIG. 216, the steps (1) to (5), (21), (22) and (25) to (27) are assigned to the respective stages, and time elapses in the order of this reference. .

Since FIGS. 216(1) to 216(5) are the same as FIGS. 214(1) to 214(5), the description of FIGS. , the setting change process is started and the setting change process ends.

216 (21) and (22) are the same as FIGS. 214 (21) and (22), the description of FIGS. 214 (21) and (22) is used, and the description here is Although omitted, the game is started with a two-coin bet.

In FIG. 216(25), the power supply is interrupted while the game is being played (while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating) in a two-coin bet state, resulting in the same state as in FIG. 216(1). However, necessary information is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 by the power-off processing in step S221 shown in FIG.

Next, in FIG. 216 (26), the power is restored, and the state of the reels 110 to 112 is restored to the state immediately before the power interruption while the two-coin bet state is maintained. That is, if there is a reel that has already stopped rotating immediately before the power failure, that reel remains stopped, and the reel that was rotating immediately before the power failure starts rotating. The effect image display device 157 returns to the state where the first display is displayed in the normal background display. Also, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) return to the door open pattern lighting. Also, the game state returns to the first game state.

In FIG. 216 (27), the front door 102 is closed while the game state is the first game state while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, and the detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the open sensor 294 ( switch to an L-level closed detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 here also corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and in the example in FIG. It will be. If the power is cut off and restored before the front door 102 is closed, the speaker (272, 277) does not output the first voice "Please check". This is so that the amusement arcade clerk can concentrate on checking the rotation of the reels after power is restored. Since the effect image display device 157 continues to display the first display, the first display may make the store clerk aware that the game is in the first gaming state.

FIG. 217 is a table summarizing the states of related constituent elements when the front door 102 is closed during payout after settlement of the inserted tokens before the front door 102 is closed after the setting change. In FIG. 217, the steps (1) to (5), (21), (31) and (32) are assigned reference numerals, and time elapses in the order of the reference numerals.

Since FIGS. 217(1) to 217(5) are the same as FIGS. 214(1) to 214(5), the description of FIGS. , the setting change process is started and the setting change process ends.

Since FIG. 217(21) is the same as FIG. 214(21), the description of FIG. 214(21) is used and the detailed description is omitted here, but medals are inserted.

In FIG. 217(31), the settlement button 134 is pressed in the state of betting two coins, and the hopper unit 180 starts paying out the two-coin medals and credit medals. In the effect image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed in the normal background display even after the payout is started. On the other hand, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting in the settlement pattern. In addition, "payout sound" is output from the speakers (272, 277).

217 (32), the front door 102 is closed while the game state is the first game state, and the detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the open sensor 294 (the L level close detection signal is switch). The closing operation of the front door 102 here also corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and in the example in FIG. 217, the closing operation of the front door 102 is performed during the payout process. Even during the payout process, if the closing operation of the front door 102 is performed while the game state is the first game state, the speaker (272, 277) will output a message "Please confirm" instead of the payout sound. One voice is output. In the effect image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed as the normal background display. Note that the first sound may be output together with the payout sound.

Fig. 218 shows a configuration related to the case where the power failure and power recovery occurs during payout after settling the inserted medals before closing the front door 102 after the setting change, and the front door 102 is closed during payout after power recovery. It is a table summarizing the states of elements. In FIG. 218, the steps (1) to (5), (21), (31), and (35) to (37) are assigned to each stage, and time elapses in the order of this reference. .

Since FIGS. 218(1) to 218(5) are the same as FIGS. 214(1) to 214(5), the description of FIGS. , the setting change process is started and the setting change process ends.

Since FIG. 218(21) is the same as FIG. 214(21), the description of FIG. 214(21) is used and the detailed description is omitted here, but medals are inserted.

Since FIG. 218(31) is the same as FIG. 217(31), the description of FIG. 217(31) is used and the detailed description is omitted here. is started.

In FIG. 218(35), the power is cut off during payout, resulting in the same state as in FIG. 218(1). However, necessary information is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 by the power-off processing in step S221 shown in FIG.

Next, in FIG. 218 (36), the power is restored and the payout of the remaining medals that have not yet been paid out is started. The effect image display device 157 returns to the state where the first display is displayed in the normal background display. In addition, the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) all return to the settlement pattern lighting, and the speaker (272, 277) resumes outputting the payout sound. Also, the game state returns to the first game state.

In FIG. 218 (37), the front door 102 is closed while the game state is the first game state during payout, and the detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the open sensor 294 (L level closed detection). signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 here also corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and in the example in FIG. Become. If the power is cut off and restored before the front door 102 is closed, the speaker (272, 277) does not output the first voice "Please confirm", but outputs the payout sound. continues. The reason why the first sound is not output is to allow the store clerk to concentrate on confirming the payout after power is restored. Since the effect image display device 157 continues to display the first display, the first display may make the store clerk aware that the game is in the first gaming state. Part or all of the payout sound may not be output during the payout period of the remaining medals after returning.

FIG. 219 is a table summarizing the states of related components when front door 102 is closed during setting confirmation after setting change. In FIG. 219, the steps (1) to (5), (41), and (42) are assigned reference numerals, and time elapses in the order of the reference numerals.

219(1) to 219(5) are the same as FIGS. 214(1) to 214(5), the description of FIGS. , the setting change process is started and the setting change process ends.

In FIG. 219(41), the setting key switch 281 that was turned off in FIG. 219(5) is turned on again. The state shown in FIG. 219 (41) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened and the power is turned on. In this state, the setting confirmation process is started by turning the setting key switch 281 from the OFF state to the ON state. , the set value display 293 displays "1" which is the current set value. Also, the monitor LEDs provided on the main control board and the external common terminal board 248 start to light up. On the effect image display device 157, a setting confirmation display is displayed to notify that the setting is being confirmed, and the first display is also continuously displayed. In addition, the speaker (272, 277) also outputs a voice ("Settings are being checked") to notify that the settings are being checked. The title panel lamp 164 continues to illuminate in white, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R also switch from demo pattern lighting to white lighting.

In FIG. 219 (42), the front door 102 is closed in the first game state during setting confirmation, and the detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the open sensor 294 (the L level close detection signal is switch). The closing operation of the front door 102 in FIG. 219 (42) also corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and in the example in FIG. That's what it means. In this case, the speaker (272, 277) outputs the first voice "Please check" instead of the voice "Checking settings". Note that the effect image display device 157 continues to display the setting confirmation display, and also continues to display the first display. In the explanation in FIG. 219, the character display such as "Please confirm" which is an alert notification is called the first display, but the setting confirmation display is called the first display, and the first voice is called the first display. In the example of FIG. 219, the first notification (first voice) is executed while the first display (setting confirmation display) is being displayed.

FIG. 220 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is closed after shifting to the second game state after setting change. In FIG. 220, the steps (1) to (5), (21), (22), (45) and (46) are assigned to each stage, and time elapses in the order of this reference. .

220(1) to 220(5) are the same as FIGS. 214(1) to 214(5), the description of FIGS. , the setting change process is started and the setting change process ends.

(21) and (22) in FIG. 220 are the same as (21) and (22) in FIG. Although omitted, the game is started with a two-coin bet.

In FIG. 220 (45), the third stop operation is performed while the front door 102 is open, the 2-bet bonus internal winning state is obtained, and the game state changes to the second game state. In the effect image display device 157, a second character display such as "Completed" is displayed in the normal background display due to the transition of the game state to the second game state. In addition, the second voice "Completed" is also output from the speakers (272, 277).

In FIG. 220 (46), the front door 102 is closed, and the detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the open sensor 294 (switched to an L level closed detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 in FIG. 220 (46) corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and corresponds to a certain operation in the second game state. As described above, when the detection signal from the open sensor 294 switches to the L-level closed detection signal, the main control section 300 transmits the door close command to the first sub-control section 400 . In the first sub-control unit 400, when the door closing command is transmitted, based on the fact that the first notification command is received first, the speaker (272, 277) outputs an alert notification " Please check." is output, but there is no problem even if it is output, and there is an advantage that the control processing does not become complicated. That is, the clerk understands the situation and is playing a game with a two-coin bet, and at the stage of the third stop (stage (45) in FIG. 220), the second display is displayed and the second sound is also output. Furthermore, since the above-mentioned "fourth notification" is not performed in the game to be started after this, the clerk does not have to worry about whether the transition to the second game state has occurred.

214 to 220 described above are examples in which the closing operation of the front door 102 is performed as a certain operation after the setting change processing is performed. As described above, when the setting change process is started, the RAM clear process (step S1101 shown in FIG. 201) is performed, and the game state changes to the first game state. If the setting change process is performed regardless of whether the setting is changed or not, the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed. This first sound is output even if the game state has shifted to the second game state as shown in the last example of FIG. That is, the first sound is output regardless of whether the game state is the first game state as long as the setting change process is performed. On the other hand, if the closing operation of the front door 102 is performed without performing the setting change processing, the first sound is not output, but the closing operation of the front door 102 is performed after the reset switch 291 is pressed for a long time. A first voice may be output when the voice is heard. Alternatively, the first sound may be output when the front door 102 is closed in the first game state regardless of whether or not the setting has been changed.

FIG. 221 shows the state of the related components when the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state after the setting has been confirmed once, and the inserted medals are settled. This is a summary table. In FIG. 221, each stage is assigned a code from (50) to (59), and time elapses in order of increasing numbers.

FIG. 221 shows, as items of components, the power switch 244, the front door 102, the open sensor 294, the setting key switch 281, the set value display 293, the monitor LEDs provided on the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248, respectively. , effect image display device 157, title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R (top and side lamps), upper speaker 272 and bass speaker 277 (speakers). At the bottom, an item of medal blocker 172 shown in FIG. 195 is provided. The game state is always the second game state (same up to FIG. 225).

In FIG. 221 (50), the power switch 244 is on and the front door 102 is closed. The open sensor 294 outputs an L-level closed detection signal. The setting key switch 281 is in the OFF state, and the setting value display 293 is not displayed. The monitor LEDs provided on each of the main control board and the external collective terminal board 248 are off. A demonstration animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are illuminated in demo patterns, and the title panel lamp 164 is illuminated in white. Nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277). The medal blocker 172 is retracted from the medal passage 171 , and the medals passing through the medal passage 171 are stored in the bucket 181 . Hereinafter, a state in which the medal blocker 172 is retracted from the medal passage 171 or retraction is referred to as non-operation.

In FIG. 221 (51), the front door 102 is opened and the open sensor 294 outputs an open detection signal (H level signal). All the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start to light up in the door opening pattern, and the speaker (272, 277) outputs a warning voice saying "the door is open". The effect image display device 157 continues to display the demonstration animation, and the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

In FIG. 221 (52), the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise, and the setting key switch 281 is turned on. That is, in a state where the front door 102 is opened and the power is turned on, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and the setting confirmation process is started. The set value display 293 displays "1", which is the current set value, and the monitor LED starts lighting. On the effect image display device 157, a setting confirmation display is displayed to notify that the setting is being confirmed. In addition, the speaker (272, 277) also outputs a voice ("Settings are being checked") to notify that the settings are being checked. The title panel lamp 164 switches to white lighting, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R also switch to white lighting. Further, when the setting confirmation process is started, the medal blocker 172 protrudes into the medal passage 171 , and the medals passing through the medal passage 171 are discharged from the medal payout port 155 . Hereinafter, the state in which the medal blocker 172 protrudes into the medal passage 171 or the protruding state will be referred to as operation. While the setting confirmation process is being performed, it is impossible to care for the medals from the medal slot 141. - 特許庁That is, it is not possible to insert three medals, four or more medals, or one or two medals. In addition, the operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132 is not accepted, or even if accepted, the operation is disabled. Furthermore, the operation of the start lever 135 and the settlement operation are not accepted, or are invalidated even if they are accepted.

In FIG. 221 (53), the setting key switch 281 is returned to the OFF state, and the setting confirmation processing is completed. The setting value display 293 is hidden, and the monitor LED is also turned off. The voice from the speakers (272, 277) is switched to the voice "the door is open". The effect image display device 157 starts displaying the demonstration animation, and among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R start lighting in the demonstration pattern. The title panel lamp 164 lights up in white. Medal blocker 172 is deactivated.

In FIG. 221 (54), when the front door 102 is opened, the protruding open/close piece is pushed down by hand, and the front door 102 is pseudo-closed so that the open sensor 294 cannot detect the open/close piece. As a result, the front door 102 is open, but the open sensor 294 outputs an L-level closed detection signal. There is no audio output such as "the door is open" from the speakers (272, 277).

In FIG. 221 (55), the setting key switch 281 is turned on again. However, the ON operation of the setting key switch 281 here is the ON operation in the state where the closed detection signal is output from the open sensor 294 . 221 (51), etc., the setting confirmation process is started when the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the front door 102 is open and the power is turned on. Strictly speaking, it starts when the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the open sensor 294 is outputting an open detection signal. Therefore, in FIG. 221 (55), since the open detection signal is not output, the setting confirmation process is not started, the setting value display 293 remains hidden, and the effect image display device 157 The demonstration animation continues to be displayed, and nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277). Also, the medal blocker 172 remains inactive. However, since the setting key switch 281 is turned on, the monitor LED starts lighting.

In FIG. 221 (56), medal insertion such as maintenance of medals or operation of bet buttons 130 to 132 is performed. Since the setting confirmation process is not in progress, medals can be inserted, and the speaker (272, 277) outputs a medal insertion sound. In this way, even if the setting key switch 281 is in the ON state, it may be possible to insert medals. Further, even when the setting key switch 281 is in the ON state, there are cases where bet operation, start operation, and settlement operation can be performed. In the effect image display device 157, the display of the demonstration animation is switched to the normal background display. Also, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R start lighting in a normal pattern.

In FIG. 221 (57), the hand holding down the opening/closing piece is released, the opening/closing piece protrudes, the open sensor 294 detects the opening/closing piece, and an open detection signal is output. All the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start to light up in the door opening pattern, and the speaker (272, 277) outputs a warning voice saying "the door is open". In the state of FIG. 221 (57), the setting key switch 281 is already on. In addition, the state of FIG. 221 (57) is also a state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is set. When the setting key switch 281 is already in the ON state and the number of bets of 1 or more is set, even if the open sensor 294 outputs an open detection signal, the setting confirmation process is not started, and the effect image is displayed. On the display device 157, the normal background display continues. Also, the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

In FIG. 221 (58), the payout button 134 is pressed to start the payout. All the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start to light up in the settlement pattern. In addition, "payout sound" is output from the speakers (272, 277). Also, the medal blocker 172 is activated during payout.

In FIG. 221 (59), the payout is completed. In the state of FIG. 221 (59), the setting key switch 281 is already in the ON state, the payout is completed (the bet number is not set), and the open sensor 294 outputs an open detection signal. is in a state of In this state, the setting confirmation process is started, and the setting value display 293 displays "1" which is the current setting value. A setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 . In addition, a voice such as "Setting confirmation is in progress" is also output from the speakers (272, 277). The title panel lamp 164 switches to white lighting, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R also switch to white lighting. Also, the medal blocker 172 remains active.

In the example shown in FIG. 221 described above, even when the setting key switch 281 is turned on ((55) in FIG. 221, the setting confirmation process is not started (the display during setting confirmation is displayed on the effect image display device 157). is not displayed), and the settlement operation is performed with the number of bets of 1 or more set ((58) in the same figure). ((59) in the same figure) corresponding to the example in which the confirmation display is displayed.

FIG. 222 summarizes the states of related components when the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state after the setting has been confirmed once, and the game has been played once. It is a table. In FIG. 222, the steps (50) to (57), (61) and (62) are assigned reference numerals, and time elapses in the order of the reference numerals.

In FIG. 222 as well, the same items as in FIG. 223 are shown as items of constituent elements (same up to FIG. 225).

(50) to (57) in FIG. 222 are the same as (50) to (57) in FIG. 221, so the description of (50) to (57) in FIG. After confirming the settings, the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, medals are inserted, and then an open detection signal is output.

In FIG. 222 (61), the start lever 135 is operated to start the game. That is, the reels 110-112 start rotating. The top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R start normal pattern lighting. The title panel lamp 164 lights up in white. Medal blocker 172 is activated.

In FIG. 222 (62), up to the third stop operation is performed. In the state of FIG. 222 (62), the setting key switch 281 has already been turned on, the game is finished (the bet number is not set), and the open sensor 294 outputs an open detection signal. is in a state of In this state, the setting confirmation process is started, and the setting value display 293 displays "1" which is the current setting value. A setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 . In addition, a voice such as "Setting confirmation is in progress" is also output from the speakers (272, 277). The title panel lamp 164 switches to white lighting, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R also switch to white lighting. Also, the medal blocker 172 remains active.

In the example shown in FIG. 222 described above, even when the setting key switch 281 is turned on ((55) in FIG. 222), the setting confirmation process is not started (the effect image display device 157 displays during setting confirmation). is not displayed), and the game is started ((61) in the same figure), and when the game is finished, the setting confirmation process is started (indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the effect image display device 157) (( 62)) corresponds to the example.

221 and 222, the number of bets is set when the setting key switch 281 is already in the ON state and the open sensor 294 is outputting the open detection signal. When the setting confirmation process is started, a setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 .

FIG. 223 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the setting value is displayed on the setting value display 293 even when the setting key switch 281 is in the OFF state. In FIG. 223, the steps (1) to (3) and (71) to (78) are assigned reference numerals, and time elapses in the order of the reference numerals.

Since FIGS. 223(1) to 223(3) are the same as FIGS. 214(1) to 214(3), the description of FIGS. , the setting change process has started.

In FIG. 223 (71), the power switch 244 is turned off during the setting change process. The state of each component is the same as the state in FIG. 223(1). When the power switch 244 is turned off, necessary information is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 by the power-off processing in step S221 shown in FIG.

In FIG. 223 (72), the setting key switch 281 is also turned off while the power switch 244 remains off, and the power switch 244 is turned on in the following figure (73). When the power switch 244 is turned on, the main controller initial setting process shown in FIG. 200 is started. First, the initial setting at startup (step S1001) restores the state immediately before the power failure. That is, even if the setting key switch 281 has been turned off, the fact that the setting key switch 281 was on just before the power was cut off is stored, and the set value display 293 displays the setting just before the power cut off. A value of "1" is displayed. In addition, the sub-controller side (400, 500) also returns the backed-up information when the power is cut off, and the effect image display device 157 displays the setting confirmation display, and the speaker (272, 277) says "Setting confirmation in progress". ” is output. All the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting. Also, the medal blocker 172 is inactive.

On the side of the sub-control unit (400, 500), in a game machine that does not store a backup when the power is cut off, the state immediately before the power cut-off is being changed. , a setting changing command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, and the sub-control unit side (400, 500) displays a setting checking display based on this setting changing command. is displayed, and a voice such as "Checking settings" is output.

As shown in the main control unit main process in FIG. 198, the main control unit initial setting process (setting change process (step S1013)) in FIG. 200 is executed only when power is turned on. In this example, since the setting key switch 281 was turned off before the power was turned on, the determination in step S1005 is No, and the setting change process (step S1013) cannot be executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 223 (74), the power switch 244 is turned off once, then the setting key switch 281 is turned on (FIG. 223 (75)), and the power switch 244 is turned on again (FIG. 223 (75)). 223(76)). By doing so, the setting change process (step S1013) is started. In FIG. 223 (76), the set value display 293 displays the set value "1", and the monitor LED starts lighting. In addition, a setting changing display is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and a voice saying "setting is being changed" is output from the speakers (272, 277). All the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting. Also, the medal blocker 172 is inactive.

In FIG. 223 (77), the start lever 135 is operated, the set value is determined (step S1115 shown in FIG. 201), and the set value display 293 displays the number 0 indicating that the set value has been determined. Even if the setting value is determined, the monitor LED continues to light up because the setting key switch 281 remains on. Although the speaker (272, 277) outputs a voice such as "The setting is being changed", it may be configured to output a voice such as "The setting has been changed." Note that the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

In FIG. 223 (78), the setting key switch 281 is turned off. As a result, the setting change process ends (step S1119 shown in FIG. 201), and the setting value display 293 is hidden. Also, the monitor LED is turned off. The sound from the speakers (272, 277) is switched to "the door is open" warning that the front door 102 is being opened. It should be noted that instead of "the door is open", a voice output such as "the setting change is completed" or "the setting change is finished" may be used. Furthermore, the effect image display device 157 starts displaying the demonstration animation, and among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R start lighting in the demonstration pattern. . The title panel lamp 164 lights in white because the setting value is a setting value other than setting b. Note that the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

FIG. 224 shows a case where after the setting confirmation is performed once, medals are inserted with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and the inserted medals are settled. 4 is a table summarizing the states of related components; In FIG. 224, the steps (50) to (54), (81), (82), (57) to (59) are assigned to the respective stages, and time elapses in the order of this reference. .

Since (50) to (54) in FIG. 224 are the same as (50) to (54) in FIG. 221, the description of (50) to (54) in FIG. , the front door 102 is pseudo-closed after one confirmation of the setting.

In FIG. 224 (81), when the front door 102 is in a pseudo-closed state, token insertion such as handling of tokens or operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132 is performed. Since the setting confirmation process is not in progress, medals can be inserted, and the speaker (272, 277) outputs a medal insertion sound. In the effect image display device 157, the display of the demonstration animation is switched to the normal background display. Also, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R start lighting in a normal pattern. Also, the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

After the medals have been inserted, in FIG. 224 (82), the setting key switch 281 is turned on again. However, the ON operation of the setting key switch 281 here is the ON operation in the state where the closed detection signal is output from the open sensor 294, the setting confirmation process is not started, and the setting value display 293 is turned off. The effect image display device 157 continues to display the normal background, and nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277). Also, the medal blocker 172 remains inactive. However, since the setting key switch 281 is turned on, the monitor LED starts lighting.

(57) to (59) in FIG. 224 are the same as (57) to (59) in FIG. 221, so the description of (57) to (59) in FIG. , the false closing of the front door 102 ends, and the open sensor 294 outputs an open detection signal. After that, the settlement operation is performed, the payout is completed, and the setting confirmation process is started.

In the example shown in FIG. 224 described above, even when the setting key switch 281 is turned on ((82) in FIG. 224), the setting confirmation process is not started when the number of bets is set to 1 or more. (The setting confirmation display is not displayed on the effect image display device 157.) A settlement operation is performed in a state where the number of bets of 1 or more is set ((58) in the same figure). This corresponds to an example in which the process is started (indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the effect image display device 157) ((59) in the same figure).

FIG. 225 shows the configuration elements related to the case where the setting key switch 281 is turned on after medals are inserted with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state after the setting has been confirmed once, and the game is played. is a table summarizing the states of In FIG. 225, the steps (50) to (54), (81), (82), (57), (61), and (62) are assigned to each stage, and the time It will pass.

Since (50) to (54) in FIG. 225 are the same as (50) to (54) in FIG. 221, the description of (50) to (54) in FIG. , the front door 102 is pseudo-closed after one confirmation of the setting.

225 (81) and (82) are the same as FIGS. 224 (81) and (82), so the explanations of FIGS. Although omitted, the setting key switch 281 is turned on after medals are inserted. That is, the setting key switch 281 is turned on when the number of bets of 1 or more is set.

Since FIG. 225 (57) is the same as FIG. 221 (57), the description of FIG. Become.

225 (61) and (62) are the same as FIG. 222 (61) and (62), so the explanation of FIG. Although omitted, the start lever 135 is operated to start a game, and when the game ends after the third stop operation is performed, the setting confirmation process is started.

The example in FIG. 225 described above is an example in which, when the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the bet number of 1 or more is set, the game can be continued with the set bet number. Equivalent to. That is, this corresponds to an example in which the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted and the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is also accepted. The setting of the bet number is given priority, and the game is continued with the bet number.

In the example of FIG. 225, even when the setting key switch 281 is turned on ((82) in FIG. 225), the setting confirmation process is not started when the number of bets is set to 1 or more ( The setting confirmation display is not displayed on the effect image display device 157), the game is started with the set number of bets ((61) in the figure), and when the third stop operation is performed, the setting confirmation process is performed. This corresponds to an example in which a setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 ((62) in the same figure).

224 and 225, when the number of bets of 1 or more is set, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on, the setting confirmation process is not started. The setting confirmation display is not displayed on the image display device 157, and a state different from the state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is set (the state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is not set, more specifically, payout processing is completed or the game is finished), the setting confirmation process is started and a setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 . In addition, when the bet number of 1 or more is set, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on, the set value is not displayed on the set value display 293, and the bet number of 1 or more is set. When a state different from the state in which the bet number is set (a state in which the bet number of 1 or more is not set, more specifically, a state in which the payout process has been completed or a state in which the game has ended) value is displayed.

224(57) and FIG. 225(57), when the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the number of bets of 1 or more is set (see FIG. 224). (82), which corresponds to the timing after (82) in FIG. In FIGS. 224(57) and 225(57), while the number of bets of 1 or more is set, the opening sensor 294 indicates that the front door 102 has opened by releasing the hand holding down the opening/closing piece. Although an operation for detection is performed, the setting confirmation process is not started, and the effect image display device 157 does not display the setting confirmation in progress display.

The matters described above with reference to FIGS. 204 to 225 are also applicable to the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. FIG. 226 is a back view of a pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied, viewed from the back side.

A ball tank 150P for temporarily storing game balls is provided in the upper rear portion of the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. A tank rail 154P is provided for guiding the falling ball through a communication hole formed in the bottom of 150P to a dispensing device 152P located on the right side of the back surface.

The payout device 152P is made of a cylindrical member, and has therein a payout motor, a sprocket and a payout sensor (not shown). The dispensing device 152P is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154P when installed at a predetermined position.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, temporarily retains game balls that have flowed down into the payout device 152P through the tank rail 154P, and rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Thus, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one to the lower side of the payout device 152P. In other words, the payout device 152P is a type of ball feeding device that imparts driving force to game balls to convey the game balls.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball has passed, either a high or low signal, and when the game ball has not passed Either a high or low signal is output to a payout control unit (not shown). A game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail and reach an upper tray arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100P, and the pachinko machine 100P satisfies a prescribed condition for giving. Based on this, the amount of game value (game balls) corresponding to the granting condition is awarded (paid out) to the player by this configuration.

On the left side of the payout device 152P in the drawing, there is a main board case 158P that houses a main board 156P that constitutes a main control section that performs overall game control processing. A first sub-board case 162P that houses a first sub-board 160P that constitutes a first sub-controller that performs a second sub-board case 166P that houses a second sub-board 164P; a payout board 170P that constitutes a payout control unit that performs control processing relating to the payout of game balls; , a launch board case 176P that houses a launch board 174P that constitutes a launch control section that performs control processing related to launching game balls, and a power supply control section that supplies power to various electric game machines. A power supply board case 184P housing a power supply board 182P having a power switch 178P for turning on/off the power by operation of a game clerk and a RAM clear switch 180P for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when operated when the power is turned on. , and a CR interface section 186P for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section and the card unit.

Further, in this embodiment, a setting change key 192P, a setting change button 194P, and a character ratio/setting display 196P are provided on the main substrate 156P. In this pachinko machine 100P as well, by opening the main body 104, turning on the setting change key 192P, and then turning on the power switch 178P, at least one of a plurality of set values with different jackpot probabilities can be set. Setting change processing is started. In the setting change process, the current setting value is displayed on the character ratio/setting display 196P, and the clerk can change the setting value by pressing the setting change button 194P while confirming this. Also, by opening the main body 104, turning on the power switch 178P, and then turning on the setting change key 192P, the setting confirmation process is started, and the current setting value is displayed on the character ratio/setting display 196P. Is displayed. The setting change process may be started when the setting change key 192P is operated under the condition that the RAM clear switch 180P is pressed when the power is turned on, or even if the RAM clear switch 180P is not pressed when the power is turned on. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the setting can be changed when the setting change key 192P is operated when the power is turned on.

The pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 226 has settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, and b, which are the same as the setting values of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. are displayed on the character ratio/setting display 196P in the same display order as . Also, setting b is the most unfavorable set value for the player, and the larger the number, the more advantageous the set value for the player.

The character item ratio/setting display 196P is a 7-segment LED board that is mounted on the main board 156P and arranged inside the main board case 158P, and is attached in a manner that can be visually recognized by the store clerk. Note that the role product ratio/setting display device 196P may be provided on the game board 200, for example, so that it can be visually recognized by the player.

In the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 226, the power switch 178P corresponds to the power switch 244, the main body that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame corresponds to the front door 102, and detects that the main body has opened (not shown). The body open sensor corresponds to the open sensor 294, the setting change key 192P corresponds to the setting key switch 281, and the character ratio/setting display 196P corresponds to the set value display 293. Also, the main substrate 156P of the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 226 and the external centralized terminal board (not shown) are each provided with a monitor LED that lights up when the setting change key 192P is turned on. In addition, a liquid crystal display device and speakers used for various effects are also provided. Further, the game board is provided with a game board lamp, and the game frame is provided with a game frame lamp, and these lamps correspond to various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R).

According to the above description,
"A first gaming state [for example, a bet-2-bonus non-internal winning state or setting b is set] and a second gaming state [e.g., a bet-2-bonus internal winning state or setting 1 is set. A game state control means [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control means 300] capable of executing control to shift to one game state out of a plurality of game states including the state],
A first notification [e.g., the first voice of "Please confirm" or turn off of the title panel lamp 164] with an executable notification means [e.g., the speaker (272, 277) or the title panel lamp 164] ,
A game machine comprising
The notification means may execute the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation of closing the front door 102 or an operation of turning off the setting key switch 281] is performed in the first game state. is a means,
The first game state is a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the second game state,
A playground characterized by: 』
explained.

It is possible to alert the person who has performed the certain operation that the state of the gaming machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player by calling attention to it.

The first gaming state is a state in which the first number is betted and the bonus is not won, and the second gaming state is the first number being betted and the bonus is not won. It may also refer to an internally elected state in which a lottery has been elected (the same shall apply hereinafter). Alternatively, the first gaming state is an internal winning state in which the first number is betted and the bonus is won, and the second gaming state is a second gaming state that is greater than the first number. It may also be an internal winning state in which a bonus is won by betting the number of coins (the same shall apply hereinafter).

The second game state is a normal game state or an initial setting game state, and the first game state is a state more disadvantageous to the player than the second game state [for example, penalty bonus state, setting b is set], and the first gaming state may be, for example, a non-advantageous section state, a bonus non-matching state, a state in which points or items are not acquired, etc. (same below).

A door is provided, and the certain operation may be an operation that can be performed when the door is open, or an operation to close the door ( The same applies below).

The first notification is a notification suggesting the first gaming state or a notification to make the user aware of the first gaming state [for example, a notification saying "I am in the first gaming state"]. Alternatively, it may be an alert notification that does not specify an alert target [for example, a notification such as "Please check"] (the same applies below).

The notification means includes first notification means [for example, speakers (272, 277)], second notification means [for example, title panel lamp 164], and third notification means [for example, effect image display device 157] (the same applies hereinafter).

Also, the game state when the setting b is set may be the first game state, and in that case, the game mode may change during the game state with RT=game mode (the same applies below ).

Furthermore, instead of the game state control means, "game control means for controlling a game based on the setting of the first set value and a game based on the setting of the second set value ”, and the game (first game) executed based on the setting of the first setting value is executed based on the setting of the second setting value It may be a game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the played game (second game) (the same applies below). Further, the first game state can be read as a state in which the first set value is set, and the second game state can be read as a state in which the second set value is set (hereinafter (same for

Also, in place of the game state control means, "a game in an internal winning state in which a certain hand is internally won as a result of a lottery with a predetermined number of bets, and a game in a non-internal winning state that is not in the internal winning state" and the non-internal winning state may be more disadvantageous to the player than the internal winning state (same below). Also, the first game state can be read as the non-internally elected state, and the second game state can be read as the internally elected state (same below).

Also, according to the above description,
``Move to one of a plurality of game states including a first game state [e.g., 2 bet bonus non-internal winning state] and a second game state [e.g., 2 bet bonus internal winning state] game state control means [for example, CPU 304 of main control means 300] capable of executing control to
annunciation means [e.g., speaker (272, 277)] capable of performing a first annunciation [e.g., first voice of "Please confirm"];
a reel [e.g., reels 110-112];
A game machine comprising
The notification means is means for executing the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102] is performed in the first game state,
The first game state is a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the second game state,
The notification means is means that may execute the first notification during rotation of the reel [for example, FIG. 215 (23)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

It is possible to alert the person who has performed the certain operation that the state of the gaming machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player by calling attention to it. In addition, even while the clerk of the amusement arcade is performing a maintenance action to check whether the reels rotate, the clerk's attention can be called.

The reel can start rotating before the certain operation is performed, and the notification means issues the first notification when the certain operation is performed while the reel is rotating. It may be any means that may be implemented.

Also, according to the above description,
``Move to one of a plurality of game states including a first game state [e.g., 2 bet bonus non-internal winning state] and a second game state [e.g., 2 bet bonus internal winning state] game state control means [for example, CPU 304 of main control means 300] capable of executing control to
annunciation means [e.g., speaker (272, 277)] capable of performing a first annunciation [e.g., first voice of "Please confirm"];
a reel [e.g., reels 110-112];
A game machine comprising
The notification means is means for executing the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102] is performed in the first game state,
The first game state is a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the second game state,
The reel can start rotating before the certain operation is performed [for example, FIG. 215 (22), FIG. 216 (22)],
The notifying means may execute the first notifying when the certain operation is performed while the reel is rotating [for example, FIG. 215 (23)],
In the case where power failure and power recovery occurs while the reel is rotating and before the certain operation is performed [for example, (25) to (26) in FIG. is a means for not executing the first notification even if the certain operation is performed during the remaining rotation of the [for example, FIG. 216 (27)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

It is possible to alert the person who has performed the certain operation that the state of the gaming machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player by calling attention to it. In addition, even while the clerk of the amusement arcade is performing a maintenance action to check whether the reels rotate, the clerk's attention can be called. On the other hand, after a power failure/recovery occurs, it is possible to concentrate on confirmation work after power is restored without executing the first notification.

Also, according to the above description,
``Move to one of a plurality of game states including a first game state [e.g., 2 bet bonus non-internal winning state] and a second game state [e.g., 2 bet bonus internal winning state] game state control means [for example, CPU 304 of main control means 300] capable of executing control to
annunciation means [e.g., speaker (272, 277)] capable of performing a first annunciation [e.g., first voice of "Please confirm"];
a dispensing means [e.g., hopper unit 180];
A game machine comprising
The notification means is means for executing the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102] is performed in the first game state,
The first game state is a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the second game state,
The notification means is a means that may execute the first notification during the period of payout processing in the payout means [for example, FIG. 217 (32)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

It is possible to alert the person who has performed the certain operation that the state of the gaming machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player by calling attention to it. In addition, even while a game parlor clerk is performing a maintenance action to check whether the payout process is normally performed, the clerk's attention can be called.

The payout means is means capable of starting the payout process before the certain operation is performed. It may be means that may execute the first notification.

The payout process may be a process started by a checkout operation after inserting medals, or may be a process performed based on the result of a reel stop operation after a start operation after inserting medals.

Also, according to the above description,
``Move to one of a plurality of game states including a first game state [e.g., 2 bet bonus non-internal winning state] and a second game state [e.g., 2 bet bonus internal winning state] game state control means [for example, CPU 304 of main control means 300] capable of executing control to
annunciation means [e.g., speaker (272, 277)] capable of performing a first annunciation [e.g., first voice of "Please confirm"];
a dispensing means [e.g., hopper unit 180];
A game machine comprising
The notification means is means for executing the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102] is performed in the first game state,
The first game state is a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the second game state,
The payout means is means capable of starting payout processing before the certain operation is performed [for example, FIG. 217 (31) or FIG. 218 (31)],
The notification means is means that may execute the first notification during the period of the payout process [for example, FIG. 217 (32)],
When power failure and power recovery occurs during the period of the payout process and before the certain operation is performed [for example, (35) to (36) in FIG. Means that does not execute the first notification even if the certain operation is performed during the remaining period of the process [for example, FIG. 218 (37)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

It is possible to alert the person who has performed the certain operation that the state of the gaming machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player by calling attention to it. In addition, even while a game parlor clerk is performing a maintenance action to check whether the payout process is normally performed, the clerk's attention can be called. On the other hand, after a power failure/recovery occurs, it is possible to concentrate on confirmation work after power is restored without executing the first notification.

Also, according to the above description,
``Move to one of a plurality of game states including a first game state [e.g., 2 bet bonus non-internal winning state] and a second game state [e.g., 2 bet bonus internal winning state] game state control means [for example, CPU 304 of main control means 300] capable of executing control to
annunciation means [e.g., speaker (272, 277)] capable of performing a first annunciation [e.g., first voice of "Please confirm"];
Display means [for example, effect image display device 157];
A game machine comprising
The notification means is means for executing the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102] is performed in the first game state,
The first game state is a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the second game state,
The notification means may execute the first notification while the display means is displaying the first display [for example, character display of "Please confirm"] [for example, FIG. 214 ( 6)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

It is possible to alert the person who has performed the certain operation that the state of the gaming machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player by calling attention to it. Further, even while the store clerk is performing maintenance to check whether the display on the display means is normally performed, the clerk's attention can be called.

The display means is means capable of starting display of the first display before the certain operation is performed, and the notification means performs the certain operation while the first display is being displayed. may be means that may execute the first notification when is performed.

again,
"The gaming state control means, when a certain condition [for example, the condition that a bonus combination is won with a predetermined number of bets and the bonus combination is not won] is established, the game state is changed from the first game state to the second game state." A means for executing control to transition to a game state,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The first notification serves as a warning to perform the initial setting.

again,
"The certain condition is a condition including one or more games being played [for example, one or more games must be played to win a bonus combination],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

When the store clerk runs the game before the store opens, the player can start playing from the second game state.

The certain condition is a condition including the execution of one or a plurality of games with a predetermined number of bets and the winning of a certain hand. In other words, the certain condition may be a condition that may be met by winning a certain hand after playing a game with a predetermined number of bets. The condition may be established by playing a game in the state and winning a certain combination but not winning the certain combination. What has been described here also applies to the following.

again,
"The notifying means is a means that does not execute the first notifying when the certain operation is performed for a predetermined number of times [for example, the second time] [for example, FIG. 214 (8)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

In many cases, the store clerk has already noticed the certain operation after the predetermined time (for example, the second time), so redundant notification can be avoided.

again,
``The notification means is a means for executing a second notification [for example, a second voice of 'Completed]'] when the first game state transitions to the second game state.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

By the second notification, it can be confirmed that the game state disadvantageous to the player has been resolved.

The second notification is a notification suggesting that the second game state has been entered or a notification suggesting that the game state is in the second game state [for example, a notification such as "second game state"]. Alternatively, it may be an alert notification that does not specify an alert target [for example, a notification such as "Completed" or "Returned"] (the same applies below).

again,
"A setting change that changes a setting value that has been set to a new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] with different degrees of advantage for the player. Setting change means for performing processing [for example, CPU 304 of main control unit 300 for executing setting change processing shown in FIG. 201],
When the certain operation is performed after the setting change process [for example, the process including operating the power switch 244, the setting key switch 281, etc., which cannot be operated unless the front door 102 is opened] is completed. is an operation with
When the notification means executes the first notification when the certain operation is performed in the first game state after the setting change process is started, when the game state is the first game state. is a means [for example, FIG. 214(6)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Since the player is still at a disadvantage in the first game state even though the setting change processing is started and the adjustment of the player's advantage degree is started, the notification means executes the first notification. , the first game state can be noticed by the person who performs the setting change.

The setting change process may be a process that cannot be started unless the door is opened (the same applies hereinafter).

again,
``The notifying means is means capable of executing a third notification after the setting change process is started [for example, FIG. 214 (3)] and before the certain operation is performed [for example FIG. 214 (5)],
The third notification is a notification [e.g., a voice notification saying "The door is open" or "The setting has been changed"] that is executed when the process for changing the setting is completed.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The notification means may be means for executing the first notification when the certain operation is performed after executing the second notification (the same applies below).

Even if the third notification is a notification that the setting change processing has ended or a notification that suggests that the setting change processing has ended [for example, a notification such as "The setting change has been completed"] Alternatively, it may be a notification about the state of the gaming machine [for example, a notification such as "the door is open"] (same applies below).

Also, according to the above description,
``Setting confirmation means for performing a setting confirmation process for confirming one setting value set from among a plurality of types of setting values [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] with different degrees of advantage for the player [ For example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300],
an operating means [for example, a setting key switch 281] operated when confirming the setting;
A game machine comprising
The operation means is a means that may be operated in the first state,
The first state is a state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is set [for example, the state in FIG.
When the operation means is operated in the first state [for example, FIG. 225 (82)], the bet number set in the first state [for example, number of bets] can be continued [for example, (61) to (62) in FIG. 225],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Since the game is not interrupted by the operation of the operating means, it is possible to make the illegal player who has illegally operated the operating means let his guard down and expose the illegal player.

Even if the game is continued when the operation means is operated in the first state, and the next game is not started after the game is finished unless the setting confirmation process is finished. good.

If the operation means is operated while medals have not been inserted, subsequent bet operations may not be accepted. That is, the game may not be started when the operation means is operated and the setting confirmation process is performed in a state where no betting operation is performed.

The case where the operation means has been operated means the case where the setting confirmation process has not been executed.

A setting change means for performing a setting change process for changing a setting value that has been set so far to a new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values with different degrees of advantage for a player, wherein the operation means It may be means that is also operated when changing settings (the same shall apply hereinafter).

Also, according to the above description,
``Setting confirmation means for performing a setting confirmation process for confirming one setting value set from among a plurality of types of setting values [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] with different degrees of advantage for the player [ For example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300],
an operating means [for example, a setting key switch 281] operated when confirming the setting;
Display means [for example, effect image display device 157];
A game machine comprising
The operation means is a means that may be operated in the first state,
The first state is a state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is set [for example, the state in FIG.
When the operation means is operated in the first state [for example, FIG. 225 (82)], the bet number set in the first state [for example, number of bets] can be continued [for example, (61) to (62) in FIG. 225],
The display means may display a first display [for example, "setting confirmation display"] when the operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 225 (52)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Since the game is not interrupted by the operation of the operating means, it is possible to make the illegal player who has illegally operated the operating means let his guard down and expose the illegal player. That is, after the operation means is operated, the game parlor clerk can confirm the first display by the display means, and the first display can detect the fraudulent act, and the fraudulent person can be exposed. Sometimes.

The first display may be a display that is displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display that is displayed while the setting confirmation process is being executed. The setting confirmation process is a process that may be started when the operating means (for example, the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is turned on. The setting confirmation means confirmation of the setting value currently set. During the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting value, and the display means displays the first display ( For example, a setting confirmation display) is displayed.

A door [for example, the front door 102] and a sensor [for example, an open sensor 294] that detects that the door is opened, and the display means detects that the sensor has opened the door. means for displaying the first display [for example, FIG. 221 (52)] when the operation means is operated while the sensor is not detecting, and the operation means is operated while the sensor is not detecting may be means for not displaying the first display [for example, FIG. 221 (55)] when the is performed.

Also, according to the above description,
``Setting confirmation means for performing a setting confirmation process for confirming one setting value set from among a plurality of types of setting values [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] with different degrees of advantage for the player [ For example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300],
an operating means [for example, a setting key switch 281] operated when confirming the setting;
Display means [for example, effect image display device 157];
A game machine comprising
The operation means is a means that may be operated in the first state,
The first state is a state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is set [for example, the state in FIG.
When the operation means is operated in the first state [for example, FIG. 225 (82)], the bet number set in the first state [for example, number of bets] can be continued [for example, (61) to (62) in FIG. 225],
When the operation means is operated, the display means may display a first display [e.g., "setting confirmation in progress display] [e.g., FIG. 225 (52)],
The display means does not display the first display even when the operation means is operated [eg, FIG. 224 (82)], and the settlement operation is performed in the first state [eg, FIG. 224 (58)] When the payout process is completed, the first display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 224 (59)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Since the game is not interrupted by the operation of the operating means, it is possible to make the illegal player who has illegally operated the operating means let his guard down and expose the illegal player. That is, after the operation means is operated, the game parlor clerk can confirm the first display by the display means, and the first display can detect the fraudulent act, and the fraudulent person can be exposed. Sometimes. In addition, even if the operation means is operated, the first display may not be displayed. It may be possible to discover the act and expose the fraudulent person.

A door [for example, the front door 102] and a sensor [for example, an open sensor 294] for detecting that the door is opened are provided, and the display means indicates that the sensor indicates that the door is open. 221 (52)] means for displaying a first display [e.g., setting confirmation display] when the operation means is operated while the sensor is detecting the non- It may be a means that does not display the first display [for example, FIG. 221 (55)] when the operation means is operated in the state of detection.

again,
"Medal slot [for example, medal slot 141],
a first passageway;
a second passageway [e.g., reservoir passageway 173];
a medal blocker [for example, a medal blocker 172] that sorts the medals inserted from the medal slot into one of the first passage and the second passage;
with
The first passage is a medal return passage [for example, return passage 266];
When the operation means is operated, the medal blocker may distribute the medals inserted from the medal slot to the first path [for example, FIG. 221 (52)]. ,
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

After operating the operating means, the game store clerk can check how the medals have passed. In addition, since the game cannot be started after the operation means is operated, the store clerk can calmly change the settings without starting the game by mistake.

The medal return path is a path leading to a medal ejection port [for example, medal ejection port 155].

The second path is a medal storage path [for example, the storage path 173], and medals passing through the medal storage path are stored in a bucket (storage tank) [for example, the bucket 181].

again,
"Equipped with a door [e.g., front door 102],
The operation means is means that can be operated when the door is in the open state [for example, the setting key switch 281 shown in FIG. 194(a)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

It is possible to prohibit the operation of the operating means by the player.

again,
``The operation means can be operated even in the second state [for example, the pseudo-closed state of the front door 102 shown in FIG. is a means that may be
The medal blocker sorts the medals inserted from the medal slot into the second passage when the operation means is operated in the second state [for example, FIG. 55)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Maintenance of the gaming machine in the second state is not hindered.

A sensor [for example, an open sensor 294] is provided to detect that the door is open, the operation means is means that becomes operable by opening the door, and the second state is the It may also mean that the sensor is in a non-detection state.

Further, the medal blocker may sort the medals inserted from the medal slot into the second path when the operation means is operated in the first state. For example, FIG. 221(55)].

again,
``Equipped with setting value display means [for example, setting value display 293] capable of displaying the setting value,
The setting value display means may not display the setting value even if the operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 221 (55)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Maintenance of the gaming machine in the second state is not hindered.

The set value display means may not display the set value in the second state even if the operation means is operated.

again,
``A gaming machine characterized by comprising light-emitting means capable of emitting light when the operating means is operated [for example, a monitor LED provided on each of the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248]. 』
also explained.

It can be confirmed by the light emitted from the light emitting means that the operating means is being operated normally. In particular, when the set value display means does not display the set value even if the operation means is operated, it is useful for the light emitting means to emit light.

again,
"A transmitting means [for example, an external centralized terminal board 248] capable of transmitting a signal [for example, a setting key switch ON signal] to the outside [for example, a hall computer] when the operation means is operated is provided. Characteristic playground. 』
also explained.

It is possible to confirm from the outside that the operation means is being operated normally. In particular, when the setting value display means does not display the setting value even if the operation means is operated, it is useful to be able to confirm the setting value from the outside.

Also, according to the above description,
`` A gaming machine equipped with display means [for example, effect image display device 157] capable of displaying a first display [for example, 'setting confirmation display]',
224 (81) or FIG. 225 (81) in which medals have been cleaned or the bet buttons 130 to 132 have been operated]. Means for not displaying the first display when [for example, an operation to turn on the setting key switch 281] is performed (hereinafter referred to as "first case") [for example, FIG. 82) or FIG. 225 (82)],
After the first case, if a state different from the first state [e.g., completion of payout by settlement operation or end of the game with the bet amount set in the first state], the display means the first display is displayed [e.g., FIG. 224(59) or FIG. 225(62)];
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Since the first display is not displayed by the first operation during the maintenance work by the store clerk, the maintenance work that has been performed before the first operation can be continued with priority. In addition, when it is desired to perform maintenance for confirming whether the first display is displayed on the display means, the state may be shifted to a state different from the first state, and the maintenance can be proceeded step by step. can be done.

The first operation is the operation of the operation means operated when confirming the setting. The first state is a state in which the bet number of 1 or more is set, and the state different from the first state is the end of the game with the bet number set in the first state. or the state in which the settlement operation is performed in the first state and the payout process is completed.

The first display may be a display that is displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display that is displayed while the setting confirmation process is being executed. The setting confirmation process is a process that may be started when the operating means (for example, the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is turned on. The setting confirmation means confirmation of the setting value currently set. During the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting value, and the display means displays the first display ( For example, a setting confirmation display) is displayed.

Also, according to the above description,
`` A gaming machine equipped with display means [for example, effect image display device 157] capable of displaying a first display [for example, 'setting confirmation display]',
225 (81) in which medals have been inserted, such as the operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132], the first operation [for example, the setting key switch 281 224 (82) or 225 (82 )],
After the first case, if a state different from the first state [e.g., completion of payout by settlement operation or end of the game with the bet amount set in the first state], the display means The first display is displayed [eg, FIG. 224 (59) or FIG. 225 (62)],
The display means displays the first display even when a second operation [for example, an operation for causing the opening sensor 294 to detect the opening/closing piece] is performed while the first state is maintained after the first case. means not to display [for example, FIG. 224 (57) or FIG. 225 (57)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Since the first display is not displayed by the first operation during the maintenance work by the store clerk, the maintenance work that has been performed before the first operation can be continued with priority. Further, even when the second operation is performed while the first state is maintained after that, the first display is not displayed, and the maintenance work can be continued with priority. In addition, when it is desired to perform maintenance for confirming whether the first display is displayed on the display means, the state may be shifted to a state different from the first state, and the maintenance can be proceeded step by step. can be done.

The first operation is the operation of the operation means operated when confirming the setting. The first state is a state in which the bet number of 1 or more is set, and the state different from the first state is the end of the game with the bet number set in the first state. or the state in which the settlement operation is performed in the first state and the payout process is completed.

The first display may be a display that is displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display that is displayed while the setting confirmation process is being executed. The setting confirmation process is a process that may be started when the operating means (for example, the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is turned on. The setting confirmation means confirmation of the setting value currently set. During the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting value, and the display means displays the first display ( For example, a setting confirmation display) is displayed.

A door [for example, the front door 102] and a sensor [for example, an open sensor 294] for detecting that the door is opened are provided, and the second operation is detected by the sensor when the door is opened. It may be an operation for detecting that.

Also, according to the above description,
``Display means [for example, effect image display device 157] capable of displaying a first display [for example, 'setting confirmation display]'];
setting value display means capable of displaying setting values [for example, setting value display 293];
A game machine comprising
225 (81) in which medals have been inserted, such as the operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132], the first operation [for example, the setting key switch 281 224 (82) or 225 (82 )],
If, after the first case, a state different from the first state [e.g., completion of payout due to settlement operation or end of game with the bet amount set in the first state] (hereinafter referred to as "second 224 (59) or 225 (62)], the first display is displayed by the display means [for example, FIG.
The setting value display means is means capable of displaying the setting value in the second case.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Since the first display is not displayed by the first operation during the maintenance work by the store clerk, the maintenance work that has been performed before the first operation can be continued with priority. Further, even when the second operation is performed while the first state is maintained after that, the first display is not displayed, and the maintenance work can be continued with priority. In addition, when it is desired to perform maintenance for confirming whether the first display is displayed on the display means, the state may be shifted to a state different from the first state, and the maintenance can be proceeded step by step. can be done.

The set value may be selected from a plurality of types of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player.

The first operation is the operation of the operation means operated when confirming the setting. The first state is a state in which the bet number of 1 or more is set, and the state different from the first state is the end of the game with the bet number set in the first state. or the state in which the settlement operation is performed in the first state and the payout process is completed.

The first display may be a display that is displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display that is displayed while the setting confirmation process is being executed. The setting confirmation process is a process that may be started when the operating means (for example, the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is turned on. The setting confirmation means confirmation of the setting value currently set. During the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting value, and the display means displays the first display ( For example, a setting confirmation display) is displayed.

note that,
"The display means is means for not displaying the setting value in the first case.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Since the setting value is not displayed, the maintenance work that has been performed before the first operation can be continued with higher priority.

again,
"Equipped with a door [e.g., front door 102],
The first operation is an operation that can be performed when the door is open [for example, (52), (82), (52), (82) in FIG. 224]. is
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

It is possible to prohibit the operation of the operating means by the player.

again,
"The first state is a state in which a bet number of 1 or more is set.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The first state can be easily set during maintenance work by a game clerk.

again,
"Equipped with setting value display means [for example, setting value display 293] capable of displaying setting values,
The setting value display means may not display the setting value even if the first operation is performed [for example, FIG. 221 (55)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

Since the setting value is not displayed by the first operation during the maintenance work by the store clerk, the maintenance work that has been performed before the first operation can be continued with priority.

The set value is a value related to the degree of advantage of the player. For example, depending on the set value, the probability of winning a special combination or a big win, the payout rate of game media, or the winning probability of various lotteries may differ. Different (same below).

again,
``A gaming machine characterized by comprising light-emitting means capable of emitting light when the first operation is performed [for example, a monitor LED provided on each of the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248]. 』
also explained.

It can be confirmed by the light emitted from the light emitting means that the first operation is normally performed. In particular, when the display means does not display the first display in the first case, it is beneficial for the light emitting means to emit light.

again,
``It is provided with a transmission means [eg, external centralized terminal board 248] capable of transmitting a signal [eg, setting key switch ON signal] to the outside [eg, hall computer] when the first operation is performed. Characteristic playground. 』
also explained.

It can be confirmed from the outside that the first operation is performed normally. In particular, when the display means does not display the first display in the first case, it is useful to be able to check from the outside.

Also, according to the above description,
"An operation means [for example, a setting key switch 281] that can be switched between an ON state and an OFF state by an operation,
setting value display means capable of displaying setting values [for example, setting value display 293];
A game machine comprising
The set value display means is means for displaying the set value when there is an ON operation [for example, FIG. 224 (52) or FIG. 225 (52)],
The ON operation is an operation to switch the operation means from the OFF state to the ON state,
The set value display means may not display the set value even if the ON operation is performed [for example, FIG. 224 (82) or FIG. 225 (82)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

In other words, the setting value display means is means for displaying the setting value and not displaying the setting value when the ON operation is performed.

Even if an unauthorized person illegally performs the ON operation during business hours, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized person from confirming the setting value.

A door and a sensor for detecting that the door is open, and the set value display means is operated when the ON operation is performed while the sensor is detecting that the door is open. and means for not displaying the set value when the operation means is operated while the sensor is in a non-detection state.

again,
"Equipped with a door [e.g., front door 102],
The ON operation is an operation that can be performed when the door is in an open state.
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

It is possible to prohibit the operation of the operating means by the player.

again,
"The set value display means is a means that may display the set value when the operation means is in the OFF state [for example, FIG. 223 (73)],
A playground characterized by: 』
also explained.

The setting value can be checked even when the operating means is in the OFF state, and the workability of the maintenance work by the store clerk may be improved.

When power is restored while the operation means is in the ON state and the power is restored after switching the operation means to the OFF state, the display means displays the set value display.

again,
``A gaming machine characterized by comprising light-emitting means capable of emitting light when the ON operation is performed [for example, a monitor LED provided on each of the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248]. 』
also explained.

It can be confirmed by the light emitted from the light emitting means that the ON operation is normally performed. In particular, when the display means does not display the setting value even when the ON operation is performed, it is useful for the light emitting means to emit light.

again,
``It is characterized by having a transmitting means [for example, an external centralized terminal board 248] capable of transmitting a signal [for example, a setting key switch ON signal] to the outside [for example, a hall computer] when the above-mentioned ON operation is performed. Playground to play. 』
also explained.

It is possible to confirm from the outside that the ON operation is performed normally. In particular, when the display means does not display the setting value even when the ON operation is performed, it is useful to be able to confirm the setting value from the outside.

The actions and effects described in the embodiments described above are merely the most preferred actions and effects, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described here. In addition, even if the constituent elements are included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. described above, the constituent elements may be used in other embodiments, examples, or It may be applied to modified examples, various examples, additional remarks, and the like. That is, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the constituent features included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. Even if it is applied to an example, various examples, notes, etc., it can be established as a unified technical idea.

227 to 326, a game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel game machine such as the slot machine 100 or a pinball game machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail. 227 to 326 are used only for explanations using FIGS. 227 to 326 in principle. In the explanation using FIG. 326, priority is given to the symbols shown in FIGS.

The slot machine described below employs a so-called medal-less configuration in which information corresponding to the number of actual medals (virtual medal count) is used. We will use

In the slot machine of the present embodiment, when a predetermined number of game medals are inserted and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols are applied thereto, a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received to start rotation of the reels. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of wins is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the condition determined by the combination of symbols based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the process of paying out the number of game medals is executed and finished. This is a gaming machine that advances a series of games that ends without executing the process of paying out the number of game medals if they do not match.

First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 and the basic configuration of the lending machine 700 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 227 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 227 corresponds to an example of the gaming table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front side of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. Prepare. Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of patterns are printed on strip-like members at equal intervals, and the strip-like members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . The symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed approximately three times in the vertical direction from the display window 113 when viewed from the player, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. The symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 is the upper symbol of the left reel, the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 110 is the middle symbol of the left reel, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 is the lower symbol of the left reel, and the middle reel. The symbol displayed on the upper stage of 111 is the upper stage symbol of the middle reel, the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 111 is the middle stage symbol of the middle reel, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the middle reel 111 is the lower stage symbol of the middle reel, and the symbol displayed on the right reel 112 is The symbols displayed on the upper row are called right reel upper row symbols, the symbols displayed on the middle row of the right reel 112 are called right reel middle row symbols, and the symbols displayed on the lower row of the right reel 112 are called right reel lower row symbols. Each of the symbols 112 to 112 is displayed vertically three times on each reel 110 to 112 through the display window 113, for a total of nine symbols. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. That is, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, although the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 227 has three reels inside the center of the slot machine 100, the number of reels and the reel installation positions are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating each pattern displayed on the display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. An optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112 inside the slot machine 100. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through the space between them. Based on the detection result of the optical sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotation direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line. A winning line is a line for determining whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has been displayed. A valid pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are 5 pay lines. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line is activated, and when two medals are bet, an upper horizontal pay line and a lower horizontal pay line are added. When the book becomes valid and 3 medals are bet, the 5 lines added with the lower right winning line and the upper right winning line become valid as the winning lines. The number of winning lines is not limited to 5. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, Five lines, ie, the winning line and the rising winning line may be effective as the winning lines. Hereinafter, an effective winning line may be referred to as an effective line.

The notification lamp 123 indicates, for example, that a specific winning combination (for example, a bonus combination, a special combination) has been internally won in an internal lottery to be described later, or that this internal winning state has been carried over. It is a lamp that informs the player. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay role that is one of the winning roles in the previous game. It's a lamp to let you know. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet button 130 or 132 is a button for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 227, one card is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed. When the button is pressed once, one sheet is inserted. When the button is pressed once again, an additional sheet (total of two sheets) is inserted. When the button is pressed once again, an additional sheet (total of three sheets) is inserted. When the bet button 132 is pressed, three coins are thrown. Hereinafter, the bet button 130 may be referred to as a single bet button, and the bet button 132 may be referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. It should be noted that, hereinafter, the expression "given to the player" may be used in the same sense as "payout to the player". The game information display 126 and the number-of-payouts display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays.

A start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112 . That is, when the bet button 130 or 132 is operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 including a left stop button 137 , a middle stop button 138 and a right stop button 139 . The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112, respectively. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as the second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as the third stop operation. Also, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations will be referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel, respectively. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as the operation order or pressing order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110, the second stop operation is the stop operation of the middle reel 111, and the third stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is the "forward pushing operation order" or simply The stop operation is called "forward push", the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112, the second stop operation is the stop operation of the middle reel 111, and the third stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110. referred to as "operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

The instruction monitor 125 is a display for displaying information about the order of operation (push order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 . This indication monitor 125 also consists of a seven segment (SEG) display. For example, when instructing to operate the left stop button 137, the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 in this order, "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor 125, and the left stop button 137, the right stop button 139, and the middle stop button 139 are displayed. When instructing to operate the stop button 138 in order, “2” is displayed on the instruction monitor 125 .

The settlement button 134 is a button for returning the inserted game medals (the number of bets) to the medal number control section 350 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

The game medal number display device 170 is a 5-digit 7-segment (SEG) display, and is a device for displaying the game medal number recorded by the medal number control unit 350 shown in FIG.

The counting button 171 is operation means for transmitting information on the number of game medals recorded in the medal number control section 350 shown in FIG.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps.

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker 277 (see FIG. 228) provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is provided above the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided above the production device 160 for outputting the sound of the speaker 272 (see FIG. 228) to the outside. The production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a production image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (player side, front side). ). It should be noted that any display device other than the liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it is capable of displaying various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface. Note that the effect image display device 157 corresponds to an example of effect means.

A lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 227 is sometimes called a card unit, and corresponds to an example of the game medium management device of the present invention. This lending machine 700 is installed in a one-to-one relationship with the slot machine 100 .

The lending machine 700 accepts cards. There are two types of "cards" here. One is a visitor card (also referred to as a general card) having a prepaid function, which is a game storage medium issued to general players who have not registered as members. The other is a membership card, which is a game storage medium issued to a member player who has registered as a member of a game arcade. An IC card is used as the card.

Valuable value is stored in the card. Valuable values stored in the card include "number of medals possessed" and "monetary balance" which is the balance of prepaid money.

The lending machine 700 that accepts the card has a function of converting the "number of medals possessed" stored in the card into the "number of game medals (number of credits)".

The “number of game medals (number of credits)” is data that can be used for setting the number of bets and can be converted into “number of medals possessed”. The "number of game medals" can be obtained by withdrawing the "monetary balance" of the card or the "number of medals possessed". In addition, the "number of game medals" includes the number of medals obtained by winning prizes. This "number of game medals" is managed by the medal number control unit 350 shown in FIG. 228, and is the number of electronic medals (amount of electronic game value) electromagnetically stored. By performing the insertion operation using the bet buttons 130 and 132, the "number of game medals" is subtracted.

The “number of medals possessed” is a value obtained by converting the “number of game medals (number of credits)” into a numerical value. This "number of medals possessed" is stored so as to be identifiable by the player's card. That is, by operating the counting button 171, the "number of game medals" is converted into the "number of owned medals", which can be stored in the card. The "number of owned medals" may be managed by a management device for managing the number of owned medals installed in the game arcade.

On the front side of the lending machine 700, a banknote insertion slot 701 for inserting banknotes is provided at the top, and a card insertion slot 702 for inserting cards is provided at the bottom. A card reader/writer receives a member card or visitor card inserted into the card slot 702, and reads information stored in the card. The bills inserted into the bill insertion slot 701 are identified for authenticity and bill type, and the denomination of the bill is stored in the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 as a "monetary balance".

An information display 703 is provided below the banknote insertion slot 701 . This information display device 703 is a display device for providing operation guidance of the rental machine 700, the state of the slot machine 100, and the like in the form of characters and images. It should be noted that the surface may be composed of a touch panel, and various operations may be input by touching various displayed items with a finger.

Under the information display 703, a money balance display 705 and a medal balance display 706 are arranged in two stages, one above the other. The "money balance" stored in the card inserted into the card slot 702 is displayed on the money balance display 705 as the amount. On the other hand, the medal number balance display 706 displays the "number of medals possessed" stored in the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 as the number of medals.

A lending button 707 and a card returning button 708 are provided at the central portion of the lending machine 700 in the vertical direction. The lending button 707 is an operation means for performing an operation for withdrawing the "monetary balance" stored in the card inserted into the card slot 702 and obtaining the "number of game medals." Specifically, when the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 has a "monetary balance", the LED lamp built into the lending button 707 lights up in a manner indicating that withdrawal is possible. By operating the lending button 707 in this state, the "number of game medals" is added according to the money to be withdrawn. For example, the "number of game medals" equivalent to 1000 yen is added as the predetermined amount. Also, if the "monetary balance" of the card is less than a predetermined amount (for example, less than 1000 yen), only the "number of game medals" converted from the current balance at a predetermined rate is added. Even if the "monetary balance" of the card is less than the predetermined amount, the "number of game medals" corresponding to the predetermined amount can be added by replenishing the "number of medals" stored in the card. good. The card return button 708 is operated by the player when the game ends, and is an operation means for storing the "number of medals held" determined at the end of the game in the card inserted in the card slot 702 and ejecting the card. is. The "number of medals held" determined at the end of the game is obtained by subtracting the number of medals converted from the "number of medals held" stored in the card inserted in the card insertion slot 702 into the "number of game medals", and then counting. The number of medals is obtained by adding the number of game medals counted by the operation.

Each of the data of "monetary balance", "number of medals", and "number of game medals" described above is stored in the order of "money balance" and "number of medals" → "number of game medals" → "number of medals". will be converted. In this way, the "number of game medals" specified by the card is converted into the "number of game medals", and in the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, the number of bets can be set using the "number of game medals". Therefore, players who are accustomed to conventional slot machines in which real medals are lent, credits are secured by inserting the real medals, and the number of bets is set using the credits are confused. It is possible to provide a game by a new slot machine (management game machine) that does not use real medals without giving any money.

Although this specification does not mention "the number of stored medals", this "the number of stored medals" is the number of owned medals deposited in the game hall rather than being stored in the card. In the game arcade, the number of medals obtained by the player in the game is managed by the hall management terminal 800 shown in FIG. number" may be managed. When both the "number of stored medals" and the "number of owned medals" are stored, the "number of owned medals" is preferentially withdrawn. Further, both the "number of medals possessed" and the "number of medals saved" may be stored in the host server (intermediate management terminal 810 or management server 820 shown in FIG. 231) in association with the card number. In the case of the visitor card, the "number of medals possessed" is directly stored in the visitor card, but the "number of medals possessed" may be stored in the host server in association with the card number. When the card number is stored in the host server in correspondence with the card number, data that can specify the time stored in the host server may be written in the card (member card, visitor card) and ejected. As for the "monetary balance", the card (member card, visitor card) is directly written and ejected. The timing at which the "number of medals possessed" is stored in a card (member card, visitor card) or the host server is, for example, the timing at which the counting button 171 is operated and the counting process is performed. However, instead of this, the information may be stored collectively when the cards are returned. Furthermore, when the player finishes the game and returns the card from the lending machine 700, the "number of medals possessed" stored in the lending machine 700 is once stored in the hall management terminal 800 as accumulated medals. When the player inserts the card again into the same or another lending machine 700 on the same day as the card is returned, only the "number of tokens possessed" for that day, which was once stored as accumulated medals, is returned to the lending machine. 700, and the "number of game medals" may be added within the range of the "number of medals possessed" to enable a game to be played.

Also, the rental machine 700 may be provided with an IR sensitive unit that receives an infrared signal from a remote control carried by a game hall attendant, converts it into an electronic signal, and outputs the electronic signal.

Furthermore, the lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 227 was able to lend out the "number of game medals" by operating the lending button 707 and withdrawing the "monetary balance" stored in the card. It may be possible to withdraw the "number of medals possessed" and convert it to "number of game medals". Specifically, a coin holding button is provided in the lending machine 700, and when the card inserted in the card insertion slot 702 has a "number of holding medals", an LED lamp built into the holding medal button can be pulled out. Lights up in a manner that represents By operating the possess medal button in this state, if the number of possess medals is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (eg, 50), the predetermined number (eg, 50) of "game medal count" is added. In addition, the above-described number of medals acquired by the player in the game is stored in the card as "points" during the day, or managed by the hall management terminal 800 shown in FIG. 700 is provided with a replay button. When there is a "score", the built-in LED lamp of the replay button lights up in a manner indicating that withdrawal is possible. By operating the replay button in this state, a predetermined number (for example, 50) of "game medals" may be added.

Next, with reference to FIG. 228, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be explained in detail. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 . Here, regarding the main control unit 300, if the data volume becomes large, it becomes difficult to confirm the program, and there is a problem of security deterioration such as becoming a hotbed for unauthorized modification. and the data capacity of the RAM 308 is limited.

《Main control unit》
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 has a game control unit 302 that controls the progress of the game and a medal count control unit 350 that controls the number of game medals owned by the player. The game control unit 302 corresponds to an example of game control means, and the medal count control unit 350 corresponds to an example of game value control means. The game control unit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 that stores control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, reel pattern arrangement and stop positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, It is equipped with an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the medal count control section 350, the first sub-control section 400, and the second sub-control section 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit (not shown) used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from a crystal oscillator (not shown). Then, a start signal output circuit (not shown) that outputs a start signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 executes game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit. Start (start the main control unit main processing, which will be described later).

Also, the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 monitors the states of the bet buttons 130 and 132, the start lever 135, the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the settlement button 134 at each interrupt time. For example, when it is detected that the bet buttons 130 and 132 have been turned on, a process of electronically inserting medals electronically stored in the medal number control section 350 as medals to be inserted into a game is executed. When it detects that the start lever 135 has been turned on, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit. The random number generating circuit that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery. When it is detected that the left stop button 137, the middle stop button 138, or the right stop button 139 is turned on, if the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to each stop button are in a stoppable state, the reels 110 to 112 are stopped. Execute control. When it is detected that the settlement button 134 has been turned on, a process of returning the electronically inserted game medals to the medal count control section 350 is executed.

In addition, the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 monitors the state of various sensors 318 (the optical sensor of the left reel 110, the optical sensor of the middle reel 111, the optical sensor of the right reel 112, etc.) at each interrupt time. ing. The optical sensor of the left reel 110, the optical sensor of the middle reel 111, and the optical sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the respective reels 110 to 112, and the light shield provided on the reel frame. It becomes L level every time a piece passes. Rotational position information indicating how much the reel rotates from the reference position from when it once goes to L level until it goes to L level again is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, the CPU 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 .

The main control unit 300 drives a display device such as a drive circuit 322 for driving the motors 110m to 112m (see FIG. 229) provided for the reels 110 to 112, an instruction monitor 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127. A driving circuit 324 that drives various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121). I have.

Furthermore, in the slot machine 100, set values are set to give different degrees of advantage to the players. Setting values 1 to 6 are prepared. There is a tendency that the higher the set value, the higher the player's advantage. Specifically, an internal winning probability is determined for each set value. A setting change button 175 is connected to the game control unit 302 to be operated when changing the setting value.

In addition, an information output circuit 328 is connected to the game control unit 302, and the main control unit 300, via this information output circuit 328, outputs an information input circuit provided in an external hall computer 600 (see FIG. 231) or the like. 650 outputs the game information of the slot machine 100 (for example, information indicating the state of the game).

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit (not shown) that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the game control section 302 and the medal number control section 350 respectively.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-controller 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main controller 300 .

Like the game control unit 302, the medal number control unit 350 also includes a CPU 354, a ROM 356, a RAM 358, an I/O 360 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. A timer 362 is installed. The CPUs 304 and 354 are provided on the same substrate and connected via a buffer IC. As a result, the CPU 304 is made to use the ROM 306 and the RAM 308 and the ROM 356 and the RAM 358 are not made to be used, and the CPU 354 is made to use the ROM 356 and the RAM 358 and the ROM 306 and the RAM 308 are not made to be used. A WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) is also installed. The CPU 354 of the medal number control section 350 also operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 354 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 356 to the counter timer 362, and the counter timer 362 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 354 for each interrupt time. The CPU 354 operates in response to this interrupt request. The medal number control section 350 executes an interrupt process (a medal number control section timer interrupt process to be described later) at 0.745 ms. Further, communication with the rental machine 700 is repeated at a cycle of 300ms.

The CPU 354 of the medal count control unit 350 also has a start signal output circuit (not shown) that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 354 of the medal count control unit 350 also outputs this start signal. When the activation signal is input from the circuit, medal count control is started (the medal count control unit main processing, which will be described later, is started).

A basic circuit of the medal number control section 350 is connected to a game medal number display device 170 composed of a 5-digit 7-segment (SEG) display, a count button 171 and a game medal number clear button 172 .

In addition, the basic circuit of the medal number control section 350 is also connected to the lending machine 700 via a lending machine connection terminal board 790 . The medal count control section 350 performs two-way communication with the lending machine 700 .

The medal number control section 350 transmits various commands to the game control section 302 . The game control section 302 also transmits various commands to the medal number control section 350 . That is, the communication between the medal count control section 350 and the game control section 302 is also two-way communication.

Also, the medal count control unit 350 stores the “game medal count” in a predetermined area of the RAM 358 . Specifically, the "number of game medals" is stored in the credit counter. The medal count control unit 350 updates the “game medal count” stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 358 by addition processing or subtraction processing. As the addition processing, processing based on a payout command transmitted from the game control unit 302, processing based on a settlement command transmitted from the game control unit 302, and processing based on a lending notification transmitted from the lending machine 700 is given. On the other hand, as subtraction processing, there are counting processing based on operation of the counting button 171 and processing based on an input command transmitted from the game control section 302 .

228 is provided at a position where a player cannot operate it (for example, a position where it cannot be operated unless the front door 102 is opened). This is an operation means for clearing the "number of game medals" stored in the . For example, if a player is absent with "2" remaining in the number of game medals, it becomes difficult to determine whether the player who has left "2" intends to continue playing the game. Although the game cannot be started, if the number of game medals can be cleared by the clerk's operation, another player can be welcomed early. When the number of game medals clear button 172 is operated, the "number of game medals" is not necessarily cleared. , counting may be performed in the same manner as when the counting button 171 is operated. If the counting button 171 fails to recognize that the counting button 171 has been operated, the ``number of game medals'' cannot be converted into the ``number of medals possessed,'' and there is a risk that the player will be disadvantaged. However, if the counter can be counted by the store clerk's operation, the player will not be disadvantaged. Furthermore, since there is no need to newly provide a counting button for the store clerk, there is no cost increase. It should be noted that clearing and counting may not be determined by judging the number of game medals, and clearing and counting may be determined according to the operation method of the game medal number clear button 172 . For example, it is cleared when pressed for a short time, and counted when pressed for a long time. Either clearing or counting can be easily selected regardless of the number of game medals. Also, it is cleared when only the game medal number clear button 172 is operated, and is counted when the game medal number clear button 172 and other buttons are operated at the same time. It is less likely that you will make a mistake in operation, and you can easily choose between clearing and counting.

《Sub-controller》
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 receives control commands transmitted by the main control unit 300 (game control unit 302) via the input interface. The first sub-controller 400 comprises a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on this control command. , an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-controller 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 . Note that these speakers 272 and 277 correspond to an example of the rendering means.

A drive circuit 422 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel lamp, bet button lamp, reel backlight, etc.) are connected. Note that the various lamps 420 correspond to an example of effect means.

Further, the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control section 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157 . The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effects (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. 512 and are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub-control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

Next, an example of connection between each board such as the power control board, the main control board and the first sub-control board and each unit such as the reel unit and the effect movable body unit will be described.

FIG. 229 is a diagram showing an example of connection between each board and each unit.

This FIG. 229 shows a power supply control board 252B, a main control board 300B, a first sub-control board 400B, a reel unit 109, and an effect movable body unit 160U. The effect movable body unit 160U is a unit that moves the shutter 163 incorporated in the effect device 160 shown in FIG. The shutter 163 corresponds to an example of a movable body.

A plurality of connectors PC1 to PC4, MC2 to MC6 and SC1 to SC4 are shown on each of the power control board 252B, the main control board 300B and the first sub-control board 400B. Also, one or a plurality of connectors RC1 to RC3 and DC1 are shown in each of the reel unit 109 and the effect movable body unit 160U.

An island facility installed in a game machine installation office steps down a 100V AC power supply to a voltage of 24V, and supplies a 24V AC current to the pachinko machine 100 through a power cord 265 connected to a connector PC1. The 24V AC current is converted into a 24V DC voltage, a 12V DC voltage and a 5V DC voltage in the power control board 252B. In addition, although it may be converted into other DC voltages, the DC voltage of 24V and the DC voltage of 5V will be explained here.

The power control board 252B shown in FIG. 229 shows a 24V power line and a 5V power line, and a power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and a power control 24V capacitor 24PC connected to the 24V power line and connected to the 5V power line. Also shown are power control 5V monitor LED 5PL and power control 5V capacitor 5PC. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL is a power monitoring LED lamp that lights or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL lights or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. LED lamp for power supply monitoring. A power switch 244 is also shown.

A 24V power line and a 5V power line are connected to the connector PC2 of the power control board 252B. The connector PC2 and the connector MC5 of the main control board 300B are connected by a harness PM, and the main control board 300B is supplied with a direct current of 24 V and a direct current of 5 V through the harness PM. .

A 24V power line is connected to the connector PC3 of the power control board 252B. The connector PC3 and the connector SC1 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS1, and a 24V direct current is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through this harness PS1. A 5V power line is connected to the connector PC4 of the power control board 252B. The connector PC4 and the connector SC2 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS2, and a direct current of 5V is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through this harness PS2.

The main control board 300B may also be supplied with 24V and 5V through separate harnesses, like the first sub-control board 400B. Also, 24V and 5V may be supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through a common harness, like the main control board 300B.

The main control board 300B shown in FIG. 229 also shows a 24V power line and a 5V power line. A 24V DC current supplied through the harness PM flows through the 24V power supply line of the main control board 300B, and a 5V DC current also supplied through the harness PM flows through the 5V power supply line of the main control board 300B. . The main control board 300B shown in FIG. 229 also shows a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and a main control 24V capacitor 24MC connected to the 24V power line, and a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML connected to the 5V power line. ing. The main control 24V monitor LED24ML is a power monitoring LED lamp that lights or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the main control 5V monitor LED5ML lights or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. LED lamp for power supply monitoring. Note that no capacitor is provided on the 5V power supply line.

A reel motor drive IC 322i is mounted on the main control board 300B. The reel motor drive IC 322i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the drive circuit 322 shown in FIG. A 24V DC current and a 5V DC current are also supplied to the reel motor drive IC 322i. Although not shown, the main control board 300B includes the game control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350 shown in FIG. ing.

The connector MC2 connected to the reel motor drive IC 322i of the main control board 300B and the connector RC1 of the reel unit 109 are connected by a harness MR1. A connector RC2 of the reel unit 109 is connected by a harness MR2, and a connector MC4 to which the reel motor drive IC 322i is also connected and a connector RC3 of the reel unit 109 are connected by a harness MR3. The reel unit 109 is supplied with the 24 V DC current and the 5 V DC current supplied to the reel motor drive IC 322i through these harnesses MR1 to MR3, respectively, and the motors 110m to 112m provided for each reel are driven. become drivable. Control signals (commands) for controlling the motors 110m to 112m are sent from the main control board 300B through the harnesses MR1 to MR3, respectively. Although a harness is connected to each motor, the connectors RC1 to RC3 on the reel unit 109 side are made into one connector, and the connectors MC2 to MC4 on the main control board 300B side are also made into one connector, and one common harness is used. You can connect with However, one common harness is a collection of three harnesses MR1 to MR3.

Furthermore, the connector MC6 of the main control board 300B and the connector SC4 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness MS. This harness MS is a harness for control signals (for command transmission) and is not used for current supply.

The first sub-control board 400B shown in FIG. 229 also shows the 24V power line and the 5V power line. A 24V direct current supplied through the harness PS1 flows through the 24V power supply line of the first sub-control board 400B, and a 5V direct current supplied through the harness PS2 flows through the 5V power supply line of the first sub-control board 400B. current flows. 229 also has a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and a sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC connected to the 24V power line, and a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL connected to the 5V power line. It is shown. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL is a power monitoring LED lamp that lights or blinks while a 24V DC current flows, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL lights or blinks while a 5V DC current flows. LED lamp for power supply monitoring. Also in the first sub-control board 400B, no capacitor is provided on the 5V power supply line.

A movable body motor drive IC 424i is mounted on the first sub-control board 400B. This movable body motor drive IC 424i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the drive circuit 424 shown in FIG. A DC current of 24V and a DC current of 5V are supplied to the movable body motor drive IC 424i. Although not shown here, the first sub-control board 400B has the basic circuit 402 shown in FIG.

The connector SC3 of the first sub-control board 400B, to which the movable body motor drive IC 424i is connected, and the connector DC1 of the effect movable body unit 160U are connected by a harness SD. The direct current of 24V and the direct current of 5V supplied to the movable body motor drive IC 424i are supplied to the movable body unit 160U through the harness SD, and the motor 163m provided in the movable body unit 160U is driven. be possible. A control signal (command) for controlling the motor 163m is sent from the first sub-control board 400B through the harness SD.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 227 also includes a second sub-control section 500 as shown in FIG. 228, and although not shown in FIG. A direct current of 24 V and a direct current of 5 V are supplied through the harnesses shown. Also, the second sub-control board is connected to the first sub-control board 400B with a harness for control signals (for command transmission). Furthermore, the second sub-control board is also connected to the effect device (effect image display device 157) in the same manner as the first sub-control board 400B.

As described above, the main control board 300B and the reel unit 109 are electrically connected by the harnesses MR1-MR3. Also, the first sub-control board 400B and the effect movable body unit 160U are electrically connected by a harness SD.

Here, based on the above configuration, the operation when the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 in the power-off state is opened and the left reel 110 is manually rotated will be described. Note that the power failure state may be a state in which the power switch 244 is turned off, or a state in which the power switch 244 is turned on but the power cord 265 is not connected to the outlet. Alternatively, it may be in a state in which no power is supplied from the island facility (the same shall apply hereinafter). If power is not supplied from the island facility, the power is cut off even if the power cord 265 is connected to the outlet and the power switch 244 is on. Each reel 110-112 can be manually rotated in either the forward or reverse direction even in such a power failure condition.

Any of the monitor LEDs (power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL shown in FIG. 229 that lights up in the energized state ) are also extinguished in the power failure state.

However, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the motor 110m (see FIG. 229) that rotates the left reel 110 generates a current (induced current) due to back electromotive force. Continuing the description with reference to FIG. 229, the induced current generated by the motor 110m flows through the harness MR1 into the main control board 300B and is supplied from the reel drive IC 322i to the 24V power line and the 5V power line. A main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR is provided between the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the ground, and a main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR is provided between the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML and the ground. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML has its resistance adjusted by the main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR, so that it is lit by the induced current, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML has its resistance adjusted by the main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR. Lights up due to induced current. Further, even if manual rotation is stopped, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML continues lighting for a while because the main control 24V capacitor 24MC is provided in the 24V power supply line. On the other hand, since the 5V power supply line is not provided with a capacitor, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML immediately turns off when the manual rotation is stopped. That is, when manual rotation is stopped, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML is turned off before the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML. A capacitor having a lower capacity than the main control 24V capacitor 24MC may also be provided on the 5V power supply line.

The induced current that has flowed into the main control board 300B this time flows through the harness PM into the power supply control board 252B, and is supplied from the connector PC2 to the 24V power line and the 5V power line. A power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR is provided between the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the ground, and a power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR is provided between the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the ground. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL has its resistance adjusted by the power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, so that it is lit by the induced current, and the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL has its resistance adjusted by the power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Lights up due to induced current. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of boards such as the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B emit light. Further, even if manual rotation is stopped, the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL continues lighting for a while because the power control 24V capacitor 24PC is provided in the 24V power line. In addition, since the power control 5V capacitor 5PC is also provided on the 5V power line, the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL also continues lighting for a while.

The induced current that has flowed into the power control board 252B further flows through the harness PS1 into the first sub-control board 400B and is supplied from the connector SC1 to the 24V power line. A secondary control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR is provided between the secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the ground. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and the ground. The secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL is lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the secondary control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR. Also, the induced current that has flowed into the power control board 252B flows through the harness PS2 into the first sub-control board 400B, and is supplied from the connector SC2 to the 5V power line. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and the ground. The sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL is lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of substrates such as the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control substrate 300B, the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control substrate 252B, and the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control substrate 400B emit light. There will be Even if manual rotation is stopped, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL continues lighting for a while because the sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC is provided in the 24V power supply line. On the other hand, since the 5V power supply line is not provided with a capacitor, the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL immediately turns off when the manual rotation is stopped.

The above description is a description of the phenomenon that occurs when the harnesses MR1, PM, PS1, and PS2 are normally connected to the connectors and are not disconnected. On the other hand, if the harness MR1 is broken or not properly connected to the connector RC1 and/or the connector MC2 (disconnected or insufficiently inserted), no matter how much the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the None of the monitor LEDs indicated at 229 are illuminated, and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML remain off. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, if none of the monitor LEDs, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML shown in FIG. connection failure can be suspected.

Also, if the harness PM is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector MC5 and/or the connector PC2, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML lights up, but the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL do not light up. As a result, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, although the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML are lit, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and If the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL is not lit, an abnormality in the harness PM or poor connection with the connectors MC5 and PC2 can be suspected.

Even when the main control board 300B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B are lit by manually rotating the left reel 110. It is possible.

Further, if the harness PS1 is disconnected or not normally connected to the connector PC3 and/or the connector SC1, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the secondary control 24V of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. Only the monitor LED 24SL does not light up. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, if only the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. can be done. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector PC4 and/or the connector SC2, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the sub-control 5V of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. Only the monitor LED5SL does not light up. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is manually rotated, if only the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. can be done.

Here, the case where the left reel 110 is manually rotated in the power failure state has been described, but even when the middle reel 111 is manually rotated in the power failure state, the right reel 112 can be manually rotated in the power failure state. The same is true when rotating. In addition, when the number of reels to be manually rotated increases, the monitor LED emits bright light. For example, when the left reel 110, middle reel 111 and right reel 112 are manually rotated at the same time, the monitor LED emits brighter light than when only the left reel 110 is manually rotated.

In addition, the main control 24V monitor LED24ML, the main control 5V monitor LED5ML, the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL, the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL, the power control 24V monitor LED24PL and the power control 5V monitor LED5PL LEDs used for different purposes from the monitor LED ( For example, even if an error monitoring LED that emits light when an error occurs, or a signal monitoring LED, etc.), if it is provided with an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line or 5V power line, it can be manually operated in the power failure state. When the left reel 110 is rotated, light is emitted if there is no electrical connection failure. Therefore, even if the LED is used for a purpose other than the monitor LED, it is possible to check for an electrical connection failure.

Moreover, even in the power-off state, the shutter 163 shown in FIG. 227 can be opened and closed manually.

When the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the motor 163m (see FIG. 229) that opens and closes the shutter 163 generates a current (induced current) due to back electromotive force. Continuing the description with reference to FIG. 229, the induced current generated by the motor 163m flows through the harness SD into the first sub-control board 400B and is supplied from the movable body motor drive IC 424i to the 24V power line and the 5V power line respectively. be done. The secondary control 24V monitor LED 24SL is lit by the induced current because the resistance value is adjusted by the secondary control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR, and the secondary control 5V monitor LED 5SL is also adjusted in resistance value by the secondary control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. Lights up due to induced current.

The induced current that has flowed into the first sub-control board 400B this time flows through the harness PS1 into the power supply control board 252B and is supplied from the connector PC3 to the 24V power line. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL is lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR. In addition, the induced current that has flowed into the first sub-control board 400B also passes through the harness PS2, flows into the power supply control board 252B, and is supplied from the connector PC4 to the 5V power line. The power control 5V monitor LED 5PL is also lit by an induced current due to the resistance value being adjusted by the power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of substrates such as the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control substrate 400B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power control substrate 252B emit light.

The induced current that has flowed into the power control board 252B further flows through the harness PM into the main control board 300B, and is supplied from the connector MC5 to the 24V power line and the 5V power line. The power control 24V monitor LED 24PL has its resistance adjusted by the power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, so that it is lit by the induced current, and the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL has its resistance adjusted by the power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Lights up due to induced current. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of boards such as the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power control board 252B, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B, and the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B emit light. There will be

The above explanation is for the phenomena that occur when the harnesses SD, PS1, PS2, and PM are normally connected to the connectors and are not disconnected. On the other hand, if the harness SD is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector DC1 and/or the connector SC3, none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. , the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL remain off. As a result, even if the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, if none of the monitor LEDs, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL shown in FIG. A bad connection can be suspected.

Also, if the harness PS1 is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector SC1 and/or the connector PC3, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the secondary control 24V monitor LED24SL and the secondary control 5V monitor LED5SL Although it lights up, the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML do not light up. As a result, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL are lit, but the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML are not lit. , an abnormality in the harness PS1 and a poor connection with the connectors SC1 and PC3 can be suspected. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector SC2 and/or the connector PC4, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL Although it lights up, the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up. As a result, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL are lit, but the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML are not lit. , an abnormality in the harness PS2 or a poor connection with the connectors SC2 and PC4 can be suspected.

Even when the first sub-control board 400B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B can be controlled by manually opening and closing the shutter 163. ) can be lit.

Also, if the harness PM is disconnected or is not properly connected to the connector PC2 and/or the connector MC5, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the main control 24V monitor of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. Only LED24ML and main control 5V monitor LED5ML do not light up. As a result, if only the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML out of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. connection failure can be suspected.

FIG. 230 shows an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 229 and the reel unit 109 also shown in FIG. In the following, differences from the connection example described with reference to FIG. 229 will be mainly described, and redundant description may be omitted.

In FIG. 230, the connector MC5 and the connector MC6 provided on the main control board 300B are omitted. A reel relay board 902B is shown between the main control board 300B and the reel unit 109 shown in FIG.

The reel relay board 902B is provided with a connector RRM1 to which the harness MR11 connected to the connector MC2 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR1 to which the harness MR12 connected to the connector RC1 of the reel unit 109 is connected. Also provided are a connector RRM2 to which the harness MR21 connected to the connector MC3 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR2 to which the harness MR22 connected to the connector RC2 of the reel unit 109 is connected. Further, a connector RRM3 to which the harness MR31 connected to the connector MC4 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR3 to which the harness MR32 connected to the connector RC3 of the reel unit 109 is connected are also provided.

Even in the connection example in FIG. 230, if the reels 110 to 112 are manually rotated in the power failure state, the monitor LEDs such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML light up if normal. However, if the plurality of harnesses MR11, MR12, MR21, MR22, MR21, and MR32 between the main control board 300B and the reel unit 109 are disconnected or not properly connected, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and Monitor LEDs such as the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up.

In the connection example shown in FIG. 230, the number of harnesses and the number of connectors are increased compared to the connection example shown in FIG. 229 due to the provision of the reel relay board 902B. is becoming more sexual. However, an induced current can be generated by manual operation in a power-off state, and poor electrical connection can be easily confirmed from the lighting state of the monitor LED.

The reel relay board 902B may also be provided with a 24V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line, and a 5V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 5V power line. An induced current is generated by manual operation in the power-off state, and if the monitor LED is normal, these monitor LEDs are also turned on, so that it is possible to confirm the electrical connection failure.

In the description here, the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, the right reel 112, and the shutter 163 are described as the movable bodies, but the movable bodies are not limited to these, and may be motor-driven movable bodies.

Furthermore, in place of the LED lamp which is lit by an induced current in the power failure state, a light emitting means such as a 7-segment (SEG) display may be used. For example, it may be a 7-segment display that displays setting values (for example, setting 1 to setting 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A requirement for the light emitting means is that it be visible. These light emitting means do not move even when the motor is driven. This is because the light emitting means is not provided on the movable body that is driven by the motor and is provided on the fixed substrate.

In the above description, the adjustment resistors (24MR, 5MR, 24PR, 5PR, 24SR, 5SR) are used to cause the monitor LED to emit light by the induced current in the power-off state. That is fine, and it is not limited to the adjustment resistor. However, if a large amount of induced current flows even when the power is on, it will cause problems. need to be adjusted.

In addition, the configuration described above is
light emitting means;
a movable body unit having a movable body operable by being driven by a motor;
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness,
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power failure state to drive the motor, and a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor flows into the light emitting means,
The light emitting means corresponds to an example of a game machine characterized in that it does not move even when the motor is driven.

FIG. 231 is a configuration diagram of a game system including the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 231, the gaming system S has a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 227, a lending machine 700 also shown in FIG. The rental machine 700, the hall computer 600, and the hall management terminal 800 are collectively referred to as an external processing device. One of the features of this external processing device is that it has storage means.

The hall management terminal 800 is a computer different from the hall computer 600, is installed in each of the game halls (halls) H1, H2, . . . Since the lending machine 700 is connected to the slot machine 100 , the hall management terminal 800 is connected to the slot machine 100 via the lending machine 700 . To the hall management terminal 800, information about the number of medals (counting information and lending information) performed between the lending machine 700 and the slot machine 100 and information about the operating state of the slot machine 100 are input. The hall management terminal 800 records and manages the input information.

The management server 820 is provided for overall management of the gaming system 1, and includes information on the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700, such as information identifying the slot machine 100 and information identifying the lending machine 700 (gaming machine installation information) and manages this information. Management server 820 is connected to hall management terminals 800 of many halls via intermediate management terminals 810, and information obtained by communicating with hall management terminals 800, that is, information on the number of medals, slot Information such as the operating state of the machine 100 is also managed.

<<Communication sequence and communication contents>>
Commands are transmitted and received between the game control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350 . The game control unit 302 transmits a game control unit command (game control state command, game control priority command) to the medal number control unit 350 every 2.98 ms. On the other hand, the medal count control section 350 transmits a medal count control command (medal count control state command, response command) to the game control section 302 every 5.96 ms. In addition, in the game control unit 302, the game control priority command is transmitted with priority over the game control state command. Further, in the medal number control section 350, a response command corresponding to the game control priority command is transmitted with priority over the medal number control state command.

In communication between the game control unit 302 and the medal number control unit 350 and communication between the medal number control unit 350 and the lending machine 700, gaming machine status information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information are transmitted and received. be.

FIG. 232 is a table summarizing gaming machine status information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information.

The gaming machine state information shown in FIG. 232(a) roughly includes three types of state information: advantageous state information, setting state information, and front door state information. The advantageous state information includes information (RB information) indicating whether or not the bonus operation state is equivalent to RB, information indicating whether or not the bonus operation state is equivalent to BB (BB information), and bonus operation state equivalent to AT (assist time). It consists of information (AT information) indicating whether or not. The setting state information includes information indicating whether or not the setting state is changed by operating the setting button 175 shown in FIG. information). The front door state information is information (door open information) indicating whether or not the front door 102 is in an open state. Note that the AT state is a game state in which auxiliary functions such as notification of the stop operation order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 and notification of symbols to be aimed and stopped are activated so that the player can obtain advantageous results.

Gaming machine performance information shown in FIG. Contains monitor information. The total inserted number information is information representing the accumulated number of inserted medals since the power was turned on. Note that the number of medals for replay is not included. The total payout number information is information representing the cumulative number of payout medals since the power was turned on. Note that the number of medals for replay is not included. The MY counter value information is information representing the maximum value of the MY counter calculated after the power is turned on. The slot machine 100 has a state in which the order of stop operations for internally won hands is notified, and the MY counter is a counter that counts the number of net increase in medals after shifting to this state. The information on the total payout number of the accessory is information representing the number of medals to be paid out due to the operation of the accessory accumulated since the power was turned on. The continuous accessory total payout number information is information representing the payout number of medals accumulated by the operation of the RB since the power was turned on. The number-of-games information is information representing the number of games accumulated since the power was turned on. The role ratio monitor information is information representing various ratios (role ratio, continuous role ratio, advantageous section ratio, instructed role ratio, role state ratio) for evaluating the gambling nature of the gaming machine. become.

The gaming machine installation information shown in FIG. 232(c) includes two types of information, game control section information and medal number control section information. The game control section information is composed of the ID number information of the IC chip of the game control section 302, the maker code of the IC chip, and the product code of the IC chip. The medal number control section information is composed of the ID number information of the IC chip of the medal number control section 350, the manufacturer code of the IC chip, and the product code of the IC chip.

FIG. 233 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control state command is transmitted from the game control section 302 to the medal number control section 350. FIG.

FIG. 233 shows the first sub-control section 400, the game control section 302, the number-of-medals control section 350, and the lending machine 700 from the left.

First, communication between the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 will be explained before explaining the game control state command. A token amount control section 350 is connected to the lending machine 700 , and communication between the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 is performed between the token number control section 350 and the lending machine 700 . Communication between the medal count control unit 350 and the lending machine 700 is performed at a cycle of 300 ms.

As shown in FIG. 233 , a game machine information notification and a counting notification are transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 . In addition, a lending notification is transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control section 350 , and upon receiving this lending notification, the medal count control section 350 returns a lending reception result response notification to the lending machine 700 .

FIG. 234 is a diagram showing the details of communication between the medal count control section 350 and the lending machine 700. FIG.

FIG. 234(a) is a diagram showing the data structure of messages exchanged in communication between the medal count control section 350 and the lending machine 700. FIG. This message consists of five types: message length, command, serial number, data part, and checker. The message length stores the length of the entire message. The command stores a command code for identifying the type of gaming machine information notification, counting notification, lending notification, and lending reception result response notification. The serial number stores the serial number for the gaming machine information notification, the counting serial number for the count notification, and the lending serial number for the lending notice and the lending reception result response notice. The range of various serial numbers is 0 to 255, and the serial number becomes 0 when the power is turned on, returns to 1 when reaching 255, and then repeats from 1 to 255. Various types of data are stored in the data section, and the checksum is the sum of the data from the message length to the data section, and the lower 1 byte of the sum is stored.

FIG. 234(b) is a diagram showing specific contents of the data portion of the gaming machine information notification. The data portion of the game machine information notification stores a code representing the type of the game machine, such as pachinko type game machine, reel type game machine, and arrange ball game machine. In the case of this embodiment, a code representing a reel-type gaming machine is stored. The gaming machine information type includes hall control/fraud monitoring information in addition to the gaming machine performance information and gaming machine installation information described with reference to FIG. The game machine information type stores a code for identifying which of these three types of information the information is.

FIG. 235(a) is a diagram showing details of hall control/unauthorized monitoring information.

The information on the number of game medals is information representing the current number of game medals stored in the RAM 358 of the medal number control section 350 .

The information on the number of inserted medals is the number of inserted medals, and the number of returned medals when there are returned medals when the settlement button 134 (see FIG. 227) is operated. Minute information (-3 to 3 sheets). That is, it is information based on information on the number of inserted medals and information on the number of settled medals included in the game control priority command (insertion command, settlement command) transmitted from the game control section 302 to the medal number control section 350 .

The paid-out medal number information is information representing the number of paid-out medals. This payout medal number information is information based on information on the number of payout medals included in the game control priority command (payout command) transmitted from the game control section 302 to the medal number control section 350 .

The advantageous state information is the advantageous state information shown in FIG. 232(a) described using FIG. In addition, information representing the state of the gaming machine may be included.

Gaming machine error state information is information represented by an error code.

FIG. 235(b) is a list of error codes. Regarding the various errors shown in FIG. 235(b), the medal count control state commands, various processing commands sent from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400, and game control priority commands (error generation command).

Only errors that require special explanation will be explained below. The medal number control disconnection is an error when the game control unit 302 detects the disconnection of the medal number control unit 350, and the game control disconnection is the opposite. This is an error when it is detected. The game order abnormality is an error that the order of game progress in the game control unit 302 is abnormal. The game control command serial number abnormality is an error that the serial number of the command from the game control unit 302 is a value other than the value obtained by adding 1 to the previous value. The payout number abnormality is an error when the payout number included in the game control state command is out of the range of 0 to 15 sheets. That is, in the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, the maximum number of coins for one payout is fifteen. The settlement number mismatch is an error when the settlement number included in the game control priority command (settlement command) is equal to or greater than the input number. Chip ID number disagreement is an error when the IC chip number information in the game control section information shown in FIG. 232(c) is different from the previous information. The medal count control RAM error is an error that indicates that the RAM 358 of the medal count control section 350 is defective. The lending machine communication abnormality is an error such that a lending notification is not received even though the VL signal from the lending machine 700 is in the ON state, which will be described later in detail. 235(b), all seven segments of the instruction monitor 125 shown in FIG. Also, the effect image display device 157 displays an error code for display.

The gaming machine fraud information includes the setting state information and the front door information shown in FIG. 232(a) described using FIG. It contains information, a security signal indicating that fraud is being detected, and the like.

The information on the number of game information is the information on the current bet amount and the information on the payout amount. These two pieces of information are distinguished by type information. The current bet number is included in the start lever acceptance command (game control state command) when the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted and the start lever acceptance command (game control state command) is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350. bet is the current bet value. Also, when a payout command (game control state command) is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350, the number of payouts is the value of the number of payouts included in the payout command.

Returning to the explanation using FIG. 234(b), in the game machine information notification transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 at a cycle of 300 ms, the game machine information of the code specified by the game machine information type is included. stored. That is, when the value of the gaming machine information type is 0, the gaming machine performance information, when the value of the gaming machine information type is 1, the gaming machine installation information, and when the value of the gaming machine information type is 2, the hall controller・Incorrect monitoring information is stored. The gaming machine performance information, the gaming machine installation information, and the hole controller/fraud monitoring information have different notification intervals, and the gaming machine performance information is notified once at the longest first time (for example, 180 seconds), The gaming machine installation information is notified once every second time period (eg, 60 seconds), and the hall control/fraud monitoring information is notified at the shortest third time period (eg, 300 ms of notification cycle). When the notification timings of these three pieces of information overlap, the notification of the gaming machine installation information has the highest priority, followed by the notification of the gaming machine performance information. The lowest priority is the hall control/fraud monitoring information with the highest number of notifications.

FIG. 234(c) is a diagram showing the specific contents of the data portion of the count notification transmitted from the medal count control section 350 to the lending machine 700 at intervals of 300 ms. Note that, as shown in FIG. 233, the count notification is sent within a range of 90 ms or more and 100 ms or less from the start of notification of the gaming machine information notification. This is managed by a counting notification interval timer set to 90 ms in step S3303 shown in FIG. 258 to be described later. Further, although details will be described later, when the count button 171 shown in FIG. , the number of medals corresponding to the number of short presses becomes the counted number. On the other hand, when the cycle of 300 ms arrives while the counting button 171 is pressed for 500 ms or more, the number of sheets to be counted is 50 sheets. That is, the number of sheets to be counted can be set in units of one sheet, or 50 sheets can be set at once. However, if the number of counted medals exceeds the value of the number of game medals stored in the RAM 358, this value of the number of game medals is set as the number of counted medals. The medal number information is information representing the number of medals to be counted determined by the operation of the counting button 171 until the cycle of 300 ms arrives. The number of counted accumulated medals is information representing the number of counted medals accumulated since the power was turned on.

FIG. 234(d) is a diagram showing the specific contents of the data portion of the lending notification sent from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control section 350 at intervals of 300 ms. Note that, as shown in FIG. 233, the lending machine 700 notifies the medal count control unit 350 of the lending notification within 170 ms from the start of reception of the counting notification. The medal count control unit 350 monitors whether or not the lending notification is notified within 170 ms by the lending notification interval timer set to 170 ms in step S3502 shown in FIG. 260 to be described later. When the lending button 707 of the lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 227 is operated, if the "monetary balance" of the card is a predetermined amount (eg, 1000 yen) or more, the number of medals corresponding to the predetermined amount (eg, 50) is the number of loaned medals. On the other hand, if the "monetary balance" of the card is less than the predetermined amount, the number of medals converted from the current balance at the predetermined rate becomes the number of loaned medals. The information on the number of loaned medals is information representing the number of loaned medals corresponding to the operation of the loan button 707 in this way. It should be noted that the predetermined amount and the number of medals corresponding to the predetermined amount can be set in the lending machine 700 in advance.

FIG. 234(e) is a diagram showing specific contents of the data portion of the lending reception result response returned from the medal number control section 350 to the lending machine 700. FIG. Although details will be described later, in the medal number control unit 350, the number of loaned medals notified by the loan notification is 50 or less, or the number of game medals stored in the RAM 358 is less than the lending threshold value (for example, 15000). or whether counting processing is not performed, etc., and decides whether the loaned medal number reception result is normal or abnormal. This receipt result is sent to the lending machine 700 in the lending receipt result response.

Next, the game control state command that the game control unit 302 shown in FIG. 233 transmits to the medal number control unit 350 every 2.98 ms will be described.

FIG. 236 is a table showing game control state commands.

The game control state command is a 16-bit command, the most significant bit of the high-order byte is used as a strobe signal, the remaining high-order 7 bits represent the command type, and the low-order byte represents the content. FIG. 236 also shows command offsets used for transmission.

The game control unit 302 transmits a command representing advantageous state information (RB information, BB information, AT information), and after 2.98 ms, transmits a command representing setting state information (information during setting change, information during setting confirmation). After 2.98 ms have elapsed, a command representing front door state information (door open information) is transmitted. This completes the transmission of the gaming machine status information.

Then, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the total number of inserted sheets in 3 bytes (total inserted number information) is divided into three 1-byte portions and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, the first byte of the command type with the upper byte of 13H is transmitted, and after 2.98 ms, the second byte of the command type with the upper byte of 14H is transmitted, and after 2.98 ms, the upper byte is 15H. Send the 3rd byte with the command type of .

Subsequently, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the total number of payouts in 3 bytes (total number of payouts information) is divided into 1-byte portions 3 times and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, the first byte of the command type with the upper byte of 16H is transmitted, and after 2.98 ms, the second byte of the command type with the upper byte of 17H is transmitted, and after 2.98 ms, the upper byte is 18H. Send the 3rd byte with the command type of .

Then, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the MY counter value in 3 bytes (MY counter value information) is divided into 3 batches of 1 byte each and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, the 1st byte of the command type with the upper byte of 19H is transmitted, and after 2.98 ms, the 2nd byte of the command type with the upper byte of 1AH is transmitted, and after 2.98 ms, the upper byte is 1BH. Send the 3rd byte with the command type of .

Furthermore, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, the information representing the total number of payouts of the role product in 3 bytes (information on the total number of payouts of the role product) is divided into three 1-byte portions three times at intervals of 2.98 ms. Send with That is, the 1st byte is transmitted with the command type of which the upper byte is 1CH, and after 2.98ms, the 2nd byte is transmitted with the command type of which the upper byte is 1DH, and after 2.98ms, the upper byte is 1EH. Send the 3rd byte with the command type of .

Then, when 2.98 ms elapses, information representing the total number of continuous bonuses paid out in 3 bytes (continuous bonuses total payout number information) is divided into three 1-byte portions and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, the 1st byte is transmitted with the command type whose upper byte is 1FH, and after 2.98 ms, the 2nd byte is transmitted with the command type whose upper byte is 20H, and after 2.98 ms, the upper byte is 21H. Send the 3rd byte with the command type of .

Subsequently, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the number of games in 2 bytes (number of games information) is divided into two 1-byte portions and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, the first byte of the command type with the upper byte of 22H is transmitted, and after 2.98 ms, the second byte of the command type with the upper byte of 23H is transmitted.

Then, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, the role ratio monitor information is transmitted over 5 commands at intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, the command type with the upper byte of 24H transmits the information indicating the role ratio, the command type with the upper byte of 25H transmits the information indicating the continuous role ratio with the command type of the upper byte of 26H, and the advantageous section ratio is sent with the command type with the upper byte of 26H. , the command type with the upper byte of 27H transmits the information indicating the instructed role product ratio, and the command type with the upper byte of 28H sends the information indicating the role product state ratio. This completes the transmission of the gaming machine performance information.

Furthermore, when 2.98 ms has passed, the game control unit information is transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms over 15 commands. That is, the information representing the IC chip ID number of the game control unit 302 by 4 bytes is divided into 4 times by 1 byte and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. Next, the information representing the IC chip maker code of the game control unit 302 in 3 bytes is divided into 1-byte portions 3 times and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. Subsequently, the information representing the IC chip product code of the game control unit 302 in 8 bytes is divided into 1-byte portions 8 times and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. This completes the transmission of the gaming machine installation information.

Finally, send the checksum value. When the transmission of the checksum value is completed, it returns to the transmission of the advantageous state information, and thereafter repeats transmitting the game control state commands shown in FIG. 236 one by one at intervals of 2.98 ms. In addition, when there is a game control priority command, the transmission of the game control state command is interrupted until this command is transmitted.

Next, the medal number control state command transmitted by the medal number control section 350 shown in FIG. 233 to the game control section 302 every 5.96 ms will be described.

FIG. 237 is a table showing medal number control state commands.

The medal number control state command is also a 16-bit command, and the most significant bit of the upper byte is used as a strobe signal, the remaining upper 7 bits indicate the command type, and the lower byte indicates the content. Note that FIG. 237 also shows command offsets used for transmission.

The medal count control section 350 transmits VL signal information indicating whether or not the VL signal from the lending machine 700 is in an ON state. This VL signal information corresponds to basic information, and may include other information.

Then, when 5.96 ms has elapsed, the information representing the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 in 2 bytes is divided into upper and lower 1-byte portions and transmitted at intervals of 5.96 ms. That is, the command type with the upper byte of 02H is transmitted for the lower 1 byte, and when 5.96 ms elapses, the command type with the upper byte of 03H is transmitted for the upper 1 byte.

When 5.96 ms elapses, information representing the counted number of sheets (counted number of sheets information) is transmitted, and when 5.96 ms elapses, information representing the rented number of sheets (lending number of sheets information) is transmitted.

Finally, the error code described using FIG. 235(b) is transmitted. When the transmission of the error code is completed, the process returns to the transmission of the VL signal information, and thereafter, the medal count control state command shown in FIG. 237 is repeatedly transmitted in order every 5.96 ms. In addition, when there is a response command to the game control priority command, transmission of the medal number control state command is interrupted until this command is transmitted.

Next, the security command transmitted from the game control unit 302 shown in FIG. 233 to the first sub-control unit 400 with a period of 100 ms will be described.

The security command includes VL signal information indicating whether or not the VL signal is on, door open information indicating whether or not the front door 102 is open, and "the number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358. information, information representing the counted number of sheets, information representing the number of rented sheets, and the like. The information representing the "number of game medals", the information representing the number of counted tokens, and the information representing the number of loaned tokens are the information transmitted from the medal count control section 350 by the medal count control state command.

Various processing commands are also transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 . The various processing commands include, for example, a normal return command when power is restored, a setting change start command related to setting value changes, a setting change end command including changed setting values, an error occurrence command and an error cancellation command, and the number of input sheets. a bet command including a settlement button command indicating that the settlement button has been pressed; an effect information command including effect information; a start lever reception command indicating that the operation of the start button 135 has been received; Examples include first to third press commands accompanying operation acceptance, game information commands including game information, payout start commands representing start of payout, and the like. Errors in the error generation command and the error cancellation command include errors indicated by the error codes described with reference to FIG. This includes an open error, a lending machine abnormality error in which the VL signal is turned off, and the like.

FIG. 238 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control priority command is transmitted from the game control section 302 to the medal number control section 350. FIG.

The game control priority command is a command transmitted with priority over the game control state command. The game control unit 302 transmits the game control priority command to the medal control unit 350 again if there is a retransmission request from the medal control unit 350 after transmitting the game control priority command.

Figure 239 (a) is a diagram showing the details of the game control priority command.

When the game control priority command is transmitted to the medal number control section 350, a response command is returned from the medal number control section 350, and the transmission of the medal number control state command is continued without this response command being returned. There are two types of things. The former game control priority command is called a game control priority command 1, and the latter game control priority command is called a game control priority command 2. FIG. 238 shows a communication sequence when the game control priority command 1 is transmitted.

The game control priority command 1 includes a payout command, an insertion command, and a settlement command. As for the payout command, the payout number (0 to 15) is transmitted with the command type of which the upper byte is 04H, then the command serial number is transmitted with the command type of which the upper byte is 05H, and finally the command type of which the upper byte is 06H. to send the checksum. That is, in the transmission of the payout command, three commands are transmitted continuously.

The input command transmits the number of inserted sheets (0 to 3 sheets) with a command type of which the upper byte is 07H, then transmits the command serial number with a command type of which the upper byte is 08H, and finally a command type of which the upper byte is 09H. to send the checksum. That is, three commands are continuously transmitted even when an input command is transmitted.

For the settlement command, the number of sheets to be settled (0 to 3 sheets) is transmitted with the command type with the upper byte of 0AH, then the command serial number is transmitted with the command type with the upper byte of 0BH, and finally the command type with the upper byte of 0CH. to send the checksum. That is, three commands are continuously transmitted even when the settlement command is transmitted.

The number-of-medals control unit 350 shown in FIG. 238 transmits a response command when the game control priority command 1 is received.

FIG. 239(b) is a diagram showing the details of the response command returned from the medal count control section 350 to the game control section 302. FIG.

The response command is sent in response to the payout command (payout response), in response to the input command (input response), and in response to the settlement command (settlement response). There is The response command has a value of 00H in the upper byte, which is the value of the command type. The payout response is a response command that includes any one of normal, abnormal, and a re-request for the payout command. Here, normal corresponds to completion of payout, and abnormal corresponds to a case where the number of game medals exceeds a payout threshold value (for example, 16383 medals) due to payout.

The input response is a response command that includes any one of normal, abnormal, and a re-request of the input command. It should be noted that normal here corresponds to completion of loading, and abnormal corresponds to failure of loading or invalidity of loading.

The settlement response is a response command that includes any one of normal, abnormal, and a re-request of the settlement command. It should be noted that normal here corresponds to the completion of settlement, and abnormality corresponds to the case where the number of game medals exceeds the settlement threshold value (for example, 16383) due to settlement. The settlement threshold is the same value as the payout threshold described above.

FIG. 240 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when the game control priority command 2 is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 239(a), the game control priority command 2 includes an error occurrence command, a RAM clear command, and a start lever operation command. The error occurrence command is a command type whose high-order byte is 01H, and is a command including that various errors shown in FIG. 235(b) have occurred.

The RAM clear command is a command type in which the upper byte is 02H, and the RAM 308 normality determined by the game control unit 302 or the RAM 308 defect determined by the game control unit 302 is included.

The start lever acceptance command is a command type whose upper byte is 03H, and since the bet amount is determined when the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted, information indicating the determined bet amount (current bet amount: 1 to 3) is included. command.

《Pattern arrangement》
Each reel 110 to 112 is provided with a predetermined number of symbols of a plurality of types. The slot machine 100 in this embodiment is configured to stop the corresponding reels 110 to 112 within the maximum withdrawal range from the position where the stop operation is performed, in order to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

《Types of winning roles》
The winning combination of the slot machine 100 includes a special combination, a replay combination, and a small combination. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

《Types of internally elected roles》
In the game, an internal winning combination is determined by lottery at the start of the game, and a winning combination corresponding to this internal winning combination is possible in the game. Depending on the combination, the result of internal winning may be carried over to the next game.

《Types of game status》
The slot machine 100 is provided with various states with different degrees of advantage, and the state changes to change the degree of advantage to improve the interest of the game.

《Overview of processing》
Processing of the game control unit 302, the medal count control unit 350, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings. It should be noted that the present embodiment employs a so-called medal-less configuration in which information corresponding to the number of real medals (virtual number of medals) is used without using actual medals. number” shall be used.

《Game control section main processing》
First, the game control section main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the game control section 302 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of a game control part main process.

As described above, the game control unit 302 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by a reset interrupt and executes the game control unit main processing shown in FIG.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initialization, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt is disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, and various variables stored in the RAM 308 (including the MY counter, which will be described later) are initialized. , permits the WDT 314 to operate, sets initial values, and the like. Note that the contents of the RAM 308 are initialized when the setting is changed. Also, when it is determined that the backup data in the RAM 308 is abnormal in the recovery process, the contents of the RAM 308 are initialized. When this initialization is performed, a RAM clear command including information as to whether or not the initialization has been completed normally is sent to the medal count control section 350 .

In step S102, medal insertion/start lever acceptance processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S103, a valid pay line is determined.

In step S104, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current game state, and an internal lottery (lottery for a combination) is performed using this and the random number obtained from the random number generation circuit 316. , to determine internally elected hands. As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including the working combination) is internally won, the flag for that winning combination is turned on.

In step S105, reel stop data corresponding to the stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the game control section 302 .

In step S106, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started under the condition that the game interval timer (subtracted by the timer updating process described later) is 0, and the initial value is set to the game interval timer. Also, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to transmit a reel rotation start command to the first sub-controller 400 . After that, when the reels 110-112 reach a predetermined rotational speed, the optical sensors provided on each reel are detected, and the symbol position of each reel is grasped, the stop operation to the stop buttons 137-139 is enabled. The game interval counter secures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) to suppress gambling.

In step S107, a reel stop control process is executed. In this processing, when one of the stop buttons 137-139 is pressed after the stop operation is validated, the reels 110-112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137-139 are stopped. Specifically, every time a stop operation is performed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of pull-in frames set in the stop table. Further, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared for the first stop operation, and reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared for the second stop operation. For each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, the corresponding command (first 1st to 3rd stop commands) to the first sub-controller 400. When all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S108.

In step S108, a winning determination process is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. After determining the winning combination, preparations are made to transmit the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S109, a medal awarding process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S110, game state control processing is performed. Here, the status regarding the game state is updated based on the result of the game.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing.

Next, using FIG. 242, the details of the medal insertion/start lever reception processing (step S102) in the game control unit main processing of FIG. 241 will be described. 241. This figure is a flow chart of the medal insertion/start lever acceptance process (step S102) in FIG.

First, in step S1001, which is executed first, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S1003, and if there is some error status, the process proceeds to step S1002.

In step S1002, error notification processing corresponding to the error status is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1001 again.

In step S1003, one interruption time waiting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1004.

In step S1004, interrupt processing is prohibited, and the process proceeds to step S1005.

In step S1005, it is determined whether or not a setting key operation has been accepted. If the operation of the setting key is accepted, the process proceeds to step S1006, and if the operation of the setting key is not accepted, the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1006, processing for confirming acceptance of the setting key operation is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1001 again.

In step S1007, it is determined whether the VL signal is on. This VL signal is a signal that is always transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control section 350 in an ON state. The game control section 302 grasps the state of the VL signal based on the information transmitted from the medal number control section 350 . If the VL signal is on, the process proceeds to step S1008, and if the VL signal is off, the process proceeds to step S1001 again.

In step S1008, it is determined whether or not the operation of the start lever 135 has been accepted. If the operation of the start lever 135 has been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1009, and if the operation of the start lever 135 has not been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1011.

In step S1009, it is determined whether or not the replay flag is on. This replay flag is a flag that is set to ON when a replay is awarded by winning a replay role. If the replay flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1010, and if the replay flag is on, the medal insertion/start lever reception processing is terminated.

In step S1010, the current bet number (current bet number) is compared with the number required to start the game (startable number). If the current bet number is smaller than the startable number, the process proceeds to step S1011, and if the current bet number is equal to or greater than the startable number, the process proceeds to step S1012.

In step S1011, processing during medal insertion is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1001 again. Details of the processing during medal insertion will be described later with reference to FIG. 243 .

In step S1012, 03H is set in the upper byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1013. The value set here is used to indicate that the transmitted command is the start lever acceptance command.

In step S1013, the current number of bets is set in the lower byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal number control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1014.

In step S1014, priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1015, a start lever acceptance command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and this medal insertion/start lever acceptance processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 243, details of the processing during medal insertion (step S1011) in the medal insertion/start lever reception processing of FIG. 242 will be described. 242. This figure is a flow chart of the process during medal insertion (step S1011) in FIG.

First, in step S1101 executed first, it is determined whether or not the operation of the settlement button 134 has been accepted. If the operation of the checkout button 134 has been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1102, and if the operation of the checkout button 134 has not been received, the process proceeds to step S1103.

In step S1102, a checkout button process is executed, and this process during medal insertion ends. Details of the settlement button process will be described later using FIG.

In step S1103, it is determined whether or not any of the bet buttons 130 and 132 has been operated. If the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 has been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1104, and if the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 has not been accepted, the process during medal insertion ends.

In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the replay flag is on. This replay flag is a flag that is set to ON when a replay is awarded by winning a replay role. If the replay flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1105, and if the replay flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1114.

In step S1105, 0 is set as the requested number of sheets, and the process proceeds to step S1106. This requested number is a value used for setting the number of medals exchanged with the medal number control section 350 .

In step S1106, the current bet amount and the maximum bet amount (3 in this embodiment) are compared. If the current bet amount is not equal to the maximum bet amount, the process proceeds to step S1107, and if the current bet amount is equal to the maximum bet amount, the process proceeds to step S1110.

At step S1107, a value obtained by subtracting the current bet number from the maximum bet number is set as the required number of coins, and the process proceeds to step S1108.

In step S1108, it is determined whether or not the bet buttons 130 and 132 determined to have received the operation are the one bet button 130 or not. If the bet buttons 130 and 132 determined to have received the operation are the one bet button 130, the process proceeds to step S1109; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1110.

In step S1109, 1 is set as the requested number of sheets, and the process proceeds to step S1110.

From step S1105 to step S1109, the requested number of coins becomes 0 if the current bet number is the maximum bet number. Also, when the MAX bet button 132 is operated while the current bet amount is less than the maximum bet amount, if the maximum bet amount is 3 and the current bet amount is 0, the requested number is 3, and if the current bet amount is 1. , the requested number is 2, and if the current bet number is 2, the requested number is 1. Further, when the bet-one button 130 is operated while the current bet amount is less than the maximum bet amount, the requested number of bets becomes one.

In step S1110, 07H is set in the upper byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1111. Note that the value set here is used to indicate that the command to be transmitted is an input command.

In step S1111, processing for transmitting variation information to the medal number control unit is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1112. Details of the variation information transmission process addressed to the medal number control unit will be described later using FIG.

In step S1112, a response result to the command transmitted in step S1111 is waited, and it is determined whether or not this result is "normal". If the response result is "normal", the process proceeds to step S1113, and if the response result is not "normal", the process proceeds to step S1114.

In step S1113, the requested number is added to the current bet amount, and the process proceeds to step S1114.

In step S1114, a bet button acceptance command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit, and this processing during medal insertion ends.

Next, details of the checkout button process (step S1102) in the medal insertion process of FIG. 243 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the settlement button processing (step S1102) in FIG.

First, in step S1201 executed first, a settlement button acceptance command is transmitted to the first sub-controller, and the process proceeds to step S1202.

In step S1202, it is determined whether or not the replay flag is on. This replay flag is a flag that is set to ON when a replay is awarded by winning a replay role. If the replay flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1203, and if the replay flag is on, this settlement button process is terminated.

In step S1203, the requested number of coins and the current bet number are set, and the process proceeds to step S1204.

In step S1204, 0AH is set in the upper byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1205. Note that the value set here is used to indicate that the command to be transmitted is the settlement command.

In step S1205, processing for transmitting variation information to the medal number control section is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1206. Details of the variation information transmission process addressed to the medal number control unit will be described later using FIG.

In step S1206, it is determined whether or not the response to the command sent in step S1205 was "normal". If the response result is "normal", the process advances to step S1207, and if the response result is not "normal", this settlement button processing ends.

At step S1207, the current bet number is set to 0, and the settlement button process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 245, the variation information transmission process to the medal number control section in the process during medal insertion in FIG. ), and variation information transmission processing (step S1605) addressed to the medal count control section in the medal awarding processing of FIG. 243, 244, and 248. This figure is a flow chart of the variation information transmission processing (steps S1111, S1205, and S1605) addressed to the medal count control section.

First, in step S1301, which is executed first, an initial value (4 in this embodiment) is set as the remaining number of transmissions, and the process proceeds to step S1302.

In step S1302, information indicating that the response result is "abnormal" is set, and the process proceeds to step S1303. This response result is overwritten by the response result from the medal count control section 350, but if it is not overwritten (no response), it indicates "abnormal".

In step S1303, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is some kind of error status, this processing for transmitting variation information addressed to the medal number control unit is terminated, and if there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S1304.

In step S1304, an initial value (a value corresponding to 100 ms in this embodiment) is set to the value of the response wait timer, and the process proceeds to step S1305.

In step S1305, 1 is subtracted from the remaining number of transmissions, and the process proceeds to step S1306.

In step S1306, if the value of the remaining number of transmissions is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1307.

In step S1307, triple command transmission processing is executed, and the process advances to step S1308. The details of this triple command transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1308, if the value of the response wait timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1309, and if the value of the response wait timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S1303 again.

In step S1309, if a response from the medal count control section 350 has been received, the process proceeds to step S1310, otherwise the process proceeds to step S1308 again.

At step S1310, if the result of receiving the response from the medal number control unit 350 is "request", the process proceeds to step S1303 again, and if the result is otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1311.

In step S1311, the reception result of the response from the medal count control section 350 is stored as the response result, and the process proceeds to step S1312.

In step S1312, the command serial number is incremented by 1, and the processing for transmitting variation information addressed to the medal count control unit is terminated.

Next, using FIG. 246, details of the triple command transmission process (step S1307) in the variation information transmission process addressed to the medal count control section in FIG. 245 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the triple command transmission process (step S1307) in FIG. Here, the triple command is a command composed of a group of commands that are transmitted three times in succession. It is a series of commands.

First, in step S1401 executed first, the checksum value is set to 0 (initialized), and the process proceeds to step S1402.

In step S1402, the requested number of medals is set in the lower byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1403.

In step S1403, priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1404, the transmission content (lower byte) is used to update the checksum value.

In step S1405, 1 is added to the value of the upper byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1406.

In step S1406, the command serial number is set in the lower byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal number control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1407.

In step S1407, priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1408, the transmission content (lower byte) is used to update the checksum value.

In step S1409, 1 is added to the value of the upper byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal number control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1410.

In step S1410, a checksum is set in the lower byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal count control section 350, and the process proceeds to step S1411.

In step S1411, priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, referring to FIG. 247, priority command transmission processing (step S1014) addressed to the medal number control unit in the medal insertion/start lever reception processing in FIG. Details of the command transmission processing (steps S1403, S1406, and step S1409) will be described. 242 and 246. This figure is a flow chart of the priority command transmission processing (steps S1014, S1403, S1406, and step S1409) addressed to the medal number control section in FIGS.

First, in step S1501 that is executed first, it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit is empty. If this transmission buffer is empty, the process proceeds to step S1502, and if the transmission buffer is not empty, this step S1501 is repeated.

In step S1502, the transmission content (2 bytes) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control section, and this priority command transmission processing addressed to the medal number control section ends.

Next, using FIG. 248, details of the medal awarding process (step S109) in the game control unit main process of FIG. 241 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the medal giving process (step S109) in FIG.

First, in step S1601, which is executed first, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S1602, and if there is some error status, the process proceeds to step S1603.

In step S1602, the value of the payout number is set as the requested number, and the process proceeds to step S1604.

In step S1603, error notification processing corresponding to the error status is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1601 again.

In step S1604, 04H is set in the upper byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1605. The value set here is used to indicate that the transmitted command is a payout command.

In step S1605, a variation information transmission process (FIG. 245) to the medal count control unit is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1606.

In step S1606, it is determined whether or not the response to the command transmitted in step S1605 was "normal". If the response result is "normal", the process proceeds to step S1607, and if the response result is not "normal", the process proceeds to step S1608.

In step S1607, a payout command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit, and this medal awarding process ends.

In step S1608, if there is no error request, a command indicating that the number of game medals is in an overflow state (cannot be added by payout) is sent to the first sub-control unit, and the process proceeds to step S1601.

<< Game control unit timer interrupt processing >>
Next, the game control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of a game control part timer interruption process.

The game control unit 302 is provided with a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (once every 1.49 ms in this embodiment). load processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 1.49 ms, which is the cycle of the game control unit timer interrupt.

In step S203, error monitoring processing is executed. Here, processing is performed to deal with various errors such as an abnormality in the state of communication with the medal count control section 350 and an abnormality in the opening/closing state of the door. If there is any error status, an error occurrence command including information on this error status is sent to the medal count control section 350. FIG.

In step S204, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area. Note that the state of the optical sensor is confirmed in this process.

In step S205, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S206, a medal count control command reception process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S207, game control command transmission processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S208, effect command transmission processing is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission in the main processing of the game control unit 302, timer interrupt processing, etc. are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In this embodiment, the output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 consists of 16 bits. Bit 15 is strobe information (if ON, indicates that data is set) ~ 14 are command types (for example, basic command, bet command, start lever reception command, internal winning command, reel rotation start command accompanying the start of rotation of the reels 110 to 112, stop button 137 to 139 operation acceptance) First to third press commands, first to third stop commands associated with stopping the reels 110 to 112, winning commands, payout number commands and payout completion commands accompanying medal payout processing, game state update commands, etc.), bits 0 to Reference numeral 10 consists of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it is possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the game control unit 302, and is included in the output schedule information Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S209, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S204, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities and medal payout abnormalities is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, various lamps 336 and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S210, security command transmission processing is executed. Specifically, a security command is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 every 100 ms. This security command contains VL signal information indicating whether or not the VL signal is on, door open information indicating whether or not the front door 102 is open, and "the number of game medals" stored in the RAM 308. , information representing the counted number of sheets, information representing the number of rented sheets, and the like.

In step S211, timer update processing is performed. For example, a process of updating various timers in units of time, such as subtracting a game interval timer, is executed.

In step S212, it monitors whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low voltage signal has been received (power cutoff has been detected), the process proceeds to step S214, and if a low voltage signal has not been received (power cutoff has not been detected), the process proceeds to step S213. move on.

In step S213, a timer interrupt termination process is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, processing such as setting the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register is performed. Then, it returns to the game control part main processing shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S214, information (return data) that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of the power failure, is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and the used area of the RAM 308 is saved. is derived and stored in RAM 308, and the power supply status is set to "normal".

Next, using FIG. 250, the details of the disconnection determination process, which is one of the error monitoring processes (step S203) in the game control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 249, will be described. 249. This figure is a flow chart of disconnection determination processing, which is one of the error monitoring processing (step S203) in FIG.

First, in step S2001 executed first, if the value of the disconnection determination timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S2002, and if the value of the disconnection determination timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S2003.

In step S2002, if the strobe signal transmitted from the medal number control section 350 is on, the process proceeds to step S2004, and if the strobe signal is off, the process proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2003, an initial value (a value corresponding to 20 ms in this embodiment) is set as the value of the disconnection determination timer, and the process proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2004, an initial value (a value corresponding to 20 ms in this embodiment) is set as the value of the disconnection determination timer, and the process proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2005, if the value of the timer for disconnection determination is 1, the process proceeds to step S2006, and if the value of the timer for disconnection determination is not 1, this disconnection determination process ends.

In step S2006, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S2007, and if there is some error status, this disconnection determination process ends.

In step S2007, information indicating a disconnection error with the medal count control section 350 is set as the error status, and this disconnection determination process is terminated.

Next, using FIG. 251, the details of the medal number control command reception process (step S206) in the game control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 249 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the medal count control command reception process (step S206) in FIG.

First, in step S2101 executed first, if the strobe signal transmitted from the medal count control section 350 is ON, the process proceeds to step S2102, and if the strobe signal is OFF, this medal count control command reception processing is terminated.

In step S2102, the information in the RAM 308 is updated based on the command received from the medal count control section 350. FIG. These commands include 6 types of medal count control state commands (Fig. 237) and response commands (Fig. 239(b)), and the command type can be identified by the upper byte. That is, the upper byte of the received command is referenced to identify the command type, and the contents of the RAM 308 are updated based on the contents.

In step S2103, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S2104, and if there is some error status, this medal number control command reception process is terminated.

In step S2104, if the received command is a command containing an error code (an error code in the medal count control section 350), the error code is set as the error status. If there is no error in the medal number control section 350, an error code indicating normality is set in the error status, but in this case, there is no error status.

Next, using FIG. 252, details of the game control command transmission process (step S207) in the game control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 249 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the game control command transmission process (step S207) in FIG.

First, in step S2201 that is executed first, it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control section 350 is empty. If this transmission buffer is empty, the process proceeds to step S2202, and if this transmission buffer is not empty, the process proceeds to step S2207.

In step S2202, the command offset (see FIG. 236) is repeatedly added and updated by 1 within the range of 1 to 41 (1 after 41). In this embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 236, a configuration is adopted in which 41 types of commands are repeatedly transmitted in order from the game control section 302 to the medal count control section 350 . The command offset is used to sequentially switch the type of command to be transmitted.

In step S2203, the command corresponding to the command offset and the information to be targeted by this command are read out to generate the transmission content, and the transmission content is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control section 350.

In step S2204, it is determined whether the command offset is 41 or not. Of the 41 types of commands transmitted from the game control means to the medal number control section 350, the last command (command transmitted 41st) is a check generated based on the transmission contents of the commands up to that point. It has become Sam. That is, the checksum is updated for command offsets from 1 to 40 (step S2205), and when the command offset reaches 41, the updated checksum is sent to the medal count control unit 350 (step S2203, step S2207), the checksum value is initialized to generate a new checksum (step S2206). After the above processing, the process advances to step S2207.

In step S2207, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control section 350 are output to the medal number control section 350 (the I/O output port is updated). The information output here is received by the medal number control section 350 when the strobe signal is set to ON in step S2209 which will be described later.

In step S2208, it is determined whether or not the strobe signal to the medal count control section 350 is off. If the strobe signal to the medal number control section 350 is OFF, the process proceeds to step S2209, and if the strobe signal to the medal number control section 350 is ON, the process proceeds to step S2210.

In step S2209, the strobe signal for the medal count control section 350 is set to ON, and this game control state command transmission processing is terminated.

In step S2210, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 are cleared, and the process proceeds to step S2211.

At step S2211, the strobe signal to the medal count control section 350 is set to OFF, and this game control state command transmission processing is terminated.

<<Medal number control unit main processing>>
Next, the medal count control unit main processing executed by the CPU 354 of the medal count control unit 350 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the medal count control section.

As described above, the medal count control section 350 is provided with an activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) that outputs an activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 354 of the medal number control section 350 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by a reset interrupt and executes the medal number control section main processing shown in FIG.

When power is turned on, power-on processing is first performed in step S301. Here, the WDT is initialized and restarted until the power supply voltage reaches a predetermined voltage (9 V) or higher, and when the power supply voltage reaches the predetermined voltage, access to the RAM 358 is permitted and an interrupt cycle is set. be done. In addition, communication circuit settings and the like are also performed.

In step S302, RAM abnormality determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S303. The details of this RAM abnormality determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S303, preparation processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S304. Details of this preparatory processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S304, processing for transmitting gaming machine information notification is executed, and the process proceeds to step S305. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S305, a count notification transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S306. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S306, reception confirmation processing of the rental notice is executed, and the process proceeds to step S307. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S307, if the rental notification reception flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S308, and if the same flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S304 again.

In step S308, a lending reception result response transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S304 again. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, details of the RAM abnormality determination process (step S302) in the medal number control unit main process of FIG. 253 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart of the RAM abnormality determination process (step S302) in FIG.

First, in step S3001 executed first, if the power status is "normal", the process proceeds to step S3002, and if the power status is other than "normal", the process proceeds to step S3005.

In step S3002, a checksum value is derived based on the data in RAM 358, and the process proceeds to step S3003.

In step S3003, the checksum value derived in step S3002 is compared with the checksum value derived at the time of power failure. , and if these values are different, it is determined that the checksum value is not normal, and the process advances to step S3005.

In step S3004, normal RAM clear processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3008. In this embodiment, there are four types of RAM clear processing, and as shown in FIG. 255, the normal RAM clear processing has the fewest clear targets. In the RAM 358, in addition to the area for storing information during the game, an area for storing hardware information such as a chip ID, an area for storing information on the state of the gaming machine such as the ratio of advantageous sections, and an area for storing information received from the game control unit 302 Although there is a buffer that temporarily stores the information that has been played, in normal RAM clear processing, the area that mainly stores the information during the game is cleared.

In step S3005, all RAM clear processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3006. Of the four types of RAM clear processing, the all-RAM clear processing has the largest number of objects to be cleared, and clears the entire area as shown in FIG.

In step S3006, information indicating "RAM failure" is stored as RAM failure information, and the process proceeds to step S3007.

In step S3007, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S3008.

In step S3008, if the number of game medals clear button 172 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S3009, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3011.

In step S3009, the number of game medals is set to 0, and the process proceeds to step S3010.

In step S3010, information indicating "detected" is set as game medal clear detection information, and the process proceeds to step S3011.

In step S3011, the power-on flag is set to ON.

In step S3012, execution of interrupt processing is permitted.

In step S3013, this determination processing is repeatedly executed until the strobe signal ON from the game control unit 302 is detected, and when the strobe signal ON is detected, the process proceeds to step S3014.

In step S3014, execution of interrupt processing is prohibited.

In step S3015, the power-on flag is set to off.

In step S3016, it is determined whether or not the game control unit RAM clear command of the game control priority command shown in FIG. 239(a) has been received. If this command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3017; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3020.

At step S3017, if the information included in the game control unit RAM clear command is information indicating clearing "normal", the process proceeds to step S3018, and if not information indicating "normal", the process proceeds to step S3019.

In step S3018, limited (2) RAM clear processing is executed. In this process, as shown in FIG. 255, the area excluding chip information, role ratio monitor information, etc. is cleared.

In step S3019, limited (1) RAM clear processing is executed. In this process, as shown in FIG. 255, the area excluding chip information and the like is cleared.

In step S3020, if the information indicating "RAM failure" is stored as the RAM failure information, the process proceeds to step S3021. do.

In step S3021, information (error code E8) indicating "RAM defect" is set as the error request set value.

In step S3022, error request setting processing is executed. The details of this error request setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, details of the error request setting process (step S3022) in the RAM abnormality determination process and the like in FIG. 254 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart of the error request setting process (step S3022) in FIG. 254 and the like.

First, in step S3101 executed first, if no error code is set in the error request, the process advances to step S3102, and if some error code is already set, this error request setting process ends.

In step S3102, the error request setting value (error code) is set as the error request.

In step S3103, if the error request is "E9" shown in FIG. 235(b), the process advances to step S3104; otherwise, the process advances to step S3105.

In step S3104, the lending machine communication abnormality error setting flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S3105.

In step S3105, if the error request is "E7" shown in FIG. 235(b), the process proceeds to step S3106; otherwise, this error request setting process ends.

At step S3106, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to ON, and the error request setting process is terminated.

Next, using FIG. 257, the details of the preparation process (step S303) in the medal number control section main process of FIG. 253 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the preparation process (step S303) in FIG.

First, in step S3201 executed first, an initial value (5 in this embodiment) is set to the value of the lending machine communication abnormality counter.

In step S3202, the chip information (ID, manufacturer code, product code) of medal number control section 350 is updated. These pieces of information are stored in the ROM of the medal control section.

In step S3203, interrupt processing is permitted.

In step S3204, while the game control chip ID acquisition flag is ON, this processing is repeatedly executed, and when the game control chip ID acquisition flag is set to OFF, the process proceeds to step S3205.

In step S3205, an initial value (a value corresponding to 60.196 seconds in this embodiment) is set to the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer.

In step S3206, an initial value (a value corresponding to 180.588 seconds in this embodiment) is set to the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer.

Next, details of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S304) in the medal number control unit main process of FIG. 253 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S304) in FIG.

First, in step S3301 executed first, this processing is repeatedly executed until the value of the game machine information notification interval timer becomes 0, and when the value of the timer becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S3320.

In step S3302, an initial value (a value corresponding to 300.98 ms in this embodiment) is set to the gaming machine information notification interval timer.

In step S3303, a value corresponding to 90 ms is set as the count notification interval timer value.

In step S3304, the value of the number of game medals is set as the number of game medals for count determination.

In step S3305, gaming machine information type acquisition processing is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S3306, preparations for transmission of various game machine information corresponding to the game machine information type are made. Specifically, when the value of the gaming machine information type is 0, the transmission of the gaming machine performance information is prepared, and when the value of the gaming machine information type is 1, the transmission of the gaming machine installation information is prepared, and the game is played. If the device information type value is 2, preparations are made for transmission of hall controller/unauthorized monitoring information.

At step S3307, if the value of the gaming machine information type is 2, the process proceeds to step S3308, and if the value of the gaming machine information type is other than 2, the process proceeds to step S3311.

In step S3308, the number of inserted medals is set to zero.

In step S3309, the number of payout medals is set to zero.

At step S3310, the value of the number of game information is set to zero.

In steps S3311 to S3317, various types of gaming machine information (telegram length, command type, gaming machine information serial number, gaming machine type, gaming machine information type, gaming machine information, checksum) (see FIGS. 234(a) and 234(b)) are sequentially transmitted. It should be noted that the checksum is a value updated based on the content of transmission up to that point.

In step S3318, the gaming machine information serial number is updated by one within the range of 1-255. Note that the value of the gaming machine information serial number is 0 only when the power is turned on.

Next, using FIG. 259, the details of the gaming machine information type acquisition process (step S3305) in the gaming machine information notification transmission process of FIG. 258 will be described. This figure is a flowchart of the gaming machine information type acquisition process (step S3305) in FIG.

First, in step S3401 executed first, if the value of the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S3402, and if the value of the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3404.

In step S3402, an initial value (a value corresponding to 60.196 seconds in this embodiment) is set to the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer.

In step S3403, 1 is set to the gaming machine information type, and the gaming machine information type acquisition process is terminated.

At step S3404, 2 is set to the gaming machine information type, and the process proceeds to step S3405.

In step S3405, if the value of the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer is 0, the process advances to step S3406, and if the value of the timer is not 0, the gaming machine information type acquisition processing ends.

In step S3406, an initial value (a value corresponding to 180.588 seconds in this embodiment) is set to the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer.

In step S3407, 0 is set to the gaming machine information type, and the gaming machine information type acquisition process is terminated.

Next, the details of the count notification transmission process (step S305) in the medal count control unit main process of FIG. 253 will be described with reference to FIG. 253. This figure is a flow chart of the count notification transmission process (step S305) in FIG.

First, in step S3501, which is executed first, this processing is repeatedly executed until the value of the count notification interval timer becomes 0, and when the value of the timer becomes 0, the process advances to step S3502.

In step S3502, an initial value (a value corresponding to 170 ms in this embodiment) is set to the rental notification interval timer.

From step S3503 to step S3505, the message length, command type, and counting serial number are sequentially transmitted to the lending machine 700. FIG.

In step S3506, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set to zero.

In step S3507, if the VL signal is on, the process proceeds to step S3508, and if the same signal is off, the process proceeds to step S3513. This VL signal is a signal that is always sent from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control section 350 in an ON state if normal.

In step S3508, if the number of sheets to be counted is 0, the process proceeds to step S3509, and if the number of sheets to be counted is 0, the process proceeds to step S3513.

In step S3509, the input prohibition flag is set to ON.

In step S3510, if the expected number of medals to be counted is equal to or greater than the number of game medals for counting determination, the process proceeds to step S3511.

In step S3511, the value of the number of game medals for count determination is set as the counted number.

In step S3512, the number of sheets to be counted is set to the number of sheets to be counted.

In step S3513, the counted number of sheets is transmitted to the lending machine 700. FIG.

In step S3514, the value of the number of counted medals is subtracted from the number of game medals.

In step S3515, the number of sheets to be counted is set to zero.

In step S3516, the input prohibition flag is set to off.

In step S3517, the value of the number of counted medals is added to the total number of medals counted.

In step S 3518 , the total number of medals counted is transmitted to the lending machine 700 .

In step S3519, the checksum is sent to the lending machine 700. FIG. The checksum value transmitted here is a value updated based on the data transmitted to the lending machine 700 in this counting notification transmission process.

In step S3520, the counting serial number is updated by one within the range of 1-255. Note that the value of the count serial number is 0 only when the power is turned on.

Next, details of the lending notice reception confirmation process (step S306) in the medal count control unit main process of FIG. 253 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the lending notice reception confirmation process (step S306) in FIG.

First, in step S3601, which is executed first, if the lending notice reception flag is off, the process proceeds to step S3602, and if the flag is on, this lending notice reception confirmation processing ends.

In step S3602, if the value of the rental notification interval timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S3603, and if not 0, the process returns to step S3601.

At step S3603, if the VL signal is on, the process proceeds to step S3604, and if the signal is off, this lending notice reception confirmation processing is terminated. This VL signal is a signal that is always transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control section 350 in an ON state.

In step S3604, the value of the lending machine communication abnormality counter is decremented by 1, and this lending notification reception confirmation processing ends.

Next, using FIG. 262, the details of the lending reception result response transmission process (step S308) in the medal count control unit main process of FIG. 253 will be described. 253. This figure is a flow chart of the loan reception result response transmission process (step S308) in FIG.

First, in step S3701 executed first, an initial value (5 in this embodiment) is set in the lending machine communication abnormality counter.

In step S3702, the lending machine communication abnormality error setting flag is set to off.

In step S3703, if the loaned number of sheets reception result is "normal", the process proceeds to step S3704; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3707.

In step S3704, the value of the lending serial number is set to the normal lending serial number.

In step S3705, the value of the rental serial number is set as the rental serial number for confirmation. The check lending serial number is a value used for comparison with the next lending serial number (step S4104 in FIG. 265), and this step S3705 is provided in preparation for this comparison.

In step S3706, the lending serial number for confirmation is updated by one within the range of 1-255. Note that the value of the rental serial number for confirmation is 0 only when the power is turned on.

From step S3707 to step S3711, the message length, command type, normal lending serial number, lending number receipt result, and checksum) are sequentially transmitted to the lending machine 700 . Note that the checksum is a value updated based on the content of the previous transmission.

At step S3712, if the lending number receipt result is "normal", the process proceeds to step S3712, and if it is other than "normal", this lending receipt result response transmission process ends.

In step S3713, standby processing is executed until the transmission in steps S3707 to S3711 is completed.

In step S3714, the number of loaned tokens is added to the number of game medals, and the lending reception result response transmission process is terminated.

《Timer interrupt processing of medal number control section》
Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the medal count control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the medal count control unit 350 will be described. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of timer interrupt processing of the medal count control section.

The medal number control section 350 has a counter timer that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (once every 0.745 ms in this embodiment). Interrupt processing is started at predetermined intervals.

In step S401, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU to the stack area is performed.

In step S402, the WDT is periodically activated (in this embodiment, the WDT count value does not exceed the initial set value and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). (Once every 0.745 ms, which is the interrupt period).

In step S403, input port state update processing (port reading) is performed. In this input port state update process, the input contents for the I/O input port are stored in the signal state storage area within the RAM 358 .

In step S404, lending notification reception processing is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S405, update processing of the planned number of sheets to be counted is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S406, a game control unit command reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S407, error monitoring processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S408, processing for transmitting a medal number control command addressed to the game control unit is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S409, a display device display process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S410, a timer update process is performed to update various timers in units of time.

In step S411, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low voltage signal is received (power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S413, and if a low voltage signal is not received (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S412. move on.

In step S412, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, processing such as setting the value of each register temporarily saved in step S401 to each original register is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the medal count control section shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S413, information (return data) that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of the power failure, is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 358, and the used area of the RAM 358 is saved. is derived and stored in RAM 358, and the power supply status is set to "normal". It should be noted that the same processing (step S214 in FIG. 249) is executed when the game control unit 302 also detects the interruption of the power supply, but the processing here ends before the processing on the game control unit 302 side ends. If you do so, the command from the game control unit 302 cannot be received. In order to prevent such a problem from occurring in the present embodiment, a circuit configuration is adopted in which the processing here is terminated after the processing on the game control section 302 side is completed.

Next, using FIG. 264, the details of the lending notification reception process (step S404) in the medal count control section timer interrupt process of FIG. 263 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the lending notification reception process (step S404) in FIG.

First, in step S4001 executed first, the lending notice reception flag is set to off.

In step S4002, if a rental notification from the rental machine 700 has been received, the process advances to step S4003; otherwise, this rental notification reception processing ends.

In step S4003, the information in the RAM 358 is updated based on the received lending notice. That is, the data included in the rental notification is stored in RAM 358 .

In step S4004, a lending number determination process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S4005, the determination result of step S4004 is set as the loan number receipt result.

In step S4006, the lending notice reception flag is set to ON, and this lending notice reception processing ends.

Next, using FIG. 265, the details of the lending number determination process (step S4004) in the lending notification reception process of FIG. 264 will be described. 264. This figure is a flow chart of the loan number determination process (step S4004) in FIG.

First, in step S4101, which is executed first, the determination result is set to "abnormal".

In step S4102, a checksum is calculated from the received rental notification data.

In step S4103, the checksum value included in the received rental notification is compared with the value calculated in step S4102. End the process.

In step S4104, the value of the lending serial number included in the received lending notification is compared with the value of the lending serial number for confirmation stored in the RAM 358. If the two are equal, the flow advances to step S4105. End the number-of-sheets determination process. If the previous lending notice was normally received, the checking lending serial number here will be the value set in steps S3705 and S3706 in FIG. 262 (the updated lending serial number received last time). .

In step S4105, if each information of the message length and command type of the received rental notification is information corresponding to the rental notification, it is determined to be normal, and the process proceeds to step S4106. do.

In step S4106, if the value of the number of rented sheets included in the received rent notice is 0, the process proceeds to step S4111, and if the value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4107.

At step S4107, if the value of the number of game medals is less than 15000, the process proceeds to step S4108.

In step S4108, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine information type value of the previously transmitted gaming machine information notification is 2, that is, whether or not the gaming machine information notification is about hall control/illegal monitoring information. If the value is 2, the process advances to step S4109.

In step S4109, if the value of the number of counted sheets in the previously transmitted count notification is 0, the process proceeds to step S4110, and if the same value is not 0, this lending number determination processing ends.

In step S4110, if the value of the number of rented cards included in the received rent notification is 50 or less, the flow advances to step S4111, and if the same value is greater than 50, the loaned number determination processing ends.

In step S4111, the determination result is set to "normal", and the lending number determination process is terminated.

Next, using FIG. 266, the details of the scheduled count number update process (step S405) in the timer interrupt process of the medal count control section in FIG. 263 will be described. 263. This figure is a flow chart of the update processing of the number of sheets to be counted (step S405) in FIG.

First, in step S4201, which is executed first, if the power-on flag is on, the flow advances to step S4202, and if the flag is off, this update processing for the number of sheets to be counted ends.

In step S4202, if the VL signal is on, the process proceeds to step S4203, and if the same signal is off, the process proceeds to step S4213. This VL signal is a signal that is always sent from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control section 350 in an ON state if normal.

In step S4203, if the counting button 171 is being operated, the process proceeds to step S4204, and if the same button is not being operated, the process proceeds to step S4210.

In step S4204, if the count long press flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4205, and if the flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4208.

In step S4205, if the count long-press timer value is 0, the process proceeds to step S4206, and if not 0, the process proceeds to step S4207.

In step S4206, an initial value (a value corresponding to 500 ms in this embodiment) is set to the value of the count long press timer, and the process proceeds to step S4207.

In step S4207, if the count long-press timer value is 1, the process proceeds to step S4208, and if not 1, the process proceeds to step S4210.

In step S4208, the count long-press flag is set to ON.

In step S4209, the value of the planned number of sheets to be counted is set to 50, and this planned number of sheets to be counted updating process ends.

In step S4210, if the count button 171 was operated immediately before (the count button 171 was released), the process proceeds to step S4211; otherwise, this update processing of the number of sheets to be counted ends.

In step S4211, if the count long-press flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4212, and if the flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4213.

In step S4212, 1 is added to the value of the planned number of sheets to be counted, and this planned number of sheets to be counted updating process is terminated.

In step S4213, the count long-press flag is set to off.

In step S4214, 0 is set to the value of the count long-press timer.

In step S4215, the value of the planned number of sheets to be counted is cleared (set to 0), and this planned number of sheets to be counted updating process ends.

Next, using FIG. 267, the details of the game control unit command reception processing (step S406) in the medal number control unit timer interrupt processing of FIG. 263 will be described. The figure is a flow chart of the game control unit command receiving process (step S406) in FIG.

First, in step S4301 executed first, if the switch from off to on of the strobe signal from the game control unit 302 is detected, proceed to step S4302, otherwise this game control unit command reception processing exit.

In step S4302, an initial value (in this embodiment, a value corresponding to 190 ms) is set to the game control command disconnection timer.

In step S4303, if the received command is a game control state command, the process proceeds to step S4304, and if the received command is not the game control state command (game control priority command), the process proceeds to step S4305.

In step S4304, game control state command reception processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later using FIG.

In step S4305, game control priority command reception processing is executed. The details of this processing will be described later using FIG.

Next, using FIG. 268, details of the game control state command reception processing (step S4304) in the game control unit command reception processing of FIG. 267 will be described. The figure is a flowchart of the game control state command reception process (step S4304) in FIG.

First, in step S4401, which is executed first, if the received command is a command to send a checksum, the process proceeds to step S4404; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4402. In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which 41 types of commands are repeatedly transmitted from the game control means to the medal number control section 350, and the final command is calculated from the contents of the previous 40 types of commands. It is a command to send sum. That is, for the 1st to 40th commands, the process proceeds to step S4402, and for the 41st command, the process proceeds to step S4404.

In step S4402, the contents of the command reception buffer are updated according to the contents of the received command.

In step S4403, the checksum is updated based on the content of the received command, and the game control state command receiving process is terminated.

In step S4404, the value of the checksum updated by the content of the 1st to 40th command in step S4403 and the value of the checksum included in the command received from the game control unit 302 are compared, and if both are equal, it is normal. It determines, it progresses to step S4405, and if both differ, this game control state command reception processing will be complete|finished.

In step S4405, the checksum value updated in step S4403 is cleared.

At step S4406, the value of the gaming machine status information buffer (the gaming machine status information value shown in FIG. 232(a)) is set in the RAM 358 among the contents of the command reception buffer.

At step S4407, if the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4408, and if the flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4410.

In step S4408, the acquired chip ID is acquired based on the information in the gaming machine installation information buffer among the contents of the command reception buffer.

In step S4409, if the chip ID stored in RAM 358 and the acquired chip ID acquired in step S4408 match, the process proceeds to step S4410; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4414.

At step S4410, the value of the game machine installation information buffer (the value of the game machine installation information shown in FIG. 232(c)) is set in the RAM 358 among the contents of the command reception buffer.

In step S4411, the value of the role ratio monitor information buffer is set in the RAM 358 out of the contents of the command reception buffer.

At step S4412, the value of the gaming machine performance information buffer is set in the RAM 358 out of the contents of the command reception buffer. The values of the gaming machine performance information shown in FIG. 232(b) are set in the RAM 358 by steps S4411 and S4412.

In step S4413, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to OFF, and this game control state command reception process is terminated.

In step S4414, information indicating "chip ID number mismatch" (error code E7) is set as the error request set value.

In step S4415, the error request setting process of FIG. 256 is executed, and this game control state command reception process is terminated.

Next, details of the game control priority command reception processing (step S4305) in the game control unit command reception processing of FIG. 267 will be described with reference to FIGS. These figures are flowcharts of the game control priority command reception process (step S4305) in FIG.

First, in step S4501 executed first, if a triple command has been received, the process advances to step S4502, and if a command other than the triple command, the process advances to step S4514 in FIG. As described above, the triple command is a command composed of a group of commands that are transmitted three times in succession. is a triple command. That is, among the game control priority commands, if the above triple command is received, the process proceeds to step S4502, and if the error occurrence command, RAM clear command, start lever reception command excluding these commands is received, the step of FIG. 270 The process proceeds to S4514.

In step S4502, if the last command of the triple command is received, the process advances to step S4504; otherwise, the process advances to step S4503. In this embodiment, the last command of the triple command is a checksum, and the value of this checksum is calculated based on the contents of the commands excluding the last command. That is, for commands other than the last command, the process advances to step S4503 to store the contents thereof in the reception buffer, and when the last command is received, the process advances to step S4504.

In step S4504, information indicating "request" is set in the response command.

In step S4505, a checksum is calculated based on the contents of the reception buffer updated in step S4503.

In step S4506, the checksum value calculated in step S4505 and the checksum value included in the last command of the triple command are compared. If different, this game control priority command reception processing is terminated.

In step S4507, if the later-described game control command serial number update flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S4508, and if the same flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S4510.

In step S4508, the value of the serial number of the triple command stored in the reception buffer is set to the value of the game control command serial number.

In step S4509, the game control command serial number update flag is set to OFF.

Note that steps S4507 to S4509 are provided for initializing the command serial number for determination.

In step S4510, if the value of the serial number of the triple command stored in the reception buffer and the value of the game control command serial number (game control command serial number updated in the previous S4511 (command serial number for judgment)) are equal, step S4511 , and if the two are different, the process proceeds to step S4512.

In step S4511, 1 is added to the game control command serial number, and the process proceeds to step S4514 in FIG.

In step S4512, information (error code E3) indicating "game control command serial number abnormality" is set as an error request setting value.

In step S4513, the error request setting process of FIG. 256 is executed, and this game control priority command reception process is terminated.

At step S4514 in FIG. 270, if the received command is a RAM clear command, the process proceeds to step S4515; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4516.

In step S4515, RAM clear command reception is executed. In this embodiment, nothing is executed here.

At step S4516, if the received command is an input command, the process proceeds to step S4517; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4518.

In step S4517, input command reception processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

At step S4518, if the received command is a settlement command, the process proceeds to step S4519; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4520.

In step S4519, settlement command reception processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

At step S4520, if the received command is a start lever acceptance command, the process proceeds to step S4521; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4522.

In step S4521, start lever acceptance command reception processing is executed. The details of this processing will be described later using FIG.

At step S4522, if the received command is a payout command, the process proceeds to step S4523; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4524.

In step S4523, a payout command reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S4523, error occurrence command reception processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 271, details of the input command receiving process (step S4517) in the game control priority command receiving process of FIGS. 269 and 270 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the input command reception process (step S4517) in FIG.

First, in step S4601 executed first, information indicating "request" is set in the response command.

At step S4602, if the input prohibition flag is off, the flow advances to step S4603, and if the flag is on, this input command reception process ends.

In step S4603, information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command.

At step S4604, if the value of the number of game medals is greater than or equal to the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the three consecutive commands), the process proceeds to step S4605; End the reception process.

In step S4605, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands) is added to the number of inserted medals.

In step S4606, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands) is added to the value of the current bet number.

In step S4607, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands) is subtracted from the value of the number of game medals.

In step S4608, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and this input command reception process ends.

Next, using FIG. 272, the details of the settlement command reception processing (step S4519) in the game control priority command reception processing of FIGS. 269 and 270 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the settlement command reception process (step S4519) in FIG.

First, in step S4701, which is executed first, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands) is subtracted from the value of the current bet.

In step S4702, if the value of the current bet number is 0, the process proceeds to step S4703, and if the value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4706.

In step S4703, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands) is subtracted from the number of inserted medals.

In step S4704, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands) is added to the number of game medals.

In step S4705, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and this settlement command reception process ends.

In step S4706, information (error code E6) indicating "unmatched number of sheets to be settled" is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4707, the error request setting process of FIG. 256 is executed, and this settlement command reception process ends.

Next, using FIG. 273, the details of the start lever reception command reception processing (step S4521) in the game control priority command reception processing of FIGS. 269 and 270 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the start lever acceptance command reception process (step S4521) in FIG.

First, in step S4801 executed first, the payout command acquisition flag is set to ON.

At step S4802, if the game interval abnormality timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S4803, and if the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4807.

In step S4803, an initial value (a value corresponding to 4.1 seconds in this embodiment) is set to the value of the game interval abnormality timer.

In step S4804, 11H (see FIG. 235 (a)) is set to the type information set value, and in subsequent step S4805 the value of the received command (the current bet number in the game control unit 302) is set to the count information set value. be. The information set here is later included in the gaming machine information and transmitted to the renting machine 700 .

In step S4806, game information setting processing is executed, and this start lever reception command reception processing is terminated. Details of the game information setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S4807, information (error code E5) indicating "game interval abnormality" is set as the error request setting value.

At step S4808, the error request setting process of FIG. 256 is executed, and this start lever acceptance command reception process ends.

Next, details of the game information setting process (step S4806) in the start lever reception command reception process of FIG. 273 and the game information setting process (step S4A19) in the payout command reception process of FIG. 275 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the game information setting process (steps S4806, S4A19) in FIGS.

First, in step S4901, which is executed first, 1 is added to the number of game information.

At step S4902, if the number of game information is 1, the process proceeds to step S4903, and if the number of game information is not 1 (is 2), the process proceeds to step S4905.

In step S4903, as type information 1, the type information set value (the value set in step S4804 in FIG. 273 or step S4A14 in FIG. 275) is set.

In step S4904, the value of the count information set value is set as count information 1, and the game information setting process is terminated. Here, when the value set in step S4804 of FIG. 273 is set as type information 1, the value set in step S4805 is set, and the value set in step S4A14 of FIG. is set, the value set in step S4A16 or step S4A18 is set.

In step S4905, the value of the type information setting value (the value set in step S4804 in FIG. 273) is set as type information 2. FIG.

At step S4906, the value of the count information set value (the value set at step S4805 in FIG. 273) is set as count information 2, and the game information setting process is terminated.

Note that the type information 2 and the count information 2 are provided for transmitting information on both of them in case the game is started quickly after the payout (within the period of transmission to the lending machine 700). It is a thing. That is, when the payout information (step S4A14 in FIG. 275, etc.) is set in the type information 1 and the count information 1, the current bet amount information (step S4804, etc. in FIG. may be set to It should be noted that, from the start of the game to the payout, the reels rotate and stop, and even if there is type information or count information during that time, it will be transmitted to the lending machine 700 (cleared). 2 and the count information is never set to 2.

Next, using FIG. 275, the details of the payout command reception process (step S4523) in the game control priority command reception process of FIGS. 269 and 270 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the payout command receiving process (step S4523) in FIG.

First, in step S4A01 that is executed first, game medal clear detection information is cleared.

At step S4A02, if the payout command acquisition flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S4A03, and if the flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S4A09.

In step S4A03, if the replay has been won, the process proceeds to step S4A04, and if the regame has not been won, the process proceeds to step S4A05.

In step S4A04, 0 is set to the additional value for the number of game medals.

In step S4A05, information (error code E4) indicating "abnormal number of payouts" is set as the error request set value.

In step S4A06, if the value of the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands) is 15 or less, the process proceeds to step S4A07, and if the same value is greater than 15, the process proceeds to step S4A10.

In step S4A07, the value of the number of payout medals is set to the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands).

In step S4A08, the game medal addition value is set to the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands).

In step S4A09, information (error code E2) indicating "abnormal game order" is set as the error request set value.

In step S4A10, the error request setting process of FIG. 256 is executed, and this payout command reception process is terminated.

In step S4A11, game medal overflow confirmation processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

At step S4A12, if the information of the response command indicates "normal", the process proceeds to step S4A13; otherwise, this payout command reception process is terminated.

In step S4A13, the payout command acquisition flag is set to OFF.

In step S4A14, 21H (see FIG. 235(a)) is set to the type information set value.

In step S4A15, if the player wins the replay role, the process proceeds to step S4A18, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4A16.

In step S4A16, the value of the received command (the value contained in the first command among the triple commands) is set as the count information set value. The first command of the payout commands here includes the number of payouts in the game control section 302, and the number of payouts is set as the count information setting value. The information set here is transmitted to the renting machine 700 together with the type information setting value included in the gaming machine information.

At step S4A17, the current bet number is set to zero.

In step S4A18, the value of the current bet number is set as the count information set value. The information set here is transmitted to the renting machine 700 together with the type information setting value included in the gaming machine information.

In step S4A19, the game information setting process of FIG. 274 is executed, and this payout command receiving process is terminated.

Next, using FIG. 276, the details of the game medal number overflow confirmation process (step S4A11) in the payout command reception process of FIG. 275 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the game medal number overflow confirmation process (step S4A11) in FIG.

First, in step S4B01 executed first, information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command.

In step S4B02, the total value of the number of game medals and the added value of the number of game medals is set as the addition result.

In step S4B03, if the value of the addition result is 16383 or less, the process proceeds to step S4B04, and if the value of the addition result is greater than 16383, this game medal number overflow confirmation processing is terminated.

In step S4B04, the value of the addition result is set to the number of game medals.

In step S4B05, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and this game medal count overflow confirmation process is terminated.

Next, using FIG. 277, the details of the error occurrence command reception processing (step S4524) in the game control priority command reception processing of FIGS. 269 and 270 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the error generation command reception process (step S4524) in FIG.

First, in step S4C01 executed first, an error request is cleared. When an error occurrence command is received from the game control unit 302, the error on the medal number control unit 350 side is cleared by the processing here, so the error of the game control unit 302 is preferentially processed.

In step S4C02, if information (error code E1) indicating "game control disconnection" is set in the received command, the process proceeds to step S4C08, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4C03.

At step S4C03, if the received command contains information indicating "abnormal game order" (error code E2), the process proceeds to step S4C08; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4C04.

At step S4C04, if information (error code E3) indicating "game control command serial number abnormality" is set in the received command, the process proceeds to step S4C08, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4C05.

In step S4C05, if the received command contains information indicating "medal number control RAM error" (error code E8), the process proceeds to step S4C08; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4C06.

In step S4C06, if information (error code E0) indicating "medal number control disconnection" is set in the received command, the process proceeds to step S4C08; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4C07.

At step S4C07, if information (error code rE) indicating "game control RAM failure" is set in the received command, the process proceeds to step S4C08; otherwise, this error generation command reception process ends.

In step S4C08, the game control command serial number update flag is set to ON, and the error occurrence command reception process is terminated. By setting this flag to ON, the command serial number for determination is initialized (step S4508 in FIG. 269).

Next, details of the error monitoring process (step S407) in the medal count control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 263 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the error monitoring process (step S407) in FIG.

First, in step S4D01 executed first, if the value of the game control command disconnection timer is 1, the process proceeds to step S4D02, and if the same value is not 1, the process proceeds to step S4D04.

In step S4D02, information (error code E1) indicating "game control disconnection" is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4D03, the error request setting process of FIG. 256 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4D04.

In step S4D04, if the value of the rental machine communication abnormality counter is 1, the process proceeds to step S4D05, and if the value is not 1, this error monitoring process ends.

In step S4D05, if the lending machine communication abnormality error setting flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4D06, and if the flag is on, the error monitoring process ends.

In step S4D06, information (error code E9) indicating "rental machine communication error" is set as the error request set value.

In step S4D07, the error request setting process of FIG. 256 is executed, and this error monitoring process is terminated.

Next, using FIG. 279, the details of the game control unit addressed medal number control command transmission process (step S408) in the medal number control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 263 will be described. 263. This figure is a flow chart of the game control unit addressed medal count control command transmission process (step S408) in FIG.

First, in step S4E01 that is executed first, information on the VL signal is updated.

In step S4E02, if the above-described power-on flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4E03, and if the same flag is on, this game control unit addressed medal count control command transmission process is terminated.

In step S4E03, if the value of the strobe counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S4E04, and if not 0, the process proceeds to step S4E09.

In step S4E04, some response command to be transmitted to the game control unit 302 (insertion command reception processing in FIG. 271, response command set in either settlement command reception processing in FIG. 272 or payout command reception processing in FIG. 275) is set. If not, the process proceeds to step S4E05, and if any response command is set, the process proceeds to step S4E07.

In step S4E05, the command offset is repeatedly added and updated by 1 within the range of 1 to 6 (1 after 6). In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the medal number control state commands (six types of commands) described with reference to FIG. The command offset is used to sequentially switch the type of command to be transmitted.

In step S4E06, the command corresponding to the command offset and the target information of this command are read out to generate transmission contents, and the transmission contents are set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control section 302. When transmitting the information on the number of game medals, this value is divided into upper bytes and lower bytes and transmitted using two of the six types of commands. Among them, the value of the number of game medals obtained when the previous command was transmitted is used.

In step S4E07, the response command set in either the insertion command reception process of FIG. 271, the settlement command reception process of FIG. 272, or the payout command reception process of FIG.

In step S4E08, the response command set in any one of the insertion command reception process of FIG. 271, the settlement command reception process of FIG. 272, or the payout command reception process of FIG. 275 is cleared.

In step S4E09, if the value of the strobe counter is 3 or less, the process proceeds to step S4E10, and if the value is greater than 3, the process proceeds to step S4E11.

In step S4E10, the strobe signal addressed to the game control unit 302 is set to ON.

In step S4E11, the content of the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302 is cleared.

In step S4E12, the strobe signal addressed to the game control unit 302 is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to step S4E13.

At step S4E13, the value of the strobe counter is incremented by one. This value is repeatedly updated within the range of 0 to 7 (0 after 7).

In step S4E14, the content of the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302 is output to the game control unit 302, and the processing for transmitting the medal number control command addressed to the game control unit ends. The information output here is received by the game control unit 302 when the strobe signal addressed to the game control unit 302 is set to ON.

Next, with reference to FIG. 280, the details of the indicator display processing (step S409) in the medal count control unit timer interrupt processing of FIG. 263 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the display device display process (step S409) in FIG.

First, in step S4F01 executed first, if the value of the number of game medals is different from the value of the number of display game medals, the process proceeds to step S4F02, and if the two values are the same, the process proceeds to step S4F07.

In step S4F02, if the value of the discrete timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S4F03, and if not 0, the process proceeds to step S4F07.

In step S4F03, if the value of the number of game medals is greater than the value of the number of game medals for display, the process proceeds to step S4F04, and if the value of the number of game medals is smaller than the value of the number of game medals for display, the process proceeds to step S4F05.

In step S4F04, 1 is added to the number of display game medals.

In step S4F05, 1 is subtracted from the number of display game medals.

In step S4F06, a value corresponding to 4 ms is set as the value of the discrete timer.

In step S4F07, the number of game medals for display is displayed, and this display device display processing is terminated.

<<Modification 1>>
Here, a modified example (hereinafter referred to as Modified Example 1) of processing relating to medal insertion will be described with reference to FIGS. 281 to 283. FIG. FIG. 281 is a modification of the medal insertion process of FIG. 243, FIG. 282 is a modification of the triple command transmission process of FIG. 246, and FIG. 283 is a modification of the insertion command reception process of FIG. be.

First, in the modification shown in FIG. 281, step S1121 is provided between steps S1107 and S1108 in the processing shown in FIG. 243, and step S1122 is provided between steps S1109 and S1110. Also, steps S1112 and S1113 in FIG. 243 are deleted and step S1123 is provided. These processes will be described below.

In step S1121, the input number limitation flag is set to ON.

In step S1122, the input number limitation flag is set to OFF.

In step S1123, the value of the content of the response is added to the value of the current bet.

In the modification shown in FIG. 282, step S1402 is deleted from the processing shown in FIG. 246, and step S1421 is provided. This processing will be described below.

In step S1421, information on the requested number of medals and the input number limitation flag is set in the lower byte of the transmission contents (2 bytes) to the medal count control section 350. FIG.

In the modification shown in FIG. 283, step S4603 is deleted from the processing shown in FIG. Moreover, steps S4621, S4622, and S4623 are newly provided after the No route in the judgment of step S4604, and step S4608 is deleted and step S4624 is provided. These processes will be described below.

In step S4621, the information of the input number limitation flag included in the received command (the first command among the three consecutive commands) is referred to. If the flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4622. The process advances to step S4623.

In step S4622, for the received command value storing the value of the requested number included in the received command (the first command of the triple commands), that value is set as the number of game medals, and the process proceeds to step S4605.

In step S4623, the received command value storing the requested number of sheets included in the received command (the first command of the triple command) is set to 0, and the process proceeds to step S4624.

In step S4624, the received command value is set in the response command, and this input command receiving process ends.

<<Modification 2>>
Here, a modified example (hereinafter referred to as modified example 2) of the update processing of the number of sheets to be counted will be described with reference to FIG. 284 . FIG. 284 is a modification of the planned number update process of FIG.

First, in the modification shown in FIG. 284, step S4204 is deleted from the processing shown in FIG. Further, step S4206 is deleted and step S4221 is provided, and step S4209 is deleted and step S4222 is provided. These processes will be described below.

In step S4221, the value of the long-press timer is set according to the pressing time of the counting button 171. FIG.

In step S4222, the number of sheets to be counted is set according to the pressing time of the count button 171. FIG.

<<Modification 3>>
Here, a modified example (hereinafter referred to as modified example 3) of the update processing of the number of sheets to be counted will be described with reference to FIG. 285 . FIG. 285 is a modification of the planned number update process of FIG.

First, in the modification shown in FIG. 285, steps S4231 and S4232 are provided before step S4207 in the processing shown in FIG. Moreover, steps S4233 and S4234 are newly provided after the No route in the judgment of step S4207, and steps S4235 and S4236 are provided before step S4210. Further, step S4237 is provided after step S4215. These processes will be described below.

In step S4231, if the value of the automatic counting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S4232, and if not 0, the process proceeds to step S4207.

In step S4232, the value of the automatic counting timer is set to a value corresponding to 2.0 seconds, and the process proceeds to step S4207.

In step S4233, if the value of the automatic counting timer is 1, the process proceeds to step S4234, and if not 1, the process proceeds to step S4235.

In step S4234, the automatic count flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S4208.

In step S4235, if the automatic counting flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4210, and if the same flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4236.

In step S4236, if the number of game medals is 0, the process proceeds to step S4213, and if the same value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4208.

In step S4237, the automatic counting flag is set to OFF, and this update processing of the planned number of sheets to be counted ends.

<<Processing of the first sub-controller 400>>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 286(a) is a flow chart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. 286(b) is a flow chart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 286(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, in step S501, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S501. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state.

In step S503, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S505.

In step S505, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S507, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the game control unit 302, is executed. The details of this command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 286(d).

In step S509, effect control processing is performed. Here, production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408 . This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing updating processing of the effect data when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S511, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if there is a command for the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S509, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S513, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if there is a command to various lamps 420 in the performance data read in step S509, this command is output to the drive circuit 422. FIG.

In step S515, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if there is a shutter control instruction in the effect data read out in step S509, the shutter control corresponding to this instruction is performed.

In step S517, information output processing is performed to set the transmission of the control command to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if there is a control command to be sent to the second sub-controller 500 in the performance data read out in step S509, the setting for outputting this control command is made, and the process returns to step S503.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 286(b). This command reception interrupt processing is processing executed when the first sub-control section 400 detects a strobe signal output by the game control section 302 . In step S521 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the game control unit 302 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 286(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S531, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S503 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 286(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S503, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S533, transmission of the device data to the second sub-control section 500 set in step S515, update processing of the random number value for effect, and the like are performed.

Next, details of the command processing (step S507) in the first sub-controller main processing of FIG. 286(a) will be described with reference to FIG. 286(d). This figure is a flowchart of the command processing (step S507) in FIG. 286(a).

First, in step S541 executed first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed command. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S543; otherwise, the command processing is terminated.

In step S543, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the game control unit 302, is executed.

<<Processing of the second sub-controller 500>>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 287(a) is a flow chart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 287(b) is a flow chart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 287(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. 287(d) is a flow chart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S601 in FIG. 287(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S601. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S603, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S605.

In step S605, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S607, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S609, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S607, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S611, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S609. For example, if there is an image control instruction in the performance data read out in step S609, the image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). This image control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 287(d). When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S603.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 287(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 . In step S615 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 287(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S617, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S603 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 287(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S603, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S619, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing of step S611 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 287(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S621, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 518 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S623, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S625; otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S625, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S621, the CPU 504 obtains image data information (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, and so on) forming the display image. , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516 . The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S627, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S629, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image rendering. wait for is entered.

In step S631, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<<Description of operation>>
The operation of the above-described slot machine 100 will be described below.

[Operation at power-on]
In the medal count control unit 350, the contents of the RAM are backed up when the power is turned off. Then, when it is determined that there is no abnormality in the RAM when the power is turned on, normal RAM clear processing is performed, and the state at the time of power off is restored (determination of Yes in step S3003 in FIG. 254). When the power is turned on for the first time, the initial state is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the RAM when the power is turned on, all RAM clear is executed (determination of No in step S3003 in FIG. 254). Furthermore, information indicating "RAM failure" is stored in the RAM failure information, so that information indicating "RAM failure" (error code E8) is set in the error request (Yes in steps S3006 and S3020 in FIG. 254). determination, step S3102 in FIG. 256). This error information is transmitted to the game control unit 302 (FIG. 279), and error notification based on this information is executed (step S1002 in FIGS. 251 and 242). The game control unit 302 does not clear the contents of the RAM even if an error is received from the medal count control unit 350. FIG. Furthermore, in the medal number control unit 350, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to ON, so that various information is updated (initialized) when the game control unit state command is received (Fig. 254 (determination of Yes in step S3007 of FIG. 268 and step S4407 of FIG. 268).

Also, when the power is turned on, a RAM clear command may be transmitted from the game control unit 302 (step S101 in FIG. 241). The medal count control section 350 that receives this RAM clear command employs a configuration that clears the RAM in response to the RAM clear command from the game control section 302 (Yes in step S3016 of FIG. 254). In this case, the medal number control unit 350 temporarily permits the interrupt processing, and then, upon receiving a command from the game control unit 302, prohibits the interrupt processing and performs subsequent processing. It is possible to reliably execute the processing when it is received (steps S3012 to S3014 in FIG. 254). Further, by setting the power-on flag to OFF while the interrupt is enabled, the counting process by operating the counting button 171 is not executed (steps S3011 and S3015 in FIG. 254).

In addition, the number of game medals can be initialized in the number of game medals control unit 350 by operating the number of game medals clear button 172 when the power is turned on (determination of YES in step S3008 in FIG. 254). At this time, information indicating "detected" is set in the game medal count clear detection information. (Fig. 258). The game medal number clear detection information is cleared when a payout command is received from the game control unit 302 (step S4A01 in FIG. 275).

[Game control state command transmission (regular transmission from game control unit 302 to medal count control unit 350)]
In the slot machine 100 , 41 types of game control state commands (see FIG. 236) are transmitted to the medal number control section 350 . Specifically, in the game control command transmission processing (step S207 in FIG. 249, FIG. 252) of the game control unit timer interrupt processing of the game control unit 302, the game control state commands are sequentially transmitted one by one to the medal count control unit. It is set in the buffer (determination of Yes in step S2201 in FIG. 252). However, when the game control priority command is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350 first, the game control state command is not set in the transmission buffer (No in step S2201 in FIG. 252).

After the game control state command and the game control priority command are set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350, the contents of this transmission buffer are output and the strobe signal is set to ON (step S2208 in FIG. 252 judgment of Yes). By setting this strobe signal to ON, the medal number control section 350 receives the command. The strobe signal is set to OFF in the next interrupt process, and the contents of the transmission buffer are also cleared (determination of No in step S2208 in FIG. 252), but the output from the I/O port is maintained as it is. . This makes it possible to stabilize reception of commands on the medal number control section 350 side. Then, when the contents of the transmission buffer are cleared, the contents of the transmission buffer are updated in order to transmit a new command in the next interrupt process (determination of Yes in step S2201 in FIG. 252). That is, in the game control unit 302, one command is transmitted while two interrupt processes are executed, and the transmission state and the transmission stop state are switched each time the interrupt process is executed. In addition, the transmission state continues for 1.49 ms (however, the output of the command itself continues for 2.98 ms), whereas the game control unit 302 has two reception timings (0.745 ms interrupt processing twice). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the command from being missed.

[Game control priority command transmission (interrupt transmission from game control unit 302 to medal count control unit 350)]
In the game control unit 302, a game control state command is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 in timer interrupt processing, but the game control priority command is given priority according to the state of the game in the game control unit main processing. It is sent to the number control unit 350 . More specifically, when the transmission buffer becomes empty in the process of the game control command transmission process (Fig. 252), the game control command transmission process in the next timer interrupt process is executed (the next game control state command is set in the transmission buffer), by setting the game control priority command in the transmission buffer in the game control unit main processing, this game control priority command is given priority over the game control state command and the number of medals control unit 350. Game control priority commands include an insertion command associated with the operation to insert game medals, a settlement command associated with the operation to settle game medals currently set in the number of bets, a start lever acceptance command associated with acceptance of start lever operation, and a game medal There are a payout command associated with payout, an error occurrence command associated with error occurrence, and a RAM clear command associated with RAM clear (FIG. 239(a)).

Among the game control priority commands, the input command, the settlement command, and the payout command each consist of three commands. Among these, the first command is a command containing information on the number of game medals to be targeted, the second command is a command containing the communication number (command serial number) of the game control priority command, and the third command is the previous command. A command containing a checksum based on the contents of two commands. Since these commands are sent consecutively without being interrupted by other commands, they are sometimes referred to as triple commands. Also, the values of the high-order bytes of the triple command are consecutive values.

If the response command from the medal number control section 350 is not received, or if the response command from the medal number control section 350 includes information indicating "request", the command is resent. (Determination of No in step S1308 in FIG. 245, determination of No in step S1310), if the upper limit number of retransmissions is exceeded, information indicating "abnormality" is set as the response result from the medal number control unit 350. (NO in steps S1302 and S1306).

In addition, when information other than "request" is included in the response command from the medal number control section 350, this information is set in the response result from the medal control section, and the command serial number is incremented by 1 (Fig. 245 steps S1311 and S1312).

[Operation of the game control unit 302 by the insertion operation (transmission of the insertion command, etc.)]
When a game medal insertion operation is performed, the number of game medals requested by this operation (requested number) is determined (steps S1105 to S1109 in FIG. 243). In this embodiment, it is possible to perform a betting operation using two types of bet buttons, ie, a 1 bet button and a MAX bet button. When the MAX bet button is operated, the number of game medals necessary for setting the maximum bet number is set as the requested number (step S1107 in FIG. 243), and when the 1 bet button is operated, 1 is added to the requested number. It is set (step S1109 in FIG. 243). However, when the current bet amount is the maximum bet amount, the required number is set to 0 by the inserting operation (determination of No in step S1106 in FIG. 243).

Subsequently, a command (the first command among the commands constituting the insertion command) consisting of upper byte data indicating that it is an insertion command and lower byte data indicating the value of the number of requested medals is sent to the medal count control unit 350. It is set in the transmission buffer (steps S1110 and S1111 in FIG. 243, steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 246, and FIG. 247). When the game control command transmission processing (step S207 in FIG. 249, FIG. 252) of the game control unit timer interrupt processing is executed in this state, the game control state command is not set in the transmission buffer, and is set in the transmission buffer first. This command is sent to the medal number control unit 350 (determination of No in step S2201 in FIG. 252).

After that, when the transmission buffer is cleared in the game control command transmission processing of the next game control unit timer interrupt processing (No judgment in step S2208 in FIG. 252), the checksum is updated, and 1 is added to the upper byte data. It is added and updated to the value indicating the second command, and the command (the second command among the commands constituting the input command) consisting of lower byte data indicating the command serial number is stored in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350. It is set (steps S1404 to S1407 in FIG. 246, FIG. 247). Then, in the game control command transmission processing (step S207 in FIG. 249, FIG. 252) of the next game control unit timer interrupt processing, the command of the transmission buffer is transmitted to the medal count control unit 350, and the next game control unit timer interrupt When the transmission buffer is cleared in the game control command transmission process of the process (No judgment in step S2208 of FIG. 252), the checksum is updated, and furthermore, 1 is added to the upper byte data to indicate the third command. 246, a command (the third command among commands constituting the insertion command) consisting of lower byte data indicating the checksum is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 (step S1408 in FIG. 246). ˜S1411, FIG. 247). Then, the command of the transmission buffer is transmitted to the medal number control section 350 in the next game control command transmission processing of the game control section timer interrupt processing (step S207 in FIG. 249, FIG. 252).

The insertion command is transmitted to the medal count control section 350 in the above flow. is added (Yes in step S1112 of FIG. 243).

In addition, when the replay role is won and the replay is granted (the replay flag is ON), the processing of the input command is not executed (determination of No in step S1104 in FIG. 243).

Also, during the period from when the input command is transmitted until when the response command is received from the medal number control unit 350, the input command is not transmitted even if the bet button is operated (step S1112 in FIG. 243 is the response command received). (Wait until the

Also, when the bet button is operated, the command is transmitted to the first sub-control section 400 regardless of whether or not a response command to the input command is received, and regardless of the contents of the response command from the medal count control section 350. (Step S1114 in FIG. 243). Upon receiving this command, the first sub-control section 400 can execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the bet button.

[Operation of game control unit 302 due to settlement operation (transmission of settlement command, etc.)]
When the insertion operation is performed, the current bet amount is added accordingly, but by operating the settlement button 134 (settlement operation), the game medals set to the current bet amount can be settled.

When the settlement operation is performed, the value of the current bet amount is set as the number of game medals requested in the settlement operation (No in step S1101 in FIG. 243, step S1203 in FIG. 244).

Subsequently, a command (the first of the commands constituting the settlement command) consisting of upper byte data indicating the settlement command and lower byte data indicating the requested number of sheets is sent to the medal count control unit 350. It is set in the transmission buffer (steps S1204 and S1205 in FIG. 244, steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 246, and FIG. 247). When the game control command transmission processing (step S207 in FIG. 249, FIG. 252) of the game control unit timer interrupt processing is executed in this state, the game control state command is not set in the transmission buffer, and is set in the transmission buffer first. This command is sent to the medal number control unit 350 (determination of No in step S2201 in FIG. 252).

Subsequently, the second and third commands among the commands that make up the settlement command are transmitted, but since this processing is the same as that for the input command, the description thereof will be omitted.

The settlement command is transmitted to the medal number control section 350 in the above flow. If the response command to this command includes information indicating "normal", the value of the current bet number is set to 0. It is set (determination of Yes in step S1206 in FIG. 244).

In the above example, the value of the current bet becomes 0 after receiving the response command (when the response command indicating "normal" is received, the value of the current bet is decremented). In the state before receiving the response command, the current bet value has not been subtracted. On the other hand, since the number of game medals is added in the medal number control section 350 which received the settlement command, the number of game medals owned by the player is temporarily increased at this point. If no response command indicating "normal" is received, the value of the current bet will not be decremented and an error will occur (No determination in step S1206 in FIG. 244), but this error can be avoided by some means. In this case, the value of the current bet amount is not subtracted. As a result, the number of medals increases by the amount added to the number of game medals by the medal number control unit 350, and the game medals are obtained illegally by the settlement operation. It will be. Therefore, the current bet value may be set to 0 before and after the settlement command is transmitted, and a configuration may be adopted in which a response command to the settlement command is not waited for (response command not used). In addition, although there is a possibility that errors in the communication state cannot be detected in this configuration that does not use the response command, communication quality is not degraded because errors in the communication state can be detected by adopting a configuration that uses the response command for the input command. can be made It should be noted that command indexes may be managed between the game control unit 302 and the medal number control unit 350, and an error may occur when the number of mismatches reaches a predetermined number (eg, 5 times). According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent an operation based on incorrect information.

Note that, when receiving a settlement command including information on the number of medals exceeding the number of inserted medals, the medal number control unit 350 may not accept the settlement and give an error. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent illegal acquisition of game medals.

Note that, when receiving a settlement command including information on the number of medals exceeding 16, the medal number control unit 350 may not accept the settlement and give an error. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent illegal acquisition of game medals.

Incidentally, when the medal number control section 350 receives a settlement command including information on the number of medals exceeding 16384, the settlement may not be accepted and an error may be made. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent illegal acquisition of game medals.

In addition, when the replay role is won and the replay is granted (the replay flag is ON), the processing of the settlement command is not executed (determination of No in step S1202 in FIG. 244).

Also, when the settlement button 134 is operated, the command is transmitted to the first sub-control section 400 regardless of whether or not the settlement command has been transmitted, and regardless of the content of the response command from the medal count control section 350 ( step S1201 in FIG. 244). Upon receiving this command, the first sub-control unit 400 can execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the checkout button 134 .

[Operation of game control unit 302 by start lever operation (transmission of start lever reception command, etc.)]
If the start lever is operated while the current bet value is equal to or greater than the startable number, the upper byte data indicating the start lever acceptance command and the lower byte data indicating the current bet value (start lever acceptance command) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350 (steps S1012 to S1014 in FIG. 242). Further, a start lever acceptance command is transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 (step S1014 in FIG. 242). Upon receiving this command, the first sub-control section 400 can execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the start lever.

[Operation of game control unit 302 due to payout (transmission of payout command, etc.)]
When the game ends and a winning combination with a payout is won, the value of the number of payouts is set to the number of game medals requested for the payout (requested number of medals) (step S1602 in FIG. 248). Subsequently, a command (the first command among the commands constituting the payout command) consisting of upper byte data indicating the payout command and lower byte data indicating the value of the requested number of coins is sent to the medal count control unit 350. It is set in the transmission buffer (steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 248, steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 246, and FIG. 247). When the game control command transmission processing (step S207 in FIG. 249, FIG. 252) of the game control unit timer interrupt processing is executed in this state, the game control state command is not set in the transmission buffer, and is set in the transmission buffer first. This command is sent to the medal number control unit 350 (determination of No in step S2201 in FIG. 252).

Subsequently, the second and third commands among the commands that make up the payout command are transmitted, but since this processing is the same as that of the input command, the explanation is omitted.

The payout command is transmitted to the medal count control section 350 in the above flow. command is transmitted (step S1607 in FIG. 248). Upon receiving this command, the first sub-control section 400 can execute an effect corresponding to the payout.

On the other hand, if the response command is "abnormal" and nothing is set in the error request, the number of game medals overflows and the payout cannot be accepted. 1 to the sub-controller 400 (step S1608 in FIG. 248). Upon receiving this command, the first sub-control section 400 can execute an effect corresponding to the overflow. It should be noted that, if the overflow state is not resolved, retransmission of the payout command is repeated, and the game cannot proceed. In this case, the overflow state can be resolved by operating the count button 171 . When the overflow state is resolved, an effect corresponding to the payout is executed and the game can proceed. In other words, when the game cannot be progressed due to overflow, the player himself/herself can deal with it without calling a clerk.

[Operation when medal number control command is received]
When the game control unit 302 receives a command from the medal number control unit 350 (detected by switching the strobe signal, step S2101 in FIG. 251), the type of this command (game control state command (FIG. 237) or response command (FIG. 239) (b)) is identified, and the contents of the RAM 308 are updated according to the command type (step S2102 in FIG. 251). Also, if the command received here is a command containing an error code, on condition that the error status in the game control unit 302 is not set, this error code is an error in the game control unit 302 The status is set (step S2104 in FIG. 251).

[Send medal count control command (from medal count control unit 350 to game control unit 302)]
In the slot machine 100, six types of medal number control state commands (see FIG. 237) are transmitted to the game control section 302. FIG. Specifically, by the medal number control command transmission processing (step S408 in FIG. 263, FIG. 279) of the medal number control unit timer interrupt processing of the medal number control unit 350, one medal number control state command is sent. It is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit one by one (judgment of Yes in step S4E04 of FIG. 279). However, when the response command is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302 first, the medal number control state command is not set in the transmission buffer (determination of No in step S4E04 in FIG. 279).

The medal number control state command and response command set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control section 302 are then output to the game control section 302 (step S4E14 in FIG. 279). In this state, if the strobe signal is set to ON (step S4E10 in FIG. 279), the game control section 302 side will receive the command. In managing the on/off of the strobe signal, a strobe counter that adds 1 for each interrupt within the range of 0 to 7 is used. 4 to 7 are set to OFF (steps S4E09 and S4E13 in FIG. 279). The transmission buffer is updated when the strobe counter is 0 (step S4E03 in FIG. 279). That is, in the medal number control section 350, one command is transmitted while the interrupt processing is executed eight times, and the transmission state and the transmission stop state are switched every time the interrupt processing is executed four times. . In addition, the transmission state continues for 2.98 ms (0.745 ms x 4 times), whereas the game control unit 302 has two reception timings (1.49 ms interrupt processing twice), so the command It is possible to prevent spillage.

[Operation when game control state command is received]
In the medal number control unit 350, when a command is received from the game control unit 302 (detected by switching the strobe signal, step S4301 in FIG. 267), if this command is a game control state command, game control state command reception processing (FIG. 267 , step S4304, FIG. 268).

As for the game control state command, 41 kinds of commands (Fig. 236) are sequentially transmitted, among which the 1st to 40th commands are temporarily stored in the buffer and the checksum is updated (No in step S4401 of Fig. 268 judgment). When the 41st command (checksum) is received, if the content is normal, the checksum is cleared, and the RAM is updated based on the information temporarily stored in the buffer (step S4406 in FIG. 268, S4410 to S4413). However, when updating the gaming machine installation information buffer, role ratio monitor information buffer, and gaming machine performance information buffer, it is executed when the chip ID stored in the RAM matches the chip ID in the gaming machine installation information buffer. (Yes in step S4409 of FIG. 268). If the IDs do not match, an error code E7 is set as an error request (No determination in step S4409 in FIG. 268). Also, when all the RAMs are cleared in the medal count control unit 350, the chip IDs stored in the RAM have already been cleared. update processing is executed (game control unit chip ID acquisition flag ON in FIG. 254, determination of No in step S4407 in FIG. 268).

[Operation when game control priority command is received]
In the medal number control unit 350, when a command is received from the game control unit 302 (detected by switching the strobe signal, step S4301 in FIG. 267), if this command is a game control priority command, game control priority command reception processing (FIG. 267 step S4305, FIGS. 269 and 270) are executed.

First, if the game control priority command is not a triple command (RAM clear command, start lever reception command, error generation command), processing corresponding to each command is executed (Fig. 270).

On the other hand, if the game control priority command is a triple command (insertion command, settlement command, payout command), the first and second commands are once stored in the buffer (step S4503 in FIG. 269), the third command , the checksum value included in this command is compared with the checksum calculated from the contents previously stored in the buffer. (steps S4504 to S4606 in FIG. 269).

Next, if the game control command serial number update flag is ON, the game control command serial number is updated to the value of the command serial number stored in the reception buffer, and the game control command serial number update flag is set to OFF (Fig. 269 determination of Yes in step S4507). It should be noted that the game control command serial number update flag is a flag that is set to ON in order to prevent a situation in which a command serial number error occurs separately after the error is resolved (FIG. 277).

Next, it is determined whether or not the game control command serial number and the command serial number stored in the reception buffer match (step S4510 in FIG. 269). Since the game control unit 302 and the medal number control unit 350 both add 1 to the command serial number (step S1312 in FIG. 245, step S4511 in FIG. 269), these values will match if there is no abnormality. If these values do not match, the error code E3 is set in the error request (No judgment in step S4510 in FIG. 269).

After the above processing, processing corresponding to each command is executed (FIG. 270).

[Operation when input command is received]
If the received game control priority command is an input command, an input command reception process is executed (step S4517 in FIG. 270, FIG. 271). In this processing, if the value included in the insertion command (hereinafter referred to as the requested number of inserted medals) is within the number of game medals, the requested number of inserted medals is added to the number of inserted medals, the requested number of inserted medals is added to the current bet number, After the requested number of inserted medals is subtracted from the number of game medals, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command (Yes in step S4604 of FIG. 271). When the requested number of inserted medals is larger than the number of game medals, information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command (NO determination in steps S4603 and S4604 in FIG. 271). The number of inserted medals is a value used in gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3308 in FIG. 258).

Note that while the counting notification transmission process is being executed, the input prohibition flag is set to ON (step S3509 in FIG. 260). It is set (determination of No in steps S4601 and S4602 in FIG. 271).

[Operation when settlement command is received]
When the received game control priority command is the settlement command, settlement command reception processing is executed (step S4519 in FIG. 270, FIG. 272). In this process, the value included in the settlement command (hereinafter referred to as settlement request number) is subtracted from the current bet amount (step S4701 in FIG. 272). If the current bet amount is 0, the number of bills requested for settlement is subtracted from the number of inserted medals, and after the number of bills requested for settlement is added to the number of game medals, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command. (determination of Yes in step S4702 in FIG. 272). The number of inserted medals is a value used in gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3308 in FIG. 258). If the current bet number is not 0, an error code E6 is set as an error request (NO determination in step S4702 in FIG. 272).

[Operation when the start lever acceptance command is received]
When the received game control priority command is the start lever acceptance command, the payout command acquisition flag is set to ON (step S4801 in FIG. 273). If this flag is not set to ON, an error may occur in the subsequent payout command reception process, and fraud prevention may be discovered. Next, if the value of the abnormal game interval timer is 0 (determination of Yes in step S4802 in FIG. 273), the initial value is set to the abnormal game interval timer (step S4803 in FIG. 273), and the game information is set. 273 (steps S4804 to S4806 in FIG. 273). Here, 11H is set as the type information set value, and this value indicates the acceptance of the start lever. Also, the current bet number is set as the count information set value. That is, in these processes, information on the number of game medals used by accepting the start lever is stored as game information. The game information is information used for the gaming machine information transmitted to the renting machine 700, and the number of pieces of this information is initialized each time the gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3310 in FIG. 258). In addition, when the game interval abnormality timer is not 0, an error code E5 is set as an error request (determination of No in step S4802 in FIG. 273). This game interval abnormality timer is a timer similar to the game interval counter (step S106 in FIG. 241) in the game control unit 302. By using this timer also in the medal number control unit 350 separately from the game control unit 302, preventing fraud.

[Operation when receiving payout command]
When the received game control priority command is a payout command, the number of game medals clear detection information is first cleared. This information is information set by operating the number of game medals clear button 172 when the power is turned on, and this information is transmitted to the lending machine 700 until it is cleared when this payout command is received. ing.

Next, if the payout command acquisition flag is not ON, an error code E2 is set as an error request (determination of No in step S4A02 in FIG. 275). This flag is a flag that is set to ON when the start lever acceptance command is received, so if this flag is OFF, it means that the payout command has been received even though the start lever acceptance command has not been received. Used for fraud prevention.

Next, if the player has won the replay, 0 is set to the game medal addition value (step S4A04 in FIG. 275). In cases other than replay wins, if the value included in the payout command (hereinafter referred to as the number of payouts) is 15 or less, the number of payouts and the additional value for the number of game medals are set to the number of payouts (Fig. 275). steps S4A07, S4A08). The number of paid-out medals is a value used in gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3309 in FIG. 258). If the payout number is greater than 15, an error code E4 is set as an error request (NO in steps S4A05 and S4A06 in FIG. 275).

Subsequently, game medal count overflow confirmation processing is executed (step S4A11 in FIG. 275, FIG. 276). Here, if the total value of the number of game medals and the added value of the number of game medals is 16383 or less, which is the upper limit value of the number of game medals for payout, this total value is taken as the number of game medals, and "normal" is indicated in the response command. Information is set (determination of Yes in step S4B03 in FIG. 276). On the other hand, if the total value is greater than the upper limit value of the number of game medals, the number of game medals is maintained as it is, and information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command (determination of No in step S4B03 of FIG. 276). Regarding the determination of the number of game medals here, as will be described later (see [Rental notification (periodic transmission from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]), in the actual operation, the number of game medals is the actual threshold value. If the actual threshold value is exceeded, the output cannot be increased (response command "abnormal"), and if the actual threshold is not exceeded, the output can be increased (response command "normal"). Any process may be used for the determination process and the determination value (16383 in this embodiment), and for example, the actual threshold does not need to be the same as the determination value for processing.

If information indicating “abnormality” is set in the response command in the game medal number overflow confirmation process, the payout command reception process is terminated, and this response command is transmitted to the game control unit 302 .

On the other hand, if information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, the payout command acquisition flag is set to OFF (step S4A13 in FIG. 275). Further, processing for setting game information is executed (steps S4A14 to S4A19 in FIG. 275). Here, 21H is set as the type information set value, and this value indicates that there was a payout. Also, the number of payouts (the current number of bets in the case of a replay win) is set as the count information set value. That is, in these processes, information on the number of game medals obtained by payout is stored as game information. The gaming information is information used for gaming machine information transmitted to the renting machine 700, and the number of pieces of this information is initialized each time gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3310 in FIG. 258).

[Notification of gaming machine information (periodic transmission from medal count control unit 350 to lending machine 700)]
In the medal number control section 350, the game machine information notification is transmitted in the medal number control section main processing (step S304 in FIG. 253, FIG. 258). This game machine information notification is configured to be executed at approximately 300 ms intervals by a game machine information notification interval timer (steps S3301 and S3302 in FIG. 258). In addition, 90 ms is set in the counting notification interval timer for adjusting the time until the counting notification executed after the game machine information notification is transmitted (step S3303 in FIG. 258).

Next, the value of the current number of game medals is set in the number of game medals for count determination. In the slot machine 100, since the number of game medals may change when performing the counting process (moving the number of game medals from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700), the value for the counting process is temporarily changed. (step S3304 in FIG. 258).

Next, the gaming machine information type is obtained (step S3305 in FIG. 258, FIG. 259). The gaming machine information notification includes gaming machine information, and as this gaming machine information, one of three types of gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, hall controller/fraud monitoring information is selected (Fig. 234). (b)). Specifically, when the gaming machine information type is 0, the gaming machine performance information is selected, when the gaming machine information type is 1, the gaming machine installation information is selected, and when it is 2, the hall controller/fraud monitoring information is selected. Here, one of 0, 1, and 2 is set as the game machine information type using the game machine installation information transmission interval timer and the game machine performance information transmission interval timer (FIG. 259). In this embodiment, the gaming machine information type is set to 1 at intervals of about 60 seconds, the gaming machine information type is set to 0 at intervals of about 180 seconds, and otherwise 2 is set to the gaming machine information type. . That is, in the game machine information notification with a cycle of about 300 ms, the game machine information mainly includes hall control/fraud monitoring information, but the game machine installation information is included in the game machine information at intervals of about 60 seconds, and the game machine information is notified at intervals of about 180 seconds. The gaming machine performance information is included in the gaming machine information at intervals. Data to be notified of gaming machine information (FIGS. 234(a) and (b)), including gaming machine information corresponding to these gaming machine information types, are set in the lending machine addressed transmission buffer (step S3306 in FIG. 258). ) are transmitted sequentially (steps S3311 to S3317 in FIG. 258). Note that the gaming machine information serial number is updated at the time of this transmission (step S3318 in FIG. 258).

Hall con/fraud monitoring information corresponding to the gaming machine information type 2 includes game information corresponding to the number of inserted medals, the number of paid-out medals, and the number of game information. After being set in the buffer, it is initialized in preparation for the next transmission (determination of Yes in step S3307 in FIG. 258).

[Counting notification (periodic transmission from the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700)]
In the medal number control section 350, a count notification is transmitted in the medal number control section main processing (step S305 in FIG. 253, FIG. 260). This count notification transmission process is configured to be executed after 90 ms from the start of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S3303 in FIG. 258, step S3501 in FIG. 260).

In the count notification transmission process, the data to be counted ((a) and (c) in FIG. 234) is set in the transmission buffer for the lending machine and sequentially transmitted (steps S3503 to S3505, S3513, and S3518 in FIG. 260). , S3519). Note that the counting serial number is updated at the time of this transmission (step S3520 in FIG. 260).

This count notification includes information on the number of sheets to be counted. When the number of sheets to be counted is 0, 0 is transmitted as the number of sheets to be counted (determination of No in step S3508 in FIG. 260, step S3513). In this case, the number of game medals does not change (step S3514 in FIG. 260). On the other hand, when a value other than 0 is set as the number to be counted, the number to be counted is set based on this value (steps S3511 and S3512 in FIG. 260), and the number of game medals is subtracted (FIG. 260). step S3514). It should be noted that the setting of the counted number and the subtraction of the number of game medals are executed in a state where the insertion operation is prohibited (steps S3509 and S3516 in FIG. 260). Note that the scheduled number of medals to be counted is set in the scheduled number of medals to be counted update processing of the timer interrupt processing of the medal count control unit (step S405 in FIG. 263, FIG. 266).

[Setting the number of medals to be counted (medal number control section 350)]
In the medal number control section 350, the processing for updating the scheduled number of cards to be counted is executed in the medal number control section timer interrupt processing (step S405 in FIG. 263, FIG. 266). The number of sheets to be counted is determined based on the set number of sheets to be counted in this process, and a count notification including this information is transmitted to the lending machine 700 .

First, the case where the counting button 171 is pressed for less than 500 ms will be described. In this case, the initial value is set to the count long-press timer (step S4206 in FIG. 266), but since the count button 171 is released before the value of the timer becomes 1 (500 ms has elapsed since it was pressed), the count button 171 is released. The long press flag is not set to ON (Yes is not determined in step S4207 in FIG. 266). When the counting button 171 is released in this state, 1 is added to the number to be counted (determination of Yes in step S4210 in FIG. 266, step S4212).

Next, the case where the count button 171 is pressed for 500 ms or longer will be described. In this case, the initial value is set to the count long-press timer (step S4206 in FIG. 266), and when the value of the timer becomes 1 (500 ms has elapsed since the key was pressed), the count long-press flag is set to ON and counts. The planned number of sheets is set to 50 (determination of Yes in step S4207 in FIG. 266). After that, while the count button 171 is kept pressed with the counting long-press flag turned on, the process of setting the scheduled number of sheets to be counted to 50 is repeated, and the number of sheets to be counted based on this scheduled number of sheets is counted each time the counting notification is sent. will be set. On the other hand, when the counting button 171 is released while the counting long-press flag is ON, the counting long-pressing flag is set to OFF, the counting long-pressing timer is set to 0, and the value of the number of sheets to be counted is cleared (step S4210 in FIG. 266). determination of Yes, determination of No in step S4211).

[Rental notification (periodic transmission from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control unit 350)]
Upon receiving the lending notification from the lending machine 700, the medal count control unit 350 updates the content of the RAM based on the content of the lending notification (step S4003 in FIG. 264). Then, it is determined whether the checksum calculated from the rental notification matches the checksum included in the rental notification (steps S4102 and S4103 in FIG. 265). Next, it is determined whether or not the confirmation lending serial number of the medal count control unit 350 matches the lending serial number included in the lending notice (step S4104 in FIG. 265). The lending serial number for confirmation holds a value obtained by adding 1 to the lending serial number included in the previously received lending notification (step S3706 in FIG. 262), and is configured so that these values match if communication is normal. It is Furthermore, it is determined whether the message length and command data are normal. If an abnormality is determined by these determinations, the determination result is set to "abnormal".

Following the above determination, if the number of rented sheets included in the rent notification is 0, the determination result is set to "normal" (determination of Yes in step S4106 in FIG. 265). On the other hand, if the loaned number is not 0, the following determination is further executed (determination of No in step S4106 in FIG. 265).

First, if the number of game medals is 15000 or more, the determination result is set to "abnormal" (determination of No in step S4107 in FIG. 265). In this embodiment, when the number of game medals is 15000 or more, it is configured so that it cannot be increased by lending. In this configuration, if the number of game medals exceeds 14,999, it cannot be increased by lending, and if it does not exceed 14,999 (if it is 14,999 or less), it will be an operation that can be increased by lending. In realizing this operation, for example, if the number is 15,000 or more, the increase due to lending is restricted, and if the number is 14,999 or less, the increase due to lending is allowed. will behave the same. Also, if the number is 14999 or less, it is possible to increase by lending. In other cases, even if the increase by lending is restricted, the operation is the same as in the present embodiment. As described above, in the actual operation, if the number of game medals exceeds the actual threshold value (14999 in the above case), the increase due to lending cannot be performed. , Any value may be used as long as there is a value that becomes the actual threshold, and any processing may be used for the determination process and the determination value (15000 in this embodiment). For example, the actual threshold does not need to be the same as the determination value for processing do not have.

Further, the above determination may be made based on the number of game medals to be added instead of the current number of game medals. However, this configuration can also be said to be a configuration in which there is a real threshold value including the number of game medals to be added to the current number of game medals. In other words, this configuration can also be said to be a configuration in which, in the actual operation, if the number of game medals exceeds the actual threshold value, the increase due to lending cannot be performed, and if the number of game medals does not exceed the actual threshold value, the increase due to lending can be performed.

Next, if the game machine information type is not 2, the determination result is set to "abnormal" (determination of No in step S4108 in FIG. 265). This embodiment is configured to accept lending when the gaming machine information type is set to 2. FIG.

Next, if the number of counted sheets is not 0, the determination result is set to "abnormal" (determination of No in step S4109 in FIG. 265). If the counted number is not 0, the number of game medals is subtracted, and if the loaned number is not 0, the number of game medals is added.

Finally, if the loaned number of sheets is greater than 50, the determination result is set to "abnormal" (determination of No in step S4110 in FIG. 265). In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of sheets to be lent out per one time is set to 50.

If it is not determined as abnormal in the above determination, the determination result is set to "normal" (determination of Yes in steps S4107 to S4110 in FIG. 265).

The determination result of the above processing is set to the loan number reception result, and the loan notice reception flag is set to ON (steps S4005 and S4006 in FIG. 264).

In addition to the lending notification reception process described above, the medal count control unit 350 executes lending notification reception confirmation processing in the medal count control unit main processing (step S306 in FIG. 253, FIG. 261). In this lending notification reception confirmation process, it is checked whether the lending notification reception flag is turned on for 170 ms from the start of the counting notification transmission process (step S3502 in FIG. 260, steps S3601 and S3602 in FIG. 261). . This lending notification reception flag is set in the lending notification reception processing of the timer interrupt processing of the medal count control unit (step S404 in FIG. 263, FIG. 264).

Even though the VL signal is on, if the lending notification reception flag is not turned on within 170 ms from the start of the counting notification transmission process, the value of the lending machine communication abnormality counter is decremented by 1 ( step S3604 in FIG. 261). The value of this lending machine communication error counter is initialized when the lending machine reception result response transmission is executed (step S3701 in FIG. 262), but an error occurs when the value of the lending machine communication error counter becomes 1 (see FIG. 262). 278 steps S4D06, S4D07).

[Rental receipt result response (periodic transmission from medal count control unit 350 to lending machine 700)]
In the medal count control unit 350, if the lending notice reception flag is set to ON after the lending notice reception confirmation processing, lending receipt result response transmission processing is executed in the medal count control unit main processing (step in FIG. 253). S308, FIG. 262).

In this lending reception result response transmission process, parameters related to lending machine communication abnormality are initialized (steps S3701 and S3702 in FIG. 262).

Subsequently, if the lending number receipt result is set to "normal", the value of the lending serial number included in the received lending notice is set to the normal lending serial number (step S3704 in FIG. 262). Also, after the value of the lending serial number included in the received lending notice is set as the lending serial number for confirmation, 1 is added to the value of the lending serial number for confirmation (steps S3705 and S3706 in FIG. 262). In other words, the value of the lending serial number for confirmation here is the same value as the value of the lending serial number scheduled to be included in the next lending notification.

Subsequently, data ((a) and (e) in FIGS. 262A and 26B) to be the target of the lending reception result response are set in the lending machine-addressed transmission buffer and sequentially transmitted (steps S3707 to S37011 in FIG. 262). With the above processing, if the loaned number receipt result is "normal", the currently received lending serial number is sent, and if the lending number receipt result is "abnormal", the previously received lending serial number is sent. . It should be noted that if the lending number reception result is "normal", the value of the lending number is added to the number of game medals after this transmission is completed (determination of Yes in step S3712 in FIG. 262).

[Operation for error (game control unit 302)]
The game control unit 302 determines various errors (step S203 in FIG. 249). For example, if a strobe signal is not detected for a certain period of time when a command is sent from the medal number control section 350, a medal number control disconnection error is set in the error status (Fig. 250). In the state where the error status is not set in the game control section 302 , the error status is set based on the error code of the medal number control section 350 . If the error status is set, a process of notifying that an error has occurred is executed (step S1002 in FIG. 242, step S1603 in FIG. 248). Therefore, an error on the side of the game control unit 302 is processed with priority over an error on the side of the medal number control unit 350. For example, if there is no error on the side of the game control unit 302, an error on the side of the medal number control unit 350 is notified. will be Also, the error status is sent to the medal count control unit 350 by the error occurrence command (step S203 in FIG. 249).

[Operation in response to an error (medal count control unit 350)]
254, step S4414 in FIG. 268, step S4512 in FIG. 269, step S4706 in FIG. 272, step S4706 in FIG. 275, step S4A09 in FIG. 275, step S4D02 in FIG. 278, step S4D06 in FIG. 278, and FIG. 256). Information of this error code is transmitted to the game control section 302 by means of a medal count control state command. In addition, when an error occurrence command is received from the game control section 302, the error request is cleared (step S4C01 in FIG. 277). Thus, an error on the game control section 302 side is processed with priority over an error on the medal count control section 350 side.

[Modified example for input operation]
FIG. 281 is a modification of the medal insertion process of FIG. 243, FIG. 282 is a modification of the triple command transmission process of FIG. 246, and FIG. 283 is a modification of the insertion command reception process of FIG. be. The operation of these processes will be described below.

243, the required number of coins is determined according to the operated bet buttons 130, 132 and the current bet number, and an insertion command including this information is transmitted to the medal number control section 350. (Fig. 246). On the other hand, in FIG. 281, when the MAX bet button (bet button 132) is operated, the input number limited flag is set to ON (step S1121 in FIG. 281), and the one bet button (bet button 130) is operated. If so, the input number limitation flag is set to OFF (step S1122 in FIG. 281). Then, an input command including the information of the input number limitation flag is transmitted to the medal count control section 350 (Fig. 282).

In the insertion command reception process of FIG. 283, if the number of game medals exceeds the requested number, the requested number is added to the number of inserted medals and the current bet number, the requested number is subtracted from the number of game medals, and the value of the requested number is changed. It is returned to the game control unit 302 by a response command (determination of Yes at step S4604 in FIG. 283). The game control unit 302 that has received this response command adds the value returned by this response command to the current bet number (step S1123 in FIG. 281).

In the input command receiving process of FIG. 283, if the number of game medals equal to or greater than the required number is not found, the input number limitation flag is referred (determination of No in step S4604 of FIG. 283). When the number-of-throwing-in limited flag is ON, the processing for the requested number is not performed, and 0 is returned to the game control unit 302 as a response command (determination of No in step S4621 in FIG. 283). In the game control section 302 which received this response command, the value returned by this response command, 0, is added to the current bet number (step S1123 in FIG. 281), so the current bet number is maintained without change. It will be.

In the insertion command reception process of FIG. 283, if there is no number of game medals equal to or greater than the required number and the insertion number limit flag is off, the operation is the same as when the current number of game medals is set to the required number (see FIG. 283). YES is determined in step S4621, and the number of game medals is set as the value of the received command in step S4622). That is, the value of the current number of game medals is added to the number of inserted medals and the current number of bets, and the number of game medals is subtracted to zero. Then, the value of the number of game medals before subtraction (the value set in the received command) is returned to the game control unit 302 by a response command. The game control unit 302 that has received this response command adds the value returned by this response command to the current bet number (step S1123 in FIG. 281).

In the above modified example, when the number of game medals corresponding to the number requested by the insertion command is not sufficient, 0 is returned for the requested number of medals if the number-of-insertion limited flag is on, and if the number-of-insertion limitation flag is off. returns the maximum number of sheets currently available for the requested number of sheets. When the number-of-medals control unit 350 cannot respond to the requested number of medals from the game control unit 302, this configuration uses information (the number of inserted limited flag) is transmitted together with the requested number of sheets. With this configuration, for example, in a configuration where the advantage level changes depending on the difference in the current bet amount, it may be possible to prevent the current bet amount from becoming a disadvantageous value unintentionally.

In this embodiment, when the MAX bet button 132 is operated, a value necessary for setting the maximum bet number is set as the required number of bets. A configuration may be adopted in which some fixed value is set as the requested number of sheets.

Also, for example, in the case of adopting a configuration in which the maximum bet number is set as the requested number, if the bet number of one bet button 130 has been operated first and the current bet number is 1, the MAX bet button 132 is pressed. If an insertion command with the maximum bet number as the requested number is transmitted by an operation, the medal number control unit 350 cannot accept the requested number (the maximum bet number is exceeded). Also in this case, the number-of-medals control unit 350 cannot cope with the number of medals requested from the game control unit 302 . In such a case as well, by transmitting the information for proper use and the requested number of sheets together, the operation of not responding to the requested number of sheets (for example, returning 0 as a response command) and the operation of responding as much as possible ( For example, return the maximum number of bets as a response command) can be used properly.

《Example of operation》
An example of the operation of the slot machine 100 described above will be described below.

[Operation example related to counting process]
FIG. 288 is a diagram showing a first example in which count button 171 is operated. FIG. 288(a) is a timing chart of the first example, and FIG. 288(b) is a diagram showing the display mode of the game medal number display device 170, which is a 5-digit 7-segment display.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 288(a), time elapses from left to right. The same applies to the timing charts shown in subsequent figures.

At the top of the timing chart shown in FIG. 288(a), arrows with numerals corresponding to (i) to (v) shown in FIG. 288(b) are shown. These arrows represent the display period of the game medal number display device 170 .

At the bottom of the timing chart shown in FIG. 288(a), the timing at which the count notification is transmitted from the medal count control section 350 to the lending machine 700 is described as "counting timing". This counting timing has a period of 0.3 seconds (300 ms). The counted number (the number of game values transmitted to the lending machine 700) at this counting timing is shown. Further, the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is shown below the "count number". Furthermore, the operation mode of the count button 171 is shown below it.

In the first example shown in FIG. 288, the operation of the counting button 171 is started with the "number of game medals" being 250. As shown in (i) of FIG. 288(b), the game medal number display device 170 displays the number "250".

Even if the first counting timing comes after the operation of the counting button 171 is started, the counting button 171 remains operated. Before long, 0.5 second (500 ms) has passed since the counting button 171 was started to be operated. Even when 0.5 seconds have passed, the count button 171 is still operated, and a long-pressing operation is performed, and 50 is set as the value of the number of sheets to be counted (step S4209 of update processing of the number of sheets to be counted shown in FIG. 266). ). In the following description, operation of the counting button 171 for 0.5 seconds or more is referred to as a long press, and operation of the counting button 171 for less than 0.5 seconds after starting operation is referred to as a short press. The scheduled count number update process shown in FIG. 266 is executed at a cycle of 0.7 ms. It keeps being overwritten to the value of 50 sheets. After 0.5 seconds have passed since the operation of the counting button 171 was started, when the first counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 is being operated, the number of sheets to be counted is set based on the value of the number of sheets to be counted. (50 in this example), and a count notification of 50 medals is sent from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 . The "number of game medals" is reduced from 50 to 200. As shown in (ii) of FIG. 288(b), the game medal number display device 170 displays a change display in which "1" is subtracted from the number "250". As for this change display, the numbers decremented by "1" are displayed at intervals of about 4 ms by the display processing shown in FIG. If the display on the game medal number display device 170 is suddenly changed from "250" to "200", the player may not notice the change in the display. A display (a display performed before displaying the number of game medals after the number of game medals is reduced by 50, and a display for recognizing that the number of game medals will change) is performed. Then, when about 200 ms has passed, the number "200" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170, as shown in (iii) of FIG. 288(b).

When the next counting timing arrives while the count button 171 is kept pressed, the number of counts is set again based on the value of the number of counts to be counted (50 in this example), and 50 is sent from the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700. A sheet count notification is sent again. The "number of game medals" is reduced from 50 to 150. As shown in (iv) of FIG. 288(b), the game medal number display device 170 displays a changing display in which "1" is subtracted from the number "200" at intervals of about 4 ms. Then, when about 200 ms has passed, the number "150" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170, as shown in (v) of FIG. 288(b).

Furthermore, when the timing for counting the third time arrives while the count button 171 is kept pressed, the medal number control unit 350 sends a count notification of 50 medals to the lending machine 700, and the "number of game medals" is 50. Decrease to 100 sheets. After that, assume that the counting button 171 is released before the fourth counting timing arrives. That is, the long-pressing operation of the count button 171 ends. In this case, the value of the number of sheets to be counted (here, 50 sheets) is cleared in step S4215 shown in FIG. The value of "number of sheets" is 0. Therefore, the “number of game medals” remains at 100 as well. Since the change display is performed in a time (approximately 200 ms) shorter than the counting timing of 300 ms, the player, after visually recognizing the number after 50 tokens have been reduced, if he/she wants to keep that number of game medals. , the operation of the count button 171 is terminated, the number of game medals corresponding to the number can be left.

Also, when the counting button 171 is released before the first counting timing after the operation of the counting button 171 is started (when the hand is released at the timing of the arrow A shown in FIG. 288(a)), 266), one sheet is added to the value of the number of sheets to be counted (step S4212 shown in FIG. 266), and when the counting timing arrives, the one sheet is transmitted as a count notification. The “number of game medals” is reduced by one to 249, and the number “249” is displayed on the display device 170 for number of game medals.

Also, when the count button 171 is operated a plurality of times before the first count timing comes after the first operation of the count button 171 is started, that is, when the count button 171 is pressed a plurality of times before the count timing arrives. , the value of the number of sheets to be counted is incremented by one each time a short press is performed. Eventually, when the timing for counting arrives, the number of sheets to be counted is set based on the value of the number of sheets to be counted (in this case, it corresponds to the number of times of single pressing), and the value of the number of times short-pressed until then is transmitted as a notification of counting.

On the other hand, when counting button 171 is released after 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of operation of counting button 171 and before the first counting timing has arrived (as indicated by arrow B in FIG. 288(a)). 266), even if the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set to 50, it will be cleared in step S4215 shown in FIG. The value of "count" is 0 (a count notification indicating that the counted number of sheets is 0 is transmitted). Similarly, after the display of the number of game medals 170 changes from 250 to 200 in about 200 ms, when the counting button 171 is released before the next counting timing arrives (Fig. 288(a)). ), the count notification of 50 sheets is not transmitted, and the "count" value becomes 0 (the count notification of 0 is transmitted). ).

FIG. 289 is a timing chart showing a first example of an effect during counting.

FIG. 289 shows effect image display device 157 and speaker 272 . As described above, the security command transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 at a period of 100 ms contains information representing the number of coins to be counted.

When the count button 171 is pressed for a short time and one card is counted, no display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 to notify that counting is being performed. , its display continues. Also, the counting sound is not output from the speaker 272 . For example, if the effect sound corresponding to the game background display is being output, the output is continued. If the count sound is output with a small number, it may be mixed with other effects sounds, and may give the player an expectation different from the expectation that the other effects sounds were intended to express. In the first example, no counting sound is output. If the number of counting sounds is large, the output time is long, so there is little possibility that the sound will be mixed with other sound effects, and there will be little influence on other sound effects. It should be noted that even when two sheets are counted as a small number, the counting sound may not be output as in the case of one sheet.

On the other hand, when the counting button 171 is long pressed and 50 cards are counted, the effect image display device 157 displays a display notifying that counting is being performed, and the speaker 272 outputs a counting sound. . That is, as described above, the security command transmitted from the game control section 302 to the first sub-control section 400 at a period of 100 ms includes information representing the number of coins to be counted. In the first sub-control section 400, when information indicating 50 sheets is transmitted as the information indicating the number of sheets to be counted, a counting sound is output. In addition, when the second sub-controller 500 also receives the information representing 50 sheets as the information representing the counted number of sheets via the first sub-controller 400, it displays the in-counting notification.

Furthermore, the long press continues, and during the continuous counting in which 50 sheets are counted every 0.3 seconds, as shown in FIG. be done. This character display is displayed so as to overlap the game background display. In addition, the speaker 272 outputs a counting sound (for example, a notification sound "piyopiyo...") having a length of 0.3 seconds or longer. Since the length of the counting sound output at one time is 0.3 seconds or more, it is connected with the counting sound output at the timing of counting the next 50 sheets, and it sounds like continuous output. For example, if the counting sound has a length of 0.5 seconds or more, it overlaps with the counting sound output at the timing of counting the next 50 sheets, and the continuity is maintained, and the counting sound is generated in the continuous counting period. continue without interruption. It is recognized that continuous counting is being performed by the character display of "Continuous counting" and the continuous counting sound.

Note that when the number of sheets counted exceeds a predetermined number of 2 or more and less than 50 sheets (for example, 10 sheets), a counting sound may be output. In this case, a counting sound different from the counting sound during long pressing may be output. By doing so, for example, when the short press is repeated, it is possible to make the user recognize that a plurality of sheets have been counted. Alternatively, when the "number of game medals" stored in the medal number control unit 350 remains less than 50 (for example, 10 remaining) and the long press is performed, 10 are counted instead of 50. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that there are only a few left from the change in the effect sound.

FIG. 290 is a timing chart showing an example in which a bet operation was performed before the counting button 171 was operated and the number of bets was not zero. In this embodiment, operating the count button 171 does not change the value of the current bet. However, in FIG. 290, if the current bet is not 0 when the count button 171 is operated, counting processing is executed. This is a modified example in which settlement processing (setting the current number of bets to 0 and adding the decrement to the number of game medals) is performed before.

In the example shown in FIG. 290, when the bet buttons 130 and 132 are operated and the count button 171 is operated before the start lever 135 is operated, settlement (the number of bets is returned to the "number of game medals") is performed. will be

FIG. 290 shows the “current number of bets”, and below that, the value of the “number of game medals” stored in the RAM 358 is shown. Furthermore, below that, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is shown, and at the bottom, the operation mode of the counting button 171 is shown.

In this example, the MAX bet button 132 is operated and the "current bet number" is 3. The "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 has been reduced from 68 to 65 by subtracting 3 in response to this betting operation. Before long, instead of operating the start lever 135, the counting button 171 is operated. When the counting button 171 is operated, the up edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171 is detected, and based on this up edge detection, first, the number of bets is returned to the "number of game medals". . As a result, the "current number of bets" becomes 0, and the "number of game medals" increases by three to become 68. That is, the game returns to the state before the bet operation, and the previous bet operation is cancelled. After performing this cancellation, the counting process is performed. The counting button 171 is pressed long, and when the counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 is kept pressed, 50 medals are counted, and the "number of game medals" decreases from 50 to 18 medals.

In this example, by operating the counting button 171, the current number of bets can be returned to the "number of game medals" without operating the settlement button 134 shown in FIG. I will end up doing it. In this configuration, if it is desired to change only the current number of bets, the adjustment button 134 should be operated. For example, after betting 3 coins, if you want to change to betting 1 coin, operate the checkout button 134 to temporarily return the 3 coins that have been bet to the "number of game medals", and then bet again for betting 1 coin. By operating the button 130, the current number of bets can be reduced to one. Note that the settlement button 134 may not be provided because the settlement process can be performed by operating the counting button 171 without operating the settlement button 134 .

FIG. 291 is a timing chart showing an example of the counting end effect.

As described above, information indicating the counted number of coins included in the security command is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 . The first sub-control unit 400 accumulates the counted number of sheets transmitted in the security command until the counted number of sheets transmitted reaches 0, and when it reaches 0 (when the counting is completed) Executes the counting end production with . The counting end effect here is an effect corresponding to the quantity of counting performed at once.

FIG. 291(a) is a diagram showing an example of a counting end effect that is performed when the accumulated number of sheets is less than a predetermined number (for example, 1000 sheets). On the effect image display device 157, during counting, a counting effect (for example, character display of "Continuous counting" and output of counting sound described with reference to FIG. 289) is performed. , the effect image display device 157 performs a counting end effect 1 in which a character display of "counting end" is displayed.

On the other hand, FIG. 291(b) is a diagram showing an example of a counting end effect that is performed when the cumulative count number is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 1000). When the counting of a predetermined number or more is finished, the counting end effect 2 is performed, and the effect image display device 157 adds a warning display of ``be careful not to store too much'' in addition to the character display of ``counting finished''.

As described above, in this embodiment, the RAM 358 of the medal number control unit 350 can store up to 16383 "game medal numbers". However, in the slot machine 100, there is a possibility that the "number of game medals" will disappear. Therefore, it is desired that the slot machine 100 does not continue to store too many "game medal counts". Therefore, it is preferable to issue a notification to increase the frequency of operation of the count button 171 . The warning display described with reference to FIG. 291(b) is an example of notification for increasing the frequency of operation of the counting button 171, and prompts the renting machine 700 to moderately transfer the game value. Note that the counting effect may also be changed according to the cumulative counted number of sheets. For example, when the cumulative counted number of sheets is less than a predetermined number (eg, 1000 sheets), a counting effect A is performed, and after the cumulative counted number of sheets reaches a predetermined number (eg, 1000 sheets) or more, the counting effect B is performed. shall be performed. Further, the counting performance A is a performance giving an impression that the player is in an appropriate state, and the counting performance B is a performance giving an impression that the player is in an inappropriate state. It is possible to give the player an unfavorable impression that the accumulated number of coins is large.

Here, the operation of the slot machine 100 when the settlement button 134 is operated will be described.

FIG. 292 is a timing chart showing an example when the settlement button 134 is operated.

In a conventional slot machine, real medals are lent, the real medals are inserted to secure credits, and the credits are used to set the number of bets. In such a conventional slot machine, not only the betted medals but also the stored medals are included in the settlement process of real medals (for example, the maximum number of bets is 3 and the maximum number of stored medals is 50). A total of 53 tickets will be settled). When this settlement process ends, a demonstration command is output to the first sub-controller 400 , and the second sub-controller 500 may execute a process of displaying a demonstration screen on the effect image display device 157 . That is, there is a certain amount of time while the checkout process, which may involve the physical ejection of medals, is being performed. A settlement button command indicating that the settlement button 134 has been pressed is output to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 performs an effect related to settlement based on this settlement button command. Move to a demonstration production based on the command.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, which does not require real medals, the object of settlement is the medals bet (current bet number, maximum 3), and physical medals are not ejected. The processing time related to settlement is a short amount of time. Therefore, after the payment button 134 is pressed, there is only a short processing time for payment, and the demo command is output to the first sub-controller 400 without delay. Therefore, if the specification is made to execute an effect based on the execution of the settlement process, this effect will be performed only for a short time before the demonstration effect, and there is a risk that the player will conversely feel uncomfortable. There is

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 292, a settlement button command indicating that the settlement button 134 has been pressed is output to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, an effect based on this settlement button command is output. (output of settlement tone, etc.) is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 292, when the bet operation is performed and the “current bet number” becomes 3, the settlement button 134 is operated to perform the settlement operation. By this settlement operation, the number of bets (three) is added to the "number of game medals", which increases from 65 to 68.

FIG. 292 shows the speaker 272 and the effect image display device 157. FIG. Even if the settlement operation is performed, the settlement sound is not output from the speaker 272 . Further, the game background display is continuously displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the settlement display is not displayed. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 292, the display is immediately switched to the demonstration display. That is, the first sub-control unit 400 starts the demonstration effect based on receiving the checkout button command (or the demonstration command immediately after the checkout button command). In this example, only the demonstration effect is executed at the start of the demonstration, making the start of the demonstration clearer.

It should be noted that the specification may be such that the settlement effect is executed (for example, it is executed for 2 seconds). While the settlement performance is being executed, even if the demonstration performance is started, the settlement performance is continued so that both performances are executed together. Although it is expected that the frequency of settlement operations will be lower than in conventional slot machines, there is a possibility that settlement operations will be performed due to fraudulent acts (so-called cheating), so there are settlement processes around. make it known.

Next, an example in which the number of sheets to be counted changes according to the length of operation time of the count button 171 will be described.

FIG. 293 is a diagram showing an example in which the number of sheets to be counted increases as the operation time of the count button 171 increases. Note that in this example, instead of the planned count number update process shown in FIG. 266, the planned count number update process shown in FIG. 284 is adopted.

FIG. 293(a) is a table showing specific values of the count long-press timer set in step S4221 in the flowchart of the scheduled number count update process shown in FIG. In this table, the count long-press timer value is set for each long-press step value. That is, when the long-press step value increases from 1 to 4, the value of the counting long-press timer decreases by a predetermined time (here, 300 ms). That is, the value of the count long-press timer is shortened step by step. Then, when the value of the long-press step value is 4 or more, the value of the counting long-press timer becomes a constant value (here, 300 ms).

FIG. 293(b) is a table showing specific values of the planned number of sheets used in step S4222 in the flowchart of the planned number of sheets update process shown in FIG. In this table, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set for each long press step value. In other words, when the long-press step value increases from 1 to 4, the value of the planned number of sheets to be counted increases as the long-press step value increases. As a result, the number of sheets to be counted increases step by step according to the operation time of the counting button 171 . Note that even if the same value is set a plurality of times, the number of sheets to be counted will eventually increase step by step. For example, even if the values of the number of sheets to be counted are set as 10→10→20→20→20→30→30→30→30 . Then, when the value of the long press step value is 4 or more, the value of the planned number of sheets to be counted becomes a constant value (here, 50 sheets).

FIG. 293(c) is a timing chart when counting is performed using the counting long-press timer shown in FIG. 293(a) and the number of sheets to be counted shown in FIG.

At the bottom of the timing chart shown in FIG. 293(c), the timing at which the counting notification is transmitted from the medal count control section 350 to the lending machine 700 is described as "counting timing". This counting timing has a period of 0.3 seconds (300 ms). On the other hand, at the top of the timing chart is shown a timing chart showing the ON state when the count button 171 is being operated.

When the counting button 171 changes from OFF to ON, a count long-press timer (value for 1.2 seconds) with a long-press step value of 1 is set (step S4221 shown in FIG. 284), and the timer is turned on. If the count button 171 is kept pressed until the value becomes "1", 10 is set as the number to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 284). Then, when the timer value becomes "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, a count long-press timer (value for 0.9 seconds) with a long-press step value of 2 is set (step shown in FIG. 284). S4221). If the counting button 171 is kept pressed until 0.9 seconds set in the count long-press timer elapses, 10 sheets set as the scheduled number of sheets to be counted will be counted at a timing of 0.9 seconds. It will be counted each time it arrives every 3 seconds.

When the value of the count long-press timer becomes "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 20 sheets is set as the planned number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 284). Subsequently, when the timer value reaches "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, a count long-press timer (value for 0.6 seconds) with a long-press step value of 3 is set (shown in FIG. 284). step S4221). If the count button 171 is kept pressed until 0.6 seconds set in the count long-press timer elapses, 20 sheets set as the scheduled number of sheets to be counted will be counted at the timing of 0.6 seconds. It will be counted each time it arrives every 3 seconds.

When the value of the count long-press timer becomes "1" again while the count button 171 is being operated, 30 sheets is set as the planned number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 284). Further, when the timer value becomes "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, a count long-press timer (a value for 0.3 seconds) with a long-press step value of 4 is set (step shown in FIG. 284). S4221). If the count button 171 is kept pressed until 0.3 seconds set in the count long-press timer elapses, the timing of counting 30 sheets, which is set as the scheduled number of sheets to be counted, arrives. will be counted by

When the value of the count long-press timer becomes "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 50 sheets are set as the expected number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 284). Thereafter, the count long-press timer is repeatedly set to a value of 0.3 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 284), and 50 sheets is repeatedly set as the expected number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 284). As a result, if the count button 171 is kept pressed, 50 sheets are counted every time the count timing comes.

In the example described here, as the operation time of the counting button 171 becomes longer, the value of the counting long-press timer becomes shorter and the value of the number of sheets to be counted increases. As the time becomes longer, the value of the long-press timer for counting may become longer, and the value of the number of sheets to be counted may increase. Alternatively, the value of the count long-press timer may be shortened, and the value of the number of sheets to be counted may be decreased.

In addition, until the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 becomes 0, the value set in the counting long-press timer is gradually shortened, and the value of the expected number of medals to be counted is gradually increased. You can

FIG. 294(a) is a timing chart showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 293(c).

In the example shown in FIG. 293(c), after the long-press step value reaches 4, the count long-press timer value is constant at the shortest 0.3 seconds, and the maximum number of sheets to be counted is constant at 50. become. This state may be continued until the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 becomes 0, but when the number of game medals falls below a certain value (for example, 300), endgame processing is executed. You may make it The term "final stage processing" as used herein refers to a process of increasing the value of the count long-press timer and decreasing the value of the number of tokens to be counted as the number of game medals decreases.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 294(a), the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is displayed. At the left end of this timing chart, the value of the count long-press timer is set to a value of 0.3 seconds, and the number of expected counts is set to 50, and the "number of game medals" is 299. "Number of game medals" is below a certain value (300).

When the value of the count long-press timer becomes "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 50 sheets are set again as the expected number of sheets to be counted (step SS4222 shown in FIG. 284). Note that the number of sheets set at this timing may be less than 50 sheets (for example, 30 sheets). Further, when the timer value becomes "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the count long-press timer value is set to a value of 0.6 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 284) and becomes longer.

When the value of the count long-press timer becomes "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 30 sheets is set as the planned number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 284). Further, when the timer value becomes "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the value of the count long-press timer is set to the value of 0.9 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 284) and becomes longer again.

When the value of the count long-press timer becomes "1" again while the count button 171 is being operated, 20 sheets are set as the scheduled number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 284). Further, when the timer value becomes "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the count long-press timer value is set to a value of 1.2 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 284), and is further lengthened.

Then, when the value of the count long-press timer becomes "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 20 sheets are set again as the expected number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 284). In addition, the number of sheets less than 20 sheets (for example, 10 sheets) may be set as the number of sheets to be counted. Further, when the value of the timer becomes "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the value of the count long-press timer is again set to the value for 1.2 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 284). Note that a value exceeding the value for 1.2 seconds (for example, the value for 1.5 seconds) may be set as the value of the counting long press timer. In the example shown in FIG. 294(a), after the "number of game medals" reaches nine, the count button 171 is released and the count button 171 is turned off. As a result, counting ends when the "number of game medals" reaches nine.

In the final stage processing described above, the number of sheets to be counted decreases step by step, and the value of the count long-press timer increases. It is possible to reduce the number of "game medals" becoming 0. If it is desired to set the "number of game medals" to 0, the counting button 171 should be operated until the display of the number of game medals display device 170 becomes "0".

FIG. 294(b) is a timing chart showing an example of a case where power is cut off when the number of sheets to be counted is set to 30 in the example shown in FIG. 293(c), and then power is restored.

In the example shown in FIG. 294(b), the count button 171 is kept in operation even after the power is cut off until the power is restored. For example, when there is an instantaneous power failure, the power may be restored before the counting button 171 is released. Alternatively, there are players who do not let go of the counting button 171 even after knowing that the power has been cut off. However, this is only in consideration of the case where the counting button 171 is kept being operated after the power failure occurs until the power is restored. I don't know if it stayed. If power is restored while the counting button 171 is being operated, the ON signal is detected without detecting the up edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171 after the power is restored. In this case, if the ON signal is detected even after 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time of the long-pressing operation, the medal number control unit 350 determines the maximum number of medals to be counted (50 in this example). ) is set (step S4222 shown in FIG. 284). Even if control is once interrupted due to a power failure, continued operation of the counting button 171 for a long period of time can be reflected after the power is restored.

Note that after the power is restored, the number of sheets (for example, 30 sheets) that is slightly smaller than the maximum number of sheets may be set. Alternatively, the planned number of sheets to be counted at the time of power failure may be reset.

Also, although the description here is about the number of sheets to be counted, the same applies to the value of the long-press counting timer. That is, when power is restored while the count button 171 is being operated, the medal count control section 350 sets the value for the shortest time (in this example, the value for 300 ms) as the value of the count long-press timer. (Step S4221 shown in FIG. 284).

FIG. 295 is a timing chart showing an example employing the scheduled count number update process of FIG.

The operation of the counting button 171 is started at the timing A, and when 0.5 seconds have passed in the ON state (timing B), it becomes a long-pressing operation, and 50 sheets are counted. Furthermore, when 1.5 seconds have passed in the ON state (cumulative 2.0 seconds from the start of operation: timing C), automatic counting is performed even if the counting button 171 is released, and 0.3 seconds is counted. Each time the timing comes, 50 cards are counted. This automatic counting continues until the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 becomes zero. Therefore, the number of game medals can be quickly set to 0 by an operation that does not take time and effort.

It should be noted that when the automatic counting is started, the change display in the game medal number display device 170 explained with reference to FIG. go. In the 7-segment display, which is the game medal number display device 170, the change display in which 1 is decremented at intervals of about 4 ms is such that all 7 segments are lit and some segments are slightly blinking due to afterimages. It may look like Moreover, if the changing display is continued until the number of game medals in the "number of game medals" becomes 0, the current display number may rather become difficult to understand. Players who select automatic counting often want to set the number of game medals in the "number of game medals" to 0, and there may be little need to change the display to show that the number of game medals is being decremented by one. be.

In addition, since the player does not operate during the period when the automatic counting is performed, it is preferable to inform the player that the automatic counting is being performed by means of a lamp or the like. Also, if there is a payout based on the game result during the automatic counting, the payout amount is also included in the automatic counting. That is, the number of medals paid out during automatic counting is added to the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358, and is included in the target from the next counting.

FIG. 296(a) is a timing chart showing an example in which automatic counting ends when the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 reaches a certain value.

When the counting button 171 is operated for 2.0 seconds, automatic counting is started, and 50 sheets are counted each time the counting timing of 0.3 seconds arrives. In FIG. 296(a), the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is also shown under the "count number". In this example, the counting button 171 is released when the "number of game medals" reaches 147, but the "number of game medals" continues to decrease due to automatic counting. Eventually, when the "number of game medals" becomes less than a certain value (for example, the value counted at one counting timing, here 50 medals), the automatic counting automatically ends, and the count button 171 must be operated. , the "number of game medals" will not decrease. Here, the remaining 47 sheets remain without being automatically counted. When it is desired to continue the game after the automatic counting, the game can be started quickly because there is a remaining number. There is also a case where it is desired to count all the number of game medals. To start counting again, the counting button 171 is operated again. For example, if a long press operation is performed for 0.5 seconds, the "number of game medals" becomes 0. It should be noted that the certain value is set to 50, but the player may be allowed to set a certain value. For example, the player may be allowed to select 0, 20, or 50 sheets. A desired number of game medals can be left after counting. A certain value may be set according to the game state. For example, a certain value is set to 0 in a normal game state, and a certain value is set to 50 in a privilege game state such as during an AT game. Since the possibility of ending the game is low in the privilege game state, the game can be started quickly by leaving a certain number of game medals. A certain value may be set according to the automatically counted number of game medals. For example, when less than 100 game medals are counted, a certain value is set to 0, and when 100 or more game medals are counted, a certain value is set to 20. If a small number of game medals are counted, there is a possibility that the purpose was to exchange the counted number of game medals for a prize such as a drink, and there is a possibility that the game will be continued after automatic counting. A game can be quickly started by leaving a certain number of game medals. Also, the opposite is possible. When a large number of game medals are counted, there is a possibility that the purpose was to temporarily count them by executing a notification or the like to prompt counting, and there is a possibility that the game will be continued after automatic counting. A game can be quickly started by leaving a certain number of game medals.

FIG. 296(b) is a timing chart showing an example of a case in which power is restored during automatic counting.

In the example shown in FIG. 296(b), automatic counting is started and the counting button 171 is released. A power failure occurs in a state in which 50 medals are being counted each time a counting timing of 0.3 seconds is reached by automatic counting. After that, the power is restored, but if the counting button 171 is operated again at the timing of the power restoration, or if the counting button 171 is operated while the power is off and the power is restored while being operated. , after the power is restored, an ON signal indicating the ON state of the counting button 171 is detected. When this ON signal is detected when power is restored, automatic counting is started even if two seconds, which is the determination time for starting automatic counting, has not passed. That is, 50 sheets are counted when the first counting timing comes after the power is restored. Therefore, automatic counting is started even if the counting button 171 is released before two seconds have elapsed since the power was restored.

FIG. 297 is a diagram showing a display example indicating that automatic counting is in progress.

FIG. 297 shows an effect image display device 157, which is a liquid crystal display, and a game medal number display device 170, which is a 5-digit 7-segment display.

The upper part of FIG. 297 shows the state during counting before automatic counting is started. In other words, the number of sheets to be counted is determined by the operation mode of the count button 171 (long press or one or more short presses). In this state, the characters "counting" are displayed on the effect image display device 157 where the game background is being displayed. That is, the character display of "counting" is displayed so as to overlap the game background display.

Also, in the game medal number display device 170 shown on the upper side, the segment representing 97 is lit.

On the other hand, the lower part of FIG. 297 shows a state in which automatic counting is being performed. When the automatic counting is started, the medal number control section 350 sends a command to the game control section 302 including the automatic counting information indicating that the counting is performed by automatic counting in the counting number information of the medal number control state command. The game control section 302 transmits the security command to the first sub-control section 400, including the information indicating the number of sheets to be counted and the above automatic counting information in the security command. The second sub-controller 500 receives the automatic counting information via the first sub-controller 400, and causes the effect image display device 157 to display the characters "automatically counting" and the message 157m. In the state in which automatic counting is being performed, automatic counting state notification is provided. It should be noted that while the automatic counting is being performed, a notification may be given by sound or a lamp. In FIG. 297, the effect image display device 157 displaying the game background displays the character display of "automatically counting". Below that, there is an explanation about how to handle the counting button 171 during automatic counting, such as "Even if you release the button, the counting continues." In the state in which automatic counting state notification is being performed, button operation unnecessary notification is performed. Furthermore, there is also an explanation such as "You can play games." In the state where the automatic counting state notification is being performed, the game progress possible notification is performed. It is notified that the game can be progressed by operating the start lever 135 and operating the stop buttons 130 to 132 even during automatic counting. Note that operations of the bet buttons 130 and 132 are not accepted during the counting process. In addition, since it is anticipated that there will be a case where it is desired to manually end the automatic counting after the automatic counting has started, the automatic counting should be ended by operating the counting button 171 again after the automatic counting has started. good too. That is, when the medal count control unit 350 detects the rising edge of the signal indicating the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171 during automatic counting, it ends the automatic counting. When the automatic counting ends, the notification of the automatic counting state ends.

FIG. 298 is a diagram showing an example of sound output indicating that automatic counting is in progress.

The operation of the counting button 171 is started at the timing A, and when 0.5 seconds have passed in the ON state (timing B), it becomes a long-pressing operation, and 50 sheets are counted. Further, when 1.5 seconds have passed in the ON state (cumulative 2.0 seconds from the start of operation: timing C), automatic counting is performed even if the counting button 171 is released. In this example, when 2.0 seconds have passed and the first counting timing has arrived, the speaker 272 outputs a counting sound indicating that automatic counting has started. Note that the counting sound may be output after 2.0 seconds have passed.

The volume of the counting sound increases at predetermined time intervals. Although the predetermined time here is 1.2 seconds, it may be 3 seconds or 0.3 seconds. By increasing the sound volume as time elapses, it is possible to easily recognize that the cumulative count amount is increasing. The first counting sound that is output first and the second counting sound that is output next are continuously output, the second counting sound and the third counting sound that is output next are also continuously output, and the third counting sound is The sound and the next output fourth counting sound are also output continuously. In addition to the volume, the rhythm, pitch, timbre, etc. may be changed. That is, it is sufficient that the counting sound changes stepwise. For example, the (n+1)th counting sound may be a counting sound with a faster rhythm than the nth counting sound, or may be a counting sound with a higher pitch. Alternatively, only the tone color may change at predetermined time intervals without increasing the volume at predetermined time intervals. For example, the first counting sound is a sound consisting only of instrumental sound A, the second counting sound is a sound consisting of instrumental sound A plus instrumental sound B, and the third counting sound is a sound consisting of instrumental sound A and instrumental sound A. A sound composed of a plurality of sounds obtained by adding a musical instrument sound B to a musical instrument sound C is assumed. It is possible to make the user easily recognize that the cumulative count amount is increasing.

On the other hand, if the counting sound continues to be output during counting, the player may feel uncomfortable. For example, it takes about 50 seconds to count 5,000 cards obtained through a game at once. If the counting sound continues to be output during this period, it may feel offensive and may be disliked by the adjacent players. As countermeasures for these cases, the volume of the counting sound may be lowered as time elapses, or the counting sound may be output for a predetermined period of time and then silenced (volume 0). Alternatively, the volume of the counting sound may decrease as time elapses, and the constant sound (volume 1) may be set after the counting sound is output for a predetermined period of time.

Furthermore, in the case of a slot machine equipped with a function that allows the player to perform various customizations, the type and volume of the counting sound, the method of change (for example, whether to increase or decrease the volume, etc.), etc. The player may be allowed to make a selection. By doing so, it is also possible to increase interest in counting.

In addition to the sound, a lamp may emit light, an image may be output, and the light emission mode of the lamp and the image may be changed step by step.

FIG. 299 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a power failure occurs before 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time of the long-pressing operation, has elapsed after the operation of the count button 171 was started.

In the example shown in FIG. 299(a), the operation of the count button 171 is started, and power is cut off before the count long-press flag described with reference to FIG. The counting button 171 remains operated until the power is restored. For example, when there is an instantaneous power failure, the power may be restored before the counting button 171 is released. Alternatively, there are players who do not let go of the counting button 171 even after knowing that the power has been cut off. However, this is only in consideration of the case where the counting button 171 is kept being operated after the power failure occurs until the power is restored. I don't know if it stayed. If power is restored while the counting button 171 is being operated, the ON signal is detected without detecting the up edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171 after the power is restored. When the ON signal is detected without detecting the up edge after the power is restored, the medal count control section 350 determines that the counting button 171 has been continuously operated, and 0.5 seconds has passed since the power was restored. It is determined whether or not the counting button 171 remains operated until the time elapses. Here, if the count button 171 continues to be operated, the count long-press flag is set to ON. counted.

If the long press is performed after the power is restored, the long press may be notified. The long-press informing is started from the time when the long-press is continued when the first counting timing comes after 0.5 seconds have passed after the power is restored. This means that if the count button 171 is released before 0.5 seconds have passed, the long press is not performed, and the count is made before the first count timing arrives after 0.5 seconds have passed. When the button 171 is released, none of the cards are counted. Pressing notification is started.

Note that if the count button 171 is released before 0.5 seconds have passed after the power is restored, one sheet is counted, but it may be an erroneous operation. Therefore, if the operation of the count button 171 is completed within 0.5 seconds immediately after the power is turned on, it may be treated as an erroneous operation and not counted.

Note that FIG. 299(b) shows an example in which the start of operation of the count button 171 is determined by detecting only the rising edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the count button 171 .

According to the example shown in FIG. 299(b), since the count button 171 is still being operated during the power failure, the rising edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the count button 171 is not detected after the power is restored. No matter how long the counting button 171 is operated, the long-press determination is not performed, and counting is not performed. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 299(a), since the long-press determination is performed depending on whether or not 0.5 seconds have passed since the ON signal of the count button 171 was detected, even if the up edge is not detected, Long press judgment is executed.

FIG. 300 is a timing chart showing a modification of the example shown in FIG.

In the first modification shown in FIG. 300(a), the power is cut off when X seconds, which is shorter than 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time of the long-pressing operation, has elapsed after the operation of the count button 171 was started. , then power is restored.

After the power is restored, if the ON signal is detected without detecting the rising edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171, a long press operation is performed for X seconds that have elapsed before the power failure. If the counting button 171 is operated for the remaining time ((0.5-X) seconds), the counting button 171 is operated for 0.5 seconds. The count long-press flag is set to ON, assuming that the count has been held.

In the modification shown in FIG. 300(b) as well, the power is cut off when X seconds, which is shorter than 0.5 seconds, which is the judgment time for the long-pressing operation, has elapsed since the operation of the counting button 171 was started. Power is restored.

In the second modification shown in FIG. 300(b), standby processing is provided for a certain period of time (in this example, a standby time of 2 seconds) when power is restored (when power is turned on). That is, since the processing load increases immediately after the power is turned on, the processing related to the counting button 171 is performed after waiting until the appropriate timing for performing the counting processing. After the standby time has passed, the processing related to the count button 171 is performed as in FIG. 300(a). That is, when the ON signal is detected without detecting the rising edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the count button 171, the long-pressing operation is determined for X seconds that have elapsed before the power failure. If the operation of the counting button 171 is continued for the remaining time ((0.5−X) seconds) after the waiting time has elapsed, the counting button is held for 0.5 seconds. Assuming that 171 has been operated, the count long-press flag is set to ON.

FIG. 301 is a timing chart showing another modification of the example shown in FIG.

In the third modification shown in FIG. 301(a), after the operation of the count button 171 is started, the power is cut off before 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time of the long-pressing operation, has passed, and then the power is restored. .

After the power is restored (power is turned on), the medal number control unit 350 detects the ON signal without detecting the rising edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171. If the ON signal is detected, the counting button 171 is operated. It determines that the power supply has been continuously set, and starts a timer dedicated to power-on. This timer measures a longer time (for example, 2 seconds) than the normal long-pressing operation determination time (0.5 seconds). Specifically, 2000 ms is set as an initial value exclusively for when the power is turned on to the counting long press timer whose initial value is set to 500 ms in step S4206 in FIG. In this way, when the long press operation is performed immediately after turning on the power, the count long press flag is set to ON when the long operation is performed. pieces are counted.

In the fourth modification shown in FIG. 301(b), after the operation of the count button 171 is started, the power is cut off before 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time of the long press operation, has passed, and then the power is restored. . In this example, the operation ends when the counting button 171 is released while the power is off. Therefore, when power is restored (power is turned on), the ON signal indicating the ON state of the counting button 171 is not detected. Then, in this fourth modification, a timer dedicated to power-on is activated in accordance with power-on. This timer counts a longer time (for example, 3 seconds) than the normal long-pressing operation determination time (0.5 seconds). Also, the timer set value dedicated to power-on in this example is longer than the timer set value dedicated to power-on in the third modification (for example, 2 seconds). If the operation of the count button 171 is started while the timer dedicated to power-on is counting time, and the operation of the count button 171 continues even after 3 seconds have passed, the count long-press flag is set to ON. be. That is, while the timer is counting time, at least one of the rising edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171 and the ON signal is detected, and the ON signal is still detected after 3 seconds have passed. If so, the count long-press flag is set to ON. Then, when the count timing arrives while the count button 171 is continuously operated, 50 sheets are counted.

Next, the display mode of the game medal number display device 170, which is a 5-digit 7-segment display, explained with reference to FIG. 288(b) will be explained in detail again.

FIG. 302(a) is a diagram showing an example of change display (subtraction) on the game medal number display device 170. FIG.

As shown at the top of FIG. 302(a), the game medal number display device 170 displays the number "100". When the change display is started, the game medal number display device 170 displays a number decremented by "1" at intervals of about 4 ms in the display device display process shown in FIG. FIG. 302(a) shows a state in which "1" is subtracted from "99"→"98"→"97"→"96"→"95"→"94".

When 50 sheets are counted by long-pressing the count button 171, the time required for the change display is approximately 4 ms×50=approximately 200 ms in order to display the change by “1” at intervals of approximately 4 ms. Since the count timing is a cycle of 300 ms, the display time of the change display to be subtracted is shorter than the cycle of the count timing, and it is possible to perform the change display to subtract 50 images.

FIG. 302(b) is a diagram showing an example of change display (addition) on the game medal number display device 170. As shown in FIG.

The number “100” is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 shown at the top of FIG. 302(b). When the change display is started, the game medal number display device 170 displays a number incremented by "1" at intervals of about 4 ms as in the change display at the time of subtraction. FIG. 302(b) shows a state in which "1" is added step by step as "101"→"102"→"103"→"104"→"105"→"106".

When 50 coins are lent out by operating the lending button 707 and 15 coins (corresponding to the maximum number of payouts allowed under the rules) are paid out as a result of the game, "1" is displayed at intervals of about 4 ms. In order to perform the change display (addition and subtraction) step by step, the time required for the change display is approximately 4 ms×65=approximately 260 ms. Since the count timing is a cycle of 300 ms, the display time of the change display to be added is shorter than the cycle of the count timing, and it is possible to perform the change display to add 65 images.

FIG. 303 is a diagram showing another example of change display on the game medal number display device 170. FIG. Since the player may not notice the change in the display content of the game medal number display device 170, this is an example of notifying that the display content has changed.

The number “100” is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 shown in FIG. 303(a). In the example here, all the digits are used to display the change, making it easy to recognize that the change is in progress. When changing from the number "100" to the number "85", in the middle of the display, all segments of all five digits are illuminated (display of "88888") and all segments of all five digits are extinguished. The display (display of "00000") is switched and displayed every 8 ms in this example. Eventually, in this example, when 250 ms have passed, the game medal number display device 170 displays the number "85". Since all the digits are used for the change display, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is a failure in which the segments of all the digits of the game medal number display device 170 do not display. If it can be recognized that no failure has occurred, it can be recognized that there is no error in the numbers displayed after the change display.

Although all the digits are used in the change display here, only a part of the digits may be used in order to reduce the processing load and the data volume. For example, one-digit display including the rightmost one-digit, two-digit display, or three-digit display is performed. Not including the rightmost digit when not using all digits may give the impression that the rightmost digit is broken, so it is meant to indicate that there is no failure. Include the rightmost single digit.

The number “100” is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 shown in FIG. 303(b). Also in this example, the number "100" changes to the number "85". That is, it changes from a three-digit number to a two-digit number. Therefore, a change display using three-digit segments is performed. The change display here changes the position of the lit segment for each digit, and the segments appear to go around. According to this changing display, it is possible to give an impression that the number changes starting from "100". Then, in this example, when 250 ms have passed since the start of the change display, the game medal number display device 170 displays the number "85".

If a change display is performed using two-digit segments instead of three-digit segments, it is possible to give the impression that the number changes with "85" as the end point.

As described above, while sandwiching the two types of change display described with reference to FIG. 303, a display that changes in steps of a predetermined number (for example, 20) toward the target value may be performed. Specifically, when the value of "100" finally changes to "60" (target value), "100" → display of change → "80" → display of change → display of "60" Become. Furthermore, when a full-color 7-segment LED display device is used as the game medal number display device 170, the light emission color of the segment may be changed when the segment is lit during the change display.

FIG. 304 is a diagram showing an example of displaying the “number of game medals” stored in the RAM 358 not only by the game medal number display device 170 but also by the effect image display device 157 .

The medal count control section 350 transmits a command including information representing the "game medal count" (the number of game medal count display numbers shown in FIG. 237) to the game control section 302 as a medal count control state command. The game control unit 302 transmits the security command to the first sub-control unit 400, including information indicating the number of game medals in the security command. Security commands are sent to the first sub-controller 400 at intervals of 100 ms. The second sub-control unit 500 receives information representing the “number of game medals” via the first sub-control unit 400 and causes the effect image display device 157 to display the “number of game medals”. In this example, the “number of game medals” is always displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the effect image display device 157 .

In this example, the display of the "number of game medals" on the effect image display device 157 displays the number as it is according to the information representing the "number of game medals" included in the security command transmitted at intervals of 100 ms. . The effect image display device 157 shown on the left side of FIG. 304 displays the number "100" according to the previous security command. In addition, the number "100" is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 displayed on the far left. In this state, the counting button 171 is pressed for a long time, and 50 sheets are counted. The medal number control section 350 starts executing the display device display process shown in FIG. 280, and the game medal number display device 170 starts a changing display that subtracts "1" at intervals of about 4 ms. In FIG. 304, the display during the change display is shown in such a way that seven segments are all lit and some segments are slightly blinking due to afterimages. On the game medal number display device 170, a changing display is performed by subtracting "1" for about 200 ms, and the number "50" is displayed about 200 ms after 50 medals are counted.

On the other hand, on the first sub-control unit 400 side, when 50 medals are counted, a security command containing information indicating that the "number of game medals" is 50 is issued during the security command transmission period (100 ms). Receive commands. In the example shown in FIG. 304, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the security command when about 20 ms has passed since 50 sheets were counted, and display processing is executed. The display processing here is frame replacement processing for replacing an image displaying "100" with an image displaying "50", and is completed in a short time. As a result, the effect image display device 157 will display the number “50” before the change display on the game medal number display device 170 is completed.

In the example shown in FIG. 304 described above, the side of the sub control unit (400, 500) that receives the information of the "number of game medals" does not perform a change display, and the side of the main control unit 300 that outputs the information, Change display. By doing this, the numerical value “50” finally displayed by the game medal number display device 170 can be grasped from the display on the effect image display device 157, and “50” is displayed on the game medal number display device 170. It can be recognized that the change display has been completed at the time point.

FIG. 305 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 304. FIG.

In the modification shown in FIG. 305, even the display of the "number of game medals" on the effect image display device 157 is changed by subtracting "1". Moreover, the changing display takes longer than the changing display in the game medal number display device 170.例文帳に追加Specifically, the change display on the effect image display device 157 is performed in 280 ms. This time of 280 ms indicates that 50 tokens are lent out by operating the lending button 707, and 15 tokens (equivalent to the maximum number of tokens to be paid out) are paid out as a result of the game. This time is longer than the time (approximately 4 ms×65=approximately 260 ms) required for addition change display and less than 300 ms, which is the period of counting timing.

A player usually looks at the effect image display device 157 in many cases, and does not often look at the game medal number display device 170 . As described above, it is desired that the slot machine 100 does not continue to store too many "game medal counts", and that the counting button 171 is operated more frequently. For that purpose, it is necessary to make the player pay attention to the "number of game medals". The reason why the effect image display device 157 also displays the "number of game medals" is to make the player pay attention to the "number of game medals" as much as possible. However, since the effect image display device 157 displays an attractive effect display such as a game background display, even if the "number of game medals" is displayed, the player is distracted by the attractive effect display. tend to Therefore, as in this modification, if the display of the "number of game medals" on the effect image display device 157 takes longer than the display of the number of game medals on the game medal display device 170, the player will be able to It can be expected that the player will pay attention to the game medal number display device 170 as well. If the game medal number display device 170 is seen, the effect display is not displayed on the game medal number display device 170, so that the player can clearly recognize the "game medal number". As a result, it becomes easier for the player to notice that the number of game medals has been accumulated, and it can be expected that the counting button 171 will be operated more frequently.

In addition, in the change display in the effect image display device 157, by displaying not only the changing character display but also the animation display indicating that the change is in progress, attention is likely to be drawn to the "number of game medals", and the number is counted here as well. It can be expected that the button 171 will be operated more frequently. By making the change display by the effect image display device 157 different from the change display by the game medal number display device 170, the change display can be made suitable for the period of the change display. Note that the change display by the effect image display device 157 may be displayed in the same mode as the change display by the game medal number display device 170 . It is easy to recognize that the change display is being performed.

FIG. 306 shows another example that is completely different from the example shown in FIG.

In another example shown in FIG. 306, the game medal number display device 170 does not perform the change display, and only the display of the "game medal number" on the effect image display device 157 performs the change display. That is, in this example, the display device display process shown in FIG. 280 is not executed, and when 50 medals are counted, the game medal number display device 170 immediately displays the number "50". On the other hand, even if the security command is received, the effect image display device 157 does not immediately perform display according to the information representing the "number of game medals" included in the security command, but subtracts "1" at a time. A changing display is performed.

In this example as well, as in the modification shown in FIG. 305, the display of the "number of game medals" on the effect image display device 157 takes longer than the display on the number of game medals display device 170. It can be expected that the game medal number display device 170, which is displayed quickly, will also be taken into consideration. By having the player look at the game medal number display device 170, the player can clearly recognize the "game medal number". As a result, it becomes easier for the player to notice that the number of game medals has been accumulated, and it can be expected that the counting button 171 will be operated more frequently. In addition, in the medal number control section 350, the amount of data for display of changes is reduced, and the processing load is reduced.

FIG. 307(a) is a timing chart when the payout is about to be performed in excess of the payout threshold.

In FIG. 307(a), the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is shown. Below that, the number of payouts to be added to the "number of game medals" is shown.

The RAM 358 of the medal count control unit 350 can store up to 16383 “game medal counts”. That is, the maximum number of sheets that can be stored in the RAM 358 is 16,383. The payout threshold is set to this maximum number of stored coins.

In a state in which the "number of game medals" is stored up to 16373, 15 coins corresponding to the maximum number of payouts (corresponding to the maximum number of payouts allowed under the regulations) are paid out. The payout number of 15 is included in the game control state command 1 (payout command) and transmitted from the game control section 302 to the medal number control section 350 . When the number of payouts of 15 is added, the "number of game medals" exceeds the maximum number of stored medals and exceeds the threshold value for payout in step S4B03 of FIG. Therefore, the payout response command includes “abnormality” and is transmitted from the medal count control section 350 to the game control section 302 . If the payout response command includes "abnormal", the game control unit 302 transmits to the first sub-control unit 400 a command indicating that the number of game medals is in an overflow state (cannot be added by payout). (Step S1608 shown in FIG. 248). On the side of the sub-controller (400, 500), based on this command, an upper limit exceeded error notification is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 307(a), on the effect image display device 157 where the game background display is displayed, as the upper limit exceeded error notification, the payout threshold is exceeded and the counting is performed so as to overlap the game background display. A character display prompting the operation of the button 171 is displayed. That is, even during the game, the upper limit exceeded error notification is executed.

As the upper limit exceeded error notification, an error sound may be output from the speaker 272, or a lamp may be lit.

FIG. 307(b) is a diagram showing another example of an upper limit exceeding error notification.

Blinking display on the effect image display device 157 may be performed as the upper limit exceeded error notification. In the example shown in FIG. 307(b), the character display of the upper limit exceeding error notification is displayed so as to overlap the game background display every second. Since the upper limit exceeding error notification is displayed during the game so as to overlap the game background display, the game background display becomes difficult to see. Therefore, in order to avoid any disadvantage to the player, blinking display is performed to secure a period in which the game background display can be easily seen.

When the game control unit 302 receives a payout response command including “normal” from the medal count control unit 350, it transmits a payout command to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1607 shown in FIG. 248). On the side of the sub-controller (400, 500), when the payout command is received while the upper limit exceeded error notification is being executed, execution of the upper limit exceeded error notification is terminated. Incidentally, if there is an operation to the count button 171, regardless of the number of game medals, the upper limit exceeded error notification may be ended. After the counting button 171 is operated, even if the counting process takes time, the upper limit exceeding error notification can be terminated early.

In addition, information representing the “number of game medals” stored in the RAM 358 is included in the security command and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 . When the transmitted information representing the "number of game medals" is the number of payout threshold values (16383 medals), the secondary control unit (400, 500) may perform upper limit reaching error notification. good. For example, the effect image display device 157 may display a character display that reads, "The upper limit has been reached. Please operate the count button." This upper limit reaching error notification ends when the transmitted information indicating the number of game medals is less than the payout threshold value (16383 medals). Incidentally, if there is an operation to the counting button 171, the upper limit reaching error notification may be ended regardless of the number of game medals. After the counting button 171 is operated, even if the counting process takes time, the upper limit reaching error notification can be terminated early.

Other cases in which the "number of game medals" is added are the case of settlement and the case of lending from the lending machine 700. FIG. In the present embodiment, reaching the upper limit is not determined for settlement, but reaching the upper limit may be determined as in the case of payout. For example, even if the settlement threshold is set to the maximum number of stored sheets and the settlement exceeds the settlement threshold, the settlement response command includes "abnormality", and the medal number control unit 350 sends the game control unit 302 to be sent. Then, the game control unit 302 also transmits an error generation command to the first sub-control unit 400, indicating that an error of exceeding the upper limit of the number of displayed game medals has occurred, even when "abnormality" is included in the settlement response command. On the side of the sub-controller (400, 500), an upper limit exceeding error is reported. On the other hand, the lending threshold is set to a smaller number (for example, 15,000) than the maximum number of stored tokens. , lending is not accepted (if the determination in step S3712 in FIG. 262 is No), and the "number of game medals" is not added. A notice of an error in lending exceeding the upper limit is displayed on the information display 703 of the lending machine 700 . However, the effect image display device 157 is transmitted by transmitting the occurrence of the upper limit lending error from the medal count control unit 350 to the game control unit 302 and further from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400. , a speaker 272, a lamp, or the like on the slot machine 100 side.

FIG. 308(a) is a timing chart when the payout is about to be performed in excess of the second payout threshold.

Also in FIG. 308(a), the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is shown, and the number of payouts to be added to the "number of game medals" is shown below.

A command including the display number of game medals (the number of game medals) is transmitted to the game control unit 302 from the medal number control unit 350 as a medal number control state command. The game control unit 302 is set with a second payout threshold (for example, 15000) that is less than the maximum number of coins stored in the RAM 358 of 16383 (payout threshold). In the game control section 302, when the number of displayed game medals sent as a command is equal to or greater than the second threshold value for payout, an error nearing the upper limit of displayed number of game medals occurs in the first sub-control section 400. Send an error generation command indicating that On the side of the sub-controller (400, 500), based on this error occurrence command, the upper limit approaching notification is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 308(a), on the effect image display device 157 where the game background display is displayed, a character display prompting the operation of the count button 171 is displayed so as to overlap the game background display as an upper limit imminent notification. is displayed. That is, in this example as well, the approaching upper limit notification is executed during the game. FIG. 307(a) shows the effect image display device 157 in which the display of the upper limit imminent notification is switched to the display of the upper limit exceeded error notification.

In addition, as an upper limit imminent notification, a notification sound may be output from the speaker 272, or a lamp may be turned on. It should be noted that the approaching upper limit notification is continued until the upper limit exceeding error notification is started after the approaching upper limit notification is started. The notification may be performed only for a part of the time. For example, the notification is performed within one second after the start lever 135 is operated. On the other hand, the upper limit exceeding error notification is performed during one game. For example, when it is known that the privilege period of the AT game or the like is short even when the upper limit imminent notification is started, it is possible to easily prioritize the remaining AT game or the like. Furthermore, when the upper limit imminent notification is switched to the upper limit exceeded error notification, it is possible to easily recognize that the notification has been changed.

FIG. 308(b) is a diagram showing another example of an approaching upper limit notification.

The effect image display device 157 may perform flashing display even when the upper limit is approaching. In the example shown in FIG. 308(b), the character display of the upper limit imminent notification is displayed so as to overlap the game background display every second. Since the upper limit imminent notification is also displayed so as to overlap the game background display during the game, the game background display becomes difficult to see. Therefore, in order to avoid any disadvantage to the player, blinking display is performed to secure a period in which the game background display can be easily seen.

When the game control unit 302 receives a command from the medal number control unit 350 that includes the display number of game medals that is less than the second threshold value for payout, the first sub-control unit 400 receives an error indicating the number of game medals to be displayed. Send an error release command indicating that the error has been released. On the side of the sub-controller (400, 500), execution of the upper limit approaching notification is terminated based on this error cancellation command.

Also, the second threshold for payout may be set in the first sub-controller 400 . In the first sub-control unit 400, when the information representing the "number of game medals" transmitted in the security command is equal to or larger than the second threshold for payout, the sub-control unit (400, 500) side may perform the notification that the upper limit is approaching. Then, this upper limit imminent notification ends when the transmitted information representing the "game medal count" becomes the number of coins less than the second payout threshold.

Furthermore, a second payout threshold may be set in the medal count control section 350 . In this case, the number-of-games medal control unit 350 determines whether or not the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than the second threshold for payout. A notification command is transmitted to the control unit 302, and the game control unit 302 transmits a notification command to the sub-control unit (400, 500) based on the command information. By doing so, the sub-controller (400, 500) side can also perform the upper limit imminent notification. And when it becomes less than the 2nd threshold value for payout, the notification end command is transmitted through the route of the number-of-medals control unit 350→game control unit 302→sub control unit (400, 500). It is preferable that the blinking period of the blinking display of the approaching upper limit notification be longer than the blinking period of the blinking display of the upper limit exceeded error notification. If the near-upper limit notification is switched to the upper limit exceeded error notification and the blinking period is shortened, the urgency of the notification can be easily recognized. If the near-upper-limit notification is a blinking display, the upper-limit-exceeding error notification may be displayed at all times. It becomes possible to easily recognize the degree of urgency of the notification.

FIG. 309 is a diagram showing an example of a case in which a highly urgent error notification overlaps with a notification prompting counting.

On the effect image display device 157 shown on the left side of FIG. 309(a), an upper limit approaching notification is displayed overlapping the game background display. In addition, the display of the notification that the upper limit is approaching may be a constant display, but is a flashing display that is displayed every second. The front door 102 is opened while the upper limit approaching notification is being performed. When the front door 102 is opened, the game control unit 302 transmits to the first sub-control unit 400 an error generation command indicating that a door opening error has occurred. On the side of the sub-controller (400, 500), error notification is performed based on this error occurrence command. With the front door 102 open, the possibility of fraud (so-called fraud) is increased, so it is necessary to close the front door 102 as soon as possible. Therefore, the error notification of the door opening error is a notification with higher urgency than the notification prompting the counting. Note that the operation of the count button 171 is accepted even when the front door 102 is open. On the effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of FIG. 309(a), an error notification display of a door opening error is displayed overlapping the game background display. The display of the error annunciation of the door opening error (hereinafter referred to as the door opening error display) is a text display of "the door is open" and is always displayed. This door open error display is displayed on the same layer as the display of the approaching upper limit notification, but it may be displayed on a layer before the display of the approaching upper limit notification so that it overlaps the display of the approaching upper limit notification. . Alternatively, since the door open error display is always displayed, it is displayed on the layer behind the blinking upper limit notification, and the always displayed door open error display overlaps the blinking upper limit approaching notification display. You may do so.

FIG. 309(b) shows that the character display of the upper limit approaching notification is displayed every second in response to the door open error display which is always displayed. On the right side of FIG. 309(b), the character display of the warning that the upper limit is approaching disappears due to the blinking display, and the door open error display of the remaining constant display is displayed. In the state shown on the right side, it is easy to see the highly urgent door open error display. Also, the speaker 272 outputs a sound such as "The door is open" as an error notification of a door open error, but does not output a notification sound for an approaching upper limit notification.

Although the errors are not as urgent as the door open error, "Please stop the rotating reel", "A communication error has occurred, which is suspected of disconnection of wiring, disconnection of wiring, or power failure of the rental machine 700". ” may be displayed to request improvement, and together with these displays, a notification prompting counting may also be performed.

FIG. 310(a) is a diagram showing an example in which the notification prompting the counting continues even after transitioning to the demonstration display.

In the slot machine 100, a bet is made during the period from when all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped if there is no payout, and after the completion of the payout if there is a payout, until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. If no operation has been performed, the state shifts to the demonstration state (demonstrating). Also, when the settlement button 134 is operated, the display shifts to the demonstration.

In the example shown in FIG. 310(a), during a game (during a bet, during 110 to 112 rotations of the reels, or during a payout), character display of the upper limit imminent notification is started, and the demonstration proceeds without the counting button 171 being operated. . In the performance image display device 157, the game background display was displayed during the game, but is switched to the demonstration display during the demonstration. The demo display is a display that introduces stories and characters. Even if the game moves to the middle of the demo, the character display of the approaching upper limit information is continued unless the "number of game medals" becomes less than the second payout threshold. Players are more likely to leave from now on if they transition during the demo. By encouraging the operation of the counting button 171 even during the demonstration, it may be possible to prevent the player from taking out only the cards from the lending machine 700 and leaving the slot machine 100 while leaving game medals. The blinking display of the approaching upper limit notification may be continued to ensure the visibility of the demonstration display, or the blinking display of the approaching upper limit notification may be displayed at all times to ensure the visibility of the approaching upper limit notification.

FIG. 310(b) is a diagram showing an example of notification after the count button 171 is operated during the demonstration.

The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 310(b) displays a demonstration display. The notification prompting the count is displayed in the largest size so as to overlap the demonstration display. In this case, since the operation of the count button 171 is desired to be performed preferentially, the notification prompting the count is displayed in the largest size. In addition, below that, a caution display is displayed to prevent the card from being stolen while the user is away from the desk, saying, "Be careful not to forget to remove the card or have it stolen." Also, in this example, the "number of game medals" is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the effect image display device 157, and "15300" exceeding the second payout threshold is displayed. In addition, "16383", which is the payout threshold value, may be displayed. The display of the "number of game medals" on the effect image display device 157 may be displayed all the time, may be displayed temporarily, or may not be displayed as in the example shown in FIG. 310(a). good.

Eventually, the count button 171 is operated, and the "number of game medals" is reduced to less than the second payout threshold. Then, the notification prompting the counting disappears (becomes hidden), and this time, the warning display is displayed in the largest size and stands out. It should be noted that the display of "the number of game medals" displayed at the lower right of the effect image display device 157 has decreased to "14950".

FIG. 311(a) is a diagram showing a notification example when the "number of game medals" once exceeds a prescribed number such as a payout threshold value or a second payout threshold value and then falls below the prescribed number.

In FIG. 311(a), the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is displayed as X medals. The X number of coins corresponds to a prescribed number such as a payout threshold value or a second payout threshold value. On the effect image display device 157, a notification prompting counting is displayed because the "number of game medals" has exceeded the specified number. When the notification prompting the counting is displayed, the operation of the counting button 171 is started, and the "number of game medals" immediately becomes less than the specified number. Here, the long press operation of the counting button 171 is continued. In this example, even if the "number of game medals" is less than the prescribed number, the notification to prompt the counting is continued. That is, the notification prompting the counting is continued until the "number of game medals" becomes smaller than the specified number by a predetermined number (for example, 50×100 for two times). The arrow of the notification period in the figure represents the period during which the notification prompting the counting such as "Please operate the counting button" is performed.

If you set the specification to start notification when the specified number is reached and immediately end the notification when the specified number is reached, there is a high possibility that only a small number will be counted, and in this example, the specified number to start notification Continue reporting until the number is less than . By doing so, it is possible to reduce repetition of notification and counting operations. It should be noted that the notification prompting the counting may be performed within a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) regardless of the number of game medals. They can be encouraged to count large numbers.

The prescribed number may be a settlement threshold, a lending threshold, or any other threshold.

In addition, when the "number of game medals" falls below the prescribed number due to a betting operation, the number of "game medals" is reduced by the predetermined number, although the maximum number of medals is reduced by three in the first place. The notification prompting the count may be continued regardless of the value.

FIG. 311(b) is a diagram showing an example of notification prompting counting when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second payout threshold over a plurality of games.

When the "number of game medals" in a certain game exceeds the second payout threshold (15000 in this example), a notification prompting counting is started. The notification prompting the counting is displayed on the effect image display device 157 on which the game background display is displayed. Even if the notification prompting the counting is started, the player continues the game without operating the counting button 171. - 特許庁As a result, the game continues without the "number of game medals" falling below the second payout threshold. Here, when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second threshold value for payout, a notification prompting the counting is performed once in a plurality of games (four games in this example). Therefore, the notification prompting the counting is not performed for three games after the notification prompting the counting is performed. During the three games in which the notification prompting the counting is not performed, the effect display such as the game background display displayed on the effect image display device 157 becomes easy to see, and the interest in the game may be improved. It should be noted that when the "number of game medals" falls below the second payout threshold, the notification prompting the counting is no longer performed. Therefore, if the "number of game medals" falls below the second payout threshold during three games in which the count prompting notification is not performed, the count prompting notification will not be performed until the next payout second threshold value is exceeded. can't break On the other hand, if the "number of game medals" falls below the second payout threshold during the game in which the notification prompting counting is being performed, the notification prompting counting that has been performed until then disappears (is hidden). ).

Next, the notification regarding counting will be further described.

FIG. 312(a) is a diagram showing an example of performing a notification prompting counting each time the "number of game medals" increases by a predetermined number. It should be noted that each diagram ((a) to (c)) shown in FIG. 312 shows the value of the “game medal number” stored in the RAM 358.

In the example shown in FIG. 312(a), every time the "number of game medals" increases by 1000, a notification prompting the counting is performed. First, when the "number of game medals" exceeds 1000, the effect image display device 157 displays that the number of medals exceeds 1000 and prompts the user to count. These displays continue to be displayed for a predetermined period of time, or continue to be displayed until the "number of game medals" changes next time (same hereafter). Therefore, it is displayed even during the game. Next, when the "number of game medals" exceeds 2000, the effect image display device 157 displays that the number of medals exceeds 2000 and prompts the user to count. Furthermore, when the “number of game medals” exceeds 3000, the effect image display device 157 displays that the number of medals exceeds 3000 and prompts the user to count. After that, these notifications are repeated until the number of sheets exceeds 14,000. Then, when the "number of game medals" reaches 15,000, which is the second payout threshold, the display prompting the count is continued unless the "number of game medals" becomes less than 15,000 as shown in FIG. 308(a). will be displayed. When the number of medals reaches 15,000, the message "15,000 or more" and the display prompting the count may be displayed continuously, or the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than the second payout threshold. If it is equal to or less than the payout threshold, the real value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 may be displayed (for example, "15015 medals" is displayed). Since the number of game medals is displayed periodically, the player can roughly grasp the number of game medals without looking at the game medal number display device 170.例文帳に追加Even in the unlikely event that a problem occurs in the game machine and the "number of game medals" disappears, the number of lost medals can be easily grasped. In addition, a display prompting for counting may be performed according to the elapsed time after starting a privilege game such as an AT game. For example, after starting a privilege game such as an AT game, a display prompting counting is performed when 10 minutes have passed, a display prompting counting is performed when 20 minutes have passed, and a count is performed when 30 minutes have passed is displayed. The display can be performed periodically regardless of the number of game medals.

FIG. 312(b) is a diagram showing an example when the count button 171 is operated in a state advantageous to the player.

Here, the state advantageous to the player is the AT state. During the AT state, the "number of game medals" tends to increase due to the payout. During the AT state game, the effect image display device 157 displays a display (AT game display) that suggests or indicates that the player is currently in the AT state. When the "number of game medals" exceeds 1000 during the AT state, as in the effect image display device 157 shown on the left side of FIG. is displayed. In this example, the count button 171 is kept pressed for a long time, and the "number of game medals" decreases to a certain value ("100" in this example).

Here, the state advantageous to the player means a state in which the "number of game medals" can be easily increased by paying out. Therefore, it is not limited to the AT state, and may be in a bonus (RB, BB) operating state or in an ART state. If the player is in an advantageous state, the "number of game medals" is expected to increase, and it can be said that the total number of game medals can be counted (output to the lending machine 700). However, if all game medals are counted, the number of inserted medals (for example, 3) in the next game will also be counted, and the next game cannot be played unless the tokens are borrowed from the lending machine 700. end up In addition, even if the game is in an advantageous state, it happens that the "number of game medals" is consumed more than the payout. Therefore, even if the player is in an advantageous state, a notification is made to the effect that a small number of "game medals" should be left. The effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of FIG. 312(b) is in a state where the "number of game medals" has decreased to 100 due to counting in the AT state. Please proceed with the game", a notification (counting end induction notification) is made to the effect that a small number of "game medals" should be left. In other words, before the counting of all game medals is completed, the counting end guidance notification is performed. Note that instead of the counting end guidance notification shown here, a notification such as "It is good to leave the game value" or a notification such as "If all are counted, the game cannot be played" may be used. In other words, the defect in the case where all game medals are counted may be reported before all the game medals are counted.

In the slot machine 100 in the example of FIG. 312(b), the automatic counting described above is not performed, and counting ends when the counting button 171 is released. In this example, when the player sees the notification that a few "game medals" should be left, the player releases the count button 171, and counting ends when 50 is left as the "game medals". are doing.

FIG. 312(c) is a diagram showing an example in which the counting button 171 is operated in a state disadvantageous to the player.

The state disadvantageous to the player here means a state in which the "number of game medals" tends to decrease as the game is played repeatedly without lending. For example, a normal state can be mentioned. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 312(c) displays a display (normal game display) that suggests or indicates the normal state.

In the example shown in FIG. 312(c), the long press operation of the count button 171 is continued in a state where the "number of game medals" is 1000, and the "number of game medals" reaches a certain value ("100" in this example). exceeding and declining. If the player is in a disadvantageous state, the possibility of the player continuing the game after counting is finished is low. In this example, the long-pressing operation of the count button 171 is continued until the "number of game medals" becomes zero. When the "number of game medals" reaches 0, the effect image display device 157 displays a character display of "please stop counting".

FIG. 313(a) is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 312(b). The following description focuses on differences from the example shown in FIG. 312(b).

In the example shown in FIG. 313(a), the counting operation continues in a state advantageous to the player (for example, AT state), and when the "number of game medals" decreases to a predetermined value ("50" in this example), counting To temporarily invalidate the counting operation even if the operation is continued. That is, even if the long-pressing operation of the count button 171 is continued, the counting is once terminated. As a result, the decrease in the "number of game medals" temporarily stops. FIG. 313(a) shows the effect image display device 157 when the "number of game medals" has decreased to 50, and the display screen displays the message "Counting is temporarily finished". ing. A new operation of the counting button 171 is required to restart the counting that has once been forcibly terminated.

FIG. 313(b) is a diagram showing an example in which counting that has been forcibly terminated once is restarted.

The example shown in FIG. 313(b) is a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 313(a). Since it has decreased to a predetermined value ("50" in this example), the counting is forced to end once. In this example, the player has a reason to stop the game even in an advantageous state, and the player operates the counting button 171 again. That is, the player presses the counting button 171 again. In this modification, when the "number of game medals" becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value, counting by "50" by long-pressing the count button 171 is not effective, and even if the long-pressing operation is performed, only "1" is counted. That is, every time the counting timing (300 ms) arrives, the "number of game medals" is decreased by "1". This is because, for the same reason as described above, if all game medals are counted, the number of inserted medals in the next game (for example, 3) is also counted. Since the next game cannot be played, only "1" is counted in order to make it difficult for the number of game medals to reach 0.

Eventually, when the number of game medals becomes 0, the effect image display device 157 displays a character display of "counting finished".

It should be noted that when the player long presses the counting button 171 again, counting by "50" may be started. In this example, since the number of game medals has decreased to "50", it becomes "0" at once, and the output of the "number of game medals" to the lending machine 700 is quickly completed.

The example shown in FIG. 313(c) is an example of the modified example described with reference to FIGS. In the modified example as well, if the player is in a disadvantageous state, as in the example shown in FIG. When the "number of medals" reaches 0, the effect image display device 157 displays a character display of "Please stop counting".

However, even in a state that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, normal state), in order to give the player motivation to continue playing the game, the same processing as in a state that is advantageous to the player (Fig. 313(a) and The process shown in FIG. 312(b) or the process shown in FIG. 312(b)) may be performed.

[Example of operation when VL signal from rental machine 700 is turned off]
Next, an example in which the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off will be described.

FIG. 314 is a timing chart showing an example when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off.

A VL signal is always transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control section 350 in an ON state. If the VL signal is in an off state, it is suspected that the power of the lending machine 700 is not turned on, and lending and counting may not be possible. It is also conceivable that the communication line connecting the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 is disconnected.

The medal number control section 350 transmits VL signal information indicating that the VL signal is off to the game control section 302 by means of a command in which the upper byte of the medal number control state command shown in FIG. 237 is 01H. When the game control unit 302 receives the VL signal information indicating that the VL signal is off, the determination result in step S1007 shown in FIG. I can't proceed. For this reason, even if the start lever 135 is operated, the operation is not valid, and even if the bet buttons 130 and 132 are operated, the operation is not valid. That is, some of the game progress operations, which are of a plurality of types, are invalidated. In this embodiment, some of the operations are intended for operations performed in the first half of one game. Therefore, if the VL signal is turned off after the first half of the operation starts the game (reel rotation is started), the second half of the operation (operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop operation)) is valid. be. Therefore, although the game is limited, it can be advanced. If the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 becomes invalid while the timing of the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is being waited for, the operation is enabled and it is necessary to wait for the timing from scratch, which may give a troublesome impression. , the possibility of giving this troublesome impression can be reduced. Furthermore, even though the counting is not possible, if the operation of the game progress operation until it is determined by lottery as to whether the internal winning is appropriate or not is enabled, for example, a result advantageous to the player can be obtained, resulting in a sudden and grand event. When the performance is started, there is a possibility that the player's desire to proceed with the game is heightened. As a result, although there was a possibility that a response action would be delayed when the VL signal is turned off, the possibility of this delay can be reduced. However, the operation of the stop buttons 137-139 may be disabled. It is possible to quickly inform the player that the VL signal has turned off. Even if the VL signal is turned off, it is not handled as an error on the main control section 300 (slot machine 100) side, and no notification regarding this is made. Also, if it is treated as an error, an error cancellation operation is required, but if the VL signal is in an off state, an abnormality on the lending machine 700 side is suspected, so an error cancellation operation is performed on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100). don't even ask. It should be noted that, as in the following example, a configuration may be employed in which an error is notified while the VL signal is off.

FIG. 314(a) shows whether the operation (insertion) of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation (insertion/lever operation) of the start lever 135 (lever) are treated as valid or invalid. there is Below that, the value of the “number of game medals” stored in the RAM 358 is shown. Further, the state of the VL signal is shown below it.

As shown in FIG. 314(a), when the VL signal is on, both the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are treated as valid operations. Also, an error notification, which will be described later, is not performed.

When the VL signal is turned off, the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are treated as invalid operations. Further, the effect image display device 157 displays an error notification display. On the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 314(a), a character display such as "Communication with rental machine not established" is displayed. As the error notification, it may be notified that the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 or the operation of the start lever 135 is invalid. For example, a character display such as "Bet operation/lever operation is invalid" or a character display such as "Bet operation/lever operation is invalid because communication with the lending machine is not established" may be displayed.

Next, a modified example of this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, regardless of the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358, when the VL signal is turned off, the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are treated as invalid operations. , in the modified examples described below, the correspondence differs depending on the value of the "number of game medals". That is, in the first modification, both the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are in a state ( If the VL signal is turned off in the state of, for example, 980 sheets as shown in FIG. 314(a), it is treated as an invalid operation. A small number of "game medals" means that the player can end the game at any time. encourage repair. On the other hand, even if the VL signal is turned off while the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than the certain threshold value, it is treated as a valid operation.

FIG. 314(b) shows a first modified example in which the "number of game medals" is 15550, which is 15000 or more, which is the second payout threshold.

When the "number of game medals" reaches the payout threshold, all of the multiple types of game progress operations are invalidated. That is, the next game insertion operation (operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132) is disabled, and the opportunity to operate the start lever 135 and the stop buttons 137 to 139 are eliminated.

In the first modification shown in FIG. 314(b), when the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than the second threshold for payout, the "number of game medals" eventually reaches the threshold for payout, and the next game can be played. Until that happens, we don't stop the progress of the game so that the players can enjoy it. Further, the continuation of the game even if the "number of game medals" exceeds the second payout threshold often means that the player is in an advantageous state (for example, AT state, etc.), and the game is played in this state. There is a high possibility that the interest in the game will be significantly reduced if the game is stopped.

In the first modification shown in FIG. 314(b), the progress of the game does not stop even if the VL signal is turned off. is displayed.

FIG. 315 shows a second modification in which the operation differs depending on whether or not the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold.

The state shown in FIG. 315(a) is a state in which the number of game medals is 14000, which is less than a certain threshold (15000 which is the second payout threshold in this example as well). In the second modification, even if the VL signal is turned off in this state, all of the multiple types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations. Therefore, operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and operation of the start lever 135 are effective. However, even in the second modification, when the VL signal is turned off, the effect image display device 157 displays an error notification.

The state shown in FIG. 315(b) is a state in which the number of game medals is 15550, which is equal to or greater than a certain threshold (second payout threshold). In the second modification, when the VL signal is turned off in this state, some of the multiple types of game progress operations are disabled. That is, the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 performed in the first half of one game are invalidated. Also, an error notification is displayed on the effect image display device 157 .

The second modification shown in FIG. 315 is the exact opposite of the first modification, but the fact that the "number of game medals" is small means that there is a possibility that the game has just started, and it does not interfere with the progress of the game that has just started. There is an aim. In addition, it cannot be said that there is a possibility that the "number of game medals" will disappear even if any trouble occurs in the slot machine 100, so the "number of game medals" is large. If the "number of game medals" disappears in this state, the disadvantage will increase. Therefore, when the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than a certain threshold value (second payout threshold value), the progress of the game is stopped, and early repair by the clerk is urged. In addition, the fact that the number of "game medals" is large means that it is not strange for the player to perform counting operation at any time. , with the aim of encouraging early repair by the store clerk.

From the above explanation, the method of responding to the turn-off of the VL signal also changes depending on the value of the "number of game medals" and whether the state is favorable or unfavorable to the player. It should be noted that the term "advantageous state" for the player means a state in which the "number of game medals" can be easily increased by paying out (for example, AT state, ART state, BB state, BR state, etc.), and is referred to as a disadvantageous state. is a state (for example, normal state) in which the "number of game medals" tends to decrease as the game continues.

When the value of the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold in a state that is disadvantageous to the player, when the VL signal is turned off, as shown in FIG. At least some operations are disabled. On the other hand, when the value of the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than a certain threshold value in a state advantageous to the player, as shown in FIG. All operations of operations are treated as valid operations.

Alternatively, if the value of the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold in a situation that is disadvantageous to the player, even if the VL signal is turned off, as shown in FIG. All operations of operations may be treated as valid operations. On the other hand, when the value of the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than a certain threshold value in a state advantageous to the player, when the VL signal is turned off, as shown in FIG. At least some of the operations may be disabled.

When the value of the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than a certain threshold value in a state disadvantageous to the player, the player may end the game at any time. Therefore, when the VL signal is turned off, at least one of a plurality of types of game progress operations is performed in order to quickly make the player aware that communication with the lending machine 700 has not been established and to prompt the clerk to repair it early. operation is disabled. On the other hand, if the value of the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold in a state that is advantageous to the player, there is a possibility that the state has just become advantageous. Therefore, even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the multiple types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations so as not to interfere with the progress of the game.

Alternatively, if the value of the "number of game medals" is greater than or equal to a certain threshold in a situation that is disadvantageous to the player, counting may not be necessary. Therefore, even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the multiple types of game progress operations may be treated as valid operations so as not to interfere with the progress of the game. On the other hand, if the value of the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value in a state advantageous to the player, the player is notified early before the "number of game medals" exceeds the certain threshold value, and the clerk In order to promote early restoration by , when the VL signal is turned off, at least some of the multiple types of game progress operations may be disabled.

FIG. 316 is a timing chart showing another example when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off.

In the above explanation, even if the VL signal is turned off, it is not treated as an error on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) side, and no error cancellation operation is requested for the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100). However, in the example shown in FIG. 316(a), it is treated as an error on the main control section 300 (slot machine 100) side, and an error cancellation operation for the main control section 300 (slot machine 100) is also requested. It is highly possible that the VL signal is turned off because the power supply of the renting machine 700 is not turned on or the communication line connecting the slot machine 100 and the renting machine 700 is disconnected. Therefore, even if the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) performs an error cancellation operation, there is a high possibility that the error will occur again. However, by making an error, the clerk can be called, and the clerk can turn on the rental machine 700 .

The example shown in FIG. 316(b) is an example in which the game can proceed until the counting button 171 is operated even if the VL signal is turned off.

In the example shown in FIG. 316(b), even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the multiple types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations. When the VL signal is turned off, it means that communication with the rented machine 700 is not established, and the rented machine 700 can also determine that there is an abnormality and issue an error notification. If the lending machine 700 issues an error notification immediately after the VL signal is turned off, the clerk can be called even if the slot machine 100 does not immediately issue an error notification. Further, since communication with the rented machine 700 has not been established, the counting notification may not be sent to the rented machine 700 even if the counting button 171 is operated. Therefore, in this example, the slot machine 100 side makes a notification at the timing when the counting button 171 is operated. By doing so, the slot machine 100 side can perform notification at the minimum opportunity, and by suppressing excessive notification, the player can comfortably proceed with the game.

After detecting the operation of the count button 171, the slot machine 100 side continues to inform until the VL signal is turned back on.

[Regarding the difference between payout and counting process]
If the amount of increase in the number of game medals per unit game in a game state advantageous to the player such as the AT state or the bonus state is greater than the amount of decrease in the number of game medals per unit game due to counting processing, it is advantageous to the player. In such a state, it becomes difficult to finish the counting process. For example, the increase in the number of game medals per game (net increase) is 10, and if it is possible to count less than 10 in the shortest time required for one game, 4.1 seconds, proceed with the AT game If the number of game medals is counted while the AT game is being played, the number of game medals will continue to increase. Therefore, when an effect accompanying counting is performed while the AT game is progressing, the execution period of this effect becomes long, and for example, it is difficult to perform an effect with an ending scene in anticipation of the end of the counting. Also, when a counting effect (FIG. 289, etc.) is executed in relation to the counting process, this counting effect interferes with other effects, and the interest in the game is reduced. On the other hand, by designing so that the amount of increase in the number of game medals per unit game in an advantageous game state is smaller than the amount of decrease in the number of game medals per unit game due to counting processing, such a problem can be made less likely to occur. can be done. For example, the increase in the number of game medals per game (net increase) is 10, and if it is possible to count more than 10 in the shortest time required for one game, 4.1 seconds, proceed with the AT game When the counting is performed while the number of game medals is counted, the number of game medals continues to decrease during the AT game. For example, if it is possible to count 50 sheets every 300 ms when the count button 171 is kept pressed, it is possible to expect a decrease of about 700 sheets in 4.1 seconds. Therefore, when the production accompanying the counting is performed while the AT game is progressing, the prospect of the end of the execution period of this production can be obtained. It should be noted that, for example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed (or the execution probability increases) according to the execution time of the counting process.

Note that the counting effect is not limited to the configuration in which the counting effect is ended in accordance with the counting process, and the counting effect may be ended even when the counting process is continuing. The execution time of the counting process for transferring the number of game medals to the lending machine 700 becomes longer as the number of game medals increases. For this reason, if the counting effect is uniformly executed in accordance with the execution period of the counting process, the interest in the game decreases due to the counting effect being executed for a long time, and the counting effect hinders other effects. Problems can arise. Such a problem can sometimes be prevented by ending the counting effect even while the counting process is continuing. In addition, as such a configuration, for example, the counting effect is ended depending on the game situation or the passage of time, or the counting effect is ended when the content determined as the counting effect is executed. . In addition, when the counting process ends before these conditions for ending the counting effect are satisfied, the counting effect may be terminated or the counting effect may be continued.

Further, the content of the counting effect may be changed according to the number of game medals counted. In this case, the effect content may be set based on the amount of game medals in the counting process, or the effect content may be set based on the cumulative amount of game medals in the counting process in an advantageous state. can be Further, for example, when the number of game medals counted exceeds a predetermined value, the setting suggesting effect may be executed (or the execution probability increases). After the player has obtained a large number of game medals, the player can perform counting processing and select a game play. It should be noted that, regarding the counting effect corresponding to the number of game medals, if the counting process and the counting effect are terminated in the middle due to reasons such as unintentionally releasing the counting button 171, the interest in the game will decrease. There is a risk that it will be lost. For this reason, even after the counting effect has ended in the middle, if a new counting process is started within a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) from there, the immediately preceding counting effect It is also possible to restart the count effect that has been lost) from the middle. In addition, the counting effect is continuously executed within a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) after the counting process ends, and a new counting process is started while the counting effect continues. In this case, the counting effect being executed may be continued as it is. With these configurations, it is possible to prevent the counting effect from disappearing due to the end of the counting process due to an unintended operation. Note that the predetermined time may be the same as the determination time of the long press of the counting button 171, for example.

Further, for example, when operating the count button 171 while performing a game progress operation, it is difficult to further operate the effect button. If an effect requiring an operation on the operating means is executed during execution of the counting effect, there is a risk of inducing an erroneous operation. Therefore, during the execution of the counting effect, the effect requiring operation of some operation means may not be executed (or the execution probability may be reduced). In addition, it is also possible to similarly limit effects that are extremely difficult to recognize when executed at the same time as the counting effects. That is, it may be configured to provide an effect that is restricted while the counting effect is being executed. In addition, it does not have to be an effect that requires the operation of the operation means, for example, an effect with a freeze that prevents the game from progressing, or an effect that takes a long time to run and the result is not known until the end. may

It should be noted that, for example, when the counting process is started while the side lamps are lighting, which is an effect in an advantageous state, the effect by the side lamps changes to that by the counting effect, and so on. may be replaced with a counting effect. Also, when some kind of effect is started during execution of the counting effect, the counting effect may be replaced by an effect to be executed later.

In addition, the content of the counting effect changes according to the degree of progress of the game during the execution of the counting process, such as the character changing (for example, growing) when the game progresses during the execution of the counting process. can be

Further, when the number of game medals becomes 0 and the counting process and the counting effect are completed, by keeping the counting button 171 pressed, if the number of game medals is newly acquired and the counting process is started, immediately before The finished counting effect may be restarted from the continuation.

Also, during execution of the counting process, at least a part of the game progress operation during execution of the counting process may be restricted such that the next game start operation cannot be performed.

[Regarding the configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting]
In the embodiment described above, by pressing the count button 171 for a long time, the number of game medals up to 50 can be transferred to the lending machine 700 . FIG. 317(a) shows the change in the number of game medals when the count button 171 is pressed long from the state where there are 120 game medals. Specifically, 50 game medals out of 120 are transferred to the lending machine 700, then 50 game medals out of the remaining 70 are transferred to the lending machine 700, and the remaining 20 are transferred to the lending machine 700. It shows the flow until all the number of game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700 and the number of game medals becomes zero.

In the counting process, the current value of the number of game medals is temporarily set as the number of game medals for counting determination (step S3304 in FIG. 258), and the counting process is executed based on this number of game medals for counting determination. (Fig. 260). At this time, if there is an increase in the number of game medals (payout or settlement operation) after the number of game medals for count determination is set, the content is reflected in the number of game medals for count determination that is set next. FIG. 317(b) shows a change in the number of game medals when 8 coins are paid out while 70 game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700 in the flow of FIG. 317(a). It is In this example, 50 of the remaining 70 game medals have been transferred to the lending machine 700, so that the remaining 20 game medals are added to the remaining 28 game medals by adding 8 payouts. After that, all the remaining game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, and the game medals become zero.

In the above-described embodiment, as in the example of FIG. 317(b) above, the increase in the number of game medals (payout or settlement operation) during the counting process is , and the number of game medals (120 in FIG. 317(b)) at the start of the counting process does not match the number of game medals (128 in FIG. 317(b)) transferred by the counting process. There is a possibility that it will become a work burden when there is a situation to check the data of In such a case, as shown in FIG. 317(c), the increase in the number of game medals (payout or settlement operation) during the counting process is not immediately reflected. becomes 0, or the count button 171 is released before the number of game medals becomes 0, thereby ending the counting process that has been continued. For example, when the counting button 171 is kept pressed for a long time, after counting 120 cards stored when the counting button 171 is pressed for a long time, 8 cards, which increased during the long pressing of the counting button 171, are counted. do. For example, when the long press of the count button 171 is released in the middle, 60 sheets out of 120 stored when the long press of the count button 171 is started are counted, and then the long press of the count button 171 is resumed. Sometimes count the 68 memorized. After restarting, since the number of game medals at the time of starting the counting process is 68, the 68 medals are counted in the order of 50→18. In FIG. 317(c), there are 8 payouts while 70 game medals are being transferred to the lending machine 700 in the flow of FIG. 317(a). does not reflect this increase (the same flow as in FIG. 317(a)), the increase is reflected after the number of game medals reaches 0, and the counting process continues until the number of game medals reaches 0. It is shown that In this configuration, the number of game medals (120 in FIG. 317(c)) at the start of the counting process and the number of game medals transferred by the counting process until the number of game medals becomes 0 once (FIG. 317(c) 120 sheets) can be matched.

In FIG. 317(e), while 70 game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700 in the flow of FIG. 317(a), 8 coins are paid out. Immediately after counting the 120 cards stored at the start of the game, the 8 cards paid out are counted. With this configuration, the time required for counting can be shortened.

It should be noted that if the number of game medals increases multiple times while the counting process is being continued, the total value of all these may be reflected later, or the counting process may be continued. If there is, it may be reflected one by one each time the number of game medals becomes zero.

The display of the game medal number display device 170 in the case of adopting the above configuration may also be displayed in accordance with the change in the game medal number. Further, the increase in the number of game medals (payout or settlement operation) while the counting process is being continued may be immediately reflected on the display (reflected in the decrease display of the number of game medals). However, regarding the amount of change in the value due to the counting process in this case, the value of the actual number of game medals and the value of the number of game medals on the display are the same (a state in which there is an increase in deviation). FIG. 317(d) shows a flow when adopting a configuration in which an increase in the number of game medals (payout or settlement operation) is immediately reflected on the display in contrast to the flow of FIG. 317(c). there is In this configuration, the value of the actual number of game medals and the value of the displayed number of game medals are in a state of deviation by the amount of the above increase, but they are in a state of matching at the end of the counting process. Even if the count button 171 is released before the number of game medals reaches 0 to end the counting process, the increase is reflected in the number of game medals at that time. The value of the number of game medals on the display becomes the same.

The timing for reflecting the increase in the number of game medals during the counting process is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, the timing when the counting button 171 is released. In this case, by operating the count button 171 again, the reflected increment can be transferred to the lending machine 700 . Alternatively, it may be the timing when the number of game medals becomes 0 while the counting process is being continued. It may be possible to transfer (the counting process continues, FIG. 317(e)).

The increase in the number of game medals may be due to payout or settlement operation, but either one of these may be the target of the configuration described in FIG. 317(c), or both may be the target.

[Regarding bet number reduction setting by bet button operation]
In the above-described embodiment, if you wish to change the number of game medals to bet 1 after betting 3 game medals, operate the checkout button 134 to return the 3 bets to the "number of game medals". By operating the bet button 130 for betting one coin again, the current number of bets can be reduced to one. In this case, it is necessary to operate the settlement button 134 and the bet button 130, but it may be configured so that these operations can be executed by operating the bet button 130 once. As an example of such a configuration, when the bet button 130 is operated while the current number of bets is the maximum value, there is a configuration in which the settlement button process (FIG. 244) is executed and then the process for the bet button operation is executed. mentioned. Also, when the bet button 130 is operated with the current bet number at the maximum value, the amount of change when the bet number changes from the maximum value to the minimum value (in the above example, the difference is 2) is taken as the settlement number. Along with sending a settlement command (FIG. 239), the current bet value may be set to the minimum value. In this configuration, a portion of the bet amount is settled by operating the bet button 130, and separate input processing and input commands are not required. These configurations are examples of configurations in which the current bet number is set to the minimum value based on the operation of the operation means capable of setting the minimum bet amount when the current bet number is at the maximum value. Equivalent to.

In addition, when the above configuration is adopted, by repeating the operation of the bet button 130, the current bet number can be changed in the order of 0→1→2→3→1→2 . . . You can change the current bet setting.

If there is a settlement sound that can be output in response to the operation of the settlement button 134 and a bet sound that can be output in response to the operation of the bet button 130, the bet button 130 when the current bet number changes from the maximum value to the minimum value For the operation of , the settlement sound and the input sound may be output in succession. However, if two types of sounds are output for one operation, the player may be confused. , the input sound may be output without outputting the settlement sound. In response to the operation of the settlement button 134, characters or the like indicating that the settlement has been made are displayed on the screen of the effect image display device 157, and the operation of the bet button 130 when the current bet number changes from the maximum value to the minimum value. On the other hand, the screen of the effect image display device 157 may not display characters or the like indicating that the payment has been made. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the settlement button 134 has been operated instead of the bet button 130 .

[Regarding the production according to the number of game medals]
Hereinafter, a configuration for executing different effects according to the number of game medals will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 318 is a diagram showing an example of an effect executed according to the number of game medals.

In the above embodiment, information on the number of game medals stored in the RAM 358 of the medal number control unit 350 is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 via the game control unit 302 (medal number control state command and security command ). The following example is an example of the operation of executing different effects according to the value of the number of game medals. In this example, in the AT state, a normal effect is executed until the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number (3000 in this example), and a special effect is executed when the predetermined number is reached.

First, FIG. 318(a1) shows the state at the start of the AT state (the number of game medals at the start=500), and FIG. 318(a2) shows the state of the game in the AT state. FIG. 318(a3) shows the state when medals are won in the AT state, and FIG. 318(a4) shows the state when the AT state ends. In the AT state, the value of the number of game medals is displayed as the value of "Possessed" in the upper left of the screen, and the number of medals acquired after entering the AT state is displayed in the "... GET" section in the upper right of the screen. is displayed.

In the flow of FIGS. 318(a1) to (a4), since the number of game medals does not exceed 3000 in the AT state, the normal effect (FIG. 318(a2)) is executed without executing the special effect.

Next, FIGS. 318(b1) to 318(b3) show an example in which a special effect is executed when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number (3000). In this example, the state in which the normal effect is executed because the number of game medals has not reached the predetermined number (Fig. 318 (b1)) is changed to the state in which the number of game medals has reached the predetermined number after winning medals ( Fig. 318 (b2)) is reached, after which the state in which the special effect is executed (Fig. 318 (b3)) is reached. In this special effect, the background, the color of the operation navigation, and the BGM are different from the normal effect. That is, the effect changes in a state where many game medals have been obtained, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the different effects are not limited to the example of the special effects described above, and various effects can be used. This different effect is not limited to a configuration that uses different effects, but for example, while the base effect is being executed, another effect interrupts part of it to create a different effect as a whole. good too. Further, for example, regarding the display of the number of game medals and the number of earned medals, the color of each digit is changed to make it rainbow, or the color of each digit is changed periodically. Numerical values may have different colors and sizes. Also, the state in which the effect is to be changed is not limited to the AT state, and it is sufficient if the effect is different when the state is advantageous to the player.

In addition, the configuration is not limited to switching the effect immediately after the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, as long as the effect to be executed differs depending on whether the number of game medals reaches the predetermined number. The effect may be switched at the timing when the number reaches a predetermined number and some condition (for example, the number of games is completed, the switching lottery is won) is satisfied, or whether or not the number of game medals reaches the predetermined number. It is good also as a structure with a different ending.

Furthermore, when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, a display suggesting the set value may be executed. The example of FIG. 318(c1) shows an example in which a display suggesting a set value (in this example, a family crest display) is executed at the ending when the number of game medals has reached a predetermined number.

In addition, it is not limited to the configuration in which a different effect or display is always executed when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, but a different effect or display is more likely to be executed than when the number of game medals does not reach the predetermined number. It may be a configuration.

In addition, for example, when the number of game medals reaches 3000, the above-mentioned special effect is executed, and when the number of game medals reaches 2000, a display suggesting a set value is executed at the ending. The value of the number of game medals, which serves as a trigger for making the , may be provided separately.

In the above example, the number of game medals is used as a determination target for determining whether or not to execute a different effect or display. Even when the number of medals is used as the determination target, or the total value of the number of game medals and the number of possessed medals is used as the determination target, the same effect may be obtained. Further, the value used at this time is not limited to the total number of possessed medals, and may be a configuration in which a part thereof (for example, 1000 of the number of possessed medals of 5000) is used. When adopting such a configuration, information about the number of medals possessed may be transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . If the card inserted in the lending machine 700 or the host server handles the credit balance, the value of the credit balance or the value obtained by converting the credit balance into the number of game medals is used to calculate the above number of medals. may be the same as the configuration using . In this way, the card inserted into the lending machine 700 or the information about the gaming value managed by the host server may be used as a determination target as to whether or not to execute a different effect or display.

Furthermore, for example, when the number of game medals is 2000 or more and the number of possessed medals is 5000 or more, a different effect is executed. A configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of determination objects are used and the results are combined, such that different effects are executed in each case. It should be noted that the value of the determination target may not be displayed, but if the value of the determination target is displayed as in the above example, the relationship between the determination target and the effect can be grasped. It becomes easy to play, and it can be expected that the interest in the game will be improved.

Also, in the above example, the number of game medals and the number of possessed medals are used as the object for determining whether or not to execute a different effect or display, but the number of earned medals in the AT state may be used as the object for determination. FIGS. 319(d1) to (d7) show an example in which a special effect is executed when the number of won medals reaches a predetermined number (3000). In this flow, FIGS. 319(d2)-(d4) show the case where the value of the number of game medals reaches 3000 in the same manner as described with reference to FIGS. 318(b1)-(b3). However, in this example, whether or not to execute the special effect is determined based on the number of medals won, so unlike FIGS. 318(b1) to (b3), the special effect is not executed at this point. After that, the number of acquired medals reaches a predetermined number (here, 3000) (Fig. 319(d5)), and then a state in which a special effect is being executed (Fig. 319(d6)). In this example as well, the effect changes when the number of medals obtained increases, and the interest in the game can be improved. Also, in this example, it is shown that setting suggestions similar to those in FIG.

In the above example, a configuration was described in which a different effect or display is executed when the number of game medals, the number of possessed medals, or the number of earned medals reaches a predetermined number. The number of medals may be used, and the number of won medals may be used for the execution of a different part of the performance, so that each may be properly used. Further, for example, a configuration in which the effects described above can be executed in parallel, such as the effect using the number of possessed medals and the effect using the number of earned medals being executed in parallel, may be employed. In these configurations, for example, if the counting process is not executed in a state advantageous to the player, the number of won medals may exceed the number of medals possessed, and in such a situation, a different effect is executed. As described above, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of determination targets are used and the results are combined.

[About operation when errors are duplicated]
The operation related to errors will be described below with reference to FIGS. 320 to 322. FIG. FIG. 320 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the number of game medals overflows. FIG. 321 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a medal number control disconnection error (error code E0) occurs. FIG. 322 is a diagram showing an example of the operation in the case where the game medal number exceeding the upper limit error and the medal number control disconnection error (error code E0) occur at the same time.

In the above embodiment, the number of game medals stored in the slot machine 100 (the RAM 358 of the medal number control section 350) can be transferred to the lending machine 700 by operating the counting button 171 (counting process). In FIGS. 320(a1) to (a3), the number of game medals is 1336 (FIG. 320(a1)), the count button 171 is operated (FIG. 320(a2)), and all the game medals are lent out. As a result of transmission to the machine 700, the value of the game medal number display device 170 (the number of game medals stored in the slot machine 100) becomes 0 (FIG. 320(a3)). .

Further, in the above embodiment, 16383 is set as the upper limit value of the number of game medals, and when winning a combination with a payout, if the total of this payout and the number of game medals exceeds the upper limit value, an overflow state occurs. (The response command becomes "abnormal" in FIG. 276). In this overflow state, it can be said that it is a kind of error because it waits for resolution of the overflow state without executing the addition processing by paying out. This overflow state can be resolved by operating the count button 171 to move the number of game medals to the lending machine 700 . In Figures 320 (b1) to (b4), the number of game medals is at the upper limit (Figure 320 (b1)). After that, the count button 171 is pressed and held (Fig. 320 (b3), 50 as the number of game medals is moved to the lending machine 700, and the value of the game medal number display device 170 is decreased by 1), and the overflow state is canceled (Fig. 320 ( A series of flows up to b4)) are shown. The message "Error has been cleared" in FIG. 320(b4) indicates that the overflow state has been resolved, and is deleted after being displayed for several seconds. Also, when the overflow state is resolved, the payout amount is added to the number of game medals. In this example, the count button 171 is pressed long, but if the count button 171 is not pressed long, 1 will be transferred to the lending machine 700 as the number of game medals. In this case, the overflow state can be canceled by repeatedly hitting the counting button 171 until the number of game medals becomes equal to or less than the upper limit. In any case, the overflow state can be canceled by operating the counting button 171. FIG.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, various errors that hinder the progress of the game by the game control unit 302 (for example, the error in FIG. 235(b)) can be detected. Since these errors require countermeasures on the side of the store, the configuration is such that the game is disabled and these errors are notified. 321 (c1) to (c3) show a state in which no error has occurred (Fig. 321 (c1)), a state in which a medal number control unit disconnection error has occurred (Fig. 321 (c2)), and then 321(c3) shows a series of flow until the error state is resolved by operating the reset button R while the side performs the treatment. In addition, the message "Error E0 resolved" in Fig. 321 (c3) indicates that the error that has occurred (in this example, the medal number control unit disconnection error) has been resolved, and after being displayed for several seconds erased. The reset button R is a button for transmitting a reset signal to each control unit, and is provided inside the gaming machine so that the player cannot operate it.

As described above, in the slot machine 100 of the above embodiment, an error related to the game control unit 302 that needs to be canceled by the operation of the store (for example, a game sequence error in FIG. game control error, etc.) and an error related to the medal number control section 350 that can be canceled by the player's operation (for example, overflow state, hereinafter referred to as medal number control error). The medal number control error is an error that does not seriously affect the progress of the game compared to the game control error. Therefore, if these errors occur in duplicate, it is conceivable to preferentially resolve the game control error of high importance. An example of the operation when adopting such a configuration will be described below. In the following explanation, an example of a disconnection error of the medal number control section and an overflow state will be explained, but the error concerning the game control section 302 and the error concerning the medal number control section 350 are not limited to these errors. It can be applied to errors that employ similar clearing methods.

FIG. 322(d1) shows a state in which the number of game medals is the upper limit value, and it is assumed that a combination with a payout is won from there, resulting in an overflow state. FIG. 322(d2) shows a state in which a message prompting the operation of the count button 171 to cancel the overflow state is displayed. The overflow state can be canceled by operating the counting button 171, but here, it is assumed that a disconnection error of the medal number control section has occurred before this operation (game control error and medal number control error overlap). . FIG. 322(d3) shows a state in which the message shown in FIG. 322(d2) is cleared and a message indicating that a disconnection error of the medal number control section has occurred is displayed. In the above example, the message indicating the overflow state ((d2) in FIG. 322) is cleared when the medal number controller disconnection error occurs. Display a message indicating that an error has occurred superimposed on the message indicating that the overflow state has occurred, or display the overflow state in a position that does not interfere with the message indicating that the medal count control unit disconnection error has occurred. You may make it display the message about both errors, such as displaying the message which shows. Also, when displaying messages regarding both errors, a configuration may be used in which a display different from the display when an error occurs alone is used.

In a state where the game control error and the medal number control error overlap, even if the counting button 171 is operated, the counting process is not executed, so the overflow state is not released. Also, at this time, a message is displayed indicating that the operation of the counting button 171 is invalid. In FIG. 322(d4), by operating the count button 171, in addition to the message shown in FIG. A state is shown in which a message prompting the user to do so is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to preferentially process the disconnection error of the medal number control section.

After that, the store side takes measures and the reset button R is operated to eliminate the error state and return to the overflow state (elimination of duplication of game control error and medal number control error). FIG. 322(d5) shows a state in which a message indicating that the disconnection error of the medal number control unit has been resolved is displayed. FIG. 322(d6) shows that after this message is cleared, a message similar to that of FIG. 322(d2) is displayed. Thereafter, by operating the counting button 171 as described in FIG. 320, the counting process can be executed and the overflow state can be released. FIGS. 322(d7) and 322(d8) show that the count button 171 has been pressed long and the overflow state has been resolved as in FIGS. 320(b3) and 320(b4). In this case, the payout amount is added to the number of game medals after the overflow state is resolved.

It should be noted that, in order to realize the above operation, while the game control error is occurring, the processing corresponding to the operation of the operating means (in the above example, the counting button 171) used to resolve the medal number control error is not executed. good too. 323 (e1) to (e3), the state in which no error has occurred (FIG. 323 (e1)) changes to the state in which a disconnection error has occurred in the medal number control section (FIG. 323 (e2)), and this error 323 ( e3)) is shown.

In the above example, the operation means for canceling the game control error and the operation means for canceling the medal number control error are different. Here, for example, the error canceling operation means for canceling the game control error and the medal number control error may be the same, such that any error can be canceled by the reset button R. It should be noted that the error canceling operating means at this time may be operable by the player or may be inoperable (for example, operating means installed inside the gaming machine). In the case of this configuration, if a game control error occurs while the medal number control error is occurring, the game control error is canceled by operating the operation means for error cancellation (the medal number control error is not canceled and the game Control error is preferentially canceled), it is possible to preferentially cancel the game control error of high importance.

[Notification of counting process (1)]
In a state advantageous to the player, an effect for livening up the game may be executed. A case of lowering (or muting) the noise is provided. With this configuration, the player can be made aware that the counting process is being executed by the change in the sound volume of the effect, and can be made to concentrate on the counting process. This change in volume corresponds to an example of counting notification. In addition, below, the count notification by the change of this effect sound volume is called the count notification A. FIG. Here, the configuration for changing the volume of the effect by counting processing will be mainly described, but the configuration for changing the effect in a state advantageous to the player by counting processing (for example, change in volume, change in sound quality, change in display) A part may be changed, and the color of the lamp and the lighting mode may be changed).

In some cases, a so-called demonstration effect is not executed in a state advantageous to the player (for example, AT state, bonus state), and a demonstration effect is executed in a state disadvantageous to the player (for example, normal state). Then, the effect is continuously executed in a state advantageous to the player. The counting notification A can make the execution of the counting process known even in such a configuration.

Although the count notification A has the above effects, there is a problem that depending on the timing of execution, it may make it difficult to understand the presentation of important scenes. Here, the state in which all the reels stop rotating corresponds to the period between games, and the effect to be executed is less important, so all the reels stop rotating. It is good also as a structure which performs count alert|reporting A in a state. Furthermore, after the last stop operation on the reels, there is a case where the effect of winning a prize is performed, so that a predetermined period has passed since the last stop operation on the reels, and all the reels have stopped rotating. It is good also as a structure which performs count alert|reporting A on condition that it has stopped. In addition, the counting notification A is provided on the condition that all the reels have stopped rotating after the effect due to the last stop operation on the reels has been executed (for example, when switching to the demonstration effect). It may be configured to execute. In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of counting processing, a configuration (for example, a configuration aimed at reducing power consumption) in which the effect volume is lowered (or silenced) even after the time has passed since the last stop operation on the reel is adopted. In this case, the degree of volume reduction may be made different so as to be distinguished from the volume reduction due to the count notification A. Further, when the performance volume reduction due to the passage of time and the execution of the count notification A overlap, the volume reduction due to the count notification A may be prioritized.

On the other hand, when any one of the reels is spinning, the game is being executed, and the effect to be executed has a high degree of importance. Therefore, it may be configured such that the count notification A is not executed while any reel is rotating.

Also, depending on the operation during the game, there is a case where an effect is executed with this as a trigger. For example, in a state where all the reels have stopped rotating as described above, the operation of the bet button 132 or the operation of the start lever 135 may trigger the production of the next game. There is a case where the operation of the operating means is triggered to execute an effect that enhances the interest of the game. For this reason, a configuration may be adopted in which the count notification A being executed is terminated (for example, the changed sound volume is returned) triggered by an operation on some operation means.

In the above description, whether or not to output a counting sound is determined according to the number of counted sheets (eg, FIG. 289), or the counting sound is varied according to the operation time of the counting button 171 (eg, FIG. 289). 289), but when the counting notification A is executed, a counting sound corresponding to such counting processing may be added. Further, for example, the count notification A is executed only when all the reels are not rotating, while the count sound is always output to the counting process. Alternatively, a counting sound may be output separately from the counting notification A. The counting sound added here is set to 50% volume while the reels are rotating, and set to 100% volume while the reels are stopped. may be added. Moreover, not only the counting sound but also various effects corresponding to the counting process (for example, the output of the counting sound, the count display related to the counting process, and combinations thereof) may be combined with the count notification A. Examples of various effects for such counting processing include outputting a counting sound in accordance with the execution of the counting processing, and counting display is allowed to be executed after the game ends (after the third stop operation, after all reels are stopped). (only counting sound is output during reel rotation). As another example, a counting sound is output in accordance with the execution of the counting process, and the counting display is displayed after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the game is finished (after the third stop operation, after all the reels are stopped). After), execution is permitted (only counting sound is output during reel rotation).

[Notification of counting process (2)]
In the above description, whether or not to output a counting sound is determined according to the number of counted pieces (eg, FIG. 289), or the counting sound is varied according to the operation time of the counting button 171 (eg, FIG. 289). , and the configuration for outputting a counting sound according to the counting process.

In a state advantageous to the player, an effect may be executed to liven up the game, but the configuration described below can output a counting sound while the counting button 171 is being operated (counting process). In addition, a case is provided in which the production sound in an advantageous state is maintained. With this configuration, there are cases where the effect sound in an advantageous state is maintained even during the counting process, and it is possible to prevent the amusement of the game from being diminished. In addition, the player can be made aware that the counting process is being executed by the counting sound. This counting sound corresponds to an example of counting notification. Note that the counting notification by the counting sound will be referred to as counting notification B hereinafter.

While the counting notification B has the above effect, there is a problem that depending on the timing of execution, it may make it difficult to understand the presentation of important scenes. Here, the state in which all the reels stop rotating corresponds to the period between games, and the effect to be executed is less important, so all the reels stop rotating. It is good also as a structure which performs count alert|reporting B in a state. Furthermore, after the last stop operation on the reels, there is a case where the effect of winning a prize is performed, so that a predetermined period has passed since the last stop operation on the reels, and all the reels have stopped rotating. It is good also as a structure which performs count alert|reporting B on condition that it has stopped. In addition, counting notification B is provided on the condition that all reels have stopped rotating after the effect due to the final stop operation on the reels has been executed (for example, when switching to the demonstration effect). It may be configured to execute.

On the other hand, when any one of the reels is spinning, the game is being executed, and the effect to be executed has a high degree of importance. Therefore, it may be configured such that the count notification B is not executed while any reel is rotating.

Also, depending on the operation during the game, there is a case where an effect is executed with this as a trigger. For example, in a state where all the reels have stopped rotating as described above, the operation of the bet button 132 or the operation of the start lever 135 may trigger the production of the next game. There is a case where the operation of the operating means is triggered to execute an effect that enhances the interest of the game. For this reason, a configuration may be adopted in which the count notification B is not executed after some operation means is operated.

In the above description, the case where the count notification B is executed and the case where it is not executed have been described. For example, a different melody, different timbre, number of sounds, volume, etc.) may be substituted for this. That is, the case where the counting sound B is executed is read as the case where the counting sound of the first mode is output, and the case where the counting warning B is not executed is the case where the counting sound of the second mode is output. good. Since there are various types of sounds, for example, if the counting sound of the second mode is a type of sound that does not hinder the production of an advantageous state, the counting process is executed without reducing the interest in the game. It is possible to make the player grasp that the game is in progress.

Furthermore, for example, when the counting sound of the first mode is output, the counting effect of the first mode is executed, and when the counting sound of the second mode is output, the counting effect of the second mode is executed. , and may be replaced with each other. Since there are various types of effects other than voice, for example, if the second aspect of the counting effect is a type of effect that does not hinder the effect of an advantageous state, the interest in the game is not diminished. The player can be made aware that the counting process is being executed.

[Example of notification of counting process]
A specific example of the configuration of the count notification (count notification A, count notification B) described above will be described below with reference to FIGS. 324 to 326. FIG. FIG. 324 is a diagram showing an example of operation in the case of setting an output permission period for the sound when outputting the counting sound for the counting process. FIG. 325 is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of FIG. 324(a), and FIG. 326 is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of FIG. 324(b).

Both FIGS. 324(a) and 324(b) show a configuration in which the output of the counting sound is permitted when a predetermined time has passed since the third stop operation in the AT state, and the counting sound stops when the betting operation is performed. It is an example of operation. FIGS. 324(a) and 324(b) show the period during which this counting sound is permitted and the period during which the counting sound is output in response to the operation of the counting button 171 within this period. In the AT state, the AT effect sound corresponding to the AT state is continuously output except when the counting sound is output.

The example of FIG. 324(a) shows the timing (a1) when the AT state starts, and FIG. 325(a1) shows the situation at this time. In this AT state, operation navigation may be executed during a game. As an example of this case, FIG. 325(a2) shows an example in which the operation navigation is displayed at the timing (a2) after the start operation. Also, as shown in FIGS. 325(a2) to (a7), in this example, the current number of game medals is displayed in the upper left frame as the value of "possessed", and in the upper right frame is obtained in the AT state. The total number of game medals played shall be displayed.

Subsequently, it is assumed that the count button 171 is long-pressed after the third stop operation and before the bet button is operated for the next game. FIG. 324(a) shows the operating period of the counting button 171. FIG. Timings (a3) to (a7) shown in FIG. 324(a) will be described in order below.

First, the timing (a3) is the timing after the third stop operation and before the counting button 171 is operated. FIG. 325(a3) shows how, at this timing (a3), an effect for winning a role (here, 8 game medals are won) is being executed.

The subsequent timing (a4) is the timing when the count button 171 is operated after the third stop operation. At this timing (a4), the counting sound is not permitted, and the display of FIG. 325(a3) continues as shown in FIG. 325(a4), and the AT effect sound continues as it is. there is When the counting button 171 is operated, the characters "counting" are displayed in the upper left frame of the screen to indicate that the counting process is being executed. It is shown that the values of the numbers are starting to decrease.

The subsequent timing (a5) is the timing at which the counting sound is permitted while the counting button 171 is kept pressed for a long time. At this timing (a5), the display of FIG. 325(a3) continues as shown in FIG. 325(a5), but the AT effect sound is not output, and the counting sound is output. . Then, by operating the count button 171, the characters "counting" are continuously displayed in the upper left frame of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The subsequent timing (a6) is the timing when the counting button 171 is released. At this timing (a6), the display of FIG. 325(a3) continues as shown in FIG. 325(a6). Further, since the counting button 171 is not operated, the counting sound is not output, and the output of the AT effect sound is resumed. Note that the characters "counting" in the frame on the upper left of the screen have been erased.

The subsequent timing (a7) is the timing when the bet button 132 is operated. At this timing (a7), the background display of FIG. 325(a3) continues as shown in FIG. 325(a7). Also, the AT effect sound is output.

In the above example, the operation at timing (a5) corresponds to an example of count notification A. This operation shows the configuration of the counting notification A that the AT effect sound is not output during the counting process. Also, the operations at the timings (a4) and (a5) correspond to an example of the count notification B. FIG. In this operation, the configuration of the counting notification B is shown in which the AT effect sound is maintained during the counting process and the counting sound is output in some cases.

Next, the example of FIG. 324(b) shows the timing (b1) when the AT state starts, and FIG. 326(b1) shows the situation at this time. In this AT state, operation navigation may be executed during a game. As an example of this situation, FIG. 326(b2) shows an example in which operation navigation is displayed at the timing (b2) after the first stop operation. Also, as shown in FIGS. 326(b2) to (b8), in this example, the current number of game medals is displayed in the upper left frame as the value of "possessed", and in the upper right frame is obtained in the AT state. The total number of game medals played shall be displayed.

Subsequently, it is assumed that the counting button 171 is long-pressed after the first stop operation is performed and immediately after the start operation of the next game. FIG. 324(b) shows the operating period of the count button 171. FIG. Timings (b3) to (b8) shown in FIG. 324(b) will be described in order below.

First, the timing (b3) is the timing when the count button 171 is operated after the first stop operation. At this timing (b3), the counting sound is not permitted, and the effect (including the AT effect sound) of FIG. 326(b2) continues as shown in FIG. 326(b3). When the counting button 171 is operated, the characters "counting" are displayed in the upper left frame of the screen to indicate that the counting process is being executed. It is shown that the values of the numbers are starting to decrease.

The subsequent timing (b4) is the timing after the third stop operation and when the long press of the counting button 171 continues. FIG. 326(b4) shows how, at this timing (b4), an effect for winning a role (here, 8 game medals are won) is being executed. Note that the counting sound is not permitted at this timing (b4), and the AT effect sound is output. Then, by operating the count button 171, the characters "counting" are continuously displayed in the upper left frame of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The subsequent timing (b5) is the timing at which the counting sound is permitted while the counting button 171 is kept pressed for a long time. At this timing (b5), the display of FIG. 326(b4) continues as shown in FIG. 326(b5), but the AT effect sound is not output, and the counting sound is output. . By operating the count button 171, the characters "counting" are displayed in the upper left frame of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The next timing (b6) is the timing when the bet button 132 is operated while the counting button 171 is kept pressed for a long time. At this timing (b6), the display of FIG. 326(b4) continues as shown in FIG. 326(b6). Further, when the bet button 132 is operated, the counting sound permission period ends, and the output of the AT effect sound is resumed. By operating the counting button 171, the characters "counting" are displayed in the upper left frame of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The subsequent timing (b7) is the timing after the start lever 135 is operated. At this timing (b7), the operation navigation is displayed as shown in FIG. 326(b7), and the AT production sound is output. By operating the counting button 171, the characters "counting" are displayed in the upper left frame of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The subsequent timing (b8) is the timing when the counting button 171 is released. At this timing (b8), the display of FIG. 326(b7) continues as shown in FIG. 326(b8). Also, since the counting button 171 is not operated, the counting sound is not output, and the AT production sound is being output. Note that the characters "counting" in the upper left frame of the screen have been erased.

In the above example, the operation at timing (b5) corresponds to an example of count notification A. This operation shows the configuration of the counting notification A that the AT effect sound is not output during the counting process. Also, the operation at the timings (b3) to (b5) corresponds to an example of the count notification B. FIG. In this operation, the configuration of the counting notification B is shown in which the AT effect sound is maintained during the counting process and the counting sound is output in some cases.

[About the display and effects based on the information from the medal number control section]
In this embodiment, the game medals are displayed in the game control unit 302 by the medal number control state command (see FIGS. 233 and 237) periodically transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 (every 5.9 to 8 ms in FIG. 233). Information such as numbers can be grasped (Fig. 251). Some of these pieces of information are sent to the first sub-controller 400 by a security command (FIG. 233) sent from the game controller 302 periodically (every 100 ms in FIG. 233). The first sub-control unit 400 can perform various displays and effects control based on these pieces of information. Also, the player can grasp these information through these displays and effects.

Here, in the above configuration, the time to establish communication between the medal count control unit 350 and the game control unit 302 when the power is turned on is the time required for communication between the game control unit 302 and the first sub-control unit 400 when the power is turned on. If it is later than the establishment time, the security command is sent from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 even though the medal number control state command from the medal number control unit 350 has not yet arrived at the game control unit 302. will be sent. Since the security command sent at this time does not reflect the information of the medal count control section 350, if various displays and effects are controlled based on the information included in this security command, the actual state will differ. Information will be given to the player.

In order to prevent such a situation from occurring, the security command may be transmitted from the game control section 302 to the first sub-control section 400 after the communication between the game control section 302 and the medal number control section 350 is established. For example, the game control unit 302 may transmit the security command for the first time after the power is turned on after receiving the medal count control state command. Also, the security command may be transmitted after providing a sufficient waiting time.

In addition, until the communication between the game control unit 302 and the medal number control unit 350 is established, even if the first sub-control unit 400 receives the security command, it may not execute processing based on the security command. For example, even if the first sub-controller 400 ignores security commands received several times after the power is turned on, or ignores security commands received until a certain standby time elapses, good.

Information indicating the communication state between the game control unit 302 and the medal number control unit 350 is included in the security command, and the game control unit 302 receives the medal number control state command (the medal number control unit 350 and the game control unit 302 When communication is established), information indicating normal communication is included in the security command and transmitted, and the first sub-control unit 400 executes various displays and effect control on the condition that this information is included. It may be made possible. With this configuration, it is possible not to give the player information different from the actual state.

Here, a supplementary description of the operation from the transmission of the security command to the transmission of the next security command will be provided. For example, if information such as the number of game medals changes between security commands, and this information is not updated until the next security command is received, the latest information will not be reflected in various displays and effect control. put away. In the game control unit 302, various processing commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 along with the control related to the game (Fig. 233). By performing various displays and effects control, the latest information can be reflected.

<others>
In the present embodiment, the slot machine 100 using medals (coins) as game media is shown as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and game balls (for example, pachinko balls) are used as games. It can be applied to slot machines, pachinko machines, arrange ball game machines, rock ball game machines, smart balls, etc., which are used as media.

In addition, the slot machine is a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals, such as running on mobile terminals (smartphones, game machines) and personal computers by a program that simulates the operation based on the above configuration. In this case, the game medium contains digitized data corresponding to medals, and the game medium is inserted by inputting the digitized data from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device). Payout of game media includes outputting digitized data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Although the present embodiment has been described above, it is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiment of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. , those involving such modifications and changes are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the invention. are not limited to those listed.

<<Correspondence between the configuration of the invention and the embodiment>>
Configurations of the invention described in the above description will now be described with reference to corresponding configurations.

In the above description,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 243). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 271),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 271),
The game control means, when the operation to the input operation means is performed during the period from when the input operation information is transmitted to the game value number control means to when the response information is received, (For example, step S1112 in FIG. 243 waits until a response command is received, [operation of the game control unit 302 by the insertion operation (insertion command transmission, etc.)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The input operation means includes a first input operation means (eg, 1 bet button 130) and a second input operation means (eg, MAX bet button 132) different from the first input operation means,
The game control means is
Based on the fact that the first insertion operation means has been operated, the gaming value number control means outputs the first insertion operation information (for example, an insertion command with a requested insertion number of one sheet) as the insertion operation information. send to
Second input operation information different from the first input operation information (for example, when the requested number of input sheets is 3 input command) to the game value number control means,
The game value number control means is
Based on the reception of the first input operation information, a first game value update process (for example, subtraction of the number of game medals from the number of requested insertions of one) is performed as the game value update process,
Based on the reception of the second input operation information, the game value update process is a second game value update process different from the first game value update process (e.g. subtraction),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value control means may not subtract the game value stored in the game value storage means based on the reception of the input operation information (for example, when the current bet number reaches the maximum bet number). If it is, if the number of game medals is 0),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means for updating the communication number with the game value number control means based on the reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 245).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Effect control means (e.g., first sub-control unit 400) for controlling effects performed by effect means (e.g., effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
The game control means is
Based on the reception of the response information within a predetermined period of time after transmitting the input operation information, predetermined game information is output to the effect control means (for example, step S1114 in FIG. 243 ),
Means for outputting the predetermined game information to the effect control means even when the response information is not received within the predetermined period from the transmission of the input operation information (for example, 243, if the response command is not received, the response command is determined to be abnormal, and step S1114 is executed),
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information ([operation of the game control unit 302 by the input operation (transmitting the input command, etc.)] description reference),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 243). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 271),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 271),
The game control means, when the operation to the input operation means is performed during the period from when the input operation information is transmitted to the game value number control means to when the response information is received, (For example, step S1112 in FIG. 243 waits until a response command is received, [operation of the game control unit 302 by the insertion operation (insertion command transmission, etc.)]),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 243). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 271),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 271),
The game control means, when the operation to the input operation means is performed during the period from when the input operation information is transmitted to the game value number control means to when the response information is received, (For example, step S1112 in FIG. 243 waits until a response command is received, [operation of the game control unit 302 by the insertion operation (insertion command transmission, etc.)]),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 243). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 271),
The game value number control means includes counting processing (for example, , steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260),
The game value number control means is
Based on the fact that the counting process is not performed when the input operation information is received, the first response information (for example, other than the re-request) is transmitted to the game control means,
A means for transmitting second response information (for example, re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is performed when the input operation information is received ([When receiving the input command operation]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is means having a transmission buffer for temporarily storing the game value number in order to transmit the game value number to the external processing device,
The game value number control means is
In the counting process, the number of game values to be transmitted to the external processing device is stored in the transmission buffer and the game value update process is performed (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260),
When the input operation information is received while the game value number is stored in the transmission buffer in the counting process and the game value update process is performed, the second response information is sent to the game control means. is a means of transmitting
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value control means stores part of the game value stored in the game value storage means in the transmission buffer in one counting process, and It is a means for subtracting the part of the game value number (for example, since the maximum value of the number of counted at one time is 50 (step S4209 in FIG. 266), it may be part of the number of game medals) ,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the game value number control means receives the input operation information from the end of one counting process to the start of the next counting process, the first response information to the game control means (for example, since the input prohibition flag is turned off, the response command is other than re-request),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means capable of retransmitting the input operation information transmitted immediately before to the game value number control means when receiving the second response information (for example, No judgment in step S1310 of FIG. 245),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means does not perform the retransmission after the number of retransmissions reaches the upper limit number (for example, determination of No in step S1306 in FIG. 245), and the operation to the input operation means is performed (For example, step S1113 in FIG. 243 is not executed because the response result is abnormal),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value control means may not subtract the game value stored in the game value storage means based on the reception of the input operation information (for example, when the current bet number reaches the maximum bet number). If it is, if the number of game medals is 0),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means for updating the communication number with the game value number control means based on the reception of the first response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 245),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 243). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 271),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260) including a process of transmitting the game value number to the game medium management device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. ) is a viable means of
The game value number control means is
Based on the fact that the counting process is not performed when the input operation information is received, the first response information (for example, other than the re-request) is transmitted to the game control means,
A means for transmitting second response information (for example, re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is performed when the input operation information is received ([When receiving the input command operation]),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 243). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 271),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260), including the process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means of
The game value number control means is
Based on the fact that the counting process is not performed when the input operation information is received, the first response information (for example, other than the re-request) is transmitted to the game control means,
A means for transmitting second response information (for example, re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is performed when the input operation information is received ([When receiving the input command operation]),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 243). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 271),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 271),
The game value number control means is
When the requested input number derived based on the received input operation information is equal to or less than the game value stored in the game value storage means, it is stored in the game value storage means. While executing the game value update process for subtracting the requested number of insertions from the number of game values, the response information including information indicating that the number of requested insertions has been subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, FIG. 281 to FIG. 283, the determination of Yes in step S4604 in FIG. 283, the same value as the requested number of inserted medals is subtracted from the number of game medals, and this subtraction is returned by the response command),
When the requested input number derived based on the received input operation information is greater than the game value number stored in the game value storage means, it is stored in the game value storage means. Along with maintaining the number of game values, it is a means that may transmit the response information including information indicating that the number of game values is maintained to the game control means (for example, modifications of FIGS. 281 to 283 , Steps S4604 and S4621 in FIG. 283 are both determined as No, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as a subtraction amount by a response command),
The game control means is
When the response information including the information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is received, an input process of inputting the game value of the number of input requests is performed (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 281),
This is means for not performing the insertion process when the response information including the information indicating that the game value number is maintained is received (for example, since 0 is added in step S1123 in FIG. 281, the insertion request number is not entered),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
As the input operation means, there is a maximum number input operation means (for example, MAX bet button 132),
The game control means, based on the fact that the maximum number insertion operation means is operated, the maximum number insertion operation information (for example, an insertion command to set the maximum number of bets as the requested number), which is the insertion operation information. means capable of transmitting to the game value number control means,
The game value number control means is a means for deriving the maximum number of game values that can be used in one game as the number of input requests based on the reception of the maximum number input operation information ([deformation for input operation Example] See),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The input operation information may include predetermined information (for example, information on input limit flag ON),
The requested input number derived based on the input operation information received is greater than the game value number stored in the game value storage means, and the predetermined information is included in the input operation information. In this case, the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is maintained, and the response information including information indicating that the game value number is maintained is transmitted to the game control means (for example, 281 to 283, the determination of No in both steps S4604 and S4621 in FIG. 283, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as a subtraction amount by a response command),
The requested number of inputs derived based on the received input operation information is greater than the game value number stored in the game value storage means, and the predetermined information is not included in the input operation information. In this case, the game value updating process is executed to set the game value number stored in the game value number storage means to 0, and the response information including information indicating the game value number before becoming 0 is executed. to the game control means (for example, the modification of FIGS. 281 to 283, the determination of No in step S4604 in FIG. 283, the determination of Yes in S4621, the number of game medals is all subtracted (becomes 0), the number of game medals before subtraction is returned as a subtraction by a response command),
The game control means is
When the response information including the information indicating the game value number before reaching 0 is received, it is a means for performing an input process of inputting the game value of the game value number (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 281). ,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
As the input operation means, there is a minimum number input operation means (for example, 1 bet button 130),
The game control means, based on the fact that the minimum number insertion operation means is operated, sets the minimum number insertion operation information (for example, an insertion command with a required number of 1) as the insertion operation information to the game value means capable of transmitting to the number control means,
The game value number control means is means for deriving the minimum game value number that can be used in one game as the requested number of insertions, based on the reception of the minimum number insertion operation information,
The minimum number input operation information does not include the predetermined information (for example, step S1122 in FIG. 281),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means for updating the communication number with the game value number control means based on the reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 245),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 243). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 271),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 271),
The game value number control means is
When the requested input number derived based on the received input operation information is equal to or less than the game value stored in the game value storage means, it is stored in the game value storage means. While executing the game value update process for subtracting the requested number of insertions from the number of game values, the response information including information indicating that the number of requested insertions has been subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, FIG. 281 to FIG. 283, the determination of Yes in step S4604 in FIG. 283, the same value as the requested number of inserted medals is subtracted from the number of game medals, and this subtraction is returned by the response command),
When the requested input number derived based on the received input operation information is greater than the game value number stored in the game value storage means, it is stored in the game value storage means. Along with maintaining the number of game values, it is a means that may transmit the response information including information indicating that the number of game values is maintained to the game control means (for example, modifications of FIGS. 281 to 283 , Steps S4604 and S4621 in FIG. 283 are both determined as No, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as a subtraction amount by a response command),
The game control means is
When the response information including the information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is received, an input process of inputting the game value of the number of input requests is performed (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 281),
This is means for not performing the insertion process when the response information including the information indicating that the game value number is maintained is received (for example, since 0 is added in step S1123 in FIG. 281, the insertion request number is not entered),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting input operation information (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 243). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 271),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 271),
The game value number control means is
When the requested input number derived based on the received input operation information is equal to or less than the game value stored in the game value storage means, it is stored in the game value storage means. While executing the game value update process for subtracting the requested number of insertions from the number of game values, the response information including information indicating that the number of requested insertions has been subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, FIG. 281 to FIG. 283, the determination of Yes in step S4604 in FIG. 283, the same value as the requested number of inserted medals is subtracted from the number of game medals, and this subtraction is returned by the response command),
When the requested input number derived based on the received input operation information is greater than the game value number stored in the game value storage means, it is stored in the game value storage means. Along with maintaining the number of game values, it is a means that may transmit the response information including information indicating that the number of game values is maintained to the game control means (for example, modifications of FIGS. 281 to 283 , Steps S4604 and S4621 in FIG. 283 are both determined as No, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as a subtraction amount by a response command),
The game control means is
When the response information including the information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is received, an input process of inputting the game value of the number of input requests is performed (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 281),
This is means for not performing the insertion process when the response information including the information indicating that the game value number is maintained is received (for example, since 0 is added in step S1123 in FIG. 281, the insertion request number is not entered),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting settlement operation information (for example, settlement command) to the game value amount control means based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 244 step S1204, step S1205),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the game value settlement number based on the reception of the settlement operation information and performing the game value update processing based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 272),
The game value number control means includes counting processing (for example, , steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260),
The counting process may be executed in accordance with the communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the external processing device,
After the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed, the game value number control means, when the second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the communication cycle after the next time, Means for, when the settlement operation information is received during execution of one counting process, subjecting the settlement number derived based on the reception of the settlement operation information to the second counting process. (For example, the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 258), and the number of game medals added by the settlement command during the counting process will be counted after the next time. Become),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first counting process and the second counting process are continuously executed according to the communication cycle,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means, when receiving the settlement operation information during execution of the first counting process, stores the settlement number derived based on the reception of the settlement operation information and the game value number storage. Means for summing the number of game values stored in the means and subjecting it to the second counting process,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means may not add the game value number stored in the game value number storage means based on the reception of the settlement operation information (for example, when the current bet number is 0). ,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4705 in FIG. 272),
The game control means is means for updating the communication number with the game value number control means based on the reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 245).
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting settlement operation information (for example, settlement command) to the game value amount control means based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 244 step S1204, step S1205),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the settlement number of the game value based on the reception of the settlement operation information and performing the game value update process based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 272),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260) including a process of transmitting the game value number to the game medium management device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. ) is a viable means of
The counting process may be executed in accordance with the communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the game medium management device,
After the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed, the game value number control means, when the second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the communication cycle after the next time, means for, when receiving the settlement operation information during execution of one counting process, subjecting the settlement number derived based on the reception of the settlement operation information to the second counting process. (For example, the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 258), and the number of game medals added by the settlement command during the counting process will be counted after the next time. Become),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting settlement operation information (for example, settlement command) to the game value amount control means based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 244 step S1204, step S1205),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the game value settlement number based on the reception of the settlement operation information and performing the game value update processing based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 272),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260), including the process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means of
The counting process may be executed in accordance with the communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the external processing device,
After the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed, the game value number control means, when the second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the communication cycle after the next time, Means for, when the settlement operation information is received during execution of one counting process, subjecting the settlement number derived based on the reception of the settlement operation information to the second counting process. (For example, the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 258), and the number of game medals added by the settlement command during the counting process will be counted after the next time. Become),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 248). ,
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 275, step S4B04 in FIG. 276),
The game value number control means includes counting processing (for example, , steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260),
The counting process may be executed in accordance with a communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the external processing device,
After the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed, the game value number control means, when the second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the communication cycle after the next time, When the payout information is received during the execution of one counting process, the payout number derived based on the receipt of the payout information may be subject to the second counting process (for example , the number of game medals to be counted is determined before counting (step S3304 in FIG. 258), and the number of game medals added by the payout command during counting is to be counted from the next time onwards). ,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first counting process and the second counting process are continuously executed according to the communication cycle,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the payout information is received during execution of the first counting process, the game value number control means stores the payout number derived based on the reception of the payout information and the game value number storage means. A means for summing up the game value numbers stored and subjecting them to the second counting process,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Effect control means (e.g., first sub-control unit 400) for controlling effects performed by effect means (e.g., effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4B05 in FIG. 276),
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the effect control means based on the reception of the response information indicating that the game value update process based on the receipt of the payout information has been completed normally ( For example, step S1607 in FIG. 248),
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (see [operation of game control unit 302 due to payout (transmission of payout command, etc.)]),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 248). ,
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 275, step S4B04 in FIG. 276),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260) including a process of transmitting the game value number to the game medium management device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. ) is a viable means of
The counting process may be executed in accordance with the communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the game medium management device,
After the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed, the game value number control means, when the second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the communication cycle after the next time, When the payout information is received during the execution of one counting process, the payout number derived based on the receipt of the payout information may be subject to the second counting process (for example , the number of game medals to be counted is determined before counting (step S3304 in FIG. 258), and the number of game medals added by the payout command during counting is to be counted from the next time onwards). ,
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 248). ,
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 275, step S4B04 in FIG. 276),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260), including the process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means of
The counting process may be executed in accordance with the communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the external processing device,
After the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed, the game value number control means, when the second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the communication cycle after the next time, When the payout information is received during the execution of one counting process, the payout number derived based on the receipt of the payout information may be subject to the second counting process (for example , the number of game medals to be counted is determined before counting (step S3304 in FIG. 258), and the number of game medals added by the payout command during counting is to be counted from the next time onwards). ,
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means derives the number of loans of the game value based on the reception of lending information from an external processing device (for example, the lending machine 700, the host server), and updates the game value based on the number of loans. means capable of processing (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 264, step S3714 in FIG. 262),
When the game value stored in the game value storage means does not exceed a first value, the game value control means controls the game value stored in the game value storage means. (for example, determination of Yes in step S4107 in FIG. 265),
When the game value stored in the game value storage means exceeds the first value, the game value control means controls the game value stored in the game value storage means. Means to maintain the number (for example, judgment of No in step S4107 in FIG. 265, see [Lending notification (periodic transmission from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 248). ,
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 275, step S4B04 in FIG. 276),
If the game value number stored in the game value number storage means does not exceed a second value, the game value number control means controls the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means. (for example, determination of Yes in step S4B03 in FIG. 276),
When the game value stored in the game value storage means exceeds the second value, the game value control means controls the game value stored in the game value storage means. means to maintain the number (for example, determination of No in step S4B03 in FIG. 276),
The second value is a value greater than the first value (for example, step S4B03 in FIG. 276, step S4107 in FIG. 265),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the game value update process based on the reception of the lending information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 261).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The gaming value control means is means having a transmission buffer for temporarily storing the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device,
The game value control means stores the response information in the transmission buffer when the game value stored in the game value storage means does not exceed the first value, and stores the response information in the transmission buffer. to the external processing device, the game value update process for adding the loan amount to the game value stored in the game value storage means can be executed after the transmission buffer is cleared. means (for example, determination of Yes in step S3712 in FIG. 262),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the game value number stored in the game value storage means does not exceed the first value, the game value number control means updates the communication number with the external processing device (for example, , determination of Yes in step S3703 in FIG. 262, step S3706), sending the response information including the first information (for example, the rental serial number received this time) to the external processing device,
When the game value number stored in the game value storage means exceeds the first value, the game value control means does not update the communication number with the external processing device ( For example, it is means for transmitting the response information including the second information (for example, the lending serial number received last time) to the external processing device ([ Refer to lending receipt result response (regular transmission from medal number control unit 350 to lending machine 700)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
the first information is the latest communication number received from the external processing device;
The second information is the communication number received from the external processing device one before the latest communication number,
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of loaned game values based on the reception of the loan information from the game medium management device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 264, step S3714 in FIG. 262),
When the game value stored in the game value storage means does not exceed a first value, the game value control means controls the game value stored in the game value storage means. (for example, determination of Yes in step S4107 in FIG. 265),
When the game value stored in the game value storage means exceeds the first value, the game value control means controls the game value stored in the game value storage means. Means to maintain the number (for example, judgment of No in step S4107 in FIG. 265, see [Lending notification (periodic transmission from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of loans of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the external processing device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 264, step S3714 in FIG. 262),
When the game value stored in the game value storage means does not exceed a first value, the game value control means controls the game value stored in the game value storage means. (for example, determination of Yes in step S4107 in FIG. 265),
When the game value stored in the game value storage means exceeds the first value, the game value control means controls the game value stored in the game value storage means. Means to maintain the number (for example, judgment of No in step S4107 in FIG. 265, see [Lending notification (periodic transmission from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value number control means derives the number of loans of the game value based on the reception of lending information from an external processing device (for example, the lending machine 700, the host server), and updates the game value based on the number of loans. means capable of processing (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 264, step S3714 in FIG. 262),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the game value update process based on the reception of the lending information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 261),
The gaming value number control means is means having a first transmission buffer for temporarily storing the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device,
The game value number control means stores the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared as the response information is transmitted to the external processing device, the game means for executing the game value update process of adding the number of loans to the number of game values stored in the value number storage means (for example, determination of Yes in step S3712 in FIG. 262);
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means counts (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260) including the game value update process of subtracting the game value number and the game value update process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device. is a viable means of
The game value number control means is means having a second transmission buffer for temporarily storing the game value number in order to transmit the game value number to the external processing device,
The game value number control means is means for storing the game value number to be transmitted to the external processing device in the counting process in the second transmission buffer and performing the game value update process (for example, in FIG. 260). Steps S3513, S3514),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the game value number stored in the game value storage means does not exceed a predetermined value (for example, determination of Yes in step S4107 in FIG. 265), the game value control means controls the external process. While updating the communication number with the device (for example, determination of Yes in step S3703 in FIG. 262, step S3706), the response information including the first information (for example, the rental serial number received this time) is sent to the external processing device means capable of executing the game value update process of adding the number of loans to the number of game values stored in the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means (for example, step S3714 in FIG. 262);
When the game value number stored in the game value storage means exceeds the predetermined value (for example, determination of No in step S4107 in FIG. 265), the game value control means controls the external Without updating the communication number with the processing device (for example, determination of No in step S3703 in FIG. 262, step S3706 is not executed), the response information including the second information (for example, the lending serial number received last time) A means for transmitting to the external processing device and maintaining the game value number stored in the game value number storage means (for example, determination of No in step S3712 in FIG. 262, S3714 is not executed),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
the first information is the latest communication number received from the external processing device;
The second information is the communication number received from the external processing device immediately before the latest communication number,
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of loaned game values based on the reception of the loan information from the game medium management device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 264, step S3714 in FIG. 262),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game medium management device when performing the game value update process based on the reception of the lending information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 261),
The game value control means is means having a first transmission buffer for temporarily storing the response information in order to transmit the response information to the game medium management device,
The game value number control means stores the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared as the response information is transmitted to the game medium management device, the means for executing the game value update process of adding the number of loans to the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means (for example, determination of Yes in step S3712 in FIG. 262);
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a gaming table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of loans of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the external processing device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 264, step S3714 in FIG. 262),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the game value update process based on the reception of the lending information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 261),
The gaming value number control means is means having a first transmission buffer for temporarily storing the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device,
The game value number control means stores the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared as the response information is transmitted to the external processing device, the game means for executing the game value update process of adding the number of loans to the number of game values stored in the value number storage means (for example, determination of Yes in step S3712 in FIG. 262);
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value control means transmits the game value to an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, the host server) and the game value, based on the operation of the operation means. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260),
The game value number control means is
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 266). ) to the external processing device,
If the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, the means can set the counting promotion state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 266),
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 266) is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms) as the number of game values. sent,
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the first value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values, a predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values, the Equipped with production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for performing a predetermined production (for example, FIG. 289),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means, when power failure occurs while the counting promotion state is set, and when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state after the power is restored after that, the counting is performed. It is a means that can set the promotion state (for example, FIG. 294 (b)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is means for not transmitting the game value number to the external processing device when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled after setting the counting promotion state (for example, Determination of No in step S4211 in FIG.
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value control means performs the process of transmitting the game value to the game medium management device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value based on the fact that the operation means is operated. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260),
The game value number control means is
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 266). ) can be sent to the game media management device,
If the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, the means can set the counting promotion state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 266),
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (eg, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 266) is sent to the game media management device at a predetermined cycle (eg, 300 ms) as the game value number. sent repeatedly,
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means performs the game value update process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and subtracting the game value number based on the operation of the operation means. It is an executable means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260),
The game value number control means is
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 266). ) to the external processing device,
If the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, the means can set the counting promotion state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 266),
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 266) is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms) as the number of game values. sent,
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value control means transmits the game value to an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, the host server) and the game value, based on the operation of the operation means. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260),
The game value number control means is
If the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 284). ) to the external processing device,
means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 284);
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value (for example, 10, step S4222 in FIG. 284) larger than the first value as the game value number is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms). sent,
The second value may increase according to the duration of the predetermined operational state (Fig. 293);
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The second value may increase in degree according to the duration of the predetermined operation state (Fig. 293).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means, when power failure occurs while the counting promotion state is set, and when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state after the power is restored after that, the counting is performed. Means that can set the promotion state and maximize the degree of increase (Fig. 294 (b)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the first value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values, a predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values, the Equipped with production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for performing a predetermined production (for example, FIG. 289),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the game value stored by the game value storage means does not exceed a predetermined value, the game value control means controls the game value stored by the game value storage means. is a means for reducing the degree of increase of the second value compared to the case where exceeds the predetermined value (Fig. 294 (a)),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value control means performs the process of transmitting the game value to the game medium management device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value based on the fact that the operation means is operated. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260),
The game value number control means is
If the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 284). ) can be sent to the game media management device,
means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 284);
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (eg, 10, step S4222 in FIG. 284) is sent to the game media management device at a predetermined cycle (eg, 300 ms) as the game value number. sent repeatedly,
The second value may increase according to the duration of the predetermined operational state (Fig. 293);
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value number control means performs the game value update process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and subtracting the game value number based on the operation of the operation means. It is an executable means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260),
The game value number control means is
If the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 284). ) to the external processing device,
means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 284);
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (eg, 10, step S4222 in FIG. 284) is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (eg, 300 ms) as the gaming value number. sent and
The second value may increase according to the duration of the predetermined operational state (Fig. 293);
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value control means transmits the game value to an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, the host server) and the game value, based on the operation of the operation means. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260),
The game value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is canceled before the first time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the game value number is set to the first value ( For example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 285) can be sent to the external processing device,
When the first time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step of FIG. 285). S4209) can be sent to the external processing device,
Means capable of setting an automatic counting state when a second time (e.g., two seconds) longer than the first time elapses while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (e.g., Step S4234 in FIG. 285),
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled, the second value as the game value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms). (For example, determination of Yes in step S4235 in FIG. 285, step S4209 is repeated, FIG. 295),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the automatic counting state is set, a notification means (for example, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for performing predetermined notification (Fig. 297, Fig. 298)
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the first value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values, a predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values, the Provided with production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for performing a predetermined production (for example, FIG. 289),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means, when power failure occurs while the automatic counting state is set, and when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state when the power is restored after that, the automatic counting state is set. Means that can set the counting state (for example, FIG. 296 (b)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is means for not setting the automatic counting state when the game value number stored by the game value number storage means is smaller than a predetermined value (Fig. 296(a)). ,
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value control means performs the process of transmitting the game value to the game medium management device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value based on the fact that the operation means is operated. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260),
The game value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is canceled before the first time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the game value number is set to the first value ( For example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 285) can be sent to the game media management device,
When the first time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step of FIG. 285). S4209) can be sent to the game media management device,
Means capable of setting an automatic counting state when a second time (e.g., two seconds) longer than the first time elapses while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (e.g., Step S4234 in FIG. 285),
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled, the second value as the game value number is repeatedly transmitted to the game medium management device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms). (for example, determination of Yes in step S4235 in FIG. 285, step S4209 is repeated, FIG. 295),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means performs the game value update process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and subtracting the game value number based on the operation of the operation means. It is an executable means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260),
The game value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is canceled before the first time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the game value number is set to the first value ( For example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 285) can be sent to the external processing device,
When the first time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step in FIG. 285). S4209) can be sent to the external processing device,
Means capable of setting an automatic counting state when a second time (for example, 2 seconds) longer than the first time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, Step S4234 in FIG. 285),
In the automatic counting state, the second value as the game value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms) even if the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled. (For example, determination of Yes in step S4235 in FIG. 285, step S4209 is repeated, FIG. 295),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value control means transmits the game value to an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, the host server) and the game value, based on the operation of the operation means. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260),
If the operating means is in a predetermined operation state when power is restored after power failure occurs, the game value control means sets the predetermined operation state as an effective operation state to the game value. A means capable of executing update processing (for example, FIG. 299(a)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is
If the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step of FIG. 266). S4212) can be sent to the external processing device,
If the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, the means can set the counting promotion state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 266),
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 266) is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms) as the number of game values. sent,
The game value number control means is in the predetermined operation state before the power failure when the operation means has been in the predetermined operation state since the power failure occurred and the power is restored thereafter. means for determining the game value number to be transmitted to the external processing device based on the time during which the predetermined operation state has been maintained after the power is restored regardless of the time (Fig. 299(a));
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is
If the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step of FIG. 266). S4212) can be sent to the external processing device,
If the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, the means can set the counting promotion state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 266),
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 266) is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms) as the number of game values. sent,
The gaming value number control means is means capable of setting the counting acceleration state when the operation means has been in the predetermined operation state since power failure occurred and the power was restored thereafter (Fig. 299(a)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the first value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values, a predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values, the Provided with production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for performing a predetermined production (for example, FIG. 289),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value control means performs the process of transmitting the game value to the game medium management device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value based on the fact that the operation means is operated. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260),
If the operating means is in a predetermined operation state when power is restored after power failure occurs, the game value control means sets the predetermined operation state as an effective operation state to the game value. A means capable of executing update processing (for example, FIG. 299(a)),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
operating means (eg, count button 171);
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The game value number control means performs the game value update process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and subtracting the game value number based on the operation of the operation means. It is an executable means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260),
If the operating means is in a predetermined operation state when power is restored after power failure occurs, the game value control means sets the predetermined operation state as an effective operation state to the game value. A means capable of executing update processing (for example, FIG. 299(a)),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
display means (for example, game medal number display device 170, effect image display device 157) capable of displaying the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The display means, when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is updated, displays a change in which the display value is changed stepwise from the value before update to the value after update. Means that can be done (e.g., FIGS. 302-306),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
The counting process is a process executed according to a predetermined period (eg, 300 ms),
The display means is means for performing the change display in a time period shorter than the predetermined period (Figs. 302 and 303),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Equipped with operating means (eg, counting button 171),
The game value number control means is means capable of executing the counting process based on the fact that the operation means is operated,
The game value number control means is
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means enters the predetermined operation state, the game value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 266). ) to the external processing device,
If the predetermined time has passed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, the means can set the counting promotion state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 266),
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is cancelled,
In the counting promotion state, a second value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 266) larger than the first value as the gaming value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at the predetermined cycle,
The game value number control means is means for not transmitting the game value number to the external processing device when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled after setting the counting promotion state (for example, Determination of No in step S4211 in FIG.
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
display means (for example, game medal number display device 170, effect image display device 157) capable of displaying the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The display means, when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is updated, displays a change in which the display value is changed stepwise from the value before update to the value after update. Means that can be done (e.g., FIGS. 302-306),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
display means (for example, game medal number display device 170, effect image display device 157) capable of displaying the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means;
A game table comprising
The display means, when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is updated, displays a change in which the display value is changed stepwise from the value before update to the value after update. Means that can be done (e.g., FIGS. 302-306),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, a RAM 308) that stores game information related to a game state and controls the progress of the game;
Game value information having game value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing game value information relating to game values used in a game, and updating the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Control means (for example, medal count control section 350);
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, FIG. 241 step S101),
The game value information control means is means for clearing at least a part of the game value information storage means when it is determined that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal. (for example, step S3005 in FIG. 254),
The game control means does not clear the game information storage means when the game value information control means determines that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal. Yes (for example, the game control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even if it receives an error from the medal number control unit 350),
The game value information control means clears at least a part of the game value information storage means when the game control means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is abnormal. (for example, determination of Yes in step S3016 in FIG. 254),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Abnormalities in the game control means are reported with priority over abnormalities in the game value information control means (see [Operation for error (game control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value information control means is a means for transmitting information to the game control means at a predetermined cycle (for example, one command is transmitted at eight interrupts (0.745 ms×8)),
The game control means is means for judging abnormal communication with the game value information control means based on the transmission status of information from the game value information control means (for example, FIG. Section 302)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Abnormality of the game control means is notified with priority over the communication abnormality (see [operation against error (game control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
If the game value information control means determines that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal, the game value information control means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is abnormal. Corresponding processing may be executed (for example, determination of No in step S3007 in FIG. 254 and step S4407 in FIG. 268, initialization of chip information),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, a RAM 308) that stores game information related to a game state and controls the progress of the game;
Game value information having game value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing game value information relating to game values used in a game, and updating the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Control means (for example, medal count control section 350);
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, FIG. 241 step S101),
The game value information control means is means for clearing at least a part of the game value information storage means when it is determined that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal. (for example, step S3005 in FIG. 254),
The game control means does not clear the game information storage means when the game value information control means determines that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal. Yes (for example, the game control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even if it receives an error from the medal number control unit 350),
The game value information control means clears at least a part of the game value information storage means when the game control means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is abnormal. (for example, determination of Yes in step S3016 in FIG. 254),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, a RAM 308) that stores game information related to a game state and controls the progress of the game;
Game value information having game value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing game value information relating to game values used in a game, and updating the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Control means (for example, medal count control section 350);
A game table comprising
The game control means is means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, FIG. 241 step S101),
The game value information control means is means for clearing at least a part of the game value information storage means when it is determined that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal. (for example, step S3005 in FIG. 254),
The game control means does not clear the game information storage means when the game value information control means determines that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal. Yes (for example, the game control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even if it receives an error from the medal number control unit 350),
The game value information control means clears at least a part of the game value information storage means when the game control means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is abnormal. (for example, determination of Yes in step S3016 in FIG. 254),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, a RAM 308) that stores game information related to a game state and controls the progress of the game;
Game value information having game value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing game value information relating to game values used in a game, and updating the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Control means (for example, medal count control section 350);
A game machine comprising
When the game value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the game value information stored in the game value information storage means, the game control means may execute processing for the abnormality. means (see [operation for error (game control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Abnormalities in the game control means are reported with priority over abnormalities in the game value information control means (see [Operation for error (game control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means for determining abnormal communication with the game value information control means based on the transmission status of information from the game value information control means (for example, FIG. 250),
Abnormality of the game control means is notified with priority over the communication abnormality (see [operation against error (game control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
If the game value information control means determines that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal, the game value information control means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is abnormal. Corresponding processing may be executed (for example, determination of No in step S3007 in FIG. 254 and step S4407 in FIG. 268, initialization of chip information),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, a RAM 308) that stores game information related to a game state and controls the progress of the game;
Game value information having game value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing game value information relating to game values used in a game, and updating the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Control means (for example, medal count control section 350);
A game machine comprising
When the game value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the game value information stored in the game value information storage means, the game control means may execute processing for the abnormality. means (see [operation for error (game control unit 302)]),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, a RAM 308) that stores game information related to a game state and controls the progress of the game;
Game value information having game value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing game value information relating to game values used in a game, and updating the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Control means (for example, medal count control section 350);
A game machine comprising
When the game value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the game value information stored in the game value information storage means, the game control means may execute processing for the abnormality. means (see [operation for error (game control unit 302)]),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
game value number control means (for example, medal number control section 350) that performs two-way communication with the game control means and performs game value update processing for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
One-way communication with the game control means, effect control means (e.g., first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the effect performed by effect means (e.g., effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) )and,
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 248). ,
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 275, step S4B04 in FIG. 276),
If the game value number stored in the game value storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the payout information, the game value control means sends predetermined information to the game control means. (for example, determination of No in step S4B03 in FIG. 276, response command is set to "abnormal"),
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the effect control means based on the reception of the predetermined information (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 248),
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, FIG. )〕reference),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is a means capable of disabling the progress of the game when the predetermined information is received (for example, the determination in step S1606 in FIG. 248 is No, and the process is repeated. Operation of unit 302 (transmission of payout command, etc.)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Equipped with counting operation means (eg, counting button 171),
The game value number control means transmits the game value number to an external processing device (for example, the lending machine 700, the host server) and processes the game value number based on the fact that the counting operation means is operated. means capable of executing the game value update process for subtracting the number (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260),
The production control means is means for causing the production means to perform background display,
The predetermined effect is a effect of blinking a display prompting the operation of the counting operation means,
The display prompting the operation of the counting operation means is a display displayed in front of the background display (for example, FIG. 307(b)),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
game value number control means (for example, medal number control section 350) that performs two-way communication with the game control means and performs game value update processing for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
One-way communication with the game control means, effect control means (e.g., first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the effect performed by effect means (e.g., effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) )and,
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 248). ,
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 275, step S4B04 in FIG. 276),
If the game value number stored in the game value storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the payout information, the game value control means sends predetermined information to the game control means. (for example, determination of No in step S4B03 in FIG. 276, response command is set to "abnormal"),
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the effect control means based on the reception of the predetermined information (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 248),
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, FIG. )〕reference),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
game value number control means (for example, medal number control section 350) that performs two-way communication with the game control means and performs game value update processing for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
One-way communication with the game control means, effect control means (e.g., first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the effect performed by effect means (e.g., effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) )and,
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 248). ,
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 275, step S4B04 in FIG. 276),
If the game value number stored in the game value storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the payout information, the game value control means sends predetermined information to the game control means. (for example, determination of No in step S4B03 in FIG. 276, response command is set to "abnormal"),
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the effect control means based on the reception of the predetermined information (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 248),
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, FIG. )〕reference),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
Game value number control means (for example, , medal number control unit 350),
One-way communication with the game control means, effect control means (e.g., first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the effect performed by effect means (e.g., effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) )and,
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of loans of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the external processing device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 264, step S3714 in FIG. 262),
If the game value number stored in the game value storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the lending information, the game value control means sends predetermined information to the game control means. is a means of sending a
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the effect control means based on the reception of the predetermined information,
The effect control means is means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in the modification of FIG. If it exceeds the upper limit, an error will occur for borrowing exceeding the upper limit),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is a means capable of causing the effect means to perform a demonstration effect when the game is not being executed,
The predetermined effect is a effect that is performed even when the demonstration effect is being performed (for example, FIG. 310 (a)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Equipped with counting operation means (eg, counting button 171),
The game value control means transmits the game value to the external processing device and the game value update process subtracts the game value based on the fact that the counting operation means is operated. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260),
The production control means is means for causing the production means to perform background display,
The predetermined effect is a effect of blinking a display prompting the operation of the counting operation means,
The display prompting the operation of the counting operation means is a display displayed in front of the background display (for example, FIG. 307(b)),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that bi-directionally communicates with the game medium management device and performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means; ,
One-way communication with the game control means, effect control means (e.g., first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the effect performed by effect means (e.g., effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) )and,
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of loaned game values based on the reception of the loan information from the game medium management device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 264, step S3714 in FIG. 262),
If the game value number stored in the game value storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the lending information, the game value control means sends predetermined information to the game control means. is a means of sending a
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the effect control means based on the reception of the predetermined information,
The effect control means is means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in the modification of FIG. If it exceeds the upper limit, an error will occur for borrowing exceeding the upper limit),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
game value number control means (for example, a medal number control section 350) that performs two-way communication with the external processing device and performs game value update processing for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
One-way communication with the game control means, effect control means (e.g., first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the effect performed by effect means (e.g., effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) )and,
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of loans of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the external processing device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 264, step S3714 in FIG. 262),
If the game value number stored in the game value storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the lending information, the game value control means sends predetermined information to the game control means. is a means of sending a
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the effect control means based on the reception of the predetermined information,
The effect control means is means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in the modification of FIG. If it exceeds the upper limit, an error will occur for borrowing exceeding the upper limit),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
An amusement machine equipped with main control means (e.g., main control unit 300) that performs two-way communication with an external processing device (e.g., lending machine 700, host server) to progress a game,
The main control means is means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to the game value used in the game (for example, updating the number of game medals),
The main control means is means capable of deriving the number of loans of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the external processing device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 264, step S3714 in FIG. 262),
The main control means is means for determining abnormality in communication with the external processing device from the state of a predetermined signal (for example, VL signal) transmitted from the external processing device,
The main control means is a means capable of disabling the game if the communication abnormality is determined (for example, determination of No in step S1007 in FIG. 242),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
One-way communication with the main control means, effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the effect performed by the effect means (for example, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) ),
The effect control means is a means that does not notify the communication abnormality in the effect means when the communication abnormality is determined (for example, does not execute error notification for the VL signal abnormality).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
One-way communication with the main control means, effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the effect performed by the effect means (for example, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) ),
Equipped with counting operation means (eg, counting button 171),
The main control means executes the processing for transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and the game value update process for subtracting the game value number based on the fact that the counting operation means is operated. possible means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260),
The production control means is means for causing the production means to perform background display,
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform a effect of blinking a display prompting the operation of the counting operation means,
The display prompting the operation of the counting operation means is a display displayed in front of the background display (for example, FIG. 307(b)),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game media management device (e.g., lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (e.g., slot machine 100),
The game table is
A game machine comprising a main control means (for example, a main control unit 300) that performs two-way communication with the game medium management device and progresses a game,
The main control means is means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to the game value used in the game (for example, updating the number of game medals),
The main control means is means capable of deriving the number of loans of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the game medium management device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 264, step S3714 in FIG. 262),
The main control means is means for determining abnormality in communication with the game medium management device from the state of a predetermined signal (for example, VL signal) transmitted from the game medium management device,
The main control means is a means capable of disabling the game if the communication abnormality is determined (for example, determination of No in step S1007 in FIG. 242),
A game media management device characterized by:

again,
a game table (for example, slot machine 100);
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) comprising at least
The game table is
A gaming machine comprising main control means (e.g., main control unit 300) that performs two-way communication with the external processing device and progresses the game,
The main control means is means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to the game value used in the game (for example, updating the number of game medals),
The main control means is means capable of deriving the number of loans of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the external processing device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 264, step S3714 in FIG. 262),
The main control means is means for determining abnormality in communication with the external processing device from the state of a predetermined signal (for example, VL signal) transmitted from the external processing device,
The main control means is a means capable of disabling the game if the communication abnormality is determined (for example, determination of No in step S1007 in FIG. 242),
A gaming system characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
counting operation means (eg, counting button 171);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
Production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, the speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420),
A game machine comprising
The game value control means performs counting processing (for example, , steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260),
The game control means is a means capable of setting a first game state (for example, AT state) in which an auxiliary function that is advantageous to the player can be operated,
The game value number control means is means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation of the counting operation means even in the first gaming state,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing a counting effect (for example, FIG. 289) accompanying the counting process,
The amount of increase in the game value number per unit game in the first game state when the game is advanced according to the activated auxiliary function is greater than the amount of decrease in the game value number per unit game by the counting process. Small (In the description of [Regarding the difference between payout and counting process], the amount of increase in the number of game medals per unit game in an advantageous game state is smaller than the amount of decrease in the number of game medals per unit game due to counting processing different configurations),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The counting effect is a effect provided with an end condition that is different from the end of the counting process. configuration that may terminate),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The production control means is a means capable of executing a specific production,
The production control means is means for not executing the specific production during execution of the counting production,
A game machine characterized by (see the configuration that does not execute an effect that requires some operation in the description of [Regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The specific effect is a effect that requires a player's operation,
A game machine characterized by (see the configuration that does not execute an effect that requires some operation in the description of [Regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The counting effect is a effect whose content changes according to the amount of subtraction of the game value number by the counting process.
(See the configuration in which the content of the counting effect changes according to the amount of game medals counted in the description of [Regarding the difference between payout and counting process]). there is

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is means for restarting the immediately preceding counting effect from the middle if the counting effect is terminated in the middle due to the end of the counting process and the new counting process is started within a predetermined time. is
During the description of [Regarding the difference between payout and counting process], even after the counting effect ends in the middle, the immediately preceding counting effect (counting effect that ended in the middle ) is resumed from the middle)).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means continues the counting effect within a predetermined time after the counting process ends, and when the counting process is newly started while the counting effect is continuing, the counting effect is executed. It is a means of continuous execution,
During the description of the game machine ([Regarding the difference between payout and counting process], the counting effect continues even after the counting process is completed, and when a new counting process is started, the counting effect being executed is maintained as it is), is described.

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
input operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132) used for setting the number of bets;
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game control means is means for transmitting first information (e.g., settlement command) regarding settlement to the game value number control means, based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated,
The game value number control means derives the settlement number of the game value based on the reception of the first information, performs the game value update process based on the settlement number, and then updates the game value with respect to the first information. A means for not transmitting response information to the game control means,
The game control means is means capable of setting the number of bets to 0 based on the fact that the adjustment operation means is operated.
A game machine characterized by this (see configuration that does not wait for a response command to a settlement command (response command not used)).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means for transmitting second information (for example, an input command) regarding the input to the game value number control means based on the fact that the input operation means is operated,
The game value number control means derives the number of game value input requests based on the reception of the second information, and performs the game value update process based on the input request number. A means capable of transmitting response information to the information to the game control means,
The game control means is means capable of setting the number of bets based on the reception of response information to the second information,
(For the input command, see the configuration using the response command).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
The game value control means, if there is an increase in the game value while the counting process is continued, controls the game value obtained by subtracting the increase in the game value from the external processing device. , the increased game value is transmitted to the external processing device ([Regarding the configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting processing]. See the configuration for the increase in the number of game medals in),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
The game value control means, if there is an increase in the game value while the counting process is continued, controls the game value obtained by subtracting the increase in the game value from the external processing device. , the increased game value is transmitted to the external processing device ([Regarding the configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting processing]. See the configuration for the increase in the number of game medals in),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value control means controls the increment of the game value while the counting process continues before the game value becomes 0 and after the counting process ends. (Refer to the operation when the count button 171 is released before the number of game medals reaches 0 in the description of [Regarding the payout and settlement operation during the counting process]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
with
The game control means is means for transmitting settlement operation information (for example, settlement command) to the game value amount control means based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 244 step S1204, step S1205),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the game value settlement number based on the reception of the settlement operation information and performing the game value update processing based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 272),
The above-mentioned increment is based on the above-mentioned settlement number (in the description of [Concerning the configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process], either payout or settlement operation is targeted as the increase in the number of game medals. configuration),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 248). ,
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 275, step S4B04 in FIG. 276),
The increment is based on the number of payouts. configuration),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
The game value control means, if there is an increase in the game value while the counting process is continued, controls the game value obtained by subtracting the increase in the game value from the external processing device. after transmitting the increased game value to the external processing device ([Regarding the configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting processing], the maximum See the configuration for the increase in the number of game medals in),
The game value number control means is a means capable of transmitting the game value number for each fixed number to the external processing device at a transmission timing that periodically visits (for example, transmission of the number of game medals by counting processing (count notification ) every 300 ms, FIG. 231),
When the game value number control means terminates the transmission of the game value number excluding the increased game value number at the current transmission timing out of the transmission timings, the game value control means It is means for transmitting the increased game value at the transmission timing (in FIGS. 317(c) and 317(e), after transmission of 120 game medals at the time of counting processing is completed first, the increased is sent.),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value control means controls the increment of the game value while the counting process continues before the game value becomes 0 and after the counting process ends. (Refer to the operation when the count button 171 is released before the number of game medals reaches 0 in the description of [Regarding the payout and settlement operation during the counting process]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
with
The game control means is means for transmitting settlement operation information (for example, settlement command) to the game value amount control means based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 244 step S1204, step S1205),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the game value settlement number based on the reception of the settlement operation information and performing the game value update processing based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 272),
The above-mentioned increment is based on the above-mentioned settlement number (in the description of [Concerning the configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process], either payout or settlement operation is targeted as the increase in the number of game medals. configuration),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 248). ,
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 275, step S4B04 in FIG. 276),
The increment is based on the number of payouts. configuration),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
display means (for example, effect image display device 157, game medal number display device 170) capable of displaying the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
The game value control means, if there is an increase in the game value while the counting process is continued, controls the game value obtained by subtracting the increase in the game value from the external processing device. after transmitting the increased game value to the external processing device ([Regarding the configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting processing], the maximum See the configuration for the increase in the number of game medals in),
The display means is means capable of performing subtraction display for subtracting the game value number in accordance with the game value number subtracted by the counting process,
The display means is a means capable of executing the subtraction display reflecting the increase when there is an increase in the game value while the counting process continues (Fig. 317(d) ( f)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value control means controls the increment of the game value while the counting process continues before the game value becomes 0 and after the counting process ends. (Refer to the operation when the count button 171 is released before the number of game medals reaches 0 in the description of [Regarding the payout and settlement operation during the counting process]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
with
The game control means is means for transmitting settlement operation information (for example, settlement command) to the game value amount control means based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated (for example, in FIG. 244 step S1204, step S1205),
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the game value settlement number based on the reception of the settlement operation information and performing the game value update processing based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 272),
The above-mentioned increment is based on the above-mentioned settlement number (in the description of [Concerning the configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process], either payout or settlement operation is targeted as the increase in the number of game medals. configuration),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 248). ,
The game value number control means is means capable of deriving the number of game values to be paid out based on the reception of the payout information, and performing the game value update process based on the number of payouts (for example, FIG. 275, step S4B04 in FIG. 276),
The increment is based on the number of payouts. configuration),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
input operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132) used for setting the number of bets;
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The input operation means includes predetermined input operation means (for example, bet button 130) capable of setting the minimum bet amount,
The game control means is means for transmitting settlement information (for example, settlement command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated,
The game control means sets the minimum value to the number of bets based on the fact that the predetermined input operation means is operated in a state in which the number of bets is set to a value different from the minimum value. means that can be set and can transmit information on the difference between the different value and the minimum value to the game value number control means as the settlement information;
The game value number control means is means capable of performing the game value update process based on the reception of the settlement information.
A game machine (see the description of [Regarding bet number reduction setting by bet button operation]) characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means determines a value obtained by subtracting the minimum value from the maximum value based on the fact that the predetermined insertion operation means is operated while the number of bets is set to the maximum value. means for transmitting the settlement information including the game value control means to the game value control means;
A game machine (see the description of [Regarding bet number reduction setting by bet button operation]) characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
including audio output means (e.g., speakers 272, 277),
The voice output means is means for outputting a settlement sound based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated,
The sound output means is means for outputting an input sound based on the fact that the input operation means is operated,
The sound output means is means for outputting the throwing sound based on the predetermined throwing operation means being operated in a state where the number of bets is set to the maximum value.
A gaming machine (see the description of [Regarding bet number reduction setting by bet button operation])) characterized by:

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
input operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132) used for setting the number of bets;
settlement operation means (for example, settlement button 134);
audio output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The input operation means includes predetermined input operation means (for example, bet button 130) capable of setting the minimum bet amount,
The game control means is means for transmitting settlement information to the game value number control means based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated,
The game control means sets the minimum value to the number of bets based on the fact that the predetermined input operation means is operated in a state in which the number of bets is set to a value different from the minimum value. means that can be set and can transmit information on the difference between the different value and the minimum value to the game value number control means as the settlement information;
The game value number control means is means capable of performing the game value update process based on the reception of the settlement information,
The voice output means is means for outputting a settlement sound based on the fact that the settlement operation means is operated,
The voice output means is means for not outputting the settlement sound when the predetermined input operation means is operated in a state in which the bet amount is set to a value different from the minimum value. ,
A game machine (see the description of [Regarding bet number reduction setting by bet button operation]) characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The sound output means is means for outputting an input sound based on the fact that the input operation means is operated,
The sound output means is means for outputting the throwing sound based on the predetermined throwing operation means being operated in a state where the number of bets is set to the maximum value.
A game machine (see the description of [Regarding bet number reduction setting by bet button operation]) characterized by:

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
Production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, the speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420),
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of performing the game value update process for updating the game value number based on the reception of information from an external processing device (for example, the lending machine 700, the host server). (For example, step S4003 in FIG. 264, step S3714 in FIG. 262),
The game value number control means is a means capable of transmitting the external information to the game control means when external information relating to the game value managed by the external processing device is received,
The game control means is a means capable of transmitting the external information to the effect control means,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing an effect corresponding to a determination target in a certain game state that is advantageous to the player,
The determination target is the sum of the number included in the external information and the number of game values,
(Refer to the configuration for determining the total value of the number of game medals and the number of possessed medals in the description of [Regarding the effect according to the number of game medals]).

again,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
Production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, the speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420),
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of performing the game value update process for updating the game value number based on the reception of information from an external processing device (for example, the lending machine 700, the host server). (For example, step S4003 in FIG. 264, step S3714 in FIG. 262),
The game value number control means is a means capable of transmitting the external information to the game control means when external information relating to the game value managed by the external processing device is received,
The game control means is a means capable of transmitting the external information to the effect control means,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing an effect corresponding to a determination target in a certain game state that is advantageous to the player,
The determination target is a number included in the external information,
(Refer to the configuration for determining the number of possessed medals in the description of [Regarding the effect according to the number of game medals]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The number included in the external information is the number of stored game values acquired in the game (for example, the number of owned medals is the stored game value acquired in the game),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means executes a first effect when the number of determination objects has not reached a predetermined number, and executes a second effect based on the fact that the number of determination objects has reached the predetermined number. (Refer to the configuration for executing different effects according to the number of game medals in the description of [Production according to the number of game medals]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is a means capable of displaying information regarding the determination target at least in the certain game state (in the description of [Regarding the effect according to the number of game medals], the value to be the determination target is displayed. configuration),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the number of game values acquired in the certain game state (in the description of [Production according to the number of game medals], (Refer to the configuration in which the production using the number of medals held and the production using the number of medals earned are executed in parallel),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
In the certain game state, the number of game values acquired in the certain game state may exceed the number contained in the external information ("Player If the counting process is not executed in a state that is advantageous to the player, the number of medals won may exceed the number of medals you have"),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect according to the determination target ([Regarding the effect according to the number of game medals] "When the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, the set value is changed. The suggested display may be executed”),
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
Production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, the speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420),
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means is means capable of performing the game value update process for updating the game value number based on the reception of information from an external processing device (for example, the lending machine 700, the host server). (For example, step S4003 in FIG. 264, step S3714 in FIG. 262),
The effect control means is a means capable of displaying the game value number in a certain game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the value of "possessed" in FIG. 319),
The effect control means is a means capable of executing an effect in accordance with the number of acquired game values in the certain game state,
(In the description of [Production according to the number of game medals], a configuration for determining the number of won medals in the AT state, see FIG. 319) is described.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is a means capable of displaying the number of acquired game values in the certain game state (for example, the value of "... GET" in FIG. 319),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is means for updating and displaying both the display of the obtained number and the display of the number of game values when game values are obtained in the certain game state (for example, FIG. 319 (d2) (d3)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is means capable of executing effects corresponding to the number of game values in the certain game state configuration),
A game machine characterized by:

A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
a first operating means (for example, a reset button R);
a second operating means (eg, count button 171);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The first operation means is an operation means capable of canceling a first error related to the game control means,
The second operation means is an operation means capable of canceling a second error related to the game value number control means,
when the first error occurs while the second error is occurring, the first error is resolvable and the second error is irresolvable;
A game machine (see the description of [About the operation at the time of error duplication], FIG. 322) characterized by the following is described.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first operating means is a reset button (see FIG. 321),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
The second error is an error that can be canceled by executing the counting process (see FIG. 320),
The game value number control means is means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation of the second operation means (see FIG. 320).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is
If the first error has not occurred, the game value update process is executed based on the operation of the second operation means (see FIG. 320),
means for not executing the game value update process based on the operation of the second operation means when the first error occurs (see FIG. 322);
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first operating means is the same operating means as the second operating means,
A game machine characterized by (see the configuration in which the error cancellation operation means for canceling the game control error and the medal number control error are the same in the description of [About the operation at the time of error duplication]) is described. there is

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
a first operating means (for example, a reset button R);
a second operating means (eg, count button 171);
Notification means (for example, effect image display device 157);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The first operation means is an operation means capable of canceling a first error related to the game control means,
The second operation means is an operation means capable of canceling a second error related to the game value number control means,
When the first error occurs while the second error is occurring, the first error is resolvable and the second error becomes the non-resolvable first state. ,
The notification means is means capable of executing a first error notification regarding the first error in the first state,
A game machine (see the description of [About the operation at the time of error duplication], FIG. 322) characterized by the following is described.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The notification means is means capable of executing notification prompting cancellation of the first error based on the operation of the second operation means in the first state (see FIG. 322 (d4). ),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The notification means is means capable of executing a second error notification (see FIG. 322 (d2)) regarding the second error.
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The notification means is means for interrupting the second error notification being executed when executing the first error notification in the first state (see FIGS. 322(d2) and (d3)),
The notification means is means for starting the second error notification when the first state ends due to cancellation of the first error (see FIGS. 322(d4) to (d6)),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The notification means is means for continuously executing the second error notification when executing the first error notification in the first state (in the description of [Regarding the operation at the time of error duplication], (see configuration to display messages about both errors),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
the second error is an error that can be canceled by executing the counting process;
The game value number control means is means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation of the second operation means.
A gaming machine (see FIGS. 320(b2) to (b4)) characterized by

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first operating means is a reset button (see FIG. 321),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game value number control means is
If the first error has not occurred, the game value update process is executed based on the operation of the second operation means (see FIG. 320),
means for not executing the game value update process based on the operation of the second operation means when the first error occurs (see FIG. 322);
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
audio output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
The game control means is a means capable of setting a first game state (for example, AT state) advantageous to the player,
The sound output means is a means capable of outputting a first effect sound (for example, an AT state effect sound) in the first game state,
The sound output means is means for reducing the volume of the first effect sound when the counting process is executed in the first game state.
A gaming machine (see [Regarding notification of counting process (1)]) is described.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are driven to rotate, stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation is performed based on the lottery result of the internal lottery )and,
with
The sound output means may decrease the volume of the first effect sound when the counting process is executed in the first gaming state in which all of the plurality of reels are stopped. is a means of
(See the configuration for executing count notification A while all reels are stopped in the description of [Regarding counting process notification (1)]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The voice output means, in the first gaming state, when the counting process is being executed after a predetermined time has passed since all of the spinning reels have been stopped. A means by which the volume of the first effect sound may be reduced,
During the description of the gaming machine ([Regarding counting process notification (1)], a predetermined period has passed since the last stop operation was performed on the reels, and all the reels have stopped rotating. (See configuration for executing count notification A on the condition of ), is described.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The sound output means is means capable of outputting a second effect sound (e.g., counting sound) when the counting process is being executed.
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Equipped with predetermined operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
The sound output means is a means for returning the volume of the first effect sound based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in a state where the volume of the first effect sound is reduced.
A game machine characterized by that (see the configuration that terminates the counting notification A being executed in response to an operation on some operating means in the description of [Regarding counting processing notification (1)]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are driven to rotate, stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation is performed based on the lottery result of the internal lottery )and,
production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420) including the audio output means;
with
The game control means is a means capable of setting a second game state (for example, normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state,
The production means is a means capable of executing a demonstration production,
The effect means is means for not executing a demonstration effect when all of the plurality of reels are stopped in the first gaming state,
The effect means is means capable of executing a demonstration effect when all of the plurality of reels are stopped in the second gaming state.
During the description of the amusement machine ([Regarding counting process notification (1)], a so-called demonstration effect is not executed in a state that is advantageous to the player, and a demo effect is executed in a state that is disadvantageous to the player. , see the description), is described.

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
audio output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 260) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the game value number. is a viable means,
The game control means is a means capable of setting a first game state (for example, AT state) advantageous to the player,
The sound output means is a means capable of outputting a first effect sound (for example, an AT state effect sound) in the first game state,
The sound output means is means capable of outputting a second effect sound (e.g., counting sound) when the counting process is being executed,
The sound output means is means for maintaining a state in which the first effect sound is being output when the counting process is being executed in the first game state.
A gaming machine (see [Regarding notification of counting process (2)]) is described.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are driven to rotate, stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation is performed based on the lottery result of the internal lottery )and,
with
The sound output means is means for outputting the second effect sound when the counting process is being executed while all of the plurality of reels in the first gaming state are stopped. be,
(See the configuration for executing count notification B in a state where all reels are stopped in the description of [Regarding counting process notification (2)]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are driven to rotate, stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation is performed based on the lottery result of the internal lottery )and,
with
The sound output means is means for not outputting the second effect sound while any one of the plurality of reels is rotating in the first gaming state.
(Refer to the configuration in which count notification B is not executed while any reel is rotating in the description of [Regarding counting process notification (2)]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
predetermined operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
with
The sound output means is means for not outputting the second effect sound during a period from when the predetermined operation means is operated in the first game state to when the plurality of reels start rotating.
A gaming machine characterized by this (see the configuration that does not execute count notification B after some operation means is performed in the description of [Regarding counting process notification (2)]).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are driven to rotate, stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation is performed based on the lottery result of the internal lottery )and,
with
The sound output means outputs the second effect sound in the first mode when the counting process is being executed while all of the plurality of reels in the first gaming state are stopped. is sometimes a means of
In the description of the game machine ([Regarding the counting process notification (2)], the case where the count notification B is executed is the case where the counting sound of the first mode is output, and the case where the counting notification B is not executed is When outputting the counting sound of the second aspect, refer to the configuration in which each is read).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are driven to rotate, stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation is performed based on the lottery result of the internal lottery )and,
with
The sound output means outputs the second effect sound in the second mode when the counting process is being executed while any one of the plurality of reels is rotating in the first gaming state. is a means of outputting
In the description of the game machine ([Regarding the counting process notification (2)], the case where the count notification B is executed is the case where the counting sound of the first mode is output, and the case where the counting notification B is not executed is When outputting the counting sound of the second aspect, refer to the configuration in which each is read).

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
predetermined operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
with
The voice output means outputs the second is a means for outputting the effect sound of in a second mode,
In the description of the game machine ([Regarding the counting process notification (2)], the case where the count notification B is executed is the case where the counting sound of the first mode is output, and the case where the counting notification B is not executed is When outputting the counting sound of the second aspect, refer to the configuration in which each is read).

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

Also, in the description above,
Throwing operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132);
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the input operation means is operated;
a game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing the number of game values related to the game values used in the game;
a game value control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means;
Production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, the speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420),
A game machine comprising
The game value number control means is means for transmitting information on the game value number to the game control means,
The game control means is means for transmitting a command (for example, a security command) including information on the game value number received from the game value number control means to the effect control means,
The effect control means is means for executing a first control related to the game value number based on the reception of the command.
(Refer to [Display and effect based on information of medal number control unit]) characterized by the above.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the power is turned on, communication between the game control means and the effect control means may be established before communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is established,
The effect control means is means for not executing the first control even if the command is received until communication is established between the game control means and the game value number control means.
(Refer to [Display and effect based on information of medal number control unit]) characterized by the above.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
When the power is turned on, communication between the game control means and the effect control means may be established before communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is established,
The command includes information indicating whether communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is normal,
The effect control means is means for not executing the first control even if the command is received until information indicating that the communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is normal is received. be,
(Refer to [Display and effect based on information of medal number control unit]) characterized by the above.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect control means is means for executing the first control based on normal communication between the game control means and the game value number control means.
(Refer to [Display and effect based on information of medal number control unit]) characterized by the above.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game control means is a means for transmitting the command to the effect control means at a predetermined period (for example, a security command is transmitted at a period of 100 ms),
The game control means transmits various processing commands (for example, various processing commands in FIG. 231) including the information on the game value number received from the game value number control means to the effect control means in accordance with the progress of the game. is a means to
The effect control means is a means for executing the first control based on the reception of the various processing commands,
A game machine characterized by:

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a lending machine 700) is described, which is connected to the game machine described above.

again,
a game machine as described above;
an external processing device (e.g., rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) is described.

100 slot machine 101 main body 102 front door 110 left reel 111 middle reel 112 right reel 700 reel unit 130-132 bet button 134 checkout button 135 start lever 137-139 stop button 144T top lamp 144L left side lamp 144R right side lamp 157 effect image Display device 160U Movable effect unit 164 Title panel lamp 165 First chance button 166 Second chance button 167 Left button 168 Right button 172 Medal blocker 180 Hopper unit 190 First selection switch 194 Second selection switch 244 Power switch 272 Upper speaker 277 Low-pitched speaker 281 Setting key switch 293 Setting value display 294 Opening sensor 740 Backlight module HD1 First operation prompting display HD2 Second operation prompting display 165D First button display 166D Second button displays LD1, LD2 Character displays RD10, RD20 Operation result Display RD11, RD21 Frame display RD12 Game number display RD22 Character display 300B Main control board 24ML Main control 24V monitor LED
5ML Main control 5V monitor LED
24MC Main control 24V capacitor 400B First sub-control board 24SL Sub-control 24V monitor LED
5SL Sub-control 5V monitor LED
24SC Sub-control 24V capacitor 252B Power control board 24PL Power control 24V monitor LED
5PL Power supply control 5V monitor LED
24PC power control 24V capacitor 5PC power control 5V capacitor

Claims (1)

light emitting means;
a movable body unit having a first movable body operable by being driven by a first motor;
a substrate case;
A game machine comprising
The movable body unit has a third movable body operable by being driven by a third motor,
The first motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a first harness,
The third motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a third harness,
The light emitting means may emit light when the first movable body is manually operated in a power-off state to drive the first motor, and a current flows in due to the back electromotive force generated by the first motor. is something,
When the light emitting means emits light when the third movable body is manually operated in the de-energized state to drive the third motor, and current due to counter electromotive force generated by the third motor flows in. and
The light emitting means does not move even when the first motor is driven, and does not move when the third motor is driven,
The certain substrate case is provided at a position where the light from the light emitting means reaches,
A playground characterized by:

Images